UC-NRLF 


11M    SMD 


1 


_ 


IM  MEMOMAM 
George   Davidson 


Professor  of  Geography 
University  of  California 


•   / 


ORDNANCE  INSTRUCTIONS 


FOB  THE 


UNITED   STATES   NAVY. 


1866. 


ORDNANCE   INSTRUCTIONS 


FOR   THE 


UNITED    STATES   NAVY. 


PART  I. 

EELATING    TO    THE 

PREPARATION  OF  VESSELS  OF  WAR  FOR  BATTLE, 

AND   TO    THE 

» 

DUTIES  OF  OFFICERS  AND  OTHERS  WHEN  AT  QUARTERS. 


PART  II. 

THE  EQUIPMENT  MD  MAMEUVRE  OF  BOATS 

AND 

EXEECISE  OF  BOAT  HOWITZERS. 


PART   III. 

OEDNANCE  AND  OKDNANCE  STOEES. 


FOURTH  EDITION-PUBLISHED  BY  ORDER  OF  THE  NAVY  DEPARTMENT. 


WASHINGTON: 

GOVERNMENT    FEINTING    OFFICE, 
1866. 


OFFICERS  are  requested  to  communicate  to  the  Bureau  of  Ordnance  any  suggestions 
relative  to  future  additions  or  corrections,  with  the  reasons  for  any  proposed  changes, 
quoting  part,  page,  and  paragraph  by  its  number. 


^ 


CONTENTS. 


[A  full  index  will  be  found  at  the  end  of  the  book.] 


Captain  

PART 

1 

PAUB 

3-6 

Executive  Officer  ....                              ... 

1 

6,  7 

Officers  in  charge  of  divisions  

1 

8,  9 

Master  

1 

9 

1 

9 

Gunner  

1 

9-12 

1 

12 

Yeoman  

1 

13 

General  distribution  of  officers  and  men  at  quarters 

1 

14-20 

Distribution  and  arms  of  men  at  the  guns  

1 

21-25 

Duties  at  quarters  in  battle  or  exercise 

1 

26-10 

Equipments  and  Implements  

1 

33-35 

Broadside  guns,  stations  and  gun-numbers 

1 

35 

Calls  for  assembling  at  quarters  

1 

3G,  37 

Preparations  for  exercise  at  general  quarters 

1 

38-40 

Arrangements  for  delivering  and  distributing  powder     

1 

41-45 

Naval  gun-carriages  

1 

45 

Exercise  of  broadside-guns  

1 

46-60 

Exercise  of  pivot-guns  

1 

61-73 

Notes  upon  the  manual  exercise 

74-88 

The  use  of  fuzes  

89-91 

Boarders  

92  93 

General  precautions  to  be  observed  in  time  of  war    .  .        .       .        ... 

94-96 

Directions  in  case  of  fire 

97-100 

Rifled  Cannon  

101-107 

Monitors  

1 

108-112 

Mortars  

1 

113-127 

Miscellaneous  Operations  

1 

128-131 

Equipment  of  boats  

9 

3-9 

Fixtures  in  boats  for  boat-guns  

9, 

6-9 

Exercise  and  Manoeuvre  for  boat-howitzers 

9 

10-18 

Exercise  with  howitzer  on  field-carriage    

9, 

19,  20* 

Remarks  on  the  use  of  Naval  Light  Artillery  

9, 

21,  22 

Notes  on  the  use  of  boat-howitzers  

9, 

22-24 

Manoeuvres  of  boats  armed  for  service  

24 

Landing  seamen,  marines,  and  howitzers                       .  .                     ... 

2 

25-27 

Ordnance  and  Ordnance  Stores  

3 

3-80 

Inspection  and  Proof  of  Naval  gun?           .  .                .        .                  ... 

8-17 

Use  of  the  Inspecting  Instruments  

3 

18-21 

Powder-Proof  ... 

22 

Water-Proof  

3 

23 

Marking  guns.  . 

3 

23 

Extreme  proof  of  trial  guns 

21-26 

Preparation  of  guns  for  service  ,  . 

3 

27-29 

M584143 


CONTENTS. 


PART  PAGE 

Preservation  of  guns 3  30-32 

Examination  of  guns 3  33-35 

Inspection  of  shot  and  shells 3  36-38 

Shot  and  shell  gauges 3  39,  40 

Piling  of  balls 3  41,  42 

Preservation  of  shot  and  empty  shells 3  43 

Preparation  of  shell  for  service 3  44-47 

Gunpowder 3  48-55 

Preservation  and  storage  of  powder 3  48-53 

Service-charges  for  naval  guns 3  53,  54 

Boxes  for  small-arm  ammunition 3  55,  56 

Cannon  and  Friction  primers 3  56,  57 

Cartridge-bags 3  57-59 

Magazines  and  shell  rooms 3  60-64 

Gun-carriages 3  65, 66 

Gun-gear 3  66, 67 

Griolet 3  68 

Directions  for  cleaning  arms 3  80-82 

Paints  and  Lacquers 3  83-89 

* 
APPENDIX. 

Directions  as  to  using  the  allowance  tables  of  crews A  iii-v 

Table  I.  Showing  the  number  of  hands  for  various  kinds  of  guns. "  vi 

Table  II.  Allowance  of  Petty  Officers,     "         "        "         "vessels "  vii,  viii 

Table  TIL  Allowance  of  Officers,  when "  ix 

Table  IV.  Allowance  of  Marines,  when "  x 

Graduation  of  sights  and  ranges,  of  32  pds. :  of  27  or  33  cwt. :  No.  1. .  B  xi 

"  '  "  "     "    :  of  42  or  57     "    :  No.  2..  "  xii 

"  8  in.    :  of  55  or  63     "    :  No.  3 .  .  "  xiii 

"  '  9  and  11  in.  shell  guns,  No.  4. .  "  xiv 

Approximate  ranges  of  Shell  guns No.  5 . .  "  xv 

"  '  Shot  guns  and  howitzers No.  6 . .  u  xvi 

"  '  Rifle  guns No.  7..  "  xvii 

Table  for  finding  the  distance  of  an  object  at  sea No.  8. .  "  xviii 

Form  of  Report  of  Target  Practice  with  great  guns No.  9 . .  "  xx,  xxi 

"  "  "  •          "  "      small  arms "    . .  "  xxii 

Directions  as  to  preparing  Reports  of  Target  Practice No.  10.  .  "  xxiii 

Form  of  Reports  of  Inspection No.  1 . .  C  xxiv-xxvi 

Questions  to  be  embraced  in  Reports  of  Target  Practice No.  2 . .  "  xxvii 

Tables  of  Allowances  of  Ordnance  Equipments  and  Stores D  xxviii-li 


PAET    I. 


RELATING  TO  THE 


PREPARATION  OF  VESSELS  OF  WAR  FOR  BATTLE, 


BUREAU  OP  ORDNANCE,  ) 

NAVY  DEPARTMENT,  January  1st,  1 866.  ( 
SIB:— 

The  Ordnance  Instructions  for  the  Navy  having  been  again  carefully  revised,  and 
such  additions  and  corrections  made  as  the  new  armaments  of  vessels  of  the  Navy 
rendered  necessary,  they  are  approved  by  the  Bureau,  and  I  have  the  honor  to  submit 
them  for  the  adoption  of  the  Navy  Department. 

I  am,  Sir,  with  high  respect, 

Your  obedient  servant, 

H.  A.  WISE,  U.  S.  N., 

Chief  of  Bureau. 


NAVY  DEPARTMENT, 
WASHINGTON,  January  1st,  18G6. 
SIR:— 

The  revised  Ordnance  Instructions  for  the  Navy, .submitted  with  your  letter  of  this 
date,  are  hereby  approved  and  adopted  by  the  Department,  and  aD  officers  of  the  Navy 
will  strictly  observe  and  enforce  them. 

Very  respectfully, 

GIDEON  WELLES, 

Secretary  of  the  Navy. 
Commander  H.  A.  WISE,  U.  S.  N., 

Chief  of  Bureau  of  Ordnance. 


CHAPTEE  I. 


GENERAL  DUTIES  OF  OFFICERS 

IN  RELATION  TO   ORDNANCE  AND   GUNNERY,   AND  TO  MILITARY 
EQUIPMENTS  AND  EXERCISES. 


CAPTAIN. 

1.  THE  CAPTAIN  OR  COMMANDING  OFFICER  will  be  careful  to  require  that 
all  the  Ordnance  Instructions  are  strictly  enforced  on  board  the  vessel  under 
his  command;    and  although  particular  duties  are  assigned,  and  various 
instructions  given  to  the  other  officers  of  the  vessel,  yet  he  is  to  see  that  the 
duties  are  performed,  and  the  instructions  obeyed,  by  the  'officers  to  whom 
they  are  respectively  addressed. 

2.  As  soon  as  the  crew  is  received  on  board  the  vessel,  he  shall  cause  a 
fire-bill  to  be  prepared,  the  crew  shown  their  stations,  and  see  that  they  are 
duly  stationed  at  quarters  for  battle  (See  Articles  78  to  103),  and  exercised 
at  general  quarters,  and  by  divisions,  particularly  the  powder  division  (See 
Articles  180  to  201),  until  each  officer  and  man  is  thoroughly  instructed  in 
his  duties ;  after  which  the  exercises  are  to  be  frequent  during  the  cruise. 
Exercises  which  are  short  and  spirited  are  preferable  to  those  which  are  long 
and  fatiguing.     Distinctions  and  indulgences  to  those  who  excel  are  recom 
mended. 

When  the  men  have  become  well  acquainted  with  their  duties  at  the  guns, 
and  in  passing  powder,  or  when  the  general  duties  of  the  ship  are  unusually 
fatiguing,  the  divisional  exercises  may  be  confined  to  those  belonging  to  one 
watch.  It  is  directed  that,  unless  bad  weather  prevent,  Monday  of  each 
week  be  set  apart  for  general  quarters. 

3*  He  will,  at  least  once  in  two  months  for  the  first  year  of  the  cruise,  and 
once  in  three  months  for  the  remainder  thereof,  assemble  the  crew  at  quar 
ters  in  the  night,  without  any  previous  intimation  of  his  intention  to  do  so, 
and  have  a  general  exercise.  He  will  inspect  the  ship  throughout,  and  cause 
an  entry  to  be  made  in  the  log-book  of  the  length  of  time  required  between 


GENERAL  DUTIES  KELATING  TO 


the  beginning  of  the  call  to  quarters  and  the  complete  preparation  for  com 
mencing  action ;  also,  when  every  gun  is  ready  for  a  second  fire. 

4.  In  order  to  ascertain  whether  the  equipments  are  complete  and  their 
uses  understood,  as  soon  after  the  ship  has  been  commissioned  as  circum 
stances  will  permit,  he  will  cause  at  least  one  round  to  be  fired,  with  shot  or 
shell,  according  to  the  nature  of  the  gun ;  and^when  practicable,  at  targets 
at  known  distances  and  with  the  appropriate  service  charges.     (See  TABLES 
OF  RANGES,  Appendix.) 

5.  lie  will  immediately  endeavor  to  discover  whether  defects  or  deficien 
cies  in  the  armament  or  equipment  exist,  and,  if  any  be  found,  will  remedy 
them  as  far  as  in  his  power  consistently  with  instructions,  representing  them 
to  the  Commandant  of  the  yard  of  outfit,  if  near  it ;  and,  if  important,  to  the 
Chief  of  the  Bureau  of  Ordnance. 

6.  On  the  representation  of  the  Gunner  that  the  Ordnance  Stores  are 
injured  or  liable  to  injury,  he  will  order  the  survey  called  for  by  Article  49. 

7.  He  will,  in  each  quarter  of  the  first  year  of  the  cruise,  expend  in 
target-practice  six  rounds,  and  in  each  succeeding  quarter-year  six  broad 
sides,  making  the  report  required  by  Art.  14. 

He  will  not,  however,  either  for  this  purpose  or  for  saluting,  reduce  his 
supply  of  ammunition  below  100  broadsides. 

8.  In  order  to  accustom  the  men  to  the  use  of  loaded  shells,  they  are  fre- 
quently  to  be  used  in  preference  to  shot.     For  this  purpose,  however,  empty 
shells,  or  those  that  are  "  bouched"  only,  will  be  carefully  fitted,  filled,  and 
fused  on  board,  in  season,  according  to  the  directions  (Chap.  I.  Part  III.), 
and  first  expended. 

They  should  be  fitted  only  as  required  to  replace  those  expended;  a  prin 
cipal  object  in  supplying  a  certain  number  of  shells  to  be  fitted  on  board 
ships,  is  to  disseminate  information  on  this  subject. 

9.  The  relative  proportions  of  "  distant,"   "  ordinary,"  and  "  near-firing" 
charges  are  to  be  preserved  (See  TABLE   OF  CHARGES,  Part  III.)  as  nearly 
as  practicable,  and  after  action  or  exercise,  deficiencies  caused  by  the  expen 
diture  of  any  particular  kind  of  charge  will  be  made  up,  without  unnecessary 
delay,  from  the  others  on  hand. 

10.  The  allowances  for  target-practice  are  not  to  be  expended  in  one  or 
two  exercises,  but  are  to  be  divided  in  such  proportions  as  to  allow  target- 
practice  once  a  fortnight,  or  at  least  once  a  month,  when  practicable  ;  and 
at  least  three-fourths  of  the  charges  allowed  shall  be  expended  in  practice  at 
sea,  when  it  can  be  conveniently  done,  opportunities  being  chosen  for  that 
purpose  under  all  the  circumstances  of  wind  and  weather  in  which  vessels  of 
war  are  liable  to  engage  in  battle. 


ORDNANCE   AND   GUNNERY — EQUIPMENTS  AND   EXERCISES.        5 

11,  When  in  port,  and  circumstances  will  admit,  such  places  are  to  be 
selected  for  practice  as  are  favorable  for  the  recovery  of  the  projectiles ; 
when  the  effect  of  the  bursting  charge  is  not  important,  a  blowing  charge 
may  be  used  in  shells,  to  test  the  efficiency  of  the  fuze  without  destroying 
the  shell. 

In  practice  the  service  charges  for  which  the  sights  are  marked  are  alone 
to  be  employed. 

Distances  within  Tialf  a  mile  are  preferable  for  solid  shot,  as  best  showing 
the  result.  Targets  of  ten  feet  high  by  twenty  long  will  afford  the  means 
of  general  comparison,  especially  with  the  practice  at  the  experimental 
battery  at  Washington.  For  shells,  the  distances  should  suit  the  ranges 
of  their  fuzes,  or  time  of  burning,  that  the  degree  of  certainty  of  explosion 
in  direct  or  ricochet  fire  may  be  seen  and  noted. 

12,  The  whole  crew  is  to  be  exercised  in  the  use  of  the  musket,  car 
bine,  pistol,  and  sword,  and  in  firing  at  a  target  with  small  arms,  by  suita 
ble  persons,  each  division  under  the  superintendence  of  its  respective  com 
manding  officer.     The  company  and  the  battalion  drill  is  recommended  as 
often  as  convenient  opportunities  of  exercise  present  themselves. 

13t  He  will  cause  the  boats'  crews  to  be  exercised  in  all  the  preparations 
for  attacking  an  enemy,  either  by  land  or  water,  and  in  the  use  of  "  boat 
and  field  howitzers,"  arid  small  arms,  under  all  the  various  circumstances 
likely  to  arise  in  such  service,*  and  particularly  in  embarking  and  disem 
barking  the  "  boat  and  field"  guns  and  ammunition.  (Sec  Part  II.) 

14.  At  the  expiration  of  each  quarter  he  will  cause  to  be  prepared,  and 
forward,  by  the  earliest  favorable  opportunity,  to  the  Bureau  of  Ordnance, 
a  report  of  all  firing,  with  or  without  projectiles,  according  to  the  detail 
given  in  form  C.    Appendix ;    also  the   Quarterly  return  of  receipts  and 
expenditures  in  the  Ordnance  Department. 

15.  He  will,  once  in  every  quarter,  cause  a  thorough  examination  to  be 
made  into  the  condition  of  the  armament,  shot  and  shells  ;  and  will  see  that 
care  is  taken  to  keep  the  shot  and  shell  lockers  dry ;  that  the  shot  and 
shells  stowed  therein  are  clean  and  free  from  rust,  and,  also,  that  the  diame 
ter  of  shot  kept  on  deck  is  not  increased  above  the  high  gauge  by  injudi 
cious  lacquering  or  painting,  and  report  to  the  Bureau  of  Ordnance  that 
this  has  been  done. 

16.  He  is  to  take  care  that  especial  attention  is  paid  to  the  fuzes,  whether 
spare  oiyn  the  shells ;  and  if  there  be  reason  to  suspect  injury  from  damp 
ness  or  any  other  cause,  he  will  have  one  or  more  fuzes  burned  for  trial. 

4 

17.  He  will  not  permit  shells  to  be  filled,  or  their  fuzes  to  be  shifted  or 
shortened,  without  his  order ;  and  whenever  these  operations  are  to  be  per- 


GENERAL   DUTIES   EELATING  TO 


formed,  he  will  see  that  a  suitable  and  properly  secured  place,  not  in  the 
shell-room,  and  as  far  from  the  magazine  as  convenient,  is  selected  for  the  pur 
pose.  On  such  occasions  the  fires  and  lights  are  to  be  extinguished,  and 
also  the  further  precautions  are  to  be  observed,  as  to  the  manner  of  per 
forming  the  work,  contained  in  the  directions  for  filling  and  emptying  shells. 
(See  Chap.  I.,  Part  III.) 

18.  He  is  not  to  dismount,  strike  below,  or  otherwise  render  unfit  for 
immediate  use,  any  of  the  guns  on  board  the  ship  he  commands,  except 
imperative  necessity  should  require  it  for  the  safety  of  the  vessel.     The 
particular  circumstances  of  such  necessity  are  to  be  immediately  entered  at 
large  in  the  log,  and  information  is  to  be  given  to  the  Commander  of  the 
squadron,  and  to  the  Secretary  of  the  Navy. 

When  guns  are  to  be  struck  below,  or  when  shipped  for  transportation, 
he  shall  cause  all  the  precautions  to  be  taken  to  guard  them  from  injury, 
prescribed  in  Article  46  of  these  instructions,  and  such  others  as  circum 
stances  require. 

19.  He  is  prohibited  from   giving   away   the  arms  of  any  description 
belonging  to  the  vessel  under  his  command. 

20.  He  will  keep  the  keys  of  the  magazines  and  shell-rooms,  and  of  the 
receptacles  for  percussion  caps  and  primers,  and  of  the  cocks  for  flooding 
magazines  and  shell-rooms,  in  the  cabin,  where  they  may  be  pbtained  by 
the  Executive  Officer  in  case  they  should  b*b  wanted  when  the  Captain  is 
absent  from  the  vessel ;  and  they  are  only  to  be  delivered  to  the  Executive 
Officer,  or  the  Officer  of  the  Powder  Division. 

21  •  Before  entering  any  friendly  port,  he  will  cause  every  gun  to  be 
drawn  and  reloaded  with  cartridge,  if  necessary  to  salute. 

22.  He  will  not  permit  friction-matches  to  be  on  board  under  any  cir 
cumstances,  and  before  sailing  will  notify  all  persons  of  this  regulation,  and 
institute  a  search  to  see  that  it  has  been  complied  with. 


EXECUTIVE  OFFICER. 

23.  The  Executive  Officer  will,  under  the  orders  and  direction  of  the 
Captain,  ascertain  that  all  the  ordnance  stores  and  equipments  ordered  or 
allowed  for  the  vessel  are  received  on  board  in  good  order ;  that  they  are 
properly  distributed  and  stowed;  that  they  are  only  used  or  expended 
according  to  directions  from  proper  authority,  and  that  they  are  duly 
accounted  for,  according  to  the  directions  and  forms  which  are  or%nay  be 
prescribed  by  the  Bureau  of  Ordnance.  In  small  vessels  which  have  no 
Gunner,  he  shall  receipt  for  and  be  accountable  for  all  ordnance  stores, 
making  all  the  returns  which  the  Gunner  is  herein  directed  to  prepare. 


ORDNANCE   AND   GUNNERY — EQUIPMENTS  AND  EXERCISES.        7 

24,  He  will  be  particularly  attentive  to  the  state  of  the  batteries,  small 
arms,  magazines,  shell-rooms,  and  shot-lockers ;  to  the  passages  leading  to 
and  scuttles  connected  with  them ;  and  take  care  that  they  are  kept  clear 
and  ready  for  action. 

25,  He  will  cause  convenient  places  to  be  assigned  for  the  stowage  of 
spare  articles  which  may  be  required  in  action,  and  see  that  shot  for  at  least 
twenty  broadsides  for  shot-guns,  and  one  shell  for  each  shell-gun,  are  always 
in  readiness  upon  the  respective  decks. 

26,  When  salutes  are  to  be  fired  he  is  personally  to  examine,  or  to  direct 
one  of  the  Officers  Commanding  a  Division  to   examine,  ascertain  and  re 
port  that  the  necessary  preparations  are  made  and  precautions  taken  to  avoid 
accidents.     The  guns,  if  loaded,  are  to  be   drawn,  wormed,  sponged  and 
reloaded.     They  are,  nevertheless,  to  be  so  laid  as  to  prevent  the  possibility 
of  mischief,  even  in  the  contingency   of  a  shot  or  wad  being  left  in  any 
of  them.     Hard  wads  are  not  to  be  used  in  firing  salutes,  nor  are  port-fires. 
The  guns  are  to  be  fired  either  with  percussion  or  friction  primers,  as  the 
Captain  may  prefer.     These,  when  in  good  order,  are  not  apt  to  fail  if  the 
lock-string  be  properly  pulled ;  as,  however,  a  slight  deterioration  may  inter 
fere  with  the  regularity  of  salutes,  the  precaution  of  dropping  a  few  grains 
of  gunpowder  into  the  vent  will  be  found  effectual. 

Guns  of  the  lowest  calibre  and  class,  when  sufficient  in  number,  are  to  be 
used  for  saluting ;  and  no  heavier  than  their  "  near-firing"  charge  is  to  be  used. 
(See  TABLE  OF  CPIARGES,  Part  III.)  Two  boats'  howitzers  will  be  found  suf 
ficient  for  saluting.  "  Saluting  powder"  to  be  used  in  all  guns  for  this  purpose, 
in  preference  to  "  Service  powder." 

27,  In  large  vessels  he  will  cause  a  cot  with  a  spare  sacking-bottom,  or 
such  other  apparatus  as  may  be  approved  by  the  Surgeon,  to  be  prepared 
and  kept  for  the  purpose  of  lowering  the  wounded  to  the  orlop  or  berth 
deck. 

28,  Before  the  powder  is  received  on  board,  he,  with  the  Gunner,  will 
carefully  inspect  the  magazines  and  shell-rooms,  their  passages  and  light- 
rooms,  and  have  them  thoroughly  cleaned,  dried  and  aired,  and  will  see  that 
the  pipes  and  stop-cocks,  and  every  thing  connected  with  flooding  the  mag 
azines,  are  in  order,  and  acquaint  himself  with  their  position  and  mode  of  opera 
tion  ;  the  lighting  apparatus  cleaned  and  dried ;  and  particularly  that  the 
glasses  for  transmitting  light  into  the  magazines  and  shell-rooms  are  clear 
and  without  fracture  ;  that  the  light  burns  clearly,  and  the  box  is  well  venti 
lated;  and  shall  report  to  the  Ordnance  Officer  when  the  magazines  are 
ready  to  receive  the  ammunition.     (See  Chap.  II,  Part  III.) 


GENEKAL   DUTIES  DELATING  TO 


OFFICERS  IN  CHARGE  OF  DIVISIONS. 

29.  OFFICERS  IN  CHARGE  OF  DIVISIONS  OF  GUNS  are  required  to  make  them 
selves  thoroughly  conversant  with  every  particular  relating  to  the  equipment, 
exercise,  and  management  of  the  guns,  as  set  forth  in  these  instructions,  and 
especially  to  familiarize  themselves  with   the  charges  prescribed  and  the 
ranges  given  in  the  Tables ;  the  principles  and  practice  of  pointing  guns 
under  all  circumstances,  and  also  with  every  precaution  connected  with  the 
use  of  shells,  and  of  percussion  and  time  fuzes. 

30.  They  are  carefully  to  inspect  their  divisions  when  called  to  quarters 
for  inspection  or  exercise,  and  see  that  every  thing  is,  at  all  times,  in  place 
and  in*  order  for  service ;  and  in  case  of  discovering  any  defect  or  deficiency, 
will  report  it  to  the  Executive  Officer. 

31 .  They  will  be  careful,  when  instructing  the  men  at  quarters,  to  require 
a  strict  adherence  to  the  prescribed  mode  of  performing  their  duties,  and  to 
all  the  details  of  execution,  in  order  that  general  uniformity  and  the  efficiency 
dependent  on  it  may  be  secured.     When  the  individuals  of  the  guns'  crews 
have  become  expert  in  the  performance  of  their  particular  duties,  then  each 
man  shall  be  instructed  by  the  officer  of  his  division,  until  he  shall  have 
become  acquainted  with  the  special  duties  of  every  station  at  the  gun. 

32.  They  are  at  least  once  a  week  to  examine  the  guns  and  all  the  iron 
work  of  the  carriages,  and  see  that  they  are  kept  free  from  rust,  and  espe 
cially  the  eccentric  axles,  elevating  screws,  and  pivot-bolts,  which  must  be 
protected  by  a  mixture  of  tallow  and  white-lead,  or  other  similar  coating. 
The  cap-squares  must  be  frequently  removed,  the  guns  lifted  and  the  trun 
nions  cleaned ;  the  elevating  screws  oiled,  but  never  cleaned  with  brick  or 
emery  paper. 

Once  a  quarter  at  least,  all  the  connecting  bolts,  such  as  cap-square, 
bracket,  breast,  and  transom  bolts,  are  to  be  examined  and  tightened  if  they 
require  it.  To  do  this  it  is  necessary,  after  lifting  the  gun,  to  turn  the  car 
riage  bottom  up.  The  threads  of  the  screws  of  the  bolts  above  named  must 
be  coated  with  the  lacquer  for  small  arms. 

33.  THE  OFFICER  OF  THE  POWDER  DIVISION  will,  in  like  manner,  carefully 
instruct  andr  drill  his  men,  and  test  the  efficiency  of  the  arrangements  for 
passing  powder,  shot,  and  shell,  in  order  to  insure  a  sufficient  supply  of 
each  to  all  parts  of  the  batteries,  without  the  danger  of  misdirection  or  of 
accumulations  in  any  part  thereof.     To  this  end  blocks  of  proper  shapes 
and  colors  may  be  provided  in  the  appropriate  tanks  of  the  magazines,  and 
passed  up  instead  of  powder,  when  that  is  not  used.     These  are  to  be  counted 
and  reported  by  the  Officers  of  the  Gun  Divisions,  and  will  enable  the  Execu- 


ORDNANCE    AND   GUNNERY — EQUIPMENTS  AND  EXERCISES.        9 

live  Officer,  and  the  Officer  of  the  Powder  Division,  to  detect  and  remedy 
defects  or  deficiencies  in  the  system  or  its  details,  and  to  be  sure  that  the 
men  are  properly  stationed  and  instructed. 


MASTER. 

34.  The  MASTER  will  see  that  the  number  of  fighting-stoppers,  whips  for 
preventer-stays,  preventer-braces,  slings  for  yards  and  gaffs,  relieving-tackles, 
and  other  articles  in  his  division  which  are  directed,  are  all  fitted  and  ready 
for  use  in  action.     At  general  quarters  his  division  must  be  regularly  drilled 
in  fishing  masts  and  spars,  stoppering  and  knotting  rigging,  and  trimming 
sails. 

CHIEF   ENGINEER. 

35.  The  CHIEF  ENGINEER  will  ascertain  that  all  the  tools  and  implements 
necessary  for  the  prompt  and  effectual  repair  of  injuries  which  the  engine 
and  its  dependencies  may  receive  in  action,  are  received  on  board  and  placed 
at  hand. 

«  GUNNER. 

36.  He  shall  attend  personally  at  the  ordnance  store    where  his  stores 
shall  be  delivered  to  him,  the  Ordnance  Officer  furnishing  him  with  means 
of  transportation  and  men  for  stowing  them  in  their  appointed  places  on 
board  ship,  when  the  crew  is  not  available  for  this  purpose.     He  is  to  be 
especially  careful  that  the  equipments  and  stores  belonging  to  the  magazine 
are  arranged  therein  in  conformity  to  Ordnance  Instructions.     (See  Chap.  I, 
Part  III.  for  further  directions  relative  to  his  duties  and  responsibilities.) 

37.  The  powder-tanks  containing  charges  for  each  class  of  guns  are  to  be 
stowed  on  their  sides,  with  the  lids  next  the  alleys  and  hinges  down,  near 
the  magazine  scuttles  through  which  these  charges  are  to  be  delivered ;  the 
charges  for  "  ordinary  firing"  nearest  the  scuttle.     When  tanks  are  emptied 
they  are  to  be  stowed  on  the  upper  shelves  in  order  that  the  powder  may 
be  kept,  as  much  as  possible,  below  the  water  line. 

38.  In  time  of  war,  passing-boxes  are  to  have  charges  for  "  ordinary  firing" 
kept  in  them  ready  for  passing  up  at  once. 

*39.  In  future  white  will  be  used  for  all  cylinders,  the  calibre  and  weight 
distinctly  stencilled  on  each  bag.  In  case  of  a  deficiency  of  white  cartridge 
cloth,  the  different  charges  for  all  classes  of  guns  may  be  distinguished  by 
the  color  of  the  cartridge-bags ;  white  being  used  for  distant  firing,  blue  for 
"  ordinary"  firing,  and  red  for  "  near"  firing. 

The  lid  ends  of  the  powder-tanks  for  service  charges  are  to  be  painted  of 


10  GENERAL  DUTIES  KELATING  TO 

the  same  colors  as  the  cartridge-bags  which  they  contain,  and  must  be  dis 
tinctly  marked  with  the  calibre  and  weight  of  the  gun  for  which  the  car 
tridges  are  intended.  Tanks  for  musket-powder  must  be  marked  MUSKET- 
POWDEK;  and  this  powder  may  be  put  up  in  either  of  the  kind  of  charges 
allowed  which  will  make  the  best  stowage,  the  bags  properly  stencilled. 

Tanks  containing  saluting  powder  are  to  be  marked  u  SALUTING."  It  is 
to  be  kept  in  bags,  stencilled  "  saluting." 

40*  No  loose  powder  is  ever  to  be  taken  or  carried  on  board  ship,  and  all, 
whether  public  or  private  belonging  to  officers,  must  be  safely  stowed  in  the 
magazines. 

41 «  All  metallic  cartridges  for  small  arms,  percussion  caps,  and  percussion 
or  friction  primers,  or  other  articles  containing  fulminating  matter,  must  be 
kept  in  boxes  prepared  for  the  purpose,  and  the  boxes  must  be  stowed  sepa 
rately  from  other  articles,  in  a  dry,  secure,  and  safe  place,  under  lock  and 
key,  and  are  on  no  account  to  be  put  in  the  magazine.  It  is  recommended 
that  they  be  distributed  in  two  or  three  places,  a  portion  conveniently  at 
hand. 

42,  The  fireworks,  after  carefully  removing  all  fulminating  matter,  such 
as  caps  or  primers,  if  any  such  be  used  to  ignite  them,  are  to  be  stowed  in 
their  proper  packing-boxes  in   other  light  boxes  of  suitable  length,  made 
water-tight,  with  lock  and  key,  and  to  fit  between  the  beams  and  carlines  of 
the  gun  decks  of  frigates  and  berth  decks  of  single-decked  vessels.    Those  for 
instant  use  must  be  placed  near  the  after  hatch,  and  the  remainder  abaft 
that  position,  if  possible,  so  as  to  be  constantly  under  the  care  of  the  sen 
tinel  at  the  cabin  doors.     In  no  case,  however,  are  they  to  be  placed  over 
any  standing  light  or  lantern  on  any  deck. 

43,  All  ammunition  packing-boxes,  shell-bags,  and  metal  cases  aro  to  be 
preserved,  and  returned  into  store  at  the  end  of  the  cruise. 

44,  No  coopering  is  ever  to  be  done  in  the  magazines  of  ships.     Should 
powder  be  received  on  board  in  barrels,  the  hoops  and  heads  must  be 
started  on  the  orlop  or  berth  deck  before  entering  the  magazine. 

45,  In  stowing  shell-rooms,  filled  shells  are  to  be  stowed  together  in  boxes 
or  bags ;  those  having  fuzes  of  different  times  of  burning,  and  each  kind  of 
fuze,  will   be  placed   in  tiers  or  ranges  distinctly  separate.     (See  Article 
ON  JL^UZES,  C.  IV.)    Empty  shells  are  to  be  stowed  by  themselves,  unsabottet, 
in  bulk,  in  a  dry  place. 

46,  Whenever  guns  are  to  be  struck  below,  or  prepared  for  transpor 
tation,  the  gunner  will  see  that  the  bores  are  washed  with  fresh  water,  care 
fully  sponged,  thoroughly  dried,  and  coated  with  melted  tallow,  and  a  wad 
dipped  in  the  same  material  inserted,  and  connected  with  a  tompion  by  a 
lanyard.     lie  is  to  see  that  the  tompion  is  put  in  securely,  and  the  vent  and 
all  screw-holes  stopped  by  a  plu£  of  soft  wood,  and  puttied  over. 

47,  He  is  to  examine  and  report  daily,  before  10  A.  M.  and  8  p.  M.,  whether 
the  guns  and  all  their  equipments ;  the  whips  for  supplying  shot  and  shells ; 


ORDNANCE   AND   GUNNERY — EQUIPMENTS  AND   EXERCISES.      11 

the  arm-chests,  armory,  and  small  arms;  the  supply  and  reserve  division 
boxes,  and  other  articles  furnished  as  ordnance  and  ordnance  stores,  are  in 
good  order  and  in  place,  and  make  immediate  report  to  the  Commanding  or 
Executive  Officer  of  any  defects  or  deficiencies  which  he  may  discover  at  any 
other  time. 

48.  The  guns  and  their  equipments  are  to  be  kept  as  dry  as  possible,  and 
no  salt  water  used  in  cleaning  them. 

49*  If  he  shall  discover  any  articles  to  be  injured,  or  liable  to  injury  from 
any  cause,  he  will  ask,  in  writing,  for  a  survey  to  be  held,  to  determine  the 
amount,  cause,  or  liability  of  any  of  the  stores  or  equipments  to  damage  or 
deterioration ;  a  copy  of  this  request  and  report  of  survey  to  be  furnished  to 
him  as  a  voucher,  by  the  officer  ordering  the  survey. 

50.  Whenever  the  magazines  or  shell-rooms  are  opened,  he  is  to  take  every 
precaution  to  guard  against  accident  by  fire ;  to  examine  particularly  that  all 
the  men  stationed  in  any  way  in  or  about  the  magazine,  embracing  all  sta 
tioned  within  the  magazine  screen,  put  on  the  magazine  dress  and  shoes,  and 
on  no  account  have  any  thing  metallic  about  them,  and  that  no  improper 
articles  are  introduced.     He  will  also  see  that  all  the  articles  required  for 
sweeping  and  removing  loose  powder  are  at  hand,  and  that  those  operations 
are  performed  before  the  magazine  is  closed. 

51.  The  tanks  are  never  to  be  opened  unless  by  special  order,  or  when 
powder  is  actually  required  for  service ;  and  then  no  more  of  the  lids  are  to 
be  unscrewed  than  is  necessary  for  immediate  supply.     The  strictest  atten 
tion  to  this  regulation  is  required  of  the  Gunner,  as  experience  has  proved 
that  the  preservation  of  the  powder  in  good  condition  depends  upon  the 
entire  exclusion  of  damp  air. 

52.  When  the  guns  are  ordered  to  be  drawn  before  entering  a  friendly 
port,  the  Gunner  is  to  be  particularly  attentive  to  assure  himself  that  no  shot 
or  wad  is  left  in  any  gun. 

53*  In  saluting,  he  is  to  guard  against  accident  in  loading,  pointing,  and 
firing,  and  to  be  particularly  careful  in  reloading,  where  that  operation  is 
unavoidable. 

54.  In  the  absence  or  illness  of  the  Gunner,  his  general  duties  will  devolve 
on  a  Gunner's  Mate,  under  the  supervision  of  the  Executive  Officer. 

55.  The  Gunner  shall  keep  a  minute-book  of  all   expenditures  in  the 
Ordnance  Department,  and  on  Monday  of  each  week  shall  submit  it  to  the 
Executive  Officer  for  examination  and  approval.     Within  ten  day.s  after  the 
expiration  of  the  quarter,  he  shall  make  out  his  quarterly  return  in  the 
required  form,  which  shall  be  signed  by  him,  certified  correct  by  the  Execu 
tive  Officer,  approved  by  the  Commander,  and  forwarded  to  the  Bureau  by 
the  first  opportunity.     At  the  same  time  the  ledger  shall  be  posted. 

2 


12  GENERAL  DUTIES  RELATING  TO 

56.  When  a  vessel  returns  from  a  cruise  to  be  refitted  or  repaired,  or 
placed  in  ordinary,  the  Gunner,  or  person  performing  the  duty  of  Gunner,  is 
not  to  leave  the  ship,  unless  specially  authorized  by  the  Secretary  of  the 
Navy,  until  all  the  guns,  powder,  small  arms,  ammunition,  and  other  articles 
under  his  charge,  shall  have  been  examined  and  surveyed,  and  turned  over 
to  his  successor,  or  other  person  appointed  to  receive  them,  or  to  the  Inspec 
tor  of  Ordnance,  the  receipt  for  which  he  shall  show  to  the  officer  to  whom 
he  applies  for  leave. 

CARPENTER. 

57.  The  CARPENTER  shall  ascertain  and  report  to  the  Executive  Officer 
that  there  are  a  sufficient  number  of  tarpaulins  to  cover  all  the  hatches  lead 
ing  to  the  fore  and  after  orlops ;  that  the  pump-gear  of  every  description  is 
ready  and  in  order  for  rigging  the  pumps,  and  that  every  preparation  can  be 
promptly  made  before  going  into  action  to  free  the  ship,  in  case  of  receiving 
injuries  below  the  water-line. 

58.  He  is  also  to  examine  and  keep  in  order  the  force  and  channel  pumps, 
the  fire-engine,  the  division-tubs,  and,  in  short,  all  the  apparatus  necessary 
to  give  a  good  and  speedy  supply  of  water  in  case  of  fire  in  action. 

59.  He  is  specially  charged  with  the  care  and  distribution  of  articles  for 
stopping  shot-holes  or  repairing  other  injuries  to  the  hull,  which  may  be 
received  in  action,  viz. :  shot-plugs  and  mauls ;  pieces  of  pine  board  from 
eighteen  inches  to  three  feet  long,  and  from  twelve  to  fifteen  inches  wide, 
covered  with  felt  or  fearnaught,  previously  coated  with  tar  or  white  lead ; 
patches  of  sheet-lead,  all  with  nail-holes  punched ;    and  trouser-slings  for 
lowering  men  outside  the  vessel,  to  be  provided  with  a  pouch  or  pocket,  to 
contain  a  hammer  and  nails.     Tarred  canvas  or  oakum  should  be  prepared 
to  shove  into  the  shot-holes  before  the  patches  of  board  or  lead  are  nailed 
on.     Although  shot-plugs  are  still  to  be  allowed,  the  means  just  described 
are  most  to  be  relied  on. 

60.  In  case  it  shall  not  have  already  been  done,  the  Carpenter,  under  the 
direction  of  the  Commander  or  Executive  Officer  of  the  ship,  will  draw  a 
black  line,  two  inches  broad,  on  the  ceiling  of  the  ship,  to  correspond  with 
the  ordinary  height  of  the  water-line.     On  this  is  to  be  marked,  by  corre 
sponding  intervals  and  numbers,  the  position  of  the  ports  on  the  lowest  of 
the  gun-decks.     By  this  arrangement  the  position  of  the  shot-hole  can  be 
easily  ascertained  and  communicated,  through  the  Officer  Commanding  the 
Powder  Division,  and  a  remedy  promptly  applied.     To  this  end  he  is  to 
pay  habitual  attention  to  keeping  the  wings  clear  to  four  feet  below  the 
water-line,  and  report  any  obstructions  to  the  Executive  Officer. 


ORDNANCE     AND   GUNNERY — EQUIPMENTS  AND  EXERCISES.    13 


YEOMAN. 

61,  The  YEOMAN  is  to  charge  himself  with,  and  is  to  be  accountable  for, 
all  articles  of  ordnance  stores  which  may  be  placed  in  the  storeroom  under 
his  charge,  and  is  not  to  issue  or  expend  any  article,  except  by  order  of,  or 
authority  from,  the  Captain  or  Executive  Officer. 

62,  On  the  return  of  a  ship,  to  be  laid  up  at  a  vard,  or  to  be  refitted  or 
repaired,  the  Yeoman  will  be  retained  to  deliver  the  ordnance  stores  in  his 
charge  into  the  hands  of  the  Ordnance  Officer.    If  any  deficiency  in  the  stores 
under  his  charge  be  discovered,  or  they  are  in  bad  order,  the  Ordnance  Officer 
will  report  the  same  to  the  Commandant  of  the  yard,  who  will  order  a  sur 
vey,  to  ascertain  the   nature  and  extent  of  the   deficiency,  or  injury,  and 
whether  either  were  caused  by  the  Yeoman's  negligence  or  fault.     If  the 
surveying  officers  shall  find  just  cause  for  suspecting  fraud  or  negligence, 
the  Commandant  shall  suspend  the  payment  and  discharge  of  the  Yeo 
man,  until  he  shall  report  the  case  to  the  Bureau  and  receive  the  orders  of 
the  Department. 

63,  No  person  is  to  be  knowingly  appointed  Yeoman  who  has  already 
served  in  that  capacity  in  any  vessel  of  war  of  the  United  States,  who  can 
not  produce  a  satisfactory  certificate  of  his  former  good  conduct  as  Yeo- 
raan. 


14  GENERAL  DISTRIBUTION  AT  QUARTERS. 


CHAPTER   II. 
GENERAL  DISTRIBUTION  OF  OFFICERS  AND  MEN  AT  QUARTERS. 


64*  THE  following  directions  for  the  general  distribution  of  a  ship's 
company  at  quarters,  or  for  action,  arc  intended  to  secure,  upon  the  most 
important  points,  a  degree  of  uniformity  which  will  promote  efficiency,  and 
at  the  same  time  leave  to  the  Captains  the  selection  and  arrangement  of 
many  individuals  under  their  command,  according  to  their  own  views  of 
the  particular  qualifications  of  each. 

65*  The  CAPTAIN'S  station,  in  action,  is  upon  the  quarter-deck. 

66*  The  Executive  Officer,  the  Midshipmen  acting  as  Aides  to  the  Captain, 
and  the  Signal  Officer,  are  also  to  be  stationed  on  the  quarter-deck. 

67.  The  stations  of  the  other  Officers  are  to  be  regulated  by  divisions,  as 
follows  : 

The  guns  upon  each  deck  are  to  be  numbered  from  forward,  beginning 
with  No.  1,  and  continuing  aft,  in  succession,  each  gun  and  its  opposite 
being  designated  by  the  same  number,  excepting  pivot  and  shifting  guns, 
each  of  which  is  to  have  a  separate  number.  The  guns  on  each  deck  are 
then  to  be  divided  as  equally  as  possible  into  three  or  two  divisions,  accord 
ing  to  the  number  of  Lieutenants  or  other  Watch  Officers  on  board,  so  that 
each  division  of  guns,  and  the  persons  belonging  to  it,  may  be  commanded 
by  a  Lieutenant  or  other  Watch  Officer.  These  divisions  are  to  be  num 
bered  consecutively,  designating  the  forward  division  on  the  lowest  gun- 
deck  as  the  first  division,  and  passing  from  the  after  division  of  one  deck  to 
the  forward  division  of  the  next  deck  above  it. 

68.  The  command  of  these  divisions  of  guns  is  to«be  assigned,  in  the 
order  of  their  numbers,  to  the  Lieutenants  or  other  Watch  Officers,  accord 
ing  to  their  rank,  assigning  the  first  division  to  the  officer  next  in  rank  to 
the  Executive  Officer.      In  case  of  a   deficiency   of  Watch   Officers,   the 
quarter-deck  division  may  be  assigned  to  an  Ensign  or  Midshipman,  who 
will  act  under  the  general  supervision  of  the  Executive  Officer.     When  the 
number  of  officers  on  board  of  vessels  having  pivot-guns  will  permit,  each 
pivot-gun  will  be  placed  under  the  special  charge  of  a  suitable  officer  of  the 
division  of  which  it  forms  a  part. 


DISTRIBUTION  OF  THE   OFFICERS.  15 


MASTER'S  DIVISION. 

69.  This  division  will  comprise  all  those  stationed  in  the  tops,  and  those 
appointed  to  attend  to  the  rigging,  sails,  steerage,  and  signals.     The  Master 
is  to  be  stationed  on  the  quarter-deck,  and  to  be  assisted  by  the  Boatswain, 
whose  station  will  be  on  the  forecastle.     The  Boatswain  will  be  charged  with 
all  his  divisional  duties  in  the  event  of  his  death  or  absence.     (For  ARMS, 
see  Table  in  Article  101.) 

POWDER  DIVISION. 

70.  This  division  will  be  under  the  direction  either  of  a  Lieutenant,  Mas 
ter,  Ensign,  or  competent  Midshipman.     It  will  consist  of  all  those  stationed 
below  the  gun-decks,  except  persons  belonging  to  the  Surgeon's  Division 
and  the  Paymaster  and  his  Clerk. 

The  Gunner  is  to  be  stationed  in  the  main  magazine,  and  a  Gunner's 
Mate  or  Quarter  Gunner  in  the  other  magazine  when  there  are  two ; 
and  those  persons  of  this  division  who  may  be  stationed  in  the  magazines 
and  passages  are  to  be  under  the  immediate  direction  of  the  Gunner  and  his 
Mate,  respectively.  Those  of  the  Carpenter's  crew  stationed  in  the  hold  or 
wings  are  to  be  under  the  immediate  direction  of  the  Carpenter's  Mate,  who 
will  be  stationed  with  them.  All  reports,  however,  are  to  be  made  through 
the  Commanding  Officer  of  the  division. 

DIVISION  OF  MARINES. 

71.  All  the  Marines  who  may  not  be  distributed  to  other  divisions  for 
action  are  to  compose  a  Division  of  Marines,  to  be  under  the  immediate 
command  of  the   Senior  Officer  of  Marines  on  board.     He  will  form  his 
division  on  such  part  or  parts  of  the  spar  or  upper  deck  as  the  Captain  may 

direct. 

i 

SURGEON'S  DIVISION. 

72.  The  SURGEON  or  senior  Medical  Officer  will  have  the  direction  of  this 
division,  which  shall  comprise  all  the  Medical  Officers  and  such  other  per 
sons  as  may  be   designated  by  the  Captain  to  assist  in  the  care  of  the 
wounded  in  action.     This  division  will  occupy  the  cockpit,  or  such  other 
convenient  place  as  the  Captain  of  the  vessel  may  direct. 

THE  CHAPLAIN. 

73.  The  CHAPLAIN  will  be  in  attendance  to  perform  the  duties  of  his 
sacred  office,  and  to  render  such  other  service  as  may  be  in  his  power. 


16 


GENERAL  DISTRIBUTION"  AT  QUARTERS. 


PAYMASTER. 

74.  The  PAYMASTER'S  station  will  be  in  the  ward-room  and  on  the  berth- 
deck,  in  charge  of  the  money,  books  and  stores  belonging  to  his  Depart 
ment. 

ENGINEER  DIVISION. 

75.  The  Engineer  Division  shall  be  under  the   direction  of  the   Chief 
Engineer,  and  shall  comprise  the  Assistant  Engineers  and  such  of  the  Fire 
men  and  Coalheavers  as  may  be  detailed  for  the  purpose.     An  Assistant 
will  be  appointed  to  take  charge  of  the  fire  party  detailed  from  this  Division. 

MISCELLANEOUS  OFFICERS. 

76.  Ensigns,  Midshipmen,  Mates,  Captain's  and  other  Clerks,  the  Sail- 
maker,  and  other  officers  not  enumerated,  arc  to  be  assigned  to  the  different 
divisions  at  the  discretion  of  the  Captain. 

77.  In  distributing  the  Petty  Officers,  Seamen,  and  others  to  the  guns  and 
other  stations  in  the  several  divisions,  it  is  desirable,  as  a  general  rule,  that 
those  stationed  at  the  same  gun  or  near  each  other  at  quarters,  should  be 
drawn  from  different  stations  for  working  ship ;  so  that  a  great  loss  at  any 
one  gun  may  not  fall  too  heavily  on  any  watch  station. 

Exceptions  to  this  general  rule  may  be  advantageously  made  where  the 
duties  of  men  require  their  habitual  attendance  on  particular  decks.  In 
such  cases  it  will  generally  be  advisable  to  station  them  at  quarters  near  to 
the  places  of  their  ordinary  duties. 


DISTRIBUTION  OF  THE  CREW. 

78.  Table  showing  the  number  of  men  for  the  service  of  each  kind  and 
class  of  gun  in  use  in  the  Navy,  assuming  the  vessel  to  have  the  established 
complement. 


PIVOT-GUNS. 

BROADSIDE-  GUNS. 

ft 

r   . 

r 

of 

0^ 

—  o 

£ 

(0 

^J 

•^*r 

J- 

J- 

Si 

§0 

«a 

®*j 

ft 

o  is 

ft 
o 

o  o  0- 

64 

«   0 

T-H  O 

•^  vi 

o--g 

ee 

1— 

°,01  53 

8| 

OJ  S 

"o-g 

O   t,' 

o  t; 

o  &; 

0 

oo 

'—  «w 

^>  O  ti 

•S,: 

If^ 

•gU 

14 

ll 

c. 

ft 

1 

•g  c, 

•?s 

c 

'w  'o 

c  c 

i 

ill 

i| 

i! 

MM 

M 

S 

S 

w 

S 

^ 

CO 

CO  CO 

s 

is 

CO 

24 

20 

1G 

10 

8 

6 

1G 

14 

12 

12 

10 

8 

6 

DISTRIBUTION   OF  THE   CREW. 


17 


To  the  XI,  X,  and  IX-inch  100-pounder  rifle,  and  64-pounder  pivot  guns, 
a  Powderman,  and  to  all  other  guns  a  Powder-boy  is  to  be  added. 

The  number  of  men  to  form  crews  of  guns  mounted  on  carriages  of  spe 
cial  character,  is  to  be  regulated  as  may  be  found  most  advantageous  by  the 
Commanding  Officer. 

70,  In  designating  the  Petty  Officers  and  others  for  particular  stations,  it 
is  assumed  that  the  intelligence,  skill,  and  force  of  the  men  have  been  equally 
divided  between  the  two  watches,  and  that  the  men  in  the  starboard  watch 
have  all  odd  numbers,  as  1,  3,  5,  and  those  of  the  port  watch  even  num 
bers,  as  2,  4,  6. 

To  preserve  this  equality,  and  to  secure  the  ability  of  those  who  may  b 
upon  deck  to  prepare  the  ship  for  action  at  night,  whilst  the  watch  below 
are  bringing  up  and  stowing  the  hammocks,  all  the  odd-numbered  guns  will 
be  entirely  manned  by  men  belonging  to  the  starboard  watch,  and  all  the 
even-numbered  guns  by  those  belonging  to  the  port  watch,  as  far  as  practi 
cable.  The  crews  of  pivot-guns  to  be  taken  half  from  each  watch. 

80.  Where  ports  on  opposite  sides  of  the  same  deck  are  numbered  the 
same,  and  are  both  provided  with  a  gun,  guns'  crews  are  only  to  be  fur 
nished  for  the  guns  on  one  side.     Pivot  and  shifting  guns  are  each  to  have 
full  guns'  crews. 

81.  When  the  complements  allowed  to  vessels  of  the  Navy  will  permit, 
it  is  recommended  as  a  general  arrangement  that  the  guns'  crews  be  formed 
of  about  one-third  Petty  Officers  and  Seamen,  one-third  Ordinary  Seamen, 
amd  one-third  Landsmen  and  Boys,  and  that  this  system  be  observed  as 
nearly  as  practicable. 

82.  At  least  one  Quarter  Gunner  should  be  stationed  at  each  division  of 
guns;  and  a  Gunner's  Mate  or  Quarter  Gunner  in  the  smaller  magazine,  and 
in  each  shell-room. 

If  there  be  more  shell-rooms  than  there  are  disposable  Quarter  Gunners  to 
attend  them,  other  careful  and  suitable  persons  are  to  be  selected  to  supply 
the  deficiency. 

83.  Before  permanently  assigning  the  individuals  which   form  a   gun's 
crew,  to  the  performance  of  particular  duties  connected  with  its  service  in 


18  GENERAL  DISTRIBUTION"  AT  QUARTERS. 

action,  it  is  important  to  ascertain  their  respective  qualifications,  as  far  as 
may  be  practicable,  by  questioning  them  or  by  exercising  them  at  the  guns. 

8-1.  The  Captains,  especially,  should  be  selected  from  those  in  whose  skill, 
coolness,  and  judgment  the  greatest  reliance  can  be  placed,  without  regard 
to  their  ratings,  though  at  the  same  time  care  should  be  taken  to  avoid 
stationing  men  of  a  higher  rating  than  the  Captains  of  the  guns,  to  perform 
subordinate  duties  at  the  same  guns.  They  should  be  examined  by  the 
Surgeon  with  reference  to  eyesight. 

Spongers  and  Loaders  rank  next  in  importance,  and,  with  activity  and 
coolness,  should  possess  the  necessary  physical  strength  and  stature.  For 
Handspikemen,  weight  is  important,  in  addition  to  strength  and  coolness. 

85.  Very  careful  men  should  be  selected  for  attending  the  Powder-scut 
tles  on  the  different  decks,  as  well  to  prevent  noise  and  contention  among 
the  Powder-boys  as  to  guard  against  accidents,  and  speedily  to  repair  such  as 
may  occur.     The.  boys  should  be  trained  to  fall  into  line,  to  insure  an  equal 
distribution  of  powder. 

86.  Unless  some  special  reason  should  require  a-  different  arrangement 
with  regard  to  Boarders,  Pikemen,  Firemen,  Sail-trimmers,  and  Pumpmen, 
the  following  will  be  observed  : 


BOARDERS. 

87.  Half  the  men  composing  a  gun's  crew,  excluding  the  Powderman 
or  Boy,  are  to  be  Boarders.     When  this  rule  gives  an  odd  number  of  men, 
the  odd  one  is  to  be  a  Second  Boarder. 

88.  The  Boarders  are  to  constitute  two  divisions,  called  First  and  Second 
Boarders. 

89.  First  Boarders  arc,  generally,  to  be  taken  from  the  second  part  of  a 
gun's  crew  ;  and  Second  Boarders  from  the  first  part. 

90f  All  Petty  Officers  on  the  spar-deck,  except  the  Quartermaster  at  the 
conn  and  the  Quartermaster  at  the  wheel,  are  to  be  First  Boarders. — (For 
ARMS  OF  BOARDERS,  see  Table,  Article  101.) 

The  Executive  Officer  leads  the  Boarders.  All  the  Division  Officers  on 
the  spar-deck  shall  be  First  Boarders,  except  the  officer  commanding  the 
quarter-deck  division,  who  shall  lead  the  Pikcmcn.  On  gun-decks  the  officer 
commanding  the  second  division  shall  be  a  First  Boarder ;  the  commanding 
officers  of  the  other  divisions  shall  be  Second  Boarders.  If  there  are  two 
officers  in  any  division,  the  second  shall  lead  those  Boarders  who  do  not 
go  with  his  principal.  A  Lieutenant  or  other  responsible  officer  should  be 
detailed  to  command  the  gun-deck  in  the  absence  of  the  boarders  and 
pikemen.  . 


STATIONS  AND   ARMS   OF  GUNS'   CREWS.  19 


PIKEMEN. 

91.  One-fourth  of  the  number  of  men  composing  a  gun's  crew,  rejecting 
fractions,  and  excepting  the  Powderman  or  Boy,  and  all  the  men  of  the 
Master's  division  on  the  spar-deck,  except  those  designated  as  Boarders  and 
those  at  the  wheel  and  conn,  are  to  be  Pikemen,  and  compose  but  one 
division. 

92.  For  each  Pikeman  at  a  gun  there  is  to  be  a  musket  or  carbine  pro 
vided,  which  in  action,  when  not  in  use,  is  to  be  kept  with  the  bayonet  un 
fixed,  hooked  securely  against  a  carline  or  beam  near  the  gun ;  or  on  a  spar- 
deck  placed  conveniently  at  hand.     When  they  are  called  away  they  will 
repair  on  deck  with  these  arms,  when,  if  ordered,  they  will  place  them  in  a 
secure  place,  to  be  designated  by  the  Executive  Officer,  and  arm  themselves 
with  pikes.      Pikemen  will  wear  a  cartridge-box  whenever  at  general  quar 
ters  or  in  action. 

Pikemen  of  the  spar-deck  divisions  will,  on  being  called  away,  arm  them 
selves  as  directed. 

Should  it  become  necessary,  in  an  emergency,  to  call  "  all  hands"  from 
below  to  repel  an  enemy,  the  Pikemen  will,  if  not  already  so  armed,  arm 
themselves  with  muskets  or  carbines,  leaving  their  pikes  to  be  used  by  those 
whose  arms  are  not  designated — that  is,  by  the  remainder  of  the  gun's  crew 
and  Powder  Division. 

93.  One  boarding-pike  for  each  gun  on  covered  decks  is  always  to  be 
kept  triced  up  conveniently  near  it,  and  this  is  to  be  used  by  the  Powder 
man,  or  any  other  person  left  at  the  gun  to  guard  the  port. 

94.  Pikemen  are  to  be  covered  by  the  Marines  with  their  bayonets  fixed. 

FIREMEN. 

95.  With  broadside  guns,  one  Fireman  is  to  be  taken  from  each  gun's 
crew,  and  from  pivot-guns  two.     Each  Fireman  is  to  have  a  fire-bucket  at 
hand  near  his  gun,  and  to  wear  his  battle-axe  in  a  belt  around  his  waist. 

SAIL-TRIMMERS. 

96.  In  all  vessels  there  shall  be  two  divisions  of  Sail-trimmers,  composed 
of  all  the  men  at  the  spar-deck  guns,  except  1st  Captains,  1st  Spongers, 
1st  Loaders,  and  Powder-boys.     The  1st  Sail-trimmers  are  to  be  taken  from 
the  guns  on  the  forward  half,  and  the  2d  Sail-trimmers  from  those  on  the 
after  half  of  the  spar-deck. 

97.  In  vessels  carrying  guns  on  more  than  one  deck  there  are  to  be  three 
divisions  of  Sail-trimmers,  called  1st,  2d,  and  3d  Sail-trimmers,  and  the  third 
division  is  to  be  made  up  of  one  man  from  each  gun's  crew  on  the  other 
deck  or  decks,  as  designated  in  the  tables. — (Article  101.) 


20  GENERAL  DISTRIBUTION  AT  QUARTERS. 

This  third  division  of  Sail-trimmers  is  to  be  regarded  as  a  reserved  force, 
and  is  not  to  repair  on  deck  at  the  general  call  for  Sail-trimmers,  nor  except 
when  specially  ordered.  Besides  serving  to  re-enforce  the  other  two  di 
visions  when  absolutely  necessary,  it  is  also  to  re-enforce  either  the  Firemen 
or  the  Pumpmen  in  cases  of  need. 

98.  The  third  division  of  Sail-trimmers,  and  all  the  Pikemen  of  the  guns' 
crews,  and  others  armed  with  muskets  (See  Tables,  Article  101),  may  be 
made  to  assemble  together  as  a  body  of  Musketeers,  either  for  landing  or 
otherwise.  No  one  gun  more  than  another  will  be  weakened  by  so  doing ; 
and  this  suggests  the  propriety  of  preferring  these  men  ordinarily  for  the 
crews  of  boats. 

PUMPMEN. 

09.  Each  gun's  crew  composed  of  as  many  as  14  men  is  to  furnish  two, 
but,  when  of  less  than  14  men,  one  Pumpman  only. 

100.  When  Pumpmen  are  sufficiently  numerous  to  admit  of  working  the 
pumps  with  one-half  their  force,  they  should  compose  two  divisions,  to  be 
called  1st  and  2d  Pumpmen. 


STATIONS  AND  ARMS  OF  GUN^S  CREWS. 


21 


DISTRIBUTION  AND  ARMS  OF  MEN  AT  THE  GUNS. 

101.  The  annexed  Tables  show  the  stations  of  guns'  crews  at  pivot-guns, 
and  at  broadside-guns,  when  composed,  respectively,  of  the  following  num 
bers  of  men  :  24,  16,  14,  12,  10,  8,  or  6  ;  how  each  man  of  a  gun's  crew  is 
to  be  armed,  and  the  number  of  small  arms  of  all  kinds  required  for  each 
gun's  crew. 

K  B. — To  these  Tables  is  annexed  another,  showing  the  small  arms  of 
the  Master's  Division. 

PIVOT-GUN'S  CREW,  composed  o/24  MEN  and  a  POWDERMAN. 


TITLES  OF  GUN'S  CREW  ON 
LEFT  SIDE  OF  GUN. 

GUN 

Nos. 

TITLES  OF  GUN'S  CREW  ON 
EIOUT  SIDE  OF  GUN. 

ARMS. 

t 

9 
cc 

1 
1 

1 
1 

1 
1 

1 
1 
1 
1 

1 

1 

12 

g 
> 

0 

w 
M 

1 
1 

1 

1 
1 

1 

1 

7 

3 

I 

£ 

1 
1 

1 

1 
1 

5 

* 

& 

I 
1 
1 
1 

1 
1 

6 

MUSKETS. 

8 
? 

w 

tt 

1 
1 

1 

1 
1 
1 

6 

1st  Loader  2  B     

3 

1 
1 

1 
1 

1 

1 
1 
1 

8 

2d  Loader-  IB    

5 

4 

1st  Sponger,  2  B  

7 

6 

2d  Sponger    1  B 

1st  Front  Lever    2  B 

q 

8 

2d  Shellman  and  Pump.  . 

1st  Compressor,  and  Pike. 
1st  Rear  Lever,  and  Pike. 
Tr  -tkl   Deck-block  2  B 

13 
11 
17 

10 

2d  Front  Lever,  IB  

14 

2d  Compressor,  and  Pike. 

12 

2d  Rear  Lever,  and  Pike. 

Tr-tkl    Slide-block  2B 

19 

18 

Tr.-tkl.,  Deck-block,  1  B.  . 

Shifting-tkl.,    Deck-block, 

21 

20 

Tr.-lkl,  Slide-block,  IB.. 

Shifting-tkl   Slide-block 

0^ 

22 

Shifting-tkl.,   Deck-block, 
and  Pikcman 

1st  Tr.  Lev.  and  Fireman. 
1st  Captain,  2  B  

15 
1 

24 

Shifting-tkL.  Slide-block  . 

16 

2d  Tr.  Lev.  and  Fireman  . 

Powderman  

95 

2 

2d  Captain,  IB  

Total  number  of  A 

rmg                           

22 


GENERAL   DISTRIBUTION  AT  QUARTERS. 


GUN'S  CREW  composed  of  16  MEN  and  a  POWDERMAN. 


TITLES  OP  GUN'S  CREW  ON 
LEFT  SIDE  OF  GUN. 

GUN 

Nos. 

TITLES  OF  GUN'S  CREW  ON 
EIGHT  SIDE  OF  GUN. 

AKMS. 

•SdaOAYg  |  -H  r-l  rH  r-i 

a> 
9 

w 

5 

0 

•*• 

K 

M 

1 
1 

PISTOLS. 

£ 

M 

£ 

8 

% 

| 

M 
•<) 

1 

1st  Loader,  2B  

3 

4 

1st  Sponger,  2  B  

1 
1 

- 

1 

1 

1 
1 

2d  Loader,  IB  

6 

6 

2d  Sponger,  IB  

1st  Shellman,  2d  Pump.  . 
1st  Handspikeruan,  2  B.  . 

7 
9 

8 

2d  Shell,  and  1st  Pump.. 

10 

2d  Handspike.,  IB..    . 

1 
1 

_ 

1 
1 

1 

1 
1 
1 

1 
1 
1 
1 
1 

1st  Side-tackle,  and  Pike. 
1st  Port-tackle,  and  Pike. 
1st  Train-tackle,  and  Fire. 
1st  Captain,  2  B  

13 
15 
11 
1 

14 

2d  Side-tackle,  and  Pike. 

1G 

2d  Port-tackle,  and  Pike  . 

12 

2d  Tr.-tack.  and  Sail-trim. 

2 

2d  Captain,  1  B  

1 
1 

1 
1 

- 

- 

- 

Powderman  

8 

4 

5 

4 

Total  number  of  Arms  

4 

4 

N.  B.— On  other  than  lower  decks,  for  Port-tacklemen  substitute  3d  and  4th  Sidc-tacklemen. 


GUN'S  CREW  composed  of  14  MEN  and  a  POWDER-BOY. 


TITLES  OF  GUN'S  CREW  ON 
LKFT  SIDE  OF  GUN. 

GUN 

Nos. 

TITLES  OF  GUN'S  CREW  ON 
EIGHT  SIDE  OF  GUN. 

AIIMS. 

Swonns. 

REVOLVERS. 

3 

I 

1 
1 

1 
3 

g 

M 

£ 

MUSKETS. 

£ 

M 

<! 

w 
g 

P5 

1 
1 

1 
1 

4 

1st  Loader,  2  B  

3 

4 

1  st  Sponger  2  B 

1 
1 
1 
1 

1 

1 
1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

3 

1 

1 

1 
1 

4 

2d  Loader,  IB  

5 

6 

2d  Spono-er  1  B 

1st  Shell,  and  2d  Pump.  . 
1st  Handspike.,  2  B  

7 
9 

8 

2d  Shell,  and  1st  Pump.. 

10 

2d  Handspike,  and  Pike.  . 

1st  Side-tackle,  and  Pike. 
1st  Train-tackle,  and  Fire. 
1st  Captain,  2  B  

13 
11 
1 

14 

2d  Side-tackle,  and  Pike  . 

12 

2d  Tr.-tack.  and  Sail-trim. 

2 

2d  Captain   1  B 

Powder-boy  

Total  number  of  Ar 

ms  

7 

4 

STATIONS  AND  AKMS  OF   GUNS'   CCEWS. 


23 


GUN'S  CREW  composed  of  12  MEN  and  a  POWDER-BOY. 


TITLES  OF  GUN'S  CREW  ON 
LEFT  SIDE  OF  GUN. 

GUN 

Nos. 

TITLES  OP  GUN'S  CKEAV  ON 
EIGIIT  SIDE  OF  GUN. 

ARMS. 

0 

t 

CO 

1 
1 
1 
1 

I  KEVOLVEHS. 

s 

£ 

g 

M 

£ 

MUSKETS. 

j  BATTLE-  AXES. 

1  at  T  nnrlor   9  T? 

3 

f> 

4 

1st  Sponger  2  B     

1 

1 

1 
1 

1 
1 
1 

1 
1 

1 
1 

1 

1 

1 

3 

G 

9d  Sponger  IB       

7 

8 

2d  Shellman  and  Pump.  . 

1st  Handspike,  and  Pike  . 
1st  Train-tackle,  and  Fire. 
1st  Captain  2  B 

9 

11 
1 

10 

2d  Handspike,  and  Pike.  . 

12 

2d  Tr.-tkl.  and  Sail-trim.  . 

2 

9d  Captain   IB    

1 
1 

G 

1 
1 

3 

- 

- 

4 

Powder-boy  

Total  number  of  Arms. 

3 

* 

GUN'S  CREW  composed  of  10  MEN  and  a  POWDER-BOY. 


TITLES  OF  GUN'S  CREW  ON 
LEFT  SIDE  OF  GUN. 

GTJN 

Nos. 

TITLES  OF  GUN'S  CREW  ON 
EIGHT  SIDE  OF  GUN. 

AEM3. 

1  !_(_,,_.  1  SWORDS. 

I  I  H_I  1  REVOLVERS. 

I  t_,  |  |__  I  PISTOLS. 

8 

MUSKETS. 

BATTLE-AXES. 

1st  Loader  2  B 

4 

1st  Sponger  2  B 

- 
1 

1 

1 

1 
1 

_  ! 
3 

6 

7 

8 

2d  Shellman  and  Pump.  . 

1 

1 

5 

1 

1 

3 

2 

1 
2 

1 
3 

1st  Handspike,  and  Pike  . 
1st  Captiin  2  B 

9 

10 

Train-tackle             

!    2 

2d  Captain  IB       

Total  number  of  Arms. 

GENERAL   DISTRIBUTION  AT   QUARTERS. 


GUN'S  CREW  composed  of  8  MEN  and  a  POWDER-BOY. 


TITLES  OF  GUN'S  CBEW  ON 
LEFT  SIDE  OP  GUN. 

GUN 

Nos. 

TITLES  OF  GUN'S  CKEW  ON 
EIGHT  SIDE  OF  GUN. 

ARMS. 

§ 

o 
£ 

02 

1 

1 

1 

1 

j 

1 
1 

PISTOLS. 

1 

£ 

1 

1 

1 
| 

8 

1 
1 
1 

BATTLK-AXES. 

1st  Loader   2  B 

3 

4 

1st  Sponger  2  B 

1 
1 

1 
1 

2d  Loader  and  Pikeman.  . 
Shotman  and  Pumpman.  . 
1st  Captain   2  B     .... 

5 

7 
1 

6 

2d  Sponger  and  Pike.  .  .  . 

8 

Tr  -tkl   Fireman 

2 

2d  Capt.  and  Handsp.,  1  B. 

4 

2 

2 

2 

3 

2 

Total  number  of  At 

ma 

GUN'S  CREW  composed  of  6  MEN  awe?  a  POWDER-BOY. 


TITLES  OF  GUN'S  CEEW  ON 
LEFT  SIDE  OF  GUN. 

GUN 

Nos, 

TITLES  OP  GUN'S  CREW  ON 
EIGHT  SIDE  OF  GUN. 

AEMS. 

SWORDS. 

| 

i 

1 

i 
i 

2 

CO 

£ 
1 

1 

i 
£ 

i 
i 

t 

w 
m 

a 
i 

i 

2 

III  ,-4  M  |  |  |  BATTLE-AXES. 

1st  Loader   2  B 

8 

4 

1st  Sponger  and  Pikeman. 

1 

1 
1 

3 

2d  Ldr.,  Shot.,  and  Pump. 

5 
1 

G 

2 

2d  Sponger,  Fireman.  .  .  . 

2d    Captain,    Handspike., 
Train-tackle.,  IB  

Total  number  of  Arms. 

2 

STATIONS  AND  ARMS  OF  MASTER'S  DIVISION. 


25 


SMALL  ARMS  OF  MASTER'S  DIVISION. 


STATIONS. 

KATINGS. 

ARMS. 

Pistol  and  Sword. 

Wheel 

Quartermaster  and  Seamen. 

do.            do. 

Quartermaster  

do.            do. 

Pikes. 

Relieving  Tackles 

Quartermaster  and  0.  S.  .  .  . 

Swords. 

GAG 

Pistol  and  Sword. 

B.  M  

Pistol,  sword,  and  Battle-axe. 

do                            

Seamen  and  0.  S  

Pikes  and  Battle-axes. 

do             do  

Muskets. 

C   F  

Pistol  and  Sword. 

Bell              

S.  C  

do.             do. 

102.  The  Captain  will  designate  the  different  hatchways  which  shall  be 
used  by  the  Boarders  and  others  from  each  gun  when  they  are  called  upon 
deck  at  quarters.     Cutlasses  should  not  be  drawn  nor  bayonets  fixed  until 
ordered,  and,  in  moving  from  one  part  of  the  deck  to  another,  should  be 
sheathed,  to  avoid  accidents. 

103.  The  use  of  fire-arms  in  the  tops  being  dangerous,  and  only  admissible 
under  very  peculiar  circumstances,  they  are  never  to  be  used  there  without 
the  express  direction  of  the  Captain. 

NOTE. — It  is  proposed  to  abandon  the  pike  and  all  muzzle-loading  small  arms  for  a 
breech-loading  carbine  and  pistol,  with  one  uniform  metallic  cartridge  for  both. 

The  revolver  pistol  does  not  realize  in  service  with  seamen  the  advantages  claimed 
for  that  description  of  arm. 


26  DUTIES  AT   QUARTERS,   IN  BATTLE   OR  EXERCISE. 


CHAPTEE   III. 

DUTIES  AT  QUARTERS,  IN  BATTLE  OR  EXERCISE. 


CAPTAIN. 

104.  THE  CAPTAIN,  when  at  general  quarters,  either  for  exercise  or  in 
action,  is  to  superintend  and  take  the  general  direction  of  every  thing  con 
nected  with  the  management  of  the  ship  and  the  service  of  her  armament. 

105.  He  will  from  time  to  time  carefully  inspect  the  ship,  in  order,  before 
commencing  a  general  exercise,  to  ascertain  that  all  the  required  and  proper 
preparations  have  been  made  for  battle.     When  time  and  other  circum 
stances  will  permit,  he  will  always  make  this  inspection  before  going  into 
action,  and  when  prevented  from  making  it  personally,  he  will  direct  it  to  be 
made  by  the  Executive  Officer. 

106.  When  engaged  with  an  enemy  at  so  great  a  distance  as  to  require 
the  guns  to  be  elevated,  he  will,  if  practicable,  cause  the  distance  to  be  ascer 
tained  by  observation,  and,  when  that  cannot  be  done,   will  estimate  the 
distance,  and  from  time  to  time  send  directions  to  the  Officers  of  gun  divisions 
for  what  distances  the  sights  of  their  guns  should  be  set,  and  the  nature  of 
the  projectile,  and,  if  a  shell  be  used,  the  time  of  the  fuze  (See  Article  326), 
and  also  the  cartridges  to  be  used,  whether  for  "  distant,"  "  ordinary,"  or 
"  near"  firing. 

107*  He  will  determine  and  direct  when  two  shot  may  be  fired ;  when 
"  quick-firing"  may  be  permitted ;  when  small  arms  shall  be  distributed  and 
loaded ;  when  Boarders  shall  be  called  up,  and  when  they  shall  assail  an 
enemy.  He  will  receive,  through  the  Executive  Officer,  the  reports  from  all 
Officers  commanding  divisions. 


EXECUTIVE  AND   SIGNAL   OFFICER— MASTER'S  DIVISION.         27 


EXECUTIVE    OFFICER. 

108.  The  EXECUTIVE  OFFICER,  under  the  direction  of  the  Captain,  and 
with  the  aid  of  the  Master,  will  work  the  ship  when  in  action  or  at  general 
quarters.     He  will  receive  the  reports  of  the  officers  of  the  different  divisions 
and  others,  and  communicate  them  to  the  Captain  of  the  ship. 

SIGNAL  OFFICER. 

109.  The  SIGNAL  OFFICER  is  to  see  that  every  thing  is  prepared   for 
making  and  answering  signals  promptly,  and  will  make  all  such  as  the  Cap 
tain  may  direct.     He  will  provide  himself  with  a  watch,  pencil,  and  signal 
note-book  properly  ruled. 

110.  He  will  note  and  report  to  the  Captain  all  signals  that  arc  made  to 
or  by  other  vessels  of  the  squadron,  or  other  vessels  in  sight,  and  also  note 
the  time  at  which  each  signal  was  made.     He  will  observe  and  report  any 
material  change  which  may  take  place  in  the  positions  of  the  vessels  of  the 
squadron,  or  of  other  vessels,  and  every  event  of  moment  that  may  occur. 


MASTER'S   DIVISION. 

111.  The  MASTER  will  cause  the  persons  in  his  division  to  sling  the  yards 
and  gaffs,  to  stopper  the  topsail  sheets,  to  lead  out  the  preventer  and  other 
braces,  and  will  see  that  they  are  clear,  and  toggled,  to  prevent  them  from 
unreeving. 

112.  He  will  have  the  fighting  stoppers  at  hand  in  the  chains  and  tops 
for  stoppering  the  rigging ;    hatchets  and  axes  ready  for  clearing  away  any 
casual   encumbrances  from  the  guns;    axes  and  hatchets  for  this  purpose 
must  be  sharpened,  covered  with  painted  canvas,  and  labelled  "  not  for  gen 
eral  use ;"  and  will  cause  proper  arrangements  to  be  made  for  applying  and 
securing  grapnels,  if  they  should  be  required. 

113.  He  will  sec  that  the  hammocks  are  compactly  stowed,  covered,  and 
stopped  down,  and  will  cause  the  boat  and  boom  covers  to  be  hauled  over 
and  securely  stopped  down ;    the  relieving  tackles  to  be  hooked  and  ready 
for  use ;  a  compass  to  be  placed  to  steer  by ;  and  see  the  spare  tiller  at  hand, 
the  chronometer  and  other  instruments  put  out  of  the  reach  of  shot,  and 
relieved  as  much  as  possible  from  the  jar  of  the.  guns. 

114.  In  case  the  Captain  should  give  orders  for  sending  small  arms  and 
ammunition  into  the  tops,  he  will  attend  to  having  them  sent  there,  and  will 
be  watchful  that  they  are  not  so  used  as  to  expose  the  sails  and  rigging  to 
danger  from  taking  fire ;  and  in  order  to  furnish  a  sufficient  supply  of  water, 
in  case  of  accident,  he  will  have  four  fire-buckets  fitted  for  each  top,  with 

3 


28  DUTIES  AT  QUARTERS,    IN  BATTLE   OR  EXERCISE. 


lanyards  long  enough  to  rca^h  the  water  from  the  yard-arms,  and  these 
should  be  filled  with  water  in  preparing  for  action. 

115.  On  the  probability  of  an  engagement,  when  the  ship  is  on  soundings, 
the  Master  will  have  the  ground-tackling  ready  and  clear;  "boats  ready  for 
getting  out,  and  every  preparation  made  for  towing,  warping,  anchoring, 
and  getting  springs  upon  the  cables ;  and  have  leads  and  lines  in  the  chains. 
If  at  anchor,  he  will  have  the  boats  dropped  astern,  the  oars  secured  to  the 
thwarts,  and,  if  directed,  have  the  plugs  ready  to  be  taken  out  that  the  boats 
may  fill,  and  also  cause  the  spare  spars  to  be  put  overboard. 

116.  Whenever  the  cables  are  bent,  they  shall  be  kept  stoppered  until 
wanted  for  use. 

117.  In  action,  besides  aiding  the  Executive  Officer  in  working  ship,  the 
Master  is  to  pay  special  attention  to  the  steerage  of  the  vessel,  and  to  the 
rigging,  sails,  and  spars,  and  will  see  that  the  stoppers  are  properly  applied, 
and  damages  repaired  as  speedily  as  possible. 

In  vessels  where  there  is  no  Signal  Officer,  the  Master,  in  action  or  general 
exercise,  may  be  directed  to  perform  the  duties  of  Signal  Officer. 

118.  The  Boatswain  being  the  assistant  of  the  Master,  is  to  see  that  the 
rigging,  especially  forward,  is  kept  clear,  and  that  all  damages  are  promptly 
reported  and  repaired.     In  the  absence  of  the  Master,  all  the  above  prepara 
tions  will  be  at  once  made  by  the  Boatswain,  and  reported  to  the  Executive 
Officer  by  him. 

ENGINEER'S  DIVISION. 

119.  The  CHIEF  ENGINEER  will  see  all  proper  preparations   made  for 
repairing  damages  to  the  engine  and  its  dependencies,  and  will  have  the 
apparatus  for  extinguishing  fire  ready  for  immediate  use.     As  soon  as  these 
preparations  are  fully  made,  and  his  men  mustered,  he  will  report  his  division 
ready  to  the  Executive  Officer.     He  will  also  report  such  damages  as  may 
be  received  in  action,  and  what  assistance  is  required  to  repair  them,  and 
he  will  have  charge  of  the  preparations  made  for  extinguishing  fires  below. 


POWDER  DIVISION. 

120.  The  Officer  commanding  this  division,  when  called  to  quarters  for 
general  exercise  or  action,  will  receive  from  the  Captain  the  keys  of  the  mag 
azines  and  shell-rooms,  and  of  their  respective  water-cocks,  and  will  deliver 
them  to  the  persons  in  charge,  who  are  not  to  open  them  without  his  special 
order. 

121,  He  will  have  the  fire-screens  let  down,  and  the  light-rooms  and  the 
deck  under  his  charge  lighted. 


OFFICER   OF  POWDER  DIVISION.  20 


122.  He  will  see  that  the  shot  and  shell  whips  are  in  place  and  in  work 
ing   order,    and   that   shot-troughs   are  placed   for  conveying   shot  where 
required ;  that  the  Gunner  and  his  Mates  at  the  magazine  hatches  and  scut 
tles,  and  the  persons  stationed  at  the  shell-room  scuttles,  are  ready  to  open 
them  when  the  order  is  given. 

123.  That  all  the  precautions  mentioned  in  the  duties  of  Gunner  and  Car 
penter  have  been  taken  against  fire,  namely :  that  the  division-tubs  are  filled 
with  water,  and  that  wet  swabs  are  placed  by  them,  and  under  all  the  lower 
scuttles  through  which  passing-boxes  are  returned ;    that  a  fire-tub  is  placed 
at  the  bottom  of  each  chute  for  the  return  of  empty  boxes ;  that  it  is  nearly 
filled  with  water,  and  has  its  wire  grating  shipped ;  that  a  proper  supply  of 
fresh  water  is  provided  for  the  use  of  the  men  ;    that  the  hatchways  of  the 
decks  next  above  that  on  which  the  Powder  Division  is  stationed  are  prop 
erly  covered  ;   that  the  air-ports  are  closed  and  secured ;    and  that  the  hose 
is  screwed  to  the  force-pumps  and  ready  for  use. 

124.  He  is  to  see  that  the  means  which  are  provided  for  lowering  the 
wounded  are  ready  and  properly  fitted,  and  that  the  wounded,  when  lowered 
down,  are  conveyed  to  the  part  of  the  vessel  set  apart  for  the  Surgeon's 
Division,  by  the  persons  detailed  for  that  purpose. 

125.  He  will  also  see  that  all  obstructions  to  the  safe  and  rapid  passage 
of  powder,   shot,  and  shells  are  removed ;  and  when  every  preparation  for 
action  has  been  made  in  his  division,  will  report  it  ready  to  the  Executive 
Officer. 

126.  When  the  order  is  given  from  the  Captain  to  open  the  magazines, 
shell-rooms,  and  scuttles,  he  will  direct  the  Gunner  and  Gunner's  Mate  to 
repair  to  their  respective  scuttles,  put  on  their  magazine  dresses  and  shoes, 
divest  themselves  of  every  article  of  metal,  and  see  that  the  men  stationed 
with  them  do  the  same  ;    they  are  also  to  see  that  wet  swabs  and  cans  of 
fresh  water  arc  provided. 

127.  The  magazines  being  opened,  the  lids  of  the  tanks  are  not  to  be 
unscrewed  until  orders  are  given  to  that  effect.     Then  the  Gunner  and  his 
Mate,  and  their  assistants  in  their  respective  magazines,  will  open  as  many, 
and  no  more,  tanks  than  are  necessary  to  supply  charges  of  the  kind  ordered, 
which  they  will  pass  up  to  the  men  stationed  on  the  deck  above  to  receive 
them.     These  men  will  be  particularly  careful  to  observe  the  orders  trans 
mitted  from  time  to  time,  designating  the  kind  of  charges  required  at  the 
guns. 

128.  While  at  general  quarters  he  will  see  that  the  men  preserve  their 
proper  stations  in  silence,  order,  and  coolness ;  and  he  will  give  particular 
attention  to  the  sufficient  and  correct  supply  of  powder  and  projectiles  to 
the  various  divisions,  and  take  care  that  in  time  of  action,  or  of  exercise  with 


30  DUTIES   AT   QUAKTERS,    IN   BATTLE   OB  EXERCISE. 

powder,  the  passing-boxes,  after  being  once  taken  out  of  the  magazine,  are 
not  passed  into  it  again,  or  even  inside  of  the  screen,  during  the  whole  of 
such  action  or  exercise.  These  duties  are  of  the  highest  importance. 

129*  In  exercise  where  no  powder  is  used,  he  will  see  that  such  substi 
tutes  for  the  various  charges  as  the  Captain  may  direct  are  passed  up  in 
their  proper  boxes,  so  that  the  number  of  rounds  and  the  kind  of  charge, 
whether  "  distant,"  "  ordinary,"  or  "  near,"  may  be  ascertained,  and  com 
pared  with  those  ordered.  Should  any  defect  or  deficiency  in  the  arrange 
ment  for  giving  a  full  supply  to  the  guns  be  discovered,  it  is  to  be  reported 
immediately  to  the  Captain,  in  order  that  a  remedy  may  be  applied  as 
speedily  as  possible,  by  additional  men  or  other  proper  means. 

130.  The  Carpenter  will  see  that  the  hatches  on  the  deck  next  above 
the  berth-deck  or  orlop  are  properly  covered  with  gratings  and  tarpaulins, 
and  that  the  air-ports  are  closed  and  secured. 

131.  He  will  then  cause  all  the  pumps  to  be  rigged,  namely,  the  main 
pumps,  for  freeing  the  ship   in  case  of   leaks,  and  the  force  and  channel 
pumps.     He  will  have  the  engine  also  rigged  and  filled  to   supply  water  for 
extinguishing  fire. 

132.  He  will  attend  particularly  to  the  preparations  for  stopping  shot- 
holes,  and  see  that  all  the  articles  enumerated  in  his  general  duties  (Article 
59)  are  distributed  among  his  mates  and  crew. 

133*  He  will,  when  directed,  cause  the  cabin  and  other  bulkheads  to  be 
taken  down,  and  every  other  obstruction  removed  which  comes  within  his 
department,  that  may  interfere  with  the  working  of  the  guns  or  the  passage 
of  ammunition;  and  having  performed  this  service,  will  report  to  that 
effect  to  the  Officers  of  the  Divisions  in  which  such  obstructions  existed. 

134.  When  these  preparations  are  completed,  he  will  see  that  the  men 
under  his  direction  are  in  their  proper  stations,  and,  when  all  their  pre 
paratory  duties   have   been   performed,  will   so    report   to   the   Executive 
Officer,  and  to  the  Officer  commanding  the  Powder  Division  what  relates  to 
that  division. 

135.  During  an  action  the  Carpenter  will  attend  the  pumps,  sound  the 
well  frequently,  and,  should  he  discover  indications  of  serious  injury  below 
the  water-line,  will  immediately  make  them  known  personally,  either  to  the 
Captain  or  to  the  Executive  Officer,  and  to  them  only. 

136.  During  an  action,  such  of  the  Carpenter's  crew  as  are  stationed  in 
the  wings,  or  on  the  orlop,  in  line-of-battle  ships,  or  on  the  berth-deck  in 
other  vessels,  will  be  constantly  on  the  look-out  for  shot-holes. 

When  a  shot  enters  they  are  to  make  its  position  known  by  reference 
to  the  numbers  of  the  ports  under  or  near  which  the  hole  is  found,  and  its 


OFFICERS  OF  DIVISIONS  OF  GUNS.  31 

distance  below  or  above  the  water-line,  as  shown  by  the  interior  line  cor 
responding  to  it,  already  described  in  the  general  duties  of  the  Carpenter 
(Article  60) ;  and  are  also  to  apply  promptly  such  remedy  themselves  as 
may  be  in  their  power. 

137.  The  MASTER-AT-ARMS,  assisted  by  the  Ship's  Corporals,  will  see  the 
galley  fire  and  all  unauthorized  lights  put  out ;  that  the  lamps  are  in  their 
places,  properly  trimmed  and  lighted ;  and  that  the  lenses  and  reflectors 
are  cleaned  and  polished. 

After  the  magazines  have  been  swept,  closed,  and  secured,  and  the  retreat 
has  been  beaten,  the  Master-at-arms  will  see  that  the  lights  in  the  light- 
rooms  are  extinguished,  and  apply  to  the  Executive  Officer  for  permission 
to  renew  the  usual  lights  and  fires. 


SURGEON'S  DIVISION. 

138.  The  SURGEON  or  senior  Medical  Officer  will  see  that  all  necessary 
preparations  are  made  for  the  reception  and  treatment  of  the  wounded,  in 
the  part  of  the  ship  which  may  have  been  set  apart  by  the  Captain  for  that 
purpose,  and  report  to  the  Executive  Officer  when  such  preparations  are 
completed. 

139.  He  will  cause  a  sufficient  number  of  tourniquets,  or  temporary 
substitutes  for  them,  to  be  distributed  to   such  men  of  the   different  divi 
sions,  and  in  each  top,  as  may  be  appointed  to  receive  them  ;  and  he  will 
take  care  that  the  persons  in  his  division,  and  such  others  as  the  Captain 
may  direct,  are  instructed  in  the  use  of   tourniquets,  to  prevent,  as  far  as 
possible,  any  dangerous  loss  of  blood  before  the  Surgeon  or  his  Assistants 
can  attend  to  wounded  men. 


OFFICERS    COMMANDING  DIVISIONS  OF   GUNS. 

140.  Each  Officer  Commanding  a  Division  of  Guns  is  to  see  that  all  per 
sons  belonging  to  it  are  present ;   that  all  the  prescribed  arrangements  are 
duly  and  promptly  made ;    that  every  article  designated  for  use  in  the  divi 
sion  is  in  order  arid  in  place ;   that  the  decks  arc  wet  and  well  sanded ;    that 
the  hand-swabs  at  the  guns  arc  wet ;    and  that  any  small  arms  that  may  be 
distributed  among  the  men  of  his  division  are  properly  loaded  at  the  time 
directed  by  the  Captain. 

141.  In  action  he  will  cause  the  wounded  of  his  division  to  be  promptly 
and  properly  conveyed  to  the  Surgeon,  but  will  see  that  no  man  leaves  his 
quarters    on    pretence    of   assisting   the    wounded.       Four   men,    "aids    to 
wounded,"  should  be  attached  to  each  Division  of  Guns,  so  as  not  to  take 
men  from  guns  for  that  purpose. 


32  DUTIES  AT   QUARTERS,    IN  BATTLE   OR  EXERCISE. 

142.  On  the  lower  deck  of  line-of-battle  ships,  or  the  main  deck  of  frigates 
and  spar-deck  of  single-deck  vessels,  he  will  see  the  hatchways  in  the  range 
of  his-  division  properly  covered  by  the  Carpenter's  crew,  assisted  by  the 
handspikeraen  or  compressor-men  of  the  nearest  guns,  and  the  scuttles  and 
whips  duly  prepared  for  passing  powder,  shot,  and  shells. 

143.  He  will  be  particularly  careful  to  prevent  the  men  from  loading  the; 
guns  improperly,  or   otherwise  than  may  be  specially  ordered,  and  will  pre 
vent  any  unnecessary  noise. 

144.  He  will  see  that  the  guns  are  very  carefully  pointed  and  properly 
aimed ;   that  there  is  no  firing  until   correct  sight  can  be  obtained,  as  ran 
dom  firing  is  not  only  a  waste  of  ammunition,  but  it  encourages  an  enemy, 
when  he  sees  shot  and  shell  falling. harmlessly  about  and  beyond  him. 

He  will  carefully  impress  upon  the  Captains  of  guns  that  there  is  no 
excuse  for  several  successive  bad  shots,  as  observation  of  the  first  or  second 
will  surely  indicate  an  erroneous  estimate  of  distance,  and  afford  means  of 
correcting  it.  Accuracy  of  fire  is  to  be  encouraged  rather  than  rapidity. 

It  is  essential  to  rapidity  and  accuracy  of  fire,  particularly  on  covered 
decks,  that  the  Division  Officers  shall  keep  the  Gun  Captains  constantly 
advised  of  the  position  and  distance  of  the  object. 

145.  He  will  also  take  care  to  prevent  confusion  at  the  powder-scuttles  in 
the  range  of  his  division,  and  that  all  orders  which  require  to  be  repeated 
are  duly  passed.     In  case  of  accident  to  the  Powder-passers,  he  will  promptly 
supply  their  places  by  such  men  as  can  be  best  spared  from  his  division. 

146.  He  will  take  care  that  each  gun  in  his  division  is  provided  with  all 
the    "Equipments  and  Implements"    prescribed  for  its  use;    and  that  the 
"  spare"  articles  which  may  be  required  in  his  division   in   action   are  in 
place.— (Article  148.) 

147.  He  will  report  to  the  Executive  Officer  when  all  preparations  have 
been  made  for  action ;    and  also  after  action  and  exercise,  when  the  guns 
have  been  properly  secured,  and  the  stores  and  implements  belonging  to  his 
division  have  been  returned  to  their  places. 


EQUIPMENTS  AND   IMPLEMENTS. 


EQUIPMENTS  AND  IMPLEMENTS. 

148.  Those  for  broadside-guns,  whether  mounted  on  two  or  four  truck 
carriages,  or  on  slides,  are  to  be  as  follows,  viz. : 


WHERE  THEY  ABE  TO  BE  PUT  WHEN  THE  GUN  is 

SECTUED. 


Carriage  complete,  with  bed  and  quoin,  or 
elevating  screw 

Breeching  with  shackle-bolts  and  pins. . . 

Compressors  and  levers,  pivot-bolt  and 
housing-chock,  for  Friction  Carriages . . 

Two  side-tackles  . . 


One  train-tackle. 


Two  handspikes1. 


One  tompion  with  lanyard  and  wad 

One  sponge  and  cap3 


One  rammer5. 


One  lock  with  string  and  vent-plug  com 
plete,  with  cover  and  strap 

One  breech-sight  with  cover 

One  reinforce-sight  with  cover 

One  priming- wire  and  one  boring-bit,  with 
beckets  for  the  wrist. 

One  fire-bucket  with  lanyard 


One  bucket  of  prepared  grease  or  oil  for 
rifle  cannon 

One  battle-lantern,  with  candle  or  lamp 
trimmed  and  primed,  but  provided  for 
gun-decks  only;  none  for  spar-decks. 

Battle-axes  (as  prescribed  according  to  the 
number  of  men  at  gun). — See  Art.  101 . 

One  hand-swab 

One  deck-bucket  and  large  swab 

Two  chocking-quoins  for  truck-carriages . 

Two  lanyards  for  each  half  port 

Lanyards,  chain  pendents,  runners  and 
tackles  for  tricing  up,  and  bars  and 
keys  for  securing  lower  deck  ports. . .  . 

Ten  shot  for  shot-guns 

For  shell-guns,  one  shell  in  its  box 


Ten  selvagee  wads  for  shot  and  shell  guns. 
Two  housing-chocks  for  lower  deck  guns . 


At  its  port. 
At  the  gun. 

Do. 
Hooked   to   the   securing-bolts  on  each 

side  of  tho  port  and  to  the  carriage. 
Hooked  to  tho  secunng-bolts  in  the  side, 

with  tho  parts  of  the  fall  round  the 

breech  of  the  gun. 
Resting  on   the   bed-bolt,  in-board  ends 

secured  by  beckets. 
In  the  muzzle  of  the  gun. 
On  the  beam  or  carling  over  the  right  side 

of  the  gun  (on  movable  brackets). 
On  tho  beam  or  carling  over  the  left  side 

of  the  gun  (on  movable  brackets). 

In  place  on  the  gun. 
Do. 
Do. 
Inside  of  the  brackets  of  the  carriage, 

near  the  breech. 

On  gun-decks,  close  to  the  side,  near  the 
beam  over  the  gun ;  on  spar-decks, 
round  the  capstan  and  tho  boats  for 
ward. 

On  the  breast-piece. 

In  the  fire-buckets.  Tho  candle  in  sup 
ply  box. 

Inside  of  the  brackets. 

On  the  breast-piece  of  tho  carriage. 

To  be  kept  in  tho  hold  until  wanted. 

When  not  in  use,  between  the  brackets 

and  the  bed. 
In  place. 


In  place. 

In  racks  round  hatches  nearest  the  gun. 

Between  the  trucks  on  tho  left  side  of  the 

gun. 
On  the  breast-piece  of  tho  carriage,  strung 

on  a  pin. 
Placed  before  tho  front  trucks  when  the 

gun  is  run  in  for  housing. 


1  Marsilly  carriages  require  a  roller  handspike  each. 

2  The  rammers  and  sponges  belonging  to  the  broadside-guns  of  spar-deck  divisions  of  all  ships  having 
topgallant  forecastles,  or  other  light  decks,  may  be  kept  under  the  forecastle  or  light  dock  when  not  in 
use.     In  shins  not  provided  with  thesu  decks  they  aro  to  be  kept  at  the  guns  insi'la  the  brackets;  or.  if 
that  cannot  be  done,  triced  up  overhead  on  tho  next  deck  below. 


34  DUTIES  AT  QUARTERS,   IN  BATTLE  OR  EXERCISE. 

149.  He  will  also  assure  himself  that  the  following  articles,  which  may  be 
required,  are  in  readiness  in  his  division,  and   prepared  for  use,  namely: 
One  rattle  for  calling  Boarders ;    one  division-tub  for  fresh  water ;   one  spare 
bed  and  quoin  for  carriages  requiring  them;    two  spare  gun-trucks;   four 
spare  handspikes ;    one  worm ;    one  scraper ;    one  bristle  sponge  for  cleaning 
guns;    two  spare  breechings;    four  swabs,  and,  if  any  of  the  guns  be  on 
slides,  a  spare  pivot-bolt.     Of  these  articles  the  worm,  scraper,  sponge,  and 
spare  breechings1  are  to  be  becketed  up  between  the  beams  and  carlings  on 
the  gun-decks  as  far  as  practicable,  and  those  which  cannot  be  so  placed 
will  be  kept  at  hand  in  the  storeroom  or  other  convenient  place.      A  ladle  is 
supplied  for  each  calibre  on  board,  and  will  be  kept  ready  in  such  place  as 
may  be  designated  by  the  Executive  Officer. 

The  above  allowance  of  articles  designated  as  "  spare,"  including  worm, 
scraper,  sponge,  and  swabs,  is  upon  the  supposition  that  each  division  is 
composed  of  five  guns  and  their  opposites.  In  case  the  number  of  guns 
should  be  either  more  or  less,  the  articles  will  be  increased  or  diminished 
proportionally  to  the  nearest  whole  number. 

150.  He  will  take  care  that  the  Quarter  Gunners  of  his  division  keep  the 
two    division-boxes   marked  "  supply"   and   "  reserve"   constantly   provided 
with  the  following  articles,  all  in  good  order,  viz. : 

The  "  Supply"  box  with  a  waist-belt  for  each  Boarder,  Pikeman,  Fireman, 
Sail-trimmer,  and  Pumpman ;  a  primed  candle  for  each  battle-lantern ;  a 
thumbstall  and  vent-guard  for  the  1st  and  2d  Captains  of  each  gun.  The 
belts  of  Boarders  to  be  furnished  with  a  frog  for  a  pistol,  with  its  cartridges 
and  percussion-caps;  those  of  1st  and  2d  Captains  of  guns  with  a  box  con 
taining  fifty  primers  fitted  to  slip  on  the  waist-belt.  Those  for  Firemen, 
Sail-trimmers,  and  Pumpmen  to  have  each  a  frog  for  the  battle-axe. 

The  "Reserve"  box  with  one  drill-brace;  three  vent-drills;  one  vent- 
punch;  two  gun-locks  and  strings  complete;  a  flask  of  priming-powder; 
two  boring-bits ;  three  priming-wires ;  eight  thumbstalls  ;  four  boxes  of  per 
cussion-primers  ;  one  box  of  friction-primers ;  one  spare  lock-string  for  each 
gun,  and  one  fuze-wrench ;  a  shackle-punch  and  pin,  and  some  rags  for 
wiping.  These  boxes  are  to  be  placed  by  the  Quarter  Gunners  in  their 
respective  divisions,  near  the  mast,  and  on  the  opposite  side  to  that  engaged. 

In  vessels  of  the  class  of  Frigates  and  upward,  these  boxes  are  to  be,  on 
covered  decks,  kept  in  their  several  divisions  and  secured  overhead. 

On  spar-decks  they  are  to  be  kept  under  the  break  of  the  poop  and  the 
topgallant  forecastle,  and,  in  vessels  having  neither  poop  nor  topgallant  fore 
castle,  between  the  beams  on  the  berth-deck.  They  will  be  kept  under  lock 
and  key. 

1  The  spare  breechings  should  never  be  stowed  near  the  galley  nor  Engine-room,  lest, 
they  be  damaged  by  heat  and  moisture. 


STATIONS  AND   GUN-NUMBERS. 


or 

«->cl 


151.  He  will  see  that  such  men  of  the  divisions,  and  others  who  are 
appointed  for  the  purpose,  obtain  the  requisite  number  of  tourniquets,  and 
distribute  them  to  the  men  selected  to  use  them.  (See  Article  139.) 


BEOADSIDE  GUNS. 

STATIONS  AND  GUN-NUMBERS. 

152,  The  following  are  to  be  the  gun-numbers  and  stations  for  a  gun's 
crew  composed  of  sixteen  Men  and  a  Powclcrman,  when  working  broadside- 
guns  on  lower  decks;  on  other  decks  15  and  16  are  3d  and  4th  Side- 
Tacklemen. 


LEFT  SIDE. 

GUN-NOS. 

RIGHT  BIDE. 

First  Loader  

3 

5 
7 
0 
13 
15 
11 
1 

4 
C 
8 
10 
14 
16 
12 

2 

First  Sponger. 
Second  Sponger. 
Second  Shcllrnan. 
Second  Handspikeman. 
Second  Side-Tackleman. 
Second  Port-Tackletnan. 
Second  Train-Tackleman. 
Second  Captain. 

Second  Lender                       

First  Shellman     

First  llandspikeman                     .  . 

First  Side-Tackleman  

First  Port-Taekleinan 

First  Train  -Tackleinan    

First  Captain 

Powderman  near  the  midships,  and  on  the  left  of  the  gun. 

For  a  gun's  crew  of  fourteen  men  and  a  Powder-boy,  or  of  twelve  men, 
the  higher  numbers  are  those  to  be  omitted,  and  the  stations  and  duties  of 
all  the  others  remain  unchanged. 

With  a  gun's  crew  of  ten  men,  all  the  numbers  continue  with  the  same 
stations  and  duties  excepting  No.  10,  who  becomes  Train-Tackleman,  and 
the  2d  Captain  handles  the  handspike. 

With  a  gun's  crew  of  eight  men,  numbers  from  1  to  V  inclusive  retain  the 
same  stations  and  duties;  No.  2  will,  in  addition  to  his  duties  as  2d  Captain, 
also  attend  to  the  handspike,  and  No.  8  becomes  Train-Tackleman. 

With  a  gun's  crew  of  six  men,  all  the  numbers  retain  the  same  stations 
and  duties,  excepting  that  No.  5  also  acts  as  Shotman,  and  No.  2  attends 
to  the  handspike  and  train-tackle  in  addition  to  the  duties  of  2d  Captain. 

153.  This  arrangement  exhibits  the  gun's  crew  placed  as  the  men  should 
stand  when  first  assembled  at  quarters,  either  for  inspection  or  any  ordinary 
exercise.  It  is  intended  that  the  men  are  then  to  stand  parallel  with  the 
gun,  and  facing  in-board. 


36  DUTIES  AT  QUARTERS,    IN  BATTLE   OR  EXERCISE. 


CALLS  FOR  ASSEMBLING  AT  QUARTERS. 
154, 

BEATS    OF    DRUM. 

1st.  THE  ORDINARY  BEAT  will  be  the  call  for  INSPECTION  at  general 
quarters. 

2d.  The  ORDINARY  BEAT,  preceded  by  ONE  ROLL — EXERCISE  at  general 
quarters,  without  powder. 

3d.  The  BEAT  QUICK — ACTION;  or  EXERCISE  at  general  quarters  with 
powder,  as  though  engaged  in  BATTLE. 

4th.  WHEN  AT  QUARTERS,  a  roll  of  the  drum  will  be  a  signal  for  "  SILENCE 
AND  ATTENTION  !"  All  firing  or  other  noise  will  immediately  cease,  and  the 
next  order  be  awaited  in  perfect  silence.  It  is  of  the  utmost  importance 
to  impress  this  upon  the  officers  and  crew. 

5th.  When  the  Captain  is  satisfied  that  his  order  has  been  delivered  and 
understood,  he  will  order  TWO  TAPS  to  be  beaten,  as  a  signal  for  the  "  EXE 
CUTION  OF  THE  ORDER."  The  roll  and  the  taps  to  be  given  sharply  and  dis 
tinctly. 

155,  On  assembling  at  quarters  for  inspection  or  general  exercise,  unless 
directed  otherwise,  in  port,  the  men  are  first  to  go  to  the  starboard  guns  on 
the  spar-deck,  the  port  guns  on  the  main  deck,  the  starboard  guns  on  the 
next  deck  below,  and  so  on.     At  sea  they  are  first  to  go  to  the  weather 
guns,  or,  if  the  ship  be  dead  before  the  wind,  to  the  same  sides  as  in  port. 

156,  When  assembled  for  inspection,  besides  seeing  that  all  the  guns  and 
articles  belonging  to  them  are  in  order  and  in  place,  it  is  directed  that  the 
men,  without   arms  or  implements,  or  casting  loose  the  guns,  shall  be  fre 
quently  called  away  and  mustered  in  their  stations  as  Boarders,  Pikemen, 
Sail-trimmers,  and  Firemen  ;  and  also  practised  in  shifting  from  one  side  to 
the  other,  and  in  taking  their  places  for  fighting  both  sides  at  once. 

157,  On   assembling  for  exercise  at  general  quarters  without  powder, 
after  the  men  have  been  mustered  and  the  divisional  reports  made,  the  order 
will  be  given  :  "  CAST  LOOSE  AND  PROVIDE  !" 

Then  the  starboard  watch  will  provide  and  cast  loose  the  odd-numbered 
guns,  and  the  port  watch  will  provide  and  cast  loose  the  even-numbered 
guns. 

The  1st  parts  of  guns'  crews  on  the  starboard  side  providing  and  casting 
loose  the  starboard,  and  the  2d  parts  the  port  guns.  The  1st  p-arts  of  guns' 
crews  on  the  port  side  the  port,  and  the  Ud  parts  the  starboard  guns.  In 
securing  guns  the  same  order  of  distributing  the  men  is  to  be  observed. 

When  both  these  services  of  providing  and  casting  loose  have  been  per 
formed,  and  the  luffs  choked  or  hitched  and  trucks  chocked,  the  men  are  all 


PREPARATIONS   FOR  EXERCISE   AND   BATTLE.  37 


to  return  to  the  guns  at  which  they  were  mustered,  and,  taking  their  places, 
await  in  silence  further  orders,  if  not  already  given. 

158,  When  assembled  for  exercise  as  though  actually  engaged  in  battle, 
besides  what  is  prescribed  for  an  exercise  at  general  quarters  without  pow 
der,  the  further  preparations  indicated  hereafter  will  be  made.     The  guns' 
crews  will  proceed  at  once  to  provide  and  cast  loose  both  sides  without  wait 
ing  to  be  mustered,  or  for  any  further  orders. 

159,  The  call  for  BOARDERS  to  repair  to  the  spar-deck  will  be  by  the  rat 
tle  and  verbal  order,  repeated  by  the  Officer  of  each  division  of  guns.     They 
should  be  trained  to  form  promptly  on  the  opposite  side  to  that  engaged, 
near  the  hatch  by  which  they  ascend. 

On  the  first  call  or  order,  the  first  division  only  will  repair  to  the  spar- 
deck,  led  by  their  officers.  If  the  call  or  order  should  be  repeated  before 
the  first  division  shall  have  returned  to  their  guns,  the  second  division  will 
immediately  repair  to  the  spar-deck. 

160,  The  call  for  PIKEMEN  to   "repel  boarders"   will  be  by  sounding 
the  Gong.     At  this  signal  all  the  Pikemen  will  assemble  on  the  spar-deck 
with  their  muskets. 

161,  ALL  HANDS  will  be  summoned  to  repel  boarders  (See  Article  92) 
by  springing  the  rattles  and  sounding  the  gong  together,  and  by  verbal 
orders. 

162,  SAIL-TRIMMERS.     The  particular  division  that  may  be  wanted  at  a 
time  will  be  called  by  passing  the  word  for  it. 

163,  The   call  for  FIREMEN  to  repair  to   the    spar-deck  will  be   given 
verbally  and  by  striking  the  ship's  bell  rapidly.     The  rapid  ringing  of  the 
bell  will  be  the  FIRE-ALARM  at  all  times,  when  the  crew  will  immediately 
assemble  at  quarters. 

164,  Boarders,  Pikemen,  and  Sail-trimmers  of  the  spar-deck  guns,  or  any 
portion  of  them,  and  of  the  Master's  division,  as  well  as  the  Marines,  may 
be  ordered  from  their  quarters  to  perform  a  particular  service,  without  any 
call,  whenever  the  Captain  may  deem  proper. 

165,  Men  called  for  any  of  the  foregoing  duties  will,  on  reaching  the 
spar-deck,  form  on  the  gangway,  upon  the  side  not  engaged  with  the  enemy, 
unless  otherwise  directed  at  the  time. 

166,  When  called  to  quarters,  every  person  is  to  repair  to  his  station 
promptly  and  without  unnecessary  noise  ;  and  on  the  order,  "  to  your  quar 
ters,"  all  will  return  to  their  stations  in  the  same  manner. 


38  DUTIES  AT   QUARTERS,    IN   BATTLE    OR  EXERCISE. 


PREPARATIONS  FOR  EXERCISE  AT  GENERAL   QUARTERS, 

WITHOUT    POWDER. 

167.  Sling  the  topsail  yards  and  gaffs,  and  put  the  preventer  braces  in 
place  ;  distribute  fighting  stoppers  and  jiggers ;  stopper  the  clews  of  the  top 
sails  ;  get  whips  on  each  side  of  the  lower  masts  for  tricing  up  the  pendant 
tackles,  and  also  the  mast-bands  and  fishes  required  for  securing  a  crippled 
mast.  Make  arrangements  for  using  grapnels ;  get  hauling-lines  ready  for 
sending  small  arms  and  ammunition  into  the  tops ;  if  not  on  soundings,  haul 
over  boat  and  boom  covers  and  stop  them  down ;  bring  up  and  stow,  if  down, 
such  hammocks  as  interfere  with  the  guns,  or  are  in  the  way  of  the  powder 
division;1  haul  over  and  secure  the  hammock-cloths ;  hook  and  mouse  the 
relieving-tackles  ;  place  the  spare  tiller  and  compass  at  hand  ;  put  the  chro 
nometers,  and  other  instruments  of  navigation,  out  of  the  reach  of  shot ;  dis 
tribute  the  small  arms  together  with  their  accoutrements  and  a  supply  of 
filled  cartridges,  to  the  men  appointed  to  use  them ;  place  axes  and  hatchets 
at  hand  on  the  spar-deck  for  clearing  away  incumbrances  at  guns;  grapnels 
in  rnizzen  channels  with  whips  to  after-davits  and  spanker-boom  end,  to  hook 
up  any  gear  likely  to  foul  the  screw.  In  steam  vessels,  topgallant  masts  and 
rigging  ready  to  be  sent  down  and  all  unnecessary  gear  unrove. 

If  underway  and  on  soundings,  get  the  boats  ready  for  hoisting  out;  the 
ground-tackle  ready  for  use  and  keep  it  clear,  and  make  every  preparation 
for  towing,  warping,  and  anchoring  with  springs  on  cables ;  stopper  the 
chains;  get  lights  in  the  light-rooms,  including  those  of  the  shell-rooms; 
light  powder  division  ;  also  gun-decks,  if  at  night,  and  it  be  ordered  by  the 
Captain;  drop  magazine  screens  ;  get  shot  and  shell  whips,  and  buckets  or 
nets,  in  place ;  rig  canvas  chutes  for  returning  empty  passing-boxes  ;  remove 
every  obstruction  to  the  free  passage  of  powder ;  clear  away  and  open  shot- 
lockers  ;  see  the  hatchways  of  the  next  deck  above  the  powder  division 
properly  covered ;  division  and  fire-tubs  in  place,  with  wet  swabs  by  them, 
and  at  the  landing  of  each  line  of  scuttles  through  which  the  passing-boxes 
pass ;  rig  main,  force,  and  channel  pumps  and  fire-engine,  which  fill  with 
water ;  get  light  Jacob-ladders  and  slings  ready  for  lowering  the  Carpenters 
outside,  and  materials  for  stopping  shot-holes;  take  down  cabin  and  other 
bulkheads,  when  directed,  and  pass  them  below ;  sand  the  decks ;  place  a 
bucket  of  water  and  a  wet  swab  in  rear  of  each  gun,  and  for  all  rifle-guns  a 
bucket  of  oil  or  prepared  grease  ;  have  spare  brcechings  at  hand ;  rope  lad 
ders  for  hatchways  in  place ;  a  bag,  to  be  supplied  from  one  reserve-box, 
containing  a  flask  of  priming-powder  and  the  following  spare  articles :  two 

'The  Executive  Officer  of  the  ship  should  appoint  a  sufficient  number  of  men  in  each 
watch  for  the  purpose  of  stowing  the  hammocks  of  the  watch  below  in  case  of  being; 
called  to  quarters  in  the  night,  so  as  to  prevent  confusion  and  insure  the  greatest  possi 
ble  dispatch  in  clearing  for  action. 


PREPARATIONS   FOR   EXERCISE   AND   BATTLE.  39 

locks,  four  lock-strings,  eight  thumbstalls,  two  boring-bits,  two  priming- 
wires,  a  shackle-punch  and  pins  and  some  old  rags,  to  be  slung  round  the 
neck  of  the  Quarter  Gunner  of  each  division  of  guns  ;  rammers  and  sponges 
placed,  and  the  latter  uncapped ;  one  worm  in  place,  on  each  side  of  the 
deck,  for  each  division,  and  a  ladle  at  hand  for  each  calibre  on  board;  pis 
tols,  in  frogs  furnished  with  cartridges  and  caps,  and  cutlasses  and  battle- 
axes,  belted  round  the  respective  persons  designated  to  wear  them ;  marines 
accoutred  and  under  arms,  and  distributed  as  the  Captain  may  direct; 
tourniquets  to  be  distributed  as  may  be  judged  necessary.  (See  Articles  139 
and  151.) 

PREPARATIONS  FOR  EXERCISE  AT  GENERAL  QUARTERS, 

WITH    POWDER,    AS    THOUGH    ENGAGED    IN    BATTLE. 

168.  Crew  cast  loose  the  guns ;  shell-rooms  and  magazine  are  opened ; 
powder  and  shells  passed  up,  and  every  thing  ready  for  firing,  the  order  for 
which  is  awaited.     If  the  beat  is  followed  by  orders  from  the  qnarter-deck 
to  fire,  then  this  is  performed  as  soon  as  each  gun   is  ready.     In  this  case, 
besides   what   has  just   been   prescribed  for   a   General   Exercise  without 
powder,  the  following  further  preparations  will  be   made :     Put  out  galley 
fire  and  all  unauthorized  lights ;  light  match  and  place  it  in  manger ;  open 
magazines  and   powder-tanks,  and   also   shell-rooms,  when  ordered ;    close 
and   secure  air-ports  ;  fill  division  and  fire   tubs  with  fresh  water ;    place 
cans  of  fresh  water  and  wet  swabs  iu  magazines  and  shell-rooms ;  light  up 
the  cockpit,  or  other  place,  for  the  wounded ;  place  mattresses,  and  if  there 
be  room,  sling   spare   cots;    get  ready  the    amputating-tablc,   instruments 
bandages,  lint,  medicines  ;  have  a  plentiful  supply  of  fresh  water  and  swabs, 
and  sprinkle  the  decks.     Make  a  particular  examination  of  all  the  arrange 
ments  for  extinguishing  fire ;  see  that  force-pumps   and  hose   are  in  good 
order,  and  the  men  stationed  at  them  in  their  places. 

Speed  being  one  of  the  principal  elements  of  military  force,  steamers 
will,  on  going  into  action,  have  all  the  furnaces  clean,  and  the  fires  in  -condi 
tion  to  make  steam  rapidly. 

The  beat  to  quarters  for  action  is  therefore  a  signal  to  start  fires  in  any 
furnaces  not  in  use. 

PROVIDING  BROADSIDE-GUNS. 

169.  When  the  exercise  of  broadside-guns  is  to  be  confined  to  one  side 
only,  each  gun's  crew  is  to  provide  its  own  gun,  on  the  side  at  which  it  is 
ordered  to  assemble,  as  follows :  but  when  the  guns  on  both  sides  are  to  be 
exercised  at  once,  each  part  of  a  gun's  crew  is  to  provide  its  own  gun  ;  each 
Captain,  Loader,  Sponger,  &c.,  doing  separately  what  is  done  by  both  him 
self  and  his  second  when  the  exercise  is  confined  to  one  side  only. 


40  DUTIES  AT  QUARTERS,    IN  BATTLE  OR  EXERCISE. 

170.  Captains  of  guns  to  provide  themselves  with  percussion-primers, 
thumbstalls,  and  priming-wire,  and  to  see  that  the  men  of  their  respective 
parts  of  the  gun's  crew  discharge  their  several  duties  promptly  and  care 
fully. 

171 1  Spongers  provide  sponges  and  rammers. 

172.  Loaders  provide  a  bucket  of  water  and  a  wet  swab;  and,  for  rifle 
cannon,  a  pot  of  oil  or  prepared  grease. 

173.  Shell  or  shotmen  provide  a   sufficient  supply  of  selvagce  and  six 
junk-wads,  and  supply  the  racks  around  the  hatchways  with  shot  from  the 
lockers  as  required. 

174.  Handspikemen   see  the  handspikes   in   place,  and    then   assist  in 
getting  up  shot  for  the  guns ;  and,  if  necessary,  in   covering  hatchways  in 
the  division. 

175.  The  Powderman  or  Boy  is  to  provide  an   empty  passing-box,  if  no 
powder  is  to  be  used ;  otherwise  he  is  to  present  himself  at  the   appointed 
place  to  receive  a  full  one. 

176.  The  Fireman  is  to  take  down  the  fire-bucket,  and  place  it  and  the 
battle-lantern  in  their  appointed  places.     On  gun-decks  the   lantern  should 
be  hung  up  at  the  ship's  side,  or  in  rear  of  arid  between  the  guns,  as  may 
be  directed,  and  lighted  when  ordered  by  the  Captain,  and   the  fire-bucket 
directly  in  rear  of  the  gun.     On  spar-decks  the  bucket  may  be  laid  on  the 
deck,  or  hung  up  in  any  convenient  place  in  rear  of  and  near  the  gun. 

177.  Side-tacklemen  provide  sand  and  water,  and  sprinkle  and  sand  the 
decks,   if    directed ;    and    get   bucket  and   swab   from    the   hold,   fill  the 
bucket  with  water,  wet  the  sponge  and  the  swab,  and  lay  it  on  deck  under 
the  sponge. 

178.  Quarter  Gunners   of   divisions,   besides    equipping  themselves,  as 
already  directed  (Article  167),  with  a  bag  of  spare  implements,  will  attend 
to  the  "Supply"  and  "Reserve"  boxes  of  their  divisions  (See  Article  150), 
and  distribute  the  belts,  primer-boxes,  and  other  articles  which  they  con 
tain,  to  the  guns'  crews,  as  soon  as  practicable,  and   then   keep   themselves 
ready  to  furnish  any  reserved   or  spare   articles  which  may  be   required, 
such  as  spare  breechings,  ladles,  and  worms,  and  will  see  the  battle-lanterns 
provided  with  candles  with  primed  wicks,  ready  for  lighting  when  ordered 
by  the  Captain. 

179.  The  swords  and  pistols  should  be  always  available  for  the  Boarders, 
at  the  shortest  notice  ;   but  their  particular  disposition  at  quarters,  and  at 
what  time  the  pistols  shall  be  loaded,  will  be  determined  by  the  Captain,  as 
in  his  judo-ment  circumstances  at  the  time  may  require.     Pistols  should  be 
loaded,  on  the  probability  of  action,  without  further  orders. 


(  ST  E  AM  K'POMPANOOSUC*  CLASS. 

Passing  Powder. 


n  r 


Boiler 


1) 


II 


A.  Magazine.  E.   Dispensary. 

H.  Passage.  F.    Tanks. 

C.   Shell  Rooms  &  Chain  Lockers.       G.   Fore  Mast. 


1).  Passage 


H.  Hold. 


OF  HOLD. 


'Boiler 


Coal 


Coal 


S.S.S.    Scuttles 


J.FGedTiev.Wasti, 


DELIVERING  AND   DISTRIBUTING   POWDER.  41 


ARRANGEMENTS  FOR  DELIVERING  AND  DISTRIBUTING 

POWDER. 

180.  In  making  arrangements  to  deliver  and  distribute  powder  from  the 
magazines,  for  action,  the  following  general  considerations  and  rules  should 
govern : 

181.  Cartridges,  as  experience  proves,  can  be  passed  up  each  independent 
chain  of  scuttles  leading  from  the  magazine  to  the  point  at  which  the  Pow 
der-boys  are  to  receive  the  full  boxes,  at  the  rate  of  one  every  six  or  seven 
seconds. 

182.  Experience  also  proves  that,  under  the  most  favorable  circumstances, 
the  broadside-guns  of  a  man-of-war  cannot  be  advantageously  fired  oftener 
than  once  in  every  seventy-five  seconds. 

Hence  it  may  be  received  as  a  rule,  that  a  single  chain  of  passing-scuttles 
is  abundantly  sufficient  to  supply  powder  for  a  division  of  guns  as  large  even 
as  eight  of  a  side ;  and  that  it  is  also  sufficient  when  both  sides  of  such  a 
division  are  to  be  used  at  once,  for  then  the  firing  of  each  piece  is  unavoid 
ably  retarded  by  the  division  of  the  guns'  crews. 

183.  No  one  chain  of  scuttles  should  be  required  to  supply  cartridges  for 
more  than  a  single  description  of  guns,1  unless  their  cartridges  be  the  same  in 
diameter,  weight,  and  form,  and  their  passing-boxes  alike,  as  in  the  case  of  the 
8-inch  shell-gun  of  63  cwt.  and  the  32-pounder  of  5V  cwt.     If,  therefore,  there 
be  on  a  deck  of  guns  but  one  differing  from  the  rest  in  calibre,  class,  or 
assimilation  of  cartridges,  that  one  should  have  a  separate  chain  of  scuttles  for 
its  supply,  in  order  to  guard  effectually  against  confusion,  or,  at  least,  delay. 
In  a  word,  each  additional  calibre  or  class  of  guns,  unless  the  cartridges  be 
assimilated  and  the  passing-boxes  alike,  involves  an  additional  chain  of  pass 
ing-scuttles  for  its  supply  ;    and  it  should  be  borne  in  mind  that  errors  with 
respect  to  cartridges  of  guns  of  the  same  calibre,  but  differing  in  class,  are 
more  to  be  apprehended  than  with  guns  differing  only  in  calibre. 

184.  If  the  guns  on  a  deck  be  all  of  the  same  calibre  and  class,  or  of  like 
cartridges  and  passing-boxes,  then  one  chain  of  scuttles  to  supply  the  forward 
half  of  those  guns,  and  another  to  supply  the  after  half,  will  be  all-sufficient. 

185.  For  each  chain  of  passing-scuttles  there  will  probably  have  to  be — 
One  man  in  the  magazine  to  deliver  charges  from  the  tanks. 

One  man  in  the  passage  to  receive  and  pass  those  charges  through  the 
scuttle  in  the  orlop  or  berth  deck. 

One  man  at  the  passage-scuttle  on  the  orlop  or  berth  deck,  to  receive  the 
charges  and  pass  them  to  the  screen. 

One  man  just  outside  of  the  screen,  to  receive  tho  charges  through  a 
flapped  hole  therein,  and  put  them  in  the  empty  passing-boxes. 

1  See  Table  of  Charges  for  Great  Guns. 


42  DUTIES  AT  QUARTERS,    IN   BATTLE   OR  EXERCISE. 

One,  two,  or  three  Runner-boys  (according  to  the  distance)  to  ran,  on  the 
orlop  or  berth  deck,  with  full  passing-boxes,  from  the  screen  to  the  scuttles 
through  the  deck,  and  back  again  with  the  empty  boxes  to  the  screen. 

One  man,  a  very  careful  one,  at  the  bottom  of  the  canvas  chute,  to  receive 
'the  empty  passing-boxes,  strike  them,  in  an  inverted  position,  over  the  fire- 
tub,  and  inspect  them  carefully  before  allowing  them  to  be  taken  away  to 
be  replenished. 

One  man,  on  the  orlop  or  berth  deck,  at  the  passing-scuttle  through  the 
deck  above,  to  pass  up  full  boxes. 

One  man  at  the  passing-scuttle  on  the  next  deck  above  the  orlop  or  berth 
deck,  to  receive  and  pass  up  full  boxes,  or,  in  the  case  of  a  single-deck  vessel, 
or  of  distribution  on  the  main  deck  of  a  frigate,  or  on  the  lower  deck  of  a 
ship-of-the-line,  to  receive  and  deliver  them  to  Powder-boys. 

One  man  at  the  passing-scuttle  on  the  second  deck  above  the  orlop  or 
berth  deck,  to  receive  and  pass  up  full  boxes ;  or,  in  the  case  of  a  frigate,  or 
distribution  on  the  main  deck  of  a  ship-of-the-line  of  two  decks,  to  receive 
and  deliver  them  to  Powder-boys. 

And  one  man  at  the  passing-scuttle  on  the  third  deck  above  the  orlop,  to 
receive  and  deliver  full  boxes  to  Powder-boys  on  the  spar-deck  of  a  ship-of- 
the-line  of  two  decks. 

Thus  each  chain  of  scuttles  will  require — 

Seven  men  to  supply  its  guns  on  the  first  deck  above;  as,  for  example, 
the  lower  deck  of  a  ship-of-the-line,  the  main  deck  of  a  frigate,  or  the  spar- 
deck  of  a  sloop-of-war,  or  other  single-deck  vessel. 

Eight  men  for  the  spar-deck  of  a  frigate,  for  the  main  deck  of  a  ship-of- 
the-line  of  two  decks,  or  for  the  middle  gun-deck  of  a  ship-of-thc-line  of 
three  decks. 

Nine  men  for  the  spar-deck  of  a  ship-of-thc-line  of  two  decks,  or  for  the 
main  deck  of  a  ship-of-the  line  of  three  decks. 

And  ten  men  for  the  spar-deck  of  a  ship-of-the-line  of  three  decks. 

Besides,  each  of  these  numbers — 7,  8,  9,  and  10 — is  to  be  increased  by 
two  or  three  Runner-boys,  for  the  purposes  above  described. 

186.  In  vessels  of  and  above  the  class  of  frigates,  or  having  two  maga 
zines — one  forward  and  the  other  aft — the  forward  half  of  the  guns  on  each 
deck  is  to  be  supplied  from  the  forward  magazine,  and  the  after  half  from 
the  after  magazine.  Thus,  for  each  deck  of  guns,  one  scuttle  at  each  of  the 
two  magazines,  together  with  its  corresponding  chain  of  scuttles,  will  be 
sufficient,  if  all  the  guns  be  of  the  same  calibre  and  class,  or  have  like  charges. 
But  the  introduction  on  board  of  any  vessel  of  guns  differing  in  either  of  these 
respects  will  involve  the  necessity  above  stated  of  a  separate  scuttle  of  de 
livery  at  the  magazine,  and  also  of  a  distinct  chain  of  scuttles  connected  with 
it,  for  the  exclusive  supply  of  each  variety  of  charges  that  may  be  introduced. 


DELIVERING  AND   DISTRIBUTING   POWDER.  43 

In  this  case,  the  exceptional  guns  should  be  supplied,  whenever  practica 
ble,  from  the  larger  magazine,  when  there  are  two  differing  in  size. 

187.  In  single-deck  vessels  carrying  more  than  sixteen  guns,  all  of  the 
same   calibre  and  class,  and  having  but  one  magazine,  two  scuttles  at  that 
magazine  will  be  sufficient — one  to  supply  the  forward  half  of  guns,  and  the 
other  the  after  half. 

188.  In  single-deck  vessels  carrying  only  sixteen  guns,  or  less,  all  of  the 
same  calibre  and  class,  or  having  like  charges,  one  scuttle  at  the  magazine 
will  suffice. 

189.  Should  any  single-deck  vessel  be  of  such  great  length,  or  so  remark 
able  in  her  armament  of  guns,  although  all  of  the  same  calibre  and  class, 
as  to  render  additional  scuttles  advisable,  they  are  to  be  cut. 

PASSING-SCUTTLES. 

190.  All  the  powder  is  to  be  passed  up  from  the  orlop  or  berth  deck 
through  circular  scuttles,  cut  in  the  deck  or  decks  at  places,  as  nearly  as 
circumstances  will  permit,  immediately  abreast  of  the  middle  of  the  partic 
ular  set  of  guns  to  the  supply  of  which  each   chain  of  scuttles  is  specially 
appropriated.     Besides  these  scuttles  for  passing  the  powder  up,  there  are 
to  be  corresponding  ones  for  each  set,  provided  with  a  canvas  chute  for 
returning  the  empty  boxes  below.     The  drawing  shows  the  manner  of  sup 
plying  an  upper  deck  and  returning  the  empty  boxes  from  it.     Each  deck 
is  to  be  supplied  in  like  manner,  by  a  distinct  and  separate  arrangement, 
through  as  many  independent  sets  of  scuttles  as  may  be  required  by  the  pre 
ceding  "  Arrangements  for  delivering  and  distributing  powder." 

191  •  Each  scuttle  is  to  have  a  tompion  or  other  means  of  closing  it,  so  as 
to  be  water-tight  when  not  in  use,  arid  to  be  so  placed  or  regulated  in  height 
as  not  to  interfere  with  the  transportation  of  guns. 

192.  Should  any  serious  difficulty  arise  in  finding  places  for  cutting  any 
of  the  different  sets  of  scuttles  through  the  decks,  or  in  the  cases  of  small  or 
very  wet  vessels,  recourse  may  be  had  to  the  gratings  of  the  hatchways. 
Still,  they  are  always  to  be  cut  through  the  decks  whenever  it  can  be  done 
with  propriety. 

193.  For  each  scuttle  at  the  magazine  for  the  delivery  of  powder  there 
must  be  a  corresponding  flap-hole  in  the  magazine  screen,  and  this  is  to  be 
regarded  as  a  part  of  the  chain  of  supply  equally  with  the  scuttle  itself. 

194.  When  on  board  ship  there  are  any  guns  of  the  same  calibre  and  class, 
or  of  assimilated  charges,  carried  on  two  consecutive  decks,  all  of  them 
may  be  supplied  by  the  same  chain  of  scuttles,  provided  the  whole  number 
of  guns  thus  made  to  depend  upon  this  chain  does  not  exceed  eight  of  a 


44:  DUTIES   AT   QUARTERS,    IN   BATTLE   OR   EXERCISE. 

side.  For  instance,  under  the  circumstances  stated,  the  chase,  or  a  few  shell 
or  other  guns  on  a  spar-deck,  may  be  supplied  by  a  chain  of  scuttles  intended 
principally  for  the  main-deck  guns  ;  or,  the  shell-guns  on  a  main  deck  being 
few,  may  be  supplied  by  a  chain  intended  principally  for  the  deck  below. 

195t  In  delivering  cartridges  from  the  magazines  for  serving  guns,  they 
are  to  be  passed  up  from  the  magazine  to  the  orlop  or  berth  deck  before 
they  are  put  into  the  passing-boxes,  which,  in  time  of  action,  or  when  exer 
cising  with  powder,  after  being  once  taken  out  of  the  magazine,  are  not,  on 
any  account,  to  be  allowed  to  go  into  it  again,  or  even  inside  of  the  screen, 
during  the  whole  time  of  such  action  or  exercise.  They  are  to  be  replen 
ished  at  the  screen,  but  outside  of  it. 

196.  All  passing-boxes  shall  be  painted  black,  with  the  calibre  and  charge 
painted  in  white  letters,  two  and  one-half  inches  (2^)  long  on  the  side,  and 
one  and  a  half  (1^)  on  the  top. 

197.  If,  however,  there  are  any  guns  of  the  same  calibre  on  spar-decks 
requiring  lighter  charges,  the  lower  half  of  the  box  shall  be  painted  white. 
For  gun-decks  in  similar  case  the  lower  half  shall  be  painted  red. 

198.  Empty  passing-boxes  returned  by  the  chutes  are  always  to  be  landed 
upon  wet  swabs,  and  then  to  be  turned  upside  down,  and  so  struck  over  a 
fire-tub,  as  before  directed,  to  free  them  from  any  loose  powder. 

199.  One  fire-tub,  nearly  filled  with  water,  is  to  be  placed  on  the  deck, 
alongside  the  bottom  of  each  chute  for  returning  empty  boxes.     The  top  of 
this  tub  is  to  be  provided  with  a  stout  hoop  to  ship  and  unship,  with  a 
grating  of  stout  copper  wire,  the  meshes  of  which  are  to  be  made  small 
enough  to  prevent  the  passing-box  from  falling  into  the  water,  in  case  of 
slipping  from  the  man's  hand  while  being  struck  over  the  tub. 


SHOT  AND  SHELL. 

200.  Shot  and  shell  are  to  be  passed  up  by  hand,  or  whipped  up,  by  the 
most  convenient  hatchways.     The  hands  stationed  below  at  the  lockers  are 
to  work  the  whips,  each  of  which,  being  fitted  with  a  toggle,  will  indicate 
when  the  projectiles  are  hoisted  high  enough.     In  case  a  shot-locker  should 
be  somewhat  removed  from  the  hatchway,  up  which  the  shot  are  to  be 
passed  or  whipped,  the  shot  may  be  speedily  conveyed  over  the  distance  by 
means  of  a  wooden  trough  fitted  for  the  purpose. 

HATCHWAY  FOR  THE  WOUNDED. 

201.  One  hatchway,  or  portion  of  a  hatchway,  and  that  as  nearly  amid 
ships  as  possible,  is  to  be  reserved  for  lowering  the  wounded  below,  and  to 
be  properly  provided  with  a  cot  or  cots,  having  a  whip  to  each. 


NAV/VL    TRUCK    CARRIAGE 


i  i  i  i   i   i  i  i  i   i  ,1  i  i   i  i  i  .1  a  i  i  i 

rr~ 


•Juhns  Eien  .  pr 


NAVAL   GUN-CARRIAGES. 


45 


NAVAL  GUN-CAKRIAGES. 

202.  All  gun-carriages  and  their  equipments  are  to  be  made  in  conformity 
with  directions  from  the  Bureau  of  Ordnance. 


NOMENCLATURE 
OF  ORDINARY  NAVAL  TRUCK-CARRIAGE. 


WOODEN  PARTS. 
Carriage. 

A.  Brackets   of  large   truck-carriages   are     D.  Front 
made  each  of  two  pieces,  joined  by  a 
jog  a,  and  do  welled.      The  remaining 


parts  of  the  brackets  are  the  trunnion- 
holes  Z>,  steps  c,  quarter-rounds  d,  and 
arch  e. 

B.  Transom,  let  into  brackets. 

('.  Breast-piece,  in  two  parts — the  inner 
part  fixed,  by  two  bolts,  into  transom ; 
the  outer  part  movable,  connected  by 
hinges. 


and  rear  axletrees,  consisting 
each  of  square  body  f,  and  arms  g, 
jogged  into  brackets. 

E.  Front  and  rear  trucks. 

F.  Dumb  trucks. 

G.  Bed  and  stool. 
II.  Quoin. 

Implements. 

I.    Handspikes. 
K.  Chocking-quoin. 


METAL   PARTS. 


Carriage. 


Two  cap- squares. 

Four  cap-square  bolts  and  two  keys 

and  chains. 
Two  bracket-bolts. 
Two  rear  axletree-bolts. 
Two  side- tackle  eye-bolts. 
One  train-tackle  eye-bolt. 
One  transporting  eye-bolt. 
Two  breast-bolts. 
Two  hinges  of  breast-pieces. 
Two  transom-bolts  (upper  and  lower). 
Two  breeching  side-shackles  and  pins. 


12.  Bed-bolt. 

13.  Four  axletree  bands. 

14.  Chafing-plates  of  steps  and  brackets. 

15.  Four  linchpins  and  washers. 

16.  Quoin-plate  and  stop. 

17.  Ratchet  for  quoin-stop. 

18.  Four  training  loops. 

19.  Brceching-thimble  (cast  iron). 

20.  Side-shackle  bolts  for  breechings. 

21.  Shackle-pin,  plates,  and  keys. 

22.  Two  axle-stays. 

23.  Handspike-shoe. 


OF  PARTS  PECULIAR  TO  MARSILLY  CARRIAGE. 


A.  The  lowest  piece  of  the  bracket,  in  place 
of  the  rear  truck  of  ordinary  carriages. 

B.  Rear  transom,  in  place  of  rear  axle. 

C.  Breast-piece  (fixed). 

D.  E.  Sweep-pieces. 

D.  Fixed  below  the  port-sill. 


E.  Movable,  with  brass  catches  (//)  and 
hooks  and  eyes  (g  g). 

II.  Elevating  screw  and  lover,  with  sau 
cer  (1)  in  place  of  bed  and  quoin. 

K.  Roller  handspike. 

L.  Loop  for  handspike. 


46  DUTIES  AT  QUARTERS,    IN   BATTLE   OR   EXERCISE. 


CHAPTER    IV. 

MANUAL    EXERCISE. 


EXEECISE   OF  BROADSIDE-GUNS, 

ON    ONE    SIDE    ONLY. 

IX-iNCH  SHELL-GUN  (as  an  example). 

WORDS  OF   COMMAND. 
I.  "  SILENCE  !  MAN  THE  STARBOARD  (OR  PORT)  GUNS  1" 
II.  "  CAST  LOOSE  AND  PROVIDE  !" 

III.  " RUN  IN!"  (preparatory). 

IV.  "  SERVE  VENT  AND  SPONGE  !" 
V.  "LOAD!" 

VI.  "RUNOUT!" 
VII.  "PRIME!" 
VIII.  "POINT!" 
IX.  "  READY— FIRE  !" 
X.  "SECURE!" 

It  is  customary  to  keep  the  guns  of  the  Battery  loaded  at  sea ;  it  has  beeu 
found  that  the  fire  of  a  ship  could  be  commenced  in  three  minutes  from  the 
beat  of  drum,  the  guns  being  secured  for  sea,  and  no  notice  of  what  was 
contemplated  announced  to  men  or  officers  save  by  the  signal  for  quarters. 

This  form  of  exercise  therefore  proceeds  on  the  assumption  that  the  cannon 
are  not  loaded,  but  the  order  of  the  commands  may  be  varied  to  suit  the 
circumstances  of  the  case. 

204.  Guns  should  never  remain  loaded  longer  than  necessary,  as  the  car 
tridge  speedily  deteriorates  by  the  effects  of  moisture.  If  a  shell  has  been 
loaded  twenty-four  hours  it  should  be  drawn  and  refuzed. 

NOTE.— In  order  not  to  incuraber  the  text  with  details,  they  are  transferred  to  tho 
'•Notes  on  the  Manual  Exercise"  (Art.  288  to  357),  which  are  to  be  carefully  studied. 
Also  the  notes  to  Pivot-Gun  Exercise. 


MARSILLY  CARRIAGL  FOR  IX.  INCH  SHELL  GUN 


D  Van  NosfreadL,  Pnl>li*H<-r. 


.t  Him-  f>r- 


MANUAL   EXERCISE — WOEDS   OF   COMMAND.  47 

I.    "  SILENCE  1     MAN   THE   STARBOARD   (OR   PORT)    GUNS  I" 

205*  At  this  preparatory  order  the  strictest  silence  is  to  be  observed. 
The  Captain  faces  the  port,  the  men,  on  the  right  and  left,  stand  facing  the 
gun ;  all  fix  their  eyes  on  the  Captain  and  attentively  wait  for  orders. 

II.  "CAST  LOOSE  AND  PROVIDE!" 

206.  The  GUN  CAPTAIN  commands,  sees  his  gun  cleared  and  cast  loose, 
portlid  unbarred  ready  for  tricing  up,  or  half  ports  taken  out;  side  and 
train  tackles  hooked,  the  side-tackle  to  the  side  training-bolt,  and  the  train- 
tackle  to  the  eye-bolt  in  the  deck  in  the  rear  of  the  gun ;  casts  loose  and 
middles  breeching  and  places  sclvagee  straps  and  toggles  amidships ;  takes 
off  lock-cover,  and  hands  it  to  the  train-tackleman,  who  places  it  amidships ; 
buckles  on  his  waist-belt  (furnished  as  directed  in  Article  150);  provides 
himself  with  a  priming-wire;  puts  on  arid  secures  his  thumbstall;  and  sees 
that  the  gear  and  implements  for  the  service  of  the  gun  are  all  in  place  and 
ready  for  use,  and  that  the  men  arc  properly  equipped. 

When  the  gun  is  ready  for  action  he  sees  that  the  men  take  their  proper 
positions,  and  reports  to  the  Officer  of  the  subdivision  to  which  he  belongs. 

It  is  important  that  the  battery  shall  be  completely  provided  at  every 
exercise,  otherwise  something  is  sure  to  be  omitted  in  preparing  for  action. 

207*  2o  CAPTAIN  assists  in  casting  loose  and  middling  breeching;  takes 
off  and  places  amidships  sight-covers,  selvagee  straps,  and  toggles  ;  handles 
quoin  ;  provides  thumbstalls,  priming-wires,  and  boring-bit,  and  equips  him 
self  with  the  first  two  ;  clears  lock-string  and  lays  it  in  a  loose  coil  round 
the  lock,  convenient  for  use,  and  buckles  on  his  waist-belt  furnished  as  1st 
Captain's.  If  the  gun  is  furnished  with  an  elevating  screw,  elevates  the  gun, 
that  the  lower  half  port  may  be  let  down. 

208.  IST  LOADER,  aided  by  1st  Sponger,  casts  loose  port-lanyards,  removes 
upper  half  port,  and  passes  it  to  the  men  on  the  left  side  of  the  gun,  who 
lay  it  amidships ;    lets  down  the  lower  half  port.     On  lower  deck  casts  off 
port-lanyards  and  muzzle -lashing;  removes  port-bar  and  passes  it  to  the  men 
at  the  left  side  of  the  gun,  who  lay  it  amidships  ;  bears  out  port.     On  all 
decks  places  hand-swab  and  chocking-quoin  near  the  ship's  side  on  the  left 
side  of  the  gun;  aids  1st  Sponger  in  taking  out  tompion. 

209.  2o  LOADER  assists  in  casting  loose  ;   sees  the  wads  in  place,  and  for 
rifle  cannon  a  pot  of  grease  at  hand ;  hooks  outer  block  of  side-tackle  to 
side  training-bolt,  on  the  left  side  of  the  gun. 

210.  IST  SPONGER  casts  loose  port-lanyards  and  aids  1st  Loader  in  remov 
ing  upper  half  ports  and  letting  down  lower  ones,  and  on  lower  decks  in 
removing  the  port-bar,  bearing  out  the  port  and  taking  off  the  muzzle-lash 
ings  ;   takes  out  tompion,  and  passes  it  to  2d  Sponger,  who  hangs  it  amid 
ships  ;  places  chocking-quoin  on  the  right  side  of  the  gun,  nea,r  the  ship's  side. 


48  DUTIES   AT   QUARTERS,    IN   BATTLE   OR   EXERCISE. 

211.  2o  SPONGER  assists  in  casting  loose ;  hooks  outer  block  of  side-tackle 
to  the  side  training-holt,  on  the  right  side  of  the  gun. 

The  Spongers  take  down  the  sponges  and  rammers ;  take  off  the  sponge- 
cap  and  hang  it  up  out  of  the  way ;  place  sponges  and  rammers  together,  on 
the  right  side  of  the  gun,  heads  toward  the  breech,  in  the  brackets  overhead 
on  covered  decks,  otherwise  on  deck. 

The  SIDE-TACKLEMEN  assist  in  casting  loose ;  on  lower  decks,  aid  Port- 
tacklemcn  ;  moisten  the  sponge,  being  certain  that  the  end  of  the  sponge 
which  touches  the  bottom  of  the  bore  is  thoroughly  wet. 

212.  SHELLMEN  assist  in  casting  loose,  provide  shot  and  wads,  and  pro 
ceed  to  hatchway,  ready  to  pass  loaded  shell,  if  ordered. 

213.  TRAIN-TACKLEMEN  lead  out  and  hook  train-tackle. 

214.  HANDSPIKEMEN  take  out  the  handspikes  on  their  respective  sides, 
and  with  carriages  using  a  quoin,  each  standing  between  his  handspike  and 
the  side  of  the  ship,  place  the  heels  of  their  handspikes  on  the  steps  of  the 
carriage  and  under  the  breech  of  the  gun,  and  raise  it  so  that  the  quoin  may 
be  eased  and  the  lower  half  port,  let  down,  or,  when  housed,  the  bed  and 
quoin  adjusted.     Then  each  Handspikeman  will  lay  his  handspike  on  deck, 
on  his  own  side  of  the  gun,  parallel  with  its  axis,  clear  of  the  trucks  and  butt 
to  the  rear. 

215.  POWDER-BOY  repairs  to  his  proper  scuttle  for  his  passing-box,  which 
having  received  he  returns  and  stands  a  little  to  the  left  and  in  rear  of  the 
gun,  keeping  the  passing-box  under  his  left  arm  and  the  cover  closely  pressed 
down  with  his  right  hand. 

216.  When  there  are  fourteen  or  more  men  at  a  gun,  the  PORT-TACKLE- 
MEN  and  SIDE-TACKLEMEN,  on  lower  decks,  lead  out  port-tackle  falls  and 
assist  in  tricing  up  the  port,  and,  when  high  enough,  belay  the  fall. 

217.  In  the  temporary  absence  of  the  first  Captains,  Loaders,  or  Spongers, 
when  at  quarters  on  one  side,  their  Seconds  will  take  their  places  and  per 
form  their  respective  duties. 

When  exercising  by  divisions,  or  single  gun's  crews,  every  station  should  be 
filled  ;  if  necessary,  taking  men  from  the  Master's  or  Powder  division  to  fill 
vacancies.  The  guns  will  be  sufficiently  exercised  in  working  with  reduced 
crews  at  general  quarters. 

218.  With  a  gun's  crew  of  ten  or  more  men,  No.  7  will  take  the  place  of 
No.  5,  and  No.  8  of  No.  G,  when  Nos.  5  or  G  arc  absent  temporarily. 


RUN-IN  . 

a,gram    JTo.'!.] 


I)  rrtsi  Xiut/nxHd,fu6li*ktr. 


Inline  Bu'n  , 


SPONGE  -LOAD 
[IUa grain   No.'l  . 


4 W" 


h'/c./i ,  pr 


EXERCISE   OF  BROADSIDE-GUNS — ON  ONE   SIDE   ONLY.  49 

IIL  "RUN  IN!"  (preparatory}. 
(Diagram  No.  1.) 

219.  Nos.  7,  8,  9,  10,  11,  12,  13,  14,  15,  16  (and,  if  necessary,  5,  6), 
man  the  Train-tackle. 

2d  Captain  ships  and  works  Roller  Handspike.  Nos.  3,  4,  overhaul  or 
tend  the  Side-tackles. 

The  gun  having  been  run  in,  No.  12  chokes  luff  of  Train-tackle,  assisted, 
if  there  is  much  motion,  by  No.  1 1 . 

Nos.  3,  4  place  Truck-quoins  in  front  of  Trucks. 

No.  6,  with  back  square  to  gun,  and  facing  over  left  shoulder  to  Sponger, 
takes  up  the  Sponge,  head  in-board,  and  stands  ready  to  hand  it  to  4. 

No.  8,  facing  to  the  gun,  and  outside  of  G,  does  the  same  with  the  Rammer. 

The  rest  of  the  men  go  to  their  stations. 

IY.  "SERVE  VENT  AND  SPONGE!"' 
(Diagram  No.  2.) 

220*  Gun  Captain  serves  and  then  stops  the  Vent.  No.  4  receives  the  moist 
Sponge  from  G,  right  hand  over,  left  under,  sends  it  home,  and,  assisted  by 
3,  presses  it  to  bottom  of  bore  ;  then,  turning  it  round  two  or  three  times, 
from  left  to  right,  in  the  direction  which  is  needed  to  have  the  worm  take, 
withdraws  it,  and,  when  out,  strikes  the  staff  several  smart  taps  under  the 
muzzle,  then  hands  it  back  to  6,  who  lays  it  on  the  deck  or  lodges  it  over 
head  on  the  hooks,  if  they  are  provided.  No.  10  examines  and  clears 
sponge-head  and  worm. 

After  the  Sponge  is  withdrawn,  Gun  Captain  serves  the  vent  with  his 
priming-wire  and  again  closes  it. 

No.  8  hands  Rammer  to  4  as  soon  as  the  Sponge  is  taken  from  him  by  6. 
Should  4  observe  that  the  Gun  Captain  neglected  to  serve  the  vent,  he  is  to 
call  his  attention  to  it. 

No.  3  stands  ready  with  Charge  he  has  taken  from  Powderman. 

No.  5,  assisted  by  Shelhnan,  opens  Shell-box,  disengages  the  Shell,  and 
has  it  in  readiness  to  pass  to  No.  3. 

Y.    "LOADl" 

(Diagram  No.  2.) 

221.  No.  3  places  Charge  in  muzzle,  seam  from  the  Vent,  small  end  in, 
arid  pushes  it  well  into  the  Bore. 

No.  4  stands  ready  with  the  Rammer,  enters  it  into  the  muzzle,  and 
pushes  the  Charge  steadily  to  the  bottom  of  the  Bore,  which  will  be  shown 

1  See  notes  on  this  command  and  the  succeeding  one,  "LOAD,"  for  further  important 
details. 

* 


50  DUTIES  AT  QUARTERS,   IN  BATTLE   OR  EXERCISE. 

by  the  mark  on  the  rammer  handle ;  3  assists  with  one  hand,  and  the  charge 
is  on  no  account  to  be  struck. 

While  4  withdraws  the  Rammer,  3  is  to  receive  the  Shell  from  5,  lift  and 
enter  it,  sabot  first,  into  muzzle,  fuze  out,  as  soon  as  the  rammer  is  clear  thereof. 

As  the  shell  lies  just  fair  with  muzzle,  3  removes  cap  from  Fuze,  which 
is  to  be  passed  along  to  the  Gun  Captain,  and  pushes  the  Shell  into  the  Bore. 

No.  4  enters  Rammer,  and,  assisted  by  3,  pushes  in  the  Shell  until  the 
mark  on  handle  shows  it  to  be  in  place.  It  is  most  strictly  forbidden  to 
strike  the  Shell  with  the  Rammer. 

No.  6  takes  Rammer  from  4  and  lays  it  down. 

Whilst  this  has  been  doing,  the  preparation  for  the  next  order  has  been 
proceeding,  thus : 

2d  Captain  ships  Roller  Handspike.  Nos.  7,  9,  11,  13,  15, — 8,  10, 
12,  14,  16  take  hold  of  Side-tackles;  Gun  Captain  feels  if  Vent  is  clear, 
and  Charge  home. 

Action. 

(This  is  equivalent  to  the  order  "Together.") 

Nos.  5,  6  assist  at  Side-tackles. 

Nos.  3,  4  attend  Truck-quoins  and  keep  the  Breeching  clear  of  Front- 
trucks. 

No.  12,  assisted  in  heavy  rolling  of  lee  guns  by  11,  prepares  to  tend 
Train-tackle.  If  necessary  with  a  round  turn  round  all  parts  of  the  fall. 

VI.  "RUN  OUT!" 
(Diagram  No.  3.) 

222.  The  execution  of  this  order  is  to  be  controlled  by  the  gun  being  to 
windward  or  to  leeward,  and  also  by  the  nature  of  the  Roll. 

To  leeward,  and  with  much  motion,  the  cannon  will  rush  out  violently 
unless  prevented ;  therefore  11  assists  12  at  the  Train-tackle ;  7,  9,  11,  13, 
15,  and  8,  10,  12,  14,  16  start  the  gun  cautiously. 

2d  Captain  heaves  up  on  Roller  Handspike,  but  is  careful  to  let  down  the 
Carriage  if  it  begins  to  start  out  rapidly ;  it  may  even  be  advisable  not  to 
use  the  Roller  Handspike  at  all. 

Nos.  3,  4  remove  Truck-quoins  and  tend  breeching. 

Action. 

If  to  windward,  2d  Captain  heaves  up  Carriage  fully  on  Roller  Hand 
spike. 

Nos.  5  and  6  assist  at  Side-tackles. 

No.  12  only  tends  Train-tackle  if  the  Roll  should  need  it;  otherwise  he 
overhauls  it  and  assists  at  Side-tackles. 

Nos.  3,  4    remove  Truck-quoins,  and  keep  Breeching  from  fouling  the 


RUN     OUT 
(TO  LEEWARD) 

[Diagram.  No.S  .] 


.D  Va 


Johns  BierL,  pr 


EXERCISE   OF  BROADSIDE-GUNS — ON  ONE   SIDE   ONLY.  51 


Front-trucks;  7,  9,  11,  13,  15,  and  8,  10,  12,  14,  16  set  taut  the  Side- 
tackles. 

When  the  gun  is  out  the  2d  Captain  swivels  the  Roller  Handspike  for 
training,  or  removes  it  altogether  if  the  Handspike  alone  be  preferred  for 
this  operation. 

Nos.  5,  6  choke  and  retain  hold  of  luffs  of  Side-tackles,  while  3,  4  place 
Truck-quoins  in  rear  of  trucks,  if  the  movement  of  the  ship  requires  it 
Crew  close  up  ;  rear  man  coils  end  of  fall,  clear  for  running. 

If  the  training  is  to  be  sharp,  the  proper  Side-tackle  will  be  hooked  to 
the  further  eye-bolt  inside;  12  unhooks  the  Train-tackle,  and  hooks  it  also 
to  the  proper  eye-bolt  in  deck. 

VII.  "PRIME!" 
(Diagram  No.  4.) 

223.  Gun  Captain  again  makes  sure  that  the  Vent  is  clear,  and,  in  so 
doing,  lets  down  his  wire  quickly  into  the  charge. 

He  inserts  a  Primer,  and  turns  down  the  Hammer  upon  it. 
Meanwhile  9,  10  take  up  handspikes,  and  place  themselves  at  rear  of 
bracket  conveniently  to  heave  forward  or  aft 
In  sharp  training  Nos.  13,  14  assist  them. 
Nos.  3,  5,  7,  11,  13,  15,  and  4,  6,  8,  12,  14,  16  man  Side-tackles. 

VIII.  "POINT!" 
(Diagram  No.  4.) 

224,  Gun    Captain   adjusts    or   verifies    Sliding-Bar  of  Rear   Sight   to 
proper  distance  given  by  the  Officer  of  Division,  and  falls  back  so  as  to  be 
clear  of  the  recoil,  lanyard  in  hand,  face  to  the  Port,  standing  directly  in  the 
rear  of  the  gun,  with  his  eye  ranging  over  the   sights,  and  keeping  in  view 
the  water-line  of  the  opposing  ship,  trains  the  gun  by  voice  or  sign. 

No.  6  throws  back  the  Hammer,  and  takes  hold  of  lever  of  Elevating 
Screw.  (If  Rollei  Handspike  is  not  used  in  training,  2d  Captain  performs 
this.) 

At  word  "Right"  or  "Left,"  3,  5,  7,  11,  13,  15,  or  4,  6,  8,  12,  14,  16 
haul  on  the  proper  Side-tackle,  and  9,  10  heave  correspondingly  on  hand 
spikes.  Nos.  3  and  4  keep  their  eyes  on  handspikemen  opposite  to  them, 
to  give  the  time  to  the  other  Nos.  for  hauling  on  the  fall. 

No.  6  (or  2d  Captain)  Elevates  or  Depresses  as  directed. 

Action. 

2d  Captain  unships  the  Roller  Handspike  if  it  has  been  used  in  training. 
Nos.  9,  10  withdraw  handspikes,  and  step  back  clear  of  recoil. 

Nos.  3,  4  overhaul  Side-tackles  to  mark,  unless  the  motion  does  not 
admit  of  it 


52  DUTIES  AT  QUARTERS,   IN  BATTLE   OR  EXERCISE. 

No.  12  overhauls  or  holds  up  Train-tackle. 
Nos.  7,  8  remove  quoins  from  Trucks. 
Men  to  their  stations. 

IX.  "RKADY — FIRE!" 

(Diagram  No.  5.) 

225.  The  Gun  Captain,  standing  as  already  placed,  waits  patiently,  but 
sharply,  for  the  coincidence  of  the  sights  upon  the  object,  which,  if  a  ship, 
is  always  the  water-line.     When  a  correction  of  elevation  or  of  direction  is 
required,  he  repeats  such  of  the  previous  orders  as  may  be  necessary ;  and 
these  are  to  be  re-executed  accordingly. 

If  the  gun  is  to  leeward,  the  men  stand  ready  to  take  hold  of  the  Train- 
tackle  and  jerk  the  cannon  into  a  taut  breeching. 

When  sure  of  his  aim  the  Gun  Captain,  who  has  held  the  lock-lanyard 
just  taut,  draws  it  promptly  and  firmly,  bearing  in  mind  that  in  no  case  is 
he  to  attempt  moving  from  his  post. 

The  2d  Captain  stands  ready  with  a  primer,  and,  in  the  case  of  failure, 
throws  back  the  hammer  and  inserts  another.  If  necessary,  serves  the 
Vent.  If  a  second  failure  occurs,  it  is  a  certain  indication  that  the  charge  is 
not  home. 

Action. 

Instantly  with  the  explosion,  11,  12  jerk  away  the  parts  of  the  train- 
tackle,  or  hook  it  if  it  has  been  unhooked. 

Nos.  3,  4  place  quoins  in  front  of  trucks.     9,  10  lay  down  handspikes. 

When  the  gun  is  not  in  to  a  taut  breeching,  the  2d  Captain  ships  the 
Roller  Handspike. 

Nos.  7,  8,  9,  10,  11,  12,  13,  14,  15,  16,  take  hold  quickly  of  Train-tackle, 
and  run  in  to  a  taut  breeching. 

When  in,  3,  4  move  up  the  Truck-quoins,  12  chokes  luff  of  Train- 
tackle. 

Gun  Captain  puts  back  the  hammer  and  coils  up  lanyard. 

No.  6  takes  up  Sponge,  and  the  exercise  proceeds  as  already  directed. 

If  necessary,  No.  2  levels  the  gun  for  loading,  and  lays  it  fair  for  running 
out 

226.  If  the  exercise  is  to  be  continued,  it  is  resumed  at  the  fourth  com 
mand  : 

"  SERVE    VENT    AND    SPONGE  !" 
"  CEASE    FIRING  !" 

227.  Whenever  this  order  is  given,  either  by  the  roll  of  the  drum,  or  by 
passing  the  word,  if  the  gun  is  primed,  the  Gun  Captain  immediately  removes 
the  primer,  and  with  the  crew  stands  at   "  Attention." 


READY-FI RE 


[Diagra 


D  V< 


,  j>r. 


EXERCISE   OF   BROADSIDE-GUNS — ON   ONE   SIDE   ONLY.  53 

228.  NOTE. — The  breechings  of  IX-in.   guns  are  to  be  so  fitted  that  the 
face  of  muzzle  when   in  shall  be  18   inches  from  inner  face  of  side,  for  two 
reasons : 

To  prevent  the  gun  from  returning  to  the  port,  and  to  give  room  for  the 
handling  of  such  large  shells. 

Seventeen  men  are  a  proper  number  for  working  a  IX-in.  gun  under  any 
circumstances. 

Rammer  handles  are  to  be  marked  for  place  of  charge  and  of  shell. 

Side  and  train  tackles  are  also  to  be  marked  to  the  proper  overhaul,  so  as 
to  avoid  slack  rope. 

Breast-sweeps  are  useful  at  lower  sill  of  port,  for  training  more  than  a 
point. 

X.  "SECURE!" 

229.  The  Powder-boy  returns  the  spare  powder  and  the  passing-boxes  to 
the  magazine.     The  Shellmen  return  the  shells  and  empty  shell-boxes,  if  any 
remain  on  deck,  to  the  shell-room. 

The  Gun  Captain  directs  the  gun  to  be  laid  square  in  the  middle  of  the 
port. 

When  the  guns  are  to  be  secured  without  being  housed  the  Loader  and 
Sponger  place  the  chocking-quoins  square  up  against  the  rear  part  of  the  front 
trucks  and  put  in  the  tornpion.  The  Handspikemen,  if  there  is  a  quoin, 
free  the  quoin  and  lower  the  breech,  the  2d  Captain  handling  the  quoin. 
When  the  gun  is  fitted  with  an  elevating  screw  this  operation  is  performed 
by  the  2d  Captain  alone,  who  handles  the  screw. 

The  Gun  Captain,  assisted  by  the  2d  Captain,  hauls  the  breeching  through 
the  jaws  of  the  cascabel  to  the  left  side  of  the  gun,  forming  with  the 
bight  a  turn  over  the  breech  and  cylinder,  taking  care  to  keep  the  breech 
ing  well  clear  of  the  elevating  screw  to  prevent  chafe,  and  securing  the 
parts  on  each  side  with  selvagees  and  heavers ;  or,  if  this  should  inter 
fere  with  the  breech-sight,  by  crossing  the  breeching  at  the  side  and 
securing  it  with  selvagee  straps  and  toggles.  In  this  case  the  breeching 
should  be  secured  after  alternate  exercises  right  and  left. 

The  Loader  and  Sponger  haul  up  and  secure  the  lower  half-ports,  put 
in  tompion,  and  secure  muzzle-bag.  The  Gun  Captain  puts  in  the  vent- 
plug,  lays  the  hammer  of  the  lock  in  its  place,  and  the  lock-string  in  a 
coil  around  it.  The  2d  Captain  takes  the  lock-cover  from  the  Train-tackle- 
man  and  secures  it  over  the  lock,  and  in  like  manner  covers  the  breech  and 
reinforce  sights. 

The  men  at  the  side-tackles  unhook  the  outer  blocks  from  the  train 
ing-bolts  and  hand  them  to  the  Loader  and  Sponger,  who  hook  them  to  the 
securing-bolts  at  the  sides  of  the  port.  The  men  on  both  sides  haul  them 
taut  and  stop  the  parts  of  the  tackles  together,  with  knittles  provided  by 


54:  DUTIES   AT   QUARTERS,    IN   BATTLE   OR   EXERCISE. 

the  Quarter  Gunner,  and  then  expend  the  remainder  of  the  falls  by  passing 
them  around  the  breech  of  the  gun,  through  the  jaws  of  the  cascabel,  and 
stopping  the  bights  alternately  to  the  eye-bolts  on  each  side  of  the  port 
until  expended  :  or,  at  four-truck  carriages,  take  two  half  hitches  over  the 
tail  of  the  brackets,  and  expend  the  ends  of  the  falls. 

The  Train-tacklemen  hook  the  train-tackle  to  the  side-tackle  bolts  on  each 
side  of  the  port,  the  double  block  on  the  left  side,  haul  the  tackle  taut, 
expend  the  end  round  the  breech,  and  stop  the  parts  in  with  the  side- 
tackles.1 

The  Gun  Captain  then  directs  the  Handspikemen,  or  if  the  screw  is  used, 
the  2d  Captain,  to  raise  the  breech  so  as  to  level  the  gun  and  bring  all  parts 
of  the  tackles  and  breeching  taut. 

The  Loader  and  Sponger  put  in  and  secure  the  upper  half-ports,  if 
directed,  and  the  Loader  swabs  the  deck  to  collect  any  loose  powder  which 
may  have  been  scattered  on  it 

The  several  persons  who  provided  the  arms  and  implements  used  in  the 
exercise,  return  them  to  their  proper  places,  or  to  the  persons  appointed  to 
take  charge  of  them,  care  being  taken  that  the  small  arms  are  unloaded  and 
reported  so  before  they  are  sent  below,  unless  otherwise  directed  by  the 
Captain. 

HOUSING  LOWER-DECK  GUNS. 

230*  If  the  lower-deck  guns  are  to  be  housed,  the  Gun  Captain  directs  the 
gun  to  be  laid  square  in  the  middle  of  the  port  and  run  in  to  a  taut  breech 
ing,  and  if  loaded,  the  load  to  be  drawn.  The  Loader  and  Sponger  place 
the  housing-chocks  before  the  front  trucks. 

The  gun  is  then  run  close  up  against  the  housing-chocks,  and  the  chock- 
ing-quoins  are  placed  square  up  behind  the  rear  trucks. 

The  Handspikemen  raise  the  breech  to  free  the  quoin  ;  the  2d  Captain 
withdraws  it  and  the  bed ;  the  Handspikemen  lower  the  breech  upon  the 
axletree,  so  that  in  case  the  gun  should  break  adrift,  the  muzzle  will  take 
the  upper  port-sill ;  and  the  Port-tacklemen  lower  the  port-lid. 

The  2d  Loader  and  1st  Shellman  bring  the  port-bar  to  the  Loader  and 
Sponger,  who  put  it  in  place  across  the  port,  hook  the  port-hooks  in  the 
ring-bolts  in  the  port-lids,  and  drive  in  the  keys  until  the  port  is  perfectly  closed. 

The  men  on  both  sides  shift  the  side-tackles  from  the  training-bolts  to 
the  securing-bolts,  haul  them  taut,  and  expend  the  ends  between  the  blocks. 
The  Loader  and  Sponger  pass  the  frapping  lashing  round  both  parts  of  the 
breeching,  in  front  of  the  brackets,  and  with  the  assistance  of  the  men 
nearest  them  bowse  it  well  taut ;  and  secure  the  muzzle  by  placing  the 
grommet  over  it  and  the  housing  hook-bolt,  and  by  frapping  the  two  parts 

1  With  the  nib-blocks  the  train-tackle  cannot  be  used  to  assist  in  securing  the  gun, 
unless  a  special  eye-bolt  is  placed  for  this  purpose. 


EXERCISE   OF   BROADSIDE-GUNS — ON  ONE  SIDE   ONLY.  55 

together  with  the  lashing.  When  the  housing-bolt  is  an  eye-bolt,  a  toggle 
will  be  necessary  to  keep  the  grommet  in  its  place. 

In  moderate  weather  the  train-tackle  is  unhooked  from  the  deck,  and 
made  up  and  stopped  along  the  side-tackle,  on  the  forward  side  of  the  gun. 
In  bad  weather  it  is  kept  hooked,  bowsed  taut,  and  the  end  expended 
through  the  ring-bolt  and  round  the  arms  of  the  rear  axle. 

The  manner  of  housing  guns,  mounted  on  truck-carriages,  on  other  decks, 
in  bad  weather,  does  not  vary  materially  from  that  just  described,  excepting 
that  the  upper  half-ports  and  the  port-bucklers  arc  put  in  and  secured. 

When  there  are  no  housing-chocks  the  ordinary  chocking-quoins  may  be 
used  as  such.  It  will  be  an  additional  security  to  take  off  the  rear  trucks, 
and  to  tighten  the  muzzle-lashing  by  raising  the  breech. 


GENERAL  REMARKS  ON  THE  MANUAL  EXERCISE. 

231*  The  exercise  of  the  great  guns  has  a  double  object:  1st,  To  teach 
the  crew  all  the  details  necessary  to  Load,  Point,  and  Fire  the  gun ;  2d,  To 
develop  their  activity,  intelligence,  and  muscular  force. 

The  principal  object,  the  base  of  all  this  instruction,  is  loading  and  point 
ing  ;  too  much  care  and  attention  cannot  be  devoted  to  obtain  exactitude 
in  all  the  movements.  There  is  a  tendency  to  devote  too  much  time  to  such 
exercises  as  shifting  carriages  from  side  to  side.  There  is  always  sufficient 
time  for  these  manoeuvres.  The  most  important  are  the  management  of  the 
rammer  and  sponge  in  loading  and  the  handspikes  in  pointing. 

232,  At  the  time  of  reception  on  board,  the  crew  may  be  considered  as 
made  up  of  three  classes :  1st,  The  Captains,  Loaders,  and  Spongers  of  guns, 
who  may  be  considered  as  competently  instructed  in  the  manual ;  2d, 
another  part,  who  have  had  some  instruction  and  are  competent  to  fill  the 
secondary  duties ;  3d,  The  remainder,  who  are  entirely  ignorant. 

The  directions  in  the  manual  arc  more  particularly  devoted  to  the 
instruction  of  a  crew  completely  formed,  omitting  all  the  minor  details  of 
position  and  exactness  in  the  performance  of  the  motions  under  the  different 
commands,  which  are  to  be  supplied  by  the  Instructor.  These  details  would 
break  the  connection  of  the  several  commands,  and  increase  the  bulk  of  the 
work.  The  precepts  of  the  manual  are  not  for  self-instruction  of  the 
ignorant,  but  to  produce  a  uniform  system  of  commands  in  the  Instructors. 
The  important  point,  is  to  instruct  the  last  two  classes  by  gun's  crews, 
and  then  by  divisions.  This  is  accomplished  by  drilling  the  guns'  crews 
separately,  until  each  man  has  acquired  some  facility  in  his  particular  duties, 
and  then  selecting  the  most  deficient  for  special  instruction,  combining 
them  as  a  gun's  crew,  in  order  not  to  uselessly  fatigue  those  who  are  already 
expert  or  readily  acquire  the  drill.  Whenever  a  new  order  is  to  be  executed, 


56  DUTIES  AT  QUARTERS,    IN  BATTLE   OR   EXERCISE. 

it  should  be  first  thoroughly  and  minutely  explained  ;  and  as  soon  as  all 
have  heard  and  appear  to  understand,  execute  it.  If  not  correctly  performed, 
repeat  the  explanation. 

233.  When  the  individuals  of  each  gun's  crew  have  become  well  ac 
quainted  with,  and  expert  in  the  performance  of  their  several  special  duties, 
they  are  to  be  successively  transferred,  temporarily,  to  the  performance  of 
the  duties  of  some  other  station,  until  each  man  shall  have  become  ac 
quainted  with  the  special  duties  of  every  station  at  the  gun. 

In  exercising  each  man  of  a  gun's  crew  in  the  duties  of  all  the  other  men 
of  that  crew  besides  his  own,  it  is  to  be  done  thus  : 

The  system  supposes  that,  beginning  with  the  2d  Captain  to  take  the 
place  of  the  1st  Captain,  the  men  are  to  be  called  to  perform  the  duties  of 
the  latter  in  a  regular  succession  agreeably  to  the  way  they  are  placed  at 
the  gun ;  i.  e.,  after  the  2d  Captain,  the  2d  Train-tackleman  is  to  do  the 
duties  of  Gun  Captain  ;  and  so  on  all  round  the  gun.  Each  man  is  to  fleet 
his  position  one  remove  or  place,  in  a  direction  "  with  the  sun,"  so  that  in 
stead  of  the  interchange  of  duties  being  confined  to  two  individuals  only,  it 
is  to  extend  to  the  whole  gun's  crew.  Thus,  for  instance,  when  the  2d  Cap 
tain  is  called  upon  to  do  the  duties  of  1st  Captain,  the  latter,  by  moving  one 
place  "with  the  sun,"  becomes  the  1st  Train-tackleman,  the  1st  Train-tackle 
man  the  1st  Port-tackleman,  and  so  on  all  around  the  gun  throughout  the 
whole  crew,  the  person  at  the  muzzle  of  the  gun  on  its  left  side  crossing 
over  and  taking  the  place  of  the  one  at  the  muzzle  on  the  right  side.  Next 
in  order,  the  2d  Train-tackle,  is  required  to  take  the  place  of  the  1st  Captain, 
then  the  2d  Captain  becomes  1st  Train-tackle.,  the  1st  Captain  the  1st 
Port-tackleman,  the  2d  Port-tackleman  the  2d  Captain,  and  so  on  through 
out. 

If  it  should  be  desired  to  take,  at  first,  a  man  from  the  middle  of  the 
crew  of  the  gun,  or  even  still  further  towards  the  muzzle,  to  do  the  duties  of 
1st  Captain,  then  it  must  be  done  under  the  supposition  that  all  the  men 
preceding  him  in  the  order  above  mentioned  have  already  been  exercised  in 
those  duties,  and  the  men  are  then  to  take  their  stands  accordingly. 

After  the  guns'  crews  have  been  well  trained  by  giving  the  words  of  com 
mand,  it  will  be  expedient  to  exercise  them  without  giving  the  several  de 
tailed  commands,  by  directing  them  to  "  load  and  fire  !"  At  this  command 
the  different  individuals  should,  each  in  proper  order  of  time,  silently  per 
form  his  prescribed  duties  of  sponging,  loading,  running  out,  training,  and 
pointing,  the  Captain  of  the  gun  regulating  the  elevation  and  depression,  by 
raising  or  lowering  his  hand,  and  by  holding  it  horizontally  and  steady  when 
the  gun  is  "  well ;"  and  in  pointing,  by  moving  his  hand  to  "  right"  or  "  left" 
as  the  gun  requires  to  be  trained,  and  by  bringing  it  down  to  his  side  when  it 
is  "  well."  Before  firing,  he  is  to  throw  his  hand  well  up  as  a  signal  for  the  men 
to  "  drop  tackles,1"  and  is  to  give  the  word  "  fire"  when  he  pulls  the  lock-string. 


EXERCISE   OF  BROADSIDE- GUNS — ON  ONE  SIDE   ONLY.          57 

When  casualties  occur  at  the  guns,  the  Captain  of  the  gun  will  order 
"  close  up,"  and  then  equalize  the  crew  on  each  side.  If  the  Powderraan  is 
disabled  the  highest  number  takes  his  place. 

234.  Whenever  the  crew  of  a  gun  becomes  so  greatly  reduced  in  action 
that  men   enough   arc  not  left  to  work  the  piece,  it  may  be  fired  while 
partially  run  in.     In  such  case,  however,  the  breeching  should  be  frapped 
forward   of  the   carriage,  the   ends  crossed  under  the  muzzle  or  otherwise 
arranged  so  as  to  keep  the  muzzle  outside  of  the  port ;  the  side-tackles  left 
loose ;  the  chocldng-quoins  placed  square   up  against  the  outer  part  of  the 
front  trucks;  the  train-tackle  hauled  taut,  the  end  of  the  fall  passed  through 
the  train-bolt  and  well  secured,  and  wet  swabs  placed  up  against  the  forward 
part  of  the  rear  trucks  and  sprinkled  with  sand  or  ashes.     After  three  or 
four  rounds  the  train-tackle  should  be  re-secured ;  the  chocking-quoins  will 
require  re-placing  after  each  fire.     The  greatest  possible  care  should  be  taken 
to  guard  against  accident  from  fire,  and  minimum  charges  of  powder  used. 

Experiment  proves  that  a  gun  may  be  fired  in  this  manner  without  injury 
to  the  ship's  side  or  the  breeching,  and  by  three  or  four  men. 

It  must  be  apparent  to  every  officer  that  both  the  rapidity  and  the  ac 
curacy  of  fire  to  be  obtained  from  guns  in  vessels  at  sea,  must  depend,  in  ?i 
great  degree,  upon  the  care  which  may  be  taken  to  explain  to  the  men  the 
best  mode  of  performing  their  respective  parts  of  the  exercise,  and  the  par 
ticular  object  for  which  each  part  is  intended,  and  especially  on  such  fre 
quency  of  exercise  and  target-firing  as  will  make  the  men  perfectly  familiar 
with  their  prescribed  duties.  The  importance  of  this  instruction,  which 
may  decide  whether  an  action  shall  result  in  victory  or  defeat,  will,  it  is 
hoped,  insure  due  attention  to  it  from  all  officers,  and  especially  from  the 
officers  of  divisions  at  quarters. 

THE  GUNS  ON  ONE   SIDE  BEING  MANNED, 

TO  CHANGE  SIDES, 

OR  BOTH  SIDES  BEING  MANNED, 

TO  MAN  ONE  SIDE  ONLY; 

COMMAND. 

"MAN  THE  STARBOARD  (OR  PORT)  GUNS!" 

235.  Whenever  this  or  any  other  order  is  given  which  requires  all  the 
men  suddenly  to  leave  the  gun  which  they  are  working,  they  are  not  to  do 
so  until    it  is  properly  loaded,  and  well  secured  by  hauling  taut  the  side  and 
train  tackles,  and  hitching  their  falls  around  the  straps  of  the  inner  blocks ; 
nor  on  lower    decks   of  ships-of-the-line  till  the   ports  are    down   and   se 
cured  by  their  lanyards.     A  strict  compliance  with  this  injunction  is  indis 
pensable  to  guard  against  excessive  or  imperfect  loading  and  other  accidents. 

When  these  precautions  have  been  duly  taken,  the  men  will  shift  over  in 
obedience  to  the  command. 


58  DUTIES  AT  QUARTERS,   IN   BATTLE   OR  EXERCISE. 


EXERCISE  OF  BROADSIDE-GUNS, 

ON  BOTH  SIDES  AT  ONCE,  BY  MANNING  ALTERNATE  GUNS  WITH  FULL 

CREWS. 

236.  In  the  event  of  being  required  to  fight  both  sides,  it  is  generally 
conceded  that  a  more  effective  fire  is  maintained  by  handling  alternate  guns 
with  full  crews. 

In  this  case  the  preparatory  order  will  be  given  : 

"SILENCE!  MAN  BOTH  SIDES,  EVERY  OTHER  GUN  WITH  FULL  CREWS." 

Upon  which  the  guns'  crews  of  the  guns  of  the  starboard  watch  will  man 
the  odd-numbered  guns  on  the  starboard  side,  and  the  guns'  crews  of  the 
port  watch  will  man  the  even-numbered  guns  on  the  port  side,  and  the  ex 
ercise  will  be  the  same  as  prescribed  for"  broadside  guns  on  one  side  onlv." 

MANNING  ALL  THE  GUNS. 

GENERAL    REMARKS. 

237*  Arrangements  have  been  made  to  enable  each  gun's  crew  to  work 
together  and  fire  alternately  a  pair  of  guns  on  the  same  side  of  tne  deck. 
Experience,  however,  shows  that  this  can  only  be  continued  with  effect  for 
three  or  four  rounds,  and  is  in  general  results  inferior  to  those  obtained  by 
manning  alternate  guns  with  full  crews. 


QUICK  FIRING. 

238§  The  service  of  the  guns  consists,  essentially,  of  two  distinct  parts, 
pointing  and  loading.  The  first  of  these,  pointing,  cannot  be  performed  too 
carefullv  and  methodically,  and  requires  extreme  coolness  and  attention  on 
the  part  of  the  Captain  of  the  gun ;  loading,  on  the  contrary,  cannot  be 
executed  with  too  much  rapidity,  provided  neither  the  safety  of  the  gun  nor 
of  its  crew  be  compromised. 

It  is  clear  that  if  two  hostile  vessels  meet  equally  matched  in  all  the 
ordinary  points  of  equipment  and  preparation,  and  manned  by  crews  equally 
skilled  in  gunnery,  the  advantage  will  be  in  favor  of  the  ship  that  loads 
quickest;  and  should  it  happen  that  nicety  of  aim  becomes  a  matter  of 
secondary  importance,  in  consequence  of  the  closeness  of  the  action,  then, 
evidently,  rapidity  of  fire  will  determine  the  affair. 

These  considerations  appear  decisive,  and  every  care  should  be  taken  in 
the  instruction  of  guns'  crews,  that  pointing  be  executed  with  deliberation, 
care,  and  method,  and  loading  with  all  possible  dispatch.  In  order,  there 
fore,  to  insure  the  great  advantage  of  rapid  firing,  officers  are  enjoined  fre- 


EXEECISE   OF  BROADSIDE-GUNS— ON  BOTH  SIDES  AT  ONCE.      59 


qnentlv  to  exercise  the  crews  in  setting  the  cartridge,  shot,  and  wad  home 
together,  in  one  motion,  of  such  guns  as  may  be  loaded  in  this  manner, 
without  inconvenience.  This  is  the  case  with  all  the  guns,  chambered  as 
well  as  unchambered,  excepting  the  8-inch  shell-gun  of  63  cwt.  of  patterns 
earlier  than  1851 ;  it  is  not  recommended,  however,  to  practise  simultaneous 
loading  with  guns  of  higher  calibre,  such  as  IX-inch  and  upwards,  as 
nothing  will  be  gained  by  it  in  point  of  time. 

To  prevent  the  shot  from  rolling  on  the  tie  of  the  cartridge  and  jamming 
it,  the  end  of  the  cartridge-bag,  outside  of  the  tie,  should  be  shortened  as 
much  as  security  will  permit,  unless  it  has  been  specially  prepared  for  this 
use,  by  stitching  back  the  end  in  the  form  of  a  cockade. 

With  the  view  of  affording  the  Loader  a  certain  and  independent  means 
of  knowing  when  the  whole  load  is  really  home,  the  handle  of  the  rammer 
should  have  a  mark  upon  it,  easily  distinguishable  either  by  day  or  night, 
and  this  should  be  suited  to  the  "  ordinary  firing"  charge  of  powder,  due 
allowance  being  made  for  the  others. 

COMMAND. 
"LOAD  IN  ONE  MOTION!" 

239,  The  Loader  receives  the  cartridge  and  puts  it  in  the  gun,  as  already 
described;  he  also  receives  the  shell  or  shot  and  wad  and  introduces  them 
accordingly. 

As  soon  as  the  whole  charge  has  been  introduced,  the  Sponger  and  Loader 
together  thrust  it  down  smartly  with  the  rammer,  as  in  ordinary  loading. 
When  home,  the  men  run  the  gun  out  as  quickly  as  possible;  the  Captain 
of  the  gun  clears  the  vent,  primes  in  running  out,  points  and  lires  in  the 
usual  manner,  but  as  rapidly  as  is  consistent  with  a  good  aim,  taking  care 
that  the  muzzle  is  clear  of  the  port-sill,  and  on  lower  decks  that  the  port  is 
triced  up  clear  of  the  explosion. 

SHIFTING  BREECHINGS  IN  ACTION. 

COMMAND. 

"SPONGE,  LOAD,  AND  SHIFT  BREECHING!" 

240,  Supposing  the  gun's  crew  to  be  reduced  to  six  men  and  the  Powder- 
boy,  that  being  the  least  number  required  to  perform  the  evolution,  and  the 
gun  to  be  discharged  and  run  in.     The  Captain  hauls  taut  the  train-tackle 
and  chokes  the  luff,  and  the  Loader  and  Sponger  place  the  chocking-quoins 
forward  of  the  front  trucks,  and  proceed  to  sponge  and  load  the  gun  in  the 
usual  manner.     The  2d  Sponger  and  2d  Loader  haul  taut  side-tackles  and 
choke  luffs,  or,  if  rolling  deep,  hitch  the  falls  round  the  straps  of  the  blocks, 
and  then  unshackle  the  old  breeching  and  shackle  the  new,  which  is  to  bo 
brought  to  the  gun  by  the  2d  Captain. 

5 


60  DUTIES  AT   QUARTERS,   IN   BATTLE   OR  EXERCISE. 

The  Captain  removes  tlie  old  breeching  from,  and  places  and  secures  the 
bight  of  the  new  one  in  the  jaws  of  the  cascabel,  after  the  gun  is  sponged. 
The  2d  Captain  passes  the  old  breeching  amidships,  and  the  men  resume 
their  usual  duties  at  the  gun. 

When  there  are  more  than  six  men  at  the  gun,  the  2d  Sponger  and  2d 
Loader,  after  securing  the  side-tackle  falls,  will  assist  to  load  the  gun,  and 
the  additional  men  will  assist  in  unshackling  the  old  and  shackling  the  ne\v 
breeching,  but  one  of  these  will  do  all  the  duties  just  assigned  to  the  1st 
Captain,  so  as  not  to  interfere  with  his  ordinary  duties  in  loading. 

SHIFTING  TRUCKS. 

241.  The  operation  of  shifting  a  truck  can  only  be  required  when  the 
gun  is  "  run  in"  after  firing.  At  the  order  to  shift  any  one  of  the  trucks 
that  may  be  designated  : 

With  the  MARSILLY  CARRIAGE. — Heave  up  with  the  roller  handspike  under 
the  end  of  the  bracket  on  the  side  on  which  the  truck  is  to  be  removed  ; 
handspikemen  pass  inside  the  breeching  and  .place  their  handspikes  under 
the  axletree  as  near  the  truck  as  possible,  and,  assisted  by  5  and  6,  lift  the 
gun  while  the  shellman  removes  the  old  truck  and  side-tackleman  puts  on 
new  one. 

With  the  ORDINARY  CARRIAGE.— To  shift  a  rear  truck,  handspikemen  lift 
under  the  rear  axletree.  To  shift  a  front  truck  the  rear  truck  on  the  op 
posite  side  should  first  be  taken  off,  then  handspikemen  lift  under  the  fore 
axletree. 


~ 


111 


3       <r 


O  '-  r3        Z 

i  I  1'«- 

*     5-  »  *     b 

3  1  I  5  1 

cc     i-  r-i  a.   — 


Is 


I  = 


a         g   * 

^        II 

£       •«  ,= 


_  J 


SECTIONAL  VIEW  OF  XI   INCH  GUN  CARRIAGE  AMD  SLIDE 


CARRIAGE 

I  WOODEN     PARTS 

.1  .  ftvfflsi  Tivuisum.  si-iM-i-fl    (in- 
o]c\  .-iliitu    «  s   is  ul  so    tlic 
middle    iiviiisiim  . 

METAL     PARTS 
K  .  I !!  cvji  liny'    Sci-cv 
I.     S;l,i(r-.-s. 

N     Insidi-   JUIII-IIM!    pljiic. 
II     lli-.-n-ki-i    I. nils  . 


SLI  DE 

METAL     PARTS 

_Jf. I!    MicMIc  Tivunii.o  Ti-uok   will 

S.  Transport.! no  Trucks. Axlo 
T  (Vnidr  Pliiios  iiisid.>  of  i-.-i 


ivot  Holi 
h  .loui-i 
.X.lniii-, 


D  Vfin  y».>itr<istd,  P 


Julia* 


PLAN     OF     XI       I NCH 
GUN     CARRIAGE     ANDSLIDE 


WOODEN      P/XRTS 


X    Billions  duid   Slats  . 
T .  JEnevpjuej-  Bi?eechia^s 


METAL      PARTS 


1  .    \lidrll"  KullfM-platc 

2  .  >\*e.s  \\n-  T;icJdes  . 
:.',  .  lli.ii-UM-  Sn-aps  . 

I  .  Kail    H.alfs. 


D  Vim  N>,tb-afld,Pubh..shsr 


Jit/ins  .Bifti .  jrr 


PLAN  OFSL1DL  FOR  XI -INCH   GUN  CARRIAGE 


METAL      PARTS 

5.  Trttiusrpovtvng    journals 

6.  Pi.vot,  pUaes  &  guide -flanges 

7.  Middle  roller 


Note  A H  in ctri/  /w/v.v  jii'c  composition  fxcep't  th<j  axles,  levers,  elevating  £crew&.braciket-T)otts, 


I)  Vfin.2fvsfrii7idfubJi.shfr. 


JJT. 


EXERCISE   OF   PIVOT-GUNS. 


61 


EXERCISE    OF    PIVOT-GUNS. 

XI-INOH  SHELL-GUN 

(As  an  exampk.) 

242.  Arranged  k>  traverse  on  circles  fitted  with  Bossed  Sockets  for  pivot 
ing,  and  with  clevis-bolts  and  sockets  for  housing. 

EQUIPMENTS  AND  IMPLEMENTS. 


ARTICLES  FOR  EACH  GUN. 


WHERE  TIIKY  ARE  TO  BE  PUT  WHEX  THE  GCJN  is 
SECURED. 


Carriage  and  slide  complete,  with  ele 
vating  screw  and  pivot-bolts 

Two  front  roller  levers . 

Two  rear          do.         

Two  levers  for  training  and  shifting  trucks. 

Two  in-tackles 

Two  out-tackles 

Two  shifting-tackles 

Two  training-tackles 

Breeching 

Preventer  

Lashings  for  securing  gun 

Tompion,  with  wad  aiid  lanyard 

Sponge  and  cap 

Rammer 

A  pot  of  oil  or  prepared  grease  for  rifle 
cannon 

Lock,  with  string 

Vent-plug 

Lock-cover  and  strap 

Breech-sight  and  cover 

Reinforce- sight  and  cover 

Trunnion-sight 

Priming- wires 

Boring-bits 

Water-buckets  and  large  swab 

Hand-swabs 

Selvagee-wads 

Battle-axes,  as  allowed  (Art.  101) 

Two  transporting  axles  and  trucks 

One  shell  in  box 

Shell-bearer 

Rail  transom-chocks1 . . 


In  place. 
>•  Becketed  to  brackets. 

Hooked  in  place. 

Do.         do. 
Made  up  on  slide. 

Do.         do. 
In  place. 

Do. 

Do. 

Do. 

[  Becketed  to  beams  between  decks,  or 
\      inside  the  brackets. 


Breast  of  carriage. 
In  place. 

In  place  on  gun. 

Do.         do. 

Do.         do. 
In  box  between  decks. 

Inside  brackets. 

Hold,  until  wanted. 
Breast  of  carriage. 

Do.  do. 

On  breast-transom. 
la  storeroom,  at  hand. 
On  slide. 

Do. 
Under  rails. 


1  These  should  always  be  kept  under  the  centre  transom  when  the  carriage  is  not  in  use;  also  iu 
tiring  at  high  angles  of  elevation  to  relievo  the  rails  of  the  shock. 


62 


DUTIES   AT   QUARTERS,    IN   BATTLE   OR   EXERCISE. 


STATIONS  AND  GUN-NUMBERS. 

243.  The  following  are  to  be  the  gun-numbers  and  stations  for  a  gun's  crew 
of  twenty-five,  including  the  Powderman,  the  Xl-inch  shell-gun  being  taken 
as  an  example : 


LEFT  SIDE. 

GUN 

•Nos. 

EIGHT  SIDE. 

First  Loader  

3 

4 

First  Sponger. 

5 

6 

Second  Sponger. 

First  Shellman       .  .          ... 

7 

8 

Second  Shellman 

First  Front-Leverman 

9 

10 

Second  Front-Lcverrnan 

First  Comprcssman 

13 

14 

Second  Comprcssman 

First  Rear-Leverman  

11 

12 

Second  Rear-Leverman. 

r 

r 

181 
20 

L 

Tacklemen. 

First  Train-Leverman 

21 
^23 
15 

22 
24J 
1G 

Second  Train-Leverman. 

First  Captain                                  . 

1 

2 

Second  Captain. 

P  o  w  de  rma  n 

25 

To  reduce  from  24  men  and  Powderman  to  20,  omit  four  highest  numbers. 

To  reduce  from  20  men  and  Powderman  to  16  men  and  Powderman, 
omit  four  next  highest  numbers. 

To  reduce  from  16  men  and  Powderman  to  12  men  and  Powder-boy,  omit 
four  highest  numbers;  7,  9,  and  10  become  Pikemen,  11  and  12  Compress- 
men  and  Train-Levermen,  in  addition  to  other  duties. 

To  reduce  from  12  men  and  boy  to  10  men  and  boy,  omit  two  highest 
numbers;  5  becomes  Pikcman,  V  becomes  Fireman,  9  and  10  Compressor 
and  Train-Levermen,  in  addition  to  other  duties. 


EXERCISE   FOR   PIVOT-GUNS.  63 


EXEECISE  FOE  HEAVY  GUNS 

MOUNTED  ON  PIVOT-CARRIAGES. 
XI-iNCH  SHELL-GUN.     (As  an  example?) 

244.  The  gun  is  supposed  to  be  secured  amidships,  fore  and  aft,  over  the 
housing  pivot,  and  not  loaded. 

The  exercise  will  proceed  in  conformity  to  the  following  words  of  com 
mand,  viz  : 

I.  "  SILENCE  !     CAST  LOOSE  AND  PROVIDE  !" 

II.  "RuN  IN!" 

III.  "  SHIFT  PIVOT  !"     (To  THE  RIGHT  OR  LEFT  !) 

IV.  "  SERVE  VENT  AND  SPONGE  !" 
V.  "LOAD!" 

VI.    "  RUN  OUT  !" 
VII.    "PRIME!" 
VIII.    "POINT!" 
IX.    "READY— FIRE!" 
X.    "  SHIFT  TO  HOUSING-PIVOT,  AND  SECURE  !" 

JV.  B. — It  is  always  to  be  understood  that  when  any  of  their  respective 
duties  under  one  command  are  executed,  the  men  will  at  once  proceed  to  pre 
pare  for  those  which  follow  next  in  order.  The  exercise  must  be  considered  as 
a  whole,  though  the  details  are  necessarily  divided  under  the  several  words  of 
command. 

EXERCISE  OF  PIVOT  XI-IN.  CANNON. 

GUN   SECURED   FOR  SEA  AMIDSHIPS. 

I.       "  SILENCE  !     CAST  LOOSE  AND  PROVIDE  !" 

245.  No.  1,  Commands;    sees  his  gun   cleared  and  cast  loose;    circles 
cleared  and  swept ;    tackles  hooked  ;    levers  shipped ;    lock  and  sights  in 
place;  elevating  apparatus,  pivot-bolts,  and  compressors  in  working  order; 
takes  off  lock-cover  and  hands  it  to  23,  who  lays  it  clear  of  circle  :  provides 
himself  with   waist-belt  and  primers,  priming-wire,  boring-bit,  and  thumb- 
stall  ;    and  sees  that  all  the  gear  and  implements  are  ready  for  use,  and  the 
men  at  their  respective  stations. 

No.  2,  Takes  off  sight-covers  and  hands  them  to  22,  who  lays  them  clear 
of  circle;  removes  rail-chocks  and  assists  in  casting  loose.  He  provides 
waist-belt  and  primers,  and  sees  that  the  men  on  his  side  of  the  gun  execute 
promptly  their  several  duties. 


64  DUTIES   AT   QUARTERS,    IX   BATTLE   OR  EXERCISE. 

CAST    LOOSE. 

(Diagram  No.  1.) 

Clear  away  the  Bulwarks 15.16.17.18.23.24. 

Lashings  of  Gun — Adrift 3.4.11.12. 

In-Tackles — Cast  loose 15.16. 

Out-Tackles — Cast  loose 13.14. 

Training-Tackles — Cast  loose 19.20.21.22.23.24. 

IMPLEMENTS QB.  GUNNER. 

Powder 25. 

Shells,  Shell-Ladle,  &c 7.8. 

Sponge    f 

T>  v  Take  down 5.6. 

Karnraer  \ 

Front  Carriage-Levers,  Ship1 '      9.1 0. 

Rear  Carriage-Levers — Ship 11.12. 

Slide-Levers — Ship  forward 15.16. 

Sight-Covers — Take  off.     2d  Capt.  and  hands  to  22. 
Buckets  of  Water8— Fill ; 
Wet  Swabs — Bring. 


r2— Fill ;  ) 

ing.          j     5>6' 


Outer  Tackles  hook  as  j  to  Deck 21.22. 

Shifting-Tackles        j  to  Slide. 23.24. 

to  Deck..  17.18. 


Inner  Tackle3  hook  -j  , 

I  to  Slide 19.20. 

Attend  Compressors 13.14. 

A,       T    ™     tl  (  11.15.17.10.21.23. 

Man  In-Tackle . .    , .  J 

(  12.16.18.20.22.24. 

Af      n      •        T  (  Front.     9.10. 

Man  Carriage-Levers J 

(  Rear.       11.12. 

1  When  the  trucks  are  to  be  brought  into  play,  the  levers  should  be  shipped  on  their 
axle-squares  so  as  to  heave  upwards,  past  the  centre,  and  rest  against  the  wood  of  the 
Carriage  or  Slide ;  otherwise  they  must  be  kept  in  place  by  hand  or  by  a  pin,  neither 
of  which  entirely  secures  the  Levers  from  flying  back  and  doing  mischief.     If  hove 
down,  they  are  apt  to  interfere  with  the  Tackles. 

In  order  to  ship  the  Levers  expeditiously  on  the  proper  square,  both  are  to  be  marked 
with  a  cold  chisel. 

The  Fore  Carriage-Levers  require  the  efforts  of  two  men  at  each,  as  the  weight  of  the 
gun  has  most  bearing  there ;  each  of  the  other  levers  is  readily  worked  by  one  man. 

2  Principally  to  moisten  the  Sponge,  which  ought  never  to  be  omitted,  as  there  is 
nothing  so  effectual  in  extinguishing  any  fragments  that  might  remain  burning  in  the 
Bore,  and  cause  accidental  explosion  in  loading,  particularly  in  blank  firing.     It  is  a 
mistake  to  suppose  that  this  practice  increases  the  foulness  of  the  Bore ;  on  the  con 
trary,  it  prevents  it  from  hardening  and  accumulating,  as  long  experience  has  shown. 
Sometimes  it  is  convenient  for  the  Spongers  to  dip  the  Sponge  alongside,  and  they  soon 
acquire  the  habit.     Superfluous  moisture  is  easily  gotten  rid  of  by  twirling  the  Sponge 
at  the  handle. 

3  Were  it  practicable  to  hook  a  tackle  so  that  it  would  move  the  gun;  even  from  amid- 


STATIONS  BEFORE  CASTING  LOOSE. 
:iin    No.l.j 


21     23       19 

17  15        IU 


11         9 


20       24:      2 
16  18 


STAND  BY  TO  RUN  IN 
[Diaqi:H  m  No.gTj 


Jtdxus  Bi*n  .  j>r 


EXERCISE   FOR  PIVOT-GUNS.  65 

246.  STAND  BY  TO  RUN  IN. 

(Diagram  No.  2.) 

Ease  Compressors4  and  go  to  In-Tackles 13.14. 

(  Front.  3.9.  and  4.10. 
Up  Carriage-Levers' -j 


Tend  Out-Tackles 5.6. 

II.   "RUN  IN  I"6 

f  11.13.15.17.19.21.23. 
Haul  on  In-Tackles -j  12.i4.io.l8.20.22.24. 

Out-Tackle  block— Unhook  from  Slide,  )      Q 

to  leave  room  for  hooking  Inner  Shifting-Tackle j 

(  Front.    3.9.  and  4.10. 
Down  Carriage-Levers -j  p^ar          1 1  19 

Tauten  Compressors 13.14. 

247,  STAND  BY  TO  PIVOT. 

(Diagram  No.  3.) 

Draw  Fore  Pivot-Bolt 3.4. 

Up  Shifting  Slide-Levers 15.16. 

f  3.11. 5.9.13.15.17.19.21.23. 

|ll  II 

Man  Outer  Shifting-Tackle 4  or    or  or       or 

II  II 

[4.12.6.10.14.16.18.20.22.24. 

Attend  opposite  Outer  Shifting-Tackle 19.3.  or  20.4. 

Stand  by  to  hook  Inner  Tackle,  )     17  or  IS 

when  the  Outer  Shifting-Tackle  is  a-block j 

ships  to  the  port,  without  being  shifted,  or  were  it  prudent  to  leave  the  gun  free  while 
shifting  the  tackle,  there  would  be  no  need  of  a  second  tackle.  But  it  is  not  possible,  in 
pivoting,  to  exert  direct  action  for  more  than  the  eighth  of  a  circle  by  one  position  of  a 
tackle,  and  it  is  absolutely  dangerous  at  sea  to  leave  the  Slide  unconfined  for  an  instant. 
When,  therefore,  the  Outer-Tackle  is  a-block,  the  second  tackle  must  be  hooked  and  set 
taut. 

4'  5> G  These  orders  are  to  be  executed  in  quick  succession,  so  as  to  be  nearly  simultane 
ous  ;  that  is,  the  compression  is  first  relieved  by  backing  its  lever,  upon  which  the 
Front-Levermen  instantly  bring  the  carriage  on  its  trucks,  and  the  gun  is  run  back  by 
the  In-Tackles,  the  Out-Tackles  being  eased  gradually,  so  as  to  check  any  violent  move 
ment  ;  for  the  trucks,  being  fitted  with  friction  rollers,  allow  the  heavy  piece  to  move 
suddenly  and  rapidly. 


66  DUTIES  AT   QUARTERS,  IN  BATTLE   OR  EXERCISE. 

III.    "PIVOT  TO   RIGHT  OR  LEFT!" 

(Diagram  No.  3.) 

3.11.5.9.13.15.17.19.21.23.* 

II  II 

Haul  on — Outer  Shifting-Tackle7 •<  or      or  or        or 

!      I  I       I 

1 4.12.6.10.14.16.18.20.22.24. 

Ease  away  opposite  Shifting-Tackle 19.3  or  20.4. 

Hook  to  Slide,  Inner  Tackle  and  Haul  Taut 17.  or  18. 

Unhook  Outer  Shifting- Tackles 21.22.23.24. 

In  Fore  Pivot-Bolt 3.  or  4. 

CM  -A.  T         m    1 1  (To  rear  of  Slide. .  19.20. 

Shift  Inner  Tackles  as  Tram-Tackles  -J  _ 

I  To  Deck 17.18. 

Down  Shitting  Slide-Levers,  unship  them  and  ship  ) 

them  on  Rear  Slide  Training-Trucks8 J       15'1G' 

Hook  Out-Tackle  Block  to  Slide 5.6. 

Take  stations  for  next  order— which,  if  the  gun  is  loaded,  will  be  "  Run 
Out ;"  if  not  loaded,  will  be  "  Sponge."9 
When  the  Gun  is  Run  Out — 

Shackle  Breeching10 3.13.— 4.14. 

Draw  the  Rear  Pivot-Bolt..  2. 


*  Other  numbers  may  bo  called  to  assist,  if  needed. 

7  The  pivoting  of  so  heavy  a  Gun  is  the  most  complicated  of  all  the  operations  with 
it,  and  demands  special  drill.  When  done  to  windward,  the  hearty  effort  of  the  whole 
Gun's  crew  is  required,  particularly  if  there  be  much  crown  to  the  deck  and  no  deck 
circles ;  to  leeward  there  is  no  difficulty,  and  the  time  at  sea  to  pivot  from  side  to  side 
may  vary  from  four  to  seven  minutes.  The  advantage  of  the  Pivot-Boss  will  now 
appear,  ns  it  secures  the  coincidence  of  the  hole  in  Slide  with  that  of  the  Socket,  and 
permits  the  Bolt  to  be  removed  out  or  in  easily.  Hitherto  the  difficulty  of  doing  F;O 
without  a  Boss  has  caused  delay,  and  contributed  more  than  any  thing  else  to  the  objec 
tions  entertained  against  such  heavy  Ordnance,  which  have  been  in  nowise  obviated 
by  either  the  Pivot  Shifting-Screws  of  our  own  oSTavy,  or  the  Pivot-Flap  of  the  English 
Navy. 

K  Some  difference  of  opinion  may  arise  in  regard  to  the  shipping  of  these  levers  before 
the  gun  is  run  out,  and  they  are  required  for  pointing.  To  ship  them  now  amounts 
to  having  them  on  the  whole  time — to  which  the  only  objection  is,  that  if  on,  before 
wanted  in  pointing  they  may  be  in  the  way  of  the  men ;  and,  on  the  other  hand,  if  not 
on,  more  attention  may  be  demanded  from  15,  16. 

The  question  will  not  bo  material  when  the  men  are  well  drilled. 

9  The  gun  being  now  pivoted  to  the  Port,  the  Breechings  should  be  shackled  and 
the  rear  Pivot-Bolt  drawn,  in  regular  order.  But  neither  of  these  can  be  done  without 
running  out  the  gun  a  few  feet.  For  in  order  to  pivot  with  the  greatest  ease,  the  car 
riage  had  been  previously  run  back  on  the  Slide  to  the  rear  Hurter,  so  as  to  bring  the 
weight  of  the  gun  as  near  as  possible  to  the  Rear  pivot,  the  very  best  position  being 
with  the  Trunnions  of  the  Gun  just  forward  of  the  Rear  pivot.  The  shackling  of  the 


STAND    BY    TO    PIVOT 

STARBOARD 
[Diagram  JTo.3.] 


ID  Vnn.Nus.h-arid,Pni>! 


Julvas  Me/i ,  pr. 


SPONGE-  LOAD 

;  mart-tun  \,.  4 ; 


RAMMER 
20 


1)  \',,,l  .\t,*l,-<>tul  Publishe 


Julius  EUJI^,  vr. 


EXERCISE   FOR  PIVOT-GUNS.  67 

IV.  "SERVE  VENT  AND  SPONGE!" 
(Diagram  No.  4.) 

248,  No.  4  is  to  receive  the  moist  sponge  from  No.  6,  right  hand  over,  left 
under,  to  send  it  home,  and,  assisted  by  No.  3,  to  press  it  to  the  bottom  of 
the  Bore,  then  to  turn  it  around  two  or  three  times  from  left  to  right,  in 
the  direction  that  the  worm  may  take,11  withdraw  it,  strike  the  staff  several 
smart  taps  under  the  muzzle,  then  return  it  to  No.  6,  who  will  receive  it 
and  lay  it  down  ;12  the  Gun  Captain  serves,  then  stops  the  Vent,13  and  as 
soon  as  the  sponge  has  been  withdrawn,  serves  the  Vent  with  his  priming- 
wire  and  again  stops  it. 

This  being  done — 

No.  20  hands  the  Rammer  to  No.  4  as  soon  as  the  latter  has  been  relieved 
of  the  Sponge  by  No.  6.  Should  No.  4  observe  that  the  Gun  Captain  has 
neglected  to  serve  the  Vent,  he  is  to  call  his  attention  to  it. 

No.  3  stands  ready  with  the  Powder  which  he  has  taken  from  No.  5,  to 
whom  it  was  passed  by  No.  25. 

Nos.  7,  8,  open  the  Shell-Box,  disengage14  the  Shell,  and  place  it  in  the 
Ladle,  in  readiness  to  pass  to  Nos.  3  and  5.  (Special  drill.) 

Breeching  and  the  removal  of  the  Bolt  are,  therefore,  deferred  until  the  Gun  has  been 
run  out  in  the  subsequent  proceedings. 

The  Breeching  is  always  to  be  shackled  to  the  Ship's  side— not  to  the  Slide,  which 
needlessly  strains  the  pivoting,  and  also  causes  the  shackle  with  its  appliances  to  inter 
fere  with  the  working  parts  at  the  forward  end  of  the  Slide. 

10  It  is  generally  expected  that  the  Compressors  are  to  supersede  the  necessity  for  a 
Breeching.     But  experience  shows  that  in  firing  it  is  better  to  rely  habitually  on  the 
Breeching,  and  use  the  Compressors  to  assist.     Thus,  in  firing  to  windward  at  Sea,  the 
Compressors  are  always  to  be  set,  but  only  so  hard  as  may  be  required  to  ease  the  shock 
on  the  Breeching.     In  liring  to  leeward,  the  Compressors  are  not  wanted,  except  to 
secure  the  gun  in  its  place  when  in.     When  the  Ship  is  not  steady,  but  rolling,  the  dis 
cretion  is  to  be  exercised. 

The  Preventer,  or  Inner  Breeching,  will  be  found  indispensable  to  avoid  accident 
when  running  out  to  leeward  in  a  sea-way.  For  with  a  trained  crew,  and  all  precaution 
in  handling  the  levers  and  In-Tackles,  there  is  a  liability  to  the  gun  getting  away,  in 
which  case  it  moves  out  with  great  violence,  and  may  do  serious  damage.  On  one  such 
occasion  on  Xl-in.  gun  cracked  the  stout  iron  straps  of  the  Compressors,  and  seemed 
but  just  prevented  from  freeing  itself  entirely  and  going  overboard  over  the  Port-sill. 
Not  being  able  to  replace  the  Straps,  the  Compressors  were  useless  till  late  in  the 
cruise.  Preventer  Breechings  were  then  fitted,  and  answered  so  well  that  the  prac 
tice  was  continued  at  sea  as  usual.  They  now  form  part  of  the  equipment  of  all  Xl-in. 
guns,  and  should  be  just  taut  when  the  gun  is  out,  and  the  Trucks  of  the  Carriage 
reach  but  do  not  ascend  the  curve  of  the  forward  Hurter. 

11  This  is  to  detach  from  the  bottom  of  the  Chamber  the  fragments  of  burnt  Flannel 
that  are  apt  to  adhere  and  solidify. 

ia  This  practice  encumbers  the  deck,  and  interferes  materially  at  times  with  the 
management  of  the  gun.  Trial  was  therefore  made  on  board  the  Plymouth,  where  the 
gun  was  on  a  covered  deck,  of  hooks  attached  to  the  beams  above,  near  each  piece,  in 
which  the  Sponges  and  Rammers  were  placed  after  having  been  used.  The  only  objoc- 


68  DUTIES  AT  QUARTERS,  IN  BATTLE   OR  EXERCISE. 

V.  "LOAD!" 
(Diagram  No.  4.) 

249.  No.  3  places  the  charge  in  the  muzzle,  seam  from  the  Vent,"  small 
end  in,  and  pushes  it  well  into  the  Bore. 

No.  4,  who  stands  ready  with  the  Rammer,  enters  it  into  the  muzzle,  and 
pushes  the  charge  home  steadily,  until  the  mark  on  the  Rammer  handle 
shows  the  charge  to  be  in  place.18  No.  3  assists  with  one  hand,  and  the 
charge  is  on  no  account  to  be  struck." 

Whilst  No.  4  withdraws  the  Rammer,  Nos.  7,  8  each  take  a  handle  of  the 
Ladle,  lift  up  the  Shell,18  and,  assisted  by  No.  5,  pass  it  on  to  Nos.  3  and  4, 
who  enter  the  shell  into  the  muzzle,  sabot  first  and  Fuze  out,  as  soon  as  the 
Rammer  is  clear  of  the  muzzle. 

As  the  Shell  lies  just  fair  with  the  muzzle,  No.  3  removes  the  cap  from 
Fuze,19  which  is  passed  along  to  the  Gun  Captain,  and  pushes  the  Shell 
into  the  Bore. 

No.  4  enters  the  Rammer,  and,  assisted  by  No.  3,  pushes  in  the  shell 
until  the  mark  on  the  handle  shows  it  to  be  in  place.  It  is  most  strictly 
forbidden  to  strike  the  shell  with  the  Rammer.20 

No,  6  takes  the  Rammer  from  No.  4  and  lays  it  down,  or  lodges  it  over 
head  on  the  hooks.  Whilst  this  has  been  doing,  the  preparation  for  the 
next  order  is  to  go  on.21  Nos.  13,  14  ease  compressors,  if  no  motion.  If 
there  is,  they  stand  ready  to  ease  at  next  order.  The  Out-Tackles  are 
manned  by  Nos.  19,  21,  23,  IV,  15,  11,  13,  and  20,  22,  24,  18,  16,  12,  14. 
The  Inner  Tackles  tended  by  No.  2  and  Qr.  Gunner.  The  Front  Carriage- 
Levers  grasped  by  3,  9,  and  4,  10.  The  Rear  by  11,  12, 

tion  was,  that  too  much  time  might  be  lost  in  so  doing ;    but  after  continued  trials  this 
was  found  not  to  be  the  case,  when  the  men  had  been  properly  trained. 

13  Stopping  the  Yent  is  omitted  by  many  practised  artillerists,  as   unnecessary  in 
extinguishing  fragments  of  the  cartridges.     But  as  so  much  importance  has  been  and 
still  is  attached  to  its  performance,  and  it  costs  so  little  trouble,  it  seems  better  to  con 
tinue  the  practice,  particularly  when  so  many  accidents  occur  from  premature  explosion, 
not  only  to  untaught  and  careless  people,  in  saluting  on  holidays,  but  also  on  shipboard, 
where  they  ought  not  to  happen. 

14  Sometimes  the  box  has  been  fitted  too  tightly  to  the  Shell,  or  has  contracted  on  it, 
and  delay  is  caused  in  loading.     This  should  be  attended  to  in  season. 

15  Otherwise  the  stout  stuff  and  seams  found  necessary  with  heavy  charges  might 
resist  the  primer,  and  cause  a  failure  to  explode  the  powder. 

10  It  was  the  habit  at  the  Experimental  Battery,  and  in  the  experimental  cruiso  of  the 
Plymouth,  to  mark  the  handle  of  the  Rammer,  so  that  there  should  be  no  doubt  as 
to  the  charge  being  home.  This  is  always  useful,  but  particularly  so  in  case  of  the  gun 
bursting,  as  it  makes  sure  of  an  important  fact. 

17  It  is  a  common  practice  in  loading,  to  expend  much  zeal  in  striking  the  cartridge 
one  or  two  blows  to  insure  its  being  home,  which  is  quite  unnecessary  when  the  mark 
on  the  handle  affords  so  much  better  evidence  thereof. 


TO     LEEWARD 
[TVLagTtun   No.  6.] 


ti  Si  at .  pr 


EXERCISE  ^FOR  PIVOT-GUNS.  69 

VI.  "RUN  OUT  I" 
(Diagram  No.  5.) 

250.  The  mode  of  executing  this  order  will  vary  with  circumstances — by 
the  gun  being  to  windward  or  to  leeward,  and  by  the  nature  of  the  rollin^ 
motion. 

To  leeward,  and  with  much  motion,  the  tendency  is  to  go  out  with  dan 
gerous  violence.'2 

Therefore,  Nos.  5,  19,  21,  23,  17,  15,  13,  and  6,  20,  22,  24,  18,  16,  14, 
haul  cautiously  on  the  Out-Tackles,  the  Qr.  Gunner  aud  No.  2,  assisted  by 
15,  16,  holding  well  back  on  the  In-Tackles  with  a  turn  caught;  13,  14 
ease  the  compressors;  Nos.  3,  9,  and  4,  10  heave  up  the  Front  Carriage- 
Levers  ;  Nos.  11,  12  keep  down  the  Rear  Carriage-Levers,  unless  it  is  seen 
that  they  are  necessary. 

In  running  out  to  windward23  the  compressors  may  be  eased  at  once,  the 
In-Tackles  slacked,  the  Carriage  hove  up  on  its  trucks,  and  the  gun  run  out 
by  the  Out-Tacklemen,  assisted  by  any  of  the  numbers  not  employed  in 
other  duties,  \\hen  out,. the  Carriage-LeTers  are  let  down  promptly  and 
unshipped.  The  compressors  are  set24  and  Rear  Slide-Lever  shipped. 

18  The  Xl-in.  Shell  weighs,  when  loaded,  135  Ibs. ;  the  lifting  and  entering  it  into  the 
muzzle  was  one  of  the  objections  of  those  who  were  opposed  to  the  use  of  heavy 
calibres.     There  was  not  one  of  the  crew  of  the  Plymouth's  Xl-in.  gun  who  was  not 
found  able,  on  trial,  to  take  up  the  Shell  and  unassisted  to  put  it  in  the  Bore,  when  the 
ship  was  still.     At  sea  a  very  simple  implement  was  used — an  iron  segment  with  a 
bent  handle  on  opposite  sides.     The  Shellmen,  7,  8,  turned  the  shell  out  of  the  box  into 
this  ladle,  placed  on  the  deck  near  No.  3,  the  Loader,  who,  when  ready,  took  the  left 
handle,  and  No.  5  (the  2d  Loader)  the  right.     These  two  lifted  the  Shell  towards  the 
muzzle,  and  No.  4  (Sponger),  standing  on  the  Slide,  received  the  right  hand  from  No.  5 
as  soon  as  within  reach.     No.  3,  stepping  on  the  Slide,  and  No.  4  continued  to  raise  the 
Shell  to  the  muzzle,  which  was  not  difficult,  because  of  the  Bore  being  conveniently 
high  above  the  Slide  on  which  they  were  standing ;  the  Sabot  projecting  beyond  the 
Ladle  was  entered  into  the  muzzle,  and  the  Shell  pushed  in,  No.  5  taking  the  ladle  back 
and  laying  it  on  the  deck. 

19  As  this  is  very  firmly  fixed  in  the  recess  of  the  metal  stock,  it  is  to  bs  removed  by 
pulling  directly  on  the  tail,  which,  if  twisted,  will  be  likely  to  break,  and  thus  cause  a 
loss  of  time.     The  patch  is  passed  to  the  Gun  Captain,  who  puts  it  in  his  belt-box,  and  is 
afterwards  handed  to  the  Quarter  deck  by  the  Lieut,  of  Division,  in  order  to  verify  the 
number  of  shells  fired.     When  the  Fuze  has  been  uncovered,  care  must  be  taken  not  to 
let  it  be  touched  by  the  moisture  of  the  hand,  or  by  the  sea- water. 

20  As  the  blow  might  dislodge  the  priming  of  the  Fuze  and  prevent  its  ignition.     It 
is  well  to  dispense  with  any  wad,  even  a  grommet,  if  possible. 

21  A  good  exemplification  of  the  principle  assumed  for  this  exercise,  that  when  any 
one  of  the  men  has  executed  an  order,  he  shall  not  remain  in  position  until  the  order  is 
given  which  requires  him  elsewhere  ;  for  he  may  not  have  any  part  in  the  next  order, 
or  even  in  that  second  next,  as  occurs  after  pivoting,  when  only  a  few  numbers  partici 
pate  in  the  following  orders:  Sponge — Load,  the  remainder  only  doing  so  at  the  third 
following,  viz. :  Run  Out. 


70  DUTIES  AT  QUARTERS,  IN  BATTLE   OR  EXERCISE. 

VII.  "PRIME!" 
(Diagram  No.  6.) 

251.  The  Gun  Captain  again  makes  sure  that  the  Vent  is  clear,26  and  in 
so  doing  lets  his  wire  down  quickly  into  the  charge.25     If  all  is  right,  he 
inserts  a  primer. 

If  the  Slide-Levers  have  not  been  shipped,  or  have  been  unshipped,  they 
must  now  be  put  on  the  axles  of  the  Rear  Slide-Trucks — 15,  16. 
The  Rear  Train- Tackles  will  be  manned  by 
v       j  13.15.17.19.21.23.5. 
OS'  (  14.16.18.20.22.24.6. 

VIII.  "POINT!" 

252.  The  Gun  Captain  adjusts  or  verifies  the   Sliding-Bar  of  the  Rear 
sight  to  the  desired  range,27  and  steps  off  the  slide  directly  to  the  rear,  lock- 
lanyard  in  hand.     The  2d  Captain  takes  hold  of  the  Elevating  screw,28  15, 
16  heave  up  the  levers  of  Rear  Slide-Trucks,  and  the  Training-Tackles  are 
manned  by 

"     j  13.15.17.19.21.23.5. 

OS<  (  14.16.18.20.22.24.6. 

(Right  or  Left.) 

22  No  operation  with  this  gun  requires  more  care.     There  is  a  weight  of  20,000  Ibs. 
moving  on  friction  Rollers  along  a  metal  plate,  down  an  inclined  plane — if  once  per 
mitted  to  get  loose  and  to  be  propelled  by  the  motion  of  the  ship,  the  momentum  is  im 
mense,  and  must  disable  some  of  the  apparatus,  perhaps  the  Gun-Carriage  itself.     On 
such  an  occasion  the  preventer  breeching  is  invaluable,  and  will  be  the  best  safeguard, 
if  fitted  so  that  when  well  stretched  it  will  not  permit  the  fore  trucks  to  ascend  on  the 
curve  of  the  Fore-hurter.  for  it  is  this  which  strains  the  strap  of  the  Compressor.. 

Permitting  the  gun  to  go  out  with  much  force  also  displaces  the  shell,  whether  a 
grommet-wad  be  used  or  not. 

23  To  windward,  with  a  steady   inclination,  the   precautions   used  to  leeward  are 
unnecessary.     On  the  contrary,  the  difficulty  is  to  move  so  great  a  weight  up  the  inclined 
plane.     Therefore,  the  carriage  is  released  from  all  restraint,  and  all  the  available  force 
put  at  the  Out-Tackles,  taking  advantage  also  of  whatever  roll  there  may  be  to  wind 
ward. 

24  This  must,  of  course,  be  regulated  by  circumstances,  as  already  mentioned  in  Note  10 ; 
as  to  windward,  set  the  compressors  moderately ;  to  leeward,  not  at  all ;   off  the  wind, 
according  to  the  roll.     Let  the  compression  be  so  adjusted  as  to  allow  the  muzzle  just 
to  come  in. 

-5  It  is  an  old  custom  for  the  Gun  Captain  to  keep  the  Priming-Wire  in  the  vent  while 
the  loading  is  going  on,  feeling  from  time  to  time  if  the  charge  is  home.  It  is  a  bad 
practice,  because  there  is  a  liability  of  being  caught  by  the  charge  as  it  comes  along  the 
Bore,  and  having  the  wire  bent,  thus  spiking  the  vent,  for  a  while  at  least.  The  mark 
on  the  Rammer  handle  is  the  best  evidence  that  the  charge  is  in  place.  The  object  now 
is  only  to  clear  the  vent  of  pieces  of  cartridge  stuff,  which  not  unfrequently  get  into  the 
vent,  and  choke  it  so  as  to  prevent  the  primer  from  exploding  the  powder. 

20  Though  the  primers  seldom  fail  to  penetrate  the  flannel  stuff  of  the  cartridge,  it  is 


PRIME-POINT- FIRE 
a^'i'Hin  No. 6. 3 


U  Vim 


hilt ii*  Bivn  ,  [>r. 


EXERCISE  FOR   PIVOT-GUNS.  71 


IX.  "BEADY — FIRE!" 

253*  The  Gun  Captain,  with  lock-lanyard  just  taut  and  his  eye  ranging 
over  the  sights,  but  kept  well  down  to  the  bottom  of  the  notch  in  head  of 
gliding-bar,  and  over  the  point  of  middle  sight,  awaits  these  being  brought 
into  coincidence  by  the  roll  with  the  object,  which  is  always  the  WATER- 
LINE — the  Slide  being  trained  constantly  as  desired  by  voice  or  sign.29 

When  sure  of  his  aim,  the  Gun  Captain  draws  the  lock-lanyard  promptly 
and  firmly. 

If  the  primer  miss,  the  2d  Captain  removes  it,  clears  the  vent,  and  puts 
in  a  fresh  primer. 

If  the  gun,  when  fired,  does  not  come  into  its  place  for  loading,  ship  Car 
riage-Levers,  heave  up,  and  run  in  by  the  In-Tackles  to  a  taut  breeching. 

Down  all  levers  and  set  Compressors. 

If  the  firing  or  exercise  is  to  continue,  the  next  order  is  "  Sponge." 

If  not,  unshackle  the  breeching,  then — Run  in,  back  to  rear  hurter  for 
pivoting — "  Stand  by  to  Pivot" — "  Pivot  to  right  or  left  ;"  when  amidships 
— In  Pivot-Bolt — "  Run  out,"  and  secure  for  sea. 

X.  "SHIFT  TO  HOUSING-PIVOT,  AND  SECURE!" 

254.  The  gun  is  brought  into  the  housing  position  amidships  and 
pivoted  to  the  socket  farthest  from  the  extremity  of  the  vessel,  and  run  out. 

No.  1  puts  in  the  vent-plug,  wipes  and  lays  the  hammer  in  place  and  the 
lock-string  around  it,  then  puts  on  the  lock-cover ;  sees  his  gun  properly 
secured,  and  the  implements  and  spare  articles  returned  to  their  places. 

No.  2  levels  the  gun  and  wipes  off  and  re-lacquers  rear  pivot-bolt  and 
elevating  screw ;  puts  on  sight-aprons ;  puts  in  rail-chocks  and  assists  in 
securing  lashings  and  breeching. 

Loaders  put  in  the  tompion  and  on  muzzle-bag,  and  wipe  off  and  re-lacquer 
the  front  pivot-bolt. 

Spongers  return  rammer  and  sponge  to  place,  and  assist*  in  securing  lash 
ings  and  breeching. 

well  to  pierco  the  latter  with  the  wire,  so  as  not  to  omit  any  means  that  may  insure  the 
instant  discharge  of  the  gun. 

57  The  Sight-Bar  of  the  Xl-in.  Gun  is  graduated  to  its  own  charge  only ;  if  reduced 
charges  are  ever  used,  it  will  only  be  at  short  distances,  when  the  gun  needs  no  eleva 
tion.  The  Bar  will  then  be  down  entirely,  its  head  resting  on  the  Box. 

2b  One  turn  of  which  is  equal  to  one  degree  of  the  quadrant,  and  may  be  of  service 
when  the  Sight-Bars  are  not. 

The  carriages  of  Gun  Sloops  and  other  vessels  carrying  Xl-in.  guns  allow  of  an  eleva 
tion  of  20°. 

29  When  the  vessels  are  moving,  it  is  best  to  train  the  gun  a  little  ahead,  watching 
when  the  object  draws  in  line ;  then,  as  the  roll  brings  the  piece  right  in  elevation,  it  is 
fired. 


72  DUTIES   AT   QUARTERS,  IN   BATTLE   OR   EXERCISE. 

Levermen  wipe  off  and  re-lacquer  their  respective  levers  and  eccentrics, 
secure  levers  in  place,  and  assist  in  securing  the  gun. 

Compressormen  wipe  off,  re-lacquer,  and  tighten  the  compressors,  and 
assist  Carpenter  in  replacing  and  securing  bulwarks. 

Shell  men  return  shells,  empty  boxes,  and  shell-bearer  to  their  places,  and 
assist  in  securing  bulwarks. 

Powderman  returns  spare  powder  and  passing-box  to  the  magazine. 

Tacklemen  tighten  and  secure  "  in"  and  u  out  tackles,"  and  make  up  and 
stow  '•  shifting"  and  "  training  tackles"  on  the  slide;  ship  the  clevis-bolts, 
pass  and  tighten  the  gun-lashings,  and  assist  in  replacing  bulwarks. 

The  men  who  provide  implements  and  spare  articles  return  them  to 
their  places. 

TRANSPORTING  PIVOT-GUNS   FROM  ONE  END  OF  A  VESSEL 

TO  THE  OTHER. 

255.  The  gun  must  be  pivoted  and  trained  so  as  to  bring  its  muzzle 
towards  the  direction  in  which  it  is  to  be  transported,  the  transport! ng- 
trucks  shipped  and  secured  to  their  axles,  the  chocking-quoins  placed, 
the  training-trucks  thrown  out  of  action,  the  compressors  brought  to  bear 
to  confine  the  gun  near  the  middle  of  the  slide,  some  of  the  tackles  hooked 
for  dragging,  and  others,  with  capstan-bars,  for  guiding  and  steadying  it. 
The  pivot-bolts  are  to  be  removed,  and  the  gun's  crew,  aided  by  others 
if  required,  transport  it  to  the  desired  position  at  the  other  end  of  the 
vessel.  The  slide  is  then  brought  over  and  pivoted  upon  a  fighting  or 
outer  centre,  the  transporting-trucks  removed,  and  the  training-trucks 
brought  into  action.  When  the  implements  for  working  and  loading  the 
gun  are  brought  to  it,  it  will  then  be  ready  for  action. 

When  the  forward  and  after  slides  are  of  different  lengths,  and  the  tra 
versing  circles  of  different  diameters,  the  longest  slide  will  be  fitted  with  an 
additional  rear  pivot-hole  and  plate,  to  correspond  with  the  smaller  circle, 
in  order  that  the  gun  may  be  worked  from  the  midship  pivot-bolt  and 
shifted  to  the  different  fighting  centres  or  pivot-bolts  of  the  smaller  circle. 

Thus,  when  only  one  pivot-gun  is  mounted  forward  and  one  aft,  and  when 
they  can  both  be  brought  to  bear  from  only  one  end  of  the  vessel,  the  force 
may  be  doubled  at  that  extremity  by  pivoting  one  gun  on  each  bow  or 
quarter,  as  the  case  may  be. 

For  heavy  guns  this  is  practicable  in  smooth  water  only. 

Arrangements  are  made  for  shifting  the  broadside-guns  both  to  the  bow 
and  stern,  in  aid  of  the  pivot-guns,  when  the  distance  of  the  enemy  is  not 
too  great.  When  the  stern  gun  is  pivoted  over  the  rudder,  one  of  the 
broadside-guns  may  be  worked  on  each  side  of  it,  in  firing  right  aft.  Guns 
mounted  on  pivot-carriages  may  be  fought  upon  the  rear  pivot,  on  the  com 
mon  or  shifting  centre,  and  fired  from  any  point  of  the  traversing  or  shift- 


EXERCISE   FOR  PIVOT-GUNS.  73 

ing  circle,  if  the  elevation  be  such  as  will  not  endanger  the  decks.  In  this 
case  the  training  must  be  done  with  the  gun  run  in  over  the  rear  pivot,  as 
after  it  is  run  out  the  training  will  be  difficult,  and  the  heltn  must  be  relied 
on  to  bring  the  gun  on  with  the  object. 

Guns  should  never  be  transported  about  the  deck  of  a  ship  when  loaded. 


74  DUTIES  AT  QUAKTERS,  IN  BATTLE   OR  EXERCISE. 


NOTES  UPON  THE  MANUAL  EXERCISE. 

FOUETH  COMMAND. 
" SERVE    VENT   AND   SPONGE !" 

"  The  Gun  Captain-serves,  then  stops  the  vent!" 

256,  A  difference  of  opinion   being  entertained  among  artillerists  with 
regard  to  the  utility  of  stopping  the  vent,  the  continuance  of  the  practice, 
as  directed  in  the  text,  is  recommended. 

The  thumbstall  has  been  made  of  various  materials,  but  its  use  is  some 
what  inconvenient  for  the  Gun  Captain,  and  he  cannot  foel  that  the  vent  is 
stopped.  At  the  Experimental  Battery  of  the  Ordnance  Yard  the  naked 
thumb  is  used,  and  experience  shows  that  the  gun  is  never  so  hot  as  to 
occasion  the  least  inconvenience,  except  with  howitzers. 

257,  It  has  been  the  uniform  practice  at  the  Experimental  Battery  at  the 
Ordnance  Yard,  Washington,  and  also  on  board  the  Gunnery  Ship  Plymouth, 
in  1857-'58,  to  use  a  moist  sponge;  and  as   no  accident  from  premature 
explosion  has  taken  place  in  either  case,  the  inference  is  that  the  method  is 
a  safe  one,  and  might  obviate  other  precautions,  especially  where  reloading 
is  necessary,  as  in  firing  salutes,  when,  there  being  no  shot  over  the  cartridge, 
it  is  imperfectly  consumed. 

258,  "  Strikes  the  staff  several  smart  taps  under  the  muzzle  !"  to  shake 
off  any  adhering  fragments  of  the  cartridge.     Should  any  burning  fragments 
be  drdwn  out,  the  Loader  extinguishes  them  with  the  wet  swab ;  the  Gun 
Captain  again  commands  "  Sponge." 

259,  Gun  Captain  "  serves  the  vent  with  his  priming-wire  !"     If  at  any 
time  he  should  find  the  vent  obstructed,  and  be  unable  to  clear  it  with  the 
priming-wire  or  boring-bit,  he  will  at  once  report,  to  the  officer  of  division, 
who  will  order  the  vent-punch  used ;  or,  if  this  should  fail,  have  recourse  to 
the  vent-drill  and  brace  in  charge  of  the  Quarter  Gunner.     The  boring-bit, 
vent-punch,  and  drills  should  be  used  with  caution,  as,  being  of  steel,  they 
are  liable  to  be  broken  off  in  the  vent  and  thus  effectually  spike  the  gun. 
After  clearing  the  vent  the  bore  should  be  sponged. 

260,  Spongers  and  Loaders  are  to  be  careful  to  keep  their  bodies  as  much 
within  the  port  as  practicable,  otherwise  at  close  quarters  they  will  be  picked 
off  by  musketry. 


NOTES  'UPON  THE   MANUAL   EXERCISE.  75 


FIFTH  COMMAND. 
"  LOAD  !" 

"  No.  3  removes  cap  from  fuze  /"  1 

261.  The  cap  is  never  to  be  removed  until  the  shell  has  been  entered  in 
the  gun.     With  high  elevations,  or  when  rolling,  care  should  be  taken  that 
the  shell  does  not  slip  down  the  bore  before  this  is  done. 

The  cap  or  patch  is  removed  by  taking  hold  of  the  lug  with  the  fore 
finger  and  thumb,  first  raising  it  a  little,  and  without  twisting ;  a  pull  readily 
removes  it.  The  patch  is  passed  to  the  Gun  Captain,  as  an  evidence  that 
the  priming  has  been  exposed ;  the  patches  to  be  preserved  and  accounted 
for  at  the  end  of  the  firing. 

262.  The  Loader  must  be  careful  not  to  touch  the  fuze  composition  with 
his  fingers,  for  fear  of  injuring  it  by  moisture.     Where  the  firing  is  not 
hurried  it  is  advisable  to  raise  the  priming  of  the  fuze,  to  insure  its  ignition. 
All  of  these  details  should  be  carefully  explained  to  the  crew. 

263.  No  wad  is  required  over  a  shell,  but  a  selvagee  wad  may  be  used  in 
heavy  rolling. 

264.  When  loading  with  shot  a  selvagee  wad  is  placed  over  it.     A  part 
— half  or  a  third — of  a  selvagee  wad,  is  equally  efficient  in  holding  the  shot 
in  place. 

265.  Shells  should  be  used  against  Ships  at  all  distances  where  the  pene 
tration  would  be  sufficient  to  lodge  them.    They  are  of  no  service  in  breach 
ing  solid  stone  walls,  but  are  very  effective  against  earthworks,  ordinary 
buildings,  and  for  bombarding.     For  these  purposes  a  good  percussion  or 
concussion  fuze  is  desirable,  but  no  reliable  fuzes  of  these  kinds  have  as  yet 
been  devised. 

266.  Solid  shot  should  only  be  used  when  great  accuracy,  at  very  long 
range,  and  penetration  are  required. 

267.  If,  in  loading,  a  shot  or  shell  jams  in  the  bore,  no  attempt  should 
be  made  to  force  it  down,  but  it  should   be  withdrawn.      This  may  be 
done  with  the  ladle,  by  depressing  and  striking  the  muzzle  against  the  lower 
sill  of  the  port,  or  by  running  the  gun  out  hard  against  the  side  at  extreme 
depression. 

268.  A  gun  is  not  to  be  loaded  with  more  than  a  single  shot  at  once, 
without  the  express  sanction  of  the  Captain,  and  never  with  more  than  a 

1  Many  officers  are  of  the  opinion  that  this  order  should  be  divided — "  Load  with 
Cartridge,"  and  "Load  with  Shell."  But  those  guns  would  be  very  badly  served  which 
should  wait  until  this  time  to  give  the  order  for  the  species  of  projectile  or  class  of  fuze 
required.  After  '"Load,"  is  the  proper  time  to  give  subsidiary  order  to  Shellmen  what 
projectile  and  length  of  fuze  to  bring  for  next  fire. 
C 


76  DUTIES  AT  QUARTERS,   IN  BATTLE   0*R  EXERCISE. 


single  shell.     Solid  shot  are  not  to  be  fired  from  shell-guns  without  a  direct 
order  from  the  Captain. 

269.  Experiments  show  that  firing  two   loaded   shells  together  should 
never  be  practised.     With  quite  reduced  charges   [of  from  t^-th  to  y^th  the 
weight  of  the  single  shell],  of  88  loaded   shells  thus  fired,  25  were  broken 
and  43  did  not  explode,  and  some  of  the  remainder  were  exploded  too  soon 
by  the  shock  of  discharge.     Of  50  unloaded  8-inch  shells,  fired  two  at  the 
same  time,  with  6  Ibs.  of  powder,  only  one  was  broken  by  the  shock  of  the 
discharge.     This   difference  between   loaded   and  empty  shells  is  accounted 
for  by  the  fact  that  a  small  hole  is  generally  broken  into  the  outer  shell, 
through  which  its  charge  is  ignited.      See  p.  13,  Report  of  Admiral  Farra- 
gut,  dated  August  31,  1853,  on  experiments  made  at  Old  Point  Comfort. 

270.  In  loading  with  a  shell,  the  most  exact  attention  is  required  to  all 
the  precautions  relating  to  the  position  of  the  fuze  and  the  mode  of  setting 
home  the  shell.     The  Loader  is  to  be   specially  instructed  that  unless  the 
leaden  patch  is  stripped  off,  to  expose  the  priming,  the  fuze  will  not  ignite, 
and  consequently  the  shell  cannot  explode. 

271.  Grape-shot  have  not  sufficient  penetration  to  be  used  with  effect, 
generally,  against   ships-of-war  beyond  150  yards.     When  the  men  on  the 
spar-decks  of  the  enemy  are   exposed,  by  the  heeling  of  the  ship,  grape  or 
canister  may  be  used  against  them,  at   distances   varying  from  200  to  300 
yards.     Against  light  vessels,  a  single  stand  of  grape  from  heavy  guns  may 
be  used  at  about  400  yards.     The  dispersion  of  the  balls  is  about  one-tenth 
the  distance,  and  is  practically  independent  of  the  charge. 

272.  The  Xl-inch  gun,  at  10°  elevation,  gives  for  the  mass  of  grape  or 
canister  a  range  of  about  1,300  yards;  the  spread  about  10°.     They  may 
therefore  be  used  with  great  effect  against  boats  or  exposed  bodies  of  men. 

273.  A  stand  of  grape  is  not  to  be  used  with  any  other  projectile. 

274.  Canister  or  case-shot,  prepared  for  immediate  use,  are  supplied  for 
all  gnns,  including  boat  and  field  howitzers,  and  are  effective  at  short  dis 
tances  against  boats  or  exposed  bodies  of  men ;   they  may  be  used  also, 
under  favorable  circumstances,  against  the  tops  of  an  enemy. 

275.  Shrapnel-shell  or  spherical  case-shot  is  intended  to  exceed  the  range 
of  canister,  and  is  to  be  used  only  under  the  same  circumstances,  but  at  an 
increased  distance.     Canister  is  more  effective  at  from  250  yards  with  the 
12-pdr.  howitzer,  to  400  yards  with  the  Xl-inch ;  but  beyond  those  distances 
shrapnel  should  be  used  up  to  900  yards  for  the  12-pdr.,  and  1,500  with  the 
Xl-inch.      A  well-delivered  shrapnel-shell  from  a  heavy  gun   must  sweep 
away  the  crew  of  a  pivot  or  other  gun,  on  a  spar-deck  not  protected  by  bul 
warks.     The  '  distant  firing'  charge  is  always  to  be  used  with  shrapnel. 


NOTES   UPON   THE   MANUAL   EXERCISE.  77 


SEVENTH   COMMAND. 
"  PRIME  !" 

"  He  inserts  a  primer  and  turns  the  hammer  down  upon  it." 

276.  To  prevent  the  primer  from  being  blown   out  of  the  vent  by  the 
blast  of  the  next  gun,  as  occasionally  happens  on  light-covered  decks. 

With  guns  of  the  old  pattern  this  cannot  be  done,  because,  if  turned 
down,  it  would  interfere  with  the  aim. 

277.  It  is  essential  that  the  head   of  the  primer  shall  be  placed  flat  and 
pressed  close  upon  the  vent,  that  the  hammer  may  strike  it  fairly.     The  tip 
of  shellac,  by  which  the  lower  end  of  the   tube  is  sealed,  occasionally  ob 
structs  the  jet  of  flame  so  as  to  split  the  tube.     In   this  case  the  flame  is 
dispersed  laterally,  and  fails  to  ignite  the   charge ;    it  is  therefore  a  good 
precaution  to  pinch  the  end  of  the  tube  before  putting  it  into  the  vent.1 

278.  The  tubes  of  all  the   primers  are   carefully  gauged  before  issuing 
them  for  service ;  but  such  as,  from  any  cause,  become  so  much  enlarged  as 
not  to  go   easily  into  the  vent,  should  be  rejected  without  attempting  to 
force  them  down. 

It  will  occasionally  happen,  either  from  carelessness  or  inattention  to  the 
instructions  given  for  the  proper  manner  of  pulling  the  lock-string,  that  the 
head  of  the  primer  will  be  crushed  without  exploding  it.  Frequently  a 
second  and  stronger  pull  will  have  the  desired  effect,  if  the  fulminate  hae 
not  been  dispersed ;  in  case,  however,  this  attempt  should  prove  unsuccess 
ful,  the  tube  of  the  primer  should  be  drawn  out,  if  possible,  before  using 
the  priming-wire  to  clear  the  vent. 

279.  In  case  either  lock  or  primer  should  entirely  fail,  recourse  will  be  had 
to  the  friction-primers  or  to  the  spur-tubes.     In  using  the  first,  the  Captain 
of  the  gun,  after  taking  the  primer  from  the  box,  will  raise  up  the  twisted 
wire-loop  until  it  is  on  a  line  with  the  spur ;    place  the  tube  in  the  vent 
with  the  spur  towards  the  muzzle  of  the  gun,  and  so  that  this  spur  will  rest 
on  the  lock-piece ;  then  hook  the  lanyard  into  the  raised  loop,  and  pull  it, 
when   otherwise  ready  to  fire  the  gun,  as  though  it  were  a  lock-string, 
using,  however,  a  less  degree  of  force.     The  lanyard  may  be  hooked  to  the 
loop  before  the  tube  is  put  into  the  vent.     When  the  spur-tubes  are  used, 
the  Gun  Captain  exposes  the  priming  and  the  2d  Captain  applies  the  match. 

280.  The   men  should  be  practised    at  unloaded  guns,  in  placing  the 
primers,  both   percussion  and  friction,  properly,  and  in  pulling  the  lock- 
string   so  as  to  insure  their  explosion,  until  this  very  essential  knowledge 
and  skill  have  been  perfectly  attained. 

1  "In  10,000  fires,  when  testing  guns  of  different  calibres,  with  the  regulation  locks, 
less  than  fifty  primers  failed  from  all  causes." 


78  DUTIES  AT   QUARTERS,    IN   BATTLE   OR   EXERCISE. 

EIGHTH   COMMAND. 
"  POINT  !" 

"His  eye  ranging  over  the  sights!" 

281,  The  Gun  Captain  gives  the  necessary  order,  "  Right"  or  "Left," 
"Raise "or  "Lower,"  by  voice   or  sign.     He  alone  should  speak,  giving 
his  orders  in  a  sharp,  clear  tone,  but  not  louder  than  necessary  for  his  own 

crew  to  hear  him. 

• 

282,  He  should  make  use   of  the  following  signs  to   assist  in  making 
himself  understood,  which,  when  the  crew  become  well  drilled,  are  sufficient 
without  the  verbal  orders. 

IN  POINTING. — He  should  move  the  left  hand,  held  vertically,  to  the  right 
or  left,  according  a3  he  wishes  the  right  or  left  tackle  hauled  upon. 

IN  ELEVATING. — He  should  move  the  hand,  held  horizontally,  up  or  down, 
according  as  he  wishes  the  breech  raised  or  lowered. 

283,  Officers  of  divisions,  while  instructing  the  men  in  aiming,  should  be 
particular  in  impressing  upon  their  minds  the  necessity  of  bringing  the  eye 
to  an  exact  level  with  the  bottom  of  the  sight-notch,  as  otherwise  they  will 
fire  too  high. 

284,  In    lateral  training,   when  the   direction  of  the  gun   is  frequently 
changed  by  the  coming  up  or  falling  off  of  the  ship,  or  when  the  position 
of  the  object  to  be  fired  at  is  rapidly  changing  by  passing  in  opposite  direc 
tions,  or  from  other  causes,  it  is  better  to  train  a  little  beyond,  and  then 
watch  the  proper  moment  for  firing,  instead  of  endeavoring  to  train  at  once 
directly  on  the  object. 

285,  The  lateral  training,  or  pointing,  when  considerable,  should  always 
precede  the  elevation  ;  because,  the  jarring  of  the  gun  is   apt  to   alter  the 
elevation. 

286,  "If  r6ller  handspike  is  not   used   in    training."     A  great  differ 
ence  of  opinion  exists  on  this  point.     The  use  of  the  roller  handspike  some 
what  facilitates   extreme   train,  but   the   gun    cannot   be  fired  until   it   is 
unshipped,  which  alters  the   elevation   and  consumes  time.     It  is  perhaps 
preferable  to  use  one  handspike   under  the  bracket,  manned  by  two  men, 
and  the  other  to  lift  and  slue  the  gun,  manned  by  one  man,  under  the 
transom. 

287,  "Elevate  or  Depress  as  directed!"     If  the  carriage  is  fitted  with  a 
quoin,  handspikemen  standing   between  the  handspikes  and  the  side  of  tho 
ship,  place  their  handspikes  on  the  steps  of  the  carriage  and  raise  the  breech. 
As  soon  as  the  quoin  is  free,  the  2d  Captain  takes  hold  of   it   with  both 
hands  and   withdraws  the  quoin  to  the  full  extent ;  handspikemen  "  raise" 
or  "lower"  the  gun  slowly  and  steadily.     When  the   proper  elevation  is 


NOTES   UPON  THE   MANUAL  EXERCISE.  79 

given,  the  Gun  Captain  gives  the  word  "  Well  !"  and  the  2d  Captain  forces 
the  quoin  tight  under  the  breech,  giving  the  word  "  Down  !" 

288,  To    facilitate   the    operation   of    pointing   guns   according   to   the 
distance  of   the  object  aimed  at,  sights   are  prepared   and  fitted   to   each 
gun  ;  and  breast-sweeps  for  all  truck-carriages  of  heavy  guns. 

The  ordinary  sights  consist  of  two  pieces  of  bronze  gun-metal,  one  of 
which,  called  the  reinforce-sight,  is  a  fixed  point,  firmly  secured  to  the 
sight-mass,  upon  the  upper  surface  of  the  gun  between  the  trunnions. 
The  heads  of  the  sights  should  not  be  bright,  otherwise  it  interferes  with 
the  aim  when  they  are  exposed  to  a  bright  sun. 

289,  The  other,  or  breech-sight,  is  a  square  bar  or  stem,  with  a  head, 
in  the  top  of  which  is  a  sight-notch.     It  is  set  diagonally,  so  as  to  expose 
two  faces  to  the  rear ;    the  rear  angle  chamfered,  to  afford  a  bearing  for 
the  clamp-screw.     This  bar  or  stem  is  made  to  slide  in  a  vertical  plane,  in 
the  sight-box  fixed  to  the  breech   sight-mass,  and  is  held    at  the   various 
elevations  for  which  it  is  graduated  by  means  of  a  thumb-screw.     Its  length 
is  sufficient  for  all  the  elevation  which  can  be  given — about  5° — before  the 
muzzle  appears  above  the  front  sight,  after  which  a  long  wooden  sight  must 
be  used,  graduated  for  the  whole  length  of  the  gun,  using  the  notch  in  the 
muzzle. 

The  bar  or  stem  of  the  sight  has  lines  across  its  faces  denoting  for  all  the 
old  guns  degrees  of  elevation,  each  of  which  is  marked  with  the  number  of 
yards  at  which  a  shot  or  shell  will  strike  the  point  aimed  at,  when  that 
line  is  brought  to  a  level  with  the  top  of  the  sight-box,  and  the  gun  is 
loaded  with  a  specified  charge  of  powder;  for  the  guns  of  the  new  system, 
the  ranges  are  marked  in  even  hundreds  of  yards. 

The  uppermost  line  on  the  stem  marked  level  is  the  zero  of  the  other 
graduations,  and  when  adjusted  to  the  level  of  the  top  of  the  sight-box, 
the  bottom  of  the  notch  in  the  head  of  the  breech-sight  and  the  apex  of 
the  reinforce-sight  show  the  dispart  of  the  gun.  When  the  line  of  sight 
coincides  with  these  points,  it  is  parallel  to  the  bore,  and  when  continued 
to  a  distant  horizon,  the  gun  is  laid  level  or  horizontal. 

Sights  should  invariably  be  made  so  that  the  level  line  on  the  stem  will 
correspond  with  the  bottom  of  the  head  when  it  rests  on  the  sight-box, 
and  thus  secure  a  dispart-sight  in  case  of  accident  to  the  screw  in  the 
sight-box. 

A  white  line,  one-fourth  (.25)  of  an  inch  wide,  drawn  on  top  of  the  gun 
from  the  breech-sight  to  the  notch  on  the  swell  of  the  muzzle,  has  been 
found  to  greatly  facilitate  the  aim.  For  night-firing  a  broad  wooden  block, 
painted  dead-white,  to  ship  over  the  reinforce-sight,  leaving  J  of  an  inch  of 
the  sight  exposed,  will  assist  in  preventing  the  aim  from  being  too  high. 

290,  For  shot-guns  the  ranges  in  yards  for  one  shot  with  the  distant- 


80  DUTIES   AT   QUARTERS,    IN   BATTLE    OR   EXERCISE. 

firing  charge  of  powder  are  marked  for  each  degree  of  elevation   on  the 
right  in-board  face  of  the  sight-bar;  for  the  ordinary  firing,  on  the  left  face. 

291,  The  gun  being  placed  a,  certain  height  above  the  water,  depending 
on  the  class  of  vessel  and  the  deck  on   which   it  is  mounted,  it  is  evident 
that,  when  the  axis  of  the  bore  is  horizontal,  the  shot  will  have  a  range  pro 
portionate  to  this  height.     This  range  or  distance  is  commonly  called  point- 
blank,  or  point-blank  range,  and  is  the  number  noted  in  the  column  marked 
P.  B.,  or  0°,  or  level  in  range  tables. 

This  point-blank,  therefore,  depends  on  the  class  of  gun,  the  charge,  and 
the  height  above  the  water. 

292,  A  preferable  definition  of  this  distance  is  "  range  at  level." 

293,  The  aim  is  always  supposed  to  be  directed  at  the  water-line.     But, 
with  the  sight-bar  at  level,  if  a  gun  is  aimed  by  it  at  the  water-line  of  a 
vessel  at  point-blank  range,  the  shot  would  strike  short  of  the  point  aimed 
at  by  about  one-quarter  of  the  distance;  or,  if  aimed,  under  similar  condi 
tions,  at  the  upper  part  of  the  hull,  the  shot  would  fall  a  distance  below  the 
point  aimed  at  equal  to  the  height  of  the  gun. 

294,  In  firing  at  small  objects,   particularly  boats,  within  point-blank 
range,  it  is   therefore  important  to  attend  to  this  source  of  error.     It  is 
desirable  that  all  sights  should  be  marked,  from   100  yards  to  the  greatest 
range,  and  thus  avoid  all  consideration  of  point-blank. 

In  fitting  new  guns,  or  those  upon  which  the  sights  require  replacing,  the 
sight-bar  will  be  fitted  as  described  in  Article  289,  and  graduated  from 
100  yards  downwards. 

For  shell-guns  the  ranges  are  marked  for  shells  on  the  sight-bars,  in  the 
same  manner  as  those  for  the  shot  of  shot-^uns. 

295,  These  sights  being  each  adjusted  to  a  particular  gun,  and  marked 
with  its  class  and  number,  do  not,  in  strictness,  admit  of  being  transferred 
to  other  guns,  even  of  the  same  class. 

296,  When  used,  the  stem  of  the  breech-sight  must  be  raised  or  lowered, 
to  correspond  with  the  ascertained  or  estimated   distance,  in  yards,  of  the 
object  aimed  at,  and  firmly  secured  there  by  the  thumb-screw.     Then,  if  the 
ship  be  steady,  elevate  or  depress  the  gun   until  the   line  of  sight  from  the 
bottom  of  the  notch  of  the  breech-sight,  the  top  of  the  reinforce-sight,  and 
the  point  to  be  struck,  will  coincide ;  but  if  the  ship  have  a  rolling  motion 
the  gun  must  be  so  laid,  after  the  sight  is  set  for  the  distance,  that  this 
coincidence  may  be  obtained,  if  possible,  at  the  most  favorable  part  of  every 
roll  which  the  ship  makes. 

297,  The.  inclination  of  the  line  of  metal  to   the  axis  of  the  bore  varies 
in  guns  of  the  same  class,  as  well  as  in  those  of  different  classes.     Aiming. 


NOTES   UPON  THE   MANUAL   EXEKCISE.  81 

therefore,  by  the  line  of  metal  cannot  be  relied  on  for  definite  ranges ; 
besides  that,  within  those  ranges,  it  is  apt  to  mislead  by  giving  too  much 
elevation  to  the  piece.  Therefore,  when  the  established  sights  are  not 
furnished,  or  have  become  unserviceable,  wooden  dispart-sights  lashed  on  the 
reinforce  should  be  immediately  substituted.  A  narrow  groove  in  the  upper 
surface  of  the  wooden  sight,  made  to  coincide  with  the  plane  of  the  line  of 
sight  marked  on  the  gun,  will  assist  the  Gun  Captain  in  getting  the  true 
direction  quickly. 

Half  the  difference  between  the  diameters  of  the  gun  at  the  base-ring 
and  swell  of  the  muzzle,  or  at  any  intermediate  point  on  the  line  of  metal, 
will  give  the  proper  height  of  the  dispart-sight  at  the  point  where  the  least 
diameter  was  taken,  to  which  must  be  added  the  height  of  the  lock-piece 
above  the  base-ring,  in  order  to  get  a  line  of  sight  over  it,  parallel  to  the 
axis  of  the  bore. 

The  guns  of  the  Dahlgren  pattern  are  cylindrical  for  a  certain  distance 
forward  of  the  base-line,  always  giving  a  line  of  sight  parallel  to  the  axis  of 
the  bore. 

298.  All  the  new  guns  are  marked  on  the  top  of  the  lock-piece,  base- 
ring,  the  reinforce   sight-mass,  and  the  swell  of  the   muzzle,  by  notches 
which  indicate   a  vertical  plane  passing  through  the  axis  of  the  bore,  at 
rio-lit  ano-les  to  the  axis  of  the  trunnions. 

O  C5 

299.  Pivot-guns  have  been  supplied  with  trunnion-sights,  designed  to  be 
used  when  the  ordinary  sights  do  not  give  the  required  elevation.     This 
instrument,  however,  gives  but  a  rude  approximation  in  either  elevation  or 
direction. 

300.  The  rifled  cannon  in   service  have   the  breech-sight  on  the  side  of 
the  breech  and  the  front  sight  on  the  rimbasc,  which  permits  the  gun  to 
be  accurately  aimed  and  the   object  kept  in  view  at  all   elevations.     It  is 
intended   in  future  to  apply  this  arrangement  to  all   cannon  mounted  on 
pivot-carriages. 

301.  Various  modes  have  been  practised  to   ascertain  at  sea  the   dis 
tance  from  the  object  aimed  at,  so  as  to  regulate  the  elevation  of  guns, 
but  none  can  be  depended  upon  for  giving  it  with  minute  accuracy,  and 
even  when  obtained  it  is  continually  varying;  therefore,  when  the  projectile 
is  seen  to   exceed  or  fall   short  of  the  object  considerably,  the  sight-bar 
must  be  readjusted  accordingly.     It  thus  becomes,  under  ordinary  circum 
stances,  the  best  instrument  for  approximating  distances.     In  correcting  the 
elevation,  however,  the  variation  of  range  to  the  first  graze,  attributable  to 
eccentricity,  differences  of  windage,  and  other  causes,  must  be  taken  into 
consideration,  as,  under  the  most  favorable  circumstances,  at  the  Experi- 


DUTIES   AT   QUARTERS,    IN   BATTLE    OR   EXERCISE. 

mental  Battery  of  the  Ordnance  Yard,  tins  variation  is  found  to  equal  fifty 
yards,  more  or  less. 


?,  In  addition  to  the  errors  arising  from  these  sources,  we  have  also 
those  due  to  the  direction  and  force  of  the  wind,  the  movement  of  the 
ship  across  the  line  of  fire,  and  to  sheering  round  a  pivot  when  performing 
evolutions. 

303,  They  can  be  obviated  or  diminished  by  the  following  means  : 

1st.  Allow  the  Gun  Captain  to  estimate  the  distance  to  windward  or  to 
leeward,  right  or  left,  to  be  allowed  for  the  deflection ;  or, 

2d.  Indicate  the  number  of  yards  right  or  left  of  the  object;  which,  after 
all,  depends  on  his  estimation  of  distance. 

3d.  Furnish  a  sight  which,  in  addition  to  the  elevation,  allows  for  the 
deviation,  and  permits  the  Gun  Captain  in  all  cases  to  aim  directly  at  the 
target. 

Such  a  sight  is  furnished  to  the  Parrott  rifles,  and  is  desirable  for 
all  guns. 

304,  In  case    the    ordinary  sights  should  be  lost  or  rendered    useless, 
tangent   firing   may  be  resorted    to    against    ships,  by  pointing  with  the 
wooden  dispart-sight  at  such  part  of  the  ship  as  the  Tables  indicate  for 
the  distance,  and  according  to  the  class  of  gun  in  use  at  the  time. 

A  Table  of  this  kind  is  appended,  which  has  been  calculated  for  the  8-inch 
and  some  of  the  heavier  of  the  32-pounder  guns  when  loaded  with  single 
shot  and  distant-firing  charges. 

The  different  classes  of  sailing  ships-of-war,  whether  of  the  same  or  of 
different  nations,  are  not  of  the  same  length,  nor  are  their  masts  of  the  same 
height  from  the  deck,  or  from  the  water.  They,  however,  correspond  so 
nearly,  for  the  same  class  of  ships  of  the  same  nation,  that  calculations  made 
from  the  angles  subtended  by  the  average  height  of  their  masts,  will  gen 
erally  give  their  distance  wkh  sufficient  accuracy  for  general  firing. 

Tables  arc  inserted  at  the  end  of  the  book,  in  which  the  distances  corre 
sponding  to  different  angles  made  by  the  masts  of  English  and  French  ships- 
of-war  are  shown — from  which  the  intermediate  distances  due  to  other 
angles  may  be  estimated,  and  the  sights  regulated  accordingly,  if  circum 
stances  should  render  it  desirable.  Also  an  abridged  Table,  in  which  the 
height  of  our  own  mast  is  used  as  the  base. 

305,  Officers  of  divisions  and  Captains  of  guns  should  be  occasionally 
practised  in  measuring  the  distances  of  objects  by  the  eye,  at  times  when 
opportunities  offer  of  verifying  the  accuracy  of  their  estimate  by  compar 
ing  it  with  the  distance  obtained  by  the  foregoing  methods,  or  any   other 
which  will  afford  the  best  means  of  comparison. 

300,  Within  point-blank  range,  if  the  hull  of  an  enemy's  vessel  is  ob- 


NOTES   UPON  THE    MANUAL   EXERCISE. 


soured  by  smoke  or  darkness,  the  aim  may  be  directed  by  the  flashes  of  his 
guns. 

307*  Most  naval  guns  are  now  fitted  with  elevating  screws,  passing 
through  a  hole  in  the  cascabcl  of  the  Dahlgren  system,  and  for  those  of  the 
old  system  attached  to  the  carriage :  but  the  ordinary  beds  and  quoins  are 
also  still  in  use  ;  they  are  arranged  to  allow  the  extreme  elevation  and  de 
pression  of  the  guns  which  the  ports  will  admit  with  safety.  AVhen  the 
inner  or  thick  end  of  the  quoin  is  fair  with  the  end  of  the  bed  in  place,  the 
gun  is  level  in  the  carriage ;  or  horizontal,  when  the  ship  is  upright.  The 
degrees  of  elevation  above  this  level,  which  may  be  given  to  the  gun  by 
drawino-  out  the  quoin  when  laid  on  its  base,  arc  marked  on  the  side  or 
edge,  and  those  of  depression  on  the  flat  part  of  the  quoin,  so  that  when  the 
quoin  is  turned  on  its  side  for  depressing,  the  marks  may  be  seen.  The 
level  mark  on  the  quoin  is  to  correspond  with  the  end  of  the  bed.  When 
the  quoin  is  entirely  removed,  and  the  breech  of  the  gun  rests  on  the  bed, 
the  gun  has  its  greatest  safe  elevation ;  and  when  the  quoin  is  pushed  home 
on  its  side,  the  gun  has  the  greatest  safe  depression  that  the  port  will 
admit. 

Care  must  be  taken  that  the  stop  on  the  quoin  is  always  properly  lodged,  to 
prevent  the  quoin  from  flying  out  or  changing  its  position,  and  that  the  bed 
is  secured  to  the  bed-bolt. 

Porter's  bed  and  quoin  has  been  adopted  for  all  carriages  requiring  quoins. 
This  quoin,  being  graduated  to  whole  degrees,  requires  a  small  additional 
quoin  for  slight  differences  of  elevation  in  smooth  water. 

When  the  elevating  screw  is  used,  a  quoin  should  be  at  hand  to  place 
under  the  breech  of  the  gun,  when  at  extreme  elevation,  to  relieve  the  screw 
from  the  shock  of  the  discharge,  and  prevent  a  change  of  the  elevation,  as 
well  as  to  take  the  place  of  the  screw  if  it  should  be  disabled.  When  the 
fire  is  continuous  at  the  same  distance,  the  lever  of  the  elevating  screw 
should  be  secured  by  a  lanyard,  to  prevent  the  screw  from  turning  and  alter 
ing  the  elevation. 

308.  If  a  greater  elevation  for  broadside-guns  should  be  desired  for  any 
special  purpose,  it  may  be  obtained  by  placing  inclined  planes  behind  the 
rear  trucks,  for  them  to  recoil  over  and  produce  a  corresponding  depression 
of  the  muzzle  of  the  gun  as  it  comes  within  the  port.  But  it  will  be  ob 
served  that,  beyond  the  elevation  which  the  ports  will  admit  of,  the  sights 
can  no  longer  be  taken  by  the  tangent  or  any  other  top  sight,  as  the  upper 
sill  of  the  port  interferes.  The  gun  must  therefore  be  laid  by  the  quoin 
and  pendulum. 

Additional  depression  may  also  be  obtained  by  placing  inclined  planes 
for  the  front  trucks  to  recoil  upon,  or  by  raising  the  breech  by  means  of  a 
wooden  toggle  placed  vertically  under  it.  One  end  of  a  tripping-line  is 


84  DUTIES   AT   QUARTERS,    IN   BATTLE   OR   EXERCISE. 

fastened  to  the  middle  of  the  toggle,  and  the  other  to  the  breecliing-bolt  in 
the  side  of  the  ship ;  by  this  arrangement  the  toggle  is  tripped  from  its 
place  at  the  commencement  of  the  recoil,  and  the  muzzle  is  raised  so  as  to 
clear  the  port-sill  by  the  preponderance  of  the  breech. 


NINTH  COMMAND. 

"  KEADY — FIRE  !" 

"  Waits  patiently  for  the  coincidence  of  the  sights  upon  the  object" 

309*  The  exact  moment  for  firing,  at  sea,  necessarily  varies  with  circum 
stances  ;  but  when  these  are  favorable  the  following  general  principles 
should  govern  : 

310.  When  the  ship  is  steady,  the  gun  should  be  fired  when  the  line  of 
sight  is  brought  upon  the  object;  but  when   the    ship   has  much  rolling 
motion,  the  moment  for  firing  should  be  chosen  a  little  before,  so  that  the 
shot  will  probably  leave  the  gun  when  the  roll  brings  the  line  of  sight  upon 
the  object  aimed  at. 

When  practicable,  and  too  much  time  will  not  be  lost,  it  will  be  best  to 
fire  when  the  vessel  is  on  the  top  of  a  wave  and  just  begins  to  roll  towards 
the  object.  If  the  loss  of  time  should  be  found  objectionable,  the  gun  may 
be  fired  at  any  other  instant,  when  properly  pointed,  giving  a  preference, 
however,  to  the  moment  when  rolling  towards  rather  than  when  rolling 
from  the  object,  and  making  due  allowance  for  the  probable  change  of 
elevation  by  the  roll  of  the  ship  before  the  shot  leaves  the  gun. 

311.  If,  from  any  cause,  the   firing  should    be  delayed  after  the  gun  has 
been  pointed,  it  should  be  carefully  pointed  again  before  the  order  to  fire 
is  given. 

312.  The  great  object  is  to  fire  low  enough  to  strike  the  hull  if  the  shot 
preserve  the  intended  direction,  and  as  a  general  rule  to  strike  it  near  the 
water-line. 

313.  To  avoid  loss  of  shot  from  lateral  deviations,  it  is  recommended  to 
direct  all  the  guns  to  be  pointed  to  strike  somewhere  between  the  fore  and 
mizzen  masts  of  an  enemy  ;  when  quite  near,  the  guns  of  the  forward  divi 
sions  should  be  pointed  in  preference  to  that  part  of  the   hull   about  the 
foremast,  and  one  or  two  of  the  after  guns  at  the  rudder,  if  it   should   be 
fairly  exposed. 


NOTES   UPON  THE   MANUAL   EXERCISE.  85 


REMARKS   ON  THE  DIFFERENT  KINDS  OF  FIRING. 

314.  FIRING  AT  WILL. — By  this  is  meant  firing  the  guns  independently 
of  each  other,  each  Captain  of  a  gun  seizing  the  most  favorable  opportunity. 
This  firing  should  always  be  used  in  action — unless  ordered  to  the  contrary — 
whenever  the  object  is  visible,  the  smoke  from  one  gun  not  greatly  impe 
ding  the  firing  of  another. 

315.  FIRING  IN  SUCCESSION. — By  this   is   meant   firing   one   gun   after 
another  in  regular  order,  commencing  from  the  foremost  or  after  gun,  ac 
cording  as  the  wind  is  blowing  from  aft  or  forward.     This  firing  may  be 
used  with  advantage  in  the  commencement  of  an  action,  or  whenever  a  con 
tinuous,  steady  fire  is  desired,  as  the  smoke  from  one  gun  will  not  impede 
the  firing  of  the  next. 

316.  QUICK  FIRING. — By  this  is  meant  rapid  firing  at  will,  the  tangent- 
sight  not  being  raised.     This  firing  should  be  used  only  when  close  along 
side  an  enemy,  as  then  but  little  pointing  would  be  required. 

317.  When  the  guns  are  laid  for  the  projectile  to  strike  the  object  aimed 
at  without  grazing  between  the  gun  and  the  object,  the  firing  is  said  to  be 
direct.     This  mode  of  firing  is  to  be  preferred  when  the  object  fired  at  is  so 
near  that  the  chances  of  hitting  it  are  very  great,  and  also  when  the  inter 
vening  surface  between  the  gun  and  object  is  so  rough  or  irregular  that  a 
projectile  striking  it  would  have  its  velocity  much  diminished  or  destroyed, 
and  its  direction  injuriously  affected. 

DIRECT  FIRING  requires  a  good  knowledge  of  distance,  and  precision  both 
of  elevation  and  lateral  direction,  in  order  to  strike  an  object  which  is 
comparatively  a  point.  It  is  always  to  be  preferred  when  the  distance  is 
accurately  known. 

318.  When  the  guns  are  so  laid  that  the   projectile   makes   numerous 
grazes  between  the  gun  and  the  object,  and  continues  its  flight,  the  firing 
is  denominated  ricochet. 

That  properly  so  called  is  performed  at  level,  or  at  most  at  three  degrees 
of  elevation  ;  shot  will  often  ricochet  at  much  greater  angles,  but  it  is  not 
what  is  meant  by  ricochet  firing. 

RICOCHET  FIRING,  upon  a  smooth  surface  within  certain  distances,  has 
some  important  advantages  over  direct  firing.  When  the  guns  have  very 
little  or  no  elevation,  and  are  near  the  water,  as  they  are  in  a  ship's  battery, 
the  projectile  strikes  the  water  at  a  very  small  anglo;  its  flight  is  not  greatly 
retarded  by  the  graze,  and  it  rises  but  little  above  the  surface  in  its 
course.  The  distant  charge  should  always  be  used,  but  the  penetration  is 
not  to  be  depended  on  beyond  1,500  yards  against  ships-of-war. 


DUTIES   AT   QUARTERS,    IN   BATTLE   OR   EXERCISE. 


Ricochet  firing  at  low  elevations  requires  only  correct  lateral  direction, 
since  the  projectile  would  rarely  pass  over  and  would  probably  strike  a 
vessel  if  within  its  effective  range,  whether  the  actual  distance  had  been 
correctly  ascertained  or  not. 

The  deviation  of  projectiles  is,  however,  generally  increased  by  ricochet, 
and  in  proportion  to  the  roughness  of  the  surface  of  the  water.  Even  a 
slight  ripple  will  make  a  perceptible  difference  not  only  in  direction,  but  in 
range  and  penetration,  and  the  height  to  which  the  projectile  will  rise  in  its 
bounds. 

Although  these  facts  demand  attention,  yet  when  the  estimated  distance 
does  not  require  an  elevation  of  more  than  three  degrees,  projectiles  from 
guns  pointed  rather  too  low  for  direct  firing  will  probably  ricochet  and 
strike  the  object  with  .effect,  even  when  the  water  is  considerably  rough. 
This  may  be  called  "  accidental  ricochet." 

When  the  water  is  not  smooth,  the  most  favorable  circumstances  for 
ricochet  firing  are  when  the  flight  of  the  shot  is  with  the  roll  of  the  sea, 
and  that  roll  is  long  and  regular. 

Ricochet  will  be  effective  against  small  objects  up  to  2,000  yards,  but 
should  not  commence  at  less  than  600  yards ;  at  less  distances  it  is  prefer 
able  to  fire  direct.  Ricochet  is  of  no  value  from  rifled  guns  firing  elongated 
projectiles,  as  they  lose  all  certainty  of  direction  on  the  rebound. 

Upon  smooth  water,  a  shot  fired  horizontally  from  the  32-pdr.  of  33  cwt., 
with  4-J  Ibs.  powder,  ricocheted  and  rolled  about  3,000  yards;  the  greatest 
range  obtained  from  an  elevation  of  5°,  with  the  same  gun  and  charge, 
was  less  than  1,800  yards.  See  Dahlgren's  Report  on  32-pdr.  of  32  cwt., 
p.  90. 

Shot  rarely  ricochet  at  all  with  elevations  above  5°,  and  the  bounds  are 
always  higher,  with  equal  charges  from  the  same  gun,  as  the  elevation  of 
the  gun  is  increased. 

319*  Concentration  of  fire  may  be  desirable  under  certain  circumstances  ; 
and  arrangements  have  been  sometimes  made  to  secure  it  by  the  simulta 
neous  discharge  of  a  number  of  guns  upon  some  part  of  an  object  whose 
distance  is  known. 

The  advantages  of  these  arrangements  are  not  very  obvious,  excepting  in 
cases  where  the  position  of  the  enemy  may  be  visible  from  one  part  of  a 
ship  and  not  from  all  the  guns  in  the  batteries. 

The  object  sought  to  be  obtained  is  therefore  to  aim  from  in-board  at  an 
invisible  target,  the  distance  and  direction  of  which  are  indicated  by  the 
Captain.  It  is  consequently  necessary  that  he  shall  be  so  placed  as  to  ob 
tain  a  distinct  view  of  the  enemy,  or  have  suitable  observers  to  inform  him 
of  his  exact  position. 


NOTES   UPON  THE   MANUAL   EXERCISE. 


87 


320*  In  general,  this  sort  of  fire  has  been  of  little  efficacy  ;  but  by  the  aid 
of  a  simple  implement,  readily  made  on  board  ship,  it  is  believed  that  good 
results  may  be  obtained,  and  particularly  at  night,  when  firing  from  guns 
on  covered  decks  is  now  absolutely  ineffective. 

It  consists  of  a  simple  metal  or  wooden  batten,  sliding  in  two  beckets 
attached  to  the  outer  or  inner  sides  of  each  of  the  brackets  of  the  carriage, 
retained  in  any  position  by  a  thumb-screw.  This  batten  is  graduated  by 
experiment  or  calculation  for  either  the  parallel  or  converging  fire,  for 
such  points  on  the  bow,  beam,  or  quarter,  as  may  be  deemed  advisable. 

A  small  knob  is  screwed  into  the  inner  end  of  each  batten,  and  a  cod- 
line  provided,  with  a  loop  in  each  end,  somewhat  longer  than  the  width 
across  the  transom.  If,  then,  one  of  the  battens  be  drawn  out  to  the 
graduation  representing  the  degree  of  train  required,  the  line  stretched  taut 
from  the  two  knobs  and  hitched,  and  guns  trained  until  this  line  is  parallel 
to  a  mark  on  the  deck,  or  one  of  the  seams  of  the  deck-plank — if  they  are 
parallel  to  the  keel — the  guns  will  all  make  the  required  angle,  and  may  be 
fired  simultaneously  or  in  succession,  as  ordered. 


DUTIES   AT   QUARTERS,    IN   BATTLE   OR   EXERCISE. 

321 1  The  principal  object  in  view,  therefore,  is  so  to  prepare  the  training 
by  anticipation,  that  when  the  smoke  rises,  or  on  sheering  the  vessel,  the 
enemy  shall  be  visible  to  all  the  Gun  Captains  at  the  same  time ;  giving 
them  the  choice  to  fire  at  will,  or  on  a  given  signal,  if  simultaneous  fire  be 
desired. 

It  diminishes  the  great  disadvantages  of  guns  on  covered  decks,  where 
the  Gun  Captains  can  only  with  difficulty  ascertain  the  direction  of  the 
enemy ;  and  places  the  whole  battery  more  completely  under  the  control  of 
the  Commander. 

322.  The  principal   care  of  the  Commander  must  be  to  keep  his  guns 
always  bearing  on  the  enemy,  and  never  pass  the  limits  of  extreme  train  for 
all  his  guns,  unless  absolutely  necessary  in  manoeuvring. 

This  he  must  regulate,  either  by  one  of  the  guns  in  his  vicinity,  or,  better, 
by  the  aid  of  a  bearing-plate,  a  species  of  plane-table  which  gives  the  angular 
bearing  of  the  object. 

323.  Concentration  of  fire  upon  a  particular  part  of  an  enemy's  vessel 
may  also  be  obtained  by  a  general  order  for  the  guns  to  be  aimed  to  strike 
that  part  when  visible,  leaving  the  Captains  of  guns  to  determine  the  proper 
time  for  firing,  according  to  circumstances  at  the  moment.     This  obviates 
the  objections  due  to  simultaneous  firing,  and  would  generally  be   equally 
effective  at  distances  beyond  point-blank.     In  this,  as  in  all  other  cases  of 
firing  at  sea,  success  depends  mainly  upon  the  skill,  judgment,  and  coolness 
of  the  Captains  of  the  guns. 


THE   USE   OP   FUZES.  89 


THE    USE    OF    FUZES. 

324.  All  spherical  shells,  except  those  for  the  24  and  12  pdr.  howitzer, 
and  all  shrapriell,  are  fitted  with  the  Navy  time-fuze. 

This  fuze  is  composed  of  a  composition  driven  in  a  paper  case,  and 
then  inserted  in  a  metal  stock  which  screws  into  a  bouching  fitted  to 
the  shell. 

The  composition  is  covered  with  a  safety-cap,  which  protects  it  from 
moisture  and  accidental  ignition  ;  also  with  a  water-cap  of  peculiar  con 
struction,  intended  to  protect  the  flame  from  being  extinguished  on 
ricochet. 

A  safety-plug  at  the  lower  extremity  prevents  the  communication  of 
fire  to  the  powder  in  the  shell,  in  the  event  of  the  accidental  ignition  of  the 
fuze  after  being  uncapped. 

325«  It  is  strictly  forbidden  to  show  or  explain  to  foreigners  or  others 
the  construction  of  any  fuzes,  except  so  far  as  may  be  necessary  for  the 
service  of  the  guns. 

326,  These  fuzes  are  of  3-J-,  5,  7,  10,  15,  and   20  seconds  time  of  burn 
ing  ;    which    are  supposed  to    offer   a   sufficient  variety  for   most   of  the 
exigencies  of  service.     There  are  also  supplied  paper-case  fuzes  of  greater 
length,  which,  when  used,  are  always  to  be  inserted  in  metal  stocks. 

All  the  Navy  t'.me-fuzes — paper  case  as  well  as  metal  stock — being  in 
tended  fox'  use  under  a  water-cap,  burn  a  longer  time  in  the  open  air. 

All  shells,  unless  otherwise  ordered,  are  fitted  and  issued  from  the  shell- 
houses  with  the  5-seconds  fuze,  which  is  to  be  regarded  as  the  general  work 
ing  fuze. 

For  greater  or  less  distances  this  fuze  may  be  drawn,  and  any  of  the  others 
substituted. 

The  Navy  time-fuze  is  rarely  extinguished  by  several  ricochets  on  water ; 
and  near  the  end  of  its  flight,  when  fired  direct,  frequently  acts  by  con 
cussion. 

The  fuze  used  should  not  be  of  longer  time  of  burning  than  requisite  to 
reach  the  object ;  the  shorter  times  are  of  quicker  composition,  therefore 
more  certain ;  also  in  firing  on  ricochet  the  shell  may  sink  short  of  the  dis 
tance  necessary  for  its  explosion,  and  consequently  be  supposed  to  fail. 

327.  For  special  firing,  as  for  example  at  shore-batteries  or  masses  of 
uncovered   troops,    any   of    these  fuzes  may  be    shortened.     To   do    this, 
unscrew  the  water-cap   and  back  the   paper  case  out  from  the  lower  end 
with  a  drift  and  mallet ;  cut  off  from  the  lower  end  with  a  fine  saw,  or 
sharp  knife  struck  with  a  mallet,  the  proportional  part  required,  and  insert 


90  DUTIES   AT   QUARTERS,    IN   BATTLE   OR   EXERCISE. 

the  upper  part  in  the  stock,  forcing  it  down  with  a  few  gentle  blows  with 
the  drift ;  screw  on  the  water-cap.  It  is  preferable,  however,  when  circum 
stances  will  admit,  to  take  up  such  distance  as  will  correspond  with  the  time 
of  flight  of  one  of  the  regulation  lengths.  When  firing  against  ships  or 
earthworks,  the  faze  should  be  a  little  longer  than  necessary,  in  order  to 
reach  the  object  before  bursting;  but  a  little  shorter  when  firing  against 
boats  or  masses  of  troops,  in  order  to  insure  its  bursting  in  front  of  them. 

328.  The  Bormann  fuze  is  fitted  to  the  24-pdr.  and  12-pdr.  howitzer  am 
munition,  and  all  shrapncll.     It  has  also  been  fitted  to  certain   shells  used 
for  special  firing.     The  length  of  fuze  is  the  limit   of  the  distance  within 
which  this  fire  is  effective. 

This  fuze  is  opened  at  the  required  number  of  seconds,  by  cutting  close 
to  the  right  of  the  mark  on  the  index-plate.  The  cut  should  be  made 
down  to  the  plane  of  the  table,  in  order  to  expose  the  composition ;  and  is 
best  made  at  two  or  three  efforts,  instead  of  trying  to  effect  the  cut  at  once. 
This  fuze  should  be  carefully  explained  to  the  men,  as  shells  have  been 
taken  from  guns  with  the  cut  made  into  the  priming-magazine,  which  would 
explode  them  at  the  muzzle. 

329.  There  are  also  on  trial  for  the  rifled  cannon  the  percussion  and 
time  fazes  of  Schenkl,  Hotchkiss,  Parrott,  and  others. 

No  reliable  percussion  or  concussion-fuze  has  as  yet  been  arranged  for 
spherical  shells. 

330.  These   fuzes    will   be    exhibited  and  explained    by  the   Ordnance 
Officer   on    the    application    of     Commanders  of  vessels,   who,   with   the 
Executive  Officer  arid  Gunner,  are  enjoined  to  make  themselves  thoroughly 
acquainted  with  this  most  important  part  of  the  equipment. 

331.  Commanders  of  vessels  will  carefully  note  and  report  the  efficiency 
of  all  fuzes  fired  in  action  or  exercise  ;  giving  the  elevation  of  the  gun, 
the  estimated    or    measured    range,  the  number  fired,  the    name  of   the 
inventor,  whether  percussion  or  time,  the  number  of  failures    to   explode 
the  shell,  premature  explosions,  and   satisfactory  action.     Great  waste  of 
ammunition  is  frequently  occasioned  by  an  under-estimate  of  the  distance. 

332.  The  times  of  flight  and  length  of  fuze  for  all  projectiles,  so  far  as 
ascertained  at  the  Experimental  Battery  at  Washington,  are  given  in  the 
TABLE  OF  RANGES,  Appendix  B. 

333.  The  best  effect  of  a  percussion-fuze  is  obtained  by  firing  into   a 
mass  of  timber.     They  frequently  fail  if  fired  into  a  bank  of  soft  earth,  sand, 
or  other  material  which  does  not  offer  a  sufficiently  sudden  resistance ;  also,  if 
fired  at  high  angles  of  elevation,  owing  to  the  fact  that  the  rifle-shells  do 
not  generally  strike  point  foremost. 


THE    USE    OF   FUZES.  91 


334,  Time-fuzes  are  also  very  unreliable  in  rifle-guns ;  expanding  projec 
tiles  cut  oft'  the  flame  from  the  fuze. 

With  the  Parrott  shell,  however,  the  Navy  time-fuze  is  the  most  certain 
of  ignition  and  regular  in  its  time  of  burning.  The  safety-plug  should  be 
removed  when  the  Navy  time-fuse  is  used  in  rifled  cannon,  as  recent  ex 
periments  show  that  it  is  a  probable  cause  of  premature  explosions  of  shells. 

In  testing  the  Navy  time-fuse  by  the  watch,  or  michronometer,  the  safety- 
plug  must  be  removed :  otherwise  the  fuze  will  burn  longer  than  the  time 
for  which  it  is  marked. 


92  DUTIES  AT  QUARTERS,  IN   BATTLE   OR  EXERCISE. 


BOARDERS. 

335.  It  is  not  supposed  that  any  directions  can  be  framed  which  will 
entirely  provide  for  all  the  various  circumstances  which  may  require  atten 
tion  when  about  to  board  an  enemy,  or  to  repel  a  similar  assault  made  by  an 
enemy  upon  our  vessels. 

The  following  general  suggestions  are,  however,  presented  for  the  con 
sideration  of  Captains,  in  order  that  some  degree  of  uniformity  may  be  pre 
served  when  other  more  important  considerations  do  not  prevent  it. 

336.  Upon  the  signal  for  Boarders,  the  divisions  called  should  form  on 
the  gangway  of  the  side  which  is  not  engaged,  properly  armed,  and  remain 
there  until  ordered  elsewhere,  provided  there  be  time  to  make  this  disposi 
tion  of  them.     In  all  movements  from  one  part  of  the   ship  to  another, 
cutlasses  should  be  sheathed  and  pistols  in  the  frogs.     The  men  of  each 
division  should  be  united  as  much  as  possible  under  their   own   officer. 
Bayonets  riot  fixed  until  ordered. 

"  PREPARE  TO  BOARD  !" 
(FROM  ANY  SPECIFIED  PART  OF  THE  SHIP.) 

337.  The  Boarders  should  repair  to  the  place  directed,  taking  care  to 
keep  themselves  down  so  as  not  to  be  seen  by  the  enemy,  and  form  close 
to  the  bulwarks,  until  the  order  is  given  to — 

" BOARD    THE    ENEMY  !" 

338.  The  Boarders  should  then  gain  the  enemy's  deck  as  quickly  as  pos 
sible,  keeping  near  enough  to  each  other  for  mutual  support,  and  to  act  in 
concert  against  the  opposing  force,  using  every  possible  exertion  to  clear  the 
enemy's  decks  by  disabling  or  driving  the  men  below. 

In  case  the  intention  of  boarding  should  be  discovered  by  the  enemy,  and 
he  collects  his  men  to  repel  the  attack,  the  marines  and  small-arm  men 
should  take  positions  where  they  can  best  fire  upon  the  men  thus  collected ; 
and,  if  possible,  the  spar-deck  guns  loaded  with  grape,  and  howitzers  loaded 
with  canister,  should  be  used  for  the  same  purpose  before  the  Boarders  are 
ordered  to  make  the  attack. 

So  long  as  the  contest  is  continued  after  boarding,  the  fire  should  be  kept 
up  against  the  enemy  from  all  the  guns  with  as  much  vigor  as  the  number 
of  men  remaining  at  them  will  allow. 

The  guns  should  then  be  much  depressed,  in  order  that  there  may  be  little 
or  no  danger  to  our  own  men.  Much  positive  injury  may  be  inflicted  on 


BOARDERS.  93 


the  enemy  in  this  way,  besides  the  advantages  of  dividing  his  attention  at 
such  an  important  moment. 

If  it  should  be  necessary  to  repel  Boarders  from  the  enemy,  the  Boarders 
and  Pikemen  must  be  called,  and  at  the  order — 

"  PREPARE    TO    REPEL    BOARDERS !" 
(AT  ANY   SPECIFIED   PART   OF   THE   SHD?.) 

339.  The  Pikemen  should  arrange  themselves  in  rear  of  those  armed 
with  swords,  and  in  situations  which  will  allow  them  to  rest  the  points  of 
their  pikes  on  the  hammocks  or  rail,  and  cover  that  part  of  the  ship  and 
the  parts  where  the  assault  is  expected.  The  marines,  with  their  muskets 
loaded  and  bayonets  fixed,  may  be  formed  behind  the  Pikemen,  or  at  any 
other  place  from  which  their  fire  on  an  assailing  enemy  may  be  most 
effective  and  least  dangerous  to  our  own  men. 

340*  The  moment  an  enemy  commences  his  assault,  the  order — 


REPEL    BOARDERS ! 


t" 


Should  be  given,  and  every  effort  made  to  prevent  his  gaining  or  retain 
ing  any  foothold  in  the  ship. 

It  will,  of  course,  be  important  to  bring  grape  and  musketry  to  bear 
at  once  upon  the  enemy's  men  when  they  are  assembled  for  boarding,  if 
they  should  be  discovered  in  time. 

The  men  left  at  the  guns  must  be  watchful  that  the  enemy  does  not 
gain  an  entrance  through  ports  or  quarter-galleries. 

341.  In  case  the  enemy  should  effect  a  lauding  on  the  decks,  the  pikes 
may,  from  their  length  and  the  press  of  the  contending  parties,  become  less 
efficient  than  the  swords.     Whenever  this  occurs,  the  sword  must  be  brought 
into  full  use,  as  the  most  efficient  weapon  for  attack  or  defence  at  such  close 
quarters. 

342.  The  howitzers,  mounted  on  the  field-carriage  and   charged  with 
canister,  should  be  ready  for  use  in  case  of  the  enemy's  getting  a  footing  on 
the  spar-deck. 

343.  Unless  induced  by  circumstances  to  attempt  to  board  the  enemy 
first,  the  most  favorable  opportunity  for  attack  will  present  itself  when  his 
men  have  been  driven  back  ;  and  to  guard  against  the  contingency  of  being 
repulsed,  in  all  cases  where  the  Boarders  are  called  to  attack  the  enemy 
they  are  to  be  covered  by  the  marines  and  all  the  available  small-arm  men 
on  deck. 

344.  The  men,    and    especially   the    Boarders   and    Pikemen,   must   be 
exercised  and  encouraged  to  practise  with  the  single  stick  and  sword,  as  far 
as  circumstances  will  allow. 


94  DUTIES  AT  QUARTERS,  IN"  BATTLE   OR  EXERCISE. 


GENEEAL  PEECAUTIOKS 

TO    BE    OBSERVED    IN    TIME    OF    WAR. 

345.  In  time  of  war,  unless  otherwise  ordered  by  the  Admiral  command 
ing,  every  cruiser  should   at   nightfall    carefully  extinguish  all  lights  not 
absolutely  necessary,  and  shade  all  those  that  are  indispensable,  that  they 
may  not  be  visible  from  out-board. 

346.  The  watch  on  deck  shall  be  mustered  at  their  quarters,  and  the  guns 
so  far  cast  loose  as  the  state  of  the  weather  will  permit. 

347.  The  officer  of  the  watch  shall,  on  taking  the  deck,  ascertain  that  the 
means  of  making  and  answering   signals  and  a  competent  signal-man  are 
always  at  hand.     It  is  his  duty  to  make  himself  fully  acquainted  with  all 
the  day  and  night  signals. 

348.  Before  making  night-signals,  every  light  should  be  extinguished  or 
covered. 

349.  Particular  care  is  required,  when  it  is  expedient  to  conceal  the  lights 
of  the  ship,  to  look  well  to  the  cabin  and  wardroom  lights.     Ports  and  air- 
scuttles  there,  are  more  apt  to  be  imperfectly  masked  or  thrown  open  heed 
lessly  by  servants. 

350.  If  in  company  with  other  vessels,  two  guns  in  each  broadside  must 
always  be  ready  for  making  signals  of  immediate  or  urgent  necessity. 

351.  No  vessel  cruising  shall  allow  a  strange  or  suspected  vessel  to  come 
within  gunshot,  without  the  watch  being  at  quarters  and  ready  to  open 
fire. 

352.  It  is  the  duty  of  the  officer  of  the  watch  to  immediately  inform  the 
Commander  of  all  suspicious  movements  which  he  may  observe,  or  which 
may  be  reported  to  him,  and  of  all  unknown  vessels  or  boats  that  may  ap 
pear  in  sight. 

353.  Speed   being   one    of  the   principal    elements   of    military   force, 
Steamers  will,  on  going  into  action,  have  all  the  fires  lighted  and  in  condition 
to  make  steam. 

The  beat  to   quarters  for  action  is  therefore  a  signal  to  start  fires  in  all 
the  furnaces  not  in  operation. 

354.  If  at  anchor  singly  or  in  squadron  in  our  own  waters,  in  those  of  an 
ally,  or  elsewhere  within  our  right  to  exercise  control,  and  where  liable  to  an 
attack  by  an  enemy  in  any  form,  no  strange  or  suspicious  vessel  must  be 


GENERAL   PRECAUTIONS  IN  TIME   OF  WAR.  95 

permitted  to  be  underway  between  evening  gun-fire  and  daylight.  The 
nearest  vessel  must  require  her  to  anchor,  and  send  an  armed  boat  to 
ascertain  her  character. 

355.  If  the  Senior  Officer  opens  fire  on  any  vessel,  the  nearest  vessel  in  a 
position  to  do  so  will  also  be  prepared  to  fire  to  bring  her  to,  if  signalled. 
All  boats  to  be  hailed  and  ordered  alongside  to  give  the  countersign,  or  to 
lay  off  on  their  oars  to  be  visited  by  the  guard-boat. 

356.  If  at  anchor  in  or  about  an  enemy's  waters,  steam  shall  be  kept  up 
at  night  at  all  times,  sufficient  to  move  the  vessel  at  half  speed  at  least, 
and  the  engines  moved  certainly  every  hour,  or  oftener  if  necessary,  to  keep 
them  in  a  condition  for  immedia'te  service.     In  vessels  with   single  engine, 
liable  to  be  caught  on  the  centres,  means  for  turning  it  off  to  be  kept  at 
hand,  and  suitable  persons  stationed  to  attend  to  it. 

357.  The  cable  must  be  kept  ready  in  every  respect  for  slipping,  with  a 
stopper  forward  of  the  bits,  and  even  unshackled,  if  the  weather  will  permit, 
with  a  steady  man  stationed  to  slip  or  cut  as  may  be  requisite. 

358.  Some  of  the  guns,  and  those  such  as  may  be  brought  most  con 
veniently  to  bear  upon  the  probable  quarter  of  attack,  must  be  loaded  with 
grape  and  some  with  canister,  and  ample  supplies  for  reloading  be  kept  on 
deck.     Appliances  for  extreme  depression  should  be  at  hand  for  broadside- 
guns  ;  a  gun  here  and  there  depressed  extremely.     The  Howitzers,  on  field- 
carriages,  in  place,  and  loaded  with  canister.     Pikes  distributed  about  the 
decks  ready  for  use. 

359.  Small  vessels  lying  in  rivers  or  sounds,  and  liable  to  be  attacked  and 
carried  by  boarding,  will  have  their  boarding-nettings  of  wire  rope  secured 
at  evening  quarters;  the  guns  cast  loose  ;  the  watch  completely  armed  and 
on  the  alert,  and  every  preparation  made  for  instantly  slipping  and  getting 
under  way  and  repelling  boarders. 

360.  At  the  hail  by  the  look-out  of  "  Boat  ahoy,"  without  further  orders 
or  the  striking  of  the  bell,  the  engine  should  be  started  immediately,  the  slip- 
rope  cut,  and  all  boats  are  to  be  received  while  under  way  and  the  crew  at 
quarters. 

361.  It  is  important  that  the  arms  of  the  watch  below  should  be  as  acces 
sible  as  possible,  that  no  confusion  may  take  place  in  case  of  being  sum 
moned  suddenly.     The  engineer  and  watch  in  the  fire  and  engine  room 
must  always  be  armed. 

362.  On  dark,  foggy,  or  hazy  nights,  no  lights  should  be  shown,  nor  the 
bell  struck  or  watch  piped  to  indicate  the  position  of  the  vessel. 

The  look-outs,  increased  and  cautioned  to  greater  vigilance,  relieved  at 


96  DUTIES   AT   QUARTERS,    IN   BATTLE   OR   EXERCISE. 

least  hourly,  and  visited  by  either  the  Commander  or  Executive  Officer  half 
hourly. 

363,  The  safety  of  small  vessels  at  night  requires  that  they  shall  be  always 
either  underway,  or  else  in  readiness  to  be  got  so  at  the  shortest  warn 
ing. 

384,  If  circumstances  prevent  this,  the  greater  the  necessity  for  increased 
precaution  and  vigilance,  and  therefore  a  picket  or  advice  boat  should  be 
kept  out  in  the  direction  from  which  attack  may  be  expected  ;  and,  indeed, 
the  resort  of  picket-boats  should  be  observed  whenever  practicable  and  at  all 
likely  to  be  of  service. 

365,  In  case  of  sending  away  a  boat  that  is  to  return  before  sunrise — which 
is  always  to  be  avoided,  if  possible — a  concerted  signal,  such  as  a  certain 
number  of  flashes  of  a  light,  preceded  or  followed  by  the  firing  of  a  certain 
number  of  muskets,  must  be  made  at  the  distance  from  the  vessel  of  about 
one-half  mile,  the  rm  nbcr  to  bo  agreed  upon  for  each  night  as  the  boat 
leaves  the  vessel.     A  countersign  is  also  to  be  given ;  but  if  not  understood 
by  the  look-out,  he  is  to  call  out  "  Enemy,"  at  the  same  time  warning  the 
boat  to  keep  oft',  at  which  the  vessel  will  be  got  underway  at  once. 

366.  The  boat  must  be  furnished  with  suitable  and  reliable  fireworks  or 
other   means  for  announcing  instantly  the   approach  of  an  enemy,  and  no 
excuse  can  bo  taken  for  a  failure  on  the  part  of  the  picket  to  give  the  alarm. 
The  capture  of  the  picket-boat  is  a  minor  consideration. 

367*  When  confident  of  being  able  to  repel  any  force,  the  boat  should 
return  to  give  timely  notice  for  preparation;  and  in  this  case  it  may  be  ex 
pedient  to  be  prepared  to  light  up  the  adjacent  waters,  to  enable  an  effective 
fire  to  be  opened  on  the  enemy  from  guns  and  howitzers. 


Commanding  Officers  of  vessels  situated  as  described  in  Art.  359, 
are  required  to  practise  their  crews,  by  going  on  deck  and  hailing,  "  Boat 
ahoy,"  at  least  once  a  week. 

The  time  taken  for  the  execution  of  this  order  to  be  noted  on  the  log. 

360,  In  times  of  anticipated  attack  from  rams  or  mail-clad  vessels  upon 
a  fleet  or  single  ship,  it  is  recommended  to  load  the  guns  with  maximum 
charges  and  solid  shot;  but  where  there  is  doubt  of  the  character  of  the 
assailant,  the  guns  should  only  be  loaded  with  the  service  powder  charge 
having  ready  at  hand  shot,  shell,  shrapnell,  grape,  or  canister,  as  the  case 
may  demand. 


DIRECTIONS   IN  CASE   OF  FIRE.  97 


DIRECTIONS  IN  CASE  OF  FIRE. 

370*  In  the  following  directions,  no  other  object  is  proposed  than  to 
notice  some  of  the  more  prominent  and  common  preparations  which  may 
be  generally  made,  and  the  measures  to  be  adopted  in  vessels  on  the  alarm 
of  fire.  The  variety  of  circumstances  under  which  that  danger  may  be 
presented  can  only  be  successfully  met  by  properly  stationed,  well-trained 
and  disciplined  men,  judiciously  directed  by  the  Captain,  and  superintended 
by  officers  whose  coolness  and  presence  of  mind  are  proof  against  every 
form  and  degree  of  clanger,  which  alone  will  enable  them  to  adopt  and  exe 
cute  the  best  plans  the  emergency  may  require. 

To  this  end  the  Captain  will,  as  soon  as  the  crew  is  organized,  cause  a 
FIRE-BILL  to  be  prepared,  adapted  to  the  particular  arrangements  of  his 
ship,  and  in  accordance  with  these  Directions,  by  which  the  crew  is  to  be 
drilled  once  a  week  till  expert,  and  after  that  occasionally.  This  fire-bill 
should,  as  far  as  possible,  conform  to  the  arrangement  for  extinguishing  fire 
during  exercise  at  General  Quarters.  Much  confusion  has  been  known  to 
arise  from  requiring  different  duties  from  the  same  person  at  Fire  Quarters, 
and  in  case  of  fire  when  at  General  Quarters. 

371.  Should  the  alarm  of  fire  be  given  when  the  men  are  not  at  Quarters, 
that  alarm  of  itself  is  to  be  considered  as  a  call  to  Quarters,  and  the  men 
must  repair  to  their  stations  at  once.     This  must  be  impressed  upon  the 
men  by  the  Division  Officers.     But  the  ordinary  call  for  inspection  is  to  be 
given  as  soon  as  practicable,  by  way  of  enforcing  the  order. 

The  alarm  will  be  given  by  the  sentinel  near  the  bell,  by  ringing  quickly 
and  loudly  successive  peals  for  ten  or  fifteen  seconds,  with  short  intervals 
between. 

The  bell  is  to  cease,  however,  as  soon  as  the  drum  begins  to  sound  the 
call  to  Quarters. 

Should  it  be  deemed  necessary  to  water  and  provision  the  boats,  pre 
paratory  to  lowering  them,  the  drum  will  beat  the  usual  call  for  provisions, 
when  the  men  stationed  for  these  purposes  will  promptly  proceed  with  their 
duties.  In  this  case  the  shot  shall  be  drawn  or  discharged  from  the  guns, 
to  guard  against  accidents  in  leaving  the  vessel,  should  it  be  impossible  to 
save  her. 

372.  The  Captain  will  direct  the  Executive  Officer,  and  such  others  as 
he  may  deem  proper,  to  visit  the  place  of  the  fire,  and  to  transmit  reports 
to  him,  by  officers,  of  its  character  and  extent,  and  to  suggest  the  measures 
which  will  most  speedily  and  certainly  subdue  it,  or  prevent  its  extension. 

373.  He  will,  if  at  sea,  cause  the  ship  to  be  hove-to,  or  steered  in  such 


98  DUTIES  AT   QUARTERS,    IN   BATTLE   OR  EXERCISE. 

direction  as  will  be  least  likely  to  increase  the  activity  of  the  fire,  or  will 
best  enable  the  men  to  use  the  means  in  their  power  for  controlling  and 
extinguishing  it. 

374.  If  fire  should  take  place  in  a  ship  at  anchor  in  port  or  harbor,  his 
attention  must  be  given  to  prevent  the  communication  of  the  fire  to  other 
vessels  or  combustible  objects,  and  to  have  the  cables  ready  for   slipping, 
boats  ready,  and,  if  advisable,  springs  prepared  to  change  the  position  of  the 
ship,  in  order  to  prevent  danger  to  other  vessels. 

375.  He  will    decide   whether  the  magazines  and  shell-rooms  shall  be 
flooded,   and   give    orders   accordingly;    whether   the  hammocks   shall   be 
brought  up  and  stowed ;  where  sentinels  shall  be  placed,  and  what  disposition 
shall  be  made  of  the  sick  and  prisoners. 

If  hammocks  are  to  be  brought  up,  each  man  not  a  Fireman,  Pump 
man,  Hoseman,  Axeman,  or  Smotherer,  or  belonging  to  the  Carpenter's 
gang,  or  detailed  as  a  Sentinel  over  boats'  falls  or  spirit-room,  will  lash  and 
carry  up  two  hammocks  and  stow  them  in  the  nettings  on  his  way  to  Quar 
ters.  Blankets,  or  other  woollen  materials,  when  wet,  afford  an  excellent 
means  of  smothering  fire,  and  should  be  left  out  by  the  party  lashing  up 
the  hammocks  and  collected  by  the  Smothering  party,  in  charge  of  an 
officer,  whose  duty  it  will  be  to  see  them  properly  used. 

.  376.  The  Officers  of  the  respective  divisions  will  enforce  the  strictest 
observance  df  orders  from  those  under  their  command,  and  allow  no  one  to 
leave  his  station,  unless  by  express  orders  or  permission.  At  the  same 
time  they  will  direct  the  most  trustworthy  of  their  men  to  perform  any 
particular  duty  within  their  divisions  which  may  tend  to  check  the  spread 
ing  of  the  fire,  or  furnish  the  means  of  extinguishing  it. 

377*  Officers  of  gun-deck  divisions  will  be  prompt  to  detach,  under 
proper  officers,  men  who  may  be  directed  for  any  particular  service,  or 
who  may  be  called  from  the  guns  by  the  calls  for  Firemen,  Sail-Trimmers, 
or  Boarders.  Should  the  call  for  Boarders  be  made  in  case  of  fire,  the  men 
will  answer  it  without  any  other  arms  than  their  swords  or  battle-axes. 
Divisional  Officers  near  the  main  or  other  pumps,  will  cause  the  men  of 
their  divisions  to  aid  in  rigging  and  working  them.  The  ship's  buckets 
are  to  be  passed  up  to  the  pumps,  as  soon  as  possible,  by  the  persons  who 
may  be  stationed  near  them,  and  these  and  the  fire-buckets  and  division- 
tubs  filled.  The  swabs  are  also  to  be  got  up  and  thoroughly  wetted. 

Division-boxes,  and  all  powder  or  explosive  materials  not  in  the  maga 
zines,  must  be  taken  in  charge  by  the  Quarter-Gunners  and  placed  in  the 
safest  positions,  ready  to  be  thrown  overboard  if  ordered. 

378.  The  Officer  commanding  the  Powder  division  will  himself  deliver 


DIRECTIONS   IN   CASE  OF    FIRE. 


the  keys  of  the  magazines,  shell-rooms,  and  water-cocks  to  the  Gunner, 
his  Mate,  and  the  men  stationed  at  the  water-cocks,  and  see  that  they 
are  prepared  to  flood  the  magazines,  if  orders  should  be  given  to  that 
effect ;  but  he  must  take  especial  care  that  the  magazines,  passages,  and 
shell-rooms  are  kept  closed  until  orders  to  open  them  are  received  from  the 
Captain. 

379.  He  will  also  take  care  that  the  air-ports  are   immediately  closed, 
and  all   other  means  adopted  for  diminishing  currents  of  air,  especially 
if  there  should  be  a  hope  of  confining  the  fire  to  the  lower  parts  of  the 
vessel. 

He  will  at  once  have  the  hose  led  from  the  bilge-cock,  the  cock  turned, 
and,  if  the  forcing-pump  or  engine  is  worked  below  the  gun-deck,  will  see 
*it  manned  and  worked  by  some  of  the  men  of  his  division. 

380.  The  Master  will  cause  windsails   to  be  taken  down;    and,  if  set, 
courses,  spanker,  and  all  lower  sails  hauled  close  np ;  head,  channel,  and  all 
other  pumps  which  work  on  upper  deck,  and  fire-engine,  if  on  deck,  to  be 
rigged  and  worked  by  the  men  of  his  division  stationed  nearest  to  each  of 
them.     If  practicable,  sails,  rigging,  boats,  spars,  and  the  sides  of  ship  must 
be  kept  wet,  and  every  exertion  made  to  furnish  a  full  supply  of  water  for 
extinguishing  the  fire.     Rigging-axes  and  battle-axes  must  be  ready  for  use, 
in  case  they  should  be  wanted  for  any  purpose. 

381.  The    Chief    Engineer   will    detail    such    Assistant    Engineers   and 
men  as  may  be  needed  to  take  charge  of  steam-pumps,  to  lead  out  hose, 
and  to  use  such  other  means  of  extinguishing  the  fire  as  may  be  ordered  or 
deemed  advisable.     If  under  steam,  the  main  engine  will  be  slowed  on  the 
first  alarm  of  fire,  unless  otherwise  expressly  ordered,  and  the  steam-pumps 
started. 

382.  The  Surgeon  and  his  assistants  will  be  in  readiness  to  destroy,  if 
required,  all  inflammable  fluids,  or  other  medical  stores   which  would  in 
crease  the  fire;    and  to  superintend  the  removal,  if  necessary,  of  patients 
who  may  be  lame  or  confined  to  hammocks  or  cots. 

383.  Exercises,  by  order  of  the  Captain,  following  false  alarms  of  fire, 
known  only  to  him  and  the  Executive  Officer  to  be  false  at  the  time  of 
giving  the  alarm,  may,  it  is  believed,  be  resorted  to  with  advantage,  espe 
cially  at  night. 

Such  alarms  furnish  the  best  means  of  ascertaining  practically  whether 
the  necessary  preparations  for  extinguishing  fire  have  been  duly  attended 
to;  and  what  degree  of  silence,  calmness,  and  promptitude  may  be  expected 
from  officers  and  men  in  repairing  to  their  stations,  as  well  as  in  the  per 
formance  of  their  duties  in  a  real  case  of  fire. 

False  alarms,  frequently  repeated,  may  perhaps  lead  some  of  the  men 


100  DUTIES  AT  QUARTERS,   IN  BATTLE   OR  EXERCISE. 

to  move  slowly,  under  the  impression  that  every  alarm  given  is  false,  and 
merely  intended  for  exercise  ;  and  this  impression  may  be  entertained  even 
when  a  fire  has  actually  taken  place.  This  evil  would,  however,  be  com 
paratively  small,  since  it  will  be  readily  admitted  by  any  one  who  has  wit 
nessed  the  effect  of  a  fire  upon  a  crew  at  sea,  that  the  great  difficulty  in 
such  cases  is  to  obtain  that  necessary  quiet  and  orderly  attendance  at  Quar 
ters  which  is  essential  to  the  success  of  all  subsequent  measures. 


RIFLED   CANNON. 


101 


CHAPTEE  V, 


RIFLED  CANNON. 


384.  THE  rifled  cannon  at  present  in  service  are — 

PARROTT. 


DENOMINATION. 

WEIGHT. 

CHARGE. 

WEIGHT  OF  SHELL. 

WEIGHT  OP  SHOT 

Ibs. 

G.4-inch,  or  100-pounder.  . 

9,700 

8   Ibs.  rifle. 

80  Ibs. 

70  Ibs. 

5.3-inch,  or  60-pounder  .  . 

5,400 

6    Ibs.  rifle. 

50  Ibs. 

60  Ibs. 

4.2-inch,  or  30-pounder  .  . 

3,550 

3^  Ibs.  cannon. 

29  Ibs. 

30  Ibs. 

3.67-inch,  or  20-pounder.  . 

1,750 

2    Ibs.  cannon. 

18  Ibs. 

20  Ibs. 

DAHLGREN. 


DENOMINATION. 

WEIGHT. 

CHARGE. 

WEIGHT  OF 
SHELL. 

CHARGE. 

4-inch,  or  20-pounder,  bronze  howitzer.  . 
3.4-inch,  or  12-pounder,  bronze  howitzer. 

Ibs. 
1,340 
880 

2  Ibs.  cannon. 
1  Ib.  cannon. 

18  Ibs. 
11  Ibs. 

0.86  Ib. 
0.50  Ib. 

385. 


CHARGES  FOR  PARROTT'S  SHELL. 


8-  INCH. 

100-PDR. 

60-PDR. 

30-PDR. 

20-PDR. 

Long  

Ibs.  oz. 

Ibs.  oz. 

Ibs.  oz. 

q    A 

Ibs.  oz. 

1      Q 

Ib.  oz. 
1 

Short  

3  11 

2    2 

SHELL  AND  SHOT  GAUGES. 


1  . 

100-PDR. 

OO-PDR. 

30-PDR. 

20-PDR. 

Greatest  I 

G   ->G 

5  97 

4  17 

3   64 

True  diameter  1 

6  35 

5  "  6 

4-15 

r>    fjo 

Least   1 

G  '!  'J 

5  94 

4  14 

3  Gl 

102  RIFLED   CANNON. 


387.  In  the  rifle-guns  of  Mr.  Parrott,  provisionally  adopted,  it  is  intended 
to  retain  the  full  charge  of  powder  which  a  smooth-bore  gun  of  the  same 
calibre  would  have  with  a  round  shot.     The  projectile  for  the  rifled  gun  is 
to  be  usually  ten  times  the  weight  of  this  charge.1 

388,  To  obtain  greater  initial  velocity,  projectiles  of  less  than  the  full 
•weight  have  been  provided — solid  shot  of  70  pounds  for  the  100-pounder, 
with  the  front  end  "  chilled."      Such  projectiles,  though  not  suited  for  long 
ranges,  will  be  effective  at  1,000  yards  or  less,  and  are  well  calculated  to  act 
against  oblique  surfaces  of  iron. 

389.  The  powder  for  the  100-pounder  and  60-poundcr  should  be  of  Rifle 
(or,  as  formerly  called,  No.  7) : — for  the  smaller  calibres,  30-pounder  and 
20-pounder,  of  Navy  cannon  powder.     The  cartridge-bags  are  the  same  as 
those  prescribed  for  similar  calibres  of  smooth-bore  guns.. 

390.  The  Parrott  guns  have  been  arranged  for  the  use  of  a  certain  kind 
of  projectile,  supplied  by  the  inventor.     These  have  reference  not  only  to 
the  calibre  and  mode  of  rifling,  but  to  the  design  of  the  gun  itself.     For 
these  reasons,  the  inventor  objects  to  the  use  of  any  other  than  his  own 
form  of  projectile  in  the  guns  of  his  invention.     This   request  has  been 
acceded  to  in  the  heavier  calibres.     The  shells  of  Schenkl  and  Hotchkiss 
have  also  been  used,  however,  in  the  smaller  calibres, 

It  is  not  considered  expedient  to  describe  these  projectiles,  and  it  is  there 
fore  directed  that  the  Commander,  Executive  Officer,  and  Gunner  shall  make 
themselves  thoroughly  acquainted  with  their  construction,  and  the  percus 
sion  and  time  fuzes  issued  with  them,  before  sailing.  The  Ordnance  Officer 
will  furnish  them  with  any  information  on  these  subjects  in  his  possession. 

391,  The    projectiles    consist   of  shells,   shrapnel,  and   solid    shot.     All 
rifled  projectiles  used   in  the  Navy  are  of  the  expanding  class ;    that  is, 
forced  into  the  grooves  by  the  action  of  the  charge  of  powder,  and  require 
no  other  precautions  in  loading  than  common  spherical  shells. 

392,  It  is,  however,  essential — 

1st.  That  the  base  of  every  rifle- projectile,  especially  the  Parrott,  shall  be 
thickly  greased  before  entering  it  into  the  gun.2  For  this  purpose  common 
pork  slush,  prepared  by  several  washings  in  hot  fresh  water,  may  be  used. 

2d.    That  the  bores  of  all  guns  shall  be  frequently  washed,  the  grooves 

j  Owing  to  the  recent  accidents  which  have  taken  place  with  these  guns,  the  150- 
pounder  has  been  withdrawn  from  service,  and  the  charge  of  the  100-pounder  pro 
visionally  reduced  to  eight  (8)  Ibs.  of  Rifle  powder,  and  the  short  shell  of  eighty  (80) 
Ibs.  only  is  to  be  used. 

2  The  Schenkl,  Hotchkiss,  and  some  other  projectiles,  have  a  small  quantity  of  grease 
attached. 


RIFLED   CANNON.  1Q3 


of  rifled  guns  cleaned  of  all  residuum  and  dirt,  and  a  moist  sponge  inva 
riably  used.     After  firing,  the  bore  should  be  oiled  with  a  sponge. 

The  attention  of  Commanding  Officers  is  especially  called  to  this  require 
ment;  and  the  Bureau  desires  that  the  action  of  Parrott's  and  other  rifle- 
projectiles  fired  under  the  above  conditions,  may  be  carefully  observed  and 
reported;  for  it  is  believed  that  nearly  all  the  failures  of  projectiles  in 
actual  service  result  from  the  grooves  being  filled,  after  a  few  rounds,  with 
a  hardened  residuum  of  powder. 

393,  It   is   also  necessary   that   the  shell   shall  be  close  home   on   the 
powder,  otherwise  the   necessary  expansion   will   not  take  place,  and   the 
shell  will  tumble  immediately  after  leaving  the  gun,  utterly  destroying  its 
range  and  accuracy. 

394,  In  order  to  be  certain  that  the  projectile  is  properly  home,  the 
rammer-handle  must  be  marked  to  indicate  it. 

395,  It  is  very  important  that  dirt,  sand,  or  other  foreign   substances 
should  not  be  carried  into  the  gun  on  the  sponge  or  the  projectile,  or  by 
the  wind  in  batteries  on  shore. 

In  using  guns  on  shore,  a  canvas  muzzle-bag,  a  soft  wad,  or  a  light  stopper 
of  wood,  suggest  themselves  as  means  of  security  during  the  interval  be 
tween  loading  and  firing  the  gun.  The  cover  or  stopper  might  be  removed, 
or  left  to  be  blown  away  at  each  discharge. 

The  longer  the  interval  above  alluded  to,  and  the  higher  the  elevation  at 
which  the  gun  is  kept,  the  more  important  and  necessary  are  these  pre 
cautions. 

398,  Much  care  is  taken  to  give  the  projectiles  uniformity  of  size ;  and 
if  the  powder  is  of  suitable  quality,  those  now  supplied  will  almost  inva 
riably  take  the  grooves.  Should  difficulty  in  this  respect,  however,  bo 
experienced,  it  may  be  remedied  by  separating  the  brass  ring  from  the  iron 
at  three  or  four  points  of  the  circumference.  This  should  be  done  with  a 
cold  chisel,  very  slightly,  and  so  as  not  to  interfere  with  the  loading.  It  is 
only  necessary  to  sever  the  contact  of  the  two  metals. 

397,  As  the  projectile  slides  in  the  gun  with  very  little  friction,  particu 
larly  when  greased,  the  gun  should  therefore  be  elevated  and  eased  out 
when  firing  to  leeward,  that  the  shot  may  not  be  started  from  its  seat.  An 
experiment  to  test  this,  showed  that  running  a  100-pounder  out  with  the 
force  of  its  crew  against  the  forward  hurter,  the  gun  being  level,  started  the 
shot  forward  nearly  two  feet. 

Placing  a  grommet  or  other  wad  over  elongated  projectiles  is  positively 
prohibited. 

The  100-pounder  and  60-pounder  guns  being,  respectively,  of  the 


104  RIFLED   CANNON. 


calibres  of  the  32-poander  and  18-pounder  spherical  shot,  and  fired  with 
the  same  charges,  these  shot  may  be  fired  from  them  with  excellent  effect, 
particularly  on  ricochet.  The  round  shot  should  be  sewed  up  in  canvas  or 
felt,  strapped  to  a  sabot,  or  snaked  between  two  grommet-wads. 

390.  Both  percussion  and  time  fuzes  are  supplied  for  these  rifle-guns. 
When  the  object  to  be  fired  at  presents  a  sufficient  resistance,  such  as  masses 
of  timber  or  earth,  ships,  or  solidly-built  houses,  the  percussion-fuzes  alone 
should  be  used  from  rifled  cannon.  They  will,  however,  frequently  fail  to 
explode  the  shell  at  long  ranges,  owing  to  the  shell  not  striking  on  its 
apex ;  or,  if  fired  into  loose  earth,  which  checks  its  momentum  too  slowly 
to  make  the  plunger  strike  with  sufficient  force. 

400.  It  has  been   observed  that  time-fuzes  burn  with  greater  rapidity 
in  shell  thrown  from  rifled  cannon.     Being  in  front,  they  are  subjected  to 
greater  pressure  from  the  air.     A  similar  effect  is  produced  when  the  fuze 
is  confined  under  a  water-cap,  as  in  the  naval  time-fuze. 

401.  The  fuze-holes  of  the  heavy  shells  are  cast  larger  than  the  diam 
eter  of  the  regular  fuze- stocks  of  the  navy,  which  can,  however,  be  used 
with  the  aid  of  a  bouching  or  an  adapting  ring,  always  sent  with  the  shells. 

This  bouching  has  heretofore  been  made  of  cast  zinc.  Others  with  a 
flange  and  washer  and  the  thread  cut  are  now  supplied,  and  the  use  of  the 
old  rings  is  prohibited. 

402.  If  it  be  desired  to  explode  the  shell  in  front  of  or  in  the  midst  of 
a  body  of  troops,  or  after  having  penetrated  some  resisting  obstacle,  the 
time-fuze  should  be  used.     This  is  the  only  fuze  to  be  used  with  shrapnel. 

403.  The  Vent  is  made  in  a  bouching  of  pure  copper  screwed  into  the 
gun.     In  the  largest  calibres  the  interior  orifice  is  lined  with  platinum. 

The  upper  portion  of  the  copper  in  naval  guns  is  replaced  by  steel,  to 
obtain  a  harder  surface  for  receiving  the  blow  of  the  hammer.  The  steel 
is  three-fourths  (£)  of  an  inch  thick. 

A  new  vent  can  be  readily  put  in,  after  getting  out  the  old  one,  without 
injury  to  the  screw-thread.  This  can  be  done  by  boring  out  the  bouching 
with  a  drill,  which  leaves  a  thin  shell  containing  the  thread.  Into  the  hole 
thus  made  insert  a  square  mandrel  about  four  inches,  driving  it  lightly  ;  by 
wrenching  it,  a  portion  of  the  shell  of  the  bouching  can  be  detached  and 
removed  by  unscrewing.  This  may  be  repeated,  and  the  whole  of  the  old 
copper  removed.  The  screw-thread  is  then  to  be  cleaned  out,  and  the  new 
vent-ping  screwed  in. 

404.  SIGHTS. — These  consist  of  a  fixed  sight  upon  the  right  rimbase, 
and  a  brass  movable  sight  placed  in  a  socket  which  is  screwed  into  the 


RIFLED   CANNON.  105 


rear  of  the  reinforce  at  the  breech  of  the  gun.  The  movable  sight  is  fur 
nished  with  a  sliding  eye-piece,  and  is  graduated  up  to  10°.  The  eye-piece 
is  also  capable  of  lateral  adjustment  to  allow  for  the  drift  as  far  as  10°,  and 
for  the  effect  of  the  wind.  It  is  desirable  that  the  sights  should  be  placed 
on  both  sides  of  the  breech ;  otherwise,  in  firing  from  a  port  at  extreme 
train,  there  is  a  considerable  loss  of  lateral  aim.  Furthermore,  with  the 
sight  on  the  right  rimbase,  it  is  not  convenient  for  the  2d  Captain  to  attend 
the  screw  without  interfering  with  the  aim. 

405.  These  guns  are  all  rifled  to  the  right,  by  which  it  is  understood  that 
the  upper  surface  of  the  projectile  is  made  to  turn  from  left  to  right,  the 
observer  looking  from  the  breech  towards  the  muzzle  of  the  gun. 

406.  DRIFT. — This  is  a  deviation  caused  by  the  direction  of  the  rifling,  is 
always  to  the  right  when  uninfluenced  by  the  wind,  and  is  to  be  allowed 
for. 

407.  The  drift  is  in  practice  confounded  with  the  deviation  produced  by 
the  direction  and  force  of  the  wind,  which  may  either  annul  or  increase  it, 
according  to  whether  it  blows  from  right  or  left  across  the   line  of  fire. 
At  long   range  it  is  also  necessary  to  consider  the  motion  of  the  vessel 
across  the  line  of  fire.     Suppose  this  to  be  at  the  rate  of  six  knots,  and  the 
gun  is  elevated   15°,  the  time  of  flight  would  be  by  the  Tables,  18  sec., 
while  the  deviation  arising  from  this  cause  would  be  upwards  of  60  yards. 
It  is  therefore  of  great  importance  that  the  Captain  of  the  gun  shall  be 
carefully  instructed  in  making  this  adjustment  of  the  eye-piece. 

408.  ELEVATING  SCREW. — To  obtain  readily  the  changes  of  elevation  ne 
cessary  in  the  use  of  rifled  cannon,  the  heavier  calibres  are  made  with  very 
small  preponderance,  and  are  supplied  with  an  elevating  screw  which  is  at 
tached  to  the  carriage  at  the  lower  end,  while  the  nut  is  connected  with  the 
cascabel  of  the  gun.     Both  screw  and  nut  admit  of  movements  by  which 
the  screw  can  take  any  position  required  in  the  various  degrees  of  elevation. 
The  parts  should  be  allowed  a  certain  amount  of  play ;    if  binding  is  pre 
vented,  it  is  believed  that  the  evident  advantages  of  the  screw  may  always 
be  obtained. 

4€9.  RANGES  AND  TIME  OF  FLIGHT. — So  far  as  ascertained,  are  contained 
in  Table  VII.,  Appendix  B. 

410.  PRECAUTIONS  TO  BE  OBSERVED. — In  the  use  of  these  rifled  cannon, 
it  is  of  the  utmost  importance  that  all  the  directions  relative  to  the  lubri 
cation  of  the  shell,  its  being  close  home,  charge  and  kind  of  powder  used, 
and  lining  of  the  shells,  shall  be  carefully  observed. 

Many  premature  explosions  of  shells  having  taken  place  in  these  guns, 
which  are  attributed  to  various  causes,  such  as, — defects  of  metal,  porosity, 


106  RIFLED   CANNON. 


faulty  fuzes,  concussion  and  friction  of  the  powder  within  the  shell, — it  is 
ordered  that,  on  the  occurrence  of  a  premature  explosion  or  rupture  of  a 
shell  within  the  gun,  it  shall  be  immediately  washed  out  and  a  careful 
examination  made  of  the  interior  of  the  bore,  by  the  mirror  and  by  taking 
impressions  in  wax  (see  Mode  of  Taking  Impressions,  p.  16,  Part  III.),  and 
all  the  circumstances  of  the  case  reported  to  the  Bureau,  specifying  the 
kind  and  calibre  of  the  shells,  kind  of  fazes,  the  charge  and  kind  of  powder, 
with  its  manufacturer's  name  :  and, 

Were  the  shells  filled  completely,  and  with  what  kind  of  powder? 
Were  the  shells  couted  inside  with  any  kind  of  composition  ? 
Are  any  cracks  or  marks  of  scoring  visible  in  the  bores  ? 

In  rifled  cannon,  cracks  or  injuries  produced  by  firing,  or  the  rupture  of 
shells,  are  to  be  sought  for — thus, 

1.  Around  and  in  rear  of  the  vent-bouching. 

2.  On  the  top  of  the  bore,  between  the  trunnions  and  reinforce-band. 

3.  On  the  lower  side  of  the  bore,  near  the  seat  of  the  shot,  at  the  junction 
of  the  lands  and  grooves. 

4.  Near  the  inside  of  the  muzzle,  caused  by  explosion  of  shells. 
Although  shells  have  been  frequently  ruptured  in  the  guns  without  leaving 

any  visible  traces  of  injury,  yet  they  may  be  developed  after  a  certain 
number  of  rounds.  Thus,  in  proving  a  gun  at  West  Point,  a  shell  exploded 
in  the  gun  at  the  second  fire  :  on  examination,  no  traces  of  injury  could  be 
perceived ;  but,  on  a  re-examination  of  the  gun  after  the  tenth  fire,  a  fine 
transverse  crack  was  discovered  in  the  rear  of  the  vent,  extending  two-thirds 
round  the  bore.  It  is  therefore  important  that  frequent  examinations  shall 
be  made,  even  if  no  apparent  injuries  exist,  as  it  is  the  opinion  of  the 
inventor  of  the  guns  that  the  principal,  if  not  the  only  cause  of  failure  of 
these  guns  in  service,  is  due  to  the  rupture  of  shells  within  the  bore. 

Experiments  have  been  made,  and  are  still  in  progress,  which  appear  to 
show  that  these  premature  explosions  may  be  to  a  great  extent  obviated,  if 
not  altogether  prevented,  by  lining  or  coating  the  rough  surface  of  the 
interior  of  the  shell  with  a  smooth  and  elastic  coating. 

All  rifle-shells,  except  those  for  howitzers,  before  being  issued  for  service, 
shall  therefore  be  lined  or  coated  on  the  interior  with  a  mixture  com 
posed  of — 

16  ounces  of  soap — common  yellow,  not  salt-water  soap. 
7  ounces  of  tallow. 
7  ounces  of  rosin. 

The  tallow  should  be  melted  first,  then  melt  and  add  the  rosin,  and  lastly, 
the  soap,  bringing  the  mass  to  a  heat  that  will  make  it  very  fluid. 

The  shells  having  been  first  thoroughly  cleaned,  fill  them  about  one-third 
full  of  the  composition,  roll  them  slowly  so  as  to  spread  the  mixture  over  the 


RIFLED   CANNON. 


107 


whole  interior  surface,  and  then  pour  off  the  residue.  This  coating  should 
he  about  five-hundredths  (0.05)  of  an  inch  in  thickness,  anJ  is  expected, 
from  a  series  of  experiments  ma<le  for  the  purpose,  to  prevent  the  premature 
explosion  of  shells  in  the  bores  of  i-ifled  guns. 

The  Bureau  further  directs  that  hereafter  the  charge  of  the  100-ponnder, 
or  6.4  inch,  Parrott  rifle,  shall  be  reduced  to  eight  (8)  pounds  of  rifle,  or  No. 
7  powder,  and  that  only  the  short -shell  or  solid  shot,  not  exceeding  eighty 
(80)  pounds  weight,  and  spherical  projectiles,  prepared  as  directed  in  the 
Circulars  of  February  24th  and  July  6th,  1864,  be  used  in  this  gun. 

411,  EXTERIOR  DIMENSIONS  OP  BOXES  CONTAINING  PARROTT'S  PROJECTILES. 


LOXG. 

WIDE. 

HIGH. 

100-pounder,  short  1 

Inches. 
18* 

Inches. 

Q8 

Indies. 

OB 

60-pounder,  

°t 

of- 

30-pounder,  containing  ...      .           10 

951 

1  ^3. 

20-pounder,  containing  10  .. 

Z,UJ 

25J 

1<H 

15f 

13 

412.  HOTCIIKISS'S  PROJECTILE  FOR  20-PouNDEB  AND  12-PouNDER  HOWITZER. 


20-pounder,  containing.  .  .                   5 

24 

15 

pi 

12-poundcr,  containing  10.  . 

20 

9 

"T 

9 

413,    SCHENKL'S  PROJECTILE  FOR  20-PouNDER  AND  12-PouNDER  HOWITZER. 


[20-pounder, 

containing.  . 

5 

24 

14 

^ 

12-pounder, 

containing  .  . 

10.. 

22i 

9| 

HI 

414,     J.  A.  D.  PROJECTILE  FOR  20-PouNDER  AND  12-PouNBER  HOWITZER. 


20-pounder,  containing  3  .  . 
12-pounder,  containing  5.  . 

15 
19 

12* 

10* 

7 
6 

108  MONITORS. 


CHAPTER    VI 

MONITORS. 


THE  diagram  represents  the  interior  arrangement  of  the  turret  of  the 
Monitors  for  the  long  and  short  XV-incli  guns. 

415.  NOMENCLATURE. 

A.  Ammunition-scuttle. 

B.  Starting-bar  for  revolving  turret  and  training  gun. 

C.  Shaft  on  which  turret  revolves. 

D.  Travelling-bar  on  which  moves  the  shell-whip. 

E.  Position  of  Engineer  stationed  at  bar  to  revolve  turret  and  train  guns. 

F.  Compressor-wheel  to  check  recoil,  hove  taut  before  firing. 

G.  Crank  for  running  gun  in  and  out. 

H.  Smoke-box  of  XV-inch  (Passaic  class). 

O.  Officer  at  sight-hole. 

P.  Port-hole. 

11.  Port-stopper. 

S.  Sight-hole. 

416.  In  the  Passaic  class  the  ports  for  the  XV-in.  gun  are  only  of  suffi 
cient  dimensions  to  allow  the  passage  of  the  shot  at  such  elevations  and 
depressions  as  were  judged  necessary :  the  gun  being  fired  entirely  within 
the  turret.     In  order  to  protect  the  crew  of  the  gun  from  the  blast  of  the 
explosion,  the  smoke-box  was  devised,  which  to   a  certain   extent  accom 
plished  the  desired  object,  but  at  the  expense  of  rapidity  of  loading. 

417.  In  designing  the  Tccumseh  class  it  was  decided  to  enlarge  the  port, 
so  as  to  allow  the  face  of  the  muzzle  to  run  out  flush  with  the  exterior  of 
the  turret.     The  gun  was  therefore  lengthened  sixteen  (16)  inches,  and  the 
muzzle  turned  down  to  the  minimum  size. 

418.  The  contracted  space  within  the  turret  rendered  it  necessary  to  in 
troduce  additional  mechanical  aids  in  lieu  of  manual  labor  in  running  out, 
loading,  and  checking  the  recoil. 


Julius  J&en -,  />/". 


MANUAL   EXERCISE.  109 


419,  The  exercise  therefore  conforms  to  the  established  exercise  for  great 
guns  only  as  far  as  circumstances  will  admit. 

The  gun  is  supposed  to  be  run  in,  and  not  loaded. 

420,  WORDS  OF  COMMAND. 
I.    "  PROVIDE  THE  GUNS  !" 

II.    "  SERVE  VENT  AND  SPONGE  !" 

III.  "LOAD!" 

IV.  "PRIME!" 

V.  "ELEVATE!"  (OR  DEPRESS). 

VI.  " RUN  OUT!" 

VII.  "TRAIN!" 

VIII.  "  READY— FIRE  !" 

IX.  "RuN  IN!" 

X.  "SECURE!" 

MANUAL    EXERCISE. 

(RIGHT  GUN.)     * 
II.   "SERVE  VENT  AND  SPONGE!" 

421,  Gun  Captain  serves,  then  stops  the  Vent.     No.  3  passes  to  left  of 
muzzle.     No.  4  receives  the  moist  Sponge-head  from  6,  and,  assisted  by  3, 
enters  it  in  the  Bore  and  forces  it  down  as  far  as  the  first  section.     No.  6 
passes  the  successive  sections  of  the  staff  to  4  as  needed,  and  receives  them 
from  him  as  the  sponge  is  withdrawn. 

After  the  sponge  is  withdrawn,  Captain  serves  the  Vent  with  his  priming- 
wire,  and  again  closes  it. 
« 

III.   "LOAD!" 

422,  No.  4  receives  Cartridge  from  5,  to  whom  the  box  has  been  passed 
by  13,  assisted  by  3,  enters  it  in  the  Bore;  receives  Rammer-head  and  suc 
cessive  sections  from  G,  and,  assisted  by  3,  rams  home.     Nos.  3  and  4  fall 
back  from  the  muzzle.     Gun  Captain  serves  the  Vent  to  feel  if  the  Charge 
is  home. 

Nos.  3  and  4  return  the  rammer. 

Nos.  7  and  8,  11  and  12  whip  up  Shot  (or  shell),  as  has  been  previously 
ordered.  Nos.  11  and  12  choke  luff  of  whip.  Nos.  7  and  8  run  shot  (or 
shell)  to  the  muzzle.  No.  5,  assisted,  if  necessary,  by  No.  6,  bears  over, 
when  3  and  4  enter  and  ram  home  by  sections. 

No.  4  removes  Patches  and  passes  them  to  7,  who  hands  them  to  Gun 
Captain. 


110  MONITORS. 


IV.     "  PRIME  1" 

423.  Gun   Captain   again   makes  sure  that  the  Vent   is   clear.     No.  2 
primes  with  priming-powder  from  a  flask  or  a  blank  musket-cartridge. 

V.   "ELEVATE!"  (OR  DEPRESS). 
(Always  done  before  running  out.) 

424.  No.  2  handles  lever  of  Elevating  screw  under  the  direction  of  the 
Officer  of  the  piece,  who  sets  the  trunnion-sight  at  the  proper  degree  of 
elevation  and  clamps  it  there.     When  the  bubble  of  the  trunnion-level  is  in 
the  centre,—"  Well." 

Nos.  3  and  4  lift  the  muzzle  by  a  section  of  the  rammer-handle;  the  pre 
ponderance  not  being  sufficient  to  overcome  the  friction  of  the  trunnions  in 
the  cap-squares.  No.  3  passes  to  the  right  of  the  muzzle. 

VI.   "RUN  OUT!" 

425.  Nos.  7,  8,  11,  and  12  man  Truck-crank  to  run  out.     Nos.  9  and  10 
ease  compressor.     Nos.  3,  4,  53  and  6  man  port-tackle:  as  muzzle  approaches 
port-stopper,  "  Open  Port !" 

As  soon  as  the  gun  is  out,  Nos.  11  and  12  unship  truck-crank  and  place  it 
clear  of  gun-slide.  No.  9  to  Compressor-wheel,  which  he  heaves  hand  taut. 
No  10  ships  ratchet-levers  and  heaves  well  taut.1  Gun  Captain  inserts  per 
cussion-primer. 

VII.  "TRAIN  RIGHT!"  (OR  LEFT). 

426.  The  officer  of  the  gun  sights  through  sight-hole,  and  orders  "  Right !" 
or  "  Left !"  as  the  muzzle  is  to  go.     The  Engineer  at  the  starting-bar  revolves 
the  turret. 

No.  1  to  lock-string ;  when  the  object  comes  in  view,  Officer  of  piece  gives 
order. 

VIII.  "READY — FIRE!" 

427.  Gun  Captain  pulls  lock-string.     No.  3  lets  go  port-tackle.     No.  5 
closes  port.     Engineer  revolves  the  turret  so  as  to  point  the  gun  abeam. 
(This  gets  the  scuttle  clear  for  passing  up  ammunition.) 

Jf  necessary, 
Nos.  11  and  12   ship  crank,  and,  with  7  and  8,  run  the  gun  in;  Nos.  9 

1  The  compressor-shaft  should  be  marked  as  a  guide  to  No.  1  to  know  when  com 
pressed  sufficiently. 


Julius  J3iefis,  pr 


MANUAL    EXEKCISE.  Ill 


and  10  easing  compressor.  No.  10  ships  ratchet-lever  to  ease  compressor, 
No.  9  easing  it  further  by  hand.  The  gun  is  now  ready  for  loading,  and 
the  exercise  proceeds  as  before. 

428.  The  exercise  of  the  left  gun  is  in  all  respects  the  same,  except  that 
Nos.  3  and  4  exchange  duties. 

429.  The  crew  of  the  XV-in.  gun  consists  ordinarily  of  14  men,  but  the 
gun  may  be  readily  worked  by  8  men ;   indeed,  some   officers  prefer  the 
smaller  number  as  being  equally  efficient,  giving  more  room  in  the  turret, 
and  affording  the  very  great  advantage  of  relief  cresvs  during  a  protracted 
engagement.     The  same  remarks  apply  to  the  Xl-in.  gun. 

WORKING  XV-iN.  BY  HALF-CREW. 
"SERVE  TENT  AND  SPONGE!" 

430.  No.  1  stops  vent.     3  passes  to  left  of  muzzle.     5  passes  sponge- 
head  and  sections  as  required  to  3,  and  assists  in  sponging. 

"LOAD!" 

431.  No.  13  receives  passing-box  at  scuttle  and  holds  it  to  5.     5  receives 
cartridge  from  13,  enters  it  in  muzzle,  passes  rammer-head  and  sections,  and, 
assisted  by  3,  rams  home.     Gun  Captain  serves  the  vent,  3  and  5  fulling  back. 

Nos.  9,  11,  13,  and  15  whip  up  shell  and  attend  it  to  muzzle. 
Nos.  5  and  3  steady  shell  and  enter  it  in  muzzle. 
No.  5  removes  patch,  passes  it  to  7,  who  hands  it  to  1. 
Nos.  5  and  3  ram  home  by  sections  as  before. 

"ELEVATE!" 

432.  Nos.  3  and  5  raise  muzzle  by  section  of  rammer. 
No.  1  tends  elevating  screw. 

"PRIME!" 

433.  No.  1  serves  vent  and  primes  with  powder. 

"  RUN  OUT  1" 

434.  Nos.  7,  11,  and  15  man  crank. 
No.  9  eases  compressor. 

Nos,  3,  5,  and  13  open  port. 

When  out, 

No.  1,  Gun  Captain,  inserts  percussion-primer. 
No.  1 1  unships  crank. 
No.  9  heaves  compressor  hand  taut. 
No.  15  ships  lever  and  heaves  well  taut. 
The  gun  is  trained  as  before. 


112  MONITORS. 


';  FIRE  I" 

435.  Nos.  3  and  5  close  port. 

Nos.  V,  11,  and  15  man  crank,  and  9  cases  compressor.  The  above  is 
given  for  the  1st  part  of  gun's  crew ;  for  2d  part  substitute  next  high  num 
bers  in  each  station. 


SHELL  AND  POWDER  DIVISION. 

436*  To  the  Shell  and  Powder  Division  is  assigned  the  most  laborious 
and  difficult  of  all  the  duties — that  of  keeping  up  a  supply  of  projectiles. 

437.  It  is  therefore  necessary  to  have  it  strongly  manned,  and  a  system 
of  frequent  reliefs  for  all  the  important  stations,  particularly  in  the  magazine 
and  shell-locker. 

438.  There  are  required  three  gangs  of  four  each  for  the  passage  of  pro 
jectiles  :  one  to  whip  them  out  of  the  hold,  or  shell-room  ;  a  second  to 
pass  them  to  the  door  of  the  turret-chamber;  and  a  third  to  pass  them  to 
the  scuttle  and  adjust  them  in  the  bearer.      When  working  with  half-crews, 
the  third   gang  assists  at  the  shell-whip,  the  fall  being  dropped  down  to 
them. 

439.  The  XV-in.  passing-box  requires  two  men  to  carry  it  to  the  turret- 
chamber. 

440.  The  allowance  of  projectiles  can  only  be  determined  by  the  char 
acter  of  the  service  expected,  and  the  stowage  capacity  of  the  vessel,  which 
is  limited  to  about  150  rounds  per  gun  for  sea-service. 

441.  By  reason  of  the  contracted  space  in  these  vessels,  all  shell  should 
be  filled,  and  all  powder  must  be  made  up  into  cartridges. 

442.  All  XV-in.  shell  shall  be  fitted  with  three  fuze-holes,  and  issued  for 
service  fuzed  with  3£,  5,  and  7  seconds  fuzes. 

443.  When  the  distance  of  the  object  is  known  to  be  less  than  the  range 
of  the  shortest  fuze,  and  time  will  admit  of  doing  so,  uncap  all  the  fuzes. 
At  other  times  uncap  the  fuze  suited  to  the  distance,  and  the  one  of  longest 
time  of  burning. 


NOMENCLATURE:    OF     13       INCH    MORTAR 
CARRIAGE     AND     CIRCLE. 


C.-ij-i-i.-iof   cxcj-uti-ic  SocluM 


frr 


MORTARS.  H3 


CHAPTER    VII 

MORTARS. 


444.  TITLES  OF  MORTAR  CREW. 

(See  Diagram  1.) 

No.  1.  First  Captain. 

"     2.  Second  Captain. 

"     3.  First  Loader  and  Trainer. 

"     4.  "     Sponger  and  Trainer. 

u     5.  Second  Loader,  Front  Eccentric  Trainer, 

"     6.  "       Sponger,     "             "                " 

"     V.  Left  Circle  Eccentric  Trainer  and  Shell  -carrier. 

"     8.  Right  "             "                "                       « 

"     9.  Left  Circle  Eccentric  Trainer  and  Shell-hoister. 

"  10.  Right  " 

"  11.  Rear  Circle  Eccentric  Trainer  and  Shell-hoister. 

"  12.  u             "                "                       <* 

u  13.  Powder-man. 

During  exercise   or  action,  Nos.  9,  10,  11,  and  12,  in  addition  to   their 
other  duties,  will  hoist  up  shell  from  below. 


114 


MORTARS. 


445. 


IMPLEMENTS  AND  EQUIPMENTS. 


ARTICLES. 


TVlIEKK  THEY    AKE    PLACED. 


Handspikes. , 


Haversack . 
Tube-pouch. 


Gunner's  Pouch. 


Quadrant. . . 
Plummet.  . . 

Scraper 

Wiper 

Shell-hooks . 
Tompion.  . . 

Quoin 


Maul... 
"Wrench. 
Pincers . 
Broom.. 


Two  on  each  side  of  the  bed  against 
the  cheeks,  leaning  upon  tho  manoeu- 
vring-bolts,  the  ends  towards  the 
vessel's  sides,  and  those  of  the  front 
handspikes  even  with  the  front  of 
the  checks. 

Containing  fuzes,  and  a  pair  of  sleeves, 
attached  to  the  tompion. 

Containing  the  priming-wire,  friction- 
tubes,  and  lanyard,  attached  to  the 
tompion,  and  lying  on  the  mortar. 

Containing  gunner's  level,  gimlet,  vent- 
punch  and  chalk,  attached  to  tom 
pion. 


In  a  basket  between  tho  cheeks  of  the 
mortar-bed. 


-{  In  the  muzzle. 

j  Under  the  mortar   upon  tho  bolster, 
(      with  handle  to  tho  left. 

I  With  tho  basket. 


Directly  over  each  mortar  must  be   rigged   a  gun-tackle  purchase- whip, 
with  seven-inch  block,  to  whip  up  and  lower  the  bomb  into  the  mortar. 
One  empty  bomb  and  one  empty  cartridge-bag  must  be  ready  for  drill. 


77  Vftn 


Julius  Bieti  .  JJT 


MANUAL   EXERCISE.  115 


MANUAL  EXEECISE. 

XIII-iN.  MORTAR. 

WORDS  OF  COMMAND. 
I.    "SILENCE!" 
II.    "CAST  LOOSE  AND  PROVIDE!" 

III.  "TRAIN!"  (RIGHT  OR  LEFT). 

IV.  "SERVE  VENT  AND  SPONGE!" 
V.    "LOAD!" 

VI.    "ELEVATE!" 
VII.    "PRIME!" 
VIII.    "  READY— FIRE  !" 
IX.    "  MORTAR  FRONT  !" 
X.    "SECURE!" 

The  exercise  commences  with  the  supposition  that  the  Mortar  is  secured 
fore  and  aft,  but  not  loaded. 

I.     "  SILENCE  1" 

(Diagram  1.) 

447.  At  this  preparatory  order  the  strictest  silence  is  to  be  observed. 

The  Captain  faces  the  breech,  the  men  on  the  right  and  left  stand 
facing  the  mortar;  all  fix  their  eyes  on  the  Captain,  and  attentively  wait  for 
orders. 

II.   "CAST  LOOSE  AND  PROVIDE!" 
(Diagram  2.) 

448*  1st  Captain  commands;  sees  his  mortar  cleared  and  cast  loose; 
canvas  covers  taken  off;  Eccentric  Bars  in  their  place;  Train-Tackles  over 
hauled  and  placed  fore  and  aft  on  deck ;  Shell-whip  hooked  into  mast-head 
span ;  small  shell-hooks  moused  on  lower  block  of  shell-whip ;  Shell-tongs 
ready  for  use  ;  Grommet  for  resting  shell  on  deck  at  hand  ;  basket  of  imple 
ments  on  deck  to  the  rear  of  mortar ;  Tompion  taken  out  and  placed  to  the 
rear ;  sees  that  there  is  a  Gunner's  Quadrant  and  plumb-line  in  the  basket ; 
a  boring-bit  between  beckets  ;  a  breeching  and  tackle,  if  it  should  be  wanted ; 
buckles  on  his  waist-belt,  furnished  with  a  primer-box ;  equips  himself  with 
a  priming-wire  and  lanyard ;  places  elevating  lever  on  the  right  side  of 
mortar  ready  for  use. 

2cl  Captain  gets  basket  of  implements  and  spirit-level  from  the  Gun 
ner  ;  places  basket  on  deck  to  the  rear  of  the  mortar  ;  screws  spirit-level  to 
trunnion,  and  adjusts  it  to  an  angle  of  45°  with  the  axis  of  the  bore. 


116  MORTARS. 


No.  3,  First  Loader,  removes  mortar-cover;  takes  out  tompion  and 
places  it  to  the  rear  of  mortar-circle,  out  of  the  way ;  provides  groramet  for 
resting  shell  on  deck ;  gets  scrapers  and  spatulas  out  of  basket. 

No.  4,  First  Sponger,  assists  in  removing  mortar-cover ;  gets  his  sleeves 
out  of  basket  and  puts  them  on;  provides  an  empty  cartridge-bag  for 
wiping  shell. 

Nos.  5  and  6,  Second  Loader  and  Second  Sponger,  hook  shell-whip 
into  masthead  span,  and  bring  it  perpendicular  over  the  bore ;  mouse  small 
shell-hooks  on  to  lower  block ;  get  breechings  and  tackles  ready  for  hook 
ing  ;  ship  front  eccentric  bars. 

Nos.  7  and  8,  Shell-carriers,  get  shell-tongs  for  carrying  shell;  assist  in 
shipping  eccentric  bars  on  their  respective  sides  of  circle. 

Nos.  9  and  1 1  overhaul  left  train-tackle  to  its  full  length,  and  place  it 
on  deck  fore  and  aft,  near  the  ship's  side ;  ship  left  circle  eccentric  bar, 
and  place  lever  for  carriage-eccentric  on  the  circle,  butt  to  the  front,  and 
close  to  the  side  of  carriage. 

i? 

Nos.  10  and  12  execute  the  same  duties  on  the  right  side  of  the  mortar. 
Nos.  11  and  12  also  ship  rear  eccentrics. 
Nos.  9,  10,  11,  12,  hook  tackles  for  hoisting  shell  from  below. 
No.   13,  Powder-man,  repairs  to  the  proper  scuttle  for  his  passing-box, 
returns,  and  stands  a  little  to  the  left  and  in  rear  of  the  circle. 


III.  "TRAIN!"  (RIGHT  OR  LEFT). 
(Diagram  3.) 

449.  Nos.  5,  6,  7,  8,  9,  10,  11,  and  12,  throw  circle  eccentric  into  gear, 
and  pin  eccentric  bars  down.  Nos.  5  and  6  then  hook  double  blocks  of 
train-tackles  into  circle  on  their  respective  sides.  All  the  crew,  except  Nos.  1 
and  2,  will  bowse  on  train-tackles,  until  the  mortar  is  in  the  desired  direc 
tion,  when  the  order  "  Well !"  will  be  given  by  No.  2,  who  attends  spirit- 
level  and  trunnion-sight. 

At  the  command  "Well!"  Nos.  5  and  6,  11  and  12  will  unhook  their 
respective  blocks  and  lay  the  train-tackle  fore  and  aft  on  deck,  near  the 
ship's  side;  Nos.  5  and  6,  7  and  9,  8  and  10,  11  and  12,  throw  the  circle 
eccentrics  out  of  gear. 

IV.   "SERVE  VENT  AND  SPONGE!" 

450*  1st  Captain  inserts  his  priming-wire  and  clears  the  vent.  No.  3 
scrapes  the  chamber  and  bore,  removes  scrapings  with  the  spoon.  No.  4 
takes  the  empty  cartridge-bag  and  wipes  out  the  mortar,  then  uses  the  sponge 
to  thoroughly  cleanse  the  chamber  and  bore ;  as  soon  as  this  operation  is 


I)  Vcuj  Nosfrand,  Puths/ier 


-s  Bieii.  a 


R I GHT     OR      LEFT 

.  3  . 


Jnfats  Btcn  •  y< 


MANUAL  EXERCISE.  11 7 


performed,  the  Captain  again  serves  the  vent.     Should  there  be  any  fire  or 
dirt  pushed  down,  the  sponging  will  be  repeated. 

Y.    "LOAD!" 

451.  The  Powder-man,  No.  13,  goes  to  the  scuttle  for  a  cartridge,  and 
brings  it  to  No.  3  (always  passing  on  the  side  not  engaged),  who  empties 
it  carefully  into  the  chamber,   keeping  the  cartridge-bag  in  his  hand,  to 
be  used  in  wiping  the  shell  before  it  is  lowered  into  the  bore.     No.  4  takes 
spatulas,  levels  off  the  powder,  and  calls  out  "Shell!"  which  is  brought  to 
the  front  of  the  mortar  by  Nos.  7  and  8,  Shell-carriers,  and  landed  in  the 
grommet,  which  has  been  put  in  its  proper  place  by  No.  5.     Nos.  5  and  6 
hook  shell  on  and  whip  it  up;  when  high  enough,  No.  3  calls  out,  "  High  !" 
wipes  it  clean  with  empty  cartridge-bag,  and,  assisted  by  No.  4,  steadies  it 
over  the  bore ;  it  is  then  lowered  carefully  upon  the  charge,  keeping  the 
fuze  exactly  in  the  axis  of  the  bore.     No.  4  then  removes  the  paper  covering 
and  exposes  the  priming  of  the  fuze,  handing  the  covering  to  No.  2,  as  an 
evidence  that  it  has  been  removed.     After  an  exercise  or  an  action,  these 
paper  coverings  will  be  compared  with   the  account  kept  by  the  Officer 
having  charge  of  the  Powder  Division.     Nos.  3  and  4  now  step  down  on 
deck,  ready  to  assist  in  training,  should  any  be  required. 

VI.  "ELEVATE!" 

452.  The  2d  Captain,  having  adjusted  the  trunnion-sight1  to  a  given  angle 
with  the  axis  of  the  bore  (usually  45°),  orders  "Raise"  or  "Lower;"  and 
at  the  same  time  the  1st  Captain   inserts  the  elevating  lever  through  ele 
vating  loop,  on  to  ratchet,  and  raises  or  lowers  according  to  direction  from 
2d  Captain,  who  will  give  the  word  "  Well !"  when  the  mortar  has  its 
proper  elevation. 

VII.  "  PRIME  1" 

453*  1st  Captain  inserts  his  priming- wire  to  ascertain  that  the  vent  is 
clear;  takes  a  friction-primer,  raises  the  loop  nearly  in  line  with  the  spur, 
hooks  it  on  his  lanyard  and  inserts  the  primer  into  the  vent,  being  careful 
that  the  lanyard  has  been  led  through  the  loop  at  the  rear  of  mortar- 
carriage  for  that  purpose ;  then  retires  to  the  rear  of  mortar  to  the  fall 
length  of  the  lanyard,  and  gives  the  word. 

Officer  in  charge  takes  station  to  watch  the  effect  of  the  bomb,  which  shall 
be  recorded  in  a  suitably  ruled  note-book. 

1  If  the  Spirit-Level  should  be  damaged,  he  will  apply  the  Gunner's  Quadrant  to  the 
face  of  the  mortar. 


118  MORTARS. 


YIIL     "  BEADY — FIRE  I " 

454.  At  the  wora   '  Fire  !"  the  Captain  pulls  the  lanyard  with  a   quick 
draw  :  there  should  be  a  pause  of  about  two  seconds  between  the  words 
"  Ready"  and  "  Fire,"  in  order  to  allow  every  one  time  to  retire  to  the  rear.1 

IX.    "MORTAR — FRONT!" 

455.  Nos.  1  and  5,  on  the  left  side,  Nos.  2  and  6,  on  the  right  side,  step 
on   the    circle;    take  carriage    eccentric  levers  and    throw   eccentrics   into 
gear;   withdraw  the  lever  from  the  sockets,  and  insert  them  into  holes  in 
the  wheel,  and   heave  the    mortar-carriage    up  against  the  front   hurter; 
throw  eccentric  out  of  gear ;  place  levers  on  the  circle  close  to  Brackets, 

butts  forward,  and  retire  to  their  stations. 

• 

X.      "  SECURE  !" 

(Diagram  1.) 

456.  Train  fore  and  aft,  face  of  mortar  forward,  throw  circle  out  of  gear ; 
1st  Captain  stops  vent;  2d  Captain  unscrews  spirit-level.      Nos.  3  and  4  put 
in  tompion,  put  on  mortar-cover,  put  scrapers,  spoons,  sleeves,  and  empty 
cartridge-bags  into  basket.    Nos.  5  and  6  unhook  shell-whip  and  coil  it  up  on 
the  lower  step  of  carriage  ;  put  small  shell-hooks  into  basket ;   put  grommet 
between  brackets  of  carriage  ;  coil  up  breeching-tackle,  and  put    it  on  the 
lower  step  of  carriage ;  secure  the  mast-head  span  to  the  rigging ;    unship 
front  circle  eccentric.     Nos.  7  and  9  coil  left  train-tackle  on  the  circle,  left 
side  of  carriage,  unship  left  circle  eccentric  bar.      Nos.  8  and  10  c\oil  right 
train-tackle   on  the  circle,  right  side  of  carriage,  unship  right  circle  eccen 
tric  bar.     Nos.  11  and  12  coil  shell-tackle  on  the  circle  in  rear  of  carriage; 
un?hip   rear  circle   eccentric  bar.     Eccentric  bars  to  be  placed  on  the  circle 
in  the  following  manner  :  left  and  front  bars,  on  left  side  of  brackets;  right 
and  rear  bars  on  the  right  side  of  brackets.     Nos.  7  and  8  put  shell-tongs  on 
circle  to  the  rear  of  carriage.      1st  Captain  puts  his  lanyard  and  priming-wire 
into  the  basket,  which,  together  with  the  spirit-level,  is  carried  to   the  Gun 
ner  by  2d  Captain ;  the  crew  then  resume  their  stations  as  at  "  SILENCE." 

1  To  lessen  the  shock  of  the  discharge  and  the  concussion  on  the  ear,  the  crew 
should  be  instructed  to  stand  on  their  toes  at  the  moment  of  firing,  keeping  at  the  samo 
time  their  mouths  and  ears  open. 


MAGAZINE   AND   SHELL-ROOM.  119 


MAGAZINE  AOT)  SHELL-EOOM. 

457.  Vessels   specially  constructed  for  mortar  purposes  have  regularly- 
built  shell-rooms,  while  others,  fitted  for  temporary  service,  have   merely 
spaces  set  apart,  which  should  be  protected  by  screens  fitting  tightly  to  the 
beams  and  deck,  with  tubs  of  water  always  at  hand  during  practice,  and 
likewise  wet  swabs  laid  to  cut  off  trains  of  powder. 

458.  Before  the  vessels  leave  port,  every  thing  must  be  arranged  in  the 
magazines  for  the  rapid  and  safe  transmission  of  ammunition  to  the  mortars, 
and  any  deficiencies  should  be  promptly  reported  to  the  Officer  command 
ing  the  division,  and  by  him  to  the  Officer  in  charge  of  ordnance. 

459.  The   Officer  in   command  of  each  vessel   is  to  be  present  at  the 
embarkation  of  the  ordnance,  to  stow  and  check  the  lists. 

460.  All  the  implements  accompanying  the  mortars  are  to  be  kept  in 
lockers  used  solely  for  that  purpose,  and  under  the  charge  of  the  Gunner  or 
his  mate. 

461.  The  full  service-charges  for  the  mortars  will  be  sent  on  board  ready 
filled  in  white  cotton  bags,  and  their  transmission  from  the  magazines  will 
be  in  leather  passing-boxes. 

462.  The  powder  is  to  be  emptied  into  the  mortar,  the  bag  well  shaken 
and  beaten  over  the  lee-side  to  remove  dust  and  fine  grains  of  powder,  and 
the   bag  placed  in  the  rear  to  wipe  out  the  mortar-chamber  after  every 
round. 

None  of  these  bags  should  be  returned  to  the  magazine  during  the  action, 
as  the  loose  powder  would  be  likely  to  form  trains. 

463.  Large  tubs  of  water  are  to  be  kept  near  the  magazines,  with  buckets 
at  hand  to  drown  the  cartridges,  or  to  extinguish  fire ;  and   every  precau 
tion  taken  to  cut  off  trains  of  powder  with  wet  swabs. 

464.  The  forward  part  of  the  vessel  above  decks  will  be  used  as  the  most 
convenient  place  for  cutting  or  preparing  fuzes,  and  a  heavy  screen,  spread 
tent-fashion,  should  be  rigged  to  protect  the  fuzes  from  fire  from  the  mor 
tars,  or  rain. 

In  filling  shells,  the  Gunner  and  two  assistants  will  be  detailed  for  this 
purpose,  besides  the  men  stationed  to  pass  powder  from  the  magazines. 

All  fire  and  lights  must  be  put  out  when  the  magazine  is  opened  for 
action. 

465.  In  firing  against  the  wind,  the  flame  is  thrown  back  in-board;  there 
fore  care  should  be  token  beforehand  to  wet  the  sides,  decks,  and  rigging  of 


120  MORTARS. 


the   vessel ;  the   sails  covered   with  tarpaulins  ;   and   men  stationed    with 
buckets  to  put  out  fire. 

466.  One  hundred  bombs  are  at  all  times  to  be  kept  ready  filled  in  the 
shell-room. 

A  vessel  properly  organized  ought  to  throw  at  least  20  bombs  an  hour; 
but  should  circumstances  prevent,  the  mortar  may  be  properly  served  if 
even  one  bomb  can  be  filled  before  the  previous  one  is  fired. 

467.  A  beech  plug  must  be  temporarily  put  in  the  fuze-hole  of  the  bomb 
when  filled ;  and  the  men  who  fill  cartridges  and  charge  the  bombs  are  to 
wear  flannel  sleeves  and  magazine-shoes. 

468.  When  ranges  are  desired  to  be  obtained  by  reduced  charges,  the 
measuring  and  filling  of  the  cartridges  must  always  be  done  in  the  magazine, 
no  matter  how  inconvenient  it  may  be ;  and  the  utmost  exactness  is  to  be 
observed  in  filling  the  powder-measures  and  levelling  off  the  top,  as  an  ounce 
of  powder  makes  an  important  variation  in  the  range  of  the  bomb. 

469.  Extra  cotton  bags  are  to  be  provided  to  receive  the  reduced  charges, 
which  are  to  be  stowed  in  half  barrels. 

470.  Every  precaution  that  suggests  itself  to  the  officers  in  command  to 
prevent  accidents,  should  immediately  be  put  in  force,  and  a  memorandum 
of  the  matter  transmitted  to  the  Ordnance  Officer  of  the  squadron. 

GENERAL  RULES  AND  OBSERVATIONS. 

471.  To  estimate  the  distance  by  the  bursting  of  a  bomb,  where  the 
flash  can  be  seen,  multiply  the  number  of  seconds  which  elapse  between 
it  and  the  sound  of  the  report  by  1,100,  and  the  product  will  be  nearly  the 
distance  in  feet. 

472.  The  officer  in   charge  of  a  mortar  must  always  note  the  time  of 
flight  and  distance,  by  the  above  rule,  for  every  bomb  that  is  fired,  and 
'likewise  note  when  the  report  is  not  heard  from  the  bursting  charge. 

473.  When  going  into  action  for  a  bombardment,  the  fore-rigging  must 
be  come   up  on  the  side  where  the  mortar  is  to  be  used,  the  fore-topmast 
sent  down,  foresail  unbent,  boom  and  gaff  laid  on  deck,  rigging  lashed  in 
close  to  the  mast,  head-sails  to  be  thoroughly  wetted,  spring  on  the  cable, 
boats  lowered  from  the  side  davits,  and  all  the  hatches  covered  with  tar 
paulins. 

474.  The  broadside-guns  must  be  kept  ready  for  action,  and  muskets 
loaded  and  at  hand,  in  case  the  squadron  should  be  attacked  by  the  enemy's 
gunboats. 

475.  Besides  bombs,  various  other  projectiles  are  fired  from  mortars, 


GENERAL   RULES  AND   OBSERVATIONS.  121 

such  as  carcasses,  which  are  shells  having  three  holes  of  similar  dimensions 
to  the  fuze-hole,  pierced  at  equal  distances  apart  in  the  upper  hemisphere, 
with  their  exterior  openings  touching  the  great  circle  which  is  perpendicular 
to  the  axis  of  the  bore. 

476.  These  carcasses  are  placed  in  the  mortar  in  the  same  manner  as  the 
bomb,  and  are  filled  with  inflammable  mixtures,  and  should  be  transported 
in  a  vessel   by  themselves,  as  they  are  dangerous   companions.     Thirteen- 
inch  carcasses  weigh  194  pounds  each. 

477.  Bombs  are  sometimes  fired  with  a  port  fire  stuck  into  the  fuze-hole, 
which  is  an  almost  certain  mode  of  igniting  many  kinds  of  buildings. 

478.  Mortars  can  also  be  fired  with  a  bag  of  one-pound  balls,  or  ordinary 
grape-shot,  with  very  reduced  charges,  and  a  wad  between  the  powder  and 
the  balls.     One  pound  of  powder  will  project  a  200-lb.  bomb  302  yards; 
the  same  weight  of  grape-shot  thrown  in  among  boats  would  prove  destruc 
tive  ;  and  especially  a  lot  of   canister    fired  in  this  manner  would  cause 
great  havoc. 

479.  It  is  not  expected,  however,  that  much  execution  could  be  done 
after  the  first  discharge  in  a  fleet  of  boats  moving  rapidly ;  but  combined 
with  the  batteries  of  the  Squadron,  it  is  presumed  that  an  enemy  would 
be  deterred  from  an  attempt  to  capture  a  vessel  by  boarding. 

TAKING   THE   DISTANCE. 

480.  An  inexperienced  officer  will  find  difficulty  in  estimating  distances 
by  the  eye  alone,  as  it  requires  long  practice  and  studied  observation.     The 
sextant,  however,  offers  a  surer  method  of  approximately  fixing  a  position 
by  taking  the  angles  between  any  three  points,  which  are  generally  found 
to  be  accurately  laid  down  on  the  Coast  Survey  charts;  then  plotting  the 
angles  with  a  horn  protractor,  or  working  them  out  by  the  three-point  prob 
lem,  which  is  given  in  all  surveying  books. 

481.  If  the  object  to  be  assaulted  is  a  large  one,  a  practical  man  can,  by 
the  exercise    of   moderate  judgment  after  two   or  three  fires,  throw  the 
bombs  near  the  work;    but,  at  the   same  time,  the  sextant  is  the  more 
certain  means  for  determining  the  true  distance,  and  the  Officer  in  command 
should   make  himself  acquainted  with  the   simple  manner  of   measuring 
horizontal  angles. 

482.  If  points  are  not  visible  in  line,  then  measure  a  base  on  shore,  angle 
on  the  object  to  be  aimed  at,  and  from  the  angles  of  the  base  line,  you  can 
fix  the  position  of  the  mortar-vessel. 

483.  When  a  vessel  once  gets  her  position  accurately  determined,  and  it 


122  MORTARS. 


becomes  necessary  after  a  bombardment  to  remove  out  of  the  line  of  battle, 
a  small  buoy  with  the  vessel's  name  or  number  should  be  dropped  under 
foot,  so  that  the  same  position  may,  if  necessary,  be  resumed. 

LOADING  MORTARS. 

484.  After  the  powder  has  been  emptied  through  the  funnel  out  of  the 
cotton  bag  into  the  chamber,  the  bomb,  loaded  and  fuzed,  is  to  be  carefully 
lowered  into  the  bore  by  the  hooks,  and  allowed  to  rest  upon  the  charge. 

485.  The  friction-tube  is  not  put  into  the  vent  until  the  piece  is  about 
to  be  fired. 

FUZES. 

486.  The  wooden  fuzes  used  at  present  for  the  13-iuch  bombs  are  in 
sections,  and  marked  according  to  the  estimated  distance  in  practice,  viz.: 

Seven  inches  extreme  length ;  and  each  section  one  inch,  giving  a  flight 
for  every  section  of  seven  seconds,  and  a  total  of  forty-nine  seconds. 

487.  The  plugs  are  of  the  proper  size  for  the  fuze-hole  ;  the  axis  bored 
cylindrically  from   the  large   end   down,  to  within   a  short  distance  of  the 
small  end,  which  is  left  solid ;  the  orifice  is  filled  with  composition  pressed 
hard  and  evenly  as  possible.     At  the  large  end  a  cup  is  hollowed  out  and 
filled  with  mealed  powder  moistened  with  alcohol. 

488.  The  rate  of  burning  is  ascertained  by  experiment,  and  marked  on  a 
water-proof  cap,  which  is  tied  over  the  cup. 

489.  A  fuze-saw  must  be  at  hand  during  practice  to  cut  the  fuze  the 
required  length. 

490.  Fuzes  for  sea-coast  mortars  arc  also  driven  in  a  conical  paper  case, 
which  is  inserted  in  a  metal  or  wooden  plug  previously  driven  in  the  fuze- 
hole  and  accurately  reamed  out. 

491.  The  paper-case  fuze  is  marked  with  the  number  of  seconds  it  burns 
per  inch,  and  it  may  be  cut,  where  no  danger  from  ignition  can  take  place, 
with  a  sharp  knife. 

PROCESS  OF  FILLING  BOMBS. 

492.  Having  been  inspected  to  see  that  they  are  clean  and  dry,  place 
the  bombs  on  a  block  made  for  the  purpose,  or  on  grommets  of  rope,  or  on 
the  ground,  with  the  eyes  up.     The  charge,  having  been  carefully  measured, 
is  then  poured   into  the   chamber  through   a  funnel,  while,  at  the  same 
time,  the  fuze  is   cut  to  the  proper  length  by  resting  it  on  a  groove  made 
in  the  block,  and  sawing  it  across.     The  fuze  is  then  tried  in  the  hole,  and 
should  enter  f  ths  of  its  length ;  if  it  does  not,  it  must  be  reduced  by  rasping. 

493.  The  head  of  the  fuze  having  been   covered    with  tow  to  prevent 


POINTING   MORTARS.  123 


breaking  the  composition,  the  fuze-setter  is  placed  on  it,  and  the  fuze  driven 
with  the  rnallet  until  the  head  is  about  -^ths  of  an  inch  above  the  surface  of 
the  bomb. 

POINTING  MORTARS. 

494.  First  give  the  elevation  by  applying  the  quadrant  to  the  face  of  the 
piece,  and  adjusting  the   quoin  or  ratchet   until   the  required  number  of 
degrees  is  obtained. 

495.  In  pointing  mortars  on  shore,  it  is  an  easy  matter  to  get  the  direc 
tion,  because  the  mortar  is  stationary  ;    but  on  shipboard,  owing  to  the 
motion,  it  is  attended   with  difficulty,  especially  when  the   vessel  is  rolling 
and  the  line  of  fire  can  only  be  approximate. 

496.  On  shore,  the  plan  of  giving  the  direction  is  to  determine  practi 
cally  two  fixed   points,  which  shall  be  in  a  line  with   the  piece  and   the 
object,  and  sufficiently  near  to  be  readily  distinguished  by  the  eye.     These 
points  being  covered  by  a  plummet,  is  the  vertical  plane  including  the  line 
of  metal,  which  becomes  the  plane  of  fire. 

497.  In  mortar-vessels  other  expedients  are  resorted  to,  such  as  trunnion- 
sights,  or  a  white   line  painted  on  the   mortar-bed  parallel  to  the  axis  of 
the  bore  when  level ;  but  the  first  plan  is  preferable. 

498.  The  circles  on  which  the  mortars  stand  being  fitted  with  eccentrics, 
are  made  to  revolve  so   as  to   point  the  mortar  at  the  object  without  the 
trouble  of  swinging  the  vessel  or  moving  the   mortar  round   with  hand 
spikes. 

499.  Before  firing,  care  must  be  taken  that  the  eccentrics  are  thrown  out 
of  gear,  and  the  circle  flat  upon  the  platform  on  which  it  revolves. 

9 


124 


MORTARS. 


TABLES  OF  CHARGES,  ELEVATIONS,  AND  RANGES 
FOR   13-INCH  MORTARS. 


500, 


CHARGES  FOR  13-lNCH  MORTAR-BOMBS. 


CHAEGB. 

13-lNCH. 

Of  shell  filled  

Ibs.    oz. 
11     0 

To  burst  shell  

6     0 

To  blow  out  fuze  

0     6 

Ordinary  service-charge  

7     0 

Incendiary,  match,  or  other  composition  

0     8 

501.  RANGES  WITH  SEA-COAST  13-lNCH  MORTARS,  20°  ELEVATION. 


CHABGE. 

MEAN  TIME  OF 
FLIGHT. 

LEAST  RANGE. 

GREATEST 
RANGE. 

MEAN  EANGE. 

Lbs. 

Seconds. 

Yards. 

Yards. 

Yards. 

4 

8. 

840 

877 

869 

6 

9.5 

1209 

1317 

1263 

8 

11.66 

1653 

1840 

1744 

10 

12.50 

2010 

2128 

2066 

12 

14.25 

2369 

2688 

2528 

14 

15.25 

2664 

2780 

2722 

CHARGES,    ELEVATIONS,   AND   RANGES. 


125 


502.       RANGES  WITH  13-IxcH  MORTARS,  AT  45°  ELEVATION. 

Weight  of  Shell,  200  Ibs. 


CHARGE. 

FLIGHT. 

FUZE. 

RANGE. 

Lbs.  oz. 

Seconds. 

Inches.  lOths. 

Yards. 

7 

21.4 

4   2| 

2180 

7  8 

22.4 

4   4 

2346 

8 

23.2 

4   6 

2480 

8  8 

23.8 

4   7£ 

2600 

9 

24.4 

4   8* 

2734 

9  8 

24.9 

4   9f 

2853 

10 

25.4 

5   1 

2958 

10  8 

25.9 

5   If 

3026 

11 

26  .  3 

5   2£ 

3150 

11  8 

26.7 

5   3£ 

3246 

12 

27.0 

5   4 

3327 

12  8 

27.4 

5   4* 

3404 

13 

27.7 

5   5£ 

3470 

13  8 

28.0 

5   6 

3552 

14 

28.3 

5   6^ 

3617 

14  8 

28.5 

5   7 

3681 

15 

29.0 

5   8 

3739 

15  8 

29.1 

5   8£ 

3797 

16 

29.2 

5   8J- 

3849 

16  8 

29.4 

5   SJ 

3901 

17 

29.6 

5   9 

3949 

17  8 

29.8 

5   9£ 

3997 

18 

29.8 

5   9f 

4040 

18  8 

30.0 

6 

4085 

19 

30.2 

6   0± 

4123 

19  8 

30.3 

6   0^ 

4160 

20 

30.5 

6   1 

4200 

126  MORTARS. 


503,  TABLE  OF  ALLOWANCES. 

Subjoined  is  a  list  of  articles  which  are  indispensable  for  the  service 
required,  and  must  be  kept  in  readiness  at  or  near  every  mortar,  in  some 
secure  position  : 

Tube-boxes 4 

Straps  for  boxes 4 

Quill-tubes 400 

Friction-tubes 600 

Fuze-composition  for  priming 12  Ibs. 

Powder-bags 250 

Port-fires 100 

Port  fire-sticks 4 

Rasps,  half  round 4 

Cotton  wick 4  Ibs. 

Hand-hatchets 2 

Sheep-skins 6 

Diagonal  scale 1 

Compasses 2 

Copper  funnel,  13  in 1 

Wood  mallets 2 

Fuze-extractor 1 

Iron  pincers    2 

Augurs 2 

Cutting-knives 2 

Scissors 2 

Thread 1  lb. 

Brass  quadrants 1 

Sponges  with  staves,  13  in 2 

Handspikes 6 

Claw-hammcr.s 1 

Lead  plummets 3 

Tallow 20  Ibs. 

Shell-hooks,  13  in 2 

Shell-hooks,  with  thimbles 2 

Cotton  quick-match 6 

Punches  for  mortar-vents 2 

Corkscrews 2 

Blocks  for  driving  fuzes 2 

Drifts  of  iron  tapped  with  copper 4 

Copper  ladles  for  fuzes 2 


TABLE   OF  ALLOWANCES.  127 

Leather  buckets 3 

Elm  plugs CO 

Brass  pickers 2 

SPARE     ARTICLES. 

Cap-squares 

Eye-pins   

Keys  for  pintles,  large    2 

Keys  for  pintles,  small 2 

Washers 2 

Bolts,  traversing 4 

Bolts,  dog 4 


128  MISCELLANEOUS   OPERATIONS. 


CHAPTEE  VIII. 

MISCELLANEOUS  OPERATIONS. 


GETTING  IN  GUNS  ON  COVERED  DECKS. 

504.  AFTER  bracing  the  yard  over  the  port  through  which  it  is  intended 
to  take  the  guns,  secure  the  lizard  round  the  yard  five  or  six  feet  outside 
of  the  ship,  and  hook  the  top  burtons  just  outside  of  the  lizard. 

Haul  taut,  and  bring  an  equal  strain  on  the  burtons  and  lifts.  Hook  a 
rolling-tackle  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  yard,  bowse  it  well  taut,  and  the 
trusses  also,  if  they  be  of  rope.  Pass  the  end  of  the  pendant  of  the  gun- 
purchase  through  the  thimble  of  the  lizard ;  take  the  end  up  and  make  it 
fast  round  the  top-mast,  just  above  the  lower  cap.  Have  the  port  lined 
with  pine  boards,  to  keep  it  from  being  chafed. 

Bore  a  hole  in  the  deck  or  decks  through  which  it  is  intended  to  pass 
the  garnet,  as  nearly  as  possible  over  the  rear  end  of  the  gun-carriago,  and 
as  near  in  line  with  the  centre  of  the  port  into  which  the  guns  are  to  come 
as  the  beams  will  allow.  Pass  the  upper  end  of  the  garnet  through  the 
hole,  and  turn  in  the  thimble,  to  which  hook  the  pendant- tackle.  Place  a 
tackle  across  the  deck  ready  for  bowsing  the  gun  into  its  carriage  through 
the  port. 

Bring  the  gun  under  the  yard  and  sling  it  as  follows :  place  one  bight  of 
the  slings  under  the  neck  of  the  cascabel,  and  pass  the  lashing  which  is 
attached  to  the  slings  round  the  chase,  at  such  a  distance  from  the  trun 
nions  as  will  allow  them  to  go  into  the  trunnion-holes  without  bringing  too 
great  a  pressure  of  the  slings  against  the  upper  port-sill.  Then  toggle  or 
hook  the  gun-purchase  to  the  outer  bight  of  the  slings,  and  s\vay  away. 
When  the  breech  of  the  gun  is  above  the  port-sill,  hook  the  garnet  and  the 
thwart-ship-tackle  to  the  cascabel,  and  bowse  on  both.  When  the  slings 
bear  hard  on  the  upper  port-sill,  lower  the  gun-purchase,  and  bowse  on  the 
garnet  until  the  breech  is  high  enough  for  the  trunnions  to  clear  the  cap- 
square  bolts  in  the  carriage;  then  bowse  on  the  thwart-ship-tackle  until  the 
trunnions  are  over  the  trunnion-holes,  lowering  the  purchase  as  required  to 
bring  the  gun  into  its  place. 


MISCELLANEOUS   OPERATIONS.  129 


As  each  gun  is  mounted  unhook  the  purchase  and  garnet,  take  off  the 
slings,  run  the  carriage  to  its  proper  port,  and  place  another  for  the  next 
gun, 

TAKING   IN   GUNS   OVER   ALL. 

505.  Sling  the  gun  slightly  breech-heavy,  to  render  it  more  manageable. 
If  it  is  to  be  mounted  on  the  spar-deck,  place  the  carriage  in  the  gangway; 
if  on  the  main-deck,  close  to  the  main  hatchway  on  that  deck.      In  place  of 
the  garnet,  hook  the  stay-purchase  for  lowering  the  gun  into  its  carriage. 

GETTING   OUT    GUNS   THROUGH   PORTS. 

506.  Secure  the  yard  as  in  getting  in  guns,  and  sling  the  gun  in  the  same 
manner.     Hook  the  garnet  and  haul  it  taut,  so  as  to  raise  the  breech  of  the 
gun  as  much  as  the  port-sill  will  permit  ;  hook  or  toggle  the  gun-purchase, 
and  sway  away.     As  soon  as  the  trunnions  are  clear  of  the  carriage  haul  it 
from  under  the  gun,  ease  away  the  garnet,  and  let  the  gun  go  out  the  port. 
As  soon  as  the  gun  is  perpendicular  to  the  purchase,  unhook  the  garnet  and 
lower  the  gun  into  the  lighter,  or  on  the  wharf,  as  the  case  may  be. 

If  the  gun  is  to  be  taken  out  over  all,  the  stay-tackle  is  to  be  substituted 
for  the  garnet,  only  it  is  to  be  hooked  to  the  same  end  of  the  slings  as  the 
gun-purchase,  and  the  lashing  on  the  slings  is  to  be  passed  around  the 
chase  of  the  gun,  as  near  the  trunnions  as  possible,  without  being  in  the 
way  of  the  brackets. 

MANNER  OF  USING  THE  GRIOLET  PURCHASE  FOR  DISMOUNT 
ING  OR  MOUNTING  GUNS  ON  COVERED   DECKS. 

507.  In  practice,  guns  are  rarely  shifted  from  one  carriage  to  another 
during  action:   it  is  only  during  a  cessation  of  firing.     While  the  action  is 
going  on,  the  crew  of  a  disabled  gun  are  more  usefully  employed  in  replacing 
the  killed  and  wounded.     Furthermore,  spare  carriages  are  not  so  numerous 
as  to  permit  this  operation  to  be  performed  frequently.     Nevertheless,  each 
gun's  crew  should  be  thoroughly  exercised,  in  order  to  develop  their  strength 
and  skill, 

508.  The  gun  is  to  be  run  in,  in  the  direction  required  to  bring  the  muz 
zle  under  the  housing-bolt,  and  the  breech  under  the  hole  bored  in  the  deck 
to  receive  the  screw-bolt  of  the  upper  block  of  the  breech-purchase.     This 
hole  should  be  bored  through  the  plank  in  the  deck,  as  nearly  abreast  the 
middle  of  the  port  as  the  beams  will  allow,  giving  the  block  room  to  play 
clear  of  the  beams  and  carlings. 

With  a  gun's  crew  of  twelve  men  the  operation  may  be  performed  as 
iollows : 


ISO  MISCELLANEOUS   OPERATIONS. 

At  the  word  "Stand  by  to  dismount!"  the  Quarter-Gunner  of  the  divi 
sion  on  the  deck  above  that  in  which  the  gun  is  to  be  dismounted  removes 
the  screw-tap,  and  stands  ready  to  place  the  washer,  key  and  un-key  the 
bolt  of  the  breech-purchase  block. 

All  the  numbers,  except  1,  2,  «J,  and  4,  man  the  train-tackle. 

No.  1  gives  the  word  u  Run  in  !" 

While  the  gun  is  coming  in,  Nos.  1  and  2  remove  breeching  from  jaws 
of  cascabel,  and  7  and  8  remove  it  from  side-shackle.  Nos.  1  and  2  throw 
its  bight  over  the  reinforce.  No.  1  removes  sight-bar  and  screws  np  the 
thumb-screw  fiimly. 

When  the  jyun  is  in  position — Nos.  1  and  2  adjust  upper  and  lower  block 
of  breech-purchase  and  secure  the  latter  with  the  cascabel-pin.  Nos.  3  and 

4  chock  fore-trucks,  provide  muzzle-purchase,  and,  assisted  if  necessary  by 

5  and  6,  adjust  its  upper  block.     Nos.  5  and  6  unshackle  breeching  from 
ship's   side,  and  shove  toggle-block  of  muzzle-purchase  into  the  bore  and 
back  it  to  the  breech-purchase. 

Nos.  7  and  8  un-key  and  throw  back  cap-squares  and  choke  luffs  of  side- 
tackles,  or,  if  rolling  deeply,  hitch  them  round  the  straps  of  the  blocks. 

Nos.  9  and  10  provide  breech -purchase  and  assist  1  and  2  in  adjusting  it. 

No.  11  chokes  luff  of  train-tackle,  or  hitches  it,  if  required;  provides 
and  hooks  tackle  of  muzzle-purchase  ;  belays  and  lowers. 

No.  12  provides  and  hooks  tackle  of  breech-purchase ;  belays  and  lowers. 

These  preparations  made,  all  the  numbers  man  the  breech-tackle  fall,  or 
divide  themselves  to  bowse  upon  both  falls  together,  as  the  position  of  the 
gun  in  the  battery  may  render  either  mode  most  convenient. 

At  the  word  "  Dismount !"    the  gun  is  swayed  out  of  the  carriage. 

Nos.  3  and  4  attend  chocking-quoins,  and  11  attends  train-tackle,  if 
required. 

All  the  numbers,  excepting  11  and  12,  who  attend  purchase-falls,  move 
up  to  their  ordinary  stations  for  serving  the  gun,  unhook  side-tackles,  and 
remove  the  old  carriage,  under  the  direction  of  No.  1 ;  and — 

At  the  word  "Mount !"  the  same  men  bring  the  new  carriage  into  posi 
tion  for  mounting. 

At  the  word  "  Lower  !"  Nos.  11  and  12  lower  the  gun  into  its  place  ;  all 
the  numbers  then  proceed,  respectively,  to  reverse  what  they  had  done  in 
dismounting. 

Guns  on  covered  decks  may  also  be  dismounted  by  means  of  a  muzzle- 
lashing,  the  runner  and  the  train-tackles,  assisted  by  the  handspikes. 

The  gun  is  run  in  and  laid  square  under  the  housing-bolt,  the  bed  and 
quoin  removed,  the  muzzle  elevated  and  secured  as  in  the  housing  position  ; 
then,  after  un-key  ing  and  throwing  back  the  cap-squ-ires,  the  breech  is 
bowsed  up  clear  of  the  carriage  by  means  of  the  train-tackle,  hooked  in  the 


THROWING   GUNS  OVERBOARD.  131 

eye  of  a  runner,  the  block  of  which  hooks  in  an  eye-bolt  in  the  beam  over 
the  gnn.  If  preferred,  this  mode  of  dismounting  may  be  adopted  by  sub 
stituting  the  muzzle-lashing  for  the  toggle-block  of  the  griolet,  and  toggling 
the  runner-block  in  the  hole  made  in  the  deck  for  the  breech-purchase  of 
the  griolet. 

THROWING  GUNS  OVERBOARD. 

509.  The  gun's  crew  being  assembled  at  Quarters,  remove  the  pin  arid 
chock  from  the  cascabel,  into  the  jaws  of  which  place  a  selvagee  strap; 
hook  the  double  block  of  the  train-tackle  into  the  housing-bolt  over  the 
port,  and  its  single  block  into  the  selvagee  strap ;  remove  the  cap-squares, 
and  place  a  round  block  of  wood  on  the  sill  of  the  port,  high  enough  to  let 
the  chase  bear  on  it  when  slightly  depressed  ;  raise  the  breech  as  much  as 
possible,  without  lifting  the  gun  out  of  the  carriage.  When  all  is  ready 
man  the  train-tackle  well ;  have  the  handspikemen  also  ready  to  assist  in 
raising  the  breech  ;  and  if  the  vessel  is  not  rolling,  it  will  be  well  to  have 
additional  handspikes  under  the  rear  of  the  carriage  to  lift  it  also,  so  as  to 
give  free  egress  to  the  gun.  When  all  is  ready,  give  the  order:  "All  to 
gether — launch !"  In  a  gale  of  wind  advantage  should  be  taken  of  a 
favorable  roll  to  give  the  word,  that  the  action  of  the  sea  and  of  the  men  at 
the  guns  may  be  simultaneous. 

If  the  guns  are  to  be  thrown  overboard  for  the  purpose  of  lightening  a 
ship  which  is  aground,  they  must  be  buoyed,  and  care  is  to  be  taken  that 
each  buoy-rope  is  of  a  proper  length  and  strong  enough  to  weigh  the  gun. 
The  best  mode  of  securing  the  buoy-rope  to  the  gun  is  to  form  a  clinch  or 
splice  an  eye  in  the  end  which  goes  over  the  cascabel,  and  take  a  half-hitch 
with  the  bight  around  the  chase  of  the  gun,  and  stop  it  with  spun -yarn. 

The  buoy  must  be  sufficient  to  float  the  rope  when  saturated;  or,  in  deep 
water,  a  smaller  line  may  be  used  for  the  buoy,  and  attached  to  the  rope 
intended  for  weighing  the  gun,  that  it  may  be  hauled  up  whec  wanted. 


PAET    II. 


EQUIPMENT  AND  MANOEUVRE 


OP 


EQUIPMENT  AND  MANOEUVRE 


OF 


BOATS. 


EQUIPMENT    OF    BOATS. 

WHEN  DIRECTED  TO  BE  MANNED  AND  AHMED  FOR  SERVICE. 

1.  BOATS  must  be  provided  according  to  the  time  of  absence  arid  nature 
of  the   service  they  are  to  perform,  keeping  in  view  the  details  prescribed 
in  Table  (Article  5). 

The  number  and  class  of  Boat-Howitzers  are  assigned  by  the  Bureau  of 
Ordnance. 

2.  When  boats    manned  and   armed   are  ordered,  the  Officers  detailed 
to  command  them  will  see  that  they  are  thus  furnished,  and  report  when 
the  boats  are  ready.     They  will  also  see  that  all  articles  are  safely  returned, 
or  duly  accounted  for,  when  the  boats  return  to  the  vessel. 

If  the  boats  are  directed  to  assemble  alongside  of  any  particular  vessel,  the 
officers  must  report  as  they  arrive  there.  If  signalled  alongside  of  the  ship 
of  the  Commander  of  the  Squadron  for  exercise  or  for  inspection,  they  are  to 
be  inspected,  if  he  shall  so  direct,  by  an  Officer  appointed  by  him,  whose 
duty  it  shall  be  to  report  those  which  may  be  particularly  well  prepared, 
and  those  which  he  may  find  deficient  in  equipment  or  arrangement,  speci 
fying  particulars. 

3.  Whenever  the  Howitzers  are  to  be  used  in  boats  they  must  be  fitted 
for  the  purpose  as  directed  in  "  EXERCISE  AND  MANOEUVRE  OF  BOAT-HOW 
ITZERS  ;"  their  crews  being  armed  with  swords  and  revolvers. 

v 

4.  Boarding-parties  are  to  be  supplied  with  swords,  revolvers,  and  rifles 

loading  at  the  breech,  with  filled  cartridge-boxes. 


EQUIPMENT  OF  BOATS  AKMED  FOR  SERVICE. 


off 


HER  SLO 
D  BRIGS. 


EAZEED  FRIGATES 
AND  IST  CLASS 
SCREW  SLOOPS. 


AND  IST 
FRIGATE 


L 

CLA 


•aaxxno  pg 


•saaxxn;) 
PS  put?  )*i 


•saaxxflo 
P8  P°«  PS 


•aaxxno  JBI 


•saaxxno 
q^  pinj  pg 


•saaxxno 


rH   rH   M   rH   rH   ft 


.      g,fc,HC,^ 


o    I  <~  •  r  ^  o  ^ 

+S  Op  -M 


•saaxxno 
qit  puu  pg 


,      ,     S  *g   ®  &.S    OSO-^O--          3    3    S    3    2 

Z  ^H      I       I    J,    d    -  —    -    «r^  ^  -"      Ir-lr-M-Hr-i 


•saaxxno 
PS  PUB  }si 


OOCOO 


-i—' 

o 


lill 


I; 


If 


11 


EQUIPMENT   OF   BOATS   ARMED   FOR   SERVICE. 


of - 

o 


a 
'So 

3    § 
£ 


=1-27 

~      O          J1 


I 


-§' 


O     -4-3 

5'|"". § 

.,    r£> Cl 

<2fe«--   S 


01    r-~.h 

be  o  S 


J     s 


CJ---------       ^^ 

H 


6 

O 


SEa|-ai§81 

^nW^5^  ^^ 


2^19.1'. 


2 

£pp: 

0202H 


Pt  o>  A  a  2 

/-^?  L-    3    ^    o 


.-3  .a    o    s  c 

OH      «      pqW 


o 
44 

si 


a      .2 

§  ! 

P..    <) 


"I 


sa 


EQUIPMENT   OF   BOATS  ARMED   FOR  SERVICE. 


DETAILS  OF  THE  FOREGOING  TABLE. 
FIXTURES  IN  BOATS  FOR  BOAT-GUNS. 

6*  Two  eye-bolts  on  each  bow,  to  receive  the  hooks  of  the  skid ;  two 
cross-pieces,  of  yellow  pine,  to  bear  the  carriage,  so  as  to  carry  the  muzzle 
of  the  howitzer  just  above  and  clear  of  the  gunwale  and  stem. 

One  piece  of  yellow  pine  scantling,  placed  lengthwise  and  amidship, 
mortised  into  the  rear  cross-piece  to  sustain  the  carriage  in  sweeping. 

MOVABLE  PIECES. 

7»  Six  pivot  plates  and  bolts — one  at  the  stem,  one  at  the  stern,  one 
at  each  bow,  and  one  on  each  quarter ;  two  light  wooden  tracks  to  lay 
along  the  thwarts  for  the  wheels  of  field-carriages  and  the  slide  of  boat- 
carriage  ;  one  midship  wheel-track  for  the  trail  of  field-carriage ;  two  stout 
skids,  each  fitted  at  one  end  with  two  hooks,  and  connected  at  the  shore 
end  by  an  iron  brace. 

The  chocks  with  rollers  at  the  stem  and  stern  posts  of  launches,  are 
arranged  to  be  removed  when  the  gun  is  used. 

8.  Implements  for  Shifting  the  Howitzer  from  Boat  to  Field-Carriage. 
One  muzzle-block. 

One  selvagee  strap. 

One  shifting-spar. 

One  short  iron  or  wooden  bolt,  to  keep  the  piece  on  the  right  slue. 

9.  Implements,  complete,  for  Serving  and  Working  the  Howitzer. 
Breeching  for  boat-gun,  if  deemed  necessary. 

Lock  with  lock-string. 

Elevating  screw. 

Sight. 

Prim  ing- wire. 

Boring-bit. 

Vent-cloth. 

Sponge  and  rammer. 

"  "         spare. 

Spring-spike. 

Rat-tail  file. 

Haversack,  with  strap,  for  Captain  of  howitzer,  to  contain  a  supply  of 
primers,  spare  fuzes,  spare  lock,  vent-bit,  vent-cloth,  and  implements  for 
spiking ;  leather  ammunition-pouches  for  each  of  the  men  of  the  field-gun, 
except  Nos.  1  and  3,  to  be  supplied  by  the  Quarter  Gunner,  with  one 
round  of  ammunition  each,  and  two  primers,  when  the  order  to  laud  is 
given. 


AMMUNITION. — SMALL   ARMS. — PROVISIONS. 


Drag-rope,  fitted  with  hooks  and  handles. 

Trail  handspike. 

A  rope,  or  chain,  to  lock  the  wheels  in  descending' slopes. 

Transporting-boxes. 

10,  AMMUNITION. 

A  chest  containing  shrapnel. 
"  "          shell. 

"  u          canister. 

These   chests   are   of  two   sizes;    the  single,  holding  nine,  and  double,, 
eighteen  rounds. 

A  key  is  becketed  to  each  box  for  unscrewing  the  lid 
Cutting-tool  for  opening  the  Bormann  fuze,  one  in  each  box  of  shell  and 
shrapnel. 

FOR  SMALL  ARMS. 

11,  Cartridge-boxes  and  belts,  furnished  with  cartridges  and  percussion- 
caps,  screw-driver,  cone-key,  and  wiper. 

An  empty  powder-tank  for  magazine,  to  contain  filled  cartridge-boxes 
and  spare  cartridges. 

SMALL  ARMS. 

12,  Breech-loaders,  in  loops  or  brackets,  under  the  gunwale  of  the  boat, 
protected  by  a  water-proof  canvas  covering,  running  round  the  rising  of  the 
boat. 

Rifles. 

Revolvers. 

Swords. 

Boat  arm-chest. 

A  good  tarpaulin  to  cover  ammunition. 

13,  PROVISIONS. 

Pork.     To  be  cooked  if  there  be  time. 
Bread,  in  water-proof  bag. 
Cheese,  or  canned  moats. 

Fresh  v>  ater,  in  breakers ;  always  to  be  used  for  ballast  when  ballast  is 
required. 

Fuel  and  kindling. 

• 

14,  UTENSILS   AND   ARRANGEMENTS   FOR   COOKING. 

Launch-stove  and  utensils. 
Mess-kettle. 

10 


EQUIPMENT   OF   BOATS   ARMED   FOR  SERVICE. 


Tin  pots  and  spoons. 

Funnel. 

Bucket. 

15,  TOOLS   AND   ARTICLES    FOR    REPAIRING    DAMAGES. 

Axe,  One  for  each  boat. 

Hatchet,  "  " 

Hammer,  "  « 

^  Hand-saw,  "  " 

V   Nails,  2  pds.  for  each  launch ;  11  pds.  for  each  large  cutter ;  and  1  pel. 
'Uor  each  of  the  rest. 

I     Sheet-lead,  3  square  feet  for  each  launch ;  and   2   square  feet  for  each 
cutter. 

Tacks  (number),  100  for  each  launch;  75  for  each  large  cutter;  and   50 
for  each  of  the  rest. 
Marlin  spike. 
Spun-yarn. 
Grease. 

16,  MISCELLANEOUS  ARTICLES. 
Boat  ensign. 

Set  of  signals  for  boat  of  Senior  Officer. 

Boat-compass. 

Spy-glass. 

Lead  and  line. 

Lantern. 

Candles. 

Tinder-box,  with  flint  and  steel. 

Fishing-lines  and  books. 

17,  FOR    TREATMENT    OF    SICK    AND    WOUNDED. 

Tourniquets. 

Bandages. 

Lint. 

Medicines. 

Surgical  instruments. 

18,  BOAT-GEAR. 
Masts. 

Spars. 
Rigging. 

A  set  of  oars,  fitted  with  trailing-lines  long  enough  to  allow  them  to  trail 
alongside  in  the  water. 


BOAT-GEAR.  9 

Three  boat-hooks. 

Spare  oars,  with  trailing-lines,  for  one  thwart. 

Cranes  on  the  gunwale  to  hold  spars  and  spare  oars,  raised  sufficiently 
high  above  the  gunwale  (9  inches)  to  allow  the  oars  to  be  got  out  or 
trailed.  The  spars  thus  arranged  form  a  considerable  protection  against 
musketry. 

Small  thrum-mats  for  muffling  oars  when  required 

Anchor. 

Chain,  or  rope. 

Hand-grapnels,  fitted  with  a  fathom  of  light  chain,  and  five  fathoms  of 
line. 
Sails. 

Awning  and  stanchions. 
Tent  awning.     (See  Drawing.) 

N".  B. — In  order  to  avoid  delay  and  confusion  when  boats  are  called 
away  for  service,  it  is  recommended  that  the  articles  required  by  the  fore 
going  lists  should  be  kept  separately  in  the  store-rooms,  in  convenient 
packages  for  stowage  in  the  boats  and  protection  against  the  weather.  The 
contents  of  each  package  must  be  marked  on  it,  together  with  the  name 
of  the  boat  for  which  it  is  intended.  Particular  attention  should  be  paid 
by  the  Executive  Officer  of  the  vessel  to  the  best  and  most  compact  stowage 
of  all  articles  required  for  boat  expeditions,  which  will,  necessarily,  vary 
according  to  the  size  of  the  boat  and  the  nature  of  the  service  she  is  to 
perform.  The  occasions  will  be  very  rare  when  all  of  these  articles  are 
required  at  the  same  time. 


10  EXERCISE   AND   MANOEUVRE 


FOEM    OF    EXERCISE    AND    MANCEUVRE 

FOR  THE   BOAT-HOWITZERS   OF  THE   UNITED   STATES  NAVY. 


NOMENCLATURE. 

19.  THE  CASCABEL  is  the  part  of  the  gun  in  the  rear  of  the  base-ring; 
and  is  composed  of — 

The  breech-plate. 

The  knob. 

The  neck. 

Base-ring. 

Cylinder. 

Chase. 

Loop,  with  hole  for  bolt. 

Lock-luo-s. 

£? 

Mass-sight. 

Mass  for  breech-sight. 
The  BORE  includes  all  the  part  bored  out,  viz. : 

Cylinder  of  bore. 

Chamber. 
These  gnns  must  not  be  polished  bright. 

BOAT-CARRIAGE  COMPLETE,  consists  of- 

Bed. 

Slide. 

Compressor-plate. 

"  bolts. 

"  handles. 

Lugs  for  loop. 

FIELD-CARRIAGE  COMPLETE,  consists  of— 

Axle. 

Trail. 

Braces. 

Supports  for  transporting  boxes. 

Lugs  for  loop. 

Trail-wheel  or  runner. 

Bolt  for         do. 

Socket  for  handspike. 


I 


* 


[is. 


OF   BOAT-HOWITZERS.  11 


Elevator. 

Disk  of  elevator. 

Box  for  elevator. 


EXERCISE   OF    THE    BOAT-HOWITZER. 

20.  While  preparations  are  in  progress  for  clearing'  out  the  boats,  the 
Officer  of  each  boat  will  see  that  the  howitzer,  and  its  various  equipments, 
are  also  in  readiness.  The  Junior  Officer  or  Officer  of  the  piece  will  attend 
to  the  gun  itself  and  its  carnages. 

The  Quarter  Gunner  will  get  up  the  ammunition  from  below ;  also  the 
lock,  sights,  sponges,  spare  fuzes,  ammunition-pouches,  and  primers.  Spare 
article  box. 

This  will  be  the  proper  time  for  examining  the  shrapnel  arid  shells, 
which  must  receive  the  particular  attention  of  the  Officer  who  is  to  com 
mand  the  boat. 

The  Captain  of  the  gun  will  look  after  the  traverses,  tracks,  and  pivot- 
plates. 

The  Coxswain  will  have  ready  the  thwarts,  oars,  masts  and  sails. 
When  the  boat  has  been  cleared  for  hoisting  out,  lay  the  thwarts  and 
traverses,  and  bolt  the  pivot-plates  on  the  bows  and  quarters  ;  if  the  stem 
and  stern  pivot-plates  interfere  with  the  purchases,  they  can  be  secured  after 
the  boat  is  in  the  water.  If  the  field-carriage  is  to  accompany  the  gun,  lay 
the  wheel  and  trail  tracks. 

In  a  sea-way,  it  may  be  better  to  place  the  howitzer  in  the  launch,  lay 
ing  it  athwartships,  and  bolting  the  two  ends  of  the  slide  into  the  bow 
pivot-plates,  which  will  hold  it  perfectly  firm. 

As  a  general  rule,  the  howitzer  is  not  to  be  handled  separately  from  one 
of  its  carriages.  It  may  be  hoisted  into  the  launch  on  either  field  or  boat 
carriage,  as  circumstances  may  dictate. 

When  the  boat-carriage  is  preferred,  sling  it  with  a  stout  strap  passed 
through  the  loop-lugs  and  brought  up  round  the  gun,  into  which  hook  the 
purchase;  previously  shove  the  bed  a  little  towards  the  rear  end  of  the 
slide,  so  that  the  carriage  will  hang  square,  and  set  the  compressors  tight. 

When  the  boat  has  been  hoisted  out,  the  howitzer,  its  ammunition,  and 
equipments,  should  be  stowed  in  it  conformably  to  the  requirements  of  the 
occasion. 

Ordinarily,  the  howitzer  may  be  placed  in  the  bow  on  its  boat-carriage, 
bolted  to  the  stem-pivot;  the  field-carriage  aft,  with  its  wheels  resting  on  the 
floor  of  the  stern-sheets  and  bearing  against  the  after  thwart ;  the  trail  laid 
over  the  quarter-rail,  so  as  not  to  interfere  with  the  steering;  and  the  am 
munition  stowed  in  the  stern-sheets,  or  elsewhere,  as  may  be  most  con- 
venient  for  trim  of  boat,  or  for  its  own  preservation. 


12  EXERCISE   AND   MANCEUVBE 

These  arrangements  can  be  subsequently  changed  as  circumstances  may 
require. 

The  Captain  of  the  howitzer  slings  his  haversack  and  deposits  in  it  a 
supply  of  primers,  a  vent-bit,  and  vent-cloth,  which  are  handed  to  him  by 
the  Quarter  Gunner. 

The  equipment  of  the  boat  will  be  much  facilitated  by  assigning  to  each 
man  special  duties  of  preparation  and  providing  articles. 

As  the  bow-oars  cannot  well  be  pulled  when  the  howitzer  is  mounted  in 
the  bow,  Nos.  1  and  2  do  not  ordinarily  assist  at  the  oars. 


STATIONS     IN    BO/XT 


: 
* 


r 


OF   BOAT-HOWITZERS. 


13 


STATIONS. 

21,  For  20  men  the  stations  in  the  boat  and  at  the  howitzer  will  be  as 
follows  ;  if  fewer  are  employed,  the  higher  numbers  are  to  be  omitted: 


BOAT. 

Stations. 


HOWITZER. 
Duty. 


Signals  and  assists  with  ammunition. 
Ammunition. 

Superintends  the  firing. 


Quarter  Master,  Stern-Sheets. 

Quarter  Gunner,  Ammunition. 

Cockswain,  Helm. 

Chief  of  Piece,  Bow. 

Port.  Starboard. 

Bow-oar.     Captain  of  howitzer,  points  and  fires 

If  the  lock   and   sight  are   on    left         the  gun,  superintends  orders,  and 
side  Captain  will  take  station  on         gives    orders    in   absence    of    an 


port  side. 
2.  Bow -oar. 

4.  2d  oar. 


5.  

3d  oar. 

6.  3d 

oar. 



hr 
1  .  

4th  oar. 

8.  4th 

oar. 

- 

9.  

5th  oar. 

10.  5th 

oar. 



11.  — 

6th  oar. 

12.  Cth 

oar. 

13.  

7th  oar. 

14.  7th 

oar. 



15.  - 

8th  oar. 

16.  8th 

oar. 

.  , 

17.  — 

9th  oar. 

Officer. 

2d  Captain,  tends  vent  and  primes. 
2d  oar.     Sponger,  sponges  and  pushes  home 
charge. 

Loader,  receives  and  enters  ammuni 
tion. 

Tends  forward  compressor. 

Tends  after  compressor. 

Train  rope. 


Runs    field -carriage     forward     when 
landing. 

18.  9th  oar.  . plims    field-carriage    forward    when 

landing. 

Officer  of  boat  directs  the  whole  of  the  operations,  or  may  take  especial 
charge  of  the  howitzer. 

Officer  of  the  gun  is  in  command  of  the  piece,  unless  otherwise  ordered 
by  the  Officer  of  the  boat. 


14  EXERCISE   AND   MANOEUVRE 


(Preliminary  Order)  —  "MAN  THE  HOWITZER!" 

22,  The  Captain  of  the  gun  sees  that  the  elevator,  sight  and  lock  are  in 
order  for  firing. 

Nos.  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  6,  7.     Trail  oars. 

No.  3  goes  to  starboard  side  of  muzzle,  having  the  sponge  and  rammer 
ready. 

No.  4  goes  to  port  side  of  muzzle,  takes  out  tompion. 

No.  5  to  starboard  side,  near  forward  compressor. 

No.  6  port  side,  near  after  compressor. 

No.  7  after-end  of  slide,  and  hooks  training-rope. 

No.  2  tends  the  vent  and  puts  in  primer. 

If  the  gun  is  unloaded,  it  must  be  run  in. 


I.    "SPONGE  I" 

23,  No.  2  closes  vent,  (a) 

No.  3  enters  the  sponge,  and,  pressing  it  firm.y  to  the  bottom  of  bore, 
turns  it  round  and  withdraws  it.  (6) 

Quarter  Gunner  takes  a  round  from  the  ammunition-box,  and,  if  shell  or 
shrapnel  be  used,  holds  it  for  the  Officer  in  command  of  gun  to  adjust  the 
fuze. 

II.  "LOAD!" 

24,  Quarter  Gunner  passes  forward  with  the   fixed   charge,  protecting  it 
under  his  jacket,  (c) 

No.  4  receives  the  charge  from  Quarter  Gunner  and  enters  it. 
No.  3  pushes  home  to  the  mark  on  rammer-handle,  (d) 
No.  2  puts  in   primer  and  covers  it  with  his  hand  until  Nos.  3  and  4  are 
clear  of  the  gun.  (e) 

III.  "POINT!" 

25,  Nos.  5  and  6  ease  compressors.   (/) 

All  six  men  and  Captain  of  gun  run  out  the  howitzer.  (g) 

Nos.  5  and  6  then  tighten  compressors. 

Officer  of  gun  puts  up  the  sight  as  directed  by  Officer  of  boat.  (A) 

Captain  of  gun  brings  the  elevation  within  the  limits  of  the  boat's 
motion,  and  causes  No.  7,  with  the  assistance  of  some  others,  to  train  nearly 
to  object  if  the  boat  is  under  way. 

IV.  "FIRE!" 

26,  If  the  boat  has  motion,  or  is  under  way,  a  discretionarv  execution 
of  this  order  is  necessarily  implied. 


OF  BOAT-HOWITZERS.  15 

The  assumed  elevation  having  been  given  by  the  elevator,  a  slight 
motion  of  the  helm  is  made  to  sweep  the  piece  laterally,  so  as  to  cross  the 
object. 

The  Captain  of  the  gun  closely  watches  this  movement,  with  his  eye 
down  on  the  sights,  and  holding  the  lock-lanyard  firmly,  draws  it  as  soon 
as  the  sights  coincide  with  the  object. 

Immediately  after  firing  he  coils  up  the  lanyard  and  pulls  from  the  vent 
any  pieces  of  the  quill  that  may  remain,  and  also  enters  the  bit  to  clear  it 
entirely  through,  (i) 


NOTES  TO  THE  FORM  OF  BOAT  EXERCISE. 

27.  («)  The  necessity  for  closing  the  vent  is  a  mooted  question ;  but  as 
the  operation  itself  is  a  slight  one,  having  no  appreciable  effect  in  compli 
cating  or  delaying  the  mano3uvre  of  the  gun,  it  is  not  deemed  advisable  to 
omit  it  in  this  "  Form."  An  equally  sure  method,  is  merely  to  lay  a  piece 
of  untwilled  woollen  cloth  over  the  vent,  and  press  it  down  with  the  hand ; 
or  else  turn  the  lock  on  it,  and  hold  that  down. 

(6)  Too  much  care  cannot  be  used  in  sponging,  as  a  premature  explosion 
endangers  life  and  limb.  A  moist  sponge  is  to  be  preferred,  for  contact  with 
it  must  surely  extinguish  every  trace  of  fire  in  the  bore. 

It  may  be  considered  as  a  safeguard  against  accident,  for  during  many 
years'  practice,  in  proving  pieces  and  exercising  the  men  to  fire  rapidly — 
ordinarily,  seven  or  eight  times  in  a  minute — not  a  single  instance  of  prema 
ture  explosion  has  occurred. 

(c)  The  head  of  the  fuze-composition  must  be  guarded  against  moisture 
from  the  fingers,  rain,  or  spray  of  the  sea;  otherwise,  there  will  be  a  failure 
to  ignite. 

(d)  The  ammunition   is  never  to  be  struck  with  the  rammer-head,  but 
pushed   home,  and  with  very  moderate   force  ;  particularly  omitting  a  very 
common  practice  of  forcing  the  charge  after  it  reaches  the  bottom  of  the 
bore.     In  pushing  home  the  charge,  No.  2  should  always  keep  his  body 
at  the  side  of  the  chase,  and  not  before  the  muzzle. 

(e)  It  is  not  necessary  to  pierce  the  cartridge  when  percussion-primers 
are  used  ;  their  fire  being  always  sufficient  to  pass  through  it. 

(/)  It  is  only  necessary  to  give  the  compressors  a  turn,  or  a  part  of  n 
turn;  this  will  relieve  the  nip  completely,  and  time  is  saved  subsequently 
in  compressing. 

(ff)  Some  will  take  hold  of  the  standard  of  the  carriage-bed  that  receives 
the  loop  of  the  piece,  others  of  the  breech  or  bed,  as  may  be  convenient,  to 
run  out  the  gun. 

(h)  In  tightening  the  thumb-screw  that  holds  the  breech-sight  in  posi 
tion,  do  not  turn  it  too  hard ;  the  thread  may  be  stripped  by  continuing  to 


16  EXERCISE  AND  MANOEUVRE 

do  so.  The  sight  may  descend  by  the  shock  of  the  discharge,  but  this  is 
of  no  moment. 

In  point-blank  firing,  the  breech-sight  is  not  required ;  the  eye  must 
then  range  along  the  cylinder  and  muzzle-sight. 

(e)  The  charge  may  not  be  fired  ;  if  this  arises  from  not  properly  draw 
ing  the  lock,  it  will  be  evident  at  sight,  as  the  wafer  of  the  primer  will  not 
flash;  in  this  case  No.  2  throws  back  the  lock.  ^ 

If  the  primer  explodes  without  acting  on  the  charge,  care  must  be  taken 
not  to  approach  the  piece  too  soon,  as  it  may  only  hang  fire,  and  the  recoil 
will  injure  any  one  in  the  way  of  it.  After  a  seasonable  pause,  the  Captain 
of  the  howitzer  will  remove  the  residue  of  the  primer,  pass  the  bit  down  the 
vent,  and  insert  another  primer. 

PIVOTING   THE   HOWITZER. 

28.  The  sweep  allowed  by  the  stem-pivot  is  about  one  point  and  a  half, 
starboard  or  port ;  if  this  is  not  sufficient  to  train  the  piece  on  the  object, 
without  diverging  too  much  from  the  course  or  position  of  the  boat,  then 
the  bow-pivots  may  be  used. 

The  Officer  of  the  boat  gives  the  order — 

"PIVOT   ON  THE  PORT  (OR  STARBOARD)   BOW!" 

29.  No.  7,  with  the  assistance  of  the  others,  trains  the  rear  end  of  the 
slide  into  the  bow-pivot  which  is  not  to  be  used.     No.  2  bolts  it  in.     No.  3 
draws  bolt  out  of  stem-pivot,  and,  with  assistance,  draws  round  the  forward 
end  of  the  slide  into  the  pivot  to  be  used ;    drops  in  the  bolt.     No.  2  with 
draws  the  bolt  from  rear  end  of  slide. 

The  sweep  on  the  bow-pivots  includes  an  arc  of  about  120  degrees. 

It  is  not  advisable  to  train  the  howitzer  more  than  a  point  abaft  the  beam 
if  forward,  or  more  than  a  point  forward  the  beam  if  aft;  as  the  accidental 
explosion  of  a  shell  near  the  muzzle,  and  even  of  a  shrapnel,  might  be 
dangerous  to  those  in  the  boat. 

On  the  bow-pivot,  the  piece  may  be  pointed  nearly  from  the  direction 
of  the  keel  to  a  little  abaft  the  beam. 

SHIFTING  THE  HOWITZER. 

30*  If  the  howitzer  does  not  bear  on  the  object  with  such  assistance  as 
is  admissible  from  the  helm,  then  the  Officer  in  command  may  direct  it  to 
be  shifted  to  the  other  end  of  the  boat. 

The  light  12-poundcrs,  with  their  boat-carriages,  average  660  pounds 
each ;  and  can  be  transported  by  hand  from  one  end  of  the  boat  to  another. 

With  their  boat-carriages,  the  12-pounders  of  750  average  1,200  pounds 
each ;  the  24-pounders  about  2,000  pounds,  and  will  probably  be  more 


OF  BOAT-HOWITZERS.  17 

conveniently  managed,  especially  if  the  boat  has  motion,  by  placing  rollers 
2i  to  2f  inches  in  diameter  on  the  tracks  laid  for  the  field-carriage.  On 
these  the  boat-carriage  can  be  shifted  from  one  end  of  the  boat  to  the  other, 
using  light  falls  to  keep  it  under  command. 


DISEMBARKATION  OF   THE  HOWITZER. 

I.    "  PREPARE   TO   LAND  !" 

31  •  The  Quarter  Gunner  fills  the  pouches  with  one  round  each,  and  passes 
them  to  the  men,  each  of  whom,  except  Nos.  1  and  3,  slings  a  pouch  over 
the  right  shoulder,  and  buckles  the  strap  as  short  as  possible,  so  as  to  keep 
the  ammunition  clear  of  the  water  when  leaving  the  boat. 

The  Captain  of  the  gun  also  shortens  the  strap  of  his  haversack 

"TRAIL  BOW  AND  STROKE  OAKS!" 

32,  Nos.  1  and  2  adjust  the  bed  of  the  boat-carriage  to  its  proper  place 
on  the  slide  for  shifting;  place  the  muzzle-block,  and  make  the  muzzle  bear 
on  it  by  means  of  the  elevator;  pass  the  strap  around  the  neck  of  the  cas- 
cabel  and  put  the  shifting-spar  through  the  strap;  the  Quarter  Gunner, 
assisted  by  the  men  from  the  after  oars,  raises  the  field-carriage  up  on  the 
tracks. 

II.  "TRAIL!" 

33*  The  boat  being  beached  in  season,  the  men  trail  oars  and  jump  to 
their  stations. 

Nos.  3  and  4  over  the  bow  to  adjust  the  skids,  which  are  launched  by 
Nos.  5  and  6. 

No.  2  attends  the  elevator. 

No.  3  attends  the  muzzle. 

Nos.  8,  10,  11,  and  13,  the  shifting-spar,  assisted  by  as  many  of  the  crew 
as  can  take  hold. 

No.  Y  draws  the  loop-bolt. 

The  Stroke  Oarsmen  run  the  field-carriage  forward,  the  Quarter  Gunner 
guiding  it  on  the  track  by  the  trail. 

III.  "SHIFT  THE  HOWITZER!" 

84,  Nos.  1  and  2  clear  the  elevator ;  heave  up  the  breech  of  the  gun  by 
the  spar;  Nos.  5  arid  6  back  the  bed  on  the  slide;  run  the  field-carriage  a 
little  forward,  so  that  its  lugs  come  under  the  loop  of  the  howitzer ;  lower 
the  piece  ;  put  in  the  loop-bolt  and  elevator;  hook  on  the  drag-rope  and  ship 
the  trail-handspike  in  its  socket. 


18  EXERCISE   AND   MANOEUVRE 

IV.  "LAND!" 

35*  Nos.  5,  6,  7,  and  8  now  jump  out  of  the  boat,  and,  with  Nos.  3  and  4, 
divide  to  each  skid  ;  not  standing  between  them,  but  keeping  outside  of 
them.  The  Stroke  Oarsmen  wheel  the  piece  up  to  the  gunwale  by  the 
spokes,  the  Quarter  Gunner  guiding  the  trail  by  the  trail-handspike,  and 
the  rest  of  the  crew  take  hold  of  the  drag-rope  to  ease  the  gun  down  from 
the  bow,  the  Quarter  Gunner  still  guiding  it  down  the  skids. 

When  down  off  the  skids  and  on  the  bottom,  the  drag-rope  is  hooked 
around  the  axle,  and  the  howitzer  run  up  on  the  beach. 

The  Captain  of  the  howitzer  superintends  and  assists  whenever  it  may 
be  necessary. 

The  sponges  and  rammers  are  now  to  be  attached  in  their  places  on  the 
trail. 

The  transport! ng-boxes  will  also  be  filled. 


EMBARKATION  OF   THE  HOWITZER. 

36,  When  the  howitzer  is  to  be  embarked,  the  transporting-boxes  should 
be  taken  off  and  put  in  the  boat  separately. 

The  men  unsling  the  ammunition-pouches,  and  pass  them  into  the  boat, 
which  is  to  be  brought  to  a  convenient  distance  from  the  beach,  and  the 
skids  laid  and  secured. 

The  field-carriage  is  then  pointed  with  the  trail  towards  the  boat,  and 
drawn  down  to  the  skids,  with  a  wheel  resting  on  each. 

Nos.  3,  4,  5,  6,  7,  and  8  divide  at  the  wheels,  and  take  hold  of  the 
spokes,  so  as  to  assist  the  carriage  up.  No.  14  ships  the  trail-handspike 
and  tends  it  with  No.  15.  The  rest  of  the  men  get  into  the  boat  and  take 
hold  of  the  drag-rope.  At  the  word  "  HEAVE  !"  the  men  at  the  wheels  bear 
the  carriage  up  on  the  skids,  those  in  the  boat  haul  on  the  drag-rope,  and 
the  two  at  the  trail  bear  it  up,  so  that  the  Quarter  Gunner,  who  stands^at 
the  bow,  can  get  hold  of  the  trail-handspike  and  guide  the  carriage  fairly. 

When  the  howitzer  is  in  the  boat,  the  skids  are  unhooked  and  put  in  the 
boat  by  Nos.  3,  4,  5,  and  6. 

The  howitzer  may  now  be  shifted  to  the  boat-carriage,  by  reversing  the 
process  already  described  in  orders  Nos.  1,  2,  and  3,  for  shifting  to  the  field- 
carriage. 


CREW  AT    THEIR    STATIONS 

FOR     ACTION 


CREW    AT    THE     DRAG     ROPE 


O 


TI-PW  to  tlu>  119     T    5     3     1    H 
246    8    10  12 

Crew  to  the  Th-ont . 


D  Van 


pr. 


OF   BOAT-HOWITZEKS. 


19 


37.    EXERCISE  WITH  HOWITZER  ON  FIELD-CARRIAGE. 

GUN'S  CREW. 


STATIONS. 
Quarter  Gunner. 

No.  1.  Captain,  rear  of  breech,  to  the 
right  (or  left,  depending  on  the 
position  of  lock  and  sight). 

2.  Rear  of  breech,  to  the  left. 

3.  Right  side  of  muzzle. 

4.  Left  side  of  muzzle. 

5.  Rear   and    outside  of  right 

wheel. 

6.  Rear    and    outside    of    left 

wheel. 

7.  Five    yards    rear    of    right 

wheel. 


8.  Five     yards 

wheel. 

9.  With  No.  7. 
10.  With  No.  8. 


rear    of    left 


DUTY. 

Charge    of    ammunition    and    spare 

equipments. 
Captain    of  piece — points  and    fires 

the  howitzer,  superintends  orders, 

and  gives  orders  in  absence  of  an 

Officer. 

Closes  the  vent,  puts  in  primer. 
Sponges  and  rams  home. 
Receives  and  enters  ammunition. 
Assists  at  right  wheel. 

Passes  ammunition,  assists  at  left 
wheel. 

Assists  at  right  wheel,  attends 
bolt  of  trail-wheel  and  trail-hand 
spike. 

Passes  ammunition,  assists  at  left 
wheel. 

Assists  at  right  wheel. 

Assists  at  left  wheel. 


(Preparatory  Order) — "MAN  THE  HOWITZER!" 

38.  The  men  go  to  their  stations  as  above  designated,  the  Captain  of  the 
howitzer  with  his  haversack,  previously  supplied,  and  all  the  men,  except 
Nos.  1  and  3,  with  one  round  in  a  pouch. 

No.  3  takes  the  sponge  and  rammer. 

No.  6  unbolts  trail-wheel,  and  ships  handspike  in  its  socket  of  trail. 

The  transporting-boxes,  if  there  be  any  with  the  howitzer,  are  to  be  de 
posited  about  twenty-five  yards  in  its  rear,  in  charge  of  Quarter  Gunner. 

The  drag-rope  is  deposited  with  the  ammunition-boxes. 


I.  "SPONGE!" 

39.  No.  3  enters  the  sponge,  and,  pressing  it  firmly  to  the  bottom,  turns 
it  round  and  withdraws  it.     No.  2  serves  the  vent. 


20  EXEECISE   AND   MANCEUVKE 

Quarter  Gunner  takes  a  round  from  the  ammunition-box,  or  from  the 
pouch  or  passing-box  of  one  of  the  men;  and,  if  shell  or  shrapnel  be  used, 
holds  it  for  the  Officer  in  command  of  the  piece  to  adjust  the  fuze. 

II.  "LOAD!" 

40.  The  charge  is  to  be  passed  along  by  the  Quarter  Gunner  to  No.  8, 
and  by  No.  8  to  No.  6,  and  by  No.  6  to  No.  4,  who  enters   it  into  the 
muzzle. 

No.  3  pushes  home  to  the  mark  on  rammer-handle. 

No.  2  puts  in  primer,  and  covers  it  with  his  hand  until  Nos.  3  and  4 
have  withdrawn  to  their  stations  outside  the  wheels. 

III.  "  POINT  I" 

41.  Officer  of  gun  puts  up  the  sight,  as  directed  by  Officer  in  command. 
The  Captain  of  the  gun  gives  the  piece  the  proper  elevation  with  the 

screw,  and  causes  No.  7  to  train  the  gun  with  the  trail-handspike  to  the 
desired  direction.  He  then  withdraws  as  far  as  the  lock-lanyard  permits, 
standing  on  the  quarter  of  the  breech,  and  outside  of  the  wheel. 

No.  2  stands  outside  of  the  left  wheel.  Nos.  3  and  4  fall  back,  and 
the  remainder  of  the  gun's  crew  take  the  stations  first  assigned  them. 

IY.  "FIRE!" 

42.  The  Captain  of  the  howitzer  instantly  draws  the  lanyard  at  the  word. 
No.  2  closes  the  vent. 

Nos.  4,  6,  and  8  go  to  the  left  wheel ;  5,  7,  and  9  to  the  right  wheel, 
taking  hold  of  the  spokes,  ready  to  wheel  the  carriage  forward,  as  may  be 
directed  by  the  Officer  in  command. 

(Concluding  Order) — "  SECURE  THE  HOWITZER  !" 

43.  The  Quarter  Gunner  secures  the  transporting-boxes,  and  gets  ready 
the  lashing. 

The  Captain  of  the  howitzer  coils  the  lanyard  around  the  lock. 

No.  7  bolts  the  trail-wheel. 

No.  3  may  carry  the  sponge  in  his  hand  if  the  fire  is  merely  sus 
pended. 

No.  7  may  also  carry  the  trail-handspike. 

Nos.  8  and  9  hook  on  the  drag-rope,  and  lead  its  parts  fair  for  taking 
hold. 

Wheel  the  piece  to  the  ammunition-boxes,  and  place  them  on  the  axle. 

The  piece  is  now  ready  for  any  change  of  position. 


OF   BOAT-HOWITZERS.  21 


REMARKS    ON    THE    USE    OF    NAVAL    LIGHT   ARTILLERY- 

44.  The  facility  with  which  the  Naval  Howitzers  are  handled  is  apt  to 
cause  a  misconception  of  the   purposes  for  which  Naval  Light   Artillery 
should  ordinarily  be  used  on  shore ;  which  are,  to  be  landed  from  boats 
in  such  numbers  as  may  be  required,  or  admitted  by  circumstances,  sup 
ported  by  the  seamen  and  marines  of  a  squadron,  and  not  to  be  assembled 
as  a  battery,  to  replace,  or  be  substituted  for,  regular  field-artillery. 

45.  The  force  landed  should  be  handled  as  light  infantry,  for  which  the  in 
dividuality  of  sailor-life  so  well  fits  the  men  ;  while  the  character  of  the  gun, 
and   the   usually  broken  nature  9f  the  shore-line   renders  this  formation 
necessary. 

46.  Open  order  in  approach,  in  landing,  in  motion,  and  in  action,  is  there 
fore  advisable;  because  a  compact  formation  requires  too  much  attention  to 
position,  distances,  and  alignments  in  any  of  them,  with  more  perfect  drill 
than  can  well  be  obtained ;  and  which,  under  fire,  exposes  too  much  of  a 
mark  to  every  shot  fired. 

47.  The  evolutions  in  the  field  should  constitute  but  a  small  part  of  the 
general  system  of   drill,  either  with  a  single  howitzer  or  a    battery,  and 
should  be  assimilated  to  those  of   light  infantry, — that  is,  the    most  ex 
tended  order  that  the  ground  admits  of, — never  massing  the  guns  in  close 
order,   but  habituating  the   seamen  to  open   out   with  them  in   skirmish 
ing  order,  keeping  on  their  flanks,  never  in  their  rear,  using  every  cover 
of  ground,  trees,  or,  if  time  will  admit,  throwing  up  some  earth  as  a  pro 
tection  against  riflemen  or  the  wide-spread  fire  of  shrapnel, — while   at  the 
same  time  the  fire  is  concentrated  to  prevent  attack  on  the  pieces  in  detail, 
or  is  dispersed,  as  may  be  required. 

48.  Such  a  drill  will  best  develop  the  scope  and  efficiency  of  the  gun  as  a 
naval  arm,  and  will  render  most  effective  the  peculiar  advantages  of  its  light 
ness  and  mobility  in  rapid  movements. 

49.  Evolutions  in  action,  or  preparatory  thereto,  should  always  be  per 
formed  with  the  ammunition  in  the  pouches;  it  being  a  common  error  in  the 
service  to  use  the  ammunition-boxes  at   such  times,  when    they  are    only 
designed  for  service  out  of  action. 

50.  If  liable  to  be  attacked,  all  the  ground  within  musket  range,  especially 
if  it  is  broken  by  ravines,  should  be  reconnoitred,  particularly  on  the  flanks  ; 
and,  if  possible,   all  the   approaches  by  which  the  enemy,  and  particularly 
cavalry  can  approach,  should  be  obstructed  ;  and  all  obstacles  to  a  retreat  or 
change  of  position  removed. 

51*  Although  commanding  positions  are  to  be  preferred,  the  top  of  a  hill 


22  EXERCISE   AND   MANOEUVRE 

should  not  be  chosen  where  the  men  and  pieces  are  relieved  against  the 
sky,  forming  a  much  better  mark. 

52.  Shell  and  Shrapnel  produce  a  greater  moral  effect  than  grape  or 
canister,  and  in  general  a  greater  real  injury,  as  the  latter  are  generally  fired 
at  too  great  distances. 


NOTES  ON  THE  USE  OF  BOAT-HOWITZERS. 

53.  N.  B. — Before   equipping  boats   with  howitzers,   notice  attentively 
the  Hints  for  General  Service,  commencing  at  page  146,  Boat  Armament 
of  the  U.  S.  Navy,  and  Suggestions  for  Landing,  of  that  system,  which 
relate  more  especially  to  the  condition  and  management  of  boat-guns. 

54.  Too  much  care  cannot  be  taken  to  be  fully  provided,  and  to  have 
each   detail  in  good   condition ;  for,  after  the  boat  has  left  the  ship,  it  may 
be  impossible  to  compensate  for  failure  in  some  seemingly  trivial  article. 

55.  The  chief  purposes  of  naval  light  artillery  are  : 

1.  To  attack  small  vessels  that  are  lightly  armed,  and  furnish  but  slight 
protection  to  the  crews. 

2.  To  contend  with  other  armed  boats. 

3.  To  cover  the  landing  of  troops. 

56.  The  landing  of  seamen  is  rather  a  remote  contingency  in  the  naval 
service,  and  should  never  be  resorted  to  when  opposed  by  good  infantry,  or 
when  the  object  to  be  attained  would  take  the  seamen  too    far   from   their 
boats,  which  should  be  the  base  of  operations. 

57.  BOAT-GUNS. — No  tackles  are  required  to  run  out  12-pdrs. ;  but  24- 
pdrs.  may  possibly  require  them. 

58.  The  hole  in  the  cascabel  for  reeving  a  breeching  has  been  purposely 
omitted  in  howitzers,  as  hitherto  the  use  of  a  breeching  has  not  been  found 
necessary.     Should  one  be  required,  a  thimble  may  be  fitted  to  the  neck  of 
the  knob  to  serve  in  place  of  this  hole. 

With  a  breeching,  the  piece  may  be  fired  as  if  on  an  ordinary  carriage. 

59.  The  recoil  is  controlled  by  compressing  the  slide  between  the  bed 
and  the  lower  plate.     It  is  necessary,  however,  that  the  surfaces  of  the 
carriage  in  contact  should  be  plane.     If  they  are  not  so,  dismount  the  gun 
and  examine  them,  and  where  the  wood  is  worn  smooth,  remove  it  in  the 
slightest  manner,  and  correct  the  surfaces  generally.    In  making  the  surface 
plane,  it  is  by  no  means  necessary  that  it  should  be  rendered  smooth.     It 
ought  to  be  as  little  so  as  possible  for  the  present  purpose. 

60.  FIELD-CARRIAGE. — In  order  to  moderate  the  recoil  on  smooth  ground, 


IMPROVED         SHRAPNEL 


SECTION        OF       12      P  D  R.       SHRAPNEL 
\\~illilioniiaiin    Ttixc     ;nul    l?iUiii{>    ol'    Sulpluii-. 
lull      Scale 


OF   BOAT-HOWITZERS.  23 


take  out  the  axle  or  pin  of  the  trail-wheel  and  turn  the  wheel  up  on  the 
trail. 

For  using  the  howitzer  on  shore,  two  transport}  ng-boxes  are  supplied, 
placed  on  a  support  and  lashed  to  the  axle  of  the  field-carriage.  When 
more  than  a  single  piece  is  landed,  it  may  be  found  convenient  to  secure  the 
trail  of  one  field-carriage  to  the  axle  of  another,  and  then,  by  means  of  pieces 
of  stuff,  or  boat's  spars,  secured  from  axle  to  axle,  to  place  the  ammunition- 
boxes,  provisions,  and  pouches  upon  them. 

61,  Shrapnel  may  be  effectively  used  where  the  dispersion  of  common 
canister  becomes  too  great  and  its  effects  feeble.      It  takes  the  place   of 
common  shell,  to  a  great  extent,  when  uncovered  masses  of  men  are  in 
view,  and  is  designed  to  burst  in  front  of  troops,  at  just  such  a  distance  and 
height  as  to  disperse  the  balls  among  them. 

62,  Similar  terms  are  used  in  marking  the  sight  and  the  fuze.     Thus, 
if  the  fuze  be  adjusted  to  2  seconds,  and  the  piece  elevated  by  the  sight 
raised  to  the  line  on  it  marked  2  seconds,  then  the  shrapnel  will  burst  about 
500  yards  from  the  piece,  and  spread  its  balls  from  that  point  to  a  con 
siderable  distance  further — effectively  at  least  150  yards. 

The  adjustment  of  the  fuze  to  the  distance  and  the  altitude  of  explosion 
arc  regulated  to  the  elevation  ;  and,  therefore,  the  three  conditions  to  good 
effect  may  be  said  to  depend  mainly  on  a  correct  knowledge  of  distance. 

63,  The  12-pdr.  shrapnel  contains  80  musket-balls,  and  if  its  explosion 
occurs  at  one  hundred  or  one  hundred  and  twenty  yards  in  front  of  and 
fifteen  to  twenty  yards  above  the  object,  one-seventh  of  the  number  of  balls 
may  be  relied  on  to  take  effect  upon  an  object  20  by  10  feet  in  size. 

64,  Shells  may  be  advantageously  substituted  for  shrapnel  when    the 
hostile  force  is  sheltered,  especially  by  such  quarters  as  small  craft  or  mer 
chantmen  afford,  or  when  material  of  any  kind  is  the  object  of  the  fire. 

65,  At  two  hundred  yards  canister,  only,  is  required. 

In  case  of  a  want  of  canister,  the  shrapnel  or  common  shell  furnishes  an 
excellent  substitute  by  cutting  into  the  magazine  of  the  Bormann  fuze,  which 
will  cause  it  to  explode  at  the  muzzle. 

66,  When  provided  with  the  Bormann  fuze,  the  shrapnel,  or  shell,  as 
issued,  is  complete.     The  upper  surface  of  this  fuze  is  graduated  into  seconds 
and  fourths  of  seconds  ;  and  it  is  only  necessary  to  lay  bare  the  composition 
contained  in  the  fuze,  by  the  cutting-tool,  to  prepare   the   projectile    for 
instant  use.     In  this  respect  the  Bormann  fuze  has  an  advantage  over  the 
ordinary  fuze.     The  length  of  the  fuzes  limits  the  distance  within  which  the 
fire  of  these  guns  is  considered  as  effective. 

67,  The  introduction  of  the  12-pounder  rifled  howitzer  has  greatly  ex 
tended  the  accuracy  and  effective  range  of  the  boat  and  field  artillery. 

n 


24:  EXERCISE   AND   MANCEUVBE 

Solid  shot  and  shell  have  sufficient  penetration  to  be  effective  against 
ordinary  wooden  vessels  at  any  distance  which  the  elevation  allowed  by  the 
respective  carriages  will  reach.  See  TABLE  OF  RANGES. 

The  shrapnel  has  sufficient  velocity  at  2,000  yards  to  disable  men  and 
horses. 

Hitherto  no   certain  or  efficient  time-fuze  has  been  adopted  for  rifled 

howitzers. 

There  are  objections  to  firing  grape  and  canister  from  rifled  guns,  as  the 
grooves  are  injured  thereby,  and  the  rotary  and  irregular  motion  given  to 
the  mass  diminishes  its  effect.  If  used,  the  balls  should  be  of  lead  or  zinc. 

68,  Fixed  ammunition  is  preferable,  on  the  score  of  greater  convenience, 
and  of  avoiding  difficulties. 


For  MANOEUVRES  OF  BOATS  ARMED  FOR  SERVICE,  sec  "  Naval  Howitzers 
Afloat ;"  by  Commander  Foxhall  A.  Parker,  U.  S.  N. 


LANDING  SEAMEN,    MARINES,   AND   HOWITZERS.  25 


LANDING  SEAMEN,  MAKINES,  AND  HOWITZEES 

FOR  EXERCISE  OR  SERVICE  ON  SHORE. 

69.  As  the  efficiency  of  seamen  when  landed  in  any  considerable  number 
depends  most  materially  upon  a  proper  system  of  organization  and  training 
previous  to  their  being  landed,  and  without  which  they  are  inefficient,  the 
following  system  is  recommended  : 

70.  The  small-arm  men  are  to  be  formed  into  companies  of  80  men,  with 
four  petty  officers.    Each  company  to  be  commanded  by  a  Lieutenant,  with 
two  other  officers.     The  company  to  be  subdivided  into  two  platoons,  and 
each  platoon  into  two  sections,  and  to  be  exercised  in  such  movements  as 
are  absolutely  necessary  to  manoeuvre  as  a  company  and  in  battalion,  by 
the  officers  who  are  to  command  them. 

71.  Small  vessels  should  furnish  a  platoon  of  40  or  section  of  20  men, 
that  the  companies  formed  by  their  aggregation  may  be  of  equal  strength. 

72.  The  companies  when  landed    are  to  fall  in,  and  number  from    the 
right  according  to  the  seniority  of  the  Captains  of  their  respective  ships, 
so  that  they  at  once  will  fall  into  their  places  according  to  their  number 
when  landed. 

73.  Each  ship  landing  two  companies  is  to  be  prepared  to  land  with  the 
small-arm  men  six  Pioneers — 2  with  a  saw  and  axe  each,  2  with  a  pickaxe 
and  spade  each,  2   with  a  small  crov/bar  and  sledge-hammer,   or  such  in 
trenching  or  other  tools  as  the  nature  of  the  expedition  may  require  ;  the 
tools  to  be  slung  on  the  men's  backs ;  smaller  detachments  a  proportionate 
number. 

74.  The  ship's  bugler,  if  she  have  one,  or  drummer,  will  be  sent  with  the 
men.      He  is  to  be  able  to  sound  the  "Assembly,"  "Retreat,"  "Close," 
"Extend,"  "Commence    Firing,"  and   "Cease  Firing,"  which  sounds  the 
men  are  to  be  accustomed  to  on  board  ship. 

75.  If  the  men  are  likely  to  be  on  shore  during  the  night,  they  should 
have  a  haversack  and  blanket  slung  across  their  shoulders. 

76.  As  muskets  are  apt  to  miss  fire  the  first  time  if  not  properly  clean, 
the  greatest  precaution  is  to  be  taken  to  see  that  the  nipple  is  perfectly  clear 
before  loading ;  first,  by  blowing  down  the  barrel  and  placing   the  finder 
before  the  nipple,  to  feel  that  the  air  passes  through  it,  and    afterwards 
snapping  a  cap  off  to  dry  up  any  oil  or  moisture  that  may  be  in  the  barrel. 
To  avoid  accidents,  it  is  better  not  to  cap  the  muskets  until  after  landing. 


26  LANDING   SEAMEN,    MARINES,    AND   HOWITZERS. 

77*  When  field-pieces  are  landed,  the  guns  shall  be  numbered  from  the 
right  in  the  same  manner  as  a  company. 

78.  One  or  more  armorers  should  be  sent  with  each  landing  party  with 
cleaning-rods,  screw-drivers,  and  spare  nipples. 

79*  The  boats  should  be  formed  in  divisions,  according  to  the  seniority 
of  the  Captains  of  their  respective  ships — or  of  the  Commanding  Officers  of 
the  divisions — numbering  from  the  right.  The  seamen  and  marines,  having 
been  told  off  in  companies  previous  to  leaving  their  ships,  on  landing  they 
will  form  immediately  in  the  same  order. 

80.  The  howitzers  being  mounted  as  boat's  guns  and  prepared  for  land 
ing,  are  brought  at  once  into  action,  or  remain  in  the  boats,  according  to 
circumstances. 

81.  Each    division    of  boats   should   have    a   distinguishing   flasx;    and 
scaling-ladders,  intrenching  tools,  and  other  implements,  should  be  carried 
by  designated  boats. 

82.  The  boats  will  always  land  a  boat's  length  apart.     Before  leaving  the 
ship  four  boat-keepers  should  be  appointed  to  each  boat  carrying  a  howitzer, 
and  two  for  the  others,  with  an  officer  in  charge  of  each  division  of  boats, 
who  are  on  no  account  to  leave  them.     Should  there  be  a  probability  of 
the  landing  party  being  attacked  on  a  re-embarkation,  the  boats  should  be 
hauled  off  to  their  anchors,  with  a  long  scope  of  cable,  having  a  stern-line 
to  the  beach,  and  a  man  in  the  boat  to  veer  in,  that  the  troops  may  be 
readily  embarked.     The  officer  left  in  charge  of  the  boats  should  be  careful 
to  avoid    being   surprised ;     and,  if  circumstances   admit,  strengthen   his 
position  by  cutting  down  trees  and  throwing  up  small  breastworks  a  short 
distance  in  front. 

83,  A  fast-pulling  boat  with  Medical  Officers  will  attend  in  rear  of  the 
line,  designated  by  a  yellow  flag. 

84,  Should  the  distance  from  the  point  of  landing  be  considerable,  the 
boats  of  each  division,  in  tow  of  each  other,  lightest  boats  leading,  will  fall 
in — the  leading  boat  of  each  division  abreast  (Art.  72),  leaving  space  for  the 
whole   line  to  form  abreast  when  ordered.     On  approaching  the  beach  the 
tow-ropes  should  be  cast  off,  and  the  launches  with  howitzers  dress  up  in 
line  ready  to  open  fire,  if  necessary,  to  clear  the  landing.     The  officer   in 
command  will  commence  firing  from  the  howitzers  when  he  thinks  fit;  but 
no  musketry  is  to  be  fired  without  special  orders. 

85,  When  the  Commanding  Officer  perceives  the  beach  to  be  clear,  or 
when  he  considers  it  proper,  he  will  order  "  Cease  firing !"  and  direct  the 
boats  with  skirmishers  and  light  howitzers  to  pull  in  and  land  as  quickly  as 
possible.     On  landing  they  will  immediately  extend,  advance,  and  seize  the 


FOR   EXERCISE   OR  SERVICE   ON   SHORE.  27 

first  cover  near  the  beach,  if  there  be  any,  but  will  not  open  fire  till  the 
Officer  commanding  them  sounds  "  Commence  firing."  The  main  body  then 
pull  steadily  in  and  land,  forming  line  in  rear  of  the  covering  party.  The 
howitzers  form  on  the  flanks  of  their  divisions,  or  as  ordered.  Pioneers  and 
scaling-ladders  as  ordered.  The  main  body  being  formed,  will  advance  in 
line  or  column,  according  to  circumstances,  preceded  by  the  skirmishers 
firing,  if  necessary.  When  firing  in  close  order  the  front  rank  should  fire 
kneeling,  as,  owing  to  the  shortness  of  muskets,  accidents  frequently  occur. 
Under  certain  circumstances,  as  advancing  on  an  open  beach,  the  boats 
might  be  employed  on  the  flanks  to  cover  the  advance  or  retreat. 

86.  Should  the  boats  be  employed  for  the  disembarkation  of  troops,  the 
same  arrangement  should  be  made.     It  will  then  be  desirable  that  every 
boat  should  carry  a  flag  similar  to  that  of  the  Commanding  Officer  of  its 
division ;  and,  when  in  large  numbers,  the  boats  should  also    be    painted 
according  to  the  colors  of  the  flags,  that  the  troops  may  readily  know  their 
own  boats. 

87.  The  re-embarkation  should  be  conducted  on  similar  principles  to  the 
disembarkation — the  skirmishers  and  light  howitzers  extending  in  rear  of 
the  line,  which  will  then  pass  through  the  intervals,  forming  again,  if  neces 
sary,  to  support  the  skirmishers,  who  will  retire  firing,  and  re-form  in  rear  of 
the  line.     The  main  body  will  then  embark,  followed  by  the  covering  party 
under  cover  of  the  boats'  guns. 

88.  When  landing  in  a  heavy  surf,  the  ammunition  should  be  put  m  one 
or  more  small  powder-tanks,  with  the  lids  well  screwed  down. 


PART     III. 


ORDNANCE 


AND 


ORDNANCE    STORES. 


PART  III. 


CHAPTER   I. 

« 

ORDNANCE  AND  ORDNANCE  STORES. 

1,  ALL  articles  of  Ordnance  and  Ordnance  Stores,  when  duly  delivered  at 
any  Navy  Yard,  are  to  be  borne  on  the  books  of  the  Inspector  of  Ordnance, 
and  duly  accounted  for,  according  to  such  regulations  as  may,  from  time  to 
time,  be  established  by  proper  authority. 

2.  He  will  make  monthly  estimates  and  requisitions  for  all  materials  and 
articles  which  may  be  required  by  the  master  workmen  in  the  Ordnance 
Department,  and  which  he  may  deem  necessary  ;  which  requisitions  are  to 
be  forwarded  to  the  Chief  of  the  Bureau  for  his  approval. 

No  articles  are  to  be  purchased  without  previous  requisitions,  nor  any  to 
be  used  until  duly  inspected,  approved,  and  receipted  for. 

Before  reception,  every  article  shall  be  carefully  examined  by  the  master^ 
workman  in  whose  department  it  is  required,  and  such  other  person  as  the^ 
Inspector  shall  appoint,  and  compared  with  samples,  to  see  that  it  con 
forms  to  the  standard,  and  is,  in  quantity  and  quality,  as  called  for  by  the 
requisition  or  order  of  the  Bureau  for  its  delivery. 

He  will  keep  on  hand  standard  Patterns  and  Drawings,  approved  by  the 
Bureau  of  Ordnance,  to  which  all  articles  of  manufacture  or  issue  shall 
strictly  conform  ;  notifying  the  Bureau  of  any  discrepancies  therefrom  in 
articles  received  from  other  Yards,  that  unauthorized  variations  may  be 
checked  and  the  manufactures  of  each  Yard  be  identical. 

3*  The  Inspectors  of  Ordnance  at  all  Navy  Yards  shall  have  the  imme 
diate  custody  of  all  articles  appertaining  to  ordnance,  and  they  shall  be  kept 
in  suitable  places,  separate  from  the  other  articles  in  the  Yard. 

And  they  will  promptly  inform  the  Bureau  of  all  orders  received  from 
Senior  Officers,  which  may  in  the  least  affect  the  execution  of  the  instruc 
tions  given  by  the  Bureau  in  relation  to  their  duties. 

4.  Inspectors  of  Ordnance  having  charge  of  the  articles  above  mentioned 
are,  under  the  direction  of  the  Commandant  of  the  Yard,  to  be  responsible 
for  their  being  carefully  attended  to,  and  preserved  from  injury. 


4  ORDNANCE   AND   ORDNANCE   STORES. 

5.  Whenever  any  of  them  shall  require  repairs,  other  than  those 
which  can  be  made  in  the  ordnance  workshops,  the  Inspector  will  ap 
ply  to  the  Commandant  of  the  Yard,  or  to  the  Bureau  through  him,  for 
the  necessary  means  to  keep  all  articles  in  his  charge  in  order  and  ready 
for  service. 

6*  He  shall  require  from  master  workmen  employed  on  ordnance  work 
reports  in  the  required  form  (sec  blank  forms)  of  the  expenditure  of  materials 
and  labor  upon  each  and  every  object  under  their  immediate  superintend 
ence,  at  which  time  they  will  make  a  return  of  all  unexpended  material  on 
hand.  They  will  also  be  responsible  for  all  waste  and  improper  use  of 
material  by  those  under  their  general  superintendence. 

7.  The  Inspector  of  Ordnance  shall  have  authority  over  all  master  and 
other  workmen  employed  on  ordnance  work,  and  direct  all  its  details. 

He  will  examine  and  certify  to  the  correctness  of  all  bills  rendered  for 
materials,  supplies,  or  labor  in  the  Ordnance  Department,  and  examine  and 
certify  to  the  correctness  of  the  pay-roll  of  all  persons  employed  on  ordnance 
work. 

8.  No  Inspecting  Officer  or  person  employed  by  the  Bureau  is  to  show 
to,  or  leave  in  the  way  of  persons  not  authorized  by  the  Bureau,  any  draw 
ing,  descriptions,  or  dimensions  of  guns  under  contract,  nor  to  permit  the 
examination  by  such  persons  of  the  guns  themselves. 

9.  The  resident  and  other  Inspectors  are  to  inform  the  contractors  of  this 
strict  requirement  on  the  part  of  the  Bureau,  and  to  request  them  to  cause 
it  to  be  rigidly  enforced  by  all  persons  under  their  control. 

10.  It  is  most  positively  forbidden  to  communicate  any  information  what 
ever  in  relation  to  ordnance   matters',  or  to  show  or  describe  ordnance  work, 
of  any  description,  to  any  person  not  in  the  employ  of  the  government,  un 
less  by  superior  authority. 

Inspectors  are  also  directed  not  to  hold  correspondence  in  writing  with 
manufacturers,  contractors,  or  other  parties  in  relation  to  ordnance  sup 
plies,  unless  specially  directed  by  the  Bureau. 

Officers  on  Ordnance  duty  will  give  no  official  opinion,  to  Inventors  or 
others,  upon  the  merits  of  any  invention  appertaining  to  Ordnance,  which 
may  be  submitted  to  them  officially  or  unofficially  for  examination,  unless 
by  special  direction  of  the  Bureau  of  Ordnance. 

All  such  opinions  will  be  forwarded  to  the  Bureau,  to  whom  parties  must 
be  referred  for  information. 

11.  The  Inspectors  of  Ordnance  at  the  several  Yards  and  stations  are 
required  to  enjoin  upon  all  their  employes   the  strictest  secrecy  in  relation  to 
every  thing  connected  with  their  duties.     No  information  whatever  is  to  be 


DUTIES   OF   ORDNANCE    OFFICERS  AND   OTHERS. 


given  to  any  one  in  relation  to  the  prices  of  articles,  the  details  of  work,  or 
the  condition  of  ordnance  or  ordnance  supplies. 

Any  breach  of  this  order  is  to  be  followed  by  prompt  dismissal  from 
employment. 

12,  Whenever  any  ordnance  stores  shall  be  furnished  to  vessels,  or  for 
any  other  purpose,  the  Ordnance  Officer  shall  take  proper  receipts  for  them 
from  the  officer  to  whom  they  are  delivered.     These  receipts  shall  be  signed 
at  the  Ordnance  office,  and  the  commander  is  required  to  ascertain  before 
sailing  if  the  proper  officers  have  signed  all  receipts  and  vouchers. 

13,  The  Ordnance  Officer  will  deliver  with  them  an  Invoice  of  the  num 
ber  and  cost  of  such  stores,  retaining  a  receipted  duplicate,  approved  by  the 
commander,  to  be  forwarded  to  the  Bureau  of  Ordnance. 

One  Ledger,  one  Invoice,  and  twenty  blanks  for  Quarterly  Returns  to  the 
Bureau  of  Ordnance,  are  to  be  furnished  each  vessel  fitted  for  sea. 

If  any  articles  are  purchased  abroad,  or  obtained  from  other  stations  after 
the  vessel  is  regularly  fitted  for  sea,  they  should  be  duly  entered  in  the 
Ledger,  and  a  note  made  therein  stating  when,  and  from  what  source  re 
ceived  ;  and,  if  practicable,  their  number  and  cost  should  be  inserted  in  the 
Invoice  of  other  articles  supplied  the  vessel. 

14,  A  separate  list  shall  be  furnished  to  all  commanders  of  vessels  of  the 
ammunition  furnished,  which  list  is  to  be  returned  to  the  Ordnance  Officer 
of  the  Yard  to  which  the  vessel  shall  return,  with  any  additional  supplies 
which  she  may  receive  during  the  cruise  entered  on  it. 

15,  The  allowances  which  are  prescribed  for  the  different  classes  of  ves 
sels  in  the  Table  of  Allowances  are  not  to  be  exceeded,  except  by  the  express 
sanction  of  the  Chief  of  the  Bureau  of  Ordnance. 

16,  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  any  commander  of  a  vessel,  before  making  or 
approving  requisitions,  to   examine  the  allowance   table  arid  expenditure 
books,  to  see  that  the  amount  required,  together  with  that  on  hand,  does  not 
exceed  the  allowance,  and  that  the  articles  required  are  allowed.     If  these 
articles  are  not  allowed,  or  are  in  excess  of  the  allowance,  but  arc,  in  his 
opinion,  necessary  for  the  use  of  the  ship  under  his  command,  he  will  state 
on  the  requisition,  opposite  the  article,  "in  excess  of  allowance,". or,  "not 
allowed,"  and  the  reason  why  considered  necessary,  before  sending  it  to  the 
Commandant  of  the  Yard  or  Squadron  for  his  approval. 

In  case  he  shall  neglect  so  to  do,  the  Inspector  of  Ordnance  will  only  fur 
nish  the  allowance,  and  shall  return  the  requisition  for  correction,  calling  the 
attention  of  the  approving  officer  to  this  neglect. 

17,  All  Ordnance  Stores,  except  the  ammunition,  shall  be  delivered  to  the 
Gunner,  or  other  officer  appointed  to  receive  them,  at  the  ordnance  store 
houses,  the  Inspector  of  Ordnance  furnishing  him  with  the  means  of  trans- 


ORDNANCE  AND  ORDNANCE  STORES. 


portation,  and  men  for  stowing  them  in  their  appointed  places  on  board, 
when  the  crew  are  not  available  for  this  purpose. 

In  order  to  guard  against  the  loss  or  misdirection  of  Ordnance  Stores, 
which  has  frequently  been  found  to  occur  whilst  they  were  being  transferred 
from  the  Ordnance  Store-houses  to  vessels  going  into  commission,  or  in  the 
case  of  vessels  landing  their  stores  on  returning  from  a  cruise : 

The  Bureau  directs  that  whenever  Ordnance  Stores  of  any  kind  are  to  be 
received  from  or  delivered  on  board  of  a  vessel,  a  responsible  officer  be  present, 
whose  duty  it  shall  be  to  take  an  exact  account  of  them  and  see  them  safely 
delivered  at  their  destination,  indorsing  the  Receipts  and  Invoices  with  his 
name. 

For  any  loss  that  may  occur  in  the  performance  of  this  duty,  that  officer 
will  be  held  pecuniarily  responsible;  and  whenever  any  stores  are  found  to 
be  missing,  the  name  of  the  officer  who  superintended  their  removal  is  im 
mediately  to  be  forwarded  to  the  Bureau. 

The  Inspector  of  Ordnance  will  be  vigilant  in  seeing  this  order  strictly 
carried  out. 

18,  All  stores  landed  from  ships  will  be  received  at  the  Ordnance  Store 
houses,  when  all  responsibility  on  the  part  of  the  officer  delivering  them  shall 
cease,  and  a  survey  be  held,  as  soon  thereafter  as  practicable,  to  determine 
the  quantity  of  stores,  and  the  condition  in  which  they  are  delivered. — (See 
form  of  survey.) 

When  the  vessel  returns  to  a  yard  to  be  refitted  or  to  be  laid  up  at  the 
end  of  the  cruise,  her  Ledger  and  Invoice  are  to  be  handed  to  the  Ordnance 
Officer  of  the  yard  for  his  examination,  and  for  the  use  of  the  officers  who 
may  be  ordered  to  hold  a  survey  upon  the  Ordnance  Equipments  and 
Stores;  and  when  the  survey  is  completed,  both  Ledger  and  Invoice  are  to 
be  forwarded  to  the  Bureau  of  Ordnance  with  the  report  of  survey. 

19,  It  having  been  found  that  in  the  "  Reports  of  Survey"  made  at  the 
different  Navy  Yards  on  the  Ordnance  Stores  of  vessels  returning  from  sea, 
many  articles  are  put  down  as  "deficient  by  Returns"  without  these  defi 
ciencies  being  in  any  way  accounted  for,  the  Bureau  directs  that  the  Sur 
veying  Officers  shall  require  the  Gunner  (or  other  officer  having  charge  of 
the  Ordnance  Stores,  in  case  there  be  no  Gunner  on  board)  to  show  a  just 
cause  for  said  deficiencies ;  a  statement  of  which,  properly  signed,  is  to  be 
forwarded  to  the  Bureau  with  the  Report  of  Survey.     In  case  of  his  failure 
to  do  so,  he  will  be  held  responsible  for  the  loss,  and  the  value  of  the  defi 
cient  articles  checked  against  his  pay. 

Where  arms  or  other  articles  are  lost  or  destroyed  in  action,  the  fact  must 
be  properly  authenticated  by  the  signature  of  the  Commanding  or  Executive 
Officer. 

20,  Ordnance  Ledgers  of  all  vessels  coming  from  a  cruise  shall  be  signed 


DUTIES   OF   ORDNANCE   OFFICERS  AND   OTHERS.  7 

by  the  Gunner  or  Executive  Officer  and  the  officer  in  command  before  leaving 
the  Yard  or  station. 

Invoices  and  Receipts  must  invariably  be  given  and  taken  of  all  ordnance, 
ordnance  stores,  equipments,  and  small  arms,  when  transferred  from  the 
keeping  of  one  officer  to  another. 

And  whenever  any  article  of  ordnance  is  lost  or  mutilated,  the  fact  shall 
be  reported  to  the  Bureau,  with  all  the  circumstances  of  the  case,  and  the 
value  of  the  same  will  be  deducted  from  the  pay  of  the  person  having  it  in 
his  possession  at  the  time,  unless  sufficient  reason  for  a  contrary  course  should 
appear. 

21 .  It  shall  be  the  duty  of  the  Inspector  of  Ordnance  (or  of  the  officers 
who  inspect  a  ship  on  her  return  from  a  cruise)  to  report  to  the  Bureau  the 
condition  in  which  the  articles  under  the  charge  of  the  Gunner  may  be 
transferred,  that  his  care  and  attention  may  be  properly  known  and  appre 
ciated. 

22.  Officers  upon  Ordnance  duty  at  Navy  Yards  may  correspond  with  the 
Bureau  on  subjects  connected  with  Ordnance  duties,  forwarding  their  com 
munications  open,  to  the  Commandant  of  the  Yard  for  transmission. 

23.  The  dates  of  all  circulars,  orders,  telegrams,  or  letters  to  which  refer 
ence  is  made  in  corresponding  with  the  Bureau,  shall  be  distinctly  quoted. 

And  the  same  rule  is  to  be  observed  in  forwarding  triplicate  Bills,  Bills  of 
Lading,  and  Invoices,  the  date  of  the  order  or  orders  being  written  across 
the  face  in  red  ink ;  and  the  receipt  of  all  telegrams  must  be  immediately 
acknowledged. 

24.  The  Commandants  will,  in  forwarding  communications,  accompany 
them  with  such  remarks  or  recommendations  as  they  may  deem  proper,  and 
at  any  other  time  make  such  suggestions  as  they  may  consider  will  promote 
the  public  interest. 

25.  In  shipping  or  forwarding  stores  each  box  or  package  shall  be  num 
bered,  and  have  the  nature  of  its  contents  stencilled  or  marked  on  the  out 
side,  and  noted  on  the  Invoice.     The  Invoice  should  in  all  cases  of  shipment 
accompany  the  articles. 

All  stores  intended  for  shipment  to  squadrons,  shall  be  legibly  and  con 
spicuously  addressed  to  the  Commander-in-Chief  of  the  squadron,  and 
marked  for  that  squadron. 


ORDNANCE   AND   ORDNANCE   STORES. 


INSPECTION  AND  PBOOF  OF  NAVAL  GUNS. 

26.  All  cannon  for  the  navy,  cast  at  private  foundries,  will  be  fabricated 
in  strict  accordance  with  the  terms  of  the  contract  made  with  the  Bureau  of 
Ordnance,  and  subject  to  the  inspection  of  an  officer  detailed  to  supervise 
the  operations.  (See  "  Instructions  for  the  Inspection  arid  Proof  of  Cannon, 
1864,"  for  further  details.) 

27»  New  guns  are  to  be  closely  examined  and  measured,  inside  and  out, 
for  defects  of  metal  or  manufacture,  and  the  results  recorded  in  the  pre 
scribed  forms  by  the  Inspector  resident  at  the  foundry,  as  soon  after  being 
finished  as  possible,  if  he  has  not  already  done  so  in  the  various  stages  of 
manufacture,  which  is  preferable,  as  the  detection  of.  errors  which  pass  the 
limits  of  toleration  may  save  useless  subsequent  labor.  Internal  defects  of 
metal  will,  for  instance,  generally  be  betrayed  by  a  close  examination  of  the 
core-pieces.  As  rust  tends  to  conceal  defects,  this  examination  of  the  guns 
is  to  take  place  before  exposure  to  the  weather.  And  previously  to  the  final 
examination  and  proof  of  guns,  they  are  not  to  be  covered  with  paint, 
lacquer,  oil,  or  any  material  which  may  hide  defects  of  metal. 

If  it  is  ascertained  that  any  attempt  has  been  made  to  conceal  defects, 
the  gun  or  guns  so  treated  are  to  be  rejected  without  further  examination. 

As  the  water-proof,  which  is  of  great  importance  in  detecting  defects  of 
metal  not  otherwise  developed,  necessarily  succeeds  immediately  the  powder- 
proof,  and  can  be  effectively  applied  only  in  fine  weather,  and  when  the 
temperature  is  above  the  freezing-point,  final  inspections  are  to  be  made  at 
such  times  only. 

DESCRIPTIVE    LIST    OF    INSTRUMENTS   REQUIRED    AND    USED    IN   THE 
INSPECTION  AND  PROOF  OF  GUNS. 

28,  1st.  A  mirror  for  reflecting  the  sun's  rays  into  the  bores.  Two 
will  be  required  if  the  sun  be  in  the  rear  of  the  Inspector. 

2d.  A  lamp  attached  to  a  staff  for  examining  the  bores  when  the  sun  is 
obscured,  or  the  guns  are  under  cover. 

3d.  A  standard  cylinder  gauge.  This  is  a  hollow  cylinder  of  iron,  turned 
to  the  least  allowed  diameter  of  the  bore,  and  one  calibre  in  length.  It  has 
a  cross-head  at  each  end,  one  of  which  has  a  smooth  hole  through  its  axis 
to  fit  the  staff,  and  the  other  is  tapped  to  receive  the  screw  in  the  end 
of  it. 

4th.  A  measuring-staff  of  steel  or  iron,  in  joints  of  suitable  length, 
connected  together  by  screws.  Each  joint  is  provided  with  a  light  brass 


• 


— T -fd 


-T-h- 


INSPECTION  AND   PROOF  OF  GUNS. 


disk,  the  diameter  of  which  is  0.05  inches  less  than  that  of  the  bore. 
Through  the  centre  of  the  disk  there  is  a  hole  which  fits  upon  a  shoulder  at 
the  joint;  the  whole  is  so  arranged  that  when  the  joints  are  screwed  to 
gether  the  "disks  between  them  are  held  firmly  in  place,  while  the  length  of 
the  staff  is  not  affected  by  them.  A  steel  point  is  screwed  on  to  the  end. 
When  pushed  to  the  bottom  of  the  bore,  the  staff  coincides  very  nearly  with  its 
axis.  The  outer  joint  is  graduated  to  inches  and  tenths.  A  slide  is  made 
to  play  upon  it  with  a  vernier  scale,  graduated  to  hundredths  of  an  inch. 
On  the  inner  end  of  the  slide  a  branch  projects  at  a  right  angle,  sufficiently 
long  to  reach  across  the  muzzle  face,  and,  when  in  contact  with  it,  to  in 
dicate  the  precise  length  obtained  from  that  point  to  the  end  of  the  meas 
uring-point  on  the  other  end  of  the  staff.  A  half  disk  of  wood,  made  to 
fit  the  bore,  with  a  groove  for  the  staff  to  rest  in,  placed  just  inside  of  the 
muzzle,  is  useful  in  preventing  any  springing  of  the  staff. 

The  point  being  taken  off,  the  staff  can  be  used  with  the  cylinder  gauge, 
to  measure  the  distance  to  which  the  latter  descends.  But  as  the  gradu 
ation  is  intended  for  the  points,  care  must  be  taken  in  this  case  to  allow  for 
the  difference. 

5th.  A  chamber-gauge  for  verifying  the  shape  and  size  of  conical 
chambers. 

The  head  should  be  made  of  close-grained,  well-seasoned  wood,  and  of 
the  exact  dimensions  of  the  chamber.  Two  planes,  crossing  each  other  at  a 
right  angle,  coinciding  with  the  vertical  and  horizontal  central  sections, 
have  been  found  better  than  a  solid  block.  The  edges  should  be  bevelled. 
A  metal  socket  in  its  centre  connects  it  with  the  measuring-staff.  Being 
pushed  to  the  bottom  of  the  bore,  if  the  length  coincides  with  that  obtained 
by  the  point,  it  is  obvious  that  the  chamber  is  large  enough,  provided  the 
cylindrical  part  has  not  been  bored  too  deep,  in  which  case  a  shoulder 
would  be  found  at  the  junction.  The  edges  of  the  gauge  should  be  chalked 
before  it  is  inserted.  When  withdrawn,  if  the  chalk-marks  are  visible  all 
around  the  chamber,  it  is  evident  the  chamber  is  not  too  large.  AVith  slight 
modifications,  this  arrangement  may  be  applied  to  the  slope  of  cylindrical 
chambers,  and  to  the  curve  at  the  bottom  of  the  bore  of  any  guns.  Should 
the  inspection  of  guns  with  conical  chambers  or  slopes  take  place  at  the 
foundry,  an  examination  of  the  chamber  reamer  will  be  very  satisfactory. 
If  found  correct  in  size  and  shape,  the  impossibility  of  making  the  chamber 
too  large  will  be  apparent. 

6th.  A  star-gauge,  for  measuring  the  diameters  of  the  bores  and  of  cylin 
drical  chambers.  This  instrument  is  composed  of  the  staff,  the  handle,  and 
a  set  of  points  for  each  calibre. 

The  staff  is  a  brass  tube,  made  in  three  pieces,  for  convenience  of  stow 
age,  and  connected  together,  when  required,  by  screws.  Its  inner  end  ex 
pands  into  a  head,  in  which  are  placed  four  steel  sockets,  at  equal  distances 


10  ORDNANCE  AND  ORDNANCE   STORES. 


from  each  other,  which  receive  the  points.  Two  of  the  sockets  opposite  to 
each  other  are  secured  permanently.  The  two  others  are  movable.  A 
tapering  plate  or  wedge,  the  sides  of  which  are  cylindrical,  runs  through  a 
slit  in  the  head ;  an  aperture  in  the  inner  ends  of  the  movable  "socket  em 
braces  the  cylinder,  so  that  when  the  plate  is  moved  forward  or  backward, 
the  sockets  are  projected  or  withdrawn.  The  tapering  of  the  plate  has  a 
certain  known  proportion  to  its  length,  so  that  if  it  is  moved  in  either  direction 
a  given  distance,  a  proportional  movement  is  imparted  to  the  sockets,  and  to 
the  points  which  they  contain.  It  is  easy  to  see  how,  in  this  manner,  a 
movement  of  .10  in.  may  increase  or  diminish  the  distance  between  the 
points  .01  in.  Therefore  there  would  be  no  difficulty  in  estimating,  to  a 
considerable  degree  of  accuracy,  a  difference  of  .001  in.  between  the 
points.  In  general,  however,  the  distance  on  the  plate  required  to  move  the 
points  .01  in.  is  about  .06  in.  only. 

A  square  sliding  rod  is  connected  with  the  tapering  plate,  and  runs 
through  the  whole  length  of  the  tube,  projecting  some  inches  beyond  the 
outer  end.  This  rod  has  as  many  parts  as  there  are  joints  in  the  staff,  and, 
like  them,  connects  by  screws.  Each  section  of  the  rod  works  in  its  proper 
joint,  through  a  square  socket  at  each  end,  and  is  prevented  from  falling  out 
by  pins.  When  screwing  the  joints  together,  if  the  ends  of  the  rod  are 
pressed  up  to  each  other  they  become  connected  by  the  same  motion. 

The  staff  is  graduated  to  inches  and  quarters,  so  that  the  distance  of  the 
points  from  the  muzzle  of  the  gun  may  always  be  known.  A  centre  line, 
starting  from  the  centre  of  the  upper  socket,  is  marked  upon  the  staff 
throughout  its  length. 

The  handle  in  use  at  present  is  of  brass,  made  to  fit  over  the  outer  end  of 
the  staff,  and  to  connect  with  the  sliding  rod  by  a  screw,  having  a  large 
milled  head  at  the  outer  extremity  of  the  handle.  It  may  be  used  on  either 
joint,  as  required.  A  slit  through  the  handle  permits  a  part  of  the  staff  near 
the  end  to  be  seen  beneath.  A  scale  on  one  side  of  the  slit  is  graduated 
with  the  distance  that  the  rod  moves,  to  throw  the  points  .01  in.  apart. 

That  part  of  the  handle  containing  the  slit  and  scale  is  separated  from  the 
other  part  ;  it  is  made  to  fit  closely  over  it.  On  each  side  there  is  a  small 
tube  ;  a  thread  is  cut  in  one,  through  which  a  fine  screw,  held  by  a  stud  on 
the  permanent  part  of  the  handle,  works  and  gives  it  motion ;  a  guide  runs 
through  the  other.  Seen  through  the  slit  is  a  small  plate  of  silver  inserted 
in  the  staff,  and  a  fine  mark  upon  it  to  show  the  place  of  zero,  when  the 
points  are  adjusted.  The  zero-mark  on  the  scale  is  made  to  correspond  with 
it  by  means  of  the  screw  just  mentioned. 

The  points  are  of  steel,  with  a  strong  shoulder  at  one  end,  below  which 
the  screw  is  cut  that  fits  into  the  socket  in  the  head.  A  wrench  is  made  to 
fit  the  other  end,  so  as  to  turn  the  point  firmly  into  its  place.  They  are 
made  of  such  a  length  that  they  will  just  pass  into  the  adjusting-ring  when 


INSPECTION   AND    PROOF   OF   GUNS.  11 


they  are  all  in  place.  To  this  instrument  belong  the  adjusting-rings  and 
the  muzzle-rest  in  the  form  of  T;  of  the  rings  there  is  one  for  each  calibre, 
reamed  out  to  the  exact  minimum  diameter  of  the  bore.  The  latter  can  be 
used  for  any  class  of  guns.  Its  office  is  to  keep  the  staff  of  the  star-gauge 
in  the  axis  of  the  bore.  For  this  purpose  it  contains  a  groove,  above  the 
perpendicular  branch,  to  receive  the  lower  half  of  the  staff.  There  is  a  .nov- 
able  slide  on  each  branch,  which  can  be  adjusted  to  marks  for  each  r^ibrc, 
so  that  points  projecting  from  their  rear  will  enter  the  muzzle  and  hold  the 
rest  in  place.  In  this  position  the  upper  edge  of  the  transverse  branch  coin 
cides  with  the  diameter  of  the  bore. 

A  hook  is  pivoted  on  the  inner  side  of  the  transverse  branch,  on  one  side 
of  the  groove,  and  so  fitted  that  when  the  star-gauge  is  in  the  gun,  it  em 
braces  one-half  of  that  portion  of  the  staff  which  is  above  tin  groove. 
Therefore,  if  the  transverse  branch  be  placed  so  as  to  coincide  with  the  axis 
of  the  trunnions,  the  hook  thrown  over  the  staff,  and  the  latter  turned  so 
that  the  centre  line  just  meets  the  end  of  the  hook,  the  perpendicular  points 
will  be  perpendicular  to  the  axis  of  the  trunnions.  If  the  staff  is  then  drawn 
out  carefully,  the  measurements  will  all  be  taken  in  the  same  plane.  A  notch 
in  the  end  of  the  hook,  made  to  coincide  with  the  plane  of  the  muzzle,  may 
be  used  for  marking  the  distances  on  the  staff. 

The  upright  branch  is  movable,  and  is  made  to  fit  into  the  end  of  the 
transverse  branch,  for  convenience  arid  security  in  packing. 

In  examining  the  bores  after  proof,  it  has  been  found  that  the  greatest 
indentation  occurs  in  general  near  the  seat  of  the  projectiles.  But,  as  it  is 
not  always  found  at  precisely  the  same  point  of  the  circle  of  the  bore,  a  con 
venient  mode  of  searching  for  it  is  desirable.  This  is  supplied  by  a  disk  for 
circular  measurements,  which  may  also  be  considered  as  belonging  to  the 
star-gauge.  It  is  made  of  composition,  and  is  divided  into  halves,  with  a 
hole  through  the  centre  to  receive  the  staff  of  the  star-gau^e. 

It  is  turned  so  as  to  fit  into  the  muzzle  of  the  gun  closely,  with  a  projec 
ting  lip  two  or  three  inches  broad  to  hold  it  in  place,  and  with  cleats  over 
lapping  the  edges,  to  keep  it-  from  going  in  too  far.  The  face  is  a  plane 
surface.  The  circumference  is  divided  into  as  many  equal  parts  as  may  be 
thought  desirable,  which  are  numbered  in  regular  order.  The  centre  hole  is 
reinforced  on  the  inside  by  a  projection  which  is  turnr  ,1  to  receive  a  collar 
that  fits  closely  around  it,  and  holds  the  two  halves  t-  ether  when  they  are 
placed  on  the  staff". 

When  ready  for  use,  the  face  is  in  the  plane  of  the  muzzle-face.  Its  zero- 
mark  is  made  to  coincide  with  a  light  punch-mark  on  the  muzzle-face, 
directly  below  the  line  of  sight. 

On  the  staff  of  the  star-gauge  a  brass  slide  is  fitted,  having  a  thumb-screw 
to  hold  it  in  any  position ;  from  the  inner  end  a  point  extends  at  a  right 
angle  to  its  axis,  of  sufficient  length  to  meet  the  points  at  the  circumference 
12 


12  ORDNANCE  AND  ORDNANCE   STORES. 

of  the  disk ;  a  centre  line  extends  from  the  base  to  the  apex.  The  slide 
being  moved  so  as  to  make  its  inner  end  coincide  with  any  mark  upon  the 
staff,  at  which  a  circular  measurement  is  required,  and  the  centre  line  of  the 
point  being  made  to  coincide  with  that  of  the  staff,  it  is  secured  by  the 
-thumb-screw.  The  point  of  the  slide  is  then  in  the  same  plane  with  the 
perpendicular  measuring-points,  and  its  direction  always  indicates  them ;  a 
series  of  measurements,  made  before  proof,  may  thus  be  compared  with 
another  made  at  the  same  points  after  proof. 

It  is  obvious  that  the  determinations  will  not  be  absolutely  accurate,  for 
when  the  gun  is  worn,  should  the  stationary  points  be  perpendicular,  the 
movable  points,  being  then  horizontal,  would  fall  below  the  true  horizontal 
diameter,  and  the  measurements  would  be  more  in  error  than  it  would  be 
with  the  points  in  any  other  direction.  Still,  if  care  is  taken  to  preserve  the 
points  at  the  greatest  length  possible,  a  very  tolerable  degree  of  accuracy 
may  be  attained.  In  the  inspection  of  guns  arranged  on  skids,  the  gun 
itself  should  be  turned,  which  will  insure  accurate  measurements.  Care  must 
also  be  taken  not  to  allow  the  joints  of  the  staff  to  become  so  loose  that 
the  coincidence  of  the  centre  line'  is  destroyed  when  they  are  screwed 
together.  If  this  should  occur,  however,  a  few  turns  of  thread,  placed 
between  them  at  the  time  of  putting  the  instrument  together,  would  remedy 
the  difficulty. 

7th.  An  instrument  for  verifying  the  interior  position  of  vents. 

When  the  vent  is  drilled  in  the  vertical  plane  of  the  axis,  as  in  the  guns 
of  old  patterns,  a  simple  head,  shaped  to  fit  the  bottom  of  the  bore,  or  the 
chamber,  with  a  staff  fitted  to  it,  is  sufficient.  But  for  the  Dahlgren  guns, 
with  two  vents,  some  other  plan  is  better.  The  following  has  been  found 
satisfactory : 

A  head  of  wTell-seasoned  wood,  which  is  fitted  to  the  chamber,  is  attached 
to  a  wooden  disk  of  the  diameter  of  the  main  bore.  The  surface  of  the  head 
corresponds  with  a  longitudinal  central  section  of  the  chamber;  at  the  point 
where  the  projection  of  the  vent  would  meet  it  a  piece  of  hard  wood  is 
inserted.  A  central  line  drawn  through  its  'length,  crossed  at  a  right  angle 
by  another  line  at  any  known  point  from  the  smaller  end,  will  afford  con 
venient  points  to  measure  from.  A  stout  square  wooden  staff  is  attached  to 
the  axis  of  the  head ;  at  a  distance  equal  to  the  length  of  the  bore,  the  end 
is  jogged  into  the  centre  of  a  half  disk  of  wood,  which  is  fitted  to  the  bore. 
The  whole  is  so  constructed  that  the  straight  edge  of  the  half  disk  (or  the 
chord)  is  in  the  same  plane  as  a  horizontal  section  of  the  head.  A  few  holes 
are  bored  through  the  disk  attached  to  the  half  head,  to  allow  the  instru 
ment  to  pass  freely  into  the  gun  and  out  of  it. 

A  w7ire  of  untempered  steel,  of  the  size  of  the  vent,  with  a  sharp,  well- 
centred  point,  and  a  small  spirit-level,  are  required  to  use  with  this  instrument. 

The  gun  being  levelled,  and  the  instrument  being  pushed  to  the  bottom 


INSPECTION   AND   PROOF   OF   GUNS.  13 


of  the  bore,  the  upper  edge  of  the  half  disk  near  the  outer  end  of  the  staff  is 
then  brought  to  a  level.  »Thc  surface  of  the  half  head  then  corresponds  with 
the  horizontal  central  section  of  the  chamber.  The  point  of  the  wire  being 
pushed  gently  to  meet  it,  will  show  very  accurately  the  interior  position  of 
the  vent. 

8th.  Profile-boards  for  distances  in  front  and  rear  of  the  base  line. 

Their  lower  edges  are  adapted  to  the  shape  of  the  gun,  and  the  upper  ones 
are  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  bore. 

The  distances  from  the  base-line  of  the  several  parts,  and  of  the  points  at 
which  diameters  are  to  be  measured,  are  laid  off  accurately  on  the  upper  edge, 
and  then  marked  in  lines  perpendicular  to  it  on  the  sides  and  lower  edges  of 
the  profile.  An  iron  strip  is  attached  to  the  upper  edge  to  prevent  warp 
ing,  and  the  whole  is  well  coated  with  shellac  varnish,  to  keep  it  from  absorb 
ing  moisture. 

The  following  instruments  are  used  in  connection  with  the  profile-boards : 

A  rule  for  verifying  the  marks,  of  such  a  length  that  not  more  than  one  fleet 
ing  may  be  necessary,  to  be  graduated  decimally  according  to  the  standard. 

A  small  square  of  steel,  to  be  used  in  referring  the  marks  on  the  board  to 
those  on  the  rule. 

A  steel  straight-edge,  long  enough  to  extend  across  the  muzzle-face,  and 
several  inches  on  the  board,  to  ascertain  the  extreme  length  from  base  to 
muzzle.  It  is  also  used  for  the  same  purpose  at  the  extreme  end  of  the  cas- 
cabcL 

A  steel  scratcher,  to  mark  the  gun  at  points  not  otherwise  indicated, 
where  diameters  are  to  be  measured. 

9th.  A  trunnion-square  of  steel  or  iron  for  ascertaining  the  position  of  the 
trunnions,  with  reference  to  the  axis  of  the  bore.  This  instrument  is  a  square 
with  two  branches,  one  of  which  is  fixed  and  the  other  movable.  The  foot 
of  each  branch  is  in  the  same  plane,  and  is  parallel  to  the  upper  edge  of  the 
main  piece  which  connects  them.  The  latter  is  graduated  to  inches  and 
tenths.  The  movable  branch  slides  on  the  main  piece,  and  may  be  secured 
to  it  by  two  thumb-screws.  It  is  provided  with  a  vernier  scale  graduated  to 
hundredths  of  an  inch.  Between  the  branches  there  is  a  slide,  also  provided 
with  a  vernier  graduated  as  before,  with  a  thumb-screw  to  secure  it  firmly ; 
in  its  centre  there  is  a  sliding-point,  moving  vertically,  with  a  thumb-screw 
to  fasten  it.  Above  the  foot  of  each  branch  there  is  a  slit  to  receive  the 
shank  of  a  plate,  on  the  end  of  which  a  thread  is  cut ;  the  lower  edge  of  the 
plate  forms  a  right  angle  with  the  branch,  and  the  plate  is  fastened  to  the 
branch  by  a  nut,  at  a  point  from  the  end  equal  to  the  semi-diameter  of  the 
trunnion,  which  is  marked  on  each  branch. 

When  the  feet  of  the  branches,  or  the  lower  edge  of  the  plates,  rest  upon 
the  trunnions,  the  upper  edge  of  the  main  piece  is  parallel  to  their  axis,  if 
their  alignment  is  correct.  When  in  the  latter  position,  the  edges  of  the  feet 
will  lie  close  against  the  sides  of  the  trunnions. 


14  ORDNANCE   AND   ORDNANCE   STORES. 


A  graduated  steel  wedge  is  used  to  measure  the  deviation  of  the  trunnions 
from  the  feet  of  the  square. 

10th.  A  trunnion-gauge,  which  is  an  iron  ring  of  the  proper  diameter 
of  the  trunnions.  Its  outer  edge  coincides  with  the  diameter  of  the  rim- 
bases. 

llth.  A  trunnion-rule,  to  measure  the  distance  of  the  trunnions  from  the 
base  ring,  or  line.  This  is  an  iron  rod  with  a  head  at  one  end,  through 
which  passes  one  branch  of  a  small  square.  The  centre  of  the  rod  is  marked 
on  the  end,  and  the  square  is  set  so  that  the  inner  edge  of  the  branch  which 
is  parallel  to  the  rod  is  at  a  distance  equal  to  the  semi-diameter  of  the 
trunnion  from  the  centre.  It  is  secured  in  this  position  by  screws  and 
clamps. 

The  upper  side  of  the  rod  is  graduated  to  inches  and  tenths.  A  slide 
with  a  slot  through  it,  to  show  the  graduation  beneath,  traverses  upon  it, 
and  is  kept  from  turning  by  a  guide  on  the  lower  side.  There  is  a  vernier 
upon  the  slide,  graduated  to  hundredth^  of  an  inch ;  a  thumb-screw  serves 
to  secure  the  slide  at  any  point  on  the  rod.  That  end  of  the  slide  from 
which  the  graduation  of  the  rod  commences  has  both  of  its  sides  drawn  out, 
to  form  knife-edges;  the  knife-edges  and  the  end  of  the  slide  are  in  the  same 
plane.  When  the  square  at  the  end  is  placed  on  the  trunnion,  the  end  of 
the  rod  will  touch  its  side  at  the  point  of  its  greatest  diameter.  The  rod 
being  held  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  bore,  with  the  side  of  the  head  pressing 
the  rimbase,  the  knife-edge  will  be  in  a  proper  position  to  fall  into  the  base 
line  when  moved  to  find  it. 

12th.  A  beam-calliper  for  measuring  diameters  is  a  square  of  steel  or  iron, 
with  two  branches,  one  of  which  is  fixed  and  the  other  sliding.  The  inner 
edges  of  the  two  branches,  when  pushed  together,  lie,  of  course,  in  contact 
with  each  other  throughout  their  length.  The  beam  is  graduated  to  inches 
and  tenths.  A  vernier  is  attached  to  the  sliding  branch,  graduated  to  hun- 
dredths  of  an  inch.  The  latter  is  provided  with  a  thumb-screw,  to  fasten  it 
at  any  point. 

The  length  of  the  beam  must  be  rather  greater  than  the  diameter;  and 
that  of  the  branches  than  the  semi-diameter  of  the  guns  to  be  inspected,  at 
their  largest  points. 

13th.  "A  cascabol-block  is  a  wooden  cylinder  of  the  proper  diameter  of  the 
breeching-hole,  the  size  of  which  it  is  used  to  verify. 

The  opening  between  the  jaws  may  be  ascertained  by  measuring  the  iron 
block  which  is  fitted  to  go  between  them,  or  by  a  template. 

14th.  A  vent-guide,  to  be  used  with  vents  in  guns  of  Dahlgrcn's  pattern. 

This  instrument  is  made  of  bronze  or  composition.  When  placed  upon 
the  gun,  one  of  its  branches  coincides  with  the  curve  of  the  cylinder,  and 
the  other,  starting  from  its  centre,  lies  along  the  cylinder  in  contact  with  it 
longitudinally.  The  lower  edges  of  the  branches  are  a  right  line  and  a 


INSPECTION   AND   PEG  OF   OF   GUNS.  15 

curved  line,  making  two  right  angles  with  each  other.  The  length  of  that 
of  the  transverse  branch  is  equal  to  the  distance  between  the  centre  of  the 
two  vents.  The  rear  surface  of  the  transverse  branch  is  curved  and  quadri 
lateral.  Its  sides  are  inclined,  so  that  their  rear  edges  show  the  exact  direc 
tion  of  the  vents.  Every  point  in  the  upper  edge  lies  in  the  same  horizontal 
plane.  The  height  is  sufficient  to  permit  the  edges  to  give  an  accurate 
direction  to  the  drill. 

The  upper  edge  of  the  other  branch  runs  off  in  a  sloping  curve  to  its  ex 
tremity. 

A  centre  line  is  drawn  through  the  lower  edge  of  the  longitudinal  branch, 
and  is  continued  upwards  on  the  rear  surface  of  the  transverse  branch  to  the 
top. 

The  guide  being  placed  with  its  centre  upon  the  centre  mark  of  the  gun, 
and  the  centre  line  of  the  longitudinal  branch  being  made  to  coincide  with 
the  centre  line  scribed  upon  the  cylinder,  the  rear  lower  edge  of  the  trans 
verse  branch  will  then  coincide  with  the  base-line,  its  extremities  will  indicate 
the  centres  of  the  vents,  and  the  rear  edges  of  the  sides  will  show  their  true 
direction. 

15th.  Vent-gauges  of  untempered  steel  wire,  with  shoulders  to  prevent 
them  from  slipping  into  the  vent.  One  should  be  of  the  proper  diameter 
of  the  vent,  one  of  the  greatest,  and  one  of  the  least  diameter  allowed. 

16th.  A  vent-searcher,  a  steel  wire  of  the  length  of  the  vent,  bent  to  a 
right  angle  at  the  lower  end  and  pointed.  It  is  used  for  detecting  imper 
fections  in  the  sides  of  the  vents. 

17th.  A  semicircular  protractor  of  metal  for  measuring  the  inclination  of 
vents,  or  for  ascertaining  their  deviation  from  the  guide. 

18th.  A  set  of  templates  for  verifying  the  shape  of  lock-lugs,  the  angle  of 
the  rear  sight  mass,  the  curve  between  the  base-line  and  the  front  of  rear 
sight  mass,  that  at  the  end  of  the  cascabel,  the  bevel  of  the  breeching-hole, 
the  opening  of  the  cascabel,  and  the  shape  of  the  muzzle  swell. 

If  the  inspection  should  take  place  at  the  foundry,  the  templates  used  in 
chipping  might  be  verified  and  used  for  inspection. 

For  guns  of  Dahlgren's  pattern,  a  bronze  model,  showing  the  shape  of  the 
lugs  arid  rear  sight  mass,  and  the  position  of  the  vents,  is  furnished  as  a 
guide  to  the  contractors. 

19th.  A  standard  foot-rule  for  verifying  measures. 

20th.  A  foot-rule  of  steel  for  measuring  the  masses,  the  length  of  the 
trunnions,  and  for  other  purposes.  The  graduation  should  be  extended  to 
each  end. 

21st.  A  set  of  ring-gauges,  large,  medium,  and  small,  for  inspecting  the 
projectiles  used  in  proof. 

22d.  A  small  beam-calliper,  with  outside  edges,  for  examining  the  ad 
justing  rings  and  the  ring-gauges. 


16  ORDNANCE   AND   ORDNANCE   STORES. 

23d.  A  platform  balance,  for  weighing  the  projectiles  used  in  proof,  and 
for  bringing  the  shells  up  to  the  standard  weight.  For  use  with  the  above 
there  should  be  provided  a  bag  of  dry  sand,  a  funnel,  some  wooden  plugs  for 
the  fuze-holes,  and  a  hammer. 

24th.  A  set  of  implements  for  loading  and  cleaning,  viz.  : 

A  rammer,  faced  with  hard  wood  or  metal,  with  a  graduated  scale  on  the 
staff,  near  the  muzzle,  to  show  the  distance  of  the  front  of  the  projectiles 
from  the  muzzle. 

A  bristle  sponge  with  a  worm  in  its  end,  for  ordinary  use  in  firing. 

A  sheepskin  sponge,  for  drying  the  bore  after  cleaning  it. 

A  gun-scraper. 

A  ladle. 

A  boring-bit. 

A  priming-wire. 

A  lock  and  lanyard,  should  navy  primers  be  used  in  firing ;  but  if  friction 
primers  are  used,  then  a  lanyard  with  a  hook  in  its  end  will  be  required,  only. 

A  breeching  and  a  couple  of  tackles,  if  the  guns  should  be  fired  on  skids. 

Six  handspikes. 

Six  buckets  and  a  large  tub,  for  washing  out  the  guns. 

If  the  firing  is  made  into  a  butt,  a  couple  of  wheelbarrows,  with  two  or 
three  pickaxes  and  half  a  dozen  shovels,  will  be  necessary. 

25th.  A  searcher,  with  six  or  more  points,  to  detect  injuries  or  cavities  in 
the  bore. 

26th.  A  machine  for  taking  the  interior  impression  of  vents. 

This  consists  of  a  wooden  head,  one-half  of  which  is  cylindrical,  and  the 
other  half  is  of  the  shape  of  the  chamber,  both  being  rather  smaller  than  the 
parts  of  the  bore  that  they  are  intended  for.  A  staff,  flat  on  its  upper  side, 
and  rounded  on  its  under  side  to  fit  the  curve  of  the  bore,  is  mortised  into 
the  circumference  of  the  cylindrical  part  of  the  head.  A  mortise  is  cut 
through  the  chamber  part  of  the  head,  extending  several  inches  in  rear  and 
front  of  the  position  of  the  vent.  Into  this  mortise  n  loose  piece  is  fitted, 
capable  of  free  motion  upwards  and  downwards,  the  top  of  which  is  pierced 
with  holes  to  secure  the  wax  or  composition  which  is  spread  over  its  sur 
face.  This  movable  piece  rests  on  a  wedge  attached  to  a  flat  rod  running 
through  a  slot  in  the  head  ;  there  is  a  slot  in  this  rod  about  four  inches  long, 
a  pin  passing  through  it  into  the  staff.  To  use  the  instrument,  withdraw  the 
rod  as  far  as  the  slot  will  permit,  which  will  allow  the  movable  piece  on 
which  the  composition  has  been  spread  to  drop  below  the  surface  of  the 
head,  and  protect  it.  Push  the  head  to  the  bottom  of  the  chamber,  and 
arrange  the  position  of  the  staff  so  that  the  movable  piece  will  cover  the 
vent,  then  press  the  end  of  the  rod  home.  This  motion  will  throw  out 
the  composition,  and  a  distinct  impression  of  the  vent  and  of  fire-cracks 
(should  there  be  any)  will  be  left  upon  its  surface ;  draw  the  rod  back  as  far 


INSPECTING  INSTRUMENTS.  17 

as  the  slot  will  allow,  and  withdraw  the  instrument :  the  impression,  being 
protected  thereby,  will  come  out  uninjured. 

Impressions  of  injuries  or  cavities  in  the  bore  may  easily  be  taken  by  a 
similar  contrivance. 

27th.  Hydraulic  pump  and  apparatus  for  the  water-proof. 

Any  of  the  various  patterns  of  this  machine  may  be  applied  to  the  proof 
of  guns.'  An  iron  cross-head  is  secured  to  a  stout  wooden  block  which  fits 
into  the  muzzle,  and  which  has  a  flange  or  shoulder  to  cover  the  muzzle- 
face  ;  rings  of  caoutchouc  or  gutta-percha  are  placed  between  them  ;  an  iron 
rod  with  a  ring  in  one  end,  to  fit  over  the  trunnion,  and  with  a  thread  cut 
on  the  other  end,  is  used  on  each  side  of  the  gun,  to  connect  the  trunnion 
with  the  cross-head.  The  whole  is  set  up  with  nuts,  and  the  pressure  upon 
the  rings  makes  a  tight  joint ;  a  coupling  upon  the  cross-head  receives  the 
hose,  and  the  water  is  forced  into  the  gun  through  a  hole  in  the  wooden 
block.  Care  should  be  taken  that  the  valve  is  loaded  with  the  proper 
weight  for  proof. 

28th.  Dies  for  marking  guns. — A  full  set  of  figures,  with  such  capital  let 
ters  as  may  be  required  for  the  inspection-marks ;  these  should  be  one  inch 
in  length.  ^  Also,  small  letters  of  suitable  size  to  mark  "Ibs.,"  and  a  full  set 
of  half-inch  figures. 


18  OEDNANCE   AND   ORDNANCE   STOKES. 


USE  OF  THE  INSPECTING  INSTRUMENTS. 

29«  The  guns  having  been  freed  from  rust,  and  their  foundry  numbers 
noted,  in  the  order  of  their  relative  positions,  on  the  field-book,  the  in 
specting  officer  will  proceed  to  verify  the  instruments  to  be  used  in  their 
measurement,  if  this  has  not  been  previously  done  in  a  manner  entirely 
satisfactory  to  him. 

He  will  then  examine  carefully  the  guns,  inside  and  out,  for  defects  of 
metal  or  of  manufacture,  and  note  the  results. 

The  interior  of  the  bore  is  to  be  examined  by  reflecting  the  rays  of  the 
sun  into  it  from  a  mirror  or  mirrors ;  or,  if  the  sun  is  obscured,  and  there  can 
be  no  delay,  by  means  of  a  spirit-lamp,  or  of  a  wax  taper,  on  the  end  of  a  rod, 
taking  care  not  to  smoke  the  surface  of  the  bore. 

The  cylinder-gauge  is  then  to  be  introduced,  which  must  pass  freely  to  the 
bottom  of  the  cylindrical  part  of  the  bore.  If  obstructed,  the  depth  to 
which  it  reaches  should  be  noted. 

The  star-gauge  is  used  to  ascertain  the  exact  diameter  of  the  bore,  and 
of  the  cylindrical  part  of  the  chamber.  The  bore  must  be  measured  at  inter 
vals  of  i  inch  from  the  bottom  of  the  cylindrical  part  to  the  seat  of  the  shot ; 
of  1  inch  from  that  point  to  the  trunnions  ;  and  of  5  inches  from  the  trun 
nions  to  the  muzzle.  If  any  marks  of  the  reamer  or  other  defects  are  seen 
in  the  bore,  they  are  to  be  searched  for,  and  their  depths  and  positions  noted. 
These  results  are  to  be  tabulated  according  to  the  blank  forms  furnished. 
The  whole  length  of  the  bore  is  ascertained  by  means  of  the  measuring-staff, 
with  the  point  screwed  on,  supported  in  the  axis  of  the  bore  by  the  disks 
and  half-tornpion. 

In  the  absence  of  this  instrument,  a  pine  rod,  having  the  proper  length  of 
the  bore  marked  on  it,  and  the  end  rounded  to  the  curve  of  the  bottom  of 
the  bore,  will  answer  as  well,  using  a  thread  or  a  straight-edge  across  the 
face  of  the  muzzle. 

The  shape  and  dimensions  of  the  chamber,  and  the  position  of  the  interior 
orifice  of  the  vent,  arc  verified  by  means  of  the  chamber-gauge,  the  description 
of  which  will  explain  its  use.  An  inspection  of  the  chamber-reamer  will  be 
generally  satisfactory  in  determining  the  size  and  shape  of  the  chamber. 

The  vent  is  measured  by  the  appropriate  gauges,  the  smaller  of  which  must 
enter  freely,  and  the  larger  not  at  all.  It  is  searched  for  roughness,  or  for 
cavities  in  the  metal  around  it,  by  means  of  the  searcher,  the  point  of  which 
should  feel  every  part  of  it  carefully. 

Its  inclination  to  the  surface,  and  its  position  externally,  are  verified  by 
means  of  the  vent-guide  furnished  for  the  Dahlgren  guns,  and  by  the  semi 
circular  protractor  and  the  vent-gauge. 


USE   OF  THE  INSPECTING  INSTRUMENTS.  10 

In  guns  of  the  ordinary  construction,  the  position  of  the  vent  is  marked 
on  the  profile-board,  and  its  inclination  to  the  surface  is  determined  by  the 
protractor  and  vent-gauge. 

The  exterior  lengths  of  the  gun  arc  measured  by  the  profile-board,  marked 
with  the  true  dimensions,  the  differences  being  measured  by  the  foot-rule, 
or,  if  minute,  estimated  by  the  eye. 

The  exterior  diameters  are  measured  with  the  calipers  and  square,  or  by 
the  set-gauges  used  in  turning,  and  a  graduated  wedge. 

To  verify  the  position  and  alignment  of  the  trunnions  of  a  gun,  it  is  first 
necessaiy  to  ascertain,  by  means  of  the  trunnion-gauge  and  of  the  calipers, 
their  cylindrical  form  and  their  diameters,  which  should  be  the  same,  or 
allowance  must  be  made  for  half  the  difference  in  measuring  their  axial  dis 
tances  from  the  base-line,  by  the  trunnion-rule,  which  should  next  be  done. 
These  distances  should  be  equal,  or  their  axes  do  not  coincide — an  error  not 
tolerated. 

The  trunnion-square  is  then  placed  upon  the  trunnions  in  the  plane  of  their 
axis.  The  feet  of  its  branches  should  coincide  with  the  surfaces  of  both 
trunnions,  throughout  their  length,  above  and  in  rear,  and  their  inner  edges 
with  the  faces  of  the  rimbascs.  Then,  with  the  beam-compass,  scribe  on  the 
upper  surface  of  the  gun  the  distance  of  the  axis  of  the  trunnions  from  the 
base-line,  and  push  the  sliding-point  of  the  square  down,  till,  at  that  distance, 
it  touches  the  surface  of  the  gun,  and  screw  it  fast.  Then  turn  the  gun  over, 
and  again  scribe  on  it  the  same  distance  from  the  base-line.  The  square, 
being  again  applied,  will  determine  whether  the  trunnions  are  above  or  below 
the  axis  of  the  bore,  which  will  coincide  with  that  of  the  gun,  if  accurately 
bored,  and  turned  on  the  same  centres  and  bearings.  If  the  branches  rest 
upon  the  trunnions  before  the  point  of  the  slider  touches  the  gun  at  the 
scribe,  their  axis  is  below ;  but  if  the  point  touch  first,  above  the  axis  of  the 
bore,  by  half  the  space  between.  The  graduated  wedge,  being  placed  under 
the  vertical  sliding-point,  will  determine  the  amount.  If  both  touch  at  once, 
both  axes  are  in  the  same  plane. 

No  a;un  can  be  received,  the  axis  of  the  trunnions  of  which  is  above  that 
of  the  bore. 

The  lengths  of  the  trunnions  are  measured  with  the  foot-rule,  and  the 
diameters  of  the  rimbascs  by  that  of  the  exterior  rim  of  the  trunnion-gauge. 
If  the  alignment  of  the  trunnions  be  correct,  it  will  serve  as  a  means  of 
determining  the  correctness  of  the  line  of  sight,  which,  before  the  gun  is 
removed  from  the  lathe,  should  be  distinctly  traced  on  the  sight-masses  and 
the  swell  of  the  muzzle,  and  should  be  at  right  angles  to  the  base-line,  to  the 
axes  of  the  trunnions,  and  to  the  connecting  piece  of  the  trunnion-square, 
when  its  branches  rest  against  their  rear,  with  the  plates  across  their  upper 
surfaces. 

The  Inspector  will  further  satisfy  himself  of  the  correct  tracing  of  the  line 


20  ORDNANCE   AND   ORDNANCE  STORES. 


of  sight  on  the  gun,  by  examining  the  lathe  and  the  manner  of  tracing  it  in 
the  plane  of  the  axis  of  the  bore,  at  right  angles  to  the  axis  of  the  trunnions, 
as  by  it  are  placed  the  sights  and  vent,  and  in  their  absence  it  serves  as  a 
line  of  metal  sight. 

The  positions  of  the  sight-masses  are  verified  by  the  profile-board,  and  by 
reference  to  the  line  of  sight,  traced  on  them  ;  their  form  and  dimensions  by 
the  templates. 

The  positions  of  the  lock-lugs  and  their  forms  are  verified  by  means  of  the 
bronze  pattern  furnished  to  each  foundry  for  each  class  of  the  Dahlgren  guns, 
and  their  dimensions  by  the  templates.  For  other  guns  the  position  of  the 
lock-piece  is  marked  on  the  profile-board,  and  their  measures  taken  as  above. 

The  opening  of  the  cascabcl  and  its  curves,  and  those  of  the  breech  and  the 
muzzle-swell,  are  verified  by  means  of  the  "  cylinder-block"  and  the  templates* 

30.  The  following  variations  from  the  proper  dimensions  may  be  tolerated 
by  the  Inspector,  though  every  effort  should  be  made  to  conform  exactly  to 
the  drafts  furnished  by  the  Bureau  of  Ordnance. 

Inch. 

In  the  diameter  of  the  bore. .  \  more °'03 

( less 0. 00 

r  where  }  more 05 

Exterior  diameter turned  or  planed  fless 05 

where  not  )  more 20 

I  turned  or  planed  }  less 05 

f-of  the  bore,  more  or  less .10 

J  from  rear  of  base-ring  or  Hue  to  face  of  the  muzzle,  more  or  less.       .25 
'ng  x  j  of  the  cascabel,  from  rear  of  base-ring  to  the  end,  more  or  less. .       .20 

I  of  the  reinforce,  more  or  less 15 

From  the  axis  of  trunnions  to  base-line,  more  or  less 05 

In  the  length  of  chamber,  more  or  less 10 

In  the  position  of  the  axis  of  the  trunnions . . .  \  f^6  axis  °[  the  b°re °° 

(  below  axis  of  the  bore 20 

In  the  length  of  trunnions,  more  or  less 05 

Diameter  of  trunnions,  less 0.05 

In  the  same  gun,  no  variations  to  be  tolerated  in  the  position  of  the  trunnions,  or 
in  their  alignment. 

(  diameter  more. .  0  0°5 

In  the  vent. .  •{  

(       do.      less 000 

In  lock-piece  any  dimensions. . .  \  m°re 10 

]  less 00 

Variation  of  position  of  exterior  orifice  of  vent 05 

Idem  of  interior  do.          do 20 

c  in  the  bore  or  vent 00 

on  exterior  surface  of  reinforces,  where  turned  or  planed. .       .10 

Depth  of  cavities. .  j  elsewhere,  where  turned  or  planed 25 

on  trunnions,  within  one  inch  of  rimbases 10 

*-  on  trunnions,  elsewhere 25 

Enlargement  or  indentation  of  bore  by  proof,  not  to  exceed 02 


USE   OF  THE   INSPECTING  INSTRUMENTS.  21 

The  measures  are  to  be  taken  by  scales  corresponding  with  the  standard 
measures  of  the  United  States. 

If  two  or  more  cavities  should  be  near  each  other  on  the  exterior,  the 
gun  may  be  rejected,  though  the  cavities  should  be  of  less  depth  than  tole 
rated  in  the  table. 

If  the  trunnions  are  placed  within  the  limits  of  toleration,  the  preponder 
ance  must  not  vary  more  than  5  per  cent.,  more  or  less,  from  that  fixed  in 
the  contract. 


ORDNANCE   AND   ORDNANCE   STOKES. 


POWDER-PROOF. 
31.  The  proof-charges  shall  be  as  follows: 


CALIBRE  AND  CLASS  OF  GUN. 

CHARGE  OF 
POWDER. 

PROJECTILE. 

WADS. 

No.  OF 
FIRES. 

XV-inch  43,000  Ibs  -| 

Pounds. 
35 
45 

Shell  ...330  Ibs. 

a                  ti 



3 

0 

55 

Cored  sh.  400  Ibs. 

3 

XT-inch  16  000  Ibs  • 

25 

Solid  shot  

Gromet  . 

1 

15 

Shell  

10 

ri 

a 

X-inch                               12  500  Ibs 

18 

Solid  shot  

Gromet  . 

1 

g. 

12 

Shell...    . 

10 

IX-inch                               9  000  Ibs  • 

15 

Solid  shot  

Gromet  . 

1 

0> 

10 

Shell  

10 

m 

12 

Shot 

Gromet 

1 

10 

Shell  

10 

8-inch  of  6,500  Ibs 

10 

Shot 

n         f 

1  A 

10 

Shot  

1 

8 

Shell 

10 

32-pdr.  of  4,500  Ibs. 

8 

Shot 

10 

'  130-pdr.  of  —  cwt.,  or  16,000  Ibs 

30 

1  shot 

Gromet 

10 

G4-pdr.  of  10G  cwt,  or.  .  .12,000  Ibs. 

20 

do  

do 

10 

d 

32-pdr.  of    57  cwt.,  or.  .  .   6,400  Ibs. 

15 

do 

do 

10 

Sc-| 

32-pdr.  of    51  cwt.,  or.  .  .    5,700  Ibs. 

13 

do  

do 

10 

o 

32-pdr.  of    42  cwt.,  or.  .  .   4,700  Ibs. 

10 

do  

do.    . 

10 

& 

32-pdr.  of    33  cwt.,  or.  .  .   3,600  Ibs. 

10 

do    

do 

10 

32-pdr.  of    27  cwt.,  or.  .  .   3,000  Ibs. 

9 

do  

do.     .. 

10 

The  cannon-powder  for  proof  shall  he  of  not  less  than  1,500  feet  initial 
velocity,  as  determined  by  the  gun-pendulum  at  the  Ordnance  Yard, 
Washington. 

It  shall  be  filled  in  service  cylinders,  and  well  settled. 

For  chambered  pieces  the  increased  charges  should  fill  the  chamber  and 
necessary  portion  of  the  bore. 

The  projectiles  shall  be  of  full  weight,  and  not  below  the  mean  gauge ; 
the  shells  shall  be  filled  with  a  mixture  of  sand  and  ashes,  to  bring  them  up 
to  the  proper  weight  of  the  filled  shell. 

Sabots  for  the  shell  and  a  gromct  wad  over  the  shot. 

The  gun  should  be  fired  on  skids  or  a  proving-carriage,  to  test  the  trun 
nions. 

If  five  per  cent,  out  of  any  lot  offered  for  ordinary  proof  under  a  contract 
shall  fail  to  sustain  it,  the  whole  may  be  rejected,  as  may  be  stipulated  in 
the  contract. 


POWDER   ANP   WATER-PROOF   OF   GUNS. 


9,3 


WATER-PROOF. 

32,  The  pressure  to  be  applied  in  the  water-proof  will  be  two  atmospheres, 
or  thirty  pounds  to  the  square  inch. 

The  penetration  of  water  in  this  proof  through  the  metal  of  the  piece,  in 
any  place,  will  cause  the  rejection  of  the  gun ;  and  if,  on  examination  after 
the  water-proof,  there  shall  be  any  defects  indicated  by  weeping  or  damp 
ness  in  the  bore,  the  gun  shall  be  rejected. 

The  water-proof  is  alone  to  be  depended  on  to  detect  minute  clusters  of 
cavities  in  the  bore,  which  for  this  purpose  should  be  perfectly  dry,  and 
examined  by  sunlight.  All  inspections,  consequently,  should  take  place  in 
fair  weather,  and  when  the  temperature  is  above  the  freezing-point. 

MARKING  GUNS. 

33,  Guns  for  the  naval  service,  received  by  authority  of  the  Bureau  of 
Ordnance,  are  to  be  marked  in  the  following  manner,  viz.  : 

On  the  cylinder,  in  the  line  of  sight  near  the  sight-mass,  all  accepted 
guns  are  to  have  stamped  an  anchor  two  inches  long. 

Drawings  of  these  stamps  will  be  furnished  by  the  Bureau  of  Ordnance. 

On  the  base  ring  or  line,  the  initials  of  the  foundry,  the  register  number, 
and  the  weight  of  gun  in  pounds. 

On  the  right  trunnion,  the  calibre  and  year  of  fabrication. 

On  the  left  trunnion,  the  letter  P.  and  the  initials  of  the  inspecting  officer ; 
all  the  above  in  one-inch  letters. 

On  the  upper  jaw  of  the  cascabcl,  the  preponderance  in  pounds  to  be 
stamped  lightly  with  half-inch  figures. 

On  the  end  of  the  upper  jaw,  the  cascabel  block  and  head  of  the  pin,  the 
foundry  number  in  quarter-inch  figures. 

The  foundry  number  is  also  to  be  marked  on  the  right  rimbase. 

Guns  rejected  for  imperfections  of  any  kind  will  have  the  letter  C.  stamped 
on  the  anchor,  so  as  to  partially  obliterate  it. 

The  founders  are  to  be  dissuaded  from  selling  such  guns  to  other  parties, 
and  required  to  break  them  up. 

Guns  rejected  for  such  defects  as  render  them  dangerous  to  those  who  fire 
them,  should  be  irreparably  mutilated,  with  the  consent  of  the  founder. 


24  ORDNANCE   AND   ORDNAN.CE   STORES. 


EXTEEME  PEOOF  OF  TEIAL-GUNS. 

34.  The  extreme  proof  of  guns  intended  for  trial  of  metal,  subject  to  such 
modifications  by  the  Bureau  as  future  experience  may  dictate,  will  be  con 
ducted  as  follows : 

A  suitable  '  butt'  shall  be  erected  to  arrest  the  flight  of  the  projectiles 
used  in  proof,  and  to  admit  of  their  easy  recovery,  and  a  bomb-proof,  readily 
accessible,  for  the  protection  of  the  firing  party. 

When  practicable,  the  '  butt'  should  be  made  thick  enough  to  allow  the 
shot  to  just  pass  through,  and  be  stopped  by  another  beyond  it,  without 
penetrating  the  latter;  this  is,  for  Xl-inch,  about  12  feet. 

With  care,  it  is  estimated  that  130  shells  may  be  fired  1,000  times,  at  the 
rate  of  one  hundred  rounds  per  day. 

After  undergoing  the  ordinary  proof  established  for  its  calibre  and  class. 
the  gun  selected  for  extreme  proof  shall  be  subjected  to  at  least  1,000 
rounds  with  service  charges. 

It  may  be  fired  from  the  skids,  or  suspended,  as  the  Bureau  may  direct. 

During  the  trial  the  gun  shall  be  frequently  and  critically  examined,  inside 
and  out,  for  cracks  or  defects,  especially  about  the  interior  orifice  of  the 
vent,  of  which  impressions  are  to  be  taken  in  wax  at  regular  intervals,  in  the 
manner  prescribed  on  page  16,  or  in  such  other  manner  as  the  Bureau  may 
direct.  If  they  show  that  the  vent  is  corroded  in  furrows,  and  enlarged 
considerably  in  diameter  at  its  junction  with  the  bore,  a  permanent  impres 
sion  is  to  be  taken  in  lead,  to  show  the  conical  enlargement.  The  following 
manner,  practised  at  the  Experimental  Battery  at  Washington,  is  recom 
mended  : 

IMPLEMENTS  REQUIRED. 

85«  1.  A  soft  wire  about  0.07  in.  in  diameter,  and  3  or  4  fathoms  long. 

2.  A  lever  about  twice  the  length  of  the  bore,  and   about  3  inches  in 
diameter,  and  shod  to  suit  the  curve  of  the  bore  nearly. 

3.  A  small  button  of  soft  lead,  judged  to  be  of  sufficient  size  to  fill  the 
vent  at  least  one  inch  from  the  bore.     This  is  to  be  pierced  lengthwise  to 
receive  the  wire. 


TO   TAKE    THE   IMPRESSION. 

36*  Shove  the  wire  through  the  vent ;  let  it  pass  along  the  bore  and  out 
at  the  muzzle ;  put  it  through  the  leaden  button  and  tie  a  knot  at  the  end. 
Draw  the  wire  back  through  the  vent  until  the  leaden  button  is  introduced 
firmly  into  the  inner  orifice. 


e 


: 


%^f^ 


tho  ,4      *» 


-5 

i 

S 

0 


. 

iOa 


PROOF   OF  TRIAL-GUNS.  25 

Apply  the  lever,  making  its  shoe  bear  on  the  button,  and  force  it  well  in 
by  repeated  blows,  the  muzzle  being  the  fulcrum.  This  done,  disengage 
the  button  by  pushing  in  the  priming-wire. 

In  taking  impressions  of  the  vent  and  cracks,  each  button  in  turn  is  used 
as  a  pattern  for  moulding  its  successor,  allowing  for  the  progressive  enlarge 
ment  of  the  vent,  or  the  cracks  emanating  from  it.  When  the  crack  shows 
itself,  the  head  of  the  button  should  be  so  enlarged  as  to  include  it. 

These  examinations  should  take  place  after  every  twenty  fires,  at  least, 
and  more"  frequently  when  any  unusual  enlargement  of  the  vent  or  extension 
of  cracks  shall  be  developed,  and  indicate  its  speedy  destruction. 

Before  each  examination  the  bore  of  the  gun  is  to  be  carefully  washed 
and  dried. 

In  recording  the  measurements  of  the  bore  in  extreme  proof  and  after 
service,  distinguish  between  "indentation,"  which  is  the  depression  at  the 
"  seat  of  the  shot,"  which  is  always  below,  and  the  "  wear  of  the  bore," 
which  is  generally  above,  and  increase  of  bore,  or  "  enlargement"  from  any 
other  cause. 

When  from  the  appearance  of  the  bore  at  the  interior  orifice  of  the  vent, 
and  especially  when  a  crack  or  cracks  appear  to  be  extending  rapidly,  the 
vent  so  enlarged  may  be  filled  with  melted  tin,  zinc,  or  Babbitt  metal, — a 
tight-fitting  sponge-head  being  pushed  to  the  bottom  of  the  chamber  to  close 
the  interior  orifice, — and  the  other  vent  be  drilled  through  for  the  purpose  of 
continuing  the  firing. 

The  precise  time  at  which  this  is  to  be  done  will  vary,  according  to 
circumstances ;  such  as  quality  of  metal,  charge,  and  elevation. 

The  endurance  of  a  smooth-bored  gun  with  service  charges  may  be  surely 
predicted  by  observation  of  the  progressive  wear  of  the  interior  orifice  of  the 
vent. 

There  are  certain  general  forms  in  which  this  enlargement  takes  place. 
They  may  be  classed  as  triangular,  lozenge,  quadrilateral,  star,  circular,  and 
elliptic.  (See  Plate.) 

With  the  ordinary  central  vent,  when  subjected  to  a  rapid,  continuous 
fire,  the  enlargement  usually  takes  the  form  of  an  isosceles  -triangle,  the  apex 
of  one  of  the  angles  towards  the  muzzle,  and  the  other  two  perpendicular 
to  it. 

AVith  the  lateral  vent  of  the  Dahlgren  system1  it  usually  takes  the  lozenge 
form,  the  cracks  extending  from  the  opposite  angles  lengthwise  of  the  bore. 
With  those  rifled  cannon  in  which  the  vent  is  bouchcd,  the  cracks  appear 
around  the  bouching  ;  and  although  the  bouching  preserves  the  vent,  yet  the 
formation  of  fissures  around  the  enlarged  orifice,  when  once  commenced, 
causes  a  greater  tendency  to  rupture.  With  the  vent  not  bouchcd,  the  wear 
in  rifled  cannon  is  about  double  that  of  the  smooth-bore. 

So  lonf  as  the  wear  of  the  vent  is  regular  and  without  cracks,  a  mere 


20  ORDNANCE   AND   ORDNANCE   STORES. 

enlargement  is  not  indicative  of  danger ;  but  when  it  reaches  a  diameter  of 
four-tenths  (.4)  of  an  inch  the  vent  should  be  closed  and  a  new  one  opened. 

A  gun  of  large  calibre  should  not  in  service  be  expected  to  endure  more 
than  400  or  500  rounds  before  it  will  be  necessary  to  open  the  new  vent, 
which,  however,  will  be  of  no  advantage,  unless  the  old  one  be  closed  at  its 
interior  orifice,  on  which  the  gases  would  otherwise  continue  to  act  as  a 
wedge. 

The  first  distinct  appearance  of  the  cracks,  as  shown  by  the  button,  is  the 
proper  limit. 

After  the  gun  bursts,  make  a  sketch  or  draft  showing  lines  of  fracture, 
and  reserve  specimens  to  be  sent  to  the  Ordnance  Yard  at  Washington  for 
trial  of  density  and  tensile  strength  ;  and,  if  practicable,  a  photograph  should 
be  taken. 


XI  '*  GUN    No.897. 


110. 


230. 


350. 


-  -      750 


.  6jr  j:/7.  Gedn.cy,  Wash  > 


PREPARATION  OF   GUNS   FOB  SERVICE.  27 


PKEPAKATION  OF  GUNS  FOE  SEEYICE. 

37 1  After  the  guns  have  been  received  at  the  Navy  Yards  it  is  necessary 
to  adjust  the  sights,  and,  in  the  guns  of  the  Dahlgren  pattern,  cut  the  screw 
hole  in  the  cascabel. 

CUTTING  THE  SCREW-HOLE. 

38.  The  boring  and  screw-cutting  machine  is  a  convenient  portable  hand 
drill-press,  the  use  of  which  is  readily  understood  by  any  machinist. 

The  gun  being  carefully  levelled,  and  the  trunnions  placed  horizontal,  the 
position  of  the  centre  of  the  screw-hole,  which  in  the  guns  of  the  .Dahlgren 
pattern  is  tangent  to  the  radius  of  the  breech,  is  marked  on  the  neck  of  the 
cascabel  with  a  centre  punch. 

The  machine  is  placed  on  the  cascabel,  the  boring  shaft  inserted  in  the 
hollow  leading  bar,  and  its  movable  centre  placed  on  the  mark.  The  instru 
ment  is  then  set  vertical,  by  a  spirit-level  on  the  cogged  driving-wheel,  and 
the  four  pairs  of  set  screws  on  the  clamp-head  embracing  the  cascabel. 

The  centre  is  then  removed,  and  a  drill  inserted  in  the  lower  extremity  of 
the  boring-shaft,  which,  being  held  firmly  by  a  shoulder  and  turned  by  a 
four-armed  wrench,  while  pressed  up  to  the  metal  by  slowly  turning  the 
cogged  driving-wheel,  cuts  the  hole.  This  is  successively  enlarged,  by  two 
or  more  counterbits,  to  the  size  of  the  body  of  the  screw. 

The  cutter  is  then  inserted  in  the  leading  bar,  and  the  thread  cut. 


ADJUSTMENT  OF  THE  SIGHTS. 

39.  The  bore  having  been  thoroughly  cleaned,  the  axis  is  levelled  by  a 
spirit-level ;  this  may  be  very  conveniently  done  by  the  aid  of  the  levcll ing-bar. 
The  axis  of  the  trunnions  is  to  be  laid  horizontal,  either  by  placing  a  small 
level  on  the  trunnions,  or,  as  more  exact,  by  using  the  trunnion-square.  If 
the  trunnion-square  is  used  it  will  be  proper  to  verify  the  position  of  the  line 
of  sight,  which  is  frequently  incorrectly  placed  at  the  foundries. 

The  breech-sight  is  then  to  be  adjusted. 

A  brass  head  or  tompion,  fitted  with  a  vertical  arm,  on  which  there  is  a 
ledge  for  a  spirit-level,  is  then  introduced  into  the  bore,  and  the  arm  placed 
vertical  by  the  spirit-level  and  a  tangent  screw.  • 

The  arm  is  pierced  on  its  centre  line  with  two  holes — one  at  the  height 

of  the  prescribed  diameter  of  the  muzzle,  the  other  at  a  height  equaj  to  the 

proper  distance  of  the  bottom  of  the  sight-notch  from  the  axis  of  the  bore. 

A  waxed  thread  or  fine  wire,  being  stretched  from  the  upper  hole  to  the 

13 


28  ORDNANCE  AND  ORDNANCE  STORES. 

centre  of  the  sight-notch,  will  coincide  with  the  line  of  "sight  traced  on  the 
swell  of  the  muzzle,  the  top  of  the  reinforce  sight-mass,  and  the  base-line,  if 
they  are  correctly  placed.  It  will  also  be  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  bore  if 
the  adjustment  of  the  breech-sight  is  exact,  and  the  top  of  the  reinforce-sight 
is  made  to  coincide  with  it. 

This  is,  however,  seldom  the  case,  and  after  the  adjustment  of  the  reinforce- 
sight  it  is  necessary  to  verify  it. 

This  is  done  by  the  levelling-bar — a  square  steel  bar  with  parallel  faces, 
somewhat  longer  than  the  distance  between  the  sights,  the  rear  end  of  which 
is  bevelled  at  60°  (the  angle  at  which  the  sight  is  placed). 

The  outer  end  of  this  bar  is  placed  on  the  reinforce-sight.  which  has  been 
previously  adjusted  to  the  proper  height,  and  the  bevelled  end  in  contact 
with  the  outer  face  of  the  sight-bar.  The  bar  is  then  levelled  by  two  screws 
placed  near  the  inner  end,  and  a  spirit-level  on  its  upper  surface. 

If  then  the  bottom  of  the  sight-notch  coincides  with  the  bottom  of  the 
bar,  the  line  of  sight  is  parallel  to  the  axis ;  otherwise,  the  reinforce-sight 
or  the  sight-bar  must  be  lowered  until  coincidence  is  obtained. 

A  centre  line  on  the  bar  verifies  the  coincidence  of  the  line  of  sight,  and 
also  the  motion  of  the  sight-bar  in  the  vertical  plane.  The  bevel  verifies  the 
angle  of  the  bar ;  and  the  distance  between  the  outer  faces  of  the  sight-notch 
and  of  the  reinforce-sight,  being  also  marked  on  the  levelling-bar,  verifies 
this  adjustment. 

Another  method  is  sometimes  and  more  advantageously  used  in  adjusting 
the  sights  of  guns  which  have  not  been  turned. 

Two  iron  or  wooden  disks  are  turned  to  the  exact  diameter  of  the  bore, 
and  placed  on  a  rod  two  or  three  feet  longer  than  the  bore.  One  of  the 
disks  is  placed  near  the  bottom  of  the  bore,  the  other  just  within  the  muzzle. 
On  the  part  projecting  beyond  the  muzzle  there  is  a  double  square,  each  arm 
of  which  is  divided  into  equal  parts  and  traversed  by  a  fine  slit. 

The  square  being  set  vertical  by  a  spirit-level  or  plumb-line,  and  a  waxed 
thread  or  wire  stretched  taut  from  the  outer  arm  through  the  slit,  cutting 
equal  divisions  on  each,  and  passing  through  the  centre  of  the  slit,  it  is  evi 
dent  that  a  line  of  sight  is  obtained  through  the  centre  of  metal  and  parallel 
to  the  axis  of  the  bore. 

This  method  has  the  advantage  of  adjusting  the  sights  in  any  plane  paral 
lel  to  the  axis,  as  in  the  case  of  the  side-sights  of  rifled  and  other  cannon. 

4  ADJUSTMENT  OF  THE  SIDE-SIGHTS. 

40*  The  gun  having  been  levelled,  and  the  trunnions  placed  horizontal,  a 
centre  line  is  to  be  drawn  on  the  top  of  the  left  (or  right)  rimbase. 

The  support  for  the  sight  is  then  to  be  fitted  to  the  breech,  at  the  dis 
tance  from  this  line  marked  on  the  pattern-sight  for  its  calibre,  with  the 


PREPARATION  OF  GUNS  FOR  SERVICE.  29 

bottom  of  the  sight-notch  in  the  bar,  exactly  the  height  of  the  front  sight 
(one  inch)  above  the  upper  surface  of  the  rimbase ;  the  sio-ht-bar  perpen- 

i  •         1  O  1         A 

dicular. 

It  is  advisable  to  place  a  very  thin  sheet  of  rubber  under  the  support,  to 
prevent  the  heads  of  the  screws  from  being  jumped  off  by  the  vibration. 
The  screws  have  the  same  thread  as  those  for  the  present  reinforce- sio-ht. 

After  the  breech-sight  is  adjusted,  a  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  bore  is  to 
be  drawn  in  the  usual  manner,  and  the  front  sight  screwed  in  on  the  rim- 
base. 

Some  trifling  adjustment  may  then  be  required,  to  bring  the  height  of  the 
top  of  the  front  sight  and  the  bottom  of  the  sight-notch  parallel  to  the  axis 
of  the  bore  in  both  the  horizontal  and  vertical  planes. 


30  ORDNANCE  AND   ORDNANCE  STORES. 


PKESEKVATIOJST  OF  GUNS. 

41.  Guns   received  at  Navy  Yards  are  to  be  carefully  placed  on  the 
ranges  of  masonry,  capped  with  iron  skids  or  bars.     It  is  intended  that 
these  shall  be  so  high  that  the  guns  may  be  rolled  upon  them  without  their 
trunnions  touching  the  ground,  and  that  the  earth  will  not  be  beaten  up 
against  their  muzzles  by  heavy  rains. 

42.  The  surface  over  which  guns  are  to  be  stowed  should  be  kept  firm 
and  clear  of  all  vegetation,  and  for  this  purpose  should  be  covered  with 
cinders  from  the  smiths'  forges,  or  other  substance  unfavorable  to  or  de 
structive  of  the  growth  of  plants  and  grasses. 

48.  In  stowing  the  guns  they  should  be  made  to  rest  on  one  of  the  skids 
or  bars,  a  little  forward  of  the  base-ring,  the  muzzle  depressed,  but  not  so 
much  as  to  prevent  the  use  of  the  sponge  to  clean  out  the  gun  ;  the  axis  of 
the  trunnion  of  each  to  be  inclined  the  same  way,  and  just  enough  not  to 
touch  the  adjoining  gun ;  the  vents  to  be  upwards. 

44.  Before  the   stowage  is  finally  made  they  should  be  carefully,  and 
thoroughly  cleaned  from  rust  and  all  improper  coatings,  and  be  lacquered 
internally  and  externally  with  such  composition  as  may  be  directed  by  the 
Bureau.     This  should  be  applied,   when  practicable,   when  the  guns  are 
well  warmed  by  the  rays  of  the  sun.      The  vents  and  all  screw-holes  are 
to  be  stopped  with  plugs  made  of  soft  wood  or  oakum  dipped  in  tallow, 
after  they  have   been    protected  by   an   application   of  beeswax  dissolved 
in  spirits  of  turpentine,  or  other  composition  that  may  be  directed  by  the 
Bureau. 

45.  No  tompions  are  to  be  put  into  the  guns  when  they  are  stowed  unless 
expressly  directed  by- the  Bureau;  if  so  ordered,  a  score  must  be  cut  out 
from  them  on  the  lower  side,  half  an  inch  wide  and  equally  deep. 

46.  In  lacquering  guns  care  is  to  be  taken  to  leave  the  distinguishing 
marks  and  numbers  distinctly  visible. 

47.  Shell-guns  are   always  to  be  denominated  by  the  diameter  of  the 
bore ;  shot-guns  by  the  weight  of  their  shot. 

48.  Guns  of  the  same  calibre  and  class,  when  it  can  be  conveniently  done, 
are  to  be  stowed  in  the  same  tier  or  range,  and  those  of  each  class  belonging 
to  or  selected  for  any  particular  vessel  kept  together.     Each  tier  or  range 
of  guns  of  a  particular  calibre,  or  class  is  to  be  marked  accordingly  with 
paint  on  a  vsign-board,  and  the  first  gun  of  each  class  belonging  to  a  vessel 
is  to  be  marked  with  the  name  of  the  vessel 


PKESEKVATION   OF   GUNS.  81 

49.  The  Officer  on  Ordnance  duty  will  examine  all  the  guns  in  the  yard 
and  on  board  vessels  in  ordinary,  at  least  once  in  every  two  weeks,  and  take 
care  that  they  are  kept  protected  from  rust  or  any  other  injury,  and  will- 
report  to  the  Bureau  whenever  any  additional  precautions  or  arrangements 
are  required  for  their  proper  preservation,  and  which  may  not  be  furnished 
by  the  order  of  the  Commandant  of  the  Yard. 

50.  No  cutting,  boring,  or  chiselling  of  guns  is  to  be  done  at  any  time 
without  express  authority  from  the  Bureau. 

51.  No  condemnation  of  guns  or  small  arms  belonging  to  the  Navy  is 
to  be  made,  except  upon  surveys  specially  ordered,  and  confirmed  by  the 
Chief  of  the  Bureau  ;  nor  of  other  articles  which  have  been  furnished  under 
his  authority,  or  by  his  direction,  unless  by  surveys  ordered  or  sanctioned 
by  him. 

52.  When  guns  and  their  equipments  are  to  be  put  on  board  vessels 
for  their  armament,  the  guns  arc  to  be  carefully  and  thoroughly  cleaned 
and  examined,  to  see  that  they  are  in  all  respects  in  proper  serviceable 
condition. 

The  vents  should  be  examined  with  the  vent-gauges  and  searchers,  to  see 
that  they  are  clear  from  any  substance  which  may  obstruct  the  use  of 
priming-wires  and  primers. 

53.  The  carriages  are  also  to  be  carefully  examined,  the  trunnion-holes 
and  arms  of  the  axletrees  cleaned,  and  saturated  with  boiled  linseed  oil,  the 
cracks  filled  with  putty,  and  rubbed  smooth,  and  the  trunnion-holes  black- 
leaded.     The  iron  work  should  be  freed  from  rust,  all  screws   be  made  to 
work  easily,  and  be  well  cleaned  and  coated  with  proper  composition. 

54.  The  Ordnance  Officers  will  see  that  the  sights  are  properly  fitted 
and  marked  for  their  proper  guns.     The  greatest  care  should  be  taken  that 
they  are  properly  adjusted,  as  the  efficiency  of  the  ship  depends  on  it,  and 
it  is  difficult  to  detect  or  remedy  any  error  after  they  arc  placed  on  board ; 
that  the  beds  and  quoins  are  fitted  and  adjusted,  and  the  quoins  graduated 
to  degrees  or  distances  to  correspond  with  those  marked  on  the  sight-bars. 
Porter's  quoin  is  adopted  for  all  carriages  requiring  quoins. 

55.  New  guns  are  to  have  locks  fitted  to  them  before  being  put  on  board 
ship.     Those  having  two  lugs  will  have  the  one  on  the  right  fitted ;  the 
other  is  to  be  left  solid. 

56.  When  the  guns  are  to  be  shipped  for  transportation  merely,  the  samo 
precautions  arc  to  be  taken  to  guard  them  from  injury  as  on  shore,  with  the 
addition   of  a  wad   dipped  into  the  composition  which  covers  the  bore, 
thrust  into  the  muzzle,  and  connected  with  the  tompion  by  a  lanyard. 

In  the  transportation  of  guns  by  rail — unboxed — the  vents  arc  to  be 


32  ORDNANCE  AND   ORDNANCE   STORES. 

plugged  with  soft  wood,  puttied  over,  and  turned  vent  downwards  on  the 
trucks.     All  bronze  howitzers  transported  by  rail  shall  be  boxed. 

57t  At  the  termination  of  a  cruise  the  guns  composing  the  battery  of 
every  vessel- of- war  of  the  United  States,  shall  be  carefully  examined  by  the 
Ordnance  Officer  of  the  Yard,  and  such  others  as  may  be  directed,  with  tho 
view  to  discover  and  report  any  injuries  which  they  may  have  sustained  in 
service,  or  any  defects  which  may  not  have  been  developed  in  the  ori 
ginal  proof.  In  this  examination  the  attention  of  the  Inspecting  Officers  is 
to  be  directed  to  the  following  points,  viz. : 

Enlargement  of  the  interior  or  exterior  orifice  of  the  vent. 

Indentations  or  hollows  produced  by  the  shot  balloting  against  the  sur 
face  of  the  bore,  or  by  the  action  of  the  gases. 

Cuts  or  scratches  in  the  bore,  produced  by  fragments  of  broken  or  the 
roughness  of  imperfect  shot. 

Roughness  or  corrosion  of  the  metal  on  the  exterior,  produced  by  neglect 
or  exposure. 

Similar  injuries  in  the  bore,  or  any  enlargement  of  the  bore,  which  is  to 
be  ascertained  by  measuring  with  the  star-gauge,  at  every  one-fourth  (1)  of 
an  inch  from  the  bottom  of  the  cylindrical  part  to  the  seat  of  the  shot,  every 
inch  from  that  point  to  the  trunnion,  thence  every  5  inches  to  the  muzzle, 
and  the  results  recorded  in  the  usual'  form,  and  reported  to  the  Bureau, 
that  they  may  be  compared  with  those  noted  at  the  original  inspection. 

In  rifled  cannon,  cracks  or  injuries  produced  by  firing,  or  the  rupture  of 
shells,  are  to  be  sought  for : — 

Around  and  in  rear  of  the  vent  bouching ; 

On  the  top  of  the  bore,  between  the  trunnions  and  reinforce  band. 

On  the  lower  side  of  the  bore,  near  the  seat  of  the  shot,  at  the  junc 
tion  of  the  lands  and  grooves. 

Near  the  inside  of  the  muzzle,  caused  by  explosion  of  shells. 

Care  is  to  be  taken  that  the  distinguishing  marks  and  numbers  are 
always  accurately  noted,  that  the  correct  history  of  each  gun  may  be 
preserved. 

58*  Before  sailing,  the  Inspector  of  Ordnance  will  furnish  the  commander 
with  a  descriptive  list  of  his  battery,  together  with  a  statement  of  the  num 
ber  of  times  each  gun  on  board  has  been  fired,  in  the  following  form  ;  a 
copy  of  which  the  commander  shall  transmit  to  the  Bureau  before  sailing  : 
this  list  shall  be  returned  to  the  Inspector  of  the  Yard  to  which  she  may 
return,  with  all  additional  firing  noted  opposite  the  number  of  each  gun, 
certified  "  correct"  by  the  commander. 

In  the  list  furnished  by  the  Inspector,  if  the  "  number  of  fires"  is  esti 
mated,  it  is  to  be  entered  in  red  ink  (See  Arts.  02-64),  and  so  carried  for 
ward  in  the  subsequent  returns. 


EXAMINATION  OF   GUNS. 


33 


NAME    OF    VESSEL. 


STATION. 


CLASS  OF 
GUN. 

MARKS  ON  BASE-RING. 

TRUNNIONS. 

PIVOT,  OR 
BROADSIDE. 

WHERE 
RECEIVED. 

NUMBER  OF 
FIRES  TO 
DATE. 

Eeg.  No. 

Weight. 

Foundry. 

Eight. 

Left. 

Forwarded  by 


Commanding. 


59.  The  Bureau  directs  that,  whenever  a  gun  is  taken  on  board  a  vessel, 
the  number  of  rounds  which  have  been  fired  from  it  be  ascertained  by  the 
Commander,  a  record  made  thereof,  and  forwarded  with  the  descriptive  list, 
in  the  above  form,  to  the  Bureau ;  and  whenever  a  gun  is  landed  or  trans 
ferred  to  another  vessel,  a  similar  record  is  to  be  furnished  the  officer  re 
ceiving  it,  which  must  be  stated  in  the  receipt  for  the  gun,  and  a  copy  for 
warded  to  the  Bureau  of  Ordnance  by  the  officer  delivering  the  gun. 

Tho  Commander  shall  also  transmit  to  the  Bureau  a  quarterly  return, 
according  to  the  prescribed  form  (See  Appendix  B,  No.  X.)  of  all  firing 
whether  with  or  without  projectiles,  in  action  or  otherwise  ;  noting  particu 
larly  the  kind  of  shell,  species  of  fuze,  kind,  charge,  and  name  of  maker  of 
the  powder  used  in  the  gun  and  shell.  He  shall  take  care  to  note  also  the 
number  of  premature  explosions  of  shells,  and  the  point  at  which  they  take 
place,  with  the  supposed  causes  thereof. 

60.  The  Inspector  will  also  furnish  the  commander  with  a  set  of  leaden 
impressions  of  the  interior  orifice  of  the  vents  of  the  guns,  secured  in  a  suit 
able  box,  that  he  may  be  able  to  compare  the  wear  and  gradual  enlarge 
ment.     These  will  be  transferred  with  the  guns  to   other  ships  or  when 
landed. 

61.  The  protracted  firing  to  which  the  Navy  cannon  have  been  subjected, 
and  to  which  they  will  continue  to  be  liable,  renders  it  necessary  not  to  ex 
ceed  the  number  of  fires  designated  for  each  vent. 

These  must  never  exceed  five  hundred  (500)  fires  for  each  vent. 
In  the  IX-in.,  XI-in.,  and  guns  of  similar  form,  the  right  vent  is  always 
bored  through,  and  the  left  initiated  sufficiently  to  give  it  direction. 

When  five  hundred  (500)  rounds  have  been  fired  from  the  right  vent,  it 


34  ORDNANCE   AND   ORDNANCE   STORES. 


is  to  be  closed  by  filling  it  with  molten  zinc  or  lead,  and  the  left  vent  is  to 
be  bored,  which  will  require  a  skilful  mechanic. 

When  the  left  vent  has  been  fired  five  hundred  (500)  rounds,  the  gun  is 
to  be  disused,  as  it  will  then  have  been  fired  one  thousand  (1,000)  times. 

It  may  happen,  from  some  peculiarity  in  the  nature  of  the  iron,  that 
the  vent  may  be  worn  to  its  full  extent  before  five  hundred  (500)  rounds 
have  been  fired,  in  which  case  the  vent  is  then  to  be  closed,  and  the  other 
vent  opened. 

The  gun  should  be  frequently-  and  critically  examined  inside  and  out 
for  cracks  or  defects,  especially  about  the  interior  orifice  of  the  vent,  of  which 
impressions  should  be  taken  after  every  ten  shotted  rounds  in  practice,  and 
at  the  close  of  an  action. 

The  instrument  described  on  p.  16  is  convenient,  but  by  no  means  indis 
pensable — any  small  spar,  such  as  a  boat's  mast,  or  even  the  rammer  handle 
with  a  curved  piece  of  wood  seized  to  the  end,  will,  in  expert  hands,  take 
an  impression  of  the  vent  or  crack  equally  well. 

62.  As  the  best  indication  of  the  amount  of  firing  to  which  any  smooth- 
bored  gun  has  been  exposed,  when  it  is  not  otherwise  known,  is  given  by 
the  enlargement  of  the  vent,  particular  attention  will  be  paid,  in  the  reinspec- 
tion  of  the  guns,  to  this  point.     The  standard  gauge  will  be  used  to  ascer 
tain  the  general  enlargement,  and  the  searcher  to  detect  defects  which  may 
have  been  developed  in  firing.     Impressions  are  to  be  taken  of  the  lower 
orifice  of  the  vent  with  softened  wax,  and  if  they  show  that  the  vent  is  cor 
roded  in  furrows  and  enlarged   considerably  in  diameter  at  its  junction  with 
the  bore,  a  permanent  impression  is  to  be  taken  in  lead  to  show  the  coni 
cal  enlargement.     (See  mode  of  taking  impressions,  Arts.  35  and  36.) 

63.  When  the  number  of  rounds  fired  is  not  known,  an  estimate  may  be 
made  from  an  examination  of  the  vent  by  cylindrical  gauges  differing  from 
each  other  by  .01  of  an  inch  passed  through  it.     If  the  number  is  estimated, 
it  is  to  be  entered  in  red  ink. 

64.  In  all  the  guns  of  the  Dahlgren  pattern  the  vents  are  (.2)  two-tentha 
of  an  inch  in  diameter.     In  all  other  guns  .22  of  an  inch  exterior,  .2  of  an 
inch  on  the  interior. 

Observation  of  the  wear  of  the  vent  in  proof  firing  of  smooth-bored 
guns  gives  the  following  as  the  average  diameter  of  the  vent,  after  the  un 
dermentioned  number  of  fires : 

No.  of  rounds  100  200  300  400  500 

Diameter  of  vent  .24  .26  .30  .35  .40 

These,  combined  with  examination  of  the  interior  orifice,  will  enable  a 
very  correct  judgment  to  be  formed  of  the  probable  number  of  fires  sustained 
and  duration  of  the  gun. 


EXAMINATION  OF  GUNS.  35 


The  larger  the  calibre  and  the  heavier  the  charge  the  more  promptly  the 
wear  is  manifested  on  the  interior  and  exterior. 

This  enlargement  does  not  extend  very  far  from  the  lower  orifice  until  the 
enlargement  on  the  exterior  has  reached  a  diameter  of  .3  of  an  inch. 

65.  So  long  as  the  wear  is  regular,  and  the  cracks,  although  numerous,  do 
not  exceed  .5  of  an  inch  in  length,  the  indications  are  good.     If  the  cracks 
are  but  few  or  diminish  in  number,  running  into  each  other  and  extending 
rapidly,  it  is  a  very  unfavorable  sign.     In  the  rifle  cannon  (Parrott's)  cracks 
athwart  the  bore  either  running  into  the  bouching  or  in  the  rear  of  it  are 
very  unfavorable  to  the  gun's  endurance. 

66.  Whenever  any  premature  explosions  of  shells  take  place  within  the 
gun  or  near  the  muzzle,  a  careful  examination  of  the  gun  shall  be  made ; 
and  all  the  circumstances  of  the  case,  together  with  the  opinions  of  the 
commander  and  officers  in  immediate   charge  as  to  the   cause  thereof,  re 
ported  to  the  Bureau ;  taking  care  to  state  the  kind  of  shell  and  species  of 
fuze  used ;  the  mode  of  loading ;  whether  the  shell  was  lined  or  coated  on 
the  interior  ;  kind,  charge,  and  name  of  maker  of  the  powder  which  was  i-sed 
in  the  gun  and  shell. 

There  is  reason  to  believe  that  few  failures  of  the  Parrott  rifles  have  oc 
curred  where  the  guns  have  not  been  previously,  or  at  the  time,  injuriously 
strained  by  the  explosion  of  shells  within  the  bore. 

67.  Whenever  a  gun  shall  give  away  under  fire,  or  an  accident  of  any 
kind  happen  to  one,  the  Bureau  desires  to  be  immediately  informed  of  all 
the  facts  in  relation  thereto. 

Particular  attention  should  be  paid  to  the  following  points : 

1.  The  manner  in  which  the  gun  was  loaded,  stating  the  charge  and  kind 
of  powder  used,  and  character  and  weight  of  projectiles. 

2.  The  condition  and  appearance  of  the  gun  after  it  gave  way,  and  what 
effect  was  produced  on  the  carriage  by  the  explosion. 

3.  What  injuries,  if  any,  occurred  to  the  crew  of  the  gun  or  vessel. 
Sketches  of  the  gun  and  fragments  which  remain  should  also  be  sent  to 

the  Ordnance  Yard  at  Washington  for  trial  of  density  and  tensile  strength, 
accompanied  by  the  written  statement  in  detail  of  the  officers  in  immediate 
charge  of  the  gun,  and  if  practicable  a  photograph  should  be  taken. 


3G  ORDNANCE   AND   ORDNANCE  STORES. 

INSPECTION  OF  SHOT  AND  SHELLS. 

RULES  AND  MEMORANDA  FOR  THE  GOVERNMENT  OP  INSPECTORS. 

68.  All  shot  and  shells  for  the  naval  service  must  be —      0 
1st.  Made  from  gray  or  mottled  charcoal  pig-iron. 

2d.  This  iron  must  not  be  blasted  with  anthracite  coal. 
3d.  It  must  be  poured  into  sand  moulds. 

69.  After  being  cast  in  this  manner,  the  shot  and  shells  must  be — 
1st.  Spherical. 

2d.  Smooth  on  the  surface. 

3d.   Free  from  the  defects  named  in  the  following  rules  for  the  use  of  the 
inspecting  instruments : 

FOR  SHOT. 

70.  INSPECTING  INSTRUMENTS. — One  large,  small,  and  one  medium  ring 
gauge,  and  one  cylinder-gauge  for  each  calibre.     The  cylinder-gauge  shall 
have  the  same  diameter  as  the  large  gauge,  made  of  cast  iron,  and  three 
calibres  in  length.     One  hammer  weighing  two  pounds,  and  having  a  flat 
face  and  a  conical  point ;    one  searcher,  of  steel  wire,  with  a  handle ;    one 
pair  of  calipers  and  standard  scale ;  one  cold  chisel ;  steel  punches. 

71.  After  having  been  well  cleaned,  each  shot  is  placed  upon  a  table,  and 
examined  to  see  that  its  surface  is  smooth,  and  that  the  metal  is  sound  and 
free  from  seams,  flaws,  and  blisters.     If  clusters  of  cavities  or  small  holes 
appear  on  the  surface,  strike  the  point  of  the  hammer  into  them,  and  ascer 
tain  their  depth  with  the  searcher.     If  the  depth  of  the  cavity  exceeds  0.2 
inch,  the  shot  shall  be  rejected;    it  shall  also  be  rejected  if  any  attempt  is 
made  to  conceal  defects  by  plugging  or  filling  holes  in  any  mode  whatever. 

72.  The  shot  must  pass  in  every  direction  through  the  large  gauge,  and 
not  at  all  through  the  small  one ;   the  calipers  and  scale  will  determine  ex 
actly  the  difference  of  diameters  of  the  same  projectile. 

73.  The  ring  and  cylinder  gauges  shall  be  examined  before  each  inspec 
tion,  and  when  found  to  have  enlarged  0.01  of  an  inch,  must  be  laid  aside 
and  marked  as  unserviceable. 

74.  The  shot  are  next  to  be  passed  through  the  cylinder-gauge,  placed 
at  an  inclination  of  about  two  inches  between  the  ends,  arid  supported  in 
such  a  manner  as  to  be  easily  turned  from  time  to  time,  to  prevent  its  be 
ing  worn  in  furrows.     Shot  which  slide  or  stick  in  the  cylinder  shall  be 
rejected;  the  latter  must  be  pushed  out  from  the  lower  end  of  the  cylinder 
with  a  wooden  rammer. 


i  U"  '|_ji  K-jji;  ncfinr-^ 

llipoi  s  tor  thickness   at  rio 


•i<^hl 


ari^los  with   axis  of  luxe  hole 


'  iliickiioss 
at  i'uxc  Loir. 


GftXLge  lor  thickness  opposite  tm,p  hole. 


PRINCIPAL     INSPECTING     INSTRUMENTS    FOR    SHELLS 


D.  VwNosfr  'aitd.PubU.-ih  <>  r 


Julius  Bieiis, 


INSPECTION   OF   SHOT  AND  SHELLS.  37 


75,  The  next  proof  of  shot  is  to  drop  a  few  taken  indiscriminately  from 
the  lot  under  inspection  from  a  height  of  twenty  feet  on  a  solid  platform  of 
iron,  or  roll  them  down  an  inclined  plane  of  the  same  height  against  a  mass 
of  iron ;  after  which  they  are  again  examined  for  defects  of  metal. 

76,  The  average  weight  of  shot  shall  be  determined  by  weighing  at  least 
three  parcels,  of  from  20  to  50  each,  taken  indiscriminately  from  the  lot. 
As  many  of  the  lightest  shall  be  weighed  separately  as  the  inspecting  offi 
cer  may  deem  necessary,  and  all  found  to  fall  below  the  least  weight  allowed 
in.  the  annexed  table  of  the  dimensions  of  shot  and  shells  shall  be  rejected. 
Shot  made  of  charcoal  iron  will  be  stamped  with  a  *  or  "  burr"  near  the 
gate. 

SHELLS. 

77,  Shells  should  be  cast  on  a  half-inch  hollow  spindle,  to  allow  the  gas 
to  pass  freely  from  the  core  ;   the  fuze-hole  would  then  be  sufficiently  large 
to  admit  the  gauge  for  thickness  before  the  shells  leave  the  foundry. 

78,  INSPECTING  INSTRUMENTS. — In  addition  to  the  instruments  for  shot, 
there  will  be  required  calipers  with  steel  points  for  measuring  the  thickness 
of  the  shell  at  points  on  the  great  circle  at  right  angles  with  the  axis  of  the 
fuze-hole ;  gauges  for  the  thickness  at  and  opposite  the  fuze-hole  ;  a  conical 
flat  steel  gauge  for  the  fuze-hole,  marked  at  the  point  to  which  it  should  enter ; 
a  pair  of  strong  hand-bellows,  with  a  wooden  plug  to  fit  the  fuze-hole  and 
the  nozzle  air-tight.      (See  Plate.) 

INSPECTION. 

79,  The  surface  of  the  shell  and  its  exterior  dimensions,  form,  weight, 
and  strength,  are  to  be  examined  and  tested  as  in  the  case  of  shot,  and  sub 
ject  to  all  the  conditions  there  specified. 

80,  The  greatest  care  is  to  be  taken  to  remove  every  particle  of  sand  or 
fragment  of  iron  from  the  interior  when  they  are  about  to  be  loaded  for 
service.     And  the  Inspectors  of  Ordnance  at  foundries  or  Navy  Yards  will 
satisfy  themselves  that  this  has  been  done  before  accepting  or  preparing 
them  for  service. 

81,  The  shell  is  next  struck  with  a  hammer,  to  judge  by  the  ring  or 
sound  whether  it  is  free  from  cracks ;   and  the  exterior  and  interior  diame 
ters  of  the  fuze-hole  (which  should  be  accurately  reamed)  are  to  be  verified, 
and  the  soundness  of  the  metal  about  the  inside  of  the  fuze-hole  ascertained. 
To  determine  the  thickness  of  the  metal,  three  points,  at  least,  on  the  great 
circle  at  right  angles  to  the  axis  of  the  fuze-hole  are  to  be  measured ;    also 
one  at  the  fuze-hole  and  one  at  the  bottom.     No   shell   shall  be  received 
which  deviates  more  than  one-tenth  of  an  inch  from  the  proper  thickness 
in  any  part. 


38  ORDNANCE   AND    ORDNANCE   STORES. 

82.  The  shell  is  next  placed  in  a  tub  of  water,  which  should  be  deep 
enough  to  completely  cover  the  shell.     Air  is  then  forced  by  the  bellows 
into  the  shell.     If  there  are  any  holes  in  it,  air-bubbles  will  rise  on  the  sur 
face  of  the  water,  and  the  shell  shall  be  rejected. 

83.  This  occasionally  occurs  from  the  escape  of  air  from  porous  spots 
which  do  not  extend  to  the  interior  of  the  shells.     In  this  case  the  action  of 
the  bellows  produces  no  increase  of  bubbles,  which  cease  rising  as  soon  as 
the  spots  or  cavities  are  filled  with  water.     Porous  spots  are  also  detected 
by  their  absorbing  water  and  drying  slowly  when  exposed  to  the  air,  and 
shall  likewise  cause  the  rejection  of  the  shell. 

84.  The  Inspecting  Officers  will  stamp  the  shell  at  one  inch  from  the  fuze- 
hole  with  their  initials,  also  those  of  the  foundry  at  which  thoy  arc  cast. 

The  Inspector  or  one  of  his  assistants  must  be  present  when  shot  or  shell 
are  inspected  ;  and  the  stamps  and  marks  arc  always  to  be  retained  in  the 
possession  of  the  Inspector. 

85.  Rejected  shells  are  to  be  mutilated  by  chipping  a  piece  out  at  the 
fuze-hole. 

86.  If,  upon  the    inspection  of   shot  or  shells,  any  of  them  should  be 
found  not  to  conform  strictly  to  these  instructions  or  to  the  requirements 
of  the  contract  under  which  they  are  offered  for  reception,  the  Inspecting 
Officer  is  not  to  receive  them ;    but  if,  in  his  opinion,  the  defects,  taken  in 
connection  with  the  general  character  of  the  articles,  will  not  impair  their 
efficacy  or  render  them  unsafe  or  hazardous,  he  may  refer  to  the  Chief  of  the 
Bureau  of  Ordnance  for  his  decision,  forwarding  to  him  minute  and  full 
information  on  the  subject. 

87.  Shot  and  shells  shall  be  delivered  for  inspection  at  the  places  speci 
fied  in  the  contract,  at  the  expense  of  the  contractor ;    and  those  which  are 
rejected  shall  be  immediately  removed,  also  at  his  expense. 


SHOT  AND  SHELL   GAUGES. 


88, 


TABLE  OF  SHOT  AND  SHELL  GAUGES. 
SHOT. 


DIMENSIONS,  WEIGHT. 

XV. 

(Cored.) 

XIII. 

XL 

• 
X. 

IX. 

8. 

32. 

Diameter  of  large  gauge  for  foundries. 
Diameter  of  small  gunge  for  foundries  . 
Mean  of  gauge  for  foundries  in. 

14.63 

14.77 
14.  SO 

12.83 
12.77 
12.80 

10.  F3 
10.77 
10.80 

1.88 

9.77 

<).so 

8.83 
8.77 
8.80 

7.  S3 
7.82 
7.85 

6.  '23 
C.22 
G.25 

Mean  w'ght  required  of  foundries.  Ibs. 

400. 

276. 

ICG. 

124. 

90. 

G5. 

32.5 

Least  weight  allowed  foundries...  Ibs. 

_ 

_ 

_ 

— 

— 

64.5 

82. 

Diameter  of   small  11  st  class  in. 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

_ 

7  $2 

6.22 

gauges  for  service,  j  2cl  class  in. 

- 

- 

- 

- 

~ 

7.  SO 

6.20 

89, 


SHELL. 


DIMENSIONS,  WEIGHT. 

XV. 

XIII. 

XI. 

X. 

IX. 

8. 

32. 

Diameter  of  large  gauge  for  foundries. 
Diameter  of  small  gauge  for  foundries. 
Mean  of  gauge  for  foundries  in. 
(Proper.  in. 

14.83 

14.77 
14.80 
2.85 

12.83 
12.77 
12.80 
2.37 

10.87 
10.83 
10.85 
2 

9.87 
9.83 
9.85 
1.80 

8.87 
8.83 
8.85 
l.cO 

7.SS 
7.82 
7.85 
1  .50 

6.  28 
6.22 
6.25 
1.25 

Thickness   <  Greatest          .       ...in. 

2.95 

2.47 

2.10 

1.90 

1.70 

1.60 

1.85 

|  Least                            in 

2.75 

2.27 

1.90 

1.70 

1.50 

1.40 

1.15 

Diameter  of  fuze-  j  Proper  and  least.  . 
hole  |  Greatest  

.G5 

.75 

.65 

.75 

.65 
.75 

.65 
.75 

.65 
.75 

.65 
.75 

.65 
.75 

Diameter  of  large  gauge  for  strapped. 
Mean  w'ght  required  for  foundries  .  lbs. 

14.93 
330. 

12.93 
208. 

10.93 
127. 

9.93 
95. 

8.93 
68.50 

7.93 
50. 

6.33 
25. 

Least  weight  allowed  foundries  for 

any  one     lbs. 

_ 

126. 

94. 

67.50 

40. 

24.5 

Weight  of  filled  and  sabotted  lbs. 

352. 

216.5 

185.5 

101.50 

73.50 

52.75 

26.5 

For  gauges  of  boat-gun  fixed  ammunition,  see  Boat  Armament  of  United  States  Navy,  by  Admiral 
Dahlgren,  2d  edition,  1856. 


90. 


SHRAPNEL. 


DIMENSIONS,  WEIGHT. 

XV. 

XL 

X. 

IX. 

8. 

82. 

24. 

12. 

Mean  of  (  Gauge  in. 
empty  <  Thickness  .    .  .  .in. 
case...  |  Weight  Ibs. 
(  Number  

14.80 
1.25 

178. 
1000. 

10.85 
1. 
76. 
625. 

9.85 
.87 
57. 
435. 

8.85 
.75 
83. 
850. 

7.85 
.69 
29. 
220. 

6.25 
.60 
15. 
285.  lead 

5.f,7 
.55 

11. 
175.  lead 

4.52 
.45 

6.5 
SO.  lead 

Balls  -<  Diameter                 in. 

1 

.85 

.85 

.65 

.85 

.05 

.65 

.65 

(  Weight  Ibs. 
Sulphur  Ibs. 
Bursting  charfe  oz. 

140. 
80. 

10. 

10! 

6. 

83.5 

8.5 
4. 

27. 

17, 
6. 
2.5 

14. 
2.25 
1.25 

10.5 
1.5 
450.  grs. 

4.75 
.75 

350.  grs. 

Weight  complete.  ..  |       H 
»       sabotted....  \  "lbs- 

858. 

141. 

101. 

75. 

52. 

32. 

24. 

12. 

91,   DIMENSIONS  OF  SABOTS  AND  STRAPS  FOR  SHELL  AND  SHRAPNEL. 


DIMENSIONS,  WKIGIIT. 

XV. 

XIII. 

XL 

X. 

IX. 

8. 

82. 

24. 

12. 

Thickness                   ...           in. 

5. 

4  50 

2  75 

2.75 

2-40 

2. 

1.50 

1.90 

1.50 

Diameter..  -jg£est  £ 

14.25 
14  25 

12.25 
12  °5 

10.50 
10  50 

9.50 
9  50 

8-60 
8'60 

6.90 
6.30 

6. 
5.50 

5.  TO 
5.55 

4.60 

4.40 

Depth  of  saucers  in. 
Weights                                      .       .lbs. 

2.50 
8.90 

2.25 
5  50 

1.80 
2  70 

1.60 
2.40 

1-40 
1-85 

1.20 

.90 

1. 
.50 

1.50 
.46 

l.SO 
22 

I  Length                       in 

25  75 

22  5 

17  25 

17  25 

14-75 

10.25 

7.625 

6.375 

Shell-straps..-}  Width  in. 
(Tin.                No. 

1.25 
XXD 

1. 
XXD 

.75 
XXD 

.75 
XXD 

•75 
IX 

.75 
IX 

.625 
1C 

.50 
1C 

.875 
1C 

Tacks                                           .       No 

20 

16 

12 

12 

8 

8 

i 

4 

4 

40 


ORDNANCE   AND   ORDNANCE   STORES 


92, 


GRAPE. 


DIMENSIONS,  WEIOHT. 

XV. 

*L 

34.75 

89.10 
15. 
3.55 
125.08 

X. 

IX. 

8. 

32. 

24. 

12. 

ElFLB. 

20. 

12. 

Weiitht  of  stand  Ibs. 
Weight  of  balls..  .                 Ib3 

- 

26.10 
71.70 
15. 
3.34 
98.62 

20.4 
52  20 
18. 
2.80 
74.10 

15.7 
37  12 
IS. 
2.50 
53.25 

S.75 
24.80 
12. 
2.50 
33.50 

Number  of  balls 

Diameter  of  balls  in 

Weight  complete        .     .     Ibs 

CANISTER. 


DIMENSIONS,  WEIGHT. 

XV. 

XI. 

X. 

IX. 

8. 

32. 

24. 

12. 

Windage,  in. 

.25 

.25 

.25 

.25 

.25 

.25 

.15 

.15 

„  .  ,  .    (Empty  case  in. 
Hel«ht  (  Finished  in. 

15.50 
14. 

13.50 
12. 

11.75 
10.5 

10* 

9.5 

9.75 
8.75 

8.65 
7.75 

5. 
6. 

3.  85 
5. 

Case  notched,  and  1             . 
turned  over,  f  " 

.75 

.75 

.65 

.50 

.50 

.45 

4.65 

3.52 

Thickness    of  I  ^J(iJ0  '-  '{jj' 

1 

4 

I 

4 

.75 

.50 

.35 

.3 

hettd  )  Bottom.'.!  in. 

2. 

I1 

1. 

1. 

.75 

.50 

1.90 

1.90 

(Rod  in. 

H 

i 

4 

i 

•Wnt  J  diameter..  in. 
NuM  thickness.  in. 

2.75 
1.50 

1  75 
1. 

175 
1. 

1-75 
1. 

Bale  in. 

f 

JL 

f 

f 

Metal    and)  Iron  No. 

20. 

25 

25 

25 

thickness)  Tin                No 

XXD 

XXD 

T^l 

10 

(  Number.  

600. 

315. 

290 

230. 

162. 

100. 

89. 

89. 

Balls.  •<  Diameter        in. 

1  30 

1  30 

1.30 

1-30 

1  30 

1  30 

1  30 

1 

(  Weight  Ibs. 

150. 

85. 

70. 

65. 

45. 

23. 

12.5 

5.85 

Weight  finished  Ibs. 

207. 

120. 

98. 

70. 

50. 

30. 

14.55 

7.75 

NOTE. — Bottom  of  XV-inch  canister,  of  two  thicknesses  of  oak,  ash,  or  beech,  crossing  each  other; 
put  together  with  wrought-iron  nails,  clinched;  spindle  riveting  on  the  bottom  through  a  3  inches 
iquare  plate,  J  thick ;  cast-iron  hexagonal  nut,  with  wroueht-iron  bale. 

For  XI,  X,  and  IX-mch,  bottom-head  one  thickness  of  one-inch  oak,  ash,  or  beech;  spindle  riveting 
on  a  plate  H  inches  wide,  by  i  thick,  running  across  the  grain  tho  whole  width  of  bottom,  with  a  rivet 
at  each  end  of  plate.  . 

Top  and  centre  heads  of  all  made  of  white  pine. 

Iron  caecs  to  bo  well  painted  inside  with  red  before  filling. 

94.  Shot  of  the  first  class,  or  which  do  not  exceed  0.18  of  an  inch 
windage,  are  to  be  entirely  black,  and  those  of  the  second  class,  having  frSm 
0.18  to  0.20  of  an  inch  windage,  to  be  marked  partly  white.  Each  class  is 
to  be  piled  and  kept  separate  from  every  other.  Both  classes  are  to  bo 
considered  and  supplied  as  "  serviceable  shot ;"  but  are  to  be  stowed  .sepa 
rately  on  board  ship,  and  the  returns  to  the  Bureau  are  to  show  the  number 
of  each,  respectively.  The  number  of  those  having  more  than  0.20  of  an 
inch  windage  are  to  be  reported  and  retained  until  special  orders  may  be 
given  for  their  disposition.  In  case  any  should  be  taken  as  the  foundation 
for  piling  serviceable  shot,  they  are  to  be  painted  entirely  white  and  their 
number  returned  as  unserviceable. 


PILING   OF  BALLS.  41 


PILING  OF  BALLS. 

95.  To  find  the  number  of  bulls  in  a  pile — Multiply  the  sum  of  the 
three  parallel  edges  by  one-third  of  the  number  of  balls  in  a  triangular  face. 

In  a  square  pile  one  of  the  parallel  edges  contains  but  one  ball ;  in  a 
triangular  pile  two  of  the  edges  have  but  one  ball  in  each.  The  number  of 

balls  in  a  triangular  face  is  — —  — ' ;   x  being  the  number  in  the  bottom 

row.  The  sum  of  the  three  parallel  edges  in  a  triangular  pile  is  x  +  2  ;  in 
a  square  pile,  2  x  -+- 1 ;  in  an  oblong  pile,  3X-f2z — 2;  X  being  the 
length  of  the  top  row,  and  x  the  width  of  the  bottom  tier ;  or  3m — x  -f  1  ; 
m  being  the  length,  x  the  width  of  the  bottom  tier. 

If  a  pile  consists  of  two  piles  joined  at  a  right  angle,  calculate  the  con 
tents  of  one  as  a  common  oblong  pile,  and  of  the  other  as  a  pile  of  which 
the  three  parallel  edges  are  equal. 


4:2 


ORDNANCE   AND   ORDNANCE   STORES. 


TABLE  GIVING    THE  NUMBER  OF    BALLS  IN  A  TRIANGULAR  PILE,  THE 
BASE  OF  WHICH  is  X. 


VALUB  OF 

VALUE  OF 

VALUE  OF 

VALUE  OF 

VALUE  OF 

X. 

8. 

X. 

S. 

X. 

S. 

X. 

S. 

X. 

9. 

1 

1 

6 

56 

11 

286 

16 

816 

21 

1771 

2 

4 

7 

84 

12 

364 

17 

969 

22 

2024 

3 

10 

8 

120 

13 

455 

18 

1140 

23 

2300 

4 

20 

9 

165 

14 

560 

19 

1330 

24 

2600 

5 

35 

10 

220 

15 

680 

20 

1540 

25 

2925 

97.  TABLE  GIVING  THE  NUMBER  OF  BALLS  CONTAINED  IN  A  SQUARE 
PILE,  THE  BASE  OF  WHICH  is  X,  AND  IN  A  RECTANGULAR  PILE,  THE 
SIDES  OF  WHICH  ARE  X  AND  X  +  N. 


M 
S 

H 

2 
3 
4 
5 

DIFFER 
ENCES. 

VALUE  OF  N. 

DIFFER 
ENCES. 

2d. 

1st. 

0. 

1. 

2. 

3. 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 

10. 

1st, 

3 
6 
10 
15 

2d. 

3 
4 
5 
6 

7 
9 
11 
13 

9 
16 
25 
36 

5 

14 
80 
53 

8 
20 
40 
30 

11 
26 
50 
85 

14 
82 
60 
100 

17 

88 
70 
115 

20 
44 
80 
130 

23 
50 
90 

145 

26 
56 
100 
160 

29 
62 
110 
175 

32 
68 
120 
190 

35 
74 
180 
205 

6 
7 
8 
9 
10 

11 
12 
13 
14 
15 

15 
17 
19 
21 
23 

~25~ 
27 
29 
81 
83 

49 
64 
81 
100 
121 

144 
159 
196 
225 
255 

91 
140 
204 
285 
885 

506 
650 
819 
1015 
1240 

112 
168 
240 
330 
440 

572 
728 
910 
1120 
1360 

133 
196 
276 
875 
495 

154 
224 
812 
420 
550 

175 
552 

848 
465 
605 

196 
280 
384 
510 
660 

217 
808 
420 
555 
715 

238 
836 
456 
100 
770 

259 
364 
492 
645 
825 

280 
392 
528 
690 
880 

301 
420 
564 
735 
935 

21 

28 
36 
45 
55 

1 

9 
10 
11 

13 
14 
15 
16 

638 
805 
1001 
1225 
1480 

704 
884 
1092 
1330 
1600 

770 
962 
1183 
1435 
1720 

838 
1040 
1274 
1540 
1840 

902 
1118 
1365 
1645 
1960 

968 
1196 
1456 
1750 
2080 

1034 
1274 
1547 

1855 
2200 

1100 
1352 
1638 
1960 
2320 

1166 
1430 
1729 
2065 
2440 

66 

78 
91 
105 
120 

16 
17 
IS 
19 
20 

85 
37 
39 
41 
43 

45 
47 
49 
51 
53 

286 
324 
361 
400 
441 

1496 
1785 
2109 
2470 
2870 

1632 
1938 
2280 
2660 
3080 

1768 
2091 
2451 
2S50 
3290 

1904 
2244 
2622 
3040 
8500 

2040 
2397 
2793 
3239 
8710 

2126 
2550 
2964 
8420 
3920 

2312 
2703 
3135 
8610 
4130 

2448 
2S56 
3S06 
3800 
4340 

2584 
3009 
3477 
3990 
4550 

2720 
3162 
3648 
4180 
4760 

2856 
8315 
3819 
4870 
4970 

136 
154 
111 
190 
210 

17 
18 
19 
20 
21 

21 
22 
23 

24 
25 

484 

529 
576 
625 
676 

3311 
3795 
4325 
4900 
8525 

3542 

4048 
4600 
5200  ' 
5850 

3773 
4301 
4876 
5500 
6175 

4004 
4554 
5152 
5800 
6500 

4235 
4S07 
5428 
6100 
6825 

4466 
5060 
5704 
6400 
7150 

4697 
5813 
3980 
6700 
7475 

4928 
5566 
6256 
7000 
7800 

5159 
5819 
6532 
7300 
8125 

5898 
6072 
6803 
7600 
8450 

5621 
6325 
70S4 
7900 
8775 

231 
253 
276 
300 
825 

22 
23 
24 
25 
26 

The  number  contained  in  a  square  pile  is  found  in  the  column  0  opposite  tho  number  X. 

In  a  rectangular  pile  let  the  smaller  side  be  19  =  X,  the  longer  side  be  26  =  X  +  N.  Then  If  =  7. 
Under  7  and  opposite  19  we  have  3,800.  This  tablo  may  bo  indefinitely  extended  by  the  aid  of  the  col 
umns  of  differences. 


PRESERVATION  OF  SHOT  AND   EMPTY  SHELL.  43 

PRESERVATION  OF  SHOT  AND  EMPTY  SHELL. 

98.  All  round  shot  and  shell  are  to  be  cleaned  from  rust  and  covered  with 
a  thin  lacquer  of  such  composition  as  may  be  directed  by  the  Bureau  when 
they  are  first  received  and  when  they  are  restowed. 

99.  For  the  present  the  following  colors  are  established  when  put  on 
board  ship:     All  shot,  black;    shell,  red ;    shrapnel,   white;   length  of  fuze 
stencilled  on  the  shell.     Special  kinds  of  shell,  as  may  be  directed  by  Bureau. 
(Crane's  shell,  yellow ;  Pevcy,  blue.) 

100.  Empty  shell,  whether  in  store  or  in  transportation,  shall  be  most  care 
fully  protected  from  damp,  and  are  to  have  the  fuze-bouching  coated  with 
such  composition  as  may  be  directed,  and  be  stopped  by  a  plug  of  very  soft 
wood,  well  coated  with  a  mixture  of  oil  and  tallow,  screwed  into  them.     The 
ends  of  the  plugs  should  not  be  sawed  off  even  with  the  shell,  but  left  square 
and  project  sufficiently  to  allow  them  to  be  unscrewed  by  means  of  a  wrench, 
and  whenever  these  plugs  are  removed  for  the  purpose  of  fitting  the  shells 
for  service,  they  are  not  to  be  thrown  away  but  preserved  for  future  use. 

They  are  to  be  piled  with  the  fuze-holes  down,  and  free  from  contact ; 
under  cover  when  practicable,  but  with  free  ventilation. 

101  •  Platforms  of  masonry,  or  of  condemned  shot,  are  to  be  prepared  to 
pile  shot  and  shell  upon,  and  are  not  to  be  wider,  if  space  can  be  found 
than  to  stow  fourteen  32-pdr.  shot,  or  not  exceeding  eight  feet  in  width. 
Square  piles  arc  to  be  preferred  where  there  is  room,  but  where  this  may  be 
deficient,  the  piles  may  be  extended  in  length. 

102.  Shot  and  shell,  after  having  been  piled,  are  to  be  so  far  examined  in 
the  first   week  of  June  in  each  year  as  to  ascertain  if  they  require  to  be 
cleaned,  rclacquercd,  and  rcpilcd  to  secure  their  proper  preservation ;    and 
their  condition  reported  to  the  Bureau,  that  if  any  work  upon  them  is  neces 
sary  it  may  be  finished  during  the  warm  months  of  the  year,  when  the  lac 
quer  can  be  best  applied. 

103.  Whenever  shot  or  shell  are  to  receive  lacquer  care  must  be  taken 
that  the  quantity  applied  does  not  increase  the  diameter  more  than  is  indis 
pensably  necessary,  and  in  no  case  above  the  established  high  gauge.     Old 
lacquer  and  rust  should  be  removed  by  scraping,  as  far  as  can  be  conveni 
ently  done  before  a  new  coating  is  applied.     For  use  at  the  Navy  Yards,  a 
milling  machine  performs  this  very  expeditiously.     Neither  hammering  nor 
heating  is  to  be  resorted  to  for  this  purpose. 


NOTE. — After  numerous  experiments  upon  different  lacquers  employed  for  the  preser 
vation  of  shot  and  shell  from  rust,  the  French  hare  abandoned  all  of  them. 

The  shot  and  shell  are  simply  piled,  under  sheds  when  practicable,  or  in  the  open  air, 
and  when  put  on  board  ship  cleaned  of  rust  and  rubbed  over  with  whale  oil — the  same 
means  adopted  every  three  months  during  the  cruise. 
14 


ORDNANCE  AND  OKDNANCE   STORES. 


PREPARATION  OF   SHELL  FOR  SERVICE. 

104.  The  fuzes  for  shell  will  be  prepared  at  the  Laboratory  in  the  Ordnance 
Yard  at  Washington,  and  distributed  to  other  Navy  Yards  as  they  may  be 
required.     All  fuzes  taken  from  shell,  or  returned  from  ships  which  have 
been  more  than  one  year  in  service,  are  to  be  sent  to  the  laboratory  to  be 
refitted.     Fuzes  of  over  two  years  date  of  manufacture,  are  not  to  be  issued 
for  service,  but  returned  to  the  laboratory. 

105.  The  charges  of  powder  for  spherical  shell  are  to  be  as  follows : 


G 

g 

> 

M 

d 

o 

<£, 

w 

X-INCII. 

_• 
3 

'£. 

M 

o 
£ 

CO 

d 

a 

§•! 

BOAT  AND  FIELD 
HOWITZERS. 

24-pdr. 

12-p'r. 

Bursting  or  Service  Charge  

Lbs. 
13. 
1.0 

Lbs. 
G.OO 
0.25 

Lbs. 
4.00 
0.25 

Lbs. 
3.00 
0.25 

Lbs. 
1.85 
0.25 

Lbs. 
0.90 
0-25 

Lbs. 
1.0 

Lbs. 
0.5 

Blowing  Charge  

NOTE — The  weight  of  charges  for  shells  will  vary  slightly  from  those  given  in  the  table 
according  to  the  size  of  the  grain  and  density  of  the  powder. 

106.  All  empty  shell,  whether  in  store  or  in  transportation,  shall  be  most 
carefully  protected  from  dampness,  and  their  fuze-holes  invariably  closed  with 
wooden  plugs.     Whenever  these  plugs  are  removed  for  the  purpose  of  fitting 
the  shells  for  service,  they  are  not  to  be  thrown  away,  but  preserved  for  future 
use.     If  by  any  accident  the  shell  should  be  damp  in  the  interior,  they  are 
to  be  heated  and  dried,  on  the  grillage  prepared  for  that  purpose, 

107.  The  number  of  shell  to  be  kept  fitted  at  the  Navy  Yards  will  be  deter 
mined  by  special  directions  from  the  Bureau. 

In  fitting  shell  to  receive  the  bouching,  great  carelessness  has  been 
observed.  The  hole  should  be  tapped  with  a  full  thread,  and  the  proper 
shoulder  left  at  the  bottom  to  prevent  the  bouching  from  being  driven  in 
by  the  shock  of  firing  and  causing  premature  explosion. 

108.  All  shell  shall  be  filled  with  musket-powder  of  the  highest  initial 
velocity.     The  shell  must  be  filled,  and  the  powder  well  shaken  down,  leav 
ing  only  room  for  the  insertion  of  the  fuze.     A  wooden  plug  the  size  of  the 
lower  part  of  the  fuze  will  always  determine  this.     The  very  common,  but 
slovenly,  practice  of  filling  the  shell,  and  then  pouring  out  a  quantity  suffi 
cient  to  allow  the  fuze  to  be  inserted,  is  expressly  prohibited.     Shell  have 
also  been  returned  with  the  powder  in  the  vicinity  of  the  fuze  compressed 
into  a  solid  mass,  owing  to  the  fact  that  sufficient  room  had  not  been  left 
for  its  insertion.     No  shell  shall  be  fuzed  unless  it  has  been  filled. 


PREPARATION  OF  SHELL  FOR  SERVICE.  45 


109.  The  date  when  shell  are  fuzed  or  filled,  as  well  as  that  on  which  any 
of  these  arrangements  are  changed,  or  the  shell  are  examined  before  issue  to 
vessels,  together  with  the  initials  of  the  officer  superintending  these  opera 
tions,  should  be  legibly  written  and  pasted  on  the  shell, or  stencilled  on  the 
box. 

110«  The  Ordnance  Officer,  or  the  Gunner  of  the  Yard,  is  to  see  the  shell 
supplied  to  all  vessels  properly  conveyed  on  board,  superintend  the  stowage, 
and  furnish  the  Commanding  Officer  with  a  statement  showing  the  number 
of  each  description  of  shell  and  fuze,  and  a  plan  of  their  stowage. 

111.  The  condition  of  the  shell,  and  especially  of  their  fuzes,  is  to  be  fre 
quently  and  carefully  examined  into,  taking  out  a  fuze  occasionally  so  as  to 
detect  any  injury  which  may  arise  from  moisture,  and  to  have  such  as  may 
be  found  damaged  replaced  by  the  spare  fuzes. 

Boat  shell  and  their  spare  fuzes  are  also  to  undergo  a  similar  examination. 
Shell  have  been  sometimes  returned  with  their  fuzes  entirely  destroyed 
by  moisture ! ! 

112.  It  has  been  found  recently,  on  drawing  the  charge  of  a  12-pounder 
howitzer  in  one  of  the  small  gunboats,  that  in  cutting  its  fuze  (Bormann)  the 
incision  had  been  made  directly  into  the  magazine. 

Had  the  gun  been  fired,  the  explosion  of  the  shrapnell  must  have  occurred 
at  the  muzzle  of  the  gun. 

There  is  no  doubt  such  errors  will  often  account  for  the  supposed  defects 
of  the  fuze. 

The  attention  of  officers  is  therefore  required  to  this  subject;  and,  in 
making  reports  of  defective  ammunition,  samples  should  be  forwarded  to 
Washington  for  examination. 

O 

It  is  of  the  gravest  importance,  not  only  because  it  involves  the  failure  of 
the  shell  to  act  properly  upon  the  object  of  fire,  but  may  also  endanger  the 
lives  of  our  own  men. 

113.  Whenever  it  is  expedient  or  necessary  to  examine    the  fuzes  and 
loading  of  shell  which  have  been   already  prepared,  great  care  must   be 
observed  in  removing  the  fuze.     It  should  never  be  done  in  the  shell-room. 

114.  The  fuze-stock  may  generally  be   safely  unscrewed  with  the  fuze- 
wrench,  taking  care,  in  the  first  place,  to  strike  the  side  of  the  shell  gently 
with  a  wooden  maUet,  to  detach  the    powder  from  the  fuze,  to  work  very 
slowly,  and  not  to  endeavor  to  overcome  any  unusual  resistance. 

115.  Whenever  it  shall  be  necessary  to  load    and  fuze   shell  on  board 
ship — a  properly  secured  place  being  first  prepared,  as  directed  by  the  Cap 
tain,  not  in  the  shell-room  and  as  far  from  the  magazine  as  convenient — the 
shell,  being  strapped  and  sabotted,  are  to  be  examined  to  see  that  they  are 
clean,  both  inside  and  out,  and  thoroughly  dry.     The  greatest  care  is  to  bo 


46  ORDNANCE  AND   OKDNANCE    STORES. 


taken  to  remove  every  particle  of  sand  or  fragment  of  iron  from  the  interior. 
The  prescribed  charge  of  powder  is  next  to  be  poured  into  them  through  a 
proper  funnel ;  care  is  to  be  taken  that  the  end  of  the  funnel  passes  below 
the  screw-thread  in  the  tap  or  bouching,  to  prevent  any  grains  of  powder 
entering  it ;  any  grains  of  it  which  may  remain  sticking  to  the  thread  of  the 
bouching  are  to  be  brushed  away  carefully,  and  then,  after  putting  a  light 
coat  of  lacquer  for  small  arms,  or  sperm  oil,  on  this  thread  and  on  that  of 
the  fuze,  the  latter  is  to  be  screwed  in  carefully  with  the  fuze-wrench.  The 
lacquer  should  be  of  the  consistency  of  cream,  and  when  from  evaporation, 
it  becomes  too  stiff,  should  be  thinned  by  adding  more  spirits  of  turpentine. 

116.  In  emptying  shell  they  are  to  be  handled  carefully  and  placed  on  a 
bench  with  a  hole  in  it  to  receive  and  support  the  inverted  shell.      A  wooden 
vessel  placed  below  will  receive  the  powder.      The  powder  which  has  been  re 
moved  from  shell  shall  only  be  used  for  filling  shell,  as  it  always  contains  a 
small  quantity  of  grit,  which  renders  it  unfit  for  general  service.      Should 
the  powder  have  become  caked,  so  as  not  to   be  easily  removed  from  the 
shell,  it  is  to  be  drowned  and  removed  by  washing  out  the  shell.     A  handful 
of  small  iron  shot  put  in  the  shell  will  facilitate  this  operation. 

117.  Loaded  shell  are  to  be  painted  red  and  placed  in  boxes  or  bags 
marked  with  a  red   cross,  which  boxes   are  to  have  the  lengths   of  fuze 
painted  on  them  in  black.     Shrapnel   shell  and  the  tops  of  their  boxes  shall 
be  painted  white,  with  the  length  of  fuze  stencilled  on  them  in  black.      They 
are  to  be  stowed  in  shell-houses  prepared  for  that  purpose.     Loaded  shell, 
whether  in  or  out   of  their  boxes,  must  be  handled  carefully.     Shell-bags 
will  be  preserved,  accounted  for  by  the  Gunner,  and  returned. 

118.  The  greatest  precaution  must  be   taken   in  handling  loaded  shells 
fitted  with  percussion-fuzes.     When  returned  from  ships  they  must  not  be 
taken  into  the  shell-houses  until  after  the  fuzes  shall  have  been  removed  and 
the  shell  plugged. 

119.  Shell-houses,  and  the  general  condition  of  the  shell  they  contain, 
are  to  be  examined  as  often  as  once  a  fortnight  by  the  Ordnance  Officer,  and 
every  precaution  taken  to  keep  them  as  dry  as  possible. 

120.  The  shell  for  boat  guns  are  to  be  stowed  in  "  the  shell-houses"  on 
shore,  and  "  shell-rooms"  on  board  of  vessels,  in  their  proper  boxes. 

121.  One-fourth  of  the  whole  number  of  spare  fuzes  allowed  for  the  great 
guns  is  to  be  for  5  seconds  of  time ;  one-fourth  for  10  seconds ;  one-fourth 
for  15  seconds;  one-fourth  assorted  of  3.  5,  7,  and  20  seconds. 

122.  Ail  the  spherical  shell,  however,  put  on  board  ship,  filled  and  fitted 
for  immediate  use,  are  to  be  provided  with  none  other  than  the  5-second 
fuze.     No  fuze  is,  under  any  circumstances,  to  be  put  in  shell  which  are  not 
filled. 


PREPARATION  OF  SHELL  FOR  SERVICE. 


123.  For  rifled  cannon  the  shell  shall  be  fitted  with  one-half  percussion, 
one-half  time  fuze.     Parrott's  shell  will  have  bouchin^,  or  "adapting"  rings 
for  the  naval  time  fuze.     The  new  form  of  adapter,  with  a  shoulder  arid 
washer  beneath  it,  shall  alone  be  used. 

124.  At  ranges  exceeding  1,400  yards  the  10  or  15-second  fuzes,  accord 
ing  to  such  excess,  are  to  be  substituted  for  the  5-second  fuze,  by  removing 
one  and  putting  in  the  other ;  or,  if  preferred,  those  fuzes  may  be  applied 
to  shell  which  are  not  already  fitted.     The  5-second  fuze  is  to  be  regarded 
as  the  general  working  fuze,  and  hence  the  reason  the   filled  shell  are  to 
be  fitted  with  it,  as  mentioned  above.     (See  TABLE  OF  RANGES  for  proper 
lengths  of  fuze  for  all  distances.) 

125.  The  different  kinds  of  fuzes  shall  be  made  up  in  separate  packages, 
distinctly  marked  with  the  kind  and  length  of  fuze,  and  their  use  carefully 
explained  to  the  Executive  Officer  and  Gunner  by  the  Inspector  of  Ord 
nance. 

126.  In  consequence  of  numerous   reports  received  from   vessels  in  ser 
vice  of  the  inefficiency  of  certain  fuzes,  commanders  of  vessels  are  required 
to  observe  carefully  the  action  and  result  of  all  fuzes,  and  report  in  detail  to 
the   Bureau   of  Ordnance  whenever  opportunities  may  occur,  particularly 
specifying  the  number  and  kind  fired,  elevation  of  gun,  range,  premature  ex 
plosions,  failures  to  explode,  and  satisfactory  action.     Also,  whether  the  fire 
was  direct  or  ricochet. 

127.  EXTERIOR  DIMENSIONS,  IN  INCHES,  FOR  SHELL-BOXES. 

For  XV-inch  shell,  18  x  18  by  20  high. 
For  Xl-inch  shell,  12- 75  x  12.75  by  14.5  high. 
For  X-inch  shell,  11.65  x  11.65  by  13.9  high. 
For  IX-inch  shell,  10.G3  x  10.63  by  12.9  high. 
For  8-inch  shell,  10.20  x  10.10  by  12.2  high. 

For  32-pounder  shell,    8. GO  x    8.50  by  10.2  high. 

128.  AREAS  OCCUPIED  BY  ONE  TIER  OF  SHELL-BOXES. 


XI-ixcn. 

X-INCH. 

IX-INCII. 

8-iNcn. 

82-POUNDKR. 

No. 

Ft.           In. 

No. 

Ft           In. 

No. 

Ft.            In. 

No. 

Ft.  In. 

No. 

Ft.    In. 

16x6 
15x5 

72 
52 

15.5^x5.8^ 
14.4    x4.6| 

75 

56 

15.2x5.3^ 
14.  2x4.  1£ 

102 
80 

15.8^x5.9^ 
14.9^x4.9£ 

108 
85 

16x6 
15x5 

176 
140 

48  ORDNANCE  AND  ORDNANCE   STORES. 


GUNPOWDER. 

STOWAGE,  PRESERVATION,  HANDLING,  AND  CHARGES. 

129.  The  Bureau  having  adopted  a  new  system   of  granulating  Navy 
powder,  the  different  classes  will  in  future   be  known  and  designated  as 
RIFLE,  CANNON,  and  MUSKET. 

Gunpowder  intended  for  ordinary  use  in  cannon  is  to  have  sufficient 
strength  to  give  a  6-pounder  shot  the  under-mentioned  Initial  Velocities, 
determinablc  by  the  gun-pendulum  of  the  Ordnance  Yard  at  Washington. 

130.  The  size  of  the  grains  is  determined  by  sieves,  made  by  piercing 
round  holes  in  thin  plates  of  brass.     These  sieves  are   five  in  number,  the 
holes  being  of  the  following  diameters,  viz.  : 

No.  1,   .  3    of  an  inch  )  Initial  yelocit    retired  1450  feet  +  50-50,  for  Rifle. 
No.  2,    .  15       do.         ) 

da         j-  do.  do.          1500  feet  -[-50-50,  for  Cannon. 

No.  4,   .06       do.         )  do  da          1550  feet +50-50,  for  Musket. 

No.  5,    .02       do.         ) 

Rifle  powder  is  used  in  the  Parrott  rifles  of  8-inch,  100-pounder,  and 
60-pounder.  Navy  cannon  powder  in  all  other  rifles  and  all  smooth-bores. 

131.  Size  of  the  grain  is  required  to  conform  to  the  following: 

Pass  through  No.  1 all  )  ^.n 

Remain  on  No.  2 all  ) 

Pass  through  No.  2 ^  i  Cannon. 

Remain  on  No.  3 all 

Pass  through  No.  4 all 

Remain  on  No.  5 all 

Ten  per  cent,  variation  tolerated. 

132.  GRAVIMETRIC  DENSITY,  is  the  weight  of  a  given  measured  quantity  : 
it  is  usually  expressed  by  the  weight  of  a  cubic  foot  in  ounces. 

This  cannot  be  relied  on  for  the  true  density,  as  the  size  and  shape  of 
the  grain  may  make  the  denser  powder  seem  the  lighter. 

Cannon  powder  should  have  a  gravimetric  density  of  about  875  oz.,  and 
not  exceeding  900  oz.,  to  the  cubic  foot.  (It  actually  varies  with  different 
makers  from  875  to  975.) 

133.  SPECIFIC  GRAVITY. — The  specific  gravity  of  gunpowder  is  between 
1.70  and  1.75. 

All  the  powder  of  any  lot  being  made  of  the  same  mill-cake,  the  specific 
gravities  are  equal  although  the  gravimetric  densities  may  vary. 


STORAGE  AND   PRESERVATION  OF   GUNPOWDER.  49 

134.  Powder  for  small  arms,  or  musket  powder,  should  all  pass  through 
No.  4,  none  through  No.  5,  and  average  from  2,000  to  2,500  kernels  in  ten 
grains  Troy. 

All  powder  should  be  well  glazed ;  for  small  arms  more  highly  than  for 
cannon. 

135.  The  system  of  granulation  adopted  by  the  Army  differs  from  that  of 
the  Navy,  as  follows : 

ALL  Timouaii—               ALL  ox- 
Mammoth 0.9in O.G  in. 

Cannon 0.35   0.25 

Mortar 0.10   0.06 

Musket O.OG  0.03 

It  will  he  seen  by  this  Table  that  under  the  Army  nomenclature,  Navy 
Rifle  nearly  corresponds  to  Army  Cannon  ;  that  the  Army  Mortar  is  the 
nearest  equivalent  to  Navy  Cannon,  but  with  much  more  fine  grain,  as  it  is 
what  passes  through  the  cannon-sieve,  but  remains  on  the  musket-sieve ; 
and  that  the  Navy  Musket  has  the  same  size  for  the  larger  grain,  but  con 
tains  more  small  grain  than  the  Army. 

In  exchanging  powder  with  the  Army,  it  is  necessary  to  attend  to  these 
distinctions. 

136.  Powder-houses  or  magazines  on  shore  are  to  be  inspected  by  the 
Ordnance  Officers  at  least  once  in  every  week,  and  every  precaution  taken 
to  guard  them  against  danger  of  explosion,  and  to  preserve   the  powder 
dry  and  in  good  condition. 

137.  Powder-barrels  in  magazines,  where  there  are  no  racks,  should  be 
placed  on  their  sides,  with  their  marked  ends  towards  the  alleys,  three  tiers 
high,  or  four  tiers,  if  necessary,  with  small  skids  on  the  floor  and  between 
the  several  tiers  of  barrels,  using  chocks  at  intervals  on   the  lower    skids 
to  prevent  the  barrels  from  rolling.     If  it  can  be  avoided,  fixed  ammunition 
should  not  be  put  in  the  same  magazine  with  powder  in  barrels. 

138.  If  it  is  necessary  to  pile  the  barrels  more  than  four  tiers  high,  the 
upper  tiers  should  be  supported  by  a  frame  resting  on  the  floor;  or  the 
barrels  may  be  placed  on  their  heads,  with  boards  between  the  tiers. 

There  should  be  an  unencumbered  space  of  G  or  8  feet  square  at  the  doors 
of  the  magazine. 

139.  Whenever  practicable,  the  barrels  should  be   arranged  in  double 
rows,  with  a  passage-way  between  the  rows,  so  that  the   marks  on  each 
barrel  may  be  seen  at  a  glance,  and  any  barrel  easily  reached. 

140.  Besides  being  recorded  in  the  magazine-book,  each  lot  of  powder 
should  be  inscribed  on  a  ticket  attached  to  the  lot  showing  the  entries  and 
the  issues. 


50  ORDNANCE  AND   ORDNANCE   STORES. 


141.  Magazines  should  be  opened  and   aired  in  clear,  dry  weather,  the 
ventilators  kept  free,  and  no  shrubbery  or  trees  allowed  to  grow  so  near  as 
to  shade  the  building  from  the  sun. 

O 

142.  The  moisture  of  a  magazine  may  be  absorbed  by  chloride  of  lime, 
or  charcoal,  suspended  in   an  open  box  under  the  arch,  and  renewed  from 
time  to  time.     The  use  of  quicklime  is  dangerous,  and  forbidden. 

148.  When  powder  is  handled  in  powder-houses  on  shore,  either  for  the 
purpose  of  inspection  or  preparation  for  delivery  to  ships,  the  baize-cloth  is 
to  be  spread,  and  the  people,  before  entering  the  magazine,  must  divest 
themselves  of  every  metal  implement,  empty  their  pockets,  that  nothing 
likely  to  produce  fire  may  escape  detection,  and  put  on  the  magazine 
dresses  and  slippers.  The  barrels  must  be  opened  only  on  the  floor-cloth, 
and  no  metallic  setter  used  in  driving  either  copper  or  wooden  hoops. 

Powder-barrels  should  never  be  opened  except  when  required  for  use,  as 
grains  of  powder  falling  between  the  staves  would  prevent  their  being 
tightened.  Samples  must  be  taken  from  the  bung. 

144.  The  attention  of  the  Inspectors  of  Ordnance  and  Commanders  of 
vessels  is  called  to   the  Regulations  regarding  the   stowage  and  service  of 
powder  and  loaded  shells  in  Magazines  and  Shell-rooms,  ashore  and  afloat, 
and  to  the  precautions  which  must  be  observed  by  every  one  who  enters, 
or  approaches  for  the  purpose  of  entering,  any  Magazine  or  Shell-room. 

The  former  Regulations  are  modified  so  far  as  to  dispense  entirely  with 
the  use  of  slippers  made  of  either  India-rubber  or  woollen  ;  and  in  lieu 
thereof,  slippers  made  wholly  of  buckskin  or  cotton  canvas  will  be  used  in 
future.  In  hot  climates,  or  in  warm  weather  generally,  the  naked  feet  are 
preferred. 

The  terrible  effect  of  the  explosion  of  a  Magazine  or  Shell-room,  ashore 
or  on  board  ship,  can  only  be  imagined.  To  avert  it,  by  every  human 
precaution,  is  an  imperative  duty  with  every  one.  The  Bureau  therefore 
directs  that  the  Inspectors  of  Ordnance  on  shore  and  the  Commanders  of 
all  vessels  afloat  will  cause  the  existing  Powder  Regulations  to  be  read,  and 
copies  placed  within  the  reach  of  every  officer  and  man  connected  in  the 
remotest  degree  with  the  service  of  the  Magazine  and  Shell-rooms ;  and  no 
officer  or  other  person  is  to  be  continued  in  such  service  who  cannot  within 
a  reasonable  time  answer  clearly  and  fully  any  questions  relating  to  the 
requirements  of  existing  Powder  Regulations  as  contained  in  these  "Ord 
nance  Instructions." 

145.  The  powder  in  barrels  should  be  turned  from  time  to  time,  at  least 
as  often  as  every  three  months,  and,  being  arranged  as  mentioned  above, 
the  oldest  powder  will  be  at  all  times  accessible  for  first  delivery  without 
disturbing  that  of  more  recent  manufacture. 


STORAGE   AND   PRESERVATION  OF   GUNPOWDER.  51 

146.  When  powder  is  sent  on  board  any  vessel  at  the  Yard,  an  Ordnance 
Officer  or  the  Gunner  is  to  see  it  properly  stowed,  and  the  Ordnance  Offi 
cer  is  to  hand  to  the  Captain  of  the  vessel  a  statement  showing  the  quan 
tity  of  powder,  number  and  capacity  of  tanks,  kind  of  charges  contained 
in  each,  with  the  initial  velocity,   maker,   and   date   of  reception,   with  a 
list  of  small-arm   and  boat  ammunition,  fireworks,  filled  and  other  shells 
and  projectiles,  together  with  all  the  information  directed  by  the  three  arti 
cles  immediately  following,  with  such   remarks  as  he  may  deem  proper  to 
secure  better  precaution   or  more  convenient  arrangement,  with  a  request 
that  the  memorandum,  or  a  copy  of  it,  may  be  delivered  to  the  Ordnance 
Officer  at  the  Yard  where  the  vessel  is  refitted  or  laid  up  at  the  end  of  the 
cruise. 

147.  When  cartridges  are  filled  for  issue  to  any  vessel,  the  powder  should 
be  selected,  as  far  as  practicable,  from  deliveries  made  by  the  same  person, 
and  at  the  same  time  or  date  ;  and  the  tanks  in  which  they  are  stowed  must 
be  marked  with  white  paint  on  the  upper  sides,  with  the  same  marks  as 
the  barrels  from  which  the  powder   was  taken,  giving  the  date  of  manufac 
ture  and  the  maker's  name. 

148.  Great  irregularities  having  been  observed  in  the  weights  of   car 
tridges  supplied    from    different    stations,  it    is    ordered    that  at  least  ten 
measures  shall  be  weighed  at  each  filling,  and  allowance  made  for  different 

densities.     (See  Art.  171.) 

149.  Whenever  powder  is  returned  into  the  powder-houses  from  vessels, 
and  the  powder  emptied  from  the  cartridges,  care  must  be  taken  to  have 
the  barrels  or  other  vessels  in  which  the  powder  may  be  placed  marked  in 
the    same    manner  and    registered  in   the   Magazine  Ledger,   so  that  the 
maker's  name  and   date  of  manufacture  of  all  powder  may   be  correctly 
known  and  carefully  preserved  for  reference. 

150*  The  names  of  vessels  from  which  powder  is  received,  the  length  of 
time  which  the  powder  has  been  on  board,  and  the  station  on  which  the 
vessel  has  been  employed,  should  also  be  note'd  and  reported  by  the  Ord 
nance  Officer,  that  reference  may  be  had  to  the  notes  in  case  it  should  be 
desired  in  subsequent  examinations  of  the  powder. 

151.  In  some  instances  where  powder  has  been  condemned  by  survey,  it 
has  been  directed  to  be  thrown  overboard.     This  should  never  be  done ; 
the  nitre  contained,  which  forms  three-fourths  (f)  of  the  powder,  is  still 
perfectly  good,  and  can  be  made  serviceable.    In  future,  condemned  powder 
is  always  to  be  returned  to  the  United  States. 

152.  The  Ordnance  Officers,  when  they  supply  vessels  with  powder,  or 


52  ORDNANCE  AND   ORDNANCE   STORES. 

remove  any  from  them,  must  report  to  the  Bureau  by  the  earliest  oppor 
tunity  all  the  information  which  is  required  to  be  noted  by  Articles  147, 
149,  150,  immediately  preceding;  and  when  powder  is  received  from  ves 
sels  returning  from  cruises,  or  after  it  has  been  long  embarked,  they  are  to 
forward  to  the  Ordnance  Yard,  Washington,  a  sample  of  two  pounds  and 
one-fourth,  properly  labelled,  for  every  five  hundred  pounds  landed,  selected 
so  as  to  show  fair  average  samples  of  the  whole,  in  order  that  its  strength 
may  be  ascertained  by  the  pendulum. 

153t  In  case  of  necessity,  powder  for  saluting  may  be  purchased  abroad 
in  order  to  preserve  a  supply  of  our  own  proof  powder  for  battle. 

154.  When  a  vessel  is  about  to  leave  a  foreign  station  and  return  directly 
to  the  United  States,  and  other  vessels  belonging  to  the  Navy  are  left  on 
the  station  without  a  full  supply  of  powder,  the  vessel  which  is  about  to 
leave  may  be  directed  to  transfer  to   those  remaining  on  the  station  any 
excess  of  powder  that  may  be  on  board  beyond  fifty  rounds. 

155.  Should  it  become  necessary  to  use  powder  for  service  charges  which 
has  not  been   regularly  inspected  and  proved  in  the  manner  required  by 
regulations,  such  tests  of  it  must  be  made  as  circumstances  will  admit. 

The  ranges  given  by  it  may  be  compared  with  those  of  service  powder  of 
known  good  quality  under  the  same  circumstances.  If  deficient  in  strength, 
the  quantity  of  the  charges  should  be  increased  until  the  ranges  are  equal 
ized,  in  order  that  the  sight-bars  may  still  indicate  the  proper  elevations  for 
each  charge  and  distance. 

156.  It  is  directed  that  vessels  of  war  shall  always  receive  their  powder 
and  loaded  shells  in  the  stream ;   unless,  upon  some  great  emergency,  the 
nature  of  which  shall  be  reported  to  the  Bureau,  it  is  deemed  essential  to 
put  them  on  board  at  the  Navy  Yard. 

157.  When  receiving  or  landing  powder,  the  red  flag  is  to  be  always 
hoisted  At  the  fore,  and  all  proper  precautions  taken  to  guard  against  acci 
dents  from  fires  and  lights.     The  tanks  should  be  passed  through  the  ports 
most  convenient  to  the  magazines,  and  landed  on  mats,  to  prevent  injury. 

The  red  flag  is  always  to  be  hoisted  at  the  powder-houses  when  they  are 
opened,  and  kept  flying  until  they  are  closed. 

158.  When  avoidable,  gunpowder  is  not  to  be  sent  from  vessels  to  pow 
der-houses,  nor  from  powder-houses  to   vessels,  in  wet  weather,  nor  when 
there  is  a  probability  of  wetting  the  barrels  or  cases ;   and  the  packages 
must  be  conveyed  in  covered  boats  or  wagons  showing  a  red  flag. 

159.  The  wharf  or  landing-place  must  be  spread  with  old  canvas,  so  that 
the  barrels  or  cases  may  not  come  in  contact  with  and  convey  sand  or  gravel 


SERVICE  CHARGES  FOR  NAVAL   GUNS. 


53 


to  the  powder-house.  The  barrels  must  not  be  rolled,  but  carried  in  slings 
to  the  trucks  running  on  tramways  of  either  wood  or  bronze,  into  the 
magazine. 

160.  The  service  charges  for  the  different  calibres  and  classes  of  naval 
smooth-bore  guns  now  used  in  the  Navy  are  as  follows,  and  the  cartridges 
are  to  be  filled  accordingly,  viz. : 


SERVICE  CHARGES  FOR  NAVAL  GUNS. 


ORDNANCE. 

CHARGES  OF  NAVY  CANNON 
POWDER. 

DlAMETEES  OK 

CAETUIDGE-GAUGE. 

SALUTINO  CHAEGES, 
No.  50. 

Calibre. 

I 
I 

G 

t=  *"1 

-2° 

|~ 

t>> 
3« 

if 

£« 

tt  6 

c  « 

n~ 

in 

X-inch  or  130-pounder.  . 
G4-pounder  

16,  000  Ibs. 
10G  c\vt. 
61 
57 
51 
46 
42 
33 
27 

42,000  Ibs. 
15,700 
12,000 
9,000 
6,500 
4,500 

G3  c\vt. 

55     " 

Ibs. 

30. 
16. 
10. 
9. 
8. 
7. 
G. 
4.5 
4. 

50. 
20. 
15. 
13. 

7. 
6. 

9. 

7. 

Ibs. 
18. 
12. 
8. 
8. 
7. 
7. 
G. 
4.5 
4. 

35. 
15. 

12.5 
10. 
7. 
6. 

8. 

7. 

Ibs. 
15. 
8. 
6. 
6. 
5. 
5. 
4. 
4. 
3. 
For  near 
firing. 

35. 
15. 
12.5 
10. 

7. 
6. 

G. 
6. 

Cylindrical. 
9.00  inches. 
7.00 
5.50 
5.50 
5.50 
5.50 
5.50 
5.50 
5.50 

Conical. 

11x5.5x11 
10x5.     x  10 
9x4.5x9 
8x5.    x8 

Cylindrical. 
5.50 
5.50 

Ibs. 

G. 
4. 
4. 
4. 
4. 
4. 
4. 
3. 

7. 
6. 
5. 
4. 
4. 

4. 
4. 

32-pounder. 

32       do  

32       do                    .      . 

32       do  

32       do 

32       do      

32       do 

Shell-Guns. 
XV-inch  

Xl-inch 

X-inch         

IX-inch 

8-inch              

8-inch. 

8-inch   

N.  B.— Two  projectiles  are  not  to  be  fired  from  any  gun  at  the  same  time,  except  at  objects  within  200 
yards'  distance,  and  only  when  the  advantages  at  the  moment  may  bo  deemed  by  the  Captain  sufficient 
to  justify  the  risk  of  injuring  the  guns  and  their  equipments  by  the  extra  strain  to  which  they  will  bo 
exposed. 

With  the  15-inch  guns  at  close  quarters  against  iron-clads,  GO  Ibs.  and  a  solid  shot  may  be  used  for 
20  rounds.  So  also  with  the  11-inch,  30  Ibs.  and  a  solid  shot.  With  all  the  other  guns,  under  like  cir 
cumstances,  and  where  penetration  is  desired,  the  distant  firing  charges  should  bo  substituted  for  tho 
near  firing. 

Of  the  service  charges,  one-tenth  shall  be  for  distant  firing,  six-tenths  for 
ordinary  firing,  three-tenths  for  near  firing,  or  for  two  projectiles.  Saluting 
charges  to  be  of  under-proof  powder. 

The  calibre  and  class  of  guns  for  which  the  cartridges  are  intended  must 
be  distinctly  marked  near  the  top  of  the  lid  end  of  the  tanks. 


ORDNANCE  AND   ORDNANCE   STORES. 


161, 


TABLE  OF  CHARGES  FOR  NAVY  RIFLE  GUNS. 


GUN. 

ORDNANCK. 

CHARGE  OF  POWDEU. 

Calibre. 

Pounder. 

100 
GO 
30 
20 
20 
12 

Diameter 
of  Bore. 

Weight. 

Weight. 

Kind. 

Diameter  of 
Cartridge- 
Gauge. 

Parrott  

Inches. 

6.40 
5.30 
4.20 
3.67 
4.00 
3.40 

Lbs. 

9,700 
5,400 
3,550 
1,750 
1,340 
880 

Lbs. 

8. 
6. 
3.25 
2 
2 
1. 

Rifle. 
Rifle. 
Cannon. 
Cannon. 
Cannon. 
Cannon. 

Inches. 

5.50 
4.60 
3.70 
3.25 

Do  

Do  

Do  

Dahlgren  .. 

Do!        

162, 


POWDER-TANKS. 


CAPACITY  OF  TANK 
FOB  POWDER  IN 
GRAIN. 

EXTERIOR  DIMENSIONS. 

WEIGIIT,  WHEN 

EMPTY. 

APPROXIMATE 
WEIGHT,  WHEN 
FILLED  WITH 
CYLINDERS. 

Height,  in  inches, 
including 
Lid  and  Handle. 

Sides,  in  inches. 

200  pounds  
150       "     

22$ 

22'- 
2o| 
16* 

16£xl6£ 

15    x!5 
13    x!3 
10^-xlOJ- 

67^  pounds. 
59J-       " 

218  pounds. 
170  to  180  Ibs. 

100        "      .  . 

50     •  "      

163,    ACCOMMODATION  AFFORDED  BY  POWDER-TANKS   OF  DIFFERENT  SIZES 
FOR  CARTRIDGES  OF  VARIOUS  KINDS  WHEN  CLOSELY  PACKED. 


CAPACITY  OF  TANK 

FOR  POWDER  IN 

WILL  STOW  CARTRIDGES  AS  FOLLOWS: 

GRAIN. 

DENOMINATION. 

Ibs. 

20 

Ibs. 
16 

Ibs. 
15 

Ibs. 
12.5 

Ibs. 
10 

Ibs. 
9 

Ibs. 

8 

Ibs. 

1 

Ibs. 

Ibs. 
5 

Ibs. 
4.5 

Ibs. 
4 

Ibs. 
3.25 

Ibs. 
3 

Ibs. 
2 

Ibs. 
1.85 

Ib. 
1 

200  pounds.  .  .  . 
150        "     .     . 

9 

6 

4 

11 

8 
5 

12 
9 

6 

14 
10 

7 

18 
18 
9 

20 
15 

10 

22 
18 
11 

25 
20 
13 

SO 
24 
16 

36 
27 
IS 

40 
30 
20 

45 
86 
24 

52 
40 
27 

60 
45 
81 

95 

71 
46 

100 
72 
4S 

190 
145 
95 

100        "     

50        "     
Powder-barrel  — 

2 
4 

2 
6 

2 

1 

8 

8 

4 
10 

4 
11 

5 
12 

5 
14 

7 
16 

9 

10 

11 
26 

13 

15 
35 

21 

52 

23 
55 

46 

103 

FIXED  AMMUNITION  FOR  BOAT  GUNS  AND  SMALL  ARMS. 

164.  The  charges  for  "  boat  and  field  howitzers"  are — 

For  the  24-pounder  of  1,310  Ibs 2.00 

For  the  medium  12-pounder  of  760  Ibs 1.00 

For  the  light  12-pounder  of  430  Ibs 0.625 


BOXES  FOR  SMALL-ARM  AMMUNITION. 


55 


165, 


DIMENSIONS  OF  BOXES  FOR  BOAT  AMMUNITION. 

PROJECTILES    WITH    CHARGE     OF    POWDER    FOR    HOWITZER    ATTACHED, 
NOT    TO    BE    STOWED    IN    THE    MAGAZINE. 


WFIGHT  IN 

CAT.IHRE  OF 
BOAT 
HOWITZER. 

KIND  OF 
PROJECTILE. 

NUMBER  OF 
PROJECTILES 
Box  CONTAINS. 

DIMENSIONS  OF  BOXES,  IN 
INCHES. 

POUNDS. 

Empty. 

Filled. 

24-pdr  
24    "  

Shrapnel  
Canister  .... 

9 

9 

22  x  20.75  by  13.75     high. 
22x20.75  by  15.50 

35.V 

36  'V 

270-jL 
2174 

12    "  heavy. 
12    "        " 

Shrapnel.  .  .  . 
Canister.  .  .  . 

9 
9 

18.75x17.75  by  11.13    " 
18.75x17.75  by  12.25    " 

221 
25k 

140^ 
114* 

166,  The  cartridges  for  small  arms  are  to  contain  the  following  quantities 
of  powder : 

For  muskets 70  grains,  Troy. 

For  muskets  (marine) 60      "          " 

For  pistols 30       "  " 

For  revolvers 18       "          " 

The  ball-cartridges  for  rifles  and  rifled  muskets  are  to  be  made  with  a 
single  Minie  ball. 

167,  EXTERIOR  DIMENSIONS  AND  CONTENTS  OF  BOXES 

FOR  SMALL-ARM  AMMUNITION  AND  FIREWORKS. 


ARTICLES. 

EXTERIOR  DIMENSIONS. 

EACH  Box 

CONTAINS 

REMARKS. 

Length. 

Width. 

Depth. 

Musket-ball  cartridges  

Inches. 
12* 
9f 
14* 
13* 
20* 
20£ 
19f 
19} 
15± 
lit 

Inches. 
8t 
»} 
8* 
6f 
13 
13 

10* 

10} 

9^ 

H 

Inches. 
8* 
8* 
*t 

n 

6| 
61 

ioi 

6* 
8* 

n 

500 
500 
1000 
1000 
30 
30 
100 
50 
30 
6300 

First  size. 
Second  size. 

Do.     blank         do.  . 

Carbine  rifle-ball    do 

Pistol-ball              do  

Blue-lights  

False  fires  

Port-fires  

Do  

Signal  rockets  

Percussion-caps  

N.  B. — There  is  a  variation  in  the  dimensions  of  the  above  boxes,  as  made, 
of  i  of  an  inch,  on  an  average,  in  their  exteriors. 

168,  Percussion-caps  and  bullets  for  small  arms  will  be  supplied  from  the 
Ordnance  Yard  at  Washington. 

169,  The  boxes  in  which  cartridges  for  small  arms,  caps,  primers,  etc.,  are 
packed  for  distribution  to  vessels,  are  to  be  marked  with  the  number  they 


56  CANNON  AND   FRICTION  PRIMERS. 

contain,  and  the  kind  of  arm  for  which  they  are  intended.  At  the  expiration 
of  the  cruise  they  must  be  carefully  returned  into  store,  and  the  Gunner  will 
be  held  pecuniarily  responsible  for  their  loss. 

170*  Standard  powder-measures  for  filling  cartridges  for  great  guns  will 
be  made  at  the  Ordnance  Yard,  Washington,  and  distributed  as  they  may  be 
required  for  the  use  of  vessels  and  shore  magazines.  As  the  gravimetric 
density  of  powder  varies  from  800  to  940,  the  weight  of  the  contents  of  ten 
measures  should  be  ascertained  for  each  lot,  and  allowance  made  accordingly 
before  filling  the  cartridges. 

S  i5 

171,  In  taking  the  weights,  the  powder  is  to  be  scooped  up  from  the 
filling-chest  with  the  measure  until  it  is  heaped,  tapped  twice  moderately  on 
the  sides  with  the  palms  of  the  hands,  and   then   struck  with  a  wooden 
straight-edge.      If  the  weight  differs  materially  from  that  marked   on  the 
measure,  a  small  compensating  measure  should  be  used  to  supply  the  defi 
ciency  or  remove  the  excess. 

CANNON-PRIMERS. 

172,  These  are  of  two  kinds,  percussion  and  friction.     Each  percussion- 
primer  is  composed  of  a  quill  tube  capped  by  an  explosive  wafer.    The  quills 
used  for  this  purpose  are  first  inspected  by  passing  them  through  a  gauge 
rather  smaller  than  the  vent. 

The  tube  is  filled  with  fine-grained  powder. 

The  wafer  is  composed  of  a  cap  of  cartridge-paper,  enclosing  a  layer  of 
fulminate  of  mercury  combined  with  a  small  quantity  of  mealed  powder. 
When  pressed  and  perfectly  dry,  the  wafer  is  coated  with  uncolored  shellac, 
to  preserve  it  from  dampness. 

173,  Primers  are  to  be  kept  in  tin  boxes  containing  fifty  each,  the  lids 
of  which  are  luted  with  shellac  to  exclude  moisture  until  wanted  for  im 
mediate  use.     These  boxes  are  intended  to  fit  in  and  form  a  lining  to  the 
primer-boxes  which  slip  on  the  waist-belts  worn  by  Captains  of  guns.     For 
purposes  of  exercise  no  more  of  these  boxes  should  be  opened  than  are  re 
quired  ;  but  for  action  a  full  box  should  be  delivered  to  each  Captain  and 
2d  Captain  of  a  gun. 

174,  A  friction-primer  consists  of  a  tube  charged  with  gunpowder,  to  the 
top  of  which  is  fastened  a  spur  containing  friction-powder,  which  is  exploded 
by  means  of  a  slider  pulled  out  by  a  lanyard.     It  is  intended  for  use  in  case 
the  lock  should  be  out  of  order,  or  the  other  primers  fail  from  any  unforeseen 
cause.       Friction-primers  are  packed  in  tin  boxes  in  the  same  manner  as 
percussion-primers.      They  are  obtained  from  the  Army  as  required. 

175,  Filled  boxes  of  primers  are  kept  in  close  laboratory  cases,  for  which 
stowage  must  be   provided  in  the  general  store-room  of  the  ship,  or  other 


PERCUSSION-CAPS.— CARTRIDGE-BAGS.  57 

safe  place.1     They  arc  on  no  account  to  be  placed  in  the  magazine,  and  the 
boxes  must  be  so  labelled  before  being  put  on  board  ship. 

176.  When  primers  have  been  returned  from  cruising  ships,  or  have  re 
mained  in  store  for  one  or  more  years,  they  must  be  tested  by  firing  five 
per  cent,  of  the  number,  and  not  issued  again  without  special  orders. 

177.  Damaged  fuzes,  primers,  caps,  and  tubes,  are  always  to  be  returned 
to  the  Ordnance  Yard  at  Washington,  in  the  condition  in  which  they  were 
received  on  the  return  of  the  ship. 

178.  The  boxes   containing  metallic  cartridges  for  breech-loading  arms 
require  the  same  care  as  percussion -caps,  and  are  to  be  labelled,  "  Oil  no  ac 
count  to  be  placed  in  the  magazine." 

179.  PERCUSSION-CAPS  for  muskets,  carbines,  and  pistols  are   made    in 
the  laboratory  at  the  Washington  Navy  Yard.     They  are  put  up  in  small 
packages  of  water-proof  paper,  labelled  with  the    number  contained  in  the 
package  and  the  date  of  fabrication,  and  stowed  in  tin  cases  containing  350 
caps  each. 

180.  Laboratory  boxes,  in  which  these  are  packed,  are  of  the  following 
dimensions:    11£  x  9£  x  7$  inches,  and  will  contain  6,300  percussion-caps 
each.     These  boxes  are  to  be  labelled,  "  On  no  account  to  be  placed  in  the 
magazine."     Stowage  is  provided  for  them  in  the  general  store-room. 

CARTRIDGE-BAGS. 

181.  The  material  of  which  cartridge-bags  arc  made  is  woven   expressly 
for  the   purpose,  and  furnished  by  the  Bureau  of  Ordnance  as  required. 
The  color  is  white,  and  the  calibre  of  the  gun  and  the  weight  of  the  charge 
must  be  stencilled  on  the  bag  in  figures  two  and  a  half  (2J)  inches  long. 
When  procured  of  necessity  elsewhere,  the  stuff  should  be  chosen  of  wool, 
entirely   free    from   any  mixture   of  thread    or  cotton,   and  of   sufficiently 
close  texture  to  prevent  the  finer  particles  of  powder  from  sifting  through. 
Wildbore,  rattinet,  merino,  and  bombazette  are  named  as  proper  materials 
for  cartridge-bags ;   of  these  the  thinnest  stuff,  not  twilled,  but  having  the 
requisite  strength  and  closeness  of  texture,  is  the  best. 

182.  MAKING  CARTRIDGE-BAGS. — Cartridge-bags  for  cylindrical  chambers 
are  made  of  a  rectangle  to  form  the  cylinder,  and  a  circular  piece  to  form 
the  bottom.     The  fiat  patterns,  by  which  the  cartridge-bags  for  the  8-inch 
and  32-poundcr  guns  are  cut,  are,  consequently,  to  be  made  rectangular  for 
the  cylindrical  part  of  the  bag,  and  circular  for  the  bottom.     The  length 

1  Primers  and  percussion-caps  should  be  divided  into  two  or  three  lots,  and  stowed 
in  different  parts  of  the  ship,  so  that  an  accidental  explosion  would  not  dep'rive  the  ship 
of  the  means  of  firing  cannon  and  small  arms. 


58 


CAETRIDGE-BAGS. 


of  the  rectangle  is  equal  to  the  development  of  the  cylinder,  together  with 
the  allowance  for  seam  ;  and  its  width,  to  the  whole  length  of  the  bag  before 
sewing,  including  the  allowance  for  seam  and  tie. 

Special  patterns  are  furnished  for  those  of  XV-in.,  XI-in.,  X-in.,  IX-in., 
8-inch  of  6,500  Ibs.,  and  32-poundcr  of  4,500  Ibs.  shell-guns,  all  of  which 
have  gomer  chambers. 

183.   DIMENSIONS  OF  FLAT  PATTERNS  FOR  CUTTING  OUT  CARTRIDGE-BAGS. 

TO  BE  MADE  OF  PINE  FOR  THE   8-INCH  AND  32-PDR.  GUNS,  AND   OF  METAL 
PLATES  FOR  THE  "  GOMER"  CHAMBERS  OF  OTHER  GUNS/ 


DIMENSIONS. 

10-INCH,  OR 
130-POUNDER. 

64-PDR.  GUN 

OF  106  CWT. 

S-INCH  RIFLE. 

100-pouNDER    RIFLE,   32-POUNDER  GUN, 
AND     S-INCH     SHELL-GUNS,     HAVING 
ClIAMBEKS  OF  82-POUNOBB  CALIBRE. 

Charges                            Ibs 

SO 

IS      15 

16     12      8 

10      9        8       7       6       5454       8 

Width      of     rectangle  1 

(length  of  bag  cut), 

including     tie     and  Mu. 

20. 

15.2  14. 

18.7  15.712.7 

16.614.613.612.6,11.610.610.1    9.6    8.6 

four-tenths      of     an  | 

Inch  for  eeaui.             J 

1 

Inches. 

laches. 

Inches. 

Length  of  rectangle  (crlin- 

1 

der  developed),  including 
eight-tenths  of  an    inch 

L     29.01 

22.8 

1S.1 

for  seam. 

| 

Radius  of  circular  pattern 

1 

of  bottom,  including  four- 
tenths    of    an    inch    lor 

1 

4.9 

3.60 

2.95 

seam. 

i 

Diameters    of     cylindrical 

i 

formers  for  inspection  of 
cartridge-bags. 
Additional   length  for  one 
pound  of  powder. 

[ 

9.00 
0.40 

7.00 
0.80 

5.50 
1.22 

184, 


DETAILS  OF  CARTRIDGE-BAGS. 
SHELL-GUNS    WITH    CONICAL   CHAMBERS. 


CALIBRE  OF  Gux. 

XV-IN. 

XI-nr. 

X-ix. 

IX-IN. 

8-1N. 
oy 

6500. 

32-PK. 
4500. 

Charge  of  powder.  .  .Ibs. 

85. 

50. 

60. 

20. 

15. 

15. 

12.5 

13. 

10. 

7. 

6. 

Diameter  of  j  Large  end. 

13.5 

13.5 

13.5 

9.85 

9.85 

9 

9. 

8.13 

8.13 

7.25 

6 

cartridge.  J  Small  end. 
"Width  of  stuff  required 

5.50 

5.50 

5. 

5. 

4.50 

4.50 

4. 

8.5 

to  cut  bag  in. 

24. 

28. 

30. 

22 

20. 

20. 

20. 

IS. 

18. 

24. 

22. 

Whole  length  of  bag  cut, 

including  tie  and  seam. 

21.5 

25.5 

27.5 

19. 

17.5 

18.5 

17.75 

16.5 

15.5 

12.6 

11.6 

Length     of    filled    car 

tridge  in. 

12. 

15.5 

13. 

12. 

10.5 

10. 

9. 

11.5 

10.5 

7.5 

9.5 

Additional     length     for 

one  pound  of  powder. 

Quantity    of    stulf    re 

quired  to  cut  one  hun 

dred  bags  yds. 

122. 

122. 

122. 

92. 

92. 

86. 

86. 

78. 

78. 

30. 

30. 

1  The  dimensions  of  thoso  for  the  XV,  IX,  X,  and  XI  inch  guns,  which  have  Gomer 
chambers,  and  cannot  be  conveniently  tabulated,  will  be  furnished  to  all  vessels  mount 
ing  such  guns.  The  formers  for  inspection  of  bags  will  have  the  forms  and  dimen 
sions  of  the  Gomer  chambers  less  0.87  inch  for  the  IX-inch,  1.0  inch  for  the  X-inch, 
1.15  inch  for  the  Xl-inch,  and  1.50  inch  for  XV-inch  guns.,  for  windage  at  the  largo 
end,  in  accordance  with  the  flat  patterns  furnished  for  cutting. 


INSPECTION  AND   PRESERVATION  OF  CARTRIDGE-BAGS.  59 

In  cutting,  the  length  of  the  rectangle  should  be  taken  in  the  direction 
of  the  length  of  the  stuff,  as  it  does  not  stretch  in  that  direction,  and 
the  material  should  be  chosen,  as  nearly  as  possible,  of  the  width  required 
for  the  length  of  the  bags,  to  save  waste  in  cutting. 

The  bags  are  to  be  sewed  with  worsted  yarn,  with  not  less  than  eight 
stitches  to  an  inch ;  they  must  be  stitched  within  four-tenths  of  an  inch  of 
each  edge,  and  the  two  edges  of  the  seam  felled  down  upon  the  same  side, 
to  prevent  the  powder  from  sifting  through.  The  edges  of  the  bottom 
are  felled  down  upon  the  sides. 

The  bags,  when  filled,  must  be  tied  with  woollen  thrums. 

183,  CARTRIDGE-BAGS  FOR  SALUTING  CHARGES. — Old  cartridge-bags 
which  have  been  condemned  for  service  charges  are  to  be  repaired  and  used 
for  saluting  charges ;  and  whenever  it  is  necessary  to  make  bags  expressly  for 
the  purpose,  or  for  immediate  use,  they  may  be  formed  by  sewing  together 
two  rectangular  pieces  with  semicircular  ends. 

186,  INSPECTION. — The  material  especially  procured  for  cartridge-bags  is 
to  be  carefully  inspected  to  detect  any  mixture  of  cotton  with  the  wool,  by 
burning  a  few  bits  taken  at  hazard  from  each  piece  ;   or,  by  dissolving  it  in 
a  solution  of  1  ounce  of  caustic  potassa  in  a  pint  of  water — the  cloth  to  be 
put  in  when  the  water  is  boiling,  which  is  to  continue  until  dissolution  takes 
place.     The  texture  of  the  stuff  is  also  to  be   examined  and  its  strength 
tried,  such  standard  for  the  latter  being  established  as  may  be  found  suffi 
cient  to  insure  perfect  efficiency. 

After  being  made  up,  the  empty  bags  are  to  be  inspected,  and  those  which 
are  sewed  with  too  long  stitches,  or  in  any  other  than  the  prescribed  man 
ner,  must  be  rejected.  The  dimensions  of  each  bag  are  to  be  verified,  first 
by  laying  it  flattened  out,  between  two  marks  on  a  table  showing  the  width 
of  a  pattern  bag.  A  variation  of  0.1  inch  greater  or  less  is  allowed.  The 
bags  arc  also  to  be  tried  on  mandrels,  or  formers,  made  according  to  the 
dimensions  given  on  the  preceding  pa^e. 

187.  PRESERVATION  FROM  MOTHS. — Serge  or  any  other  woollen  material 
employed  for  making  cartridge-bags  is  never  to  be  exposed  on  the  shelves  in 
store,  either  in  the  piece  or  when  made  up.     It  is  to  be  protected  by  pack 
ing  with  the  hydraulic  press,  by  sewing  it  up  in  linen  cloth,  or  by  envelop 
ing  it  in  water-proof  paper,  hermetically  sealed. 

An  infusion  of  coloquintida,  in  the  proportion  of  15-J  grains  Troy  to  a 
quart  of  water,  is  said  to  be  a  good  preservative,  against  moths.  In  case  oi 
using  this  preparation,  the  cartridge-bags  should  be  steeped  in  the  infusion, 
and,  after  being  thoroughly  dried,  may  be  packed  by  the  hydraulic  press, 
and  headed  up  in  old  whiskey  barrels,  if  stored  on  shore,  or  packed  in 
empty  tanks,  if  on  board  ship. 

Cartridge-bags,  as  well  as  the  material  for  making  them,  must  be  fre 
quently  examined,  to  prevent  their  being  damaged  by  moisture,  as  well  as  to 
guard  against  moths. 
15 


60  CONSTRUCTION  OF  MAGAZINES. 


CHAPTER    II. 

MAGAZINES  AND  SHELL-ROOMS. 


CONSTRUCTION,  LIGHTING,  STOWING,  AND  FLOODING. 

188t  No  details  of  internal  arrangement  should  be  more  carefully  con 
sidered  and  executed  than  those  relating  to  the  stowage  and  delivery  of 
powder,  since  a  defect  in  these  particulars,  apparently  insignificant,  may 
lead  to  the  instantaneous  destruction  of  the  ship  ;  or,  with  the  incendiary 
and  explosive  projectiles  now  used,  to  her  becoming,  comparatively,  an  easy 
prey  to  an  antagonist.  Every  possible  precaution,  therefore,  is  to  be  taken 
to  accommodate  the  fall  allowance  of  powder  completely  ;  to  guard  it  to  the 
utmost  against  injury  and  accidental  explosion  ;  and  to  deliver  it  at  the 
magazine,  as  required,  with  facility  and  certainty.  To  these  ends,  and  in 
view  of  the  fact  that  all  the  powder  for  great  guns  is  now  put  up  in  cubical 
copper  tanks,  made  water-tight,  THE  FORM  OF  MAGAZINES  should  be  as 
nearly  rectangular  as  the  shape  of  the  vessel  will  admit,  and  they  should  be 
built  strong  enough  to  resist  sufficiently  the  effect  of  her  working  in  heavy 
weather,  and  also  the  pressure  of  water  they  will  have  to  sustain  in  case  of 
being  flooded. 

189.  All  magazines  should  have  a  light-box  for  each  alley  at  one  end, 
and  a  passage  to  deliver  powder  at  the  other ;  and  the  magazine  and  its 
passage,  considered  as  one,  must  be  made  perfectly  water-tight  by  caulking 
the  bottom  and  sides,  and  then  lining  them  internally,  first  with  white  pine 
boards,  tongucd  and  grooved,  and  again  with  sheets  of  lead  of  extra  thick 
ness,  soldered  together,  over  these  boards.     Both  these  linings  are  to  extend 
entirely  over  the  bottom  or  floor,  and  all  the   way  up  to  the  crown  on  all 
the  sides. 

190.  When  the  magazine  reaches  the  ceiling  of  the  ship  it  must  be  bat 
tened  off"  two  inches ;  the  lining  of  the  floor  must  be  battened  up  one,  and 
also  the  magazine-deck,  so  that  water  leaking  through  the  sides  of  the  vessel 
may  run  by  and  under,  and  not  into  the  magazine. 

An  external  lining  of  sheet-iron  must  also  be  resorted  to  as  a  protection 
against  fire,  and  to  prevent  the  intrusion  of  rats. 


MAGAZINES  AND   SHELL-ROOMS.  61 

191 1  A  magazine  aft  in  a  ship  is  to  have  its  passage  for  delivering 
powder  adjoining  its  forward  part;  and  one  forward  in  a  ship  is  to  have  this 
passage  adjoining  its  after  part,  in  order  that  it  may  not  be  necessary  to 
pass  the  powder  over  the  light-box  scuttle. 

192*  As  many  doors  are  to  be  cut  in  the  bulkhead  separating  this  pas 
sage  from  the  magazine-room  as  there  are  alleys  to  be  left  in  the  latter, 
between  the  racks  or  shelves  on  which  the  tanks  are  stowed,  and  these 
doors  must  correspond  with  those  alleys.  They  are  not  only  to  afford  a 
means  of  entrance  to  the  magazine,  but  also  for  passing  the  tanks  in  and 
out.  Through  the  upper  part  of  each  door  a  small  scuttle  is  to  be  cut, — 
two,  if  necessary, — for  the  purpose  of  passing  the  cartridges  out  of  the 
magazine-room  with  the  door  itself  closed  ;  and  it  is  to  have  a  lid  so 
arranged  as  to  open  outwards  only,  and  to  close  of  itself  when  the  scuttle  is 
not  actually  in  use. 

193.  Sailing  ships-of-the-line  and  frigates  should  have  two  alleys  for  each 
magazine.    In  screw-vessels  of  large  class,  where  the  shaft  will  interfere  with 
this  arrangement,  two  alleys  for  the  forward  magazine.     In  smaller  vessels  one 
alley  will  suffice.     In  all  cases  the  alley  is  to  be  not  less  than  two  feet  and 
ten  inches  in  breadth,  and  it   ought  to  be  more,  if  practicable,  to  prevent 
confusion  and  delay.     Each  alley  is  to  be  illuminated  by  a  separate  light. 

If  there  is  room  in  the  magazine,  there  should  be  space  left,  at  the  end 
nearest  the  light,  for  a  man  to  pass  from  one  alley  to  the  other  without 
,'/oing  into  the  passage. 

194.  Ships  with  two  magazines — one  forward  and  the  other  aft — are  to 
have  them  as  nearly  equal,  in  point  of  capacity,  as  the  shape  of  the  vessel 
and  other  circumstances  will  admit. 

Magazines  should  be  constructed  as  low  clown  as  possible.  Their  floors 
may  rest  on  the  keelson,  but  should  not  come  below  it.  Their  height 
should  be  equal,  only,  to  an  exact  number  of  times  the  height  of  a  powder- 
tank  when  lying  on  its  side,  in  addition  to  the  thickness  of  the  shelving. 
An  additional  inch  for  each  shelf  should  be  allowed  for  play  or  spring. 
The  whole  height  in  the  clear  should  be  limited  by  the  condition  that  a  man 
standing  on  the  floor  may  reach  the  upper  tier  of  tanks  with  ease.  Four 
tiers  of  200-lb.  tanks,  three  of  them  resting  on  shelves  two  inches  thick,  and 
the  other  on  inch  battens  on  the  magazine-floor,  will,  with  an  allowance  of 
one  and  £  half  inch  for  play  and  spring,  require  a  height,  in  the  clear,  of  six 
feet  two  inches.  Both  safety  and  convenience  would  suggest  this  as  the 
maximum  limit  in  height,  even  for  the  largest  magazine.  Three  tiers  of 
these  tanks  will  require  a  height,  in  the  clear,  of  about  four  feet  eight  inches. 

If,  however,  in  ships  of  great  draught  of  water,  it  should  be  found  prac 
ticable  to  extend  the  height  of  a  magazine  so  as  to  accommodate  five  tiers  of 
tanks,  then  the  lower  or  ground  tier  may  be  laid  so  as  to  occupy  the  whole 


62  CONSTRUCTION   OF   MAGAZINES. 

of  the  magazine-floor;  and  on  the  top  of  this  tier,  in  the  alley-way,  a  light 
false  bottom  is  to  be  placed  for  the  men  to  stand  upon  to  enable  them  to 
reach  the  upper  tier,  which  is  the  one  that  should  first  be  exhausted.  This 
false  bottom  should  be  made  of  gratings,  and  in  sections  convenient  for 
speedy  removal. 

195*  When  it  is  impossible  to  avoid  extending  the  sides  of  the  magazine 
so  far  out  towards  the  skin  of  the  ship  as  to  leave  only  an  air-passage  on 
either  side,  the  crown  should  be  at  least  six  feet  below  the  deep  load-line. 

In  all  cases  where  this  crown  is  less  than  six  feet  below  that  line,  the  sides 
should  be  made  susceptible  of  protection  by  allowing  a  space  to  interpose 
materials,  such  as  sand,  coal,  or  water  in  tanks,  between  them  arid  the 
inner  planking  of  the  ship. 

An  average  space  of  six  feet  or  more  on  both  sides  will  be  sufficient. 
Under  no  circumstances,  however  well  the  sides  be  guarded,  should  the 
crown  of  the  magazine,  if  it  can  be  avoided,  be  less  than  four  feet  below  the 
deep  load-line. 

196.  It  is  proper  to  add,  in  connection  with  this  most  important  subject, 
that  in  order  to  increase  security  against  the  effects  of  lightning,  a  maga 
zine  should  be  placed,  if  practicable,  so  as  not  to  include  a  part  of  a  mast. 

197.  All  the  metallic  fixtures  about  a  magazine,  delivering-passages,  and 
light-rooms,  must  be  of  copper. 

198.  Each  delivering-passage  is  to  have,  for  the  distribution  of  powder, 
at  least  as  many  passing-scuttles  communicating  with  the  orlop  or  berth 
deck  as  there  are  chains  of  scuttles  above.     The  powder-man  will  thus 
always  find  at  the  scuttle  the  proper  passing-box. 


MAGAZINE-COCKS. 

199.  Each  magazine,  as  a  whole — that  is,  including  the  delivering-pas 
sage — being  made,  as  stated  above,  water-tight,  is  to  be  provided  with  an 
independent  cock  for  filling  it  rapidly  with  water;  a  waste-pipe  leading 
from  above  the  upper  tier  of  tanks  to  carry  off  the  superfluous  water;  and 
a  cock  just  at  the  floor  for  letting  the  water  off  when  the  magazine  is  to 
be  emptied  after  having  been  flooded.  Both  the  cocks  must  be  turned 
from  the  deck  above,  each  having  a  lever  to  its  spindle  for  the  purpose,  dis 
tinctly  marked,  with  engraved  letters,  what  it  is  and  how  it  is  to  be  used, 
and  kept  secured  by  a  proper  lock,  the  key  of  which  is  to  be  kept  among 
those  of  the  magazines.  A  short  pipe  to  lead  the  water  down  into  the  hold 
is  to  be  attached  to  the  emptying  cock,  and  with  this  the  waste-pipe  is  to 
connect.  All  are  to  be  well  boxed  over  for  protection  against  injury.  A 


LIGHTING  AND   STOWAGE   OF  MAGAZINES.  63 

perforated  disk,  or  strainer,  is  to  be  secured  inside  of  the  hole,  at  the  upper 
part  of  the  magazine,  for  the  waste-pipe.  All  couplings  of  hose  shall  con 
form  to  the  general  naval  standard. 

LIGHTING   THE    MAGAZINE. 

200«  The  magazine  is  to  he  lighted  by  means  of  one  regulation-lamp,  to 
correspond  with  each  alley  of  the  magazine-room,  placed  in  a  box  arranged 
for  the  purpose.  This  box,  of  which  a  portion  of  the  magazine  bulkhead 
forms  a  part,  is  to  be  lined,  internally,  with  soldered  sheets  of  copper,  and 
have  a  few  inches  of  water  in  it  whenever  the  lamp  is  lighted.  The 
entrance  to  it  is  at  the  top,  through  a  scuttle  in  the  deck  large  enough  to 
admit  the  lamp.  For  single-decked  vessels  this  scuttle  may  be  sur 
rounded  by  a  composition  coaming  pierced  with  holes  one-fourth  of  an  inch 
in  diameter,  on  the  forward  and  after  sides  near  the  top.  The  cover  must  be 
so  arranged  that,  when  placed  in  one  position,  all  the  holes  will  be  closed 
— by  turning  it  half  round,  they  are  all  open ;  thus  supplying  air  to  the  lamp 
and  carrying  off  smoke.  In  the  portion  of  the  magazine  bulkhead  just 
alluded  to,  and  so  as  to  throw  as  much  light  as  possible  into  the  magazine- 
room,  an  opening  with  great  bevelling  is  to  be  cut,  which  is  to  be  covered 
by  two  plane  glasses  of  suitable  thickness,  somewhat  separated  from  each 
other,  one  of  which,  that  next  to  the  lamp,  must  be  permanently  fixed  ; 
and  the  other,  or  that  next  to  the  magazine,  is  to  be  let  into  a  wooden 
frame  so  that  it  may  be  easily  removed,  and  thus  both  glasses  cleaned  at 
any  time  with  convenience  and  safety.  The  glasses  are  to  be  held  in  place 
by  brass  screws,  after  being  closely  fitted  and  having  their  edges  made 
perfectly  tight.  A  small  dome  or  reversed  funnel  of  copper,  where  it  can 
be  conveniently  done,  is  to  be  placed  above  the  lamp  and  fitted  with  a  pipe 
of  the  same  metal  to  convey  the  smoke  off.  This  pipe  may  pass  up  through 
the  covering  of  the  light-box,  which  is  to  have  a  plug-hole,  lined  with  brass, 
for  the  purpose,  and  then  led  farther,  if  necessary,  taking  care,  however,  to 
consult  perfect  safety  throughout. 

The  admission  of  air  to  the  light-box  may  be  from  the  division  of  the 
hold  in  which  it  is  placed,  by  small  holes,  near  its  top,  through  its  side  or 
back,  protected  with  copper  wire-gauze,  inside  and  outside  of  the  box. 

The  ceiling  and  bulkheads  of  all  magazines  and  shell-rooms  should  bd 
thoroughly  whitewashed. 


STOWING  THE  MAGAZINES. 

201 1  In  the  stowage  of  magazines,  reference  must  be  had  to  the  Gunner's 
duties  (Art.  36,  Part  I.),  and  to  Arrangements  for  Delivering  and  Distrib 
uting  Powder  (Art.  180,  Part  I.).  Ledges  on  the  shelves,  or  a  bar  of 
wood  to  ship  and  unship  with  facility,  will  be  provided  for  each  tier  of 


64:  STOWAGE   OF  MAGAZINES  AND  SHELL-BOOMS. 

tanks,  on  both  sides  of  the  alleys,  to  secure  them  from  getting  out  of  place 
when  the  ship  rolls. 

The  Inspector  of  Ordnance  will  furnish  the  commander  of  the  ship  with  an 
exact  plan  of  the  magazine  and  shell-rooms,  which  shall  be  returned  to  the 
Inspector  of  the  Yard  at  which  the  ship  refits  or  is  placed  in  ordinary,  with 
any  suggestions  the  Commander  may  have  to  make  relative  to  practicable 
changes  which  will  render  the  service  more  safe  or  convenient. 


SHELL-ROOMS. 

202.  Rooms  for  the  stowage  of  loaded  shells  require  the  same  care  in 
construction  and  protection  against  an   enemy's  shot,  and   in   provision  for 
lighting  and  flooding,  as  magazines.     Therefore,   they   should  always   be 
built  with  reference  to  these  objects,  as  well  as  to  affording  room  enough  to 
accommodate   conveniently  the  number  of  loaded  shells  allowed  in  their 
boxes,  stowed  in  bulk.     Each  should  have  one  light,  arrange-d  like  those  for 
magazines. 

203.  In  vessels  partially  armed  with  shell-guns,  the  best  place,  perhaps, 
for  these  rooms  is  immediately  forward  of  the  spirit-room,  but  not  com 
municating  with  it ;  and  in  those  armed  entirely  with  such  guns,  the  addi 
tional    shell-rooms  necessary  may  be,  perhaps,   more   conveniently  placed 
abaft,  and  adjoining  the  delivcring-passage  of  the  forward  magazine,  than 
elsewhere. 

204.  With  the  introduction  of  rifled  cannon,  and  various  special  projec 
tiles,  it  is  essential  to  devote  more  care  to  the  stowage  of  shells,  in  order 
to  avoid  confusion  in  battle.     Not  only  each  kind  and  calibre,  but  each 
length  of  fuze,  is  to  be  stowed  in  separate  tiers. 


DAMPNESS  OF  MAGAZINES  AND  SHELL-ROOMS. 

205.  Sponge  dipped  in   a  solution  of  salt  water,  dried  and  weighed, 
is  a  means  of  ascertaining  if  dampness  exists  in  these  places.     If  it  become 
heavier,  the  room  is  damp. 

VENTILATION. 

206.  Provision  must  be  made,  by  means  of  grating-hatches,  for  sufficient 
ventilation  in  action,  to  supply  the  magazine-men    with  fresh  air,  and  allow 
the  dampness  caused  by  perspiration  to  pass  off;  and  fan-blowers  are  to  be 
fitted  to  increase  the  supply  of  fresh  air,  and  assist  the  ventilation.     The 
magazine  should  be  opened  and  aired,  at  least  once  a  fortnight,  for  a  few 
hours,  on  bright,  clear  days. 


SPACES  REQUIRED 

for  worki  n  g* 

DIFFERENT  CLASSES  OF  GUNS 


ON 


TRUCK  CARRIAGES. 


(  with  tit  u  z  z  U  18  VJ  in  sulr  oi '  <  -e n  //  /-  vt  h>i  /  / 


Hi  train  <tf  Ordnance 
June, 


L  ith  .  k    J.  b:  Gedm ,  Wa&hn 


SPACES  REQUIRED 

for  worki  n  g* 

DIFFERENT  CLASSES  OF  GUNS 


ON 


TRUCK  CARRIAGES. 


(with  muzzle,  18UJ  inside,  of  centre  of  Port.) 


CKSttttwaatn,  del 


L  tfh   bv  J.F.  Gtdnc\ .  Wrt  vhn 


GUN-CARRIAGES.  65 


CHAPTEE   III. 

GUN-CARRIAGES,  GEAR,  IMPLEMENTS  AND  EQUIPMENTS. 


GUN-CARRIAGES. 

207,  AR  gun-carriages  shall  be  constructed  in  exact  conformity  to  the 
drawings  furnished  by  the  Bureau,  and  no  alterations  whatever  will  be  per 
mitted  without  its  express  sanction. 

The  Inspector  of  Ordnance  will  keep  approved  copies  of  all  plans,  and,  in 
order  to  insure  uniformity,  will  report  to  the  Bureau  any  deviations  from  the 
standard  drawings  which  he  may  observe  in  carriages  received  from  other  Yards. 

The  spaces  required  for  efficient  working  of  all  guns  are  represented  in 
diagrams  X,  Y,  Z,  and  these,  as  well  as  the  distances  between  pivot-centres, 
sizes  and  positions  of  bolts,  are  to  be  strictly  adhered  to. 

The  distance  between  pivot-centres  of  all  XI-in.,  X-in.,  IX-in.,  and  100- 
pdr.  carriages  shall  be  either  142  or  Il7f  inches,  depending  on  the  breadth 
of  beam,  position  of  hatches  and  other  obstructions,  and  shall  not  be 
deviated  from  except  by  explicit  directions  of  the  Bureau,  on  a  report  of 
the  particular  circumstances  in  each  case. 

For  the  60-pdr.  Parrott,  130  inches  between  centres;  and  for  the  30-pdr., 
120  inches. 

The  sizes  of  sockets  and  pivot-bolts  are  established  as  follows : 

FOE  XI-IN.,  X-IN.,  IX-IN.,       FOR  60, 30,  AND 

AND  100-PDB.  20-PDR. 

Inches.  Inches. 

Length  of  bolt  under  the  head 18  14 

Diameter  of  bolt 4 

Do.        hole  in  socket 4_1  31 

Bo.        boss 10  5  8[ 

Height  of  boss j  5  j  j 

Slot  in  the  pivot-plate,  TL  larger  than  the  boss. 

For  XI-in.,  X-in.,  IX-in.,  and  100-pdr.  carriages,  the  fighting  and  shifting 
sockets  are  bossed,  the  housing-socket  plain. 

For  60-pdr.,  30-pdr.,  and  20-pdr.  carriages,  the  shifting-socket  alone  is 
bossed. 


66  ORDNANCE  AND   ORDNANCE   STORES. 

For  broadside-guns,  the  following  positions  for  bolts  are  established : 

20    AND   24  IN.  16   AND  18  IN. 

POUT-SILLS.  PORT-SILLS. 

Inches.  Inches. 

Height  of  centre  of  lower  bolt  from  deck 14. 75  .  10 . 75 

Distance  between  the  bolts 3.75  3.75 

Do.     of  centre  of  1st  bolt  from  side  of  port 14.  14. 

Do.            do.         2d  bolt  from  side  of  port 22.  22. 

Do.            do.         training-bolt  from  side  of  port 36.  36. 

Height  of  training-bolt  from  deck 21 .  14.  &  1G. 

Height  of  securing-bolt  (side-tackle  bolt)  above  port-sill ....          8 .  8 . 

For  IX-in.  guns,  the  port-sill  should  not  be  less  than  20  inches  in  height, 
and  no  port- sill  less  than  16  inches;  otherwise,  the  carriages  will  not  give 
sufficient  elevation,  and  the  position  of  the  Gun  Captain  in  aiming  is  exceed 
ingly  awkward  and  inconvenient. 

Scraping  and  staining  gun-carriages  or  keeping  them  bright  is  prohibited; 
they  should  be  kept  well  painted,  and  the  trucks,  axletrees,  and  trunnion- 
holes  oiled. 

All  new  work  shall  be  primed  with  red-lead. 

Wrougbt-iron  Broadside  carriages,  for  IX-inch,  new  8-in.  of  6,500  Ibs., 
and  32-pdr.  of  4,500  Ibs.  shell-guns,  have  been  designed  by  the  Ordnance 
Bureau,  submitted  to  trial  with  success,  and  are  being  issued  for  service  at 
sea. 


GUN-GEAR. 

208.  Breechings  for  all  guns  are  to  be  made  of  the  best  hemp,  of  three- 
stranded  rope,  shroud-laid,  and  soft;  and  for  smooth-bore  guns  not  to  measure 
less  than  seven  and  a  half  nor  more  than  eight  inches  in  the  coil,  excepting 
those  for  IX-inch  guns,  which  are  to  measure  nine  and  a  half  inches,  and 
for  Xl-inch  ten  and  a  half  inches. 

209.  The  brecching-bolts  must  never  be  of  less  dimensions  than  those 
prescribed  by  regulation,  and  there  must  be  double  sets  for  the  IX  and  XI 
inch  guns. 

210.  In  fitting  breechings,  a  thimble  is  to  be  spliced  into  one  end,  the 
strands  stuck  through  twice,  and  marled  down.     A  thimble  is  to  be  turned 
into  the  other  end,  so  that  the  length  of  the  breeching  may  be  conveniently 
altered.     Thus  fitted,  when  the  gun  is  run  in  and  levelled,  breechings  must 
be  long  enough  to  allow  the  muzzle  of  the  gun  to  come  a  foot  iiaside  of  the 
upper  port-sill,  if  the  breadth  of  the  vessel  will  allow  it.     With   guns  of 
violent  recoil  this  distance  may  be  advantageously  doubled,  where  there  is 
room  enough,  as  thereby  the  strain  will  be  much  lessened. 

Breechings  are  neither  to  be  covered,  blackened,  nor  rendered  less  pliable 
in  any  way. 


New  8  in.  Gun  of  6500  Ibs,  andiron  Carriage 


J.ith.by  J '._t:  Gedney,  Washn 


GUN-GEAR. 


67 


BREECHINGS. 


LKNGTH 

LENGTH 

ClRCUM- 

T 

IIMBLE. 

OF 

OF 

FEKENCE 

WFJGHT, 

CLASS  OF  GUN. 

BuEEni- 

NG    WHEN 

CUT. 

BUEECH- 

NO    WHEN 

FINISHED. 

OF 

BKEECII- 

ING. 

Diam 
eter. 

Depth 

Radius 
of  Score. 

Diam.bolt- 
hole, 

NCLITDING 
THIMBLE. 

Pivot. 
XT  -inch     

X    " 

Feet. 
83. 
87.5 

Feet 
32. 
31.5 

Inch. 
10.5 
10. 

Inch. 
8. 
6. 

Inch. 
4. 
4. 

Inch. 
1.75 
1.75 

Inch. 
2.05 

2.05 

Lbs. 
172. 
170. 

IX    "                

84. 

23.5 

9.5 

6. 

3  G 

1.6 

2.05 

110. 

100-poundcr          .    .  . 

87.5 

31.5 

9.5 

6. 

3.G 

1.6 

2.05 

130. 

(jg            u 

33. 

23. 

8. 

5.5 

_ 

1.8 

1.55 

91. 

80        "       ......... 

27.5 

23.5 

7. 

5. 

- 

1.2 

1.55 

43. 

20        "       

20. 

21. 

6. 

4. 

- 

1.0 

1.55 

40. 

Broadside. 

Xl-incli      

3S.O 

32.0 

10.5 

6. 

4. 

1.75 

2.05 

172. 

X    "• 

34.5 

28  5 

10. 

G. 

4. 

1.75 

2.05 

160. 

IX    "      

31.5 

25.5 

9.5 

6. 

3.G 

1.6 

2.05 

100. 

8-in.              G-'Jcwt. 

23. 

23.3 

8. 

5.5 

- 

1.8 

1.55 

76. 

Q  .           (      f>5c\vt.  1 
8'in-       1  6.500  Ibs.   \ 

27. 

22.3 

8. 

5.5 

- 

l.B 

1.55 

72 

32-ponn(K'r  —  57  cwt.  .  . 

23.5 

24. 

S. 

5.5 

- 

1.3 

1.55 

76. 

09  ,.,i,.   J        42  cwt.  ( 
32-l)(l1-  1    4.500  Ibs.    f 

2G. 

21.5 

8. 

5.5 

- 

1.3 

1.55 

70. 

82-ponnder—  «8  cwt,  .  . 
32        '•          27  cwt... 

23  5 

22. 

19 
17.5 

8. 
8. 

5.5 
5.5 

- 

1.3 
1.3 

1.55 
1.55 

Go. 
61. 

Broadside  Rifle. 

100-poumler  

35.5 

31. 

9.5 

G. 

8.6 

1.6 

2.05 

115 

GO        "       

23. 

23.5 

8. 

5.5 

— 

1.3 

1.55 

80. 

80        "                .     .. 

25.5 

21.5 

7. 

5. 

- 

1.2 

1.55 

39. 

20        "       

23. 

17.5 

6. 

4. 

1. 

1.55 

34. 

211,  Gun-tackle  falls  will  be  made  of  Manilla  or  such  other  pliable  rope 
as  may  be  directed  from  time  to  time  by  the  Bureau  of  Ordnance.     It  is 
prohibited  to  blacken  them  or  to  diminish  their  pliability.     Three-inch  rope 
will  be  found  large  enough  for  the  heaviest,  and  from  2|  to  2£  inch  for  the 
lighter  guns. 

The  rope  being  well  stretched,  the  falls  are  to  be  cut  of  sufficient  length  to 
allow  the  full  recoil,  leaving  end  enough  to  hitch  round  the  stiaps  of  their 
inner  blocks,  when  hooked  to  the  middle  bolts. 

212,  Blocks  for  gun-tackles  should  have  pins  of  hardened  copper,  turned 
smooth,  and    sheaves  of  lignum-vitae  without   bouching.      Those  to  reeve 
3-inch  falls  to  be  10  inches,  those  for  2£-inch  falls  9  inches,  and  those  for 
2£  inch  falls  8  inches  long.     The  hooks  of  gun-tackle  blocks  are  not  to  be. 
less  than  one  and  a  half  inch  diameter  at  the  bend  for  heavy,  and  one  and  a 
quarter  for  light,  broadside-guns. 

Metallic  blocks  with  nibs,  which  keep  the  blocks  fair  with  the  falls,  and 
thus  prevent  the  falls  from  fouling  in  the  recoil,  are  to  be  supplied  to  all 
Marsilly  and  heavy  pivot  carriages. 


68  ORDNANCE  AND  ORDNANCE   STORES. 


GRIOLET. 

213.  The  GRIOLET-PURCHASE  for  dismounting  guns  on  covered  decks  is 
composed  of — 

A  toggle-block,  made  of  elm  or  oak,  the  outer  end  or  head  of  which  is 
made  rather  larger  in  diameter  than  the  inner  one,  which  exactly  fits  the 
bore  of  the  gun.  The  head  has  two  sheaves  in  it,  so  as  to  form  the  lower 
block  of  the  muzzle-purchase,  and  is  bound  at  the  outer  end  with  an  iron 
band. 

A  double  cascabel-block  of  iron  is  made  either  with  a  shackle  or  to  fit 
between  the  jaws  of  the  cascabel,  where  it  is  secured  by  the  cascabel-pin. 
The  iron  pins  on  which  the  sheaves  revolve  are  formed  with  eyes,  for  the 
convenience  of  hitching  the  standing  part  of  the  purchase. 

Two  iron  treble-blocks,  one  for  the  muzzle  and  the  other  for  the  breech- 
purchase. 

The  muzzle-purchase  block  is  so  fitted  as  to  be  either  shackled  or  toggled 
to  the  housing-bolt  above  the  port,  and  the  breech-purchase  block  has  an 
iron  strap  terminating  above,  with  an  eye  by  which  it  is  shackled  to  a  bolt 
passing  through  the  deck  above  the  gun.  This  bolt  has  an  eye  in  one  end, 
and  a  screw  or  key-slit  at  the  other,  and,  when  in  place,  is  secured  above 
the  deck  with  a  nut  or  key,  between  which  and  the  deck  a  washer  of  hard 
wood  or  iron  of  suitable  breadth  and  thickness  is  placed. 

The  hole  through  which  this  bolt  is  put  should  be  directly  above  the 
cascabel-block  when  the  muzzle  of  the  gun  is  under  the  housing-bolt,  and 
may  be  bored  at  the  time  the  gun  is  to  be  dismounted  ;f  it  is  to  be  stopped 
afterwards  with  a  plug  of  wood  coated  with  white-lead. 

But  as  it  is  desirable  that  every  division  on  the  gun-deck  should  be  exer 
cised  in  mounting  and  dismounting  its  guns,  a  hole  may  be  made  in  the 
deck  above  each  division  and  bouched  with  a  composition  screw-tap. 

The  purchase-falls  should  not  be  less  than  three  and  a  half  inches  in  size, 
and  should  be  made  of  Manilla  rope,  of  sufficient  length  to  reeve  full,  the 
gun  being  supposed  to  be  on  deck  and  the  upper  blocks  in  place,  allowing 
also  sufficient  end  for  splicing  in  the  thimbles  and  hitching  the  standing 
part  of  the  purchase  when  rove. 

An  iron  thimble,  large  enough  to  hook  the  double-block  of  a  side  or 
train  tackle,  is  spliced  into  the  end  of  each  purchase-fall. 


SELVAGEE  WADS. 

214.  Selvagee  wads  are  made  by  the  wad-machine  at  the  Navy  Yards. 
This  consists  of  pairs  of  disks  adapted  to  each  calibre  of  guns,  which  being 
placed  face  to  face  on  a  spindle  and  keyed,  present  an  annular  score,  grooved 
in  such  a  way  as  to  make,  when  filled,  a  grommet  of  the  requisite  size. 


MAGAZINE-SCREENS  AND   DftESSES.  69 

Transverse  notches  are  cut  in  the  circumference  of  the  disks  to  the  bottom 
of  the  score,  for  the  convenience  of  marling  the  wad  before  taking  it  off  the 
mould. 

In  making  the  wad,  the  end  of  a  rope-yarn  is  fixed  in  the  score,  and  the 
mould  is  turned  by  a  crank  until  the  score  is  filled.  The  grommet  thus 
formed  is  marled  like  a  selvagee  strap,  and  a  section  of  about  an  inch  is 
taken  out  of  it,  in  order  to  make  the  wad,  when  swelled  by  dampness,  enter 
the  bore  of  the  gun  readily. 

Selvagee  wads  should  be  made  neither  too  hard  nor  too  soft ;  and  to  avoid 
either  of  these  extremes,  a  sufficient  number  of  hitches  only  will  be  taken  to 
give  the  wad  the  consistency  required  for  service. 

Sections  of  one-third  or  one-fourth  of  these  wads  will  answer  as  well,  in 
case  of  need. 

MAGAZINE-SCREENS, 

21 5 •  Are  made  of  thick  fearnaught,  or  of  double  baize,  with  holes  through 
which  to  pass  the  powder ;  these  holes  to  be  covered  by  broad  flaps  of  the 
same  material.  One  screen  is  to  be  hung  abaft,  and  another  forward  of  the 
magazine  passing-hatch  and  scuttles  in  sloops-of-war ;  in  ships-of-the-line 
and  frigates,  one  is  usually  to  be  hung  abaft  the  fore,  and  one  forward  of 
the  after,  magazine-scuttle ;  but  as  ships  are  differently  arranged,  two  to 
each  magazine  will  be  allowed,  if  required. 

Canvas  chutes  for  returning  empty  passing-boxes  are  to  be  supplied  to 
each  scuttle. 

MAGAZINE-DRESSES, 

216.  Are  to  be  of  worsted,  like  a  simple  shirt,  to  reach  to  the  knees — no 
metal  buttons  to  be  worn. 

The  shoes  must  be  made  wholly  of  cotton  canvas  or  buckskin.  In  hot 
climates  or  warm  weather  generally,  the  naked  feet  are  preferred.  India- 
rubber  and  woollen  slippers  are  prohibited. 


RATTLES  FOR  CALLING  BOARDERS, 

217.  To  be  made  like  those  used  by  watchmen,  of  white  oak,  or  some 
other  similar  wood.  Rattle,  12  inches  long;  ratchet,  2  inches  in  diameter; 
spring,  one  inch  in  width,  and  of  sufficient  thickness  and  elasticity  to  pro 
duce  the  requisite  sound.  Weight  enough  should  be  given  to  the  butt  to 
cause  it  to  revolve  round  the  handle  with  ease. 

Fixed  rattles  of  greater  power  will  be  attached  to  suitable  places  on  each 
deck. 


70  ORDNANCE   AND  ORDNANCE  STORES. 


SHELL-WHIPS, 

218.  To  be  made  of  two-inch  rope,  rove  through  two  single  blocks  one 
above  the  other,  in  the  shell- hatchway,  and  the  ends  knotted  together.  A 
hook  is  fixed  on  each  part  of  the  whip,  near  the  block,  so  that  the  parts 
being  bowsed  on  alternately,  a  full  box  is  brought  up  on  one  hook  and  an 
empty  one  lowered  by  the  other,  at  the  same  time. 


FLASH-PANS. 

219.  Shallow  copper  bowls,  large  enough  to  hold  an  ounce  of  powder, 
with  a  handle  two  feet  long,  to  be  supplied  to  all  vessels. 


DARK  LANTERNS, 

220»  To  be  made  of  copper,  tinned  inside,  with  two  handles  at  the  side, 
that  the  shade  may  be  turned  without  taking  hold  of  the  top.  The  whole 
height,  1 2  inches ;  diameter,  4  inches. 


BOAT  GRAPNELS, 

221.  Are  made  of  round  iron,  quite  lio-ht,  for  throwing  into  the  rigging 
or  chains  of  the  enemy,  for  the  purpose  of  holding  on  when  boarding ;  their 
prongs  arc  barbed. 

Six  feet  of  small  chain  are  to  be  attached  to  the  ring,  and  connected  with 
six  fathoms  of  one  and  three  quarter  rope. 


TARGETS. 

222.  In  the  construction  of  targets  for  practice  at,  sea,  the  chief  object 
will  be  to  give  buoyancy  and  stability  to  the  screen,  with  sufficient  develop 
ment  of  its  surface.  To  these  ends,  whiskey  or  beef  barrels,  supporting 
boards  of  sufficient  length,  will  afford  staging  for  the  masts,  yards,  and 
screen ;  the  heel  of  the  mast  passing  through  the  stage,  and  having  ballast 
attached  to  it.  The  stage  should  be  so  fitted  as  to  be  readily  put  together 
when  wanted,  and  taken  apart  for  stowage. 

Harbor  targets  may  be  anchored,  or  supported  on  stakes ;  but  it  would 
conduce  to  good  practice  to  stretch  a  screen  of  sufficient  length  to  show, 
distinctly,  four  or  six  ports,  with  the  proper  intervals  between.  This  will 
the  better  exhibit  the  lateral  effect  of  the  firing  of  each  gun,  and  of  the 
concentration  of  fire  from  several  guns  at  known  distances. 


GUN-SLINGS. — TRUNNION-SIGHT.  71 

PACKING-BOXES. 

223. «  Cartridges  for  small  arms,  primers,  spur-tubes,  percussion-caps,  spare 
fuzes,  false-fires,  blue-lights,  port-fires,  and  signal-rockets,  will  generally  be 
supplied  to  vessels  in  boxes,  in  which  they  can  be  kept  with  little  liability 
to  injury,  until  wanted  for  use.  (See  Part  L,  Page  10,  Art.  42.) 

These  boxes  are  to  be  safely  kept  and  returned  into  store,  or  accounted 
for  in  the  same  manner  as  other  articles  of  Ordnance  stores,  by  those  per 
sons  in  whose  charge  they  may  be  placed.  They  will  be  held  pecuniarily 
responsible  for  their  loss. 

GUN-SLINGS 

224.  Must  be  made  of  chain  of  ^-inch  iron,  and  tested,  to  secure  proper 
strength;  the  rings  are  to  be  of  li-inch  iron.     The  length  of  the   slings 
should  exceed  by  one  foot  that  of  the  longest  gun   on  board.     The  two 
parts   should   be  parcelled   and  marled  together   for   a  space  of  two  feet 
before  and  one  foot  behind  the  trunnions  of  the  longest  gun,  and  a  piece  of 
three-inch  rope  spliced  around  both  parts  in  the  wake  of  the   parcelling, 
long  enough  to  take  four  or  five  turns  round  the  chase  of  the  largest  gun. 

TRUNNION-SIGHT  FOR  MORTARS  AND  PIVOT-GUNS. 

225.  The  trunnion-sight  is  designed  to  be  used  only  when  the  required 
elevation  passes  the  limits  of  the   other  sights.     It  is  formed  of  a  bar  of 
mahogany,  or  other  hard  wood  not  liable  to  warp,  of  about  forty  inches  in 
length,  two  inches  wide,  and  one  inch  thick,  with  a  brass  notch  at  the  rear 
end  and  a  point  at  the  other,  fixed  in,  and  parallel  to,  the  upper  eclire.     It 
is  attached,  by  a  stout  thumb-screw,  to  the  axis  of  the  left  trunnion,  around 
which  it  revolves  when  the  screw  is  slack. 

A  semicircular  plate,  graduated  to  degrees,  is  attached  to  the  bar,  so  that 
the  sight  may  be  used  with  the  tables  showing  the  corresponding  ranges  of 
the  several  classes  of  guns  with  their  distant  firing-charge.  (See  TABLES 
OF  RANGES,  Appendix  D.) 

The  upper  edge  of  the  sight-bar  corresponds  with  0°  when  the  line  of 
sight  is  parallel  to  the  axis  of  the  bore.  A  small  level  let  into  the  upper 
surface  of  the  rear  end  of  the  bar  shows  when  the  bar  is  level. 

In  using  this  sight,  the  thumb-screw  is  first  loosened,  and  the  rear  end  of  the 
sight  raised  until  the  mark  on  the  trunnion  coincides  with  the  degree  of 
elevation  required  for  the  range,  as  given  in  the  Tables  :  clamp  the  thumb 
screw,  and  elevate  the  gun  until  the  bubble  is  at  0°,  then  give  the  lateral 
training. 

226.  Tangent-sights  placed  on  the  side  of  the  breech,  with  a  fixed  front 
sight  on  the  rimbase,  as  in  rifled  cannon,  will  hereafter  be  supplied  to  all 
pivot-guns;  and  these  will  give  th-?  sight  with  equal  accuracy  at  all  elevations. 


72  ORDNANCE  AND   ORDNANCE   STORES. 


RAMMERS   AND    SPONGES. 

227.  Rammer-heads  are  to  be  made  of  well-seasoned  ash,  birch,  beech, 
or  other  tough  wood,  of  the  form   and   dimensions  given  in  the  drawings 
furnished  by  the  Bureau  to  the  different  Navy  Yards.     The  face  of  the  ram 
mer  is  hollowed,  so  as  to  embrace  the  front  of  the  ball  and  press  the  sel- 
vagee  wad  home  in  its  place.     A  hole  is  bored  lengthwise  through  the  head 
to  admit  the  tenon,  which  is  fastened  by  a  pin  of  hard  wood,  three-tenths 
of  an  inch  in  diameter,  passing  transversely  through  the  head  and   tenon. 
The  diameter  of  the  staff  is  1.75,  and  that  of  the  tenon   1.5   inch.     The 
diameter  of  the  rammer-head  will  be  0.25  inch  less  than  that  of  the  bore  or 
chamber  to  which  it  is  adapted. 

For  all  chambered  guns  except  those  of  the  Dahlgren  pattern,  the  ram 
mers  will  be  adapted  to  the  chamber,  but,  as  above  described,  will  answer 
equally  well  for  the  shot  and  selvagee  wad. 

Staves  are  made  of  tough  ash,  and  are  one  foot  longer  than  the  bores  of 
the  guns  for  which  they  are  intended :  they  are  to  have  grooves  -^  of  an 
inch  deep  and  £  of  an  inch  broad  cut  in  them  to  show  when  the  "  ordi 
nary  charges"  are  in  place,  and,  by  due  allowances,  the  others  also. 

For  rifled  cannon,  rammer-heads  are  made  of  composition,  of  the  pattern 
prescribed  by  the  Bureau. 

228.  Sponge-heads  are  to  be  made  of  poplar,  or  other  suitable  light 
wood.     A  hole  1.5  inch  in  diameter  is  bored  through  the  axis  to  admit  tht 
tenon  of  the  staff,  into  which  the  worm  is  previously  secured  by  means  of  a 
brass  pin  which  passes  through   an  eye  in  its  shank  and   the  tenon.     The 
worm  is  intended  to  project  half  an  inch   beyond  the  face  of  the  sponge- 
head,  when  the  tenon  is  in  place,  and  to  have  free  play  back  into  its  socket 
when  pressed  against  the  bottom  of  the  bore.     It  must  be  two  inches  in 
length  and  one  and  a  quarter  inch  in  diameter,  made  of  elastic  brass  or 
composition  wire  two-tenths  of  an  inch  in  diameter,  and  tapering  at  the 
points,  so  as  to  preserve  its  elasticity  and  firmness.     It  is  to  be  left-handed, 
in  order  to  act  when  turned  to  the  right,  or  with  the  sun. 

The  wood  of  which  sponge-heads  are  made  should  be  well  seasoned,  and 
gotten  out  of  a  size  but  little  greater  than  the  diameter  of  the  heads  for 
which  it  is  intended,  so  that  there  may  be  as  little  shrinkage  as  possible 
in  the  finished  heads. 

The  heads,  when  finished,  should  also  be  primed  with  several  coats  of 
boiled  linseed  oil  or  varnish,  as  the  porous  wood  of  which  they  are  made  is 
apt  to  become  water-soaked,  or  to  split  on  exposure  to  the  air. 

229.  For  chambered  guns  the  sponges  must  fit  the  chambers  and  slopes, 
and  a  portion  of  the  main  bore,  as  shown  in  the  drawings  furnished  by  the 
Bureau.     When  made  of  wool,  the  whole  surface  is  covered,  and  so  sheared 


BAMMERS  AND  SPONGES.  73 

as  to  have  no  windage,  and  to  be  even  with  the  points  of  the  worm,  that 
they  make  take  effect.  The  heads  for  woollen  sponges  should  be  one  inch 
less  in  diameter  than  the  bores  or  chambers  of  tlie  guns  for  which  they  are 
intended. 

In  future,  sheepskins  will  not  be  allowed,  but  covers  for  sponge- heads 
made  up  ready  to  slip  over  the  head  and  be  tacked  on. 

230.  The  heads  for  the  sponges  of  unchambered  guns  are  to  be  eight 
inches  long ;  and   all  sponge-heads  intended  to  be  covered   with  woollen 
material    must  be  slightly  tapered   and  secured  by  a  thin  copper  hoop, 
fastened  with  copper  tacks,  on  the  inner  end. 

231.  For  Bristle   Sponges  the   heads  must  be  1.5  inch  less  in  diameter 
than  the  bores  or  chambers  for  which  they  are  designed.     The  bristles  arc 
to  be  sheared  so  as  to  work  easily  and  leave  no  windage.     The  worm  must 
project  one-fourth  of  an  inch,  in  order  to  take  the  bottom  of  the  bore,  and 
special  care  is  to  be  taken  by  the  Inspector  that  it  has  both  the  necessary 
stiffness  to  act  efficiently  and   elastically  enough,  when  pressed  home,  to 
yield  sufficiently  to  allow  the  bristles  to  act  also.     Spiral  spaces  extending 
the   whole  length  of  the  sponge-head,  including  the  portion  adapted  to  the 
main  bore  in  chambered  guns,  are  to  be  left,  in  order  to  bring  out  the  un- 
consumed  portions  of  cartridges.     These  spaces  must  be  left-handed  like 
the  worm. 

Great  care  is  necessary,  in  stowing  them,  to  prevent  the  bristles  from 
being  crushed  down  by  contact  with  hard  substances.  For  this  purpose 
fenders  will  be  provided  with  copper  tacks,  on  the  inner  end. 

One  will  be  allowed  to  each  division,  for  each  calibre,  for  cleaning  guns. 

232.  Sponge-staves  are  to  be  made  of  tough  ash,  1.75  inch  in  diameter, 
and  must  be  18  inches  longer  than  the  bores  of  the  guns  for  which  they  are 
intended. 

233.  Sponge-caps  are  made  of  duck,   and,  except  for   spar-deck   guns 
where  they  are  exposed  to  the  weather,  should  not  be  painted,  but  they,  as 
well  as  the  staves,  should  be  kept  clean  by  scrubbing.     A  becket  should  be 
attached  to  the  end  to  haul  them  off  by. 

Sponges  should  be  washed  carefully  and  dried  after  use  before  putting 
the  caps  on,  and  frequently  examined  and  dried  to  prevent  their  rotting. 


ROBINSON'S  WORM. 

234.  This  worm  consists  of  a  screw,  li  inch  in  diameter,  of  two  turns,  at 
the  end  of  .a  cylindrical  iron  shank,  with  a  socket  and  straps  riveted  to  the 
staff,  which,  is  1.5  inch  in  diameter.  The  worm  is  supported  in  the  axis  of 


ORDNANCE   AND   ORDNANCE   STORES. 


the  bore  by  means  of  a  guide-ring  of  composition,  kept  in  place  on  the 
shank,  six  inches  from  the  end,  by  a  shoulder  and  forelock. 

Thus  adjusted,  it  is  used  to  draw  the  junk-wad  and  cartridge  ;  the  latter 
being  laid  hold  of  by  the  tic,  if  the  staff  be  held  in  the  axis  of  the  bore,  is 
uninjured. 

When  the  ring  is  removed  the  worm  will  be  equally  efficient  in  drawing 
the  selvagee  wad. 

LADLES. 

285.  Ladles,  when  required,  are  to  be  made  according  to  the  patterns 
sent  to  each  of  the  Navy  Yards.  Ladles  which  may  be  on  hand  are  to  be 
tried  in  drawing  projectiles  from  the  guns  before  they  are  issued  for  service. 
The  Ladle  will  not  draw  rifle  projectiles,  and  should  not  be  used  for  that 
purpose. 


SCRAPERS  FOR  BOTTOM  OF  BORE. 

These  consist  of  two  steel  blades,  crossing  each  other  in  the  middle, 
and  having  their  edges  conformed  to  the  curve  of  the  bottom  of  the  bore. 
They  are  inserted  in  a  sponge-head,  and  are  designed  to  remove  the  cake 
usually  caused  by  the  adherence  of  the  bottoms  of  the  cylinders  to  the  bot 
tom  of  the  bore. 

The  edges  of  the  scrapers  are  so  bevelled  as  to  act  oaly  when  turned  to 
the  right,  or  with  the  sun. 

Scrapers  are  also  to  be   supplied  for  rifled  cannon,  made  to  clean  a 
groove  and  the  adjacent  lands. 


ORDINARY   HANDSPIKES. 

237 »  Handspikes  arc  to  be  made  of  well-seasoned  white  hickory,  of  the 
form  and  dimensions  directed  by  the  Bureau.  They  are  always  to  be  shod, 
stained  black,  and  oiled.  The  Ordnance  Officer  of  the  Navy  Yard  will  ascer 
tain  that  they  ship  freely  in  the  training-loops  or  sockets,  and  that  the  toe 
is  sufficiently  rounded  not  to  cut  the  decks  when  held  vertically. 


DETAILS  OF  HANDSPIKES. 

No.  1. 

No.  2. 

No.  3. 

f  Total           .                                                   in 

04 

GO 

1  Square  part     

90 

20 

JjGDfftli       -{  Octagon  " 

G 

0 

Round     "       

38 

;54 

[  Shoe 

18 

18 

(  of  sciuaro 

2  75 

2  '50 

Diameter.  |^^allelid 

1  75 

1  •(] 

Radius  of  quarter  round        

4  5 

3  '5 

Weight        .            Ibs 

16 

12. 

ROLLER  HANDSPIKES. — IMPRESSION-TAKERS. 


75 


ROLLER   HANDSPIKES. 

238.  There  are  two  sizes  of  roller  handspikes :  No.  1  for  the  IX-in.  shell- 
gun  and  100-pdr.  Marsilly,  or  two-truck  carriage;  No.  2  for  all  other  guns. 

They  are  composed  of — the  head  and  socket  of  bronze,  handle  of  hickory, 
and  the  roller  of  lignum -vitae. 

The  boss  on  the  head  makes,  with  the  handle,  an  angle  of  70°,  and, 
when  vertical,  lifts  the  carriage  half  an  inch  (0.5). 

Commander  Beaumont's  roller  handspike  has  been  adopted. 

It  is  a  common  error  of  seamen  to  stoop,  with  a  view  of  raising  the  carriage 
higher.  The  lift  is  greatest  when  the  end  of  the  handle  is  at  the  hip. 


DETAILS  OF  ROLLER  HANDSPIKES. 

No.  1. 

No.  2. 

1  Extreme                                                                     .   in 

70  5 

GG. 

of  handle        ' 

63.0 

62.5 

of  socket                                                                       ' 

12 

7  5 

Length.  . 

of  boss       

1  .6 

1.3 

of  boss  from  centre  of  roller 

4  5 

3  6 

of  axle-pin        .                             

9  5 

7.5 

f  of  roller 

4  5 

3  4 

of  socket    

2.9 

2  5 

Diameter 

•<  of  hole  in  socket 

2  G 

2  25 

Small  end  of  handle  

1   5 

1  50 

1  of  hole  for  axle-pin 

75 

G2 

\  of  roller  

3.  GO 

3.00 

Width  .  . 

'  /  Exterior  of  head                              .  . 

9  00 

7  00 

Weight 

Ibs. 

«9       ' 

19.5 

IMPRESSION-TAKERS. 

239.  All  vessels  carrying  XI  and  IX  inch  guns,  and  all  iron  rifles,  are  to 
be  furnished  with  an  impression-taker  and  wax.  Impressions  of  the  vent 
and  bore,  as  described  in  Art.  57,  are  to  be  taken  after  every  ten  shotted 
rounds  in  practice,  and  at  the  close  of  an  action.  The  last  one  should  be 
preserved  for  comparison  with  the  succeeding  one ;  and  when,  in  the 
opinion  of  the  Commanding  Officer,  the  wear  becomes  excessive,  or  a  de 
cided  crack  shows  itself,  a  duplicate  must  be  forwarded  to  the  Bureau  for 
examination.  In  forwarding  them,  they  should  be  tacked  on  a  piece  of  thin 
board  secured  in  the  bottom  of  a  box.  If  wrapped  in  cotton  or  oakum 
they  are  generally  defaced.  The  date,  number  of  fires,  Register  Nos.  of  guns, 
ship  from  which  forwarded,  and  other  remarks  written  and  pasted  on  the 
under  side  of  the  box-cover. 

In  expert  hands  any  small  spar — such  as  a  boat's  mast — will  take  tin 
impression  equally  well. 
16 


76  ORDNANCE   AND   ORDNANCE   STORES. 


PASSING-BOXES. 

240.  Passing-boxes  are  to  be  made  of  strong  and  well-tanned  harness  or 
sole  leather,  strongly  sewed,  or  of  such  other  material  as  may  be  directed. 

For  8-inch  and  32-pounder  guns  they  are  to  be  of  sufficient  height  to  con 
tain  two  near-firino-  charges. 

-^  O 

Their  diameters,  in  the  clear,  must  be  half  an  inch  greater  than  those  of 
the  cartridges  they  are  to  contain. 

Their  tops  must  be  distinctly  lettered,  in  letters  one  inch  and  a  half  long, 
with  the  calibre  and  class  of  gun  they  are  intended  to  serve,  and  made  to 
slide  on  the  beckets. 

241.  All   passing-boxes  are  to  be  painted    black,  with  the  calibre  and 
charge  painted  in   white  letters  two  and  one-half  (2^)  inches  long  on  the 
side,  and  one  and  one-half  (H)  on  the  top. 

242.  If,  however,  there  are  any  guns  of  the  same  calibre  on  spar-decks 
requiring  lighter  charges,  the  lower  half  of  the  box  shall  be  painted  white. 

For  gun-decks  in  similar  cases  the  lower  half  shall  be  painted  red. 

FIRE-TUBS. 

243.  Fire-tubs  should  be  made  of  oak,  of  the  patterns  furnished  by  the 
Bureau,  the  hoops  being  of  iron.     The  top  is  to  be  provided  with  a  stout 
hoop  of  wood,  to   ship  and  unship,  with  a  grating  across  it  of  stout  copper 
wire,  the  meshes  of  which  must  be  small  enough  to  prevent  the  passing- 
boxes  from  falling  into  the  water  when  struck  over  the  tub. 

FIRE-BUCKETS. 

244.  Fire-buckets  should  be  made  of  light  well-tanned  sole  leather,  accord 
ing  to  pattern. 

A  few  Rubber  buckets  have  been  issued  for  trial  and  report. 

THE  GROMMET  MUZZLE-LASHING  FOR  HOUSING  GUNS. 

245.  Consists  of  a  grommct   made  of  rope   double  the  frize  of  the  gun- 
tackle  fells,  with  two  cringles  worked  into  it  for  the  frapping  lashing,  which 
will  be  of  stuff  half  the  size  of  the  tackle-falls. 

The  grommet  will  be  made  large  enough  just  to  slip  over  the  swell  of  the 
muzzle  when  the  bight  is  over  the  housing  hook-bolt,  and  the  gun  is  in 
position  for  housing.  It  will  be  wormed  throughout,  and  parcelled  in  the 
wake  of  the  housing-bolt  and  frapping  lashing,  and  where  there  is  no  swell, 
in  the  wake  of  the  muzzle-ring. 

Where  the  housing-bolt  is  an  eye-bolt,  the  grommet  is  secured  to  it  by 
means  of  a  toggle  which  has  a  lanyard. 


FUZE-WRFNCHES. — STOPPERS.  77 


FUZE- WRENCHES. 

246.  For  the  Navy  time-fuze  these  are  made  of  steel,  with  a  round  shank, 
four  inches  long,  four-tenths  of  an  inch  diameter.  Prongs  round,  one  and  a 
half  inch  long,  three-tenths  of  an  inch  diameter.  Cross-handle  of  wood, 
with  small  forked  screw-driver  in  one  end  for  water-cap.  The  prongs  of  the 
wrench  are  flattened  at  the  ends,  and  are  nine-tenths  of  an  inch  apart. 

A  three-armed  wrench  is  also  required  for  the  Parrott,  Schenkl,  and 
Hotchkiss  fuzes,  all  of  which  differ. 

Two  to  be  allowed  to  each  shell-room. 


RIGGING  STOPPERS. 

247.  Standing  rigging,  when  stranded  or  shot  away,  is  most  readily  and 
effectually  seemed  for  the  moment  by  using  stoppers  composed  of  two  small 
dead-eyes,  fitted  with  double  selvagee  tails  and  lanyards,  of  sizes  suitable  to 
the  rigging,  whether  lower  or  topmast.     These  are  to  be  fitted  on  board 
ship,  and  set  up  by  means  of  pendant-tackles  or  jiggers,  as  the  case  may 
require. 

HARNESS-CASKS  FOR  BOATS. 

248.  For  expeditions,  the  launches  and  first  cutters  of  all  vessels  are  each 
to  be  provided  with   a  week's   supply  of  pork,  sufficient  for  all  the  boats' 
crews  of  the  ship,  kept  in   quarter  barrels  or  kegs,  adapted  to  the  form 
of  the  boat  and  to  convenient  stowage. 

ACCOUTREMENTS  FOR  CAPTAINS  OF  GUNS,  BOARDERS,  AND 
SMALL-ARMS  MEN. 

249.  WAIST- BELTS,  to  be  made  of  buff  leather — grained  leather  becomes 
stiff  and  horny  when  exposed  to  the  sea-air — two  inches  wide,  and  from 
forty  to  forty-four  inches  long;  a  pattern  buckle  has  been  adopted. 

The  same  belt  is  used  by  Captains  of  guns  and  boarders,  as  well  as  by 
small-arms  men  and  the  crews  of  field-howitzers ;  the  frogs  and  boxes  to  hold 
the  arms  and  ammunition  being  fitted  with  loops  to  slip  on  and  off  the  belt 
as  circumstances  require,  and  in  the  following  order  : 

1st  and  2d  Captains  of  guns,  and  of  field  and  boat  howitzers,  wear  the 
primer-box  in  front;  if  they  are  boarders,  the  sword  on  the  left  and  the 
pistol-frog  on  the  right  hip.  These  equipments,  consequently,  will  be  slid 
on  towards  the  loop  end  of  the  belt,  in  the  order  just  named. 

Other  boarders,  and  guns'  crews  of  howitzers  when  used  as  field-guns, 
wear  their  arms,  as  in  the  preceding  case,  without  the  primer-box. 


78  ORDNANCE   AND   OEDNANCE   STORES. 

Men  armed  with  muskets,  and  acting  on  shore,  will  wear  musket  cartridge- 
boxes,  fitted  with  frog  and  scabbard  for  bayonet  on  the  waist-belt. 

Men  who  may  be  armed  with  carbines  on  shore  duty  will  wear  cartridge- 
boxes  with  waist-belts.  For  boat  duty,  or  when  armed  with  pistols  and 
swords,  they  will  wear  the  waist-belt  with  the  proper  frog  and  boxes. 

250.  Instead  of  the  sword-frog,  the  sword  scabbards  of  Admiral  D.  D. 
Porter's  pattern  are  fitted  with  a  loop  to  slide  on  the  waist-belt.      This 
scabbard  also  dispenses  with  the  brass  mountings,  which  are  replaced  by 
leather  ones.     The  whole  is  fastened   by  copper  rivets,   instead  of  being 
sewed. 

251.  PRIMER-BOXES,  of  black  bridle  leather,  rectangular  in  form,  and  of 
the  size  to  contain,  loosely,  the  tin  packing-box.     Flap  covering  the  top  and 
front  with  a  button  uole  strap  one  inch  in  width,  sewed  near  the  bottom: 
brass  button  riveted  to  the  bottom  of  the  box.     Loop,  two  inches  wide, 
placed  upright  on  the  back  of  the  box  for  the  waist-belt  to  pass  through. 

252.  PISTOL-FROG — buff  leather — wide  enough  at  the  mouth  to  cover 
the  cock  of  the  pistol,  and  at  the  lower  part  to  accommodate  the  stock; 
upper  part  of  the  back  of  it  turned  down  to  form  a  loop  large  enough  to 
admit  the  waist-belt.      The  stitches  forming  the  side  seams  not  to  corne 
nearer  than  0.25  inch  from  the  edges  of  the  leather.     To  be  worn  on  right  hip. 

Pocket — thin  bridle  leather — to  contain  three  cartridges  ;  flap,  tongue, 
and  loop. 

Cap-pocket,  like  the  cartridge-pocket ;  lining,  a  strip  of  sheepskin  with 
the  wool  on,  glued  with  fish-glue  and  sewed  to  the  back  at  the  mouth  of 
the  pocket. 

These  two  pockets  are  of  the  same  depth,  and  occupy  the  whole  breadth 
of  the  pistol-frog. 

253.  TIIUMBSTALLS,  of  buckskin,  with  hair-stuffed  pad,  and  thongs  for 
the  wrist. 

254.  MUSKET  CARTRIDGE-BOX — black  bridle  leather — length,  7.2  inches; 
width,  1.6  inch;  depth  in  front,  5.8  inches;  inner  cover — upper  leather — 4 
inches  wide,  with  end  pieces  sewed  to  it  so  as  to  cover  the  ends  of  the  box; 
flap — harness   leather — 8.5    inches  wide    at  the  bottom,  8  inches  at  top, 
stamped  U.  S.  N.  in  an  oval  on  the  outside ;    a  button-hole  strap,  sewed 
near  the  bottom ;  brass  button  riveted  to  the  bottom  of  the  box  ;  loop — bridle 
leather — with  a  hole  in  the  middle  to  hook  the  shoulder-belt  to,  sewed  to 
the  back  of  the  box  for  the  waist-belt  to  pass  through. 

Cap-pocket — light  upper  leather — sewed  to  the  front  of  the  box ;  length, 
41 ;  depth,  2£  inches ;  flap,  tongue,  and  loop — bridle  leather  ;  lining,  a  strip 
of  sheepskin  with  the  wool  on,  1.5  inch  wide,  glued  with  fish-glue  and 


MARKING-  SMALL   ARMS.  79 

sewed  at  the  month  of  the  pocket ;  pocket  for  l>all-screw  and  wiper  sewed  on 
the  right,  and  for  cone-key  and  cone-pick  on  the  left  of  the  cap-pocket. 

Two  tin  linings,  each  with  a  lower  division,  3  inches  by  3.3  inches,  open 
in  front,  to  contain  a  bundle  of  ten  cartridges,  and  two  bundles  of  caps  con 
taining  25  each,  packed  in  water-proof  paper.  Each  tin  has  also  two  upper 
divisions,  2.7  inches  deep — one  of  2  inches  by  1.35  inch  for  six  cartridges; 
the  other,  1.35  inch  square,  for  four  cartridges.  The  edges  of  the  tins 
are  turned  over  and  soldered  down,  to  prevent  them  from  cutting  the 
fingers. 

All  the  tin  linings  should  be  made  to  slide  freely  in  the  boxes. 

255.  CARBINE  CARTRIDGE-BOX. — The  leather  parts  are  like  those  of  the 
musket  cartridge-box ;  length,  6.4  inches;  depth  in  front,  3.7  inches;  width, 
1.3  inch;    inner  cover,  3.5  inches  wide;   flap,  6.6  inches  wide  at  top,  6.8  at 
bottom,  6  deep.     Tin  linings  ;  two  lower  divisions,  2  inches  deep,  2.9  inches 
lono-,  1.2  wide;  five  upper  divisions,  1.2  inch  wide  by  1.15  inch   long,  and 
1.5  inch  deep,  to  contain  forty  cartridges,  those  below  in  bundles  of  water 
proof  paper. 

256.  CONE-PICK  of  steel  wire,  No.  18,  1.5  inch  long,  with  a  ring-handle 
0.5  inch  in  diameter ;  it  is  carried,  with  the  cone-key,  in  the  pocket  in  front 
of  the  musket  cartridge-box. 

257.  BAYONET   SCABBARD — black   bridle   leather — length,    19.3    inches, 
Frog — buff  leather — sewed  to  a  socket  of  black  leather,  which  is  fastened  to 
the  top  of  the  scabbard ;    the  loop  of  the  frog  to  be  made  wide   enough  to 
elide  on  the  waist-belt. 

MARKING  SMALL  ARMS. 

258.  It  is  directed  that  hereafter  all  small    arms,  when  passed  by  the 
Inspector,  be  stamped  in  the  following  manner: 

MUSKETS,    CARBINES,    AND    PISTOLS. 

On  the  top  of  the  barrel,  near  the  breech,  with  an  anchor;  and,  on 
the  lock-plate,  the  letter  P  over  the  initials  of  the  Inspector,  thus :  ^ 

REVOLVERS. 

On  the  top  of  the  barrel,  near  the  cylinder,  with  an  anchor;  and,  ®n  the 
face  of  the  cylinder,  the  letter  P  over  the  initials  of  the  Inspector,  as  above. 

CUTLASSES. 

On  the  blade,  immediately  below  the  guard,  with  an  anchor;  and  the 
letter  P  over  the  initials  of  the  Inspector,  as  above. 


80  ORDNANCE  AND  ORDNANCE  STORES. 

All  arms  in  store  or  returned  from  ships  will  be  stamped  with  the  anchor 
before  being  issued. 

The  Bureau  will  furnish  to  each  Inspector  two  sizes  of  stamps.  MUSKETS, 
CARBINES,  and  CUTLASSES  are  to  be  marked  with  the  larger,  ,15-in.,  and 
PISTOLS  and  REVOLVERS  with  the  smaller,  0.1-in.,  size  of  stamps. 


PRESERVATION  OF   SMALL  ARMS. 

259.  The  Captain   will   take    care   that  the    Small   Arms  are   carefully- 
cleaned  and  wiped  dry  after  every  exercise  or  use  of  them,  before  they  are 
put  away. 

260.  He  will  cause  them  to  be  frequently  examined  at  other  times,  to 
prevent  their  being  clogged  with  oil  or  lacquer,  and  to  be  sure  that  they  are 
always  ready  for  use. 

He  will  strictly  prohibit  their  being  marked  or  otherwise  defaced. 

261.  It  is  directed  that  the  men  who  use  them  be  taught  to  clean  them 
properly,  and  to  remedy  any  slight  defects  or  obstructions  to  their  use. 

Chests  not  lined  preserve  them  best,  if  there  be  no  proper  armory. 


DIRECTIONS  FOR  CLEANING  ARMS. 

In  taking  apart  and  cleaning  guns,  there  are  required  a  screw-driver, 
wiper,  wire-tumbler  punch,  and  a  spring  vice.  No  other  implements  should 
be  used  in  taking  arms  apart,  or  in  setting  them  up. 

263.  DISMOUNTING  AND  CLEANING. — The  rifle-musket  should  be  dis 
mounted  in  the  following  order,  viz.  : 

1st.  Unfix  the  bayonet.  2d.  Insert  the  tompion.  3d.  Draw  the  ramrod. 
4th.  Turn  out  the  tang-screw.  5th.  Take  off  the  lock ;  to  do  this,  put  the 
hammer  at  half-cock,  and  partially  unscrew  the  side  screws ;  then,  with  a 
slight  tap  on  the  head  of  each  screw  with  a  wooden  instrument,  loosen  the 
lock  from  its  bed  in  the  stock ;  turn  out  the  side  screws,  and  remove  the 
lock  with  the  left  hand.  6th.  Remove  the  side  screws  without  disturbing 
the  washers.  7th.  Take  off  the  bands  in  order,  commencing  with  the 
uppermost.  8th.  Take  out  the  barrel;  in  doing  this,  turn  the  musket 
horizontally,  with  the  barrel  downward,  holding  it  loosely,  with  the  left 
hand  below  the  rear  sight  and  the  right  hand  grasping  the  stock  by  the 
handle ;  tap  the  muzzle  on  the  ground,  if  necessary,  to  loosen  the  breech. 
If  an  attempt  were  made  to  pull  the  barrel  out  by  the  muzzle,  it  would,  in 
case  it  were  wood-bound,  be  liable  to  split  at  the  head  of  the  stock. 

The  foregoing  parts  of  the  rifle-musket  are  all  that  should  usually  be 
taken  off  or  dismounted 


DIRECTIONS   FOE   CLEANING   AEMS.  81 

The  breech-screw  should  be  taken  out  only  by  an  armorer,  and  never  in 
ordinary  cleaning.  The  mountings,  cone  and  cone-seat  screw,  should  not 
be  taken  off,  nor  should  the  lock  be  taken  apart,  except  by  permission  of 
an  officer. 

2G4.  To  CLEAN  THE  BARBEL. — 1st.  Stop  the  vent  with  a  peg  of  soft 
wood,  or  piece  of  rag  or  soft  leather  pressed  down  by  the  hammer ;  pour  a 
gill  of  water,  warm,  if  it  can  be  had,  into  the  muzzle ;  let  it  stand  a  short 
time  to  soften  the  deposit  of  powder ;  put  a  plug  of  soft  wood  into  the  muzzle 
and  shake  the  water  up  and  down  the  barrel ;  pour  it  out  and  repeat  the 
washing1  until  the  water  comes  out  clear ;  remove  the  peg  from  the  cone 
and  stand  the  barrel  muzzle  downward,  to  drain,  for  a  few  moments. 

2d.  Screw  the  wiper  on  the  end  of  the  ramrod,  and  put  a  piece  of  dry 
cloth  or  tow  round  it  sufficient  to  prevent  it  from  chafing  the  grooves  of  the 
barrel ;  wipe  the  barrel  dry,  changing  the  cloth  two  or  three  times. 

3d.  Do  not  put  oil  into  the  vent,  as  it  will  clog  the  passage  and  cause  the 
first  cap  to  miss  fire  ;  but,  with  a  slightly  oiled  rag  on  the  wiper,  rub  the 
bore  of  the  barrel  and  the  face  of  the  breech-screw,  and  immediately  insert 
the  tompion  into  the  muzzle. 

4tli.  To  clean  the  exterior  of  the  barrel,  lay  it  flat  on  a  bonch  or  board, 
to  avoid  bending  it.  The  practice  of  supporting  the  barrel  at  each  end, 
and  rubbing  it  with  a  strap,  buffstick,  rarnrod,  or  any  other  instrument  to 
burnish  it,  is  pernicious,  and  should  be  strictly  forbidden. 

5th.  After  firing,  the  barrel  should  always  be  washed  as  soon  as  practi 
cable  ;  when  the  water  comes  off  clear,  wipe  the  barrel  dry  and  pass  into 
it  an  oiled  rag.  Fine  flour  of  emery  cloth  is  the  best  article  to  clean  the 
exterior  of  the  barrel. 

265.  To  CLEAN  THE  LOCK. — Wipe  every  part  with  a  moist  rag,  and 
then  a  dry  one ;  if  any  part  of  the  interior  shows  rust,  put  a  drop  of  oil  on 
the  point  or  end  of  a  piece  of  soft  wood  dipped  into  flour  of  emery ;  rub 
out  the  rust  and  wipe  the  surface  dry ;  then  rub  every  part  with  a  slightly 
oiled  rag. 

268.  To  CLEAN  THE  MOUNTINGS. — For  iron  and  steel  parts,  use  fine 
emery  moistened  with  oil,  or  emery  cloth.  For  brass  parts,  use  rotten-stone 
moistened  with  vinegar  or  water,  applied  with  a  rag,  brush,  or  stick ;  oil  or 
grease  should  be  avoided.  The  dirt  may  be  removed  from  the  screw-holes 
by  screwing  a  piece  of  soft  wood  into  them.  Wipe  all  parts  with  a  linen 
rag,  and  leave  the  parts  slightly  oiled. 

267.  DISMOUNTING  BY  AN  ARMORER. — The  parts  which  are  specially  as 
signed  to  be  dismounted  by  an  experienced  armorer  will  be  stated  in  their 
regular  order,  following  No.  8,  viz. : 

9th.  Unscrew  cone.     10th.  Take  out  cone-seat  screw,     llth.  Take  out 


82  DIRECTIONS   FOR  CLEANING   ARMS. 

band-springs,  using  a  wire  punch.  12th.  Take  out  the  guard-screws.  Be 
careful  that  the  screw-driver  docs  not  slip  and  mar  the  stock.  13th.  Re 
move  the  guard  without  injuring  the  wood  at  either  end  of  the  plate.  14th. 
Remove  the  side  screw-washers  with  a  drift-punch.  15th.  Remove  the  butt- 
plate.  16th.  Remove  the  rear-sight.  17th.  Turn  out  the  breech-screw  by 
means  of  a  "  breech  screw- wrench"  suited  to  the  tenon  of  the  screw.  No 
other  wrench  should  ever  be  used  for  this  purpose,  and  the  barrel  should  be 
held  in  clamps  neatly  fitting  the  breech. 

268.  LOCK. — To  take  the  lock  apart:  1st.  Cock  the  piece  and  apply  the 
spring-piece  to  the  mainspring ;  give  the  thumb-screw  a  turn  sufficient  to 
liberate  the  spring  from  the  swivel  and  mainspring  notch ;  remove  the 
spring.  2d.  The  scar-spring  screw.  3d.  The  sear-screw  and  sear.  4th. 
The  bridle-screw  and  bridle.  5th.  The  tumbler-screw.  6th.  The  tumbler. 
This  is  driven  out  with  a  punch  inserted  in  the  screw-hole,  which  at  the 
same  time  liberates  the  hammer.  Yth.  Detach  the  mainspring  swivel  from 
the  tumbler  with  a  drift-punch.  8th.  Take  out  the  feed-finger  and  spring. 
9th.  The  catch-spring  and  screw. 


As  a  general  rule,  all  parts  of  the  musket  are  assembled  in  the 
inverse  order  in  which  they  are  dismounted.  Before  replacing  screws,  oil 
them  slightly  with  good  sperm  oil,  as  inferior  oil  is  converted  into  a  gum, 
which  clogs  the  operation  of  the  parts.  Screws  should  not  be  turned  in  so 
hard  as  to  make  the  parts  bind.  When  a  lock  has,  from  any  cause,  become 
gummed  with  oil  and  dirt,  it  may  be  cleaned  by  boiling  in  soap-suds,  or  in 
pearlash  or  soda-water ;  heat  should  never  be  applied  in  any  other  way. 

270.  PRECAUTIONS  IN  USING. — In  ordering  arms  on  parade,  let  the  butt 
be  brought  gently  to  the  ground,  especially  if  the  ground  be  hard.  This  will 
save  the  mechanism  of  the  lock  from  shocks,  which  are  very  injurious  to  it, 
and  which  tend  to  loosen  and  mar  the  screws  and  split  the  wood-work. 

The  ramrod  should  not  be  sprung  with  unnecessary  force,  for  fear  of 
injuring  the  corners  of  the  grooves ;  and,  in  stacking  arms,  care  should  be 
taken  not  to  injure  the  bayonets  by  forcibly  straining  the  edges  against 
each  other. 

No  cutting,  marking,  or  scraping  the  wood  or  iron  should  be  allowed, 
and  no  part  of  the  gun  should  be  touched  with  a  file.  Take  every  possible 
care  to  prevent  water  from  getting  between  the  lock,  or  barrel  and  stock. 
If  any  should  get  there,  dismount  the  gun  as  soon  as  possible,  clean  and  oil 
the  parts  as  directed,  and  see  that  they  are  perfectly  dry  before  assembling 
them. 


PAINTS  AND   LACQUERS.  83 


PAINTS  AND   LACQUERS. 


COMPOSITION   AND   PREPARATION. 

271*  The  proportions  are  given  for  100  parts  by  weight  of  prepared 
colors,  when  not  otherwise  designated. 

A.  gallon  of  linseed  oil  weighs 7.5    Ibs. 

"          spirits  of  turpentine 7.25    " 

"          Japan  varnish 7.        " 

"          sperm  oil 7.12    " 

"          neatsfoot  oil. .  7.63    " 


PAINTS    AND    LACQUERS. 

Boiled  oil. 

Raw  linseed 1 03.      Ibs. 

Copperas 3.15    " 

Litharge 6.3      " 

Dryings. 

Mixture  of  copperas  and  litharge  taken  from  the  boiled  oil.   60  Ibs. 

Spirits  turpentine ...    56    " 

Boiled  oil 2    " 

Putty  (for  filling  cracks  in  wood). 

Spanish  whiting,  pulverized 81.6  Ibs. 

Boiled  oil 20.4    " 

Another  kind  of  putty,  for  the  same  purpose,  is  made  by  mixing  fine  sifted 
oak  sawdust  with  linseed  oil  which  has  been  boiled  till  glutinous. 

White  paint. 

PROPORTIONS. 


For  inside  work.         For  outside  work. 

White-lead,  ground  in  oil 80.    Ibs.  80  Ibs. 

Boiled  oil 14.5    "  9    " 

Raw  oil 0.     ."  9    " 

Spirits  turpentine 8.      "  4    " 

Grind  the  white-lead  in  the  oil,  and  add  the  spirits  of  turpentine. 
New  wood-work  requires  about  1  Ib.  to  the  square  yard  for  three  coats. 


84  PAINTS   AND   LACQUERS. 


Lead  color. 

White-lead,  ground  in  oil 75.    Ibs. 

Lampblack 1.    lb, 

Boiled  linseed  oil 23.    Ibs. 

Litharge 0-5  lb. 

Japan  varnish O'o    " 

Spirits  turpentine 2.5  Ibs. 

The  lampblack  and  litharge  are  ground  separately  upon  the  stone,  in  oil, 
then  stirred  into  the  white-lead  and  oil ;  the  turpentine  and  varnish  are 
added  as  the  paint  is  required  for  use,  or  when  it  is  packed  in  kegs  for  trans 
portation. 

Black  paint. 

Lampblack 28  Ibs. 

Litharge 1  lb. 

Japan  varnish 1    " 

Linseed  oil,  boiled 73  Ibs. 

Spirits  turpentine 1  lb. 

Grind  the  lampblack  in  oil ;  mix  it  with  the  oil,  then  grind  the  litharge  in 
oil  and  add  it,  stirring  it  well  into  the  mixture.  The  varnish  and  turpentine 
are  added  last. 

This  paint  is  used  for  the  iron-work  of  carriages. 

Pain t  for  tarpaulins. 
A  square  yard  takes  2  Ibs.  for  three  coats. 

1.  Olive. — Liquid  olive  color 100  Ibs. 

Beeswax 6    " 

Spirits  turpentine 6    " 

Dissolve  the  beeswax  in  the  spirits  of  turpentine,  with  a  gentle  heat,  and 
mix  the  paint  warm. 

2.  Add  12  ounces  of  beeswax  to  a  gallon  of  linseed  oil,  and  boil  it  two 
hours;  prime  the  cloth  with  this  mixture,  and  use  the  same  in  place  of  boiled 
oil  for  mixing  the  paint.     Give  two  coats  of  paint. 

Lacquers  for  iron  ordnance. 

1.  Black-lead,  pulverized 12  Ibs. 

Red-lead 12    " 

Litharge 5    " 

Lampblack 5    " 

Linseed  oil 66    " 

Boil  it  gently  about  twenty  minutes,  during  which  time  it  must  be  con 
stantly  stirred. 


PAINTS  AND   LACQUEKS.  85 

2.  Umber,  ground 3-'75  ^s- 

Gum-sliellac,  pulverized 3-'75 

Ivory-black 3-75 

Litharge 3-75 

Linseed  oil ' 8> 

Spirits  turpentine ^-2o 

The  oil  must  be  first  boiled  half  an  hour.  The  mixture  is  then  boiled 
twenty-four  hours,  poured  off  from  the  sediment,  put  in  jugs  and  corked. 

3.  Coal  tar  of  good  quality 2  galls. 

Spirits  turpentine l  Pmt- 

The  turpentine  to  be  added  in  small  quantities  during  the  application  of 
the  lacquer. 

4.  Anti-corrosion 40  ^>s. 

Grant's  black,  ground  in  oil 4 

Red-lead,  as  a  dryer 3 

Linseed  oil 4  Salls- 

Spirits  turpentine *  Pmt- 

This  mixture,  when  well  stirred  and  incorporated,  will  be  fit  for  use ;  but, 
as  by  long  keeping  in  this  state  it  becomes  hard,  no  more  should  be  mixed 
than  may  be  required  for  immediate  use. 

Anti-Corrosion.— Slag  from  iron  foundries,  pounded 12  Ibs. 

Chalk 12    ' 

Soot,  common 1  lo. 

In  applying  lacquer,  the  surface  of  the  iron  must  be  first  cleaned  with  a 
scraper  and  a  wire  brush,  if  necessary,  and  the  lacquer  applied  hot,  in  two 
thin  coats,  with  a  paint-brush.  It  is  best  done  in  summer. 

Old  lacquer  should  be  removed  with  a  scraper,  or  by  scouring,  and  not  by 
heating  the  guns  or  balls,  by  which  the  metal  is  injured. 

PLANTOU'S    COMPOSITION    FOR    COATING    IRON    OR    WOOD    AS    A    PRESERVATIVE. 

First  composition. 

Pulverized  rosin 3  *  bs. 

Pulverized  shellac 2  oz. 

Pulverized  charcoal,  or  cannel-coal 1  H>. 

Spirits  turpentine 1  oz- 

Second  composition. 

Pulverized  resin 3  ^8. 

Beeswax 4  oz. 

Pulverized  charcoal,  or  cannel-coal 1  M>. 

Spirits  turpentine *  oz- 


86  PAINTS  AND   LACQUERS. 


The  first  two  articles  are  to  be  dissolved  in  an  iron  vessel  over  the  fire ; 
the  charcoal  is  then  added,  and  briskly  stirred  until  the  whole  is  well  inter 
mixed  ;  after  which  the  turpentine  is  added,  and  stirred  until  it  is  well  incor 
porated  with  the  other  ingredients.  It  is  not  safely  made  on  board  ship. 

The  composition  is  to  be  applied  when  hot,  with  a  brush  or  spatula,  and 
smoothed  over  with  a  hot  iron.  The  wood,  or  iron  should  be  perfectly  dry, 
and  freed  from  rust  or  other  loose  substances. 

Lacquer  for  small  arms,  or  for  water-proof  paper. 

Beeswax 13  Ibs. 

Spirits  turpentine 13  galls. 

Boiled  linseed  oil 1  gall. 

All  the  ingredients  should  be  pure,  and  of  the  best  quality.  Heat  them 
together  in  a  copper  or  earthen  vessel,  over  a  gentle  fire,  in  a  water-bath, 
until  they  are  well  mixed. 

Lacquer  for  bright  iron-work. 

Linseed  oil,  boiled 80.5    Ibs. 

Litharge 5.5      " 

White-lead,  ground  in  oil 11.25    " 

Rosin,  pulverized 2.75    " 

Add  the  litharge  to  the  oil,  let  it  simmer  over  a  slow  fire  for  three  hours ; 
strain  it,  and  add  the  rosin  and  white-lead  ;  keep  it  gently  warmed,  and  stir 
it  until  the  rosin  is  dissolved.  Apply  it  with  a  paint-brush. 

Varnish  for  scabbards,  or  patent  leather. 

For  1st  and  2d  coats. — Prussian  blue,  in  lumps 4.    Ibs. 

Sugar-of-lcad 0.7  Ib. 

Aquafortis 0.7    " 

Linseed  oil,  boiled \ 70.    Ibs. 

Spirits  turpentine 24.6    " 

The  ingredients,  except  the  turpentine,  are  boiled  together,  in  an  iron 
kettle,  eight  hours,  when  the  mixture  will  assume  a  brilliant  black  color. 
When  the  varnish  is  nearly  cool,  stir  in  the  turpentine.  The  kettle  in  which 
the  varnish  is  made  should  be  of  a  capacity  to  hold  double  the  quantity  of 
varnish  to  be  boiled.  It  cannot  be  safely  made  on  board  ship. 

For  the  third  or  finishing  coat. — COPAL  VARNISH. 

Gum-copal,  in  clear  lumps 26.5  Ibs. 

Boiled  linseed  oil 42.5    " 

Spirits  turpentine 31.      " 


PAINTS  AND  LACQUERS.  87 

This  varnisli  is  made  in  a  copper  vessel,  smallest  at  the  top,  in  the  form  of 
a  still. 

Put  the  copal  in  the  vessel,  set  it  on  a  charcoal  fire  for  one  hour,  in  which 
time  it  will  melt,  and  all  the  watery  particles  will  evaporate.  Add  the  oil 
whilst  the  copal  is  warm,  but  not  boiling  hot.  When  nearly  cool  add  the 
turpentine,  which  will  give  it  a  proper  consistency  for  use. 

For  5  Ibs.  copal,  and  the  proper  proportions  of  oil  and  turpentine,  the 
vessel  should  hold  six  gallons.  Not  safely  made  on  board  ship. 

Japan  varnish. 

Litharge .* 4  Ibs. 

Boiled  oil 87    " 

Spirits  turpentine 2    " 

Red-lead 6    " 

Umber 1  Ib. 

Gum-shellac 8  Ibs. 

Sugar-of-lead 2    " 

White  vitriol 1  Ib. 

Japan  varnish  is  generally  purchased  from  the  paint-sellers.  It  is  made 
by  boiling  on  a  slow  charcoal  fire  for  five  hours  all  the  ingredients  except  the 
turpentine  and  a  small  portion  of  the  oil.  The  latter  is  added  as  required  to 
check  the  ebullition  and  to  allay  the  froth  which  rises  to  the  surface.  It 
must  be  continually  stirred  with  a  wooden  spatula.  Great  care  is  necessary 
to  prevent  it  from  taking  fire,  and  therefore  it  cannot  be  safely  made  on 
board  ship. 

The  turpentine  is  added  after  the  varnish  is  nearly  cool,  and  is  stirred  well 
in.  The  varnish  must  be  kept  in  tin  cans  closely  corked. 

Olive  paste. 

Yellow  ochre,  pulverized G8.    Ib^. 

Lampblack 1.1    " 

Boiled  oil 37.      " 

Spirits  turpentine 0.4  Ib. 

Make  a  thick  paste  with  the  ochre  and  oil  in  a  paint-pot,  and  with  the 
lampblack  and  oil  in  another.  Grind  them  together  in  small  portions,  and 
keep  the  mixture  in  a  tin  vessel. 

Liquid  olive  color. 

Olive  paste 61.5  Ibs. 

Boiled  oil 29.5  " 

Spirits  turpentine 5.5  " 

Dryings 3.5  " 

Japan  varnish 2.  " 

Stirred  together  in  a  paint-pot. 


88  PAINTS  AND  LACQUERS. 


BrainarcTs  paint. 

Dissolve  10  pounds  of  shellac  in  10  gallons  of  boiling  water,  adding  30 
ounces  of  salcratus.  Mix  this  solution  with  an  equal  quantity  of  paint  pre 
pared  in  the  usual  manner.  This  paint  is  economical  and  durable. 

Black  stain  (for  wood-work). 

Copperas 1  Ib. 

Nutgalls 1  " 

Sal  ammoniac \  " 

Vinegar ". 1  gal. 

Stir  it  occasionally  for  a  few  hours,  and  it  will  be  ready  for  use. 

The  wood  must  be  clean  and  smooth,  and  the  cracks  filled  with  black  putty, 
which  must  be  allowed  to  dry.  The  stain  to  be  applied  two  or  three  times, 
and  left  to  dry  for  a  day  or  two.  Then  it  is  to  be  rubbed  with  boiled  oil 
until  sufficiently  polished.  Until  the  oil  is  applied  the  color  will  be  bluish. 
Scraping  arid  staining  gun-carriages,  or  keeping  them  bright,  is  prohibited. 
They  should  be  kept  well  painted. 

Impression  wax  for  vents. 

Beeswax 4  parts. 

Tallow '. 2      " 

Charcoal,  finely  powdered 1  part. 

Melt  the  beeswax  and  tallow,  and  stir  in  the  charcoal. 

Paper  parchment. 

Immerse  unsized  paper  for  a  few  seconds  in  sulphuric  acid,  diluted  with 
half  its  volume  of  water  at  about  60° ;  wash  it  well  in  cold  water,  then 
immerse  it  in  a  weak  solution  of  caustic  ammonia,  and  again  wash. 

It  absorbs  water,  and  becomes  soft  and  pliable  like  animal  parchment,  but 
is  water-proof.  It  is  not  affected  by  boiling  water,  is  indestructible  by  most 
acids,  and  is  not  diminished  in  strength  by  wetting.  It  has  about  -f  the 
strength  of  animal  parchment  when  dry ;  the  thinner  kinds  make  capital 
tracing-paper,  which  takes  ink  readily. 

Cement  for  the  above. 

Cheese-fresh,  without  salt,  if  possible 3  parts. 

Quicklime 1  part. 

Wash  the  cheese  thoroughly  three  or  four  times  in  boiling  water,  and 
grind  the  materials  on  a  stone  and  mullcr,  adding  cold  water  until  it  is  of 
the  consistency  of  honey. 


PAINTS  AND  LACQUERS.  89 


Composition  for  lining  the  interior  of  rifle-shells. 

Soap — common  yellow,  not  salt-water  soap 16  ounces. 

Tallow V       " 

Rosin V        " 

The  tallow  should  be  melted  first,  then  melt  and  add  the  rosin,  and  lastly 
the  soap,  bringing  the  mass  to  a  heat  that  will  make  it  very  fluid. 

The  shells  having  been  first  thoroughly  cleaned,  fill  them  about  one-third 
full  of  the  composition,  roll  them  slowly  so  as  to  spread  the  mixture  over 
the  whole  interior  surface,  and  then  pour  off  the  residue.  This  coating 
should  be  about  one-tenth  (0.1)  of  an  inch  in  thickness,  except  at  the 
bottom  of  the  shell,  where  it  should  be  about  three-quarters  of  an  inch 
thick.  To  obtain  these  thicknesses,  the  operation  of  coating  should  be 
performed  twice ;  then  pour  into  the  shell  enough  of  the  composition  to 
produce  the  desired  thickness  at  the  bottom,  the  shell  standing  on  its  base. 
After  the  composition  is  perfectly  cool,  immerse  the  shell  in  hot  water  at 
as  high  a  temperature  as  the  composition  will  stand  without  "  running" — 
about  170  degrees.  This  second  heating  of  the  composition  in  the  bath 
toughens  it,  and  causes  it  to  adhere  more  closely  to  the  shell. 


APPENDIX. 


A.  ALLOWANCE  TABLE  OF  CREWS. 

B.  TABLES  OF  GUNNERY  PRACTICE. 

C.  FORMS   OF  REPORTS   OF  INSPECTION  AND   OF  TARGET 

PRACTICE. 

D.  TABLES  OF  ALLOWANCES  OF  ORDNANCE  STORES. 

17 


APPENDIX    A. 


ALLOWANCE     OF    CHEWS: 

Embracing  Officers  and  all  others  to  le  allowed  each  Vessel  of  tlie  Ncwy,  what 
ever  may  ~be  her  class,  ~kind,  or  armament. 


The  number  of  men  assigned  in  each  case  will  be  found  adequate  to  man  properly  the  battery,  and  also 
the  Powder  Division,  together  with  tho  divisions  of  tho  Master  and  Surgeon. 


DIRECTIONS. 

1.  Take  from  Table  I.,  columns  3  or  4  (either  or  both,  as  the  case  may  happen  to 
require),  the  number  of  hands  designated  for  each  kind  or  class  of  gun  the  vessel  may 
carry,  and  multiply  these  figures  respectively  by  the  number  of  guns  of  each  kind  to 
which  they  refer.     In  this  way  is  to  be  obtained  the  aggregate   number  of  hands 
necessary  to  man  properly  the  battery  itself.     Call  the  result  A.1 

2.  Then,  in  order  to  get  at  the  additional  number  of  hands  necessary  to  man  properly 
the  powder  division  and  the  divisions  of  the  Master  and  Surgeon,  which  additional  num 
ber  is  to  be  called  B,  multiply  A  by  the  decimal — 


f  .25  for  a  sailing  vessel  carrying  on  3  decks  from  74  to  90  guns. 
.29         "  "  "  2       "         "     36  to  60     " 

.34         »  "  "  1  or  2  "         "     20  to  26     " 

.36         "  "  "  1      "         "     16  to  20     "      medium  of  calibre. 

.60         "  "  "  1       "         "     14  to  18     "      light  of  calibre. 

.34        «  "  «  1      "        "      9  to    7     "      heaviest  of  calibre. 

.40         "  "  "  1      "        "       6  to    5     "  " 

.50         "  "  "  1      "         "       4  to    3     "  "  " 

.70         "  "  "  1      "         "       2  to    1     "  "  " 

.25  for  a  steamer  carrying  on  2  decks  from  36  to  60  guns,  with  broadside-guns  on 

upper  deck  lighter  than  those  on  tho  other. 
.22  for  a  steamer  carrying  on  2  decks  from  36  to  60  guns,  with  broadside-guns  on 

upper  deck  as  heavy  as  those  on  the  other. 
.  34  for  all  other  steamers,  including  iron-clads. 

NOTE  1.— Howitzers,  when  not  really  essentials  of  a  battery,  but  intended  rather  as  appendages  to  it 
for  boat  and  field  service,  and  for  particular  occasions,  than  to  be  used  as  commonly  as  the  other  guns 
of  the  vessel  in  general  exercises,  or  in  an  engagement,  are  not  to  be  included  in  applying  these  direc 
tions.  The  marines  and  available  hands  of  tho  master's  division  are  to  be  kept  drilled  to  them,  for  the 
purpose  of  clearing  the  deck  of  an  enemy. 


ALLOWANCE   OF  CHEWS. 


In  the  case  of  a  sailing  vessel,  about  one-third  of  B  will  be  the  proportion  of  hands  to 
be  taken  for  the  Master's  division,  and  the  rest,  less  those  for  the  Surgeon's  division 
(which  is  to  be  composed  of  the  surgeon's  steward  and  the  nurses  allowed),  will  be  the 
number  for  the  powder  division. 

And,  too,  in  the  case  of  a  steamer  of  any  kind,  about  one-third  of  B  will  also  be  the 
proportion  of  hands  to  be  taken  for  the  Master's  division;  but  the  rest,  less  those  just 
mentioned  for  the  Surgeon's  division,  is  to  be  increased  by  one-third  of  the  number  of 
firemen  and  coal-heavers  allowed,  to  constitute  the  powder  division. 

It  is  to  be  borne  in  mind  that  the  powder  division  is  always  to  command  a  preference 
over  the  master's,  on  the  score  of  being  sufficiently  manned. 

3.  Add  A  and  B  together,  and  call  their  sum  C. 

4.  To  ascertain  how  many  of  the  whole  number  of  C  are  to  be  petty  officers,  &c.,  con 
sult  Table  II. 

5.  One-sixth  part  of  the  whole  number  of  C  will  give  the  number  of  seamen. 

G.  One-fourth  part  of  the  whole  number  of  C  will  give  the  number  of  ordinary  sea 
men. 

7.  One-fortieth  part  of  the  whole  number  of  C  will  give  the  number  of  musicians 
(exclusive  of  the  master  of  the  band),  when  musicians  are  allowed,  which  is  to  be  only 
to  ships-of-the-liue,  frigates,  and  flag  vessels  having  a  totality  of  crew  amounting  to  not 
less  than  350  souls.2 

8.  The  total  number  of  petty  officers,  &c.,  seamen,  ordinary  seamen,  and  musicians, 
deducted  from  the  whole  number  of  C,  will  give  the  number  of  landsmen  and  boys. 

9.  The  number  of  hands,  in  addition  to  the  whole  number  of  C,  to  serve  as  firemen 
and  coal-heavers,  when  these  are  required,  is  to  be  ascertained  by  the  annexed  rule 
relating  to  the  subject. 

10.  For  the  number  and  grades  of  officers,  consult  Table  III. 

11.  For  the  number  and  grades  of  marines,  consult  Table  IV. 

12.  An  admiral  of  any  grade,  when  appointed  as  the  Commander-in-chief  of  a  fleet  or 
squadron,  is  authorized  to  nominate  to  the  Navy  Department  an  officer  not  below  the 
grade  of  a  commander  to  serve  as  the  head  of  his  staff,  or  as  the  captain  of  the  fleet, 
and  to  be  borne  on  the  books  of  the  vessel  carrying  his  flag  in  addition  to  her  established 
complement. 

13.  Every  officer  appointed  to  the  command  of  a  fleet  or  squadron  is  authorized  to 
nominate  to  the  Navy  Department  an  officer  not  higher  in  grade  than  a  lieutenant,  nor 
lower  than  an  ensign,  to  serve  as  his  flag  lieutenant,  or  aid,  and  to  be  borne  on  the 
books  of  the  vessel  carrying  his  flag  or  broad  pennant  in  addition  to  her  established 
complement. 

14.  An  admiral  of  any  grade,  appointed  the  commander-in-chief  of  a  fleet  or  squadron, 
is  to  be  allowed  two  seamen  and  two  ordinary  seamen,  to  be  borne  on  the  books  of  the 
vessel  carrying  his  flag  in  addition  to  her  established  complement. 

15.  Every  other  officer  appointed  to  the  command  of  a  fleet  or  squadron  is  to  be 
allowed  one  seaman  and  two  ordinary  seamen,  to  be  borne  on  the  books  of  the  vessel 
carrying  his  broad  pennant  in  addition  to  her  established  complement. 

16.  The  number  of  men  in  any  rating,  as  above  directed,  is  not  to  be  exceeded,  in  any 
case,  without  the  authority  of  the  Secretary  of  the  Navy,  unless  it  be  to  make  good 
deficiencies  in  superior  ratings  ;  and  vessels,  in  time  of  peace,  when  otherwise  ready  for 


NOTE  2. — If  the  number  of  musicians  thus  derived  be  even,  one-half  of  them  are  to  be  of  the  first 
class,  and  one-half  of  the  second  class;  otherwise,  the  bare  majority  are  to  be  of  the  first  class,  and  the 
rest  of  the  second. 


ALLOWANCE   OF   CREWS. 


sea,  are  not  to  be  detained  on  account  of  deficiencies  in  their  complements,  if  the  whole 
number  of  petty  officers  and  persons  of  inferior  rating  be  equal  to  nine-tenths  of  the 
number  allowed  as  their  crews. 

17.  The  total  number  of  a  crew,  as  allowed  above,  is  never  to  be  exceeded  without 
the  express  direction  or  sanction  of  the  Secretary  of  the  Navy. 

18.  Complements  will  be  designated  by  the  Navy  Department  for  receiving  vessels, 
practice  vessels,   apprentice  vessels,  store  and  supply  vessels,  and  for  any   others 
intended  for  special  or  peculiar  service. 


ALLOWANCE    OF   CREWS. 


^ 


P3     S 


1           1 

5    -si 

'c^? 

•<         c  -c 

P-                 ,O  ••— 

I    1" 

I    ° 

3 

S    «    S      r-l  i-H 

I3-! 

«l| 

•<! 

£2        •*->" 

o    . 

fc       >  t*, 

2     S-f 
S     g* 

co 
_s 

?T..M.^....-,..M 

S       ^  0 

£      *3 

s  ° 
O 

O 

III  !  M  M  ii  M  M  M  M  M 

^^'?         Q    *    '  g    

gc3§            «3->9      

c3          '"""'           *~*                                     ">!j    O         ^    G2 

od 

W 

o 

1 

'V  r^  ^      'S                      .&•'«      •§"  i 
go^fl                             !»c'*g 

*®    ^'  1  T3  "oj                                     ^    0         ^    0 

|:|l||             gj    s| 

WEIGHT  OF  GUN,  IN 
POUNDS,  OR  CWT.,  WHEN 
SO  EXPRESSED. 

i 

OO          OOOOOO                  Q                                        00 
00          OOOOOO                  Q                  o                  OO 
OO          OOOOOO                  ,Jj                  10                  rjl.co 

T^rHrH^-lr-l                                                ^                      ^                      oo 

_O          O          O          OO-^          O                 O                4J-H 

oooooS"                            "oo. 

o     o     o     o«o<2c3ioSS5j5cowi-r 

o"       eo"       oT       ofi-*" 
I—  (        1—1 

to 

h 

O 

3 

O 

3 
o 

1    §1=  -:  !;•::::  i  i  :§a 

O 

is  III  ill  j  j  I  i  i  i  iill 

W 

^1   |s||||  :  .;  i||l||l 

.S  c       Goaooo^-^^^ooSooo 

|"\  ["•}       r]  k  ",  [xj  o  o  o  'V  "71  '7  <M  <M  01  (>»  c^i  T^  ci 

ALLOWANCE   OF   CREWS. 


Vll 


s'« 

£ 

'.    1    •    '•    '•    '•    '•        '.'.'.'.        '•    ,_,'.!'. 

1  * 

^  *  Z  X 

s 

co 

•    :    :    :    :    :    :        :    :    :    :        :    :    ' 

»l^ 

**%* 

^ 

CO 

;  ;      ;  !  '.  ;      ;'..'.      ;  ;  '.  '.         '  '•      •  •  • 

II 

«»N 

o> 

1 

:                  :                                    •                              '  m 

1  ^ 

*<*2 

CJ 

>: 

§  ^ 

* 

CO 

J§  r-5! 

—  

•    . 

....                                                                                          •  •— 

s  ? 

JO         W      • 

30 

_s 

co 

r   r   i40"  ;  ""^  "  :  f  f  j| 

IJ 

l\%\ 

5 

>; 

i^              i^       .      i^^^.H^C,^^          ,H       i             i^TH       ^       j  « 

§  s* 

co 

•    •                                       •    _j  :  '  m 

g  -5 

:          :                      :                            •          •        ?„ 

Cfc 

\B\* 

^ 

:         :                    '.                         :        :       co 

^  s 

%2a< 

•» 

^ 

:                                                :         :       5 

Is  e~ 

**** 

^ 

co 

:L       :                                               :         :        a 

-      "-1 

^ 

:  :      :  :                   :                            '•         :        Z 

i't1 

|«|l 

0 

I 

1         :                    :                          :         :       1 

o~x'< 

IN 

K*xZ 

•    °*  •                                            ;            :       'S 

H  i? 

^ 

:         :                      :                   •          :                 ~ 

1  § 

^^ 

« 

co 

rt 

§  ^ 

^'1 

3 

. 

t-c     t%  ¥ 

03 

!                                                                                     •                                                        03 

^  g 

u 

o 

*   §1 

K£* 

•«* 

co 

•       •                                              •           •                    3 

w    m1*2 

%<"*'« 

ro 

• 

co 

^H«P 

co 

:      :-                                                !                f- 

fr     g  1 

t: 

:      :                                                                 •% 

*   I1? 

$&   |'-o 

6C 

CO 

§    % 

^<^< 

5 

-     \ 

^tx 

&   S   K  H 

co 

:      :                                             :               e 

°  s» 

.„• 

o 

"  »<s> 

pis 

,; 

_E 

:                              ^                                    1 

^  ^ 

*>  *  #  '< 

!   "^ 

S 

«.  «? 

**** 

CO 

«0    B0' 
tn  i—  c-  •-) 
K  0  0  I- 

_ 

co 

i  1  1  j  1  1  1  !  M  M  1  M  M  1  M  M  H| 

sf§ 

E 

% 

I^H^H 

co 

'••     *  .   "    ,-,  ^ 

" 

i  d  :::::::::::::::::•::•      :  §, 

|| 

g  "^  c* 

EATINGS. 

r 
t 

STMB.  means  a  Steaine 

llj||:|j  |  llljjjjMi!  M   ;| 

P^!!lj;Illl^l2   PJ;  || 

S^cnc^^^^     •  t_  s«  C<  3   »  <"  ^  <N          '-"o     '     •<&* 

Vill 


ALLOWANCE    OF   CREWS. 


NOT  LESS 

THAN  12 
NOll  MORB 
THAN  25. 

r' 
rH 

"3 

s 

10 

lowed  any  Cap  tail,  r-  (if  Tops. 

i 

:  :  :      :              :  :  :  :        :  :  :  : 

00 

o 

•     *     •           •                             .     .      .     .                 .      .     .     . 

NOT  LESS 

THAN  25 
NOK  ilORB 
THAN  40. 

r.' 

6 

| 

—  i  -        ;  ;-"-  i  ;  ;  - 

s 

CO 

i-l  TH      i        rH                «            '      'r-lr-l      '      '      ' 

10 

:             S      :  :        :  :  : 

<r       H 

jj 

"o,                            : 

GO 
(M 

^  fc  f,  X 

< 

5 

•/. 

o 

93 

0 

i 

a 

So  So 
a  *  g  36 

i  - 

.- 

o 

O 
CO 

'i. 

§ 

5 

s 

*      * 

co 

S 

NOT  LESS 

THAN  80 
NOK  MORE 
THAN  100. 

td 

s 

CO 

•3       -3 

3 

Is  without  spars  not  to  be  a 

M    S 

QQ 

e»        2 

_!_ 

•g       ~ 

£  <  a  < 

Isgg 

S 

| 

I       'S 

"3     g 

co 

--i          O 

s 

g:    s 

NOT  LESS 

THAN  175 
NOR  MORE 
THAN  225. 

,: 

S 

§ 

3 

c 
o 

1 
O 

S 

8* 

i 

a 

1 
1 

I 

"S    "3 

C 

ri 

b     'o 

CO 
1O 

S"           rW 

•*      o 

si  Is 

00 

6 

| 

33 

3     ° 

s 

c     5 

" 

-a      a 

s 

G 

NOT  LESS 

THAN  375 

NOK  MORE 
THAN  570. 

N 

d 

g 

QQ 

...H^^^^          |          ^^^^0* 

§8 

® 

ao- 

,_  _  ^  ^  &  rH         3         TH^^^^TH^^O^ 

GO 
00 

BO  Ol2 
£  fc  B  'A 
02^ 

a 

a 

::::::§      :::::::::: 

J 

03 

•  '  '  '  ' 

0 

/: 

1 

EATINGS. 

8.  V.  means  a  Sailing  Vessel. 
STJIU.  means  a  Steamer. 

:  :  :  :  :  i's'J  :::::::::: 

J 

•5) 

H 

O 

:  :  :  :  :  :9g^'  :  :  :  :  :  :  :  :J 

:  :        :  :iv3  :  :  :      :  :|  .g 
:  :        :  :^^i  :  :  :      :  :2|o 

ll  1  i  =|l||  ;  :'lsl  'l-sl 

ALLOWANCE   OF   CREWS. 


IX 


NOT  LESS 

THAN  12 
NOR  MORE 
THAN  25. 

-': 

bj 

a 
H 

02 

.   .              .   . 

Cl 

owed  either  Boatswains  or  Sailmakers. 
mil  be  allowed  a  clerk  in  a  vessel  having  the  complement  of  one  hundred  aud  seventy  -five  persons  or  less,  excepting  in 

Ml";  Hi!;     U||i^_i£ 

:  .      :  :  i1"1  :  :  :  :  :         ::::::•      •  •r-1 

Iff! 

lip 

1 

/ 

j     ;       TH     JTHCO          ;TH       TH               j     j     |       .  .  „       TH     > 

TH 

32 

:  :    ~  JTHCO      JTH    TH        :  :  :      :  :  :    ^  :« 

o 

NOT  LKSS 

THAN  40 
NOR  MORE 
THAN  GO. 

GO 

02' 

.:  ;    TH  JTH^     JTH    ^        i  j  :    TH.C,    TH  > 

o 

C 

:  :    ^  :^^     :*    *        :::::::    ^  :« 

s 

III 

!  -' 

7 
02' 

02 
02 

;     ;  i-i     ;  TH  TH  CO           •  TH       T-H                •     •     •     •  r-  <M  ffl       TH      •  CO 

- 

c 

Cl 

•     •     •  TH     •  •M  CO     •     •  I-H       TH                                           !     !       r-i     !  oj 

11  Ig 

TH         .   TH  (M   C4   Tj<         -CM             TH            TH—  (TH         '•         '^1(M*J            TH         '• 

§3 

\      j      JTH       JCO^^       j«         TH         THTHTH       1      I      ;      i      j         TH       j 

s 

o' 

g 
W2 

01 

•        •                                      '.                                                  '. 

£ 

CO 

^  H  55  H 

o  ^  -  < 

**' 

1 
^^ 

I 

o 

•  :                              :                  ::::=' 

NOT  LESS  |  IS 

THAN  225  '  T 
NOR  MORE  N 
THAN  375.  I  T 

:  :                             :                  :  :  :  :r5 

g 

:      :                          :                            &        : 

:      :                          '                            ^         • 

:      :                           :                  :  :  :    "3         : 

'•      '•                         '.                 :  :  :  :  t         '. 

NOT  LKSS 

THAN  375 
NOR  MORE 
THAN  570. 

2 

','.- 

'•  '                           :                             5         : 

:  ;                           .3                          | 

,' 

TH      j      JTHTH.^TH.TH      :|THTHTHTH      \      \      \      .  C  .  ^ 

Is 

NOT  LESS 

THAN  570 
NOR  MORE 
THAN  7GO. 

J3' 

~ 

:  :  j  j  |  ;  |  :  '  :  :  :•§  :  :  :  :  :  :  :  :  g  :  : 

•s|| 

5§^ 

te  -IS 

£j 

o  ...:::::-:: 

:  :            "           :o              1:  :  il 

^  "C 

d6 

NOTE.  —  Iron-clads  without  Spars  are  n< 
No  Paymaster  or  Assistant  Pa 
supply  steamers  and  store 

. 

GRADES. 

S.  V.  means  a  Sailing  Vessel. 
STMR,  means  a  Steamer. 

:::.::::::::;*:::  

I 

y,    .   . 

::::::::::::::•:.::::  :o  :: 

ALLOWANCE   OF   CEEWS. 


« 


^ 

§ 

I 

^ 

£2 


Is  Is 


Is  II' 


* 


$  p  s  p 

g  CO   0  0 


C-1         <N         i-l         —  (         O 


T-l  T-l  O 


CM        i-l        T-I        0 


CO  TH  1-1  0 


TH  IM  CO  TH  TH  O 


o 

0 

tti 

S  TH        d        CO 

co       rt<       ci       c-i 

l°3 

\\ 

c  & 

II 

02    02 

":':«-:  i 

.s    §    s    2    s 

IJilla 

O        1-5        CQ        O        O        ft, 


RANGES  OF  GUNS — GRADUATION   OF   SIGHTS. 


XI 


APPENDIX  B.-No.  I. 


GRADUATION  OF  SIGHTS  AND  MEAN  RANGES 


OP 


UNITED  STATES  NAVAL  SMOOTH-BORE  GUNS. 


(From  Results  of  Practice,  by  Admiral  DAHLGREST,   United  States  Navy.) 


The  graduation  commences  from  the  bottom  of  the  head  of  the  bar  resting  on  the 
sight-box. 

The  aim  is  supposed  to  be  taken  at  the  water-line  of  a  ship. 


Charge              

32-POUNDER   OF   2T   CWT. 

32-PouNDER  OF  33  CWT. 

41 

7  f 

Old  Model. 
2  9  £-  inches. 

bs. 

set. 

New  Model. 
26|  inches. 

41  Ibs. 
7^  feet. 

J                  31  inches. 

Axis  of  bore  above  load-  \ 
line               ^ 

Distance  between  sights.  .  ( 
j 

ELEVATION. 

1 

RANGE. 

GRADUATION. 

GRADUATION. 

RANGE. 

GRADUATION. 

Degrees. 

Level. 

Yards. 
250 

Inches. 
0.353 

Inches. 
0.324 

Yards. 

287 

Inches. 
0.350 

1° 

545 

0.746 

0.684 

581 

0.792 

2° 

800 

1.266 

1.161 

857 

1.343 

3° 

1,04*7 

1.801 

1.652 

1,140 

1.909 

4° 

1,278 

2.337 

2.144 

1,398 

2.478 

5° 

6° 

1,469 
1,637 

2.870 
3.398 

2.633 
3.116 

1,598 

3.044 

Xll 


KANGES   OF   GUNS — GRADUATION  OF   SIGHTS. 


APPENDIX  B -No.  II. 


Charge  

32-PouNDER  OF  42  Chvr. 

32-PoUNDER   OF  57   CWT. 

Gibs. 
H  feet. 

Old  Model.          New  Model. 

91bs. 

8  feet. 
) 

Axis  of  bore  above  load-  ) 
line  *.  .    ..     J 

( 

Distance  between  sights.  .  ( 

40.5  inches. 

37.1  inches. 

j                42.5  inches. 

ELEVATION. 

EANGE. 

GRADUATION. 

GRADUATION. 

EANGE. 

GRADUATION. 

Degrees. 
Level. 

Yards. 
313 

Inches. 
0.446 

Inches. 
0.408 

Yards. 
360 

Inches. 
0.412 

1° 

672 

1.016 

0.931 

760 

1.042 

2° 

988 

1.742 

1.596 

1,150 

1.808 

3° 

1,274 

2.488 

2.280 

1,440 

2.597 

4° 

1,505 

3.235 

2.964 

1,710 

3.384 

5° 
6° 

1,756 

3.974 

3.641 

1,930 
2,140 

4.162 
4.930 

RANGES   OF  GUNS — GRADUATION   OF   SIGHTS. 


Xlll 


APPENDIX  B.-No.  III. 


8-lNCH  OF  55  CWT. 

8-lNCII  OF  63  CWT. 

Charge    . 

7    Ibs. 
.  .     H  feet 

9   Ibs. 
8    feet. 

Shell    

Axis  of  bore  above  load-line 

Distance  between  sights  37    inches. 

\ 

Old  Model. 
43.50  inches. 

New  Model. 
38.20  inches. 

ELEVATION. 

EANGE. 

GRADUATION. 

RANGE. 

GRADUATION. 

GRADUATION. 

Degrees. 
Level. 

Yards. 
283 

Inches. 
0.429 

Yards. 
330 

Inches. 
0.460 

Inches. 
0.402 

1° 

579 

0.949 

660 

1.100 

0.964 

2° 

869 

1.603 

970 

1.878 

1.647 

3° 

1,148 

2.280 

1,260 

2.678 

2.350 

4° 

1,413 

2.958 

1,540 

3.478 

3.051 

5° 
G° 

1,657 
1,866 

3.632 
4.300 

1,770 

4.273 

3.749 

XIV 


RANGES   OF   GUNS — GRADUATION   OF   SIGHTS. 


APPENDIX  B -No.  IV. 


Charge  

IX-lNCII   SlIELL-GUN. 

XI-lNClI   SlIELL-GUN. 

XI-lNCU   SlIELL-GUN. 

10  Ibs. 
72  Ibs. 

10  feet. 
39  inches. 

15  Ibs. 
135  Ibs. 

10  feet. 
[Screw-sloops.] 
48  inches. 

15  Ibs. 
135  Ibs. 

20  feet. 
[2d  deck  above  water.] 
48  inches. 

Shell  

Axis  of  bore  } 
above  load-  >• 
line    .    .  .  .  ) 

Distance    be-  ) 
tween  sights  ) 

ELEVATION. 

RANGE. 

GRADUATION. 

RANGE. 

GRADUATION. 

RANGE. 

GRADUATION. 

Degrees. 
Level. 

Yards. 
340 

100 
900 
1,100 
1,300 
1,500 
1,700 

Inches. 
0.461 

0.983 
1.514 
2.073 
2.G46 
3.222 
3.813 

Yards. 
306 

500 
700 
900 
1,100 
1,300 
1,500 
1,700 

Inches. 
O.GOO 

0.945 
1.442 
2.040 
2.651 
3.295 
3.953 
4.681 

Yards. 
420 

700 
900 
1,100 
1,300 
1,500 

Inches. 
O.S7 

1.48 
2.01 

2.G2 
3.25 
4.92 

APPROXIMATE   RANGES   OF   SHELL-GUNS. 


XV 


ELEVATION  IN  DEGREES.—  RANGES  IN  YARDS.—  TIME  OF  FLIGHT  IN  SECONDS. 

s 

1 

00 

co"1"1 

i  p|    i 

i 

is 

S 

1 

1 

co" 

1     1        I 

co"     co"       • 

': 

CO 

S 

co" 

la 

»c  o  o 

S 

C3  O 

CO" 

1  1   i 

j 

CM         CO 

s 

1° 

O  CO 

1 

$~.3      : 

j 

<M'  ^  «M"        ! 

o 

Is 

1 

eo" 

cc  o' 

&i  1—1  oT       ! 

IS 

0 

o 
of 

|i 

1 

**-oo      : 

^  CO  O 

(M         <M 

. 

GO 

1 

1 

§2 

S    lji     • 

CO        CO           • 

c-r   of     : 

0 
CO 

<jf 

l- 

| 

5 

n  1  !  Is 

0 

1  .p.  i 

^;  CO  ^  CO      • 

0 

o          ^  -t  o       o 

o 

5-2 

go    oo  : 

§2 

fa 

!<--  sssj'g  g«  go. 

2  0  |B  *l  0  ^-        |2  5?  |2  *1        §  00  §  CO 

;, 

O-              CK1         ^^  O  O        lO               O 

r-  co      i  -  o  oj  o  o      o  t-      oo 

^'T)i        ^f^'2'*iH'       3^"*'        ^"^ 

§sl!|-  Us  §^§3 

CO 

^1  w      ^r  co  ^  co  ^4  •*  ^  :o      ,_;  :o 

I-!!!--  §:!:•  SSs 

CM 

12  1S1^|  I2  g5 

i.-ips  §pM.  I2i2 

£H 

'.-=>              ^-I'MOOO         0               0 

COOOCO-/5               O^O               O        <O 

ri& 

£*  o 

•  O               O  GO  *N  ^-  —  '         O  GO         —  P  T—  ( 
•  CO               CO      •  Tl<      •  •<#         <M      •        CO      • 

g^l-J-    |».I-    ihfh 

HEIGHT  ABOVE 
PLANE. 

'.      •               O         O         O        O               —  I 

Si:      co     :      ff     : 

CHARGE,  Ibs. 

IS       S    B    §    1 

o          cTSTocoo          oo          t-t~ 

WEIGHT  OF 
PROJECTILE. 

O  C 

5       §    S    S    q!       §    g    £    0    g       ; 

?   «      S1   « 

•50             <0       0 

KIND  OF  PROJECTILE. 

"o 

O  ' 

i     :     i        :     :     :     :     :        :     :             : 

•     •     •        •     :     :     •     :        :     :             : 

I         .      "3                    "o         •         •      "3             •      "o                    o 
•         •       C              •       o         ;         •       a              |       fl                      C 

'S'3^2        "55     fi     "S     "3     S        "oS        13      S 

coc/DccS         cocctnccaj         r/ico         Sco 

t> 
O 

0 
GO 

•j 

K 

k 

i          ^                    ^                   i^ 

5                 1                  |               |              -g|          ^p 

3                                       M                                        M                                 HH                               SoSo§ 

XVI          APPROXIMATE  RANGES  OF  SHOT-GUNS  AND  HOWITZERS. 


g 

0 
CO 

'           ' 

1 

CO 

fc 

s 

—  ^  —  :  —  :  —  :  —  M  —  H  —  :  —  ;  —  ;—  f  —  :  —  r- 

c 

0 

>-) 

o 

ci  rH  ;    CM  *"*         '      :      !  ;      ;      :      i      ;      :      ; 

§ 

g 

0 

CM              

? 

GO 

§      ::::;:::::::: 

•4 
tx 

t- 

o      :            ::::::::::: 

g 

^  :      :      :      :      :      :  :      :      :    co    2    !~  ^   : 

8 
2 

«*"*-':      :      ;      ;      :      •  :      •      :    --^--0  . 

1 

Jb 

r-i'  «  r-4  O  i—  '  O  1-1'  O  r-i  «O  T-To  T-T     •         rH  O  r^'-S  i-l"o  i-To  7-^  i~  —  .'  1.1 

1-TO   T-l'  TjJ  T-!O 

i 

M 
H 

V 

O         O  =  O         Ifi         O^lO         CO  iO         lO  o  <£         CO         0  _  CO         1^  „ 

T-«'  o  —  i.'o  —  'o  T-I'O  i-i'o  i-Trji  ^"^'^f.'  ,_;  ^  ,_,  .^i  ,_;  ,j<'  ,_;  ,^'  ,_:  -^  ^  ^ 

~o          '° 

^,  i-o  ci  g  o 

r-i  Tjl  CS  CO  r-'  -^' 

5 

CO 

i—  '  Tf  T-H'TH  ^"T)<  r-Trf  i-«'  -^  t-4  CO  1-1'  "r-TcO  i-!':o'  '-'"CO  —  '"CO  i—  'lO*  T-H'  CO  Cs  CO* 

cs  co'  oo  so  oo  co 

0 

5 

CM 

?      §^o      OT      "Qaoaot-t         -loot    i    -os  °      o      ° 

T—  'CO  r-TcO  T-.'  CO  C5  CO  T-TCO  O  G^  OO  CS  CM  C5  CM  OO  CM  CO  (N  -.-3  SM  OC    N  CO  CM 

I-       iO 
S  CM  i-  CM  i-  (?) 

1 

- 

p-5g|g5S5S§S2i§.-i2i^:§3i:-i! 

5?      p 

Mo 

CO  i—'  CO  r-  CO  —  •'  CO  ^  CO  ^  CO      •  ^4  CO  r-i  C-l  "^  C-l  1-1  o'l       •  CO  r-i  CM      '  OJ  "" 

?>     •  «  i-»  W  rH 

HEIGHT 
Pm 

AIJOVE 

NE. 

oo     i     i    f     '•     :    r^r?   i?   r?   ^     •     :    t- 

:    -      : 

o 

sg 


H-H«       -^       He. 

CHARGE. 

WEIGHT  OF 
PROJECTILE. 

CI         O         (M         ffl         O         O«         01  Ol         O         <>»         (M         W         <M         O         O         O         CO 

CO         C-l         CO         00         CM         CO         CO  CO         CM         CO         CO         CM         CO         £1         CM         T-l         TH 

B 

*        .        "         !         !    !        '.         '.         1        I         !         !         '        !         I 

E 

H 

:      :           ::::::::::•::: 

iS 

h 
O 

O 

g 

W 

.                .             fl         .       .                .             g                .       .                .             g                 .                .             g                 .             g                               g 

111111*111      §      2     1      |    ?      ll      1 

. 
CLASS  OF  GUN. 

1 
1                  1-'                1                    111 

s       si      §       sis 

O                             °  TjT                                                           &                       ~                  a 

C*\                                   Ol    C                                OJ                                      Cl                            •n'                      CM 
SO                                   CO    c5                               CO                                      CO                            C4                     TH 

APPROXIMATE   RANGES   OF   RIFLE -GUNS. 


XV11 


2? 

1 

H 

03 

5 

H 

C 

2 
fe 

§ 

H 

g 

1 

" 
h 

g 

8 

| 

1 

r» 

P4 
H 

1 
ft 
g 

fc 

O 

1 

o 

co 

II 

:     : 

:  :  :     :     :  :      :     :     :      : 

1 

II 

•        GO  CO 

;    ;       ; 

:    h- 

:  :      : 

$ 

^  Si  SD  ?T  f(  co 

O  04  rH  <M  CO  C.-4 
0'       I-        (0 

;    ;     o 

o 

C-l 

<^r   so    »£f 

:    o-+# 

:           : 

o  -**o      o 

CO  CO  0  C5  C5  CO 

i  1? 

Is  i 

0 

o^  :    o^ 

co"       •      co' 

1  13 

of"1        :      : 

o 

o        '      o 

t*  •  S" 

•        o 

•      cf 

l»         :    IS 

[2 

* 

;     o 

;      o 

§        ;•  go 

go 
go 

CO 

'       OH* 

!!  s 

!     I  is 

go 

5, 

0 

;  § 

I   lit  j    §2 

|2 

- 

!  § 

. 

> 

5 

O        O           •        1C  M< 

15 

c; 

P-i  o 

co  r-i 

:      :     :      : 

CO  r-t 



HEIGHT  ABOVE 
PLANE. 

GO 

:      :      :      :      : 

00 

CHARGE,  Ibs. 

c-  o      o      o      o        •'  o    I 

\C                 |-3      CJ      Q                   O 

- 

WEIGHT  OF 
PROJECTILE. 

8    S    |    §      :§§ 

O                           OS         O            •        O 
;       <M                ;       r-i       <M                  cu 

£5 

KIND  OF  PEOJECTILB. 

.  :     : 

:  :     :     :  :      :     :      :     :        : 

lid  shot  
olloxv  shot  
w  shfill 

r£3            "O 

"     5      |«  = 

1 

1              1 

1 

v  ' 

CO        E/? 

03  OC 

02  -Ji     c/ 

»  OJCQ       QQ      GO      03            03 

CLASS  OF  GTJN. 

1 

[ 

( 

c 

3 

i 

a 
j 

1 

| 
1 

,             1 

i    j    ! 
I    | 

0                      ^                      V 

3      I      f 

£             fi             Q 

18 


XV111 


DISTANCE   OF   OBJECTS  AT  SEA. 


APPENDIX  B.-No.  VIII. 

1  Table  for  Finding  the  Distance  of  an  Object  at  Sea. 

To  use  the  Table,  let  an  observer  from  the  cross-trees  measure  the  angle  between  the 
distant  horizon  and  the  enemy's  water-line,  and  look  into  the  Table  with  that  angle ; 
opposite  to  it,  in  the  column  marked  distances,  will  be  found  the  distance  of  the  object 
in  yards. 


YARDS. 

HEIGHT  OF  THE  EYE  ABOVE  THE  LEVEL  OF  THE  SEA,  IN  FEET. 

Distance. 

20 

30 

40 

50 

GO 

70 

80 

90 

100 

o     / 

0        / 

0       / 

0       / 

0       / 

0.    I 

1 

0       / 

0       / 

o     t 

100 

3.44 

5.37 

7.29 

9.21 

11.11 

13.00 

14.47 

16.34 

18.16* 

200 

1.50 

2.  46 

3.43 

4.39 

5.35 

G.31 

7.27 

8.23 

9.18 

300 

1.12 

1.49 

2.26 

3.04 

3.41 

4.19 

4.56 

5.33 

6.11 

400 

.52 

1.21 

1.48 

2.16 

2.44 

3.12 

3.40 

4.08 

4.  36 

500 

.41 

1.03 

1.25 

1.48 

2.10 

2.32 

2.54 

3.17 

3.39 

GOO 

.34 

.52 

1.10 

1.29 

1.47 

2.05 

2.24 

2.42 

3.01 

700 

.28 

.44 

1.01 

1.15 

1.31 

1.46 

2.01 

2.18 

2.34 

800 

.24 

.38 

.51 

1.05 

1.18 

1.32 

1.46 

2.00 

2.13 

900 

.21 

.33 

.45 

.57 

1.09 

1     99 

1.33 

1.45 

1.57 

1000 

.18 

.29 

.40 

.50 

1.01 

1.12 

1.23 

1.34 

1.45 

1100 

.16 

.26 

.35 

.45 

.55 

1.05 

1.15 

1.24 

1.34 

1200 

.15 

.23 

.32 

.41 

.50 

.59 

1.08 

1.17 

1.26 

1300 

.13 

.21 

.29 

.37 

.45 

.53 

1.02 

1.10 

1.18 

MOO 

.12 

.19 

.27 

.34 

.41 

.49 

.57 

1.01 

1.12 

1500 

.11 

.18 

.24 

.31 

.38 

.45 

.52 

.59 

1.07 

1GOO 

.10 

.16 

22 

.29 

.35 

.42 

.48 

.55 

1.02 

1700 

.09 

.15 

.21 

.27 

.33 

.39 

.45 

.51 

.58 

1800 

.08 

.14 

.19 

.25 

.31 

*  36 

.42 

.48 

.54 

1900 

.08 

.13 

.18 

.23 

.29 

.34 

.39 

.45 

.50 

2000 

.07 

.12 

.17 

.22 

.27 

32 

.37 

.42 

.47 

2100 

.06 

.11 

.16 

.20 

.25 

.30 

.35 

.40 

.45 

2200 

.00 

.10 

.15 

.19 

.24 

.28 

.33 

.38 

.42 

2300 

.05 

.10 

.14 

.18 

22 

.27 

.31 

.36 

.40 

2100 

.05 

.09 

.13 

.17 

.21 

.25 

.29 

.34 

.38 

2500 

.05 

.08 

.12 

.     .16 

.20 

.24 

.28 

.32 

.36 

No  correct  use  of  this  Table  can  be  made  when  the  proximity  of  land  may  interfere 
with  the  distance  of  the  horizon. 


i  By  Lieutenant  W.  P.  Buckncr,  U.  8.  N.    See  a  pamphlet  "On  the  Determination  of  Distances  at 
Sea,"  by  Captain  A.  P.  Ryder,  K.  N.,  for  more  extended  tables  of  this  and  other  methods. 


FORM  OF  REPORTS  OF  TARGET  PRACTICE 


APPENDIX  B.-No.  IX. 

REPORT  OF  TARGET  PRACTICE  WITH  GREAT  GUNS  OX  EOARD 
MADE  THIS  DAY  OF  ,  18     ,  AT . 


KIND  OF  PROJECTILE. 

1  DISTANCE  OF  TARGET,  IN 

Y  A.RDS. 

O 

0 

1 

:  OF  POWDER. 

1 
O 

s- 

I 

f| 

FALL  OF  PROJECTILE. 

BURSTING  OP 

SHELLS. 

si  ^ 
^ 

og 

& 

f  Target. 

"S 

I 

f  Target. 

tc 

H 

s    ! 

Too  soon. 

ii 

5 

.3  |  Not  at  all. 

CALIBR 

1 
O 

ClIARG] 

NUMBE 

P  3 
II 
^ 

ELEVA' 

o 

0 

3 

CO 

1 

o 

TD 

o 

At  or  i 

1 

WITH  GREAT  GUNS. 


XXI 


U.  S.  S. 


COMMANDING, 


ARMAMENT  V 


SHELLS  NOT  BURST. 

No.  FIRES  DIEECT. 

i 

M 

i 

£ 

d 
£ 

No.  Patches  of 
Fuzes  returned. 

Eange  sufficient  to 
•  burn  Fuzes. 

ss  2 

1  3 

cr  ^ 

*3  o 

5"^ 

|1I 

N.  B.—  Each  kind  of  projectile,  distance  of  target 
(measured  or  estimated),  class  of  gun,  and  charge 
of  powder,  require  a  separate  line  across  the  page. 

KEMAEKS. 

* 

XX11 


TARGET   PRACTICE — SMALL-ARMS. 


EEPORT  OP  TARGET  PRACTICE  WITH  SMALL- ARMS  ON  BOARD  THE  U.  S. 
S.  ,  COMMANDING,  MADE  THIS  


DAY  OF 


18    ,  AT 


S 

M 

(X 
-<i 

SINGLE  SHOTS 
WITH  DELIB 
ERATE  AIM. 

VOLLEYS  AT  ORDER 
"  FIRE." 

d 
H 

KIND  OF  AEM  USED. 

t* 

H 

g 

S!     • 

<M 

„ 

(Each  kind  requires  a 
separate  line.) 

DISTANCE  OF  TARGET, 

ISizE  OF  TARGET,  IN  F 
li  FEET] 

Number  Fired. 

~ 

S 

o 

INo.  within  6  Inches  o 
Centre  of  Bull's-Eye. 

Number  Fired. 

a 

o  ^ 

"a 

3 

Number  of  Hits. 

INo.  within  G  Inches  o 
Centre  of  Bull's-Eye. 

WHOLE  NUMBER  OF  S 

w 

PQ 

p 
M 

CHARGES  OF  POWDER. 

> 

KEMARKS  on  each  kind  of  arm  used,  and  the  general  results  of  practice;  names  of  those  who  made  the 
best  average  of  shots;  Officers  whose  divisions  fired  best. 


REPORTS  OF  FIRING. 


XX111 


APPENDIX   B  -No.  X. 


It  being  of  great  importance  to  know  the  endurance  of  guns  in  service,  Commanding 
Officers  are  directed  to  fill  up  the  blanks  of  the  annexed  Circular  issued  by  the  Bureau 
of  Ordnance,  November  5,  1863,  as  far  as  in  their  power,  and  forward  it  to  the  Bureau 
at  the  expiration  of  every  quarter. 

When  the  "total  number  of  fires  to  date"  cannot  be  ascertained,  the  number  since 
the  vessel  has  been  in  commission  is  to  be  stated. 

NAME  OF  VESSEL.  STATION. 


1  —  1  

6      \ 

7~ 

ft 

*c-2 

•M 

^« 

No.  of 

Total  No. 

CLASS  OF  GUN. 

1 

FOUNDBY. 

|S 

§-| 

. 

ri 

| 

g 

1 

Fires  during 
Quarter. 

of  Fires 
to  Date. 

0 

"rt 

JS  f 

2 

^ 

s 

M 

fe 

CAi 

oJ 

CO 

O 

- 

}  Commander. 

186 


The  object  of  this  circular  is  to  enable  the  Bureau  to  know,  at  all  times,  how  many 
rounds  have  been  fired  from  every  gun  in  the  service;  and  the  following  directions  are  to 
be  observed  in  making  the  quarterly  return  of  firing : 

"  CLASS  OF  GUN." — Under  this  head  give  the  kind  of  gun  ;  if  rifled,  state  it;  and  if 
a  32-pounder  or  8-inch,  give  the  weight.  It  is  not  necessary  to  give  the  position  of  the 
gun  in  the  vessel. 

"  REGISTER  No." — Be  careful  to  give  the  register  number  correctly,  as  this  is  most 
important. 

"  FOUNDRY.'' — Under  this  head  give  the  initials  on  the  base-ring. 

"  Date  of  fabrication"  will  be  found  on  the  right  trunnion. 

"  Charge  of  powder"  in  pounds. 

"  Projectiles"  to  be  entered  under  their  appropriate  heads  in  the  blank. 

"  Kind  of  fuze"  to  be  stated. 

"  Number  of  fires  during  quarter,"  must  be  given  for  each  gun  separately. 

"  Total  number  of  fires  to  date,"  must  include  all  rounds  fired  from  each  gun  sepa 
rately  ;  and  each  succeeding  quarterly  report  must  have  the  "  total  number  of  fires  to 
date"  from  the  report  next  preceding  (a  copy  of  which  is  always  to  be  kept  on  board 
the  vessel)  brought  forward,  added  to  the  total  for  the  quarter,  and  the  aggregate  placed 
in  the  last  column. 

The  Bureau  often  receives  reports  with  the  last  column  left  blank,  or  with  "not  known" 
written  therein.  Reports  sent  in  this  way  are  of  no  value  whatever  to  the  Bureau. 

If  a  record  of  the  total  number  of  fires  of  any  gun  has  not  been  kept,  or  if  it  can 
not  be  ascertained  from  the  Log,  then  vent-impressions  of  such  gun  are  to  be  taken; 
and  the  Commanding  Officer  must  determine,  as  nearly  as  possible,  judging  from  these 
impressions,  the  total  number  of  fires,  and  enter  the  same  on  his  return.  (See  ORD 
NANCE  INSTRUCTIONS,  Part  III.) 

The  Bureau  expects  that  all  Commanding  Officers  will,  in  future,  have  this  return 
carefully  made  out ;  and  that  they  will  not  sign  or  forward  one  of  them  without  first 
being  satisfied  of  its  correctness. 


FORM    OF   REPORTS   OF   INSPECTIONS   OF   SHIPS. 


APPENDIX    C.-No.    1. 


REPORT   OF  AN  INSPECTION 


Of  the   U.  S.. 
made  by 


.,  this. 


day  of. 


Commanding, 
,186  , 


at 


ARMAMENT. 


[These  inspections  are  required  to  be  made  of  each  vessel— when  first 
commissioned  and  before  proceeding  to  sea,  chiefly  with  reference  to  the 
completeness  of  her  equipment  and  the  proper  stationing  of  her  crew;  semi 
annual  ly  during  the  cruise ;  and  at  the  end  of  it,  before  being  paid  off.  As 
a  general  rule,  the  first  and  last  inspactions  are  not  to  take  place  alongside 
of  the  Navy  Yard,  but  in  the  stream.] 

1.   What  time  has  the  vessel  been  in  commission,  and  what  opportunities 
has  she  had  for  exercise  and  target  practice  ? 


2.  Date  of  last  inspection  ? 

3.  Date  of  last  target  practice  ? 


4. 


Gun  Divisions. 

Times 

1st,  commanded 

by 

in  which 

2d, 

a 

each 

3d, 

<( 

division 

4th.           « 

a 

reported 

5th,  cto.   " 

a 

ready 

Master's       " 

a 

for 

Powder        " 

a 

action. 

Engineer      " 

u 

Marine         " 

(.(. 

Hours.        Minutes. 


FORM   OF   REPORTS   OF   INSPECTION'S   OF   SHIPS.  XXV 


5.  Were  all  the  divisions  properly  prepared?     If  not,  state  what  divisions 

were  found  defective,  in  what  particulars,  and  from  what  causes. 
Include  in  the  answer  to  this  question  the  condition  of  division- 
boxes^  spare  implements,  and  equipments,  and  their  readiness  for  use. 

6.  Are  the  men  well  skilled  in  the  exercise  of  the  great  guns,  including 

working  both  sides  at  once,  and  in  pointing  and  firing  ? 

7.  Time  required  to  dismount,  shift  carriage,  remount,  load,  and  run  out 

any  broadside-gun  selected  by  the  Inspecting  Officer.  State  its  posi 
tion  and  weight. 

8.  Time  rean.ired  to  transport  a  gun  from  one  side  to  the  other,  and  back, 

giving  numbers  of  ports  and  weight  of  gun. 

9.  Time  required  to  shift  breechings,  trucks,  and  tackles. 

10.  Have  the  prescribed  arrangements  been  correctly  made  for  supplying 

the  batteries  with  powder  and  projectiles;  are  the  men  properly 
stationed  for  these  purposes,  and  are  they  expert  in  the  perform 
ance  of  these  duties  ?  Is  the  supply  ample,  and  without  confusion 
of  charges  ? 

11.  Condition  of  magazines,  shell-rooms,  shot-lockers,  and  lighting  appa 

ratus. 

12.  Are  the  men  well  trained  in  securing  masts  and  spars,  stoppering  rig 

ging,  and  repairing  injuries  to  the  steering  apparatus,  and  in  getting 
springs  on  the  cables?  State  the  time  required  to  perform  efficiently 
the  most  important  of  these  operations ;  for  instance  : 

Bowsprit  shot  away,  to  secure  foremast; 

Port  main  rigging  and  main  stays  disabled,  to  secure  mainmast; 
To  fish  a  lower  mast  and  yard  ; 

Steering   apparatus   disabled,    what   means    of  repairs   or  substitutes 
prepared. 

13.  Are  the  prescribed  arrangements  for  stopping  shot-holes  complete,  and 

the  men  well  trained  to  that  duty  ? 

14.  Are  the  arrangements  for  boarding   and  repelling  boarders   efficient? 

Note  the  time  required  to  assemble  each  division  properly  armed. 
Are  the  boarders  and  others  well  trained  in  the  use  of  the  single 
stick  or  broadsword? 


XXvi  FORM   OF   REPORTS   OF   INSPECTIONS   OF    SHIPS. 

15.  Is  the  whole  crew  well  trained  in  the  use  of  small-arms,  and  in  company 

and  battalion  drill  ?  If  not,  state  the  reasons  assigned.  State  also 
the  condition  of  the  armory,  small-arms,  and  their  ammunition. 

16.  What  is  the  state  of  the  equipment  and  preparation  of  boats  for  armed 

service?  If  defective,  in  what  particulars  and  for  what  assigned 
reasons  ? 

1 7.  Times  from  the  call  "  ARM  AND  AWAY  "  to  the  shoving  off  of  each  boat. 

Time  to  form  a  line  abreast.  Time  required  for  other  evolutions. 
Time  required  to  land  small-arm  men,  from  the  signal  or  order  given 
when  near  the  shore.  Time  to  land  howitzers,  specifying  their 
weights.  Time  to  embark  them;  to  shift  from  bow  to  stern.  Time 
to  load  properly  and  fire  safely  three  rounds.  Are  the  crews  expert 
in  these  points  ? 

18.  Are  the    arrangements  and  apparatus  for  extinguishing  fire   efficient? 

If  not,  state  deficiencies  and  their,  causes.  Times  required  to  get 
the  several  streams  of  water  to  the  designated  point ;  time  required 
for  complete  readiness.  • 

19.  Have  the  "ORDNANCE  INSTRUCTIONS"  been  fully  complied  with  in  this 

ship  ?     State  exceptions  and  reasons  assigned,  if  any. 

20.  General  condition  of  the  vessel  in  point  of  armament,  carriages,  and 

other  ordnance  equipments,  and  of  the  crew  as  to  efficiency  for 
action,  stating  particular  exceptions,  if  any,  and  what  remedies  have 
been  suggested  or  applied. 


GENERAL    ORDER. 

NAVY  DEPARTMENT,  April  5,  1861. 

Flag  Officers  are  required  to  hold  the, semi-annual  inspection  of  each 
vessel  under  their  command,  according  to  the  foregoing  form  given  in 
Appendix  C,  No.  1,  ORDNANCE  INSTRUCTIONS. 

Commanding  Officers  of  vessels  acting  singly  will  hold  the  same  general 
inspection,  and  in  either  case,  the  reports  will  be  forwarded  to  the  Bureau 
of  Ordnance  by  the  first  favorable  opportunity  after  the  inspection  has 
taken  place. 

GIDEON  WELLES, 

Secretary  of  the  Navy. 


FORM  OF  REPORTS  OF"  TARGET  PRACTICE.  XXV11 


APPENDIX  C--NO.  II. 


FORM  OF  REPORTS  OF  TARGET  PRACTICE. 

QUESTIONS  TO  BE  ANSWERED  AT  LENGTH  IN  THE  U  REMARKS  "  ON 
TARGET  PRACTICE,  IN  ADDITION  TO  FILLING  THE  TABLES.  APPEN- 
DIX  B.— NO.  IX. 

Was  the  ship  at  anchor  or  under  way  ? 

Under  what  sail  ? 

Water  rough  or  smooth  ? 

Force  and  direction  of  wind  in  reference  to  line  of  fire  ? 

Roll  of  the  ship,  in  degrees  by  pendulum,  during  firing  ? 

When  "carrying  sail"  by  the  wind,  does  heel  of  ship  cause  the  weather 
or  lee  guns  to  "  wood  "  before  they  are  level  ? 

Was  target  to  windward  or  to  leeward  ? 

How  was  its  distance  measured? 

Append  sketch  of  target,  showing  its  dimensions,  mode  of  construction, 
and  materials,  with  the  "hits,"  and  fall  of  projectiles  around  it. 

The  degree  of  strain  on  breechings  of  weather  batteries  ? 

Were  the  chocking-quoins  necessary  ? 

Probable  causes  of  the  failure  of  the  shells  to  burst? 

Such  other  remarks  as  appear  important  or  suggestive  of  improvement ; 
such  as  the  best  mode  of  constructing  a  floating  target  of  20  by  10  feet  (the 
size  used  at  the  Experimental  Battery  of  the  Ordnance  Yard,  Washington). 


XXV1U 


ALLOWANCE  TABLES. 


1- 


ft 

^ 
< 

CO 
H 
S25 

w 

CM 

I 

H 

PU 

o 

H3 

p  fc 

3  ft 
H  cq 

n  I   O 

^§ 

m 
W 

g 
I 


S  •§ 

£$ 

S  =3 
S    s 

I    1 
q  tt 


I! 

it 

sfl 

q 

< 

^ 
o 

I 

p 

s 


51 

0  S 
n     tc 

II 
|5 

S   ^ 

II 
II 

S.<! 

^j        « 

§S 

n 

1  B 

ii 

U 

S 

a 


STEAMERS. 

1 
o 

'O 

cc 

o 

•<fl 

O 
0 

£ 

10 

£- 

•73 
CM 

t- 

00 

-ij 

in 

•* 

<M 
(M 

be 

M 

O 
C/3 

</i 
* 

5 

•^ 

O 

T3 
co 

•d 

cq 

o 

CO 

M 

CO 

w 
i—  i 

<M 

0 

BEIGS. 

O 

b 

SLOOPS-OF-WAR. 

1 

5 

-d 

CO 

c^ 

.t- 

o 

d            "1 

3                          ,£> 

fcc                  ^ 

o 

i»     "i 

CO 

o 

h                  fco       .  

fc                                      00             S> 

s          ?   .1 

1 
3 

TJ 
<M 

o 
01 

1              1     « 
^               *     ^ 

"M 

o 

0 
C\l 

-S                     go 

g           d    « 

FRIGATES. 

(M 

-^ 

£         ^  1  - 

o            a    p 

SlHPS-OF-TIIE-LlNE. 

(M 

t- 

0                              O           O 

a                   ^       £ 
0                     H       H 

Proportion  to  each 
Gun. 

^  w  2  Jo        x        CT  M  "  ^  :  ^ 

NAMES  OF  ARTICLES. 

COMPLEMENTS  

•  P  ,5  °'  ,°  ^  IS  J3  o  o  o  o*  6  d  6 
^.^.^.^  g  g  ^^^^^^5^^ 

^        :      :  •  &    *:  a    ^2      : 

^         :      •  :  .2     P  s     ^  "3     ^ 

§        :     :  :  E    s*  J    §  1   S 
^        :    J    o    'E  2    fc  o     3 

•g               t-'o^         rt-g^T3         ft 

1    1=1-  |^|   iiJSi 

.§<      ajcoc      "^TjT^       ft  p,.o  tj 

! 

1    |1-  =  i^^-gggl3  »J.g 
|    ||      iSlilf^.   ^3fi 

M                             E-" 

<1^.^.                P4M--*"- 

5        S"       '  $& 

ALLOWANCE  TABLES. 


XXIX 


:  :  :  :  :  :|      :  : 

:         W    §             : 

3 

^ 

£    . 

:  a  u   :   : 

:^^  ,  : 

3 

^-/ 
_,j 

^  S  ^  w:  ; 

!    ; 

»r 

o 

^  e  o  of  • 

^ 

3 

W 

g 

CO 

£ 

-, 

PH 

**H 

•-••'  ^-1  *—  '    Kn     • 

FH 

O 

a 

i 

2j 

^  •- 

2  «  §  !  £     1    : 

c^^  gT!  HS  "£  s 

f-«fi£|   oa. 

OQ~ 

Ci 

Q 

7 

EXTRACT 

I7S 

03 

of 
•*!z! 

3 

M  a  a  o  a      «  ^ 
pqoooP      fi  W 


XXX 


ALLOWANCE  TABLES. 


BRIGS. 


FRIGATES. 


SniPS-OF-THE-LlNE. 


J-4  0 


PROPORTION  TO  EACH 
GUN. 


g 

-i, 


. 

» 


i 


5 


a3 


ALLOWANCE   TABLES. 


XXXI 


STEAMERS. 

1 

go 

1 
rt 

•5 

s 

Norn-Each  rifle  or  snooth-bore  howitzer  used  in  the  ship's  battery,  and  also  as  a  boat  and  field  gun,  shall  be  furnished  with  fifty  per  cent,  addition  to  the  above 

d 

£ 

<M 

co 

~w 

« 

<M 

i 

Classes. 

1 

I—I 

co 

0 

s 

CO 

to 

<M 

BRIGS. 

r— 

SLOOPS-OF-"WAK. 

o5 

d 

CO 

s 

d 

<M 

CO 

"w 

§ 

CJ 

a! 

d 

§5 

i—  i 

1 

FRIGATES. 

0 

SlIIPS-OF-THE-LlNE. 

C-l 

PROPORTION  TO  EACH 
GUN. 

j-ifO^-I^OOOOO                                    'l-'l-H-i 
Oi  n-i  i—  i  O  i—l                                    rM  »—  1   i—  i 

NAMES  OF  AETICLES. 

COMPLEMENTS  

066666666                          1£"cu~S 
d       (Z&J^^H^^^^^                           oatocc 

1       n     n  :  :  :  :  •          1          « 

~             "~&        fan    '                                      s3              iyi  —  • 

s^    g  p,  •  «  ;  •  ;  I  ;          0       -^-° 

ig1     tS^gS^o1^^^ 

^  s 


XXX11 


ALLOWANCE  TABLES. 


STEAMERS. 

1 
ft 

i 
[O 

CO 

1 

|j 

0 

0 

co 

e- 

g 

co 

™ 

S 

1 

GO 

to 

5 

.d 

0 

CO 

o 

01 

CO 

. 

"w 

S 

o 

BRIGS. 

r- 

0 

1 

SLOOFS-OF-WAR. 

Classes. 

•d 

CO 

t- 

C5 

GC 

1 

•d 

S 

o 

rS 

0 

a 

3 
bO 

Eazces. 

S 

10 

CO 

s    £JT        cs~ 
&    ^^           s 

"S 

0 
<M 

ill      2 

-'P--   -.oto                   ^ 

FRIGATES. 

CM 

o        ^  ^  "                  * 
o  o                    ^o 

SlIIP8-OF-TIIE-LlNE. 

t— 

§03    rt                             0 

PROPORTION  TO  EACH 
GUN. 

J3^3!^3            <Mi=Tf!0H°H= 

1—  * 

NAMES  OF  ARTICLES. 

COMPLEMENTS  

^d  d  t6  d  ^6  6  6  6  6  6  d  d  ^d  d  d  d  d  d  c  ^d  o 

§    :::::::::::::::::::: 
5   :::  |  :::::::::  j  :::::: 

i    i  .'.'  p  '  i  :.*  g,  :::  •  s  .'::::: 

s    .  :i  rO  .::.«  g.,  ..•  v  !!*:!' 

fe        jf  cT«2  -S  6  60  »rS  "        -3  1       M  §  s    •?     ^  rf 

^      •§'§)*r'3  .fj-.S  S*1      £3    g      g^3     S-H§^ 

^HJ          O"OO"*P5          ti          -«ri                -43*          ffl                t> 

pqpq      pq      pqpq      pq      pq      o          o      O           o 

'-^ 
p 
o 

P 


ALLOWANCE   TABLES. 


XXX1U 


•sorag 


•saivoiaj 


nova  ox  K 


o 


. 


-00 

-  rf   rt 
o  o 

-2  ° 

~o  o 

65 


2  £ 

^ o  5 

p^  t3  03 

&  O  ^ 

S=— .§  s 


,oS  to- 


^  rt 


o  "^ 
o  d 


CMi—  1   r-(   i—  1 


CD  d  d  o  d  d  d  d  d  o'  6  o*  +?  6  6  6  d  d  d  o' 


: 


1 


19 


XXXIV 


ALLOWANCE  TABLES. 


STEAMERS. 

co 

o 

5 

0 

CO 

0 

s 

GO 

^H 

(M 

Screw. 

Classes. 

1 

o 

CO 

£ 

C-J 

n 

0 

O 

2 

CM 

4         & 

•soiug 

t— 

0 

s        | 

SLOOPS-OF-"WAR. 

w 

1 

CO 

0 

cl 

0 

o                o 
,0                1 

to 

0 

Lazees. 

?i 

0 

CJ 

40                     rO* 

o 

0 

Cxi 

«                    o 

CO 

•saxv  oni  j 

(M 

0 

1                    cf 

•aMi'j-aiix-jo-saing 

— 

o 

5        ^ 

nova  ox  Koixaojouj 

rHCY5c<jT—  ii—  i'i—  I<M<M'      -oci     •     •     -cq'rH 

NAMES  OF  ARTICLES. 

COMPLEMENTS  

d  d  d  -g  d  6  6  d  6  6  6  6  c  o  d  o  d  d  6 

I  ;•:  !•;;  ;|  ;  ;  ;|  ;  :  ;  :  •§ 

§     ::::::::":::  s  ::::  :3 

V                  1  ;  i  8)     i  :  8.  i     :  :  :  f 
i     :•::::::«:  :-,«-  :  :  :  :  :-c 

§                   .'          ••;••'      UJ      O          •          •    ^^r^,          •          •                     •          •      0 

oT-2         '  3        s    I  Bs.   *    "  ** 

•s        i      .  d      :  ^o  o  :  :  .9     8  a  ®  '  oa  .3 

I  i  51  its  if  f^lM 

&i          •    •  a  ^        •  '5  j£^  w  ^  -  -    to              <  *** 

'•«        «T                                                 ^7    H                                 M   ^   !^5 
O                           ,jf;'h-)HH:'O^                                  PH    t-)   P 

ALLOWANCE  TABLES. 


XXXV 


STEAMERS. 

1 
| 

cc 

CO 

i 

i 

0 

i|s 

0 

a 

Sa 

T^ 
1 

g 

'I 

1 

d 

00 

0 

id 

<M 

L— 

CO 

CO 

*# 

(M 
CM 

•AVOJOg 

orf 

1 

5 

a 

T 

5 

00 

O 
I—I 

rd 

CM 

CY5 
CO 

fcb 

™ 

<M 

O 

.s 

*!« 

s 

•soiaji 

r— 

O 

13 
a 

C3 

SLOOPS-OF-WAR. 

0 

O 

•^ 

CO 

f— 

0 

1 

5 

'd 
CM 

0 

.-£ 

^ 

W 

o 
o 

'o 

•SI 

2* 

1 

'd 

CM 

iO 

ro 

CM 

t>> 

"ft 

a 

+a 

M 

10 
0 
CM 

<L> 

•saxvoiaj 

CM 

0 

c§ 

*  Fuzes,  one-half 

•siNi'i-aiix-.JO-SdiHS 

OJ 

t- 

1                 L 

•KmO 

nova  ox  NOixaoaoaj 

r>'°                  J-                                                 *              *    VDIJ                             * 

,-           l-i         oooo     •'di       o       o 

CM    (M    rt            r-l    r-(    ^H        Tf(            0            ^H            -0  -    V  S            CO            CM 

•V  '* 

NAMES  OF  ARTICLES. 

COMPLEMENTS  

6  o  d  o  6  d  _w     d       o       o       d       d       d       d 
^•^^i^l^^l^io^i      ^      Jz;      {25      \4      ^       >q 

1               I     :i    111^1    «2. 

o                        of            2       S       'I       S       —  -      S       ^ 

1        fl  1  *  I  M  !  I 

s         |i  ^  1  4  f  s  1   s 

'S      »         «;?=<2!f3fl«;'~fl 

1   1   i  i  ^  i  s|i  2 

«  i  =£§s§s:  i  §  JE!  g, 

S       •£       2J  &«•*  g|       =      •§      ~||      -S 

i  :           i  si?i§i 

If! 

•—  <    ^H          o  r-X  r-^    S   d   8    ri  «^                *i          £    y2         •—  f    r-  1    en 
^   0  H  %  £  °  ^  g  -9  £  •=  -g  .g  ^  •-  T3  -  -o  .g  ^  .S  -§ 

•^g    asg'   Sa^slsiiaSsSslsS 

^  Is  311s  Sa'6!80!^!  1*8  lw 

O"       CH  C/2  C^       C^  CQ       OQ       W       OQ        CO       02       ra 

XXXVI 


ALLOWANCE   TABLES. 


•eoiag 


•saxvoiaj 


nova  ox  ^oixaoaoaj 


CO          10          10          »O       IQ 


O   O  O   O 


h         »         ^         , 


I 


8  «8§ 

0 


DQ     co     CQ     o3     m 


ALLOWANCE  TABLES. 


XXXV11 


•soiag 


•sxivoiaj 


bo 

'5 

I 

A 

€ 

,£ 


=•1 


S      § 
O       O 


O    O 

•si 


nova  ox  Nonaojoaj 


d  eg  d  6  d  d  6  d  d  d  d  d  •£  d  +=  d  d  d 


jil 

I 


r 

GQ 


1| 

! 


If 


g  ses 

OQO2O2EH 


XXXV111 


ALLOWANCE  TABLES. 


! 

CO 

co 

| 

5 

0 
10 

s 

o 

CM 

t- 

00 

"S 

<M 

I 

o 
co 

«5 

1 

S 

CO 

5 

s 

1 

^                 ^ 
X                                g 

0                                                  0                               3 

1 

i 

&                                     q                      O            i 

•a                  s           j? 

•soraa 

0 

O                     F2                                    >-<                                    rd 

SLOOPS-OF-~WAK. 

0 

0 

-d 

CO 

S 

nd 

CM 

M 

*     1        II      « 

to 

0 
0 

if       ll    _& 

m 

M 

CN 

CM 

.2  .2                §           --1                   &  ^              'd 

'>  '>                          "o                    ^                                   CD     §J                          fll 

rH 

0 
CM 

•saxvomj 

0 

oo                g                            .g^^aa^ 

8<img 
joaj 

S 

OO               O           EH                <1J2jc/2cMCM"<1 

IIOY3  01  KOIX'JC 

i-1           •  c!-c'-<     •                               ..... 
•       •  i—  1          O       •                     •                                   ....             .^ 

I 

i 

NAMES  OF  ARTICLES. 

i 

COMPLEMENTS  ! 

dj»do'tdodo'6               dcJdddddd 
o          .             .                                    , 

1    :  •  :  :  •  :  :  .^                          1  fl  ^ 

I<           '.*''*     0. 

^    :•::'•':  cT         5                    § 

§.'!....  V            S                          $ 

1   :|     :  :  :  :5|     1   _«     ^|| 

lildjillf    111" 

»2j3«a±0ar                  Pa-agsass 

S>S^||«1                S^fSg 

|  S  S  S  £  ^  $%z         |  w  ,^ 

^-^^^^p-Sw                      ^^HoT 
^    §  H  B  H  ^        O£4                       SMtj^^----5 

I 

O 


ALLOWANCE  TABLES. 


XXXIX 


12  I 


O  CO  CO  f  .0 


-d       & 

£       -i 


t.t,« 

rt    '.: 


,_p         ^-0000  ^  rt- 

OO°  00 


rH-^*          -^ 


ocOCOCX) 


2  s 


•S3XVOI1IJ 


o  ooo 


0  l.-  i.-  r- 


o   p 
f>  ^ 


00. 

o  o 


:       .       «     ---- 


+_  CO  -M  +-> 


o-J 

s  ^  2  §  ^ 


do'ddddcddcoodcoMoo'd 

* 

ai 


xl 


ALLOWANCE  TABLES. 


CM   0  CO  CM   0   CM   0   O   0   (TO  O  CM   CM   O   O   CO   O 

1 


<M   iH  rH 


i  N 

•saxvoia^ 


O  CMCvlpOCOfOCOCMOOOfOCOCMCO 


*-  co  |  e* 

'3 

t- 

w 

a 

CMCMOOO-#T*lTKC<l    _ 
_  CM 

co  ^  co  «~o  w" co~co  co  oo  O~CQ~CM  co  co  oo"«o" 
o _ _____________^ 

r-lj3  i--CMi— IrHrH  i—   CM   CM   i— i   i— (  r— I 

M  CM 

JD  ^d  d  ,  d  _»  d  o' .  d  .  c  d  d  d  d  c  w  d  c  d 

"73  ^      I  ''"!«' 

1      ^        i   ;  -jt : : ;  | 

•a    p  :g  :;:::::  :11  :::    § 

^o 

g     a  :-o     «      •  •  ;  &z  ^«  ^ 

raig^pi          '  no     .  M  «        no  OQ          •        H 

^        m  m01  £ 

$  Ifllflflllllilllll 

«f 

f 
I: 

I 


ALLOWANCE   TABLES. 


xli 


STEAMERS. 

Side-wheel. 

Classes. 

5 

0 

O*  CM                  CMCMCM          CMCM          i—  (  CM   CM  O   lO   CM   CM   CM 
CN 

CO 

1O 

(M 

d 

CM 

co 

I.-TJI                  CM<MO           00          CMOOOOOOO 

I—  1 

CM 

CO^tl                  CM  CM   CO           COCO          CM  GO  .C-   O   O  i—  i—  C- 

L—     T—  1 

1 

O 

1 

rH 
0 

"C  "q             N  «  "^    ^  S  ° 

i 

O 

g                                                            5                                ^    r- 

d 

fO 
.CO 

corji        .j  CM  w  co        COOO-MCMOOGOOI^COCOOQ 

^                                                   J^                           CO    r^ 

1 

CM 

o 

(M    O              t*iCM    CM    CTI            CM    SM     ^  (M    CM    C^l    O    O    !>)    CM    CM 

,—  I                     ,D                     r-l            r—  i    i-H    ^            p-l    r-  1    (M    CM    I—I    r—  t    l—  ( 

.  -s  -  J 

•eoiag 

5 

CMCM            ^CMCMCM          CMCM^r—  (C<>CMOlO(MCMCM 
,0                                               ,§                         CM 

SLOOPS-OF-WAR. 

1 

d 

co 

r- 

C3 

C3                                                                             r^ 

CM 

0 

O                                                 "-1                         IO  i—  I 

O                         ""o                   O 

"S 

CM 

0 

10" 

M 
CM 

£-   T*            -^CMCM           ^                           CM^,'^^- 

•  e         el 

M 

to 

O 
(M 

COTjl    o"    *-iCMC^4CO    ^COCO    S-  CM  GO  .C-   O   O  t—  t-  C- 

0  '^                           ^                 '^ 

•8ax^ 

O 

-   II     ~!~I"!   ------- 

•axi'I-aiix-.iio-sding 

CM 

^_  ^i  ^    S  <M  W  CO  Sfi  CO  CO    S  CM   SO   GO   O   O   GO  CO   CO 

CM    i—  1.2                              rH     J3    rH    r-l     O            I—  (t—  (COOOrHi—  <rH 

HOVOI  ox  lioixaojoaj 

NAMES  OF  AETICLES. 

COMPLEMENTS  • 

d  c  d  6  6  d  6  d  d  d  6  d  o"  6  d  6  d  d  d 

13               05       
0)               ^      

•  s      :;:::::  :  |  ::  «  |  
o     IB  jj  M  i  lie    |1|  j|  if  j 

i  i  |i|illllia 

|_  |\ 

xlii 


ALLOWANCE    TABLES. 


I 


a  a 


£     SH   5~ 

'3 '3  o 


=T:      2 


nova  ox  Noixaojoaj 


6  d  d  d  d  6  d 


1  * 

d  t- 

•rt  <3 

"5  ° 

§  CQ 


ALLOWANCE   TABLES. 


xliii 


STEAMERS. 

1 

^ 
o 

*s 

cc 

O 

••5 

•<* 

o 

0 

. 

•d 

00 

lO 

•d 

Cl 

oo 

i 

^ 

O-l 

c^ 

1 
1 

02 

1 
| 

5 

1 

0 

73 
CO 

o 
I—  1 

"d 

(M 

CO 
M 

ro 

a 

1 

S 

10 

I            i 

•S9IH5I 

r— 

O 

w                         o 

a  ..  _  -6                       -  ^  -  . 

SLOOPS-OF-WAK. 

Classes. 

»d 

CO 

Jt- 

0 

7"  8        S  .                       £ 

Jr          o  £                             £ 

nd 

<M 

10 

CO 

-§    isi                 S 

03           .S    5  r-                                                                p, 

"S 

nd 

C-4 

l-O 
CM 

§      ill                                § 
,;  g  o  fe  »  S                                «                o 

«5 

1 
« 

•sax-v 

•H  S  §  a  1  •"                  ^         '| 
ag»&a'S»§                 5         8> 

to 
oiaj 

m 

0 
!M 

(M 

0 

^ 

^J^§l§§||      * 

-iiiiit-^-^^-=.|-   =§ 

_o.o0oc|o^oooo               ^                   o 

•aNil-'Jiix-ao  sdiiis 

i— 

oo9PPo°ooo°                                    ° 
CCI^^^SOC-JCMOO               M                   a 
OOEH&HH-H'-i            —  -i              <i                   O 

•KiiO 

nova  ox  NOixaojoH,T 

.       .       .              •                     0       • 

NAMES  OF  AKTICLES. 

COMPLEMENTS  .  . 

06666066666666  ^6  6^6  ^6  6 

•  ••••  ®  J  :  :  g  :  :  • 

•    •    •    •    •    a  a    •  _•  ,5    : 
::•::::::  :?-g  o  2  ^^ 

°t         •:::::::::6^SS^?! 

g       ^      •  I,              5? 
£       !'.:.':::::£            w 

JO                O              n3      '      '    J      '      '.  r-4    M 

^                S_I'rtI!S®----- 

1>                     i                    i-^—  <H>C3^^^--- 

|      I     jslU^-J?            o 

1 

l^^^fg                                                 g§ 

otftf  f  8          1^ 

t^rSa         §  3  3  s  S"r 

agg-  £§                         ss 

5SS     dd                                       ^Q 

xliv 


ALLOWANCE   TABLES. 


3 


o  o  o  o  o 


0   0   10   0   0 


•d  12 

CO  rH 


nH          « 


•soiag 


O> 
fl 

5 
_    ==  t>>: 


10000 


•^      3 


-d  I  S  I 

MM 


oogooojoo 
OOHCOOOO 


N 


6  6  6  o  o          6  o  6  o    -2  o  o  o  o  d  d  o 

U 


a 


'o      H 
g     J 


pq 


C  S  10  »«  r-i  ri  <N 


•-•     O 

^ 


erf  of 


ALLOWANCE  TABLES. 


xlv 


STEAMERS. 

'f 
S 

cfl 

i 

H 

0 

o 

<M  CM          0 
0 

co 

r- 

?-n 

s 

t- 

CO 
rH 

00     §.B 

^2 

N 

00  CO          0    § 

02 

Classes. 

1 

iJ 

cc 

CO 

2 

O   w 

p 

-d 

CM 

CO 

co 

CO 

o  -2 

d 

"w 

rH 

r-  1 

OO  CO          O     > 

0                                                                  "    0 

•««* 

O 

(M  CN         0  •" 

§                                                                       10    0 

Mi 

Classes. 

CO 

r- 

0 

t   f      /\.s^  I 

s 

3 

'o 

=3  i    1       |M"|S|  1 

"w 

2 

1 

^Qod13..      -^                    -.2^ 
o     gooo^'3            r-i       "3"c3o 

CO 

s 

10 

co 

CM 

J 

.  ,Q      o      '•"  'N  'S  'S  ^2  P             J3  o  o  ^*'ea 

=  1   o  --3»aas^       °     fe|8> 

-tJ 
02 

0 

'     11 

|l  ^  JiJJjr"!8!!!'* 

•gaivoiaj 

0 

it 

!|  1  looolf0000-!??!^'! 

—  i«—«i 

C1 

000       ^       00000    ^OOr^Or-jOO" 

OOO    -<    OOOOOeS^^SSgoO^ 

nava  01  xouaodoaj 

j 

0       -0       •       •       • 
rl        •   0        •        •        • 

NAMES  OF  ARTICLES. 

02 
g 

o 

o 

d  d  d  d  d  d  d  d  ^c  d  d  _»  ^    *  w    ;    !  ^'  c> 

c 
e 

Magazine  Stores,  &c,  —  Continu 
FUZES,  Percussion  for  Kifle-Shell  

•d'  ;|        ft    N  |j 

Si1,     if  I  I  P 

ifr.riil!'!'  !»««»« 

3t>s::::oS35      «]      o 

HP^         w  Wt-5i^    a    AH 

xlvi 


ALLOWANCE   TABLES. 


STEAMERS. 

'a 

.0 
£ 
i> 
r3 

CO 

Classes. 

•^ 

O  , 

>ri 

CO 

0 

i— 

ri 

CM 

£- 

CO 

"w 

•^ 

^J 

<M 

{s 

2 

o 
QQ 

Classes. 

rg 
Th 

I—  1 

0 

•d 

co 

s 

T3 
<M 

ro 
ro 

•d 

CO 

CJ 

o 

'2 

cr" 

•80133 

t- 

0 

a-               b 

SLOOPS-OF-WAK. 

5 

T3 

CO 

r- 

0 

1            3 

o  _;            w 

is       § 

•d 

OJ 

1-tl 

ro 

life     S 

M    5  ^         p3 

>KJ              r~(      £      >                0 

40 

to 

r—  1 

0 

o 

r—  1 

o        c  <v_  o       ^5 

rQ           C3  •-_  d,          ^ 

•^  o3  o  aT  o        o  g3 

ai 

M 

T3 

c^ 

n 

ro 

5  1  1  1  «  ^  1  11 

4J 
OQ 

O 

0 
(M 

oq 

o 

Tf( 

cv 

L-~ 

«  s  s  a  -3  1  a  a  ^ 

-t-1  2  o  o  o   ^,'7!~rS 

•saivorjj 

.-sss^lsss 

pL-8  2  -2  IPS  .2  £  .2 

•aKrpaiLL  -jo-sding 

opupooooo 
CtSprciapicica                                   * 
OcHE-nHWOCCO 

•MHO 
nova  ox  xoiiaojoaj 



NAMES  OF  ARTICLES. 

COJJPLEMEXTS  

dddddo'ddd 

^Izi^k;^^^^;^ 
.•    

.    .    

'd      .   .   '  .   :   '  .   *.  . 
•§     '::::::::: 

a        
d        

6      ::::::::: 

^  M  M  M  •  M 

^         :        1  S  :  1 
§        :       5a  :& 

f5               .                  OQ       O 

e       p^  t_  o       *-       w 

t  Hi  I  firs. 

"•     «  A«      §3g^§ 

IiliM^I 

£3cio^<<J*  ~"   i1"1 
«3  02  02  (7i  EH  H            f> 

o 

&a 

•s 

e 

•S 
1 

•SH 


ALLOWANCE   TABLES. 


xlvii 


xlviii 


ALLOWANCE  TABLES. 


O 
^ 


S   s 


.      I     CO 

T3        co 

CM  CO 


OOO  CO 


i-H  rH  CM 

CO 

CM  CM  CM                  -* 

CO          ;£OOCO          r-H          O 


0 


ALLOWANCE   TABLES. 


xlix 


Tables  of  Allowances  of  Ordnance  Equipments  and  Stores  —  Continued. 

STEAMKRS. 

•3 

<t> 
JS 

£ 

& 
>o 

CO 

Classes. 

£J 

_                                                                                                          —  i  O  O         HN 

§                                                   °.S     ^ 

73 

CO 

i-H  O  O          rl 
0                                                                                                                        00 
t"                                                                                                                                 CM   O 

T3 
CM 

£5                                                   ~§§     - 

00  <M 

w 

^                                                                                                                 r-i  O  0          CN 

3                                                     g§ 

<M 

ft 
1 

CO 

Classes. 

i 

r-H  O  O          •-£* 
0                                                                                                                        2§ 

-d 

CO 

O 

i—  I 
i—  ( 

rH  0  0          rl 
O  O 
04    0 

no 

CM 

M                                                                                                                                    r-1    0    0            f- 
0  O 
M                                                                                                                         C~   ^ 

+J 
w 

1-1                                                                   .    oj                                       <M  O   0          (N 
<^                                                                      M     rf                                                 00 
0                                                                 0    §                                              10  0 

=  5o      -.  .               -     « 

•soiag 

5                       ^     *%                  -gg-g^ 

1  ^^            ^°i 

SLOOPS-OF-WAR. 

Classes. 

^ 
M 

5           i  ss        "iir 

?rr      j>  f>                               -_ 

rd 

CN 

=               1  11            rtii|"    s 

as      a  n          ni                 r^L            -2 

CO 

§                            g      i!>    .      .1         -g5^-      ~ 
0     -S  -S  -3     "g             ^50          g 

®       a  S  M       s                   —i  4_>           w 

Eazees. 

>d 

CM 

S                       g     111     Is*  "^§S  --  "'S 
«                   ^     ^  "  "    2  «       «  r-i  g       d 

fl^^^J           <»    gB                        rH*                 -3 

i 

0 

O 
CM 

<s        ooo       <O  g-       _  r-  <—  o  —  .        S 

-3     SS2   .^^        11"      .- 

<U                  fcHt-.O'^^'O                                     ^    -g               ^r^ 

•saxvoiHj 

<N 

0 
.-^ 

~"^    Sf  .fc-s  Z  s    w§§  2«-§  1 
^      S8g,g*«2^        °^S      o"o 

•aKii-am-jo-sdiiig 
•MHO 

C1 

2        000^-^0       cNoooro^o 
fl       Hflsw^fl           ooa       wS 
O      O  O  C  <  H  O           o  o  o      <j  O 

j°  H^  ....::: 

t 
(. 

i 
t. 

NA.MES  OF  AETICLES. 

I 

& 

COMPLEMENTS  .  . 

o*  ^p'  (d  ^  ^d  d  d  d  (d  d  d  o  d  d  w5  d  d 

:   .   ."El  ..:;::; 
p   

^         •     •     •  o     

§      ::::::::  :•§  :::;::: 
.9      :::::::::  a  :::::;: 

1  11  £>!     ;  :i  B:  : 

]    ¥    ll        i  :'!    "N     • 

i  i  j-  i  i 

1  i  ^    *i£  »a| 
1  I..i     11  PI1! 

o       «       (v;03       o.      o'~H^;ro^roa 
.3        cj        WH        ocohHgo^wo 
jS       s       >H      ^^•Sa0a'gH:<2^ 

n     «2      3  3  =  ^  !  M  2  S  r?  o  g  .,-  o5  2  p 

«   «£:    ^.ferf^d^oA^x-SJ 
a   a   sfSaiJsg'tf  s^of^ 
BsaSsggsi|g§ssgBtf 

.3        oo        S3S2BJ-3        ^Sot> 
C-"       CO  CO       DQ  02  OQ  OQ  OQ  02  E^       H  H  &n  H 

20 


ALLOWANCE  TABLES. 


"S     ° 


nova  ox  KOixaoaoa,! 


bo  •      _ 
.9        fl 


ALLOWANCE  TABLES. 


li 


o  £  o. 

6  ^ 

S  o  3       ^•2SSSG°i~'fi& 
O       O       HOOOO02       c/iOH 


•     6 

S^ 
'' 


2  5 

go 
^ 


02      ^  WJ     -i  P3 


§KP    § 
S.I  I  n 


CQ    Q 

II 
Mil 

g  g§s 

g      O   <J   C5 
"       fi    "    § 

O     °^3 


*      £   CU       ^ 

ow  o 


C5       O   I-H  <M 


0f 

NAVY   DEPARTMENT, 

WASHINGTON,  January  25,  1866. 

CIRCULAR   EXPLANATORY   OF   THE   ALLOWANCE   OF   SMALL  ARMS. 

The  number  of  muskets  to  be  furnished  to  each 
vessel  of  the  Navy  is  to  conform  to  that  given  in  the 
Tables,  Article  101,  Part  I.  of  the  Ordnance  Instruc 
tions,  1866. 

All  vessels  that  have  boats  armed  with  howitzers 
are  to  be  supplied  with  a  breech-loading  carbine  for 
each  man  of  such  boats'  crews.  But  in  case  of  a 
vessel  that  has  no  boat  armed  with  a  howitzer,  then  a 
sufficient  number  of  breech-loading  carbines  are  to  be 
furnished  to  arm  the  crew  of  her  largest  boat. 

Revolvers  are  not  to  be  supplied  to  the  crews  of 
armed  boats,  and  in  landing  with  the  howitzers  the 
carbines  are  to  be  left  behind  in  the  boats. 

H.  A.  WISE, 

Chief  of  Bureau. 


IND  E 


INDEX 


A. 

ABSENCES, 

temporary,  of  some  of  a  gun's  crew,  how  supplied . . . 
ACCIDENTS, 

to  guns,  to  be  reported  in  detail 

AIMING, 

precautions  to  be  observed  in 

by  the  line  of  metal,  not  to  be  relied  on,  &c 

AlR-PORTS, 

to  be  closed  and  secured  in  exercise  with  powder. . . . 
ALL-HANDS, 

the  call  for,  and  duties  of. 

ALLOWANCES, 

for  target  practice,  how  to  be  expended 

for  mortars 

of  ordnance  and  ordnance  stores,  not  to  be  exceeded . 
AMMUNITION, 

allowance  of,  for  target  practice ;  not  to  be  reduced  by  ) 
target  practice,  or  saluting,  below  100  broadsides  J 

expenditure  of,  for  target  practice,  directions  as  to. . . 

for  boats,  on  armed  expeditions 

fixed,  preferable  on  the  score  of  convenience,  &c 

fixed,  should  not  be  put  where  barreled  powder  is ... 

a  statement  of  the,  to  be  furnished  by  the  Ordnance  ) 
Officer,  to  Commanding  Officers  of  vessels ) 

for  small  arms,  dimensions  of  boxes  for 

AMMUNITION-BOXES, 

to  be  preserved,  and  returned  into  store 

ARMAMENT, 

defects  in,  to  be  remedied  or  reported 

quarterly  examinations  of,  to  be  made,  &c 

ARMORERS, 

to  accompany  landing-parties  with  their  tools 


ARMS, 


of  any  description,  not  to  be  given  away 

for  the  men  at  the  guns 

of  men  in  the  master's  division 

fire,  use  of,  in  the  tops,  dangerous,  &c 

for  the  watch  below,  to  be  ready  for  use  in  time  of  war 

kind  of,  to  be  furnished  to  boarders 

table  of,  for  boat  expeditions 

pecuniary  responsibility  for  the  loss  of 

lost  or  destroyed  in  action,  to  be  certified  to,  &c 


PAKT 

PACK 

1 

48 

3 

35 

1 

78 

1 

80 

1 

39 

1 

19,  37 

1 

4 

1 

126 

3 

5 

1 

4 

1 

4 

2 

7 

2 

24 

3 

49 

3 

51 

3 

55 

1 

10 

1 

4 

1 

5 

2 

26 

1 

6 

1 

21-24 

1 

25 

1 

25 

1 

95 

2 

3 

2 

4 

3 

6 

3 

6 

ARTICLES 

217,  218 
67 

283 

297 

168 
92,  161 

10 
503 
15,  16 


10 
10 
G8 
137 

146 
167' 

43 

5 
15 

78 

19 

101 

101 

103 

361 

4 

5 

17 

19 


INDEX. 


ASSEMBLING  AT  OrT.\:rr-;T:s. 

the  drum  beats  for 

in  v/hat  order  the  men  proceed  to  their  guns 

without  powder,  orders  to  the  men 

with  powder,  orders  to  the  men 

the  call  for  boarders 

the  call  for  pikcnien  to  repel  boarders 

the  cail  for  all-hands 

the  call  for  sail-trimmers 

thr;  call  for  lire-men 

at  the  call  for,  every  person  repairs  to  his  station,  &c. 
ASSISTANT  KNGINEERS, 

part  of  the  Knginepr's  division,  when  at  quarters 

ARTILLERY,  NAVAL  LIGHT, 

rem.irks  on  the  use  of,  ashore  and  in  boats 

B. 

BALLS, 

the  piling  of;  to  find  the  number  of 

the  number  of,  in  a  triangular  pile 

the  number  of,  in  a  square  pile 

BATTERIES. 

to  be  kept  clean  and  ready  for  action 

BATTLE- AXES, 

the  number  allowed  for  pivot  and  other  guns 

BAYONET-SCABBARDS, 

the  materials  and  sizes  of 

BEAUMONT, 

his  roller  handspike  adopted  for  the  service 

BEDS  FOR  GUNS, 

the  arrangement  of. 

BELLS, 

the  ringing  of,  indicative  of  a  case  of  fire 

BLACK-STAIN, 

for  wood  or  iron,  its  composition 

BOARDERS, 

of  whom  to  be  composed 

to  be  in  two  divisions 

assignment  of  officers  to  the  divisions  of. 

the  call  for,  and  duties  of. 

may  bo  ordered  for  service  without  (he  call 

swords  and  pistols  to  be  ready  for  the  use  of 

general  directions  and  orders;  when  first  called  away 
"         "         " prepare  to  board ".. 
"         "        "board  the  enemy  ".. 
"         "         "prepare    to'  repel 
"  boarders " 

to  be  exercised  with  the  single-stick  and  sword  .... 

what  arms  to  be  supplied  with 

rattles  for  calling 

BOARDING -NETTINGS, 

in  time  of  war,  to  be  secured  at  evening  quarters. . . 
BOATS, 

crews  of,  to  be  frequently  exercised 

equipment  of,  when  being  armed  for  service 

howitzers  for,  exercises  of 

armed  for  service,  manoeuvres  of.  .  _  . 

grapnels  for,  description  and  use  of. 

harness-casks  for,  use  and  size  of 

t50AT  -CARRIAGES, 

for  howitzers,  of  what  they  consist 

BOAT-GUNS, 

tackles  not  required  for  12-pdrs 

proper  charges  for 


1 

36 

1 

30 

1 

36 

1 

37 

1 

37 

1 

37 

1 

37 

i  1 

37 

1 

37 

1 

37 

1 

16 

2 

21-24 

., 

41 

3 

42 

3 

42 

1 

7 

1 

21 

3 

79 

3 

75 

1 

83 

1 

97 

3 

88 

1 

18 

1 

18 

1 

18 

1 

''7 

1 

37 

1 

40 

1 

92 

1 

92 

1 

92 

1 

93 

1 

93 

2 

3 

3 

69 

1 

95 

1 

5 

2 

3-9 

2 

11-24 

2 

24 

3 

70 

3 

77 

2 

10 

2 

22 

3 

54 

AUTICLE9 

154 

If)  5 
157 
158 
159 
160 
161 
102 
103 
108 

75 
44-68 


95 
9G 
97 

24 

101 

257 

238 

307 

371 

271 

87-90 

88 

90 

159-105 

164 

179 

330 

337 

338 

339 

344 

4 

217 

359 

13 

1-18 

20-08 

09 

221 

248 

19 

57 
164 


INDEX. 


BOATSWAINS, 
in  action,  their  stations  and  duties  

PART 

T 

PACK 

15 

AirncLES 

69 

duties  of,  at  general  quarters  

1 

28 

118 

BOMBS, 
for  mortars,  100  to  be  kept  always  ready  filled 

1 

190 

to  estimate  distance  by  the  bursting  of.  

1 

120 

471 

filling,  directions  concerning  

1 

122 

492    4-93 

BOROMAN  FUZES.. 
the  description  and  use  of  

I 

90 

393 

for  shrapnell  or  shell,  a  description  of,  &c  

2 

23 

66 

the  danger  of  cutting  them  improperly 

3 

45 

BOYS, 
distribution  of,  when  at  quarters  

1 

17 

81 

BREECIIINGS, 
for  all  guns,  materials,  sizes,  &c.,  of  

3 

GG 

208 

BRISTLE-SPONGES, 
sizes  and  description  of  

3 

73 

BROADSIDE-GUNS, 
equipments  and  implements  for.  ... 

1 

33 

148 

stations  and  gun-numbers  of  crews  of  

1 

35 

15? 

exercises  at,  directions  as  to  

1 

39    40 

1G9  179 

may  bo  advantageously  fired  once  in  75  seconds  
manual  exercise  of,  on  one  side  ;  orders  for,  &c. 

1 
1 

41 

4G  54 

182 

204—229 

shifting  positions  of  the  crews  of  

1 

5Q 

233 

firing  them  when  partially  run  in  

I 

57 

234 

changing  sides,  or  manning  one  side  only  
exercise  of,  on  both  sides  at  cnce  

1 
I 

57 
58 

235 

236 

firing  alternately,  inferior   to    manning   alternate   ) 
guns  with  full  crews  [ 

I 

58 

237 

quick  firing  of,  directions  as  to  

1 

KU 

moon 

shifting  breechings  of,  in  action  

1 

59 

240 

position  of  the  bolts  for  carriages  of.  

3 

GG 

207 

C. 

CABLES, 
in  time  of  war,  to  be  kept  ready  for  slipping 

1 

95 

3^7 

CALLIPERS, 
for  examining  guns,  description  and  use  of 

3 

14  19 

00       OQ 

CANISTER, 
in  action,  the  proper  use  of  

1 

76 

in  action,  the  proper  uso  of,  for  boat-howitzers 

2 

23 

65 

dimensions,  weight,  &c.,  of  

3 

40 

93 

CAPTAINS.     See  COMMANDING  OFFICERS. 
CAPTAINS  OP  GUNS, 
the  selection  and  examination  of  

\ 

18 

84 

stations  and  numbers  of,  for  broadside  guns  

I 

35 

152 

duties  of,  when  preparing  for  exercise  at  broadside  guns 
duties  of,  when  exercising  broadside  guns  oa  one  side 
duties  of.  when  housing  lower-deck  guns 

1 
1 
1 

40 
47-54 
54 

170 

206-229 
2  '30 

duties  (?f,  when  shifting  breechings  in  action 

I 

59 

240 

stations,  &c.,  of,  for  pivot  guns  

1 

G2 

243 

duties  of,  when  the  vents  are  obstructed  

1 

74 

259 

duties  of,  when  the  locks  or  primers  fail 

T 

77 

279 

duties  of,  in  pointing  the  guns 

I 

78  84 

281  308 

duties  of,  in  preparing  howitzers  for  boats 

0 

11 

20 

duties  of,  in  aiming  arid  firing  boat-howitzers 

2 

15 

26 

duties  of,  in  disembarking  howitzers 

2 

17  18 

31  35 

waist  belts  for,  materials  and  sizes 

3 

77 

249 

CARBINES, 
crews  to  be  exercised  in  the  use  of 

1 

5 

12 

how  to  be  stamped  

79 

258 

CARCASSES, 
for  mortars,  description  and  use  of     . 

1 

121 

475.  4*7fi 

INDEX. 


CABPENTERS,  PART     PACK 

general  and  special  duties  of. 1      12 

duties  of,  in  preparing  for  action,  &c 1      12 

duties  of,  in  guarding  against  fire 1      12 

duties  of,  in  repairing  injuries  from  shot 1      12 

directions  to,  for  finding  the  position  of  shot  holes,  &c.     1      12 
duties  of,  at  general  quarters 1      30 

CARPENTER'S  MATES, 

the  stations  of,  when  at  quarters 1      15 

CARRIAGES.    See  GUN-CARRIAGES. 

CASCABELS, 

of  boat-howitzers,  a  description  of 2      10 

CASCABEL-BLOCKS, 

for  examining  guns,  description  and  use  of 3      14,  20 

CARTRIDGES, 

metallic,  how  to  be  kept  and  stowed 1      10 

passing  them  from  the  magazines 1      41 

when  to  be  put  in  the  passing-boxes 1      44 

when  filled  for  issue,  directions  as  to 3      51 

for  small-arms,  the  quantity  of  powder' for  each 3      55 

CARTRIDGE-BOXES, 

materials,  description  and  sizes  of 3      78,  79 

CEMENT, 

the  composition  of 3      88 

CHAPLAINS, 

their  stations  when  at  quarters 1      15 

CHARGES, 

distinguishing  marks  of,  for  all  classes  of  guns 1      19 

for  Parrott-shclls 1      101 

for  mortars,  directions  as  to 1      119 

for  13-inch,  mortar-bombs 1      124 

for  proving  shot  and  shell  guns 3      22 

of  powder,  for  spherical  shells 3      44 

for  smooth-bore  guns, service 3      53 

for  rifled  guns, "       3      54 

for  boat  and  field  howitzers,     "      3      54 

old  cylinders  may  be  used  for  saluting 3      59 

CHIEF  ENGINEERS.    See  ENGINEERS-CHIEF. 

CLEANING, 

small-arms,  directions  as  to 3      80-82 

CLERKS, 

their  stations  when  at  quarters 1      16 

COAL-HEAVERS, 

when  at  quarters,  part  of  the  Engineer's  division. ...     1      16 

COCKS, 

for  magazines,  the  proper  mode  of  their  construction      3      62 

COCKSWAINS, 

duties  of,  in  preparing  for  boat  expeditions 2      11 

COMMANDING  OFFICERS, 

to  require  all  ordnance  instructions  to  be  duly  en 
forced  and  obeyed  by  all  under  them,  &c 

duties  of,  as  to  exercising  crews  when  first  received         ,      ,, 

on  board,  and  subsequently 

exercising  their  crews  at  night 1      3 

to  ascertain  by  firing  one  round,  whether  all  the 

gun  equipments  are  ccmplete,  &c 

duties  of,  when  defects  or  deficiencies  exist  in  the 

armament  or  equipments 

when  to  order  surveys  on  ordnance  stores 1      4 

directions  to,  in  expenditures  for  target  practice 1      4 

to  accustom  the  men  to  the  use  of  loaded  shells 1      4 

to  have  duly  preserved  the  relative  proportions  of  )  . 

the  respective  charges  of  powder  on  hand ) 

when  practising  at  the  guns  in  port,  directions 1      5 


INDEX. 


COMMANDING  OFFICERS, 

to  exercise  their  crews  in  the  use  of  small-arms 

to  exercise  boats'  crews  in  the  use  of  howitzers,  &c. . 

to  forward  quarterly  reports  of  all  firing 

to  make  quarterly  examinations  of  the  armament. . . . 
special  attention  required  as  to  condition  of  fuzes. . . 

precautions  to  be  taken  when  filling  shells,  &c 

never  to  have  the  guns  unfit  for  instant  use,  unless. . 

not  to  give  away  arms  of  any  description 

to  keep  the  keys  of  the  ordnance  store-rooms  in  the  ) 

cabin ) 

entering  friendly  ports,  gun  charges  to  be  drawn,  &c. 

not  to  allow  friction  matches  on  board 

their  stations  when  in  action 

to  designate  the  hatchways  to  be  used  by  boarders. . 

alone  to  permit  the  use  of  fire-arms  in  the  tops 

their  duties  at  general  quarters 

to  understand  thoroughly  the  use  of  fuzes 

to  report  the  efficiency  of  all  fuzes  fired,  &c 

of  .small  vessels,  lying  in  rivers  in  time  of  war,  duties  of 

duties  of,  in  case  of  fire 

to  understand  the  construction  of  Parrott  projectiles. 

to  forward  reports  on  rifle  projectiles 

to  refer  to  the  Allowance  Tables,  before  making  ) 

requisitions  for  ordnance  or  ordnance  stores \ 

to  certify  as  to  arms  lost  or  destroyed  in  action 

to  sign  Ordnance  Ledgers  before  leaving  the  Navy  Yard 
before  sailing,  to  be  furnished  with  a  descriptive  \ 

list  of  their  batteries \ 

before  sailing,  to  be  furnished  with  impressions  of 

the  vents  of  their  guns 

to  report  in  detail  the  action  of  all  fuzes 

before  sailing,  to  be  furnished  with  a  statement  of  the  ) 

powder,  small-arms,  projectiles,  &c.,  put  on  board  j 
COMMANDS.    See  WORDS  OF  COMMAND. 

COMPRESSORMEN, 

for  pivot-guns,  their  stations  and  numbers 

COMPOSITIONS, 

Plantou's 

Brainard's 

for  lining  rifle  shells 

CONCUSSION-FUZES, 

none  reliable  yet  for  spherical  shells 

CONDEMNATIONS, 

of  guns  or  small-arms,  not  allowed,  except 

CONE-PICKS, 

materials  and  description  of 

CONTRACTORS, 

to  be  enjoined  to  secrecy  in  regard  to  guns,  &c 

COOKING-UTENSILS, 

for  boats  on  armed  expeditions 

COOPERING, 

never  to  be  done  in  magazines 

CORRESPONDENCE, 

routine  of,  between  ordnance  officers  and  the  Bureau 
CREWS, 

the  stationing  and  exercising  of 

to  be  exercised  in  the  use  of  small-arms 

to  be  instructed  in  their  duties  by  division  officers. . . 

distribution  of,  for  each  class  of  guns 

qualifications  of,  to  be  known,  prior  to  assignment,  &c. 

of  pivot  and  other  guns,  distribution  and  arms  of. ... 

of  broadside  guns,  stations  and  gun-numbers  of 

when  assembled  at  quarters  for  inspection 


PART 

PAGB 

1 

5 

1 

5 

1 

5 

1 

5 

1 

5 

1 

5 

1 

6 

1 

6 

1 

6 

1 

6 

1 

6 

1 

14 

1 

25 

1 

25 

1 

26 

1 

90 

1 

90 

1 

95,   96 

1 

97-100 

1 

102 

1 

102 

3 

5 

3 

6 

3 

7 

3 

32 

3 

33 

3 

47 

3 

51 

1 

62 

3 

85 

3 

88 

3 

89 

1 

90 

3 

31 

3 

79 

3 

4 

2 

7 

1 

10 

3 

7 

1 

3 

1 

5 

1 

8 

1 

16 

1 

17 

1 

21 

1 

35 

1 

36 

ARTICLE* 

12 
13 
14 
15 
16 
17 
18 
19 

20 

21 

22 

65 

102 

103 

104-107 

330 

331 

359-368 

370-383 

390 

392 

16 

19 
20 

58 

60 

126 

146 


243 

271 
271 
271 

329 

51 
256 
9 
14 

I  44 
22-24 


12 

31 

78-81 

83 

101 

152 

156 


INDEX. 


CREWS, 
exercisin0"  at  broadside-guns 

PAKT 
1 

PAGK 

39 

ARTICLES 

169 

temporary  absences  at  exercises  lio\v  supplied 

1 

43 

217    218 

respective  duties  of,  when   exercising   broadside-  ) 
trims                                                                          C 

1 

49 

219-229 

of  guns,  directions  as  to  shifting  places  of  

1 

56 

233 

of  guns,  directions  as  to  changing  sides,  or  manning  [ 
one  side  only  j 

1 

57 

235 

instructions  to  bo  given  to  for  quick  firin°" 

1 

58 

238  239 

of  pivot-ffims   stations  and  "Tin-numbers  of 

1 

62 

243 

of  the  °TIIIS  of  monitors  the  duties  of     

1 

109-112 

44)l-435 

of  mortars  with  their  titles   &c 

1 

113 

444 

of  boat-howitzers,  with  their  stations  and  duties  .... 
CUTLASSES, 
how  to  bo  stamped  

2 
3 

13 
79 

21 
258 

CYLINDERS, 
white  alone  to  be  used  in  future  

1 

9 

39 

materials  sizes  and  marks  of 

57 

181 

the  makinf  of,  Jind  patterns  for  

3 

58 

182-184 

for  salutin01  charges                 ... 

3 

58 

185 

preservation  of,  from  moths  

3 

59 

187 

D. 

DAHLGREN  RIFLED-CANNON, 
denominations  weight-5  charge5'  &c    of 

1 

101 

384 

prerequisites  to  the  proper  use  of  &c       .         

1 

102 

392 

cuttin^*  the  screw-holes  for     

3 

27 

38 

size  of  vents  in                                             ..... 

3 

34 

64 

DESCRIPTIVE  LISTS, 
of  guns  form  of  &c                                        

3 

3°> 

58 

DIES, 
for  markin0"  puns  description  of  &c       .        

3 

17 

28 

DISTANCES  OF  OBJECTS  AT  SEA, 
how  to  be  determined                                 '                .    . 

1 

81    82 

301   305 

1 

121 

480—483 

DISTINGUISHING-FLAGS, 
to  be  supplied  to  each,  division  of  boats  when 

2 

°6 

81 

yellow,  to  indicate  the  boat  with  medical  officers.  .  .  . 
DIVISIONS, 
of  Officers  and  ""uns  on  each  deck                              .  . 

2 
1 

26 

14 

83 
67    68 

Masters',  station  and  duties  of,  when  at  quarters,  &c. 
Powder,         "                 "                 "                 "          " 
Marines, 
Surgeons',     "                "                "                " 
Engineers',    "                 "                 "                 "          " 
Masters'   distribution  of  small-arms  for 

1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 

15 
15 
15 
15 
15 
25 

69 
70 
71 
72 
75 
101 

Masters'  duties  of  in  battle                                

1 

27 

111 

Engineers'    "         "         "         .        

1 

28 

119 

Powder          "         "         "                                     

1 

28  31 

120-137 

Surgeons'      "         "        "               

1 

31 

138,  139 

of  guns,  duties  of  Officers  Commanding,  in  action..  .  . 

1 
1 

31-33 
112 

140-151 
436-443 

DRESSES.    See  MAGAZINE  DRESSES. 
DRIFT, 
in.  rifle-^uns  always  to  the  right  &c      

1 

105 

406,  407 

DRILLS, 
company  and  battalion  recommended     .  . 

1 

5 

12 

for  howitzers  in  the  Held,  the  proper  kind  of  

? 

21 

46-49 

DRUMS, 
the  beats  on.  for  assembling  at  quarters.  .  . 

1 

36 

154 

INDEX. 


E. 

ELEVATING-?CREWS, 

description,  use  of,  &c 

for  rifle-guns,  description  and  use  of 

ENGINEERS-CHIEF, 

duties  of,  in  relation  to  tools  and  implements 

to  be  in  charge  of  their  divisions  when  at  quarters. . . 

duties  of,  when  at  general  quarters 

duties  of,  in  cases  of  fire  on  board  a  ship 

ENSIGNS, 

stations  and  duties  of,  when  at  quarters 

EQUIPMENTS, 

one  round  to  be  fired  to  ascertain  the  completeness  of 

when  deficiencies  exist  in.    duty  of  Commanding  / 
Officers   .' \ 

to  be  kept  dry,  and  salt  water  not  to  bo  used  in  cleaning 

for  broadside-guus 

for  pivot-guns 

for  mortars 

of  Captains  of  G  uns 

ESTIMATES, 

for  ordnance  materials,  to  be  made   by  Ordnance  ) 

Officers f 

EVOLUTIONS, 

of  howitzers  4n  the  field,  directions  as  to 

EXAMINATIONS, 

of  guns,  directions  as  to  making 

EXECUTIVE  OFFICERS, 

duties  of,  in  receiving,  stowing,  and  using  ordnance  ) 
stores ...    (" 

duties  of.  in  connection  with  the  batteries,  maga 
zines,  small-arms,  &c 

to  arrange  for  the  stowage  of  all  spare  articles,  and 
to  have  the  shot  and  shells  ready  for  action  .... 

duties  of,  when  salutes  are  to  be  fired 

to  have  cots  ready  for  lowering  the  wounded 

to  inspect  the  magazines,  before  receiving  powder. . . 

the  stations  of,  in  battle 

to  lead  the  boarders 

duties  of,  when  at  general  quarters 

to  understand  perfectly  the  use,  &c.,  of  fuzes 

to  understand  perfectly  the  use  of  Parrott  projec-  ) 
tiles j" 

to  certify  as  to  arms  lost  or  destroyed  in  action 

to  sign  the  Ordnance  Ledgers  of  vessels  returning  / 

home °  ^ 

EXERCISES, 

short  and  spirited  preferable;  indulgences  recom 
mended  for  those  who  excel  in 

of  crews,  in  the  use  of  small-arms   

of  crews,  at  general  quarters,  without  powder 

of  crews,  at  general  quarters,  with  powder 

of  crews,  at  broadside-guns 

of  broadside-guns  on  one  side  only 

general  remarks  on  the  manual 

of  broadside-guns,  on  both  sides  at  once, 

of  pivot-guns,  with  orders  and  mode  of  executing 

of  pivot-guns,  notes  upon 

for  alarms  of  fire  on  board  ship 

for  boat-howitzers 

for  boat-howitzers,  stations,  &c.,  of  the  men 

for  boat-howitzers,  orders  and  mode  of  executing.  . . . 

for  howitzers   on   field-carriages,    stations   of  'the 
crews,  orders  and  mode  of  manoeuvring 


PART 

PAGS 

1 

83 

1 

105 

1 

9 

1 

1C 

1 

28 

1 

99 

1 

16 

1 

4 

1 

4 

1 

11 

1 

33 

1 

61 

1 

114 

3 

77 

3 

3 

2 

21 

3 

32-35 

1 

G 

1 

7 

1 

7 

7 

7 

7 

14 

18 

27 

90 

1 

102 

3 

6 

3 

6 

1 

3 

1 

5 

1 

38 

1 

39 

1 

39 

1 

40-54 

1 

55-57 

58 

1 

63-73 

1 

74-88 

1 

99 

2 

11 

2 

13 

2 

14-18 

2 

19,  20 

ARTICLES 

307 
408 

35 
75 
119 

381 

76 

4 
5 

48 

148 

242 

445 

249 


47 
57-67 

23 
24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

66 

90 

108 

330 

390 

19 

20 


12 

167 

1G8 

1G9 

203-229 

231-235 

236 

244-254 

256-313 

383 

20 

21 

22-36 

37-43 


INDEX. 


F. 

FIELD-CARRIAGES, 

for  howitzers,  of  what  they  consist 

moderating  the  recoil  of,  on  smooth  ground 

FILLING, 

shells,  directions  as  to 

cartridges,  directions  as  to 

FIRES, 

to  be  put  out,  when  preparing  for  action 

alarm  of,  given  when  the  men  are  not  at  quarters. . . . 

taking  place  when  at  anchor  in  port 

FIRING, 

of  one  round  directed,  to  see  that  the  gun  equip 
ments  are  complete,  &c 

charges  for  "distant,"  "ordinary,"  and  "near,"  the 
relative  proportions  of,  to  be  preserved,  &c 

for  target  practico,  directions  as  to 

quarterly  reports  of,  to  be  prepared  and  forwarded.. . 

salutes,  directions  as  to 

quick,    or  with  2   shot,  to  be  determined  by  the 
Commanding  Officers,  &c 

two  loaded  shells  together,  disapproved 

grape-.-hot,  the  proper  occasions  for 

canister,  the  proper  occasions  for 

shrapnell,  the  proper  occasions  for 

afc  boats,  within  point  blank  range 

at  sea,  general  directions  as  to 

at  will,  directions  as  to 

in  succession,  directions  as  to 

quick,  "  "     . . . . 

direct,  "     

ricochet,  "  "     

concentration  of,   "  "     

solid  shot  from  rifled  guns 

mortars  against  the  wind,  precautions  required 

boat-howitzers  point  blank,  breech  sights  not  required 

amount  of,  for  each  vent,  directions  upon 

FIREMEN, 

part  of  the  Engineer  Division  when  at  quarters 

at  quarters,  the  selection  and  duties  of 

the  call  for,  to  repair  to  the  spar-deck,  and  duties  of. . 

duties  of,  in  preparing  for  the  use  of  broadside-guns. . 

FlRE-BlLLS, 

to  be  prepared  as  soon  as  crews  are  on  board 

FIRE-BUCKETS. 

materials  of,  &c 

FIRE-TUBS, 

materials  of,  &c 

FlRE-WORKS, 

how  and  where  to  be  stowed 

a  list  of,  to  be  furnished  Commanding  Officers 

boxes  for,  their  exterior  di  tensions,  &c 

FLAGS, 

distinguishing,  each  division  of  boats  to  have 

yellow,  to  indicate  the  boats  with  Medical  Officers. . . 

red,  to  indicate  the  handling  of  powder 

FLASH- PANS, 

description  and  use  of 

FRICTION-MATCHES.     See  MATCHES,  FRICTION. 
FUZES, 

special  attention  to  be  paid  to  the  condition  of,  &c.. . . 

not  to  be  shifted  nor  shortened,  except 

the  times  of,  to  be  governed  by  Commanding  Officers 

construction  and  composition  of 


PART 

PAGE 

2 

10 

2 

22 

3 

44 

3 

51 

1 

39 

1 

97 

1 

98 

] 

4 

1 

4 

1 

4 

1 

5 

1 

7 

1 

26 

1 

76 

1 

76 

1 

76 

1 

76 

1 

80 

1 

84 

1 

85 

1 

85 

1 

85 

1 

85 

1 

85 

1 

86-88 

1 

103 

1 

119 

2 

16 

3 

33 

1 

16 

1 

19 

1 

37 

1 

40 

1 

3,  97 

3 

76 

3 

76 

1 

10 

3 

51 

55 

2 

26 

2 

26 

3 

52 

0 

70 

1 

5 

1 

5 

1 

26 

1 

89 

ARTICLM 

19 
60 

108,  109 
147 

168 
371 
374 


10,   11 

14 
26 

107 

269 

271 

274 

275 

294 

310-313 

314 

315 

316 

317 

318 

319-323 

398 

465 

27 

61 

75 
95 

163-165 
176 

2,  370 

244 

243 

42 

146 

167 

81 
83 
157 

219 


16 
17 
106 
324 


INDEX. 


FUZES, 
construction  of,  not  to  be  explained  to  foreigners,  &c. 
tiroes  of  burnin0"  and  use  of 

PART 
1 
1 

PAGE 

89 

89 

ARTICUI8 

325 

326 

shortening  manner  of  doin°"  it  

1 

89 

327 

1 

90 

328 

percussion,  nor  concussion,  none  yet  for  spherical  ) 
shells             ) 

1 

90 

329 

tiroes  and  lengths  of   sec  Appendix  B  

1 

90 

332 

percussion  how  to  obtain  the  best  effects  from     .    .  . 

1 

90 

333 

time  not  reliable  in  rifle-°"uns      

1 

91 

334 

percussion,  and  time,  when  to  be  used  on  rifle-guns.  . 
for  mortar^  description  and  use  of      

1 
1 

104 
122 

399-402 
480-491 

45 

113   114 

proportions  of  fot*  the  different  times  of  

3 

46 

121 

of  5"  times,  to  be  ready  for  spherical  shells,  if  re-  ) 
ouired  for  immediate  use   &c                        .        .  .  f 

3 

46 

122 

the  different  kinds  of,   to  ba  separately  and  dis-  j 
tinctly  packed  arid  marked                              .         f 

3 

47 

125 

FUZE-WRENCHES, 

3 

77 

246 

^i 
GAUGE?, 
for  shot  and  shell  of  rifled  cannon  

1 

101 

386 

cylinder,  for  examining  guns,  description  and  use  of 
chamber,              "              "              " 
star,                     "              "              "                 " 
trunnion,              "               "              " 
vent,                                     " 
for  inspection  of  shot  and  shell  with  their  uses    .... 

3 
3 

3 

3 
3 
3 

8,  18 
9,18 
9,  18 
14,  19 
15,  18 
36 

28,  29 
28,  29 
28,  29 
28,  29 
28,29 
70-74 

for  shot  and  shell 

3 

39 

88-90 

GENERAL-QUARTERS, 
Mondays  to  be  set  apart  for  unless 

1 

2 

calls  for  assemblin0*  at                                       .... 

1 

36,  37 

154-166 

preparations  for  exercises  at,  without  powder  

1 

38 

167 

preparations  for  exercises  at  with  powder 

1 

39 

168 

GRAPE-SHOT, 
the  proper  occasions  for  the  use  of                      .        .  . 

1 

76 

271-273 

dimensions,  weight,  &c  ,  of     

3 

40 

92 

GRAPNELS, 
for  boats  description  and  use  of    

3 

70 

221 

GRAVIMETRIC  DENSITY, 
of  powder  what  it  is  and  ought  to  be  

3 

48 

132 

GRAVITY,  SPECIFIC, 
of  powder  

3 

48 

133 

GRIOLET-PURCHASE, 
the  use  of  

1 

129 

507,  508 

a  detailed  description  of                                        . 

3 

68 

213 

GROMMETS, 
over  elongated  projectiles  prohibited                     . 

1 

103 

396 

GROMMET-MUZZLE-LASHINGS, 
the  description  and  use  of 

^ 

76 

245 

GUNS, 
not  to  be  dismounted,  nor  struck  below,  unless,  &c.  .  . 
charges  of,  to  be  drawn,  on  entering  friendly  ports.  . 
to  be  examined  by  Division  Officers 

1 

1 
1 

6 
6 

8 

18 
21 
32 

when  about  to  be  struck  below,  or  prepared  for  ) 
transportation,  directions  as  to   j 

1 

10 

46 

to  be  kept  dry  ;  salt  water  not  to  be  used  in  cleaning 
when  ordered  to  be  drawn,  precautions  to  be  taken.  . 
numberino'  and  arrangement  of  on  each  deck     

1 
1 
1 

11 
11 
14 

48 
52 

67 

distribution  of  crews  for  each  class  of                       •  • 

1 

16 

78-80 

crews   of,    their   qualifications   to   be  ascertained,  ) 
prior  to  assignment  to  .                                        .  .  i 

1 

17 

83 

10 


INDEX. 


GUNS, 

the  selection  and  examination  of  Captains  of 

distribution  of  crews  and  arras  for  the 

elevation  of,  to  be  directed  by  Commanding  Officers.. 

not  to  be  kept  loaded  longer  than  necessary 

housing  lower  deck,  how  to  be  done 

broadside,  exercises  of,  objects  to  be  attained 

broadside,  crews  of,  directions  as  to  shifting  places. . 

broadside,  the  firing  of,  when  partially  run  in 

fighting  both  sides  at  once,  directions  as  to 

when  all  are  to  be  manned 

quick  firing  of,  directions  as  to  

pivot,  words  of  command,  and  mode  of  execution.  . . . 

pivot,  moving  them  from  one  end  of  the  vessel  to 
the  other 

not  to  bo  loaded  with  two  shells,  nor  two  shots,  { 
except J 

loading  with  shells,  great  attention  required 

elevating  or  depressing  them,  directions  as  to 

elevating  screws  for,  directions  for  their  use,  &c 

training  of,  general  directions  upon 

to  be  kept  ready  for  use,  in  time  of  war 

loading  with  maximum  charges,  &c.,  in  time  of  war. . 

rifled,  must  be  kept  free  from  sand,  dirt,  &c 

rifled,  description  of  the  sights  of 

getting  them  in  on  covered  decks,  how  ttv  be  done.. . 

taking  them  in  over  all,  how  to  be  done 

getting  them  out  through  ports,  how  to  be  done 

mounting  or  dismounting  them  on  covered  decks, 
with  the  Griolet-purchase 

throwing  them  overboard,  mode  of  execution 

secrecy  in  the  manufacture  of,  strictly  required .... 

inspection  and  proof  of,  directions  as  to 

proof  charges  for  shot  and  shell 

water-proof  of 

marking  them,  directions  as  to 

trial,  extreme  proof  of,  directions  as  to 

Dahlgren,  cutting  the  screw-holes  of  the 

sights  of,  the  manner  of  adjusting 

preservation  of,  their  stowage,  &c 

shot  and  shell,  how  to  be  denominated 

condemnations  of,  not  allowed,  except 

when  about  to  be  put  on  board  ship 

when  shipped  for  transportation  only 

of  all  vessels  returning  from  cruises  to  be  carefully 
examined,  &c 

descriptive  lists  of,  forms  tor,  &c 

to  be  frequently  examined  for  cracks  or  defects 

Dahlgren,  the  sizes  of  vents  in 

all  accidents  to,  to  be  reported  in  detail 

smooth-bore,  service  charges  for 

rifled,  service  charges  for 

cylinders  for,  directions  as  to  making,  &c 

breechings  for,  their  materials  and  sizes 

GUNS-BROADSIDE.     See  BROADSIDE-GUNS. 
GUN-CARRIAGES, 

implements,  and  names  of  the  parts  of  common  trucl 

names  of  the  parts  of  peculiar  to  the  Marsilly 

directions  as  to  shifting  trucks 

the  construction  of,  directions  concerning 

GUN-GEAR, 

with  directions  as  to  breechings,  falls,  blocks,  &c. . . . 
GUNNERS, 

general  and  special  duties  of 


PAET 

PAQB 

1 

18 

1 

21 

1 

26 

1 

46 

1 

54 

1 

55 

1 

56 

1 

57 

1 

58 

1 

58 

1 

58 

1 

63-72 

1 

72 

1 

75 

1 

76 

1 

78 

1 

83 

1 

88 

1 

94 

1 

96 

1 

103 

1 

104 

1 

128 

1 

129  - 

1 

129 

1 

129 

1 

131 

3 

4 

3 

8-21 

3 

22 

3 

23 

3 

23 

3 

24-20 

3 

27 

3 

27-29 

3 

30-32 

3 

30 

3 

31 

3 

31 

3 

31 

3 

32 

3 

33 

3 

34 

3 

34 

3 

35 

3 

53 

3 

54 

3 

57,  58 

3 

66 

1 

45 

1 

45 

1 

60 

3 

65 

o 

66,  67 

1 

9-12 

84 

101 

106 

203 

230 

231.  232 

233 

234 

236 

237 

2:18 

244-254 

255 

268 

270 

287 

307,  3C8 

321,  322 

346-358 

369 

395 

404 

504 

505 

506 

507,  508 

509 

8-11 

26-30 

31 

32 

33 

34-36 

38 

39,  40 

41-58 

47 

51 

52-55 

56 

57 

58 

61 

64 

67 

160 

161 

181-185 

208 


202 
202 
241 
207 

208-212 
36-5G 


INDEX. 


11 


GUNNERS, 

PART 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 

1 

1 
1 
1 
1 

1 

1 

1 

1 
1 
1 

3 
3 
3 

1 

1 

3 

O 

3 

1 
1 
1 

1 
1 

3 
1 

1 
1 
1 
2 
2 
i> 
2 

2 
2 
2 

2 
2 

o 
2 

PACK 

9 
9 
10 
10 

11 
11 

11 
11 
11 
11 

11 
11 

12 
13 
29 
90 
5 
6 
45 
51 

11 
15,  17 

71 

74 
75 

18 
35 
40 

48 
54 

77 
44 

5 
90 
90 
3 
4-9 
10-24 
11 
11 
15 
1G 
16 
17,  18 
18 
19-21 

ARTICLES 

36 
37 

4G 
47 
48 

49 

50 
51 
52 
53 

54 

55 

56 
70 
123 
330 
17 
19,  20 
110 
156 

54 
70,  82 

224 

237 
238 

84 
152 
174 

214 
230 

24S 
201 

13 

328 
342 

1 
6-18 
19-68 
20 
21 
27 
28,  29 
30 
31-35 
3G 
37-43 

to  keep  the  guns  and  equipments  as  dry  as  passible.  . 
discovering  articles  injured,  to  ask  in  writing  for  a  [ 

duties  of,  when  magazines  or  shell-rooms  are  opened, 
duties  of,  when  opening  powder-tanks  

sick  or  absent,  their  duties  to  be  performed  by  a  } 

to  keep  minute  books  of  all  expenditures,  &c.,  and  ) 

to  receive  all  ordnance  stores  except  the  ammunition, 
responsible  for  all  deficiencies  in  ordnance  stores,  &c. 

GUNNERS'  MATES, 

GUNNERS-QUARTER.     See  QUARTER-GUNNERS. 
GUNS-  PIVOT.     See  PivoT-Guxs. 
GUN-POWDER.     See  POWDER. 
GUNS-RIFLED.     See  RIFLED-CANNON. 
GUN-SLINGS, 

H. 

HANDSPIKES, 

HANDSPIKE-MEN, 

duties  of,  in  preparing  for  exercise  of  broadside-guns 
duties  of,  when  exercising  broadside-guns,  on  one  ) 

HARNESS-CASKS, 

HATCHWAYS, 

HOWITZERS, 

Borrman  fuzes  are  fitted  for  the  12  and  24  pdrs  

the  number,  &c.,  of,  for  boats,  assigned  by  Bureau  .  .  . 

embarkation  of,                                                  •  •  •  

on  field-  carriages,  the  exercises  of,  commands,  &c. 

21 


12 


INDEX. 


HOWITZERS, 

'ART 

2 
o 

9 

3 

PAttE 

21-24 

23 
25-27 
54 

ARTICLES 

44-G8 
67 
69-88 
164 
1G5 

28 

148 
202 
242 
445 
9L 
35 

239 

2G-30 

68-87 
186 

28 

28,  29 
28,  29 
70-78 

20 
20 

271 
271 

271 

235 

200 
69-88 
81 
220 
243 
345 

84 
152 

172 

208-229 
230 

boat,  dimensions  of  boxes  for  the  ammunition  of  
HYDRAULIC  PUMP, 

-1 

3 

1 

1 
1 
1 

2 

3 
3 

3 

3 

3 
3 

3 
1 

3 
3 

3 

3 
2 
1 
3 
1 
1 

1 
1 

1 

1 
1 

55 

17 

33 
45 
61 
114 
29 
24 

75 

8-21 
30-38 
50 

8-17 

18-21 
12-18 

'•'ft    °  7 
ob,  oi 

7 
6 

84 
86 
8G 

74 

63 
25-27 
17 
70 
G2 
94 

18 
35 

40 

47-53 
54 

I. 

IMPLEMENTS, 

IMPRESSION-TAKERS, 

INSPECTION', 

of  shot  and  shell,                        

INSPECTING-TNSTRUMENTS,                                                 . 
for  examining  and  proving  guns,  names  and  uescnp-  ) 

for  examining  and  proving  guns,  the  use  oi  

for  examining  shot  and  shell,  with  the  use  of,  £c  
INVOICES, 
of  all  ordnance  stores,  to  be  duly  given  and  taken.  .  . 

K. 

1L. 

LACQUERS, 

for  iron  ordnance,  composition  of  

LADLES. 
to  be  made  according  to  patterns,  and  not  used  for  ) 

LAMPS,                                                                         f 

for  magazines,  the  proper  airangement,  &o.,  oi  
LANDING, 

LANDSMEN, 

LANTERNS, 

LEVERMEN, 

stations  and  numbers  of,  for  pivot-guns  
LIGHTS,                                      .     . 

LOADERS, 

for  broadside-guns,  stations  and  numbeis  Oi  
duties  of,  when  preparing  for  exercise  at  the  b 

duties  of,  at  the  manual  exercise  of  the  broadsi   e-  / 

duties  of,  when  housing  lower-deck  ^uns  

INDEX. 


LOADERS, 

duties  of,  when  firing  quick 

duties  of,  when  shifting  breechings  in  action 

for  pivot-guns,  stations,  &c.,  of 

to  keep  within  the  ports,  as  much  as  possible 

LOG-BOOK, 

the  time  required  for  complete  preparation  for 
action,  &c.,  to  be  duly  noted  in  the 


M. 

MAGAZINES, 

to  be  carefully  cleaned,  &c.,  before  receiving  powder. 

coopering  never  to  be  done  in  the 

when  opened,  precautions  to  be  taken  against  fire  .  . . 

passing  powder  from,  directions  as  to 

for  mortars,  directions  concerning 

on  shore,  the  inspection  and  stowage  of  powder  in..  . 

on  shore,  directions  as  to  keeping  them  dry,  &c 

the  proper  construction  of,  on  board  ship 

the  proper  arrangement  of  the  cocks  for 

the  proper  mode  of  lighting 

the  proper  mode  of  stowing 

how  to  ascertain  the  dryness  of 

the  proper  ventilation  of 

MAGAZINE-DRESSES, 

the  materials  of. 

MAGAZINE-SCREWS, 

the  use  and  description  of 

MANOEUVRES, 

for  boat-howitzers 

MANUAL  EXERCISES, 

of  broadside-guns,  on  one  side  only 

general  remarks  on 

of  broadside-guns,  on  both  sides  at  once 

of  pivot-guns,  with  commands,  &c 

notes  and  suggestions  upon  the 

of  monitors,  with  words  of  command,  &c 

of  mortars,  with  words  of  command,  &c 

MARINES, 

their  stations  when  at  quarters 

their  stations  for  repelling  boarders 

landing  them  for  exercise  or  service 

MARKING, 

guns,  directions  as  to 

small-arms,  directions  as  to 

MARSILLY-G  UN-CARRIAGES, 

names  of  parts  peculiar  to 

shifting  trucks  of,  directions  as  to 

MASTERS, 

to  have  all  articles  in  their  divisions  ready  for  use  / 

&c j- 

divisions,  where  stationed  in  action 

divisions,  distribution  of  small-arms  for 

duties  of,  at  general  quarters 

duties  of,  in  cases  of  fire  on  board  ship 
MASTERS-AT-ARMS, 

duties  of,  at  general  quarters. 
MATES, 

stations  and  duties  of,  when  at  quarters 
MATCHES — FRICTION, 

not  allowed  on  board  ship 

MEASURING-STAFF, 

for  examining  guns,  description  a.nd  use  of 


69 
59 
62 
74 


10 

11 

41-43 

119,  120 

49 

50 

60-62 

62 

63 

63 

64 

64 

69 
69 
10-24 

46-54 
55-57 
58-60 
61-73 

74-88 

109-112 

115-118 

15 
93 
25-28 


,18 


ABTICLK 

238,  23: 
240 
243 
260 


28 

44 

50 

181-189 

457-470 

136-139 

141,  142 

188-198 

199 

200 

201 

205 

206 

216 
215 
19-68 

203-229 
231-235 

242-255 
256-323 
420-435 
446-456 

71 
339 

59-88 


202 
241 

54 

59 
01 

11-118 
80 

137 
76 
22 
28,  29 


INDEX. 


MEDICAL-OFFICERS, 

ART] 
1 

1 

3 
1 

1 
1 
1 

1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 

3 

1 

1 
2 

3 
3 
3 

1 

1 
1 
2 

3 

1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
] 
1 
1 

PAGK 

15 

14 

16 

8,  18 
3 

108 
109-112 
112 

113 
114 

115-118 
119.  120 
119' 
1-20,  121 
122 
122 
122 
123 
124 
124,  125 
126 
71 

59 

5 
21 
25 
55 
79 
80-82 

20 

45 
108 

10 

51 

14 
14 
14 
14 
14 
15 
15 
15 
15 
15 

AKTICL* 

72 

66 

76 

28,  29 
2 

415-418 
420-435 
436-443 

444 
445 
4-16-456 
457-470 
465 
471-479 
484,  485 
483-491 
492,  493 
494-499 
500 
501,  502 
503 
225 

187 

12 
101 
7G 
1G6 
258 
262-269 

98 

202 
415 
19 

151 

65 
66 
66 
66 
67,  68 
69 
69 
70 
71 
72 

MIDSHIPMEN, 
stations    in   action,    when   Aids    to    Commanding  { 

stations  in  action,  when  not  Aids  to  Commanding  ) 
OFfipprs                                            ; 

MIRRORS, 

MONDAYS, 

MONITORS, 

MORTARS, 

exercise  of,  with  words  of  command,  and  execution.  . 
magazines  and  shell-rooms  for,  description,  &c.,  of.  .  . 
when  fired  against  the  wind,  precautions  required.  .  . 

trunnion-sights  lor,  description  and  use  01  
MOTHS, 

MUSKETS, 

MUSKETEERS, 

M. 

NOMENCLATURE, 
of  common  truck,  and  Marsilly  carriages  

of  boat-howitzers  

of  condemned  powaer,  can  UB  mau^  u 
0. 

CEthe  stations,  &c  .,  of,  at  quarters—  the  Captain  .  .  ....  . 
u                                              the  Executive  Office 
u                                              Midshipmen  as  Aid 
u                                              Signal  Officer  
u                                              Division  Officers  .  . 
tt                                            Master..  
it                it                            Boatswain         .... 

a                <t                              Powder-division... 
u                u               «             Marine-division.  .  . 
tt               u              »            Surgeon'  s-division. 

INDEX. 


15 


OFFICERS, 

the  stations,  &c.,  of,  at  quarters — Chaplain 

"  "  "  Paymaster 

"  "  "  Engineer's-division . 

"  "  Miscellaneous 

assignment  of,  to  the  divisions  of  toarders .... 

in  charge  of  powder-divisions,  the  duties  of 

in  charge  of  gun-divisions,  the  duties  of 

of  the  watch,  their  duties  in  time  of  war,  &c 

of  boats  armed  for  service,  the  duties 

duties  of,  in  preparing  the  boat-howitzers 

QFFICERS-IN-CHARGE-OF-DlVISIOKS, 

to   be   thoroughly  conversant  with   the   exercise,  ) 

management,  &c.,  of  the  guns j 

to  inspect  thoroughly,  when  called  to  quarters 

to  instruct  their  men  fully  in  their  duties 

to  examine  weekly,  &c.,  their  guns  and  attachments. 

the  stations  of,  at  quarters 

to  teach  the  men  how  to  point  the  guns 

duties  of,  in  case  of  fire  on  board  ship 

OFFICERS-OF-POWDER-DlVISION'S, 

to  instruct  their  men  fully  in  all  their  duties,  &c 

duties  of,  in  case  of  fire  on  board  ship 

OFFICERS,  PETTY.     See  PETTY-OFFICERS. 
OILS, 

linseed,  weight  of  a  gallon  of 

sperm,          "         "  .      "         

neat's-foot,  "         "         "         

OLIVE-PASTE, 

the  composition  of 

ORDINARY  SEAMEN, 

distribution  of,  when  at  quarters 

ORDNANCE-INSTRUCTIONS, 

obedience  to,  required  from  all  on  board  ship 

ORDNANCE-LEDGERS, 

to  be  signed  by  the  Executive  Officer,  or  Gunner, 

and  the  Commanding  Officer. 

ORDNANCE-OFFICERS, 

to  explain  the  use,  &c.,  of  fuzes 

duties  of;  to  have  charge  of  all  ordnance  and  ord 
nance  stores,  at  Navy  Yards,  &c 

enjoined  to  secrecy,   in    relation  to   the   mode   of 
manufacturing  guns,  &c 

to  give  no  official  opinions  to  inventors,  or  others  .  . . 

to  furnish  ordnance  and   ordnance    stores,   in   ac- 
cordance  with  the  allowance  tables,  except . 

pecuniarily  responsible  for  the  loss  of  ordnance 
stores,  &c f 

routine,  &c.,  of  their  correspondence  with  the  Bureau 

to  make  fortnightly  examinations  of  all  guns.  &c.,  [ 
under  their  charge   } 

duties  of,  when  guns  are  to  be  placed  on  board  ship. 

duties  of.  when  guns  are  to  be  shipped  for  trans- 
portation 

to  examine  carefully  all  the  guns  of  vessels  return- 
ing  from  cruises 

to  furnish   Commanding   Officers  of  vessels  with 
descriptive  lists  of  their  batteries , 

to  furnish  Commanding  Officers  of  vessels  with  im 
pressions  of  the  vents  of  their  guns 

duties  of,  when  supplying  ships  with  shells 

to  examine  the  shell-houses,  and  the  condition  of 
the  shells,  every  fortnight 

to  inspect  the  powder-houses  every  week,  #c 


PART 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 

2 
2 


15 

1G 

16 

16 

18 

28-31 

31-33 

94 

3 

11 


90 

3-7 

4 
4 
5 

Q 

7 

31 

31 

31 

32 
32 

33 
45 
46 
49 


73 

74 

75 

76 

90 

120-137 

140-151 

347-352 

2 

20 

29 

30 
3] 

32 

67,  68 
283 
376,  377 

33 

378,  379 


271 
271 
271 

271 

81 
1 

20 

3BO 
1-25 

8-11 

10 

16 

17 

22-24 
49 
52-55 

56 

57 
58 

60 
110 
119 
136 


16 


INDEX 


ORDNAKCB-OPFICEES, 

duties  of,  when  powder  is  to  be  sent  on  board  ) 
ship [ 

reports  to  be  made  by,  when  supplying  or  receiving  I      . 
powder f 

instructions  to,  as  to  marking  small-arms 3      79 

ORDNANCE-STORES, 

surveys  on,  when  to  be  ordered 1      4 

the  receiving,  stowing,  and  expenditure  of,   to  be  [ 

attended  to  by  Executive  Officers }    j 

at  Navy  Yards,  to  be  in  charge  of  Ordnance  Officers,  j  3  3 
the  delivery  of,  to  the  Gunner,  and  his  responsibility.  3  5 
when  landed  from  ships,  directions  as  to  3  6 

P. 

PACKING-BOXES, 

to  be  preserved,  duly  accounted  for,  &c 3      71 

PAINTS, 

white,  the  composition  of. 3      83 

lead-color,  the  composition  of 3      84 

black,  the  composition  of 3      84 

for  tarpaulins,  the  composition  of. 3      84 

Brainard's,  the  composition  of 3      84 

PAPER-PARCHMENT, 

how  to  make  it,  and  its  use 3      88 

PARROTT-RIFLE  D-  C  ANNON, 

denominations,  weights,  charges,  &c.,  of ....     1      101 

the  full  charge  for ;  the  1 5  0-pdrs.  withdrawn  from)  ,  A9 

service j 

PARROTT-SHELLS, 

time-fuzes  for,  the  most  certain  of  ignition,  &c 1      91 

charges  for 1      101 

size  of  boxes  containing 1      107 

PASSING-BOXES. 

in  time  of  war,  to  have  charges  ready  for  passing  ) 

up  at  once [  \ 

putting  cartridges  from  the  magazine  into,  &c 1      44 

color  and  size  of  lettering  on 1      44 

empty,  the   handling   of,    when   returned   by   the  ) 

shoots \ 

empty,  fire-tubs  with  water,  to  be  placed  for 1      44 

materials,  sizes,  &c.,  of. 3      76 

how  to  be  painted 3      76 

PASSING-SCUTTLES.    See  Po \VDER-SCUTTLES. 

PAYMASTERS, 

the  stations  of,  when  at  quarters 1      16 

PERCUSSION-CAPS, 

the  proper  stowage  of 1      10 

for  small  arms,  will  be  furnished  from  Washington.         3      55 

PERCUSSION-FUZES, 

none  reliable  as  yet  for  spherical  shells  ...    1      90 

how  to  obtain  the  best  effects  from 1      90 

when  to  be  used  in  rifled  guns 1      104 

PETTY-OFFICERS, 

distribution  of,  when  at  quarters 1      16 

PICKET-BOATS, 

to  be  kept  out  in  direction  of  the  enemy 1      96 

PlKEMEN, 

of  whom  to  be  composed,  with  the  duties  of 1  19 

to  be  covered  by  Marines  with  fixed  bayonets 1  19 

the  calls  for  and  duties  of 1  37 

the  stations  of,  when  repelling  boarders 1  93 

to  be  exercised  with  the  single-stick  and  sword 1  93 


ARTICLE 

146 

152 
258 

6 
23 

2,3 

17 
18 


223 

271 
271 
'271 
271 
271 

271 

384 

387 

334 
385 
411 

38 

195 

196,  197 

198 

199 
240 
241,  242 


74 

41 
168 

329 
333 
399 

77-81 
364 

91,92 
94 

160,  165 
339-341 
344 


INDEX. 


17 


PlKES-BOARDING, 

to  be  near  each  gun  on  covered  decks 

number  allowed  for  each  pivot,  and  other  gun 

PILING, 

of  balls,  to  ascertain  the  number  of,  &c 

PISTOL-FEOGS, 

materials  and  description  of. 

PISTOLS, 

crews  to  be  exercised  in  the  use  of 

number  allowed  for  each  pivot,  and  other  gun 

to  be  kept  ready  for  the  use  of  the  boarders 

quantity  of  powder  in  the  cartridges  for , . 

how  to  be  stamped 

PlVOT-GUNS, 

when  practicable,  each  to  be  in  charge  of  an  Officer  { 
of  the  division,  &c } 

to  have  full  gun's-crews 

distribution  and  arms  for  crews  of 

equipments  and  implements  belonging  to 

stations,  and  gun-numbers  of  crews  of 

exercises  of,  with  commands,  and  the  mode  of  their  ) 
execution ) 

moving  them  from  one  end  of  the  vessel  to  the  other 

the  trunuion-sights  of,  with  their  use 

the  trunnion-sights  of,  a  description  of 

to  be  supplied  with  tangent-sights 

PLANTOU'S  COMPOSITIONS, 

for  preserving  iron  or  wood 

POINT-BLANK-RANGE, 

what  it  signifies,  &c 

PORTER'S- SCABBARD, 

a  description  of 

PORT-FIRES, 

not  to  be  used  when  firing  salutes 

POWDER, 

"saluting,"  to  be  used  when  firing  salutes 

charges  of,  how  to  be  distinguished 

loose,  never  to  be  carried  on  board  ship 

the  delivery  and  distribution  of,  at  quarters 

proper  kind  of,  for  rifled  cannon    

proof,  for  shot  and  shell  guns 

charges  of,  for  spherical  shells • 

classifications  of • 

size  of  the  grains  of,  and  initial  velocities,  &c 

gravimetric  density  of 

specific  gravity  of 

for  small-arms,  size  of 

differences  in  the  Army  and  Xavy  granulations^of. 

stowage,  &c.,  of,  in  powder-houses,   &c.,  directions  ' 
as  to 

a  statement  of,   to  be  furnished  to    Commanding 
Officers  of  vessels,  before  sailing,  &c 

filling  cartridges  with,  directions  as  to 

when  returned  from  ships,  directions  as  to 

condemned,  never  to  be  thrown  overboard,  &c 

samples  of,  to  be  forwarded  by  Ordnance  Officers,  &c. 

for  saluting,  may  be  purchased  abroad,  when 

may  be  transferred  to  vessels  remaining  on  a  for 
eign  station,  by  those  returning,  &c 

when  to  be  used,  though  not  regularly  inspected,  &c. 

putting  it  on  board  ship,  directions  as  to 

when  received  or  landed,  the  red  flag  to  be  hoisted. . 
moving  it  from  or  to  vessels,  precautions  required. . . 
quantity  of,  for  cartridges  for  small-arms 


19 
21 

41,42 

78 

5 

21 

40 

55 

79 


1      14 


17 
21 
61 

G2 

63-72 

72 
81 
71 
71 

85 
80 


7 

9 

10 

41-43 

102 

22 

44 

48 

48 

48 

48 

49 

49 

49,50 


93 
101 

95-97 
252 

12 

101 

179 

166 

258 

68 

80 
101 
242 
243 

244-254 

255 
299 
225 
226 

271 
291 
250 
26 

26 

39 

40 

180-189 

389 

31 

105 

129 

130,  131 

132 

133 

134 

135 

13G-145 

146 

147 

149,  150 
151 
152 
153 

154 

155 
156 
157 

158,  159 
166 


18 


INDEX 


POWDER-BARRELS, 

directions  as  to  stowage  of 

should  be  turned  once'in  three  months,  &c 

POWDER-Dl  VISIONS, 

stations  of,  when  in  action 

duties  of,  at  general  quarters 

on  board  monitors,  their  duties 

POWDER-HOUSES, 

to  be  inspected  once  a  week,  &c 

directions  as  to  keeping  them  dty,  &c 

POWDER-MEN, 

duties  of,  in  preparing  for  the  use  of  broadside-guns. 

duties  of,  at  the  manual  exercise  of  broadside-guns,  ) 
on  one  side  only ^ 

stations.  £0.,  of,  for  pivot-guns 

POWDER-SCUTTLES, 

careful  men  to  be  selected  for  attending 

directions  as  to  use  of,  in  passing  cartridges 

position  of,  on  each  deck 

to  be  provided  with  water-tight  tompions 

flap-holes  in  magazine  screens  to  be  provided  for 

when  guns  of  the  same  calibre  on  different  decks  / 

may  be  supplied  from  the  same f 

POWDER-TANKS, 

stowage  and  arrangement  of,  by  Gunners 

distinguishing  colors  and  marks  of 

when  opened,  precautions  required 

tables  of  capacities,  sizes,  &c.,  of 

PRECAUTIONS, 

in  time  of  war^  general  instructions  as  to 

to  be  observed,  in  the  use  of  rilled-guns 

to  be  observed,  in  the  use  of  small-arms 

PRIMERS, 

the  proper  stowage  of 

for  cannon,  directions  as  to  management  of 

for  cannon,  description,   use,  and  preservation  of, 
with  their  boxes,  &c 

PRIMER-BOXES, 

materials,  and  description  of 

PROFILE-BOARDS, 

for  examining  guns,  description  and  use  of 

PROJECTILES, 

for  Parrott-guns,  a  peculiar  kind,  &c 

for  riilcd-cannon,  are  shells,  shrapnel,  and  solid  ) 
shot j" 

rifled,  the  bases  of,  to  be  thickly  greased,  &c 

rifled,  uniformity  in  size  of,  requisite,  &c 

care  required  in  placing  them  in  the  'guns 

Parrott's,    size  of  boxes  containing.  '. 

Ilotchkiss's,     "          (;  " 

Shenkle's,         "          "  "         ', . , '. ', ', '.  ', '.  \ ', 

Dahlgron's,  "  "  " 

PROOF, 

of  naval-guns,  directions  as  to 

of  shot  and  shell-guns,  charges  for 

extreme,  of  trial-guns 

PROVISIONS, 

for  boats,  on  armed  expeditions 

PUMPMEN, 

the  selection  of,  &c 

when  to  be  in  two  divisions 

to  be  at  their  stations,  when  preparing  for  action.  &c. 
PUTTY, 

the  composition  of 


PAR 

PACK 

3 

49 

3 

50 

1 

15 

1 

28-31 

1 

112 

3 

49 

50 

1 

40 

1 

48 

1 

G2 

1 

18 

1 

41 

1 

<J3 

1 

43 

1 

43 

1 

43 

1 

9 

1 

9 

1 

11 

3 

54 

] 

94-9  G 

1 

105-1 

3 

82 

1 

10 

1 

77 

3 

56 

3 

78 

2 

13,  19 

1 

102 

1 

102 

1 

102 

1 

103 

1 

103 

1 

107 

1 

107 

1 

107 

107 

3 

8-21 

3 

22 

3 

24-26 

2 

7 

1 

20 

1 

20 

1 

39 

3 

83 

ARTICLE 

137-139 
145 

70 

120-137 
436,  443 

130-139 
141,  142 

175 
215 
243 

85 

181-189 

190-192 

191 

193 

194 


37 
39 
51 
162,  163 

345-369 

410 

270 

41 
276-280 

172-180 


251 
28,  29 

390 
391 

392 
396 
397 
411 
412 
413 
414 

26-3( 

31 

34-3 

13 

99 

100 

168 

271 


INDEX. 


19 


Q  U  ARTER-  G  UNNERS, 

the  stations  of,  at  quarters 

implements  for,  when  exercising  without  powder .... 

duties  of,  in  preparing  for  using  broadside-guns 

duties  of,  in  case  of  fire  on  board  ship 

duties  of,  iu  preparing  howitzers  for  boats 

duties  of,  in  disembarking  howitzers 

QUOINS  FOR  Guxs, 

the  arrangement  of. 


R. 

RAMMERS, 

materials,  sizes,  &c.,  of 

RANGES. 

for  shot-guns,  how  and  when  marked 

point-blank,  tiring  at 

for  shell-guns,  how  marked 

for  13-inch  mortars 

exceeding  1400  yards,  kind  of  fuzes  for,  &c 

RATTLES, 

use  and  description  of 

RECEIPTS, 

for  all  ordnance  materials,  to  be  duly  given  and  taken 
REPORTS, 

quarterly,  of  all  firing,  to  be  forwarded 

quarterly,  of  the  condition  of  the  armament,  &c.,  to 
be  prepared  and  forwarded 

twice  a  day,  to  bo  made  by  Gunners,  nature -of 

to  be  made  of  the  expenditures  of  ordnance  ma-  ) 
tcrials 

in  detail,  to  be  prepared  and  forwarded,  of  all  acci 
dents  to  guns 

to  be  forwarded  of  the  action,  &c.,  of  all  fuzes. . . . 

to  be  forwarded  by  Ordnance  Officers,  when  issuing  j 

or  receiving  powder ) 

REQUISITIONS, 

for  ordnance  materials,  to  be  made  by  Ordnance  ) 

Officers J 

RESPONSIBILITY, 

of  Officers,  for  loss  of  ordnance  stores , 

RETURNS, 

quarterly,  of  receipts  and  issues  of  ordnance,  to  be 
forwarded  by  Commanding  Officers 

quarterly,  to  be  rendered  by  Gunners 

REVOLVERS, 

number  of,  allowed  for  each  pivot  and  other  gun  . . . 

quantity  of  powder  in  the  cartridges  for 

how  to  be  stamped 

REWARDS, 

recommended  to  those  excelling  in  ordnance  exer 
cises  

RIPLED-CANNON, 

the  breech-sights  in  the  side  of,  with  their  use,  &c. .  . 

time-fuzes  very  unreliable  for 

denominations,  &c..  of  the  Parrott  and  Dahlgren 

the  bores  and  grooves  of,  to  be  carefully  cleaned,  &c. 

the  shells  in,  must  be  close  home  on  the  powder 

must  be  kept  free  from  sand,  dust,  &c 

projectiles  for,  to  be  uniform  in  size 

vents  of,  how  to  replace  old  ones 

sights  of,  description  and  use  of. 


PART 

PACK 

ARTICLE 

1 

17 

82 

1 

39 

167 

1 

40 

178 

1 

98 

377 

2 

11 

20 

2 

17 

31 

1 

83 

307 

3 

72 

221 

1 

79 

290 

1 

80 

294 

1 

80 

294 

1 

124,  125 

501,  502 

3 

47 

124 

3 

69 

217 

3 

7 

20 

1 

5 

14 

1 

5 

15 

1 

10 

47 

3 

4 

6 

3 

35 

67 

3 

47 

126 

3 

51 

152 

3 

3 

2 

3 

G 

19,20 

1 

5 

14 

1 

11 

55 

1 

21-24 

101 

3 

55 

161 

3 

79 

25 

1 

3 

2 

1 

81 

30. 

1 

91 

334 

1 

101 

384 

1 

102 

392 

1 

103 

393,  394 

1 

103 

395 

1 

103 

396 

1 

104 

403 

1 

104 

404 

20 


INDEX 


RlFLED-CANNON, 

all  arc  rifled  to  the  right 

precautions  required  in  the  use  of 

kind  of  fuzes  to  be  used  for  the  shells  of. 

table  of  charges  for 

rammer-heads  for,  made  of  composition. . 
RICOCHET, 

firing,  directions  as  to 

RIGGING-STOPPERS, 

description  and  use  of 

ROBINSON'S- WORMS, 

description  and  use  of 


SABOTS, 

for  shells,  dimensions,  &c.,  of 

SAILMAKERS, 

the  stations  of,  when  at  quarters 

SAIL-TRIMMERS, 

when  to  be  in  two  divisions,  and  the  stations  of. . . .  . 

when  to  be  in  three  divisions,     "  "         "   . . . . 

the  call  for  and  duties  of 

SALT- WATER, 

not  to  be  used  in  cleaning  guns  nor  equipments 

SALUTES, 

directions  as  to  firing 

precautions  required  when  firing 

powder  for,  may  be  purchased  abroad,  when 

old  bags  may  be  used  for  cylinders  for 

SCABBARDS, 

for  swords,  Porter's,  description  of 

for  bayonets,  materials,  size,  &c.,  of 

varnish  for,  its  composition 

SCALING-LADDERS, 

to  be  furnished  each  division  of  boats  landed  for 

service 

SCRAPERS, 

for  bottoms'  of  bores,  description  and  use  of. 

SCREENS.    See  MAGAZINE-SCREENS. 
SEAMEN, 

distribution  of,  when  at  quarters 

the  landing  of,  for  battle,  a  remote  contingency,  &c.  . 

the  landing  of,  for  exercise  or  service,  directions  ) 

as  to [ 

SEAMEN  ORDINARY.     See  ORDINARY- SEAMEN. 
SHELLS, 

loaded,  to  be  frequently  used  in  target  practice,  &c. . . 

precautions  required  in  filling 

stowage  of,  in  the  shell-rooms 

how  to  be  passed  up  for  use 

should  be  drawn,  if  loaded  more  than  24  hours 

loading  with,  directions  as  to 

in  battle,  proper  occasions  for  using 

getting  jammed  in  the  bore,  should  be  withdrawn. . . 

loading  with,  precautions  to  be  observed 

all  spherical,  fitted  with  time-fuzes,  except 

Parrott,  the  navy  time-fuze  the  most  certain  for 

Parrott,  charges  for 

for  riiled-cannon,  gauges  for 

for  rilled-guns,  to  be  close  home  on  the  powder 

preferable -for  light  artillery  in  the  field 

when  useful  in  boat-howitzers 

inspection  of,  with  instruments  to  be  used 


PART 
1 
1 

3 
3 

3 

1 


PAGE 

105 
105-107 

47 
54 

72 

85 
77 
73 


3  I  39 


79 
86 

•29 
74 


16 

22 

25-27 


4 

5 

10 

44 

46 

75 

75 

75 

76 

89 

91 

101 

101 

103 

22 

23 

37,38 


ARTICLK 
405 

410 

123,  124 
161 

227 

318 

247 
234 


91 
76 

96 
97 
162,  165 

48 

26 
53 
153 

185 

250 
257 
271 

91 
236 


77 
56 

69-88 


17 

45 

200 

204 

261-263 

265 

267 

270 

324 

334 

385 

386 

303,  394 

52 

64 

77-87 


INDEX. 


21 


SHELLS, 
gaupres,  and  dimensions  of  sabots  and  straps  for  .... 

PAK1 

PAGE 

39 

AHTICLH 

89-91 

}  reservation  of,  directions  as  to  piling,  painting,  &c..  . 
preparation  of,  for  service,  directions  as  to  

3 

43 

44-47 

98-103 
104-128 

filling,  directions  as  to  

3 

44 

108 

emptying  directions  as  to     . 

3 

46 

116 

boxes  for,  dimensions  and  areas  occupied  by.  .  . 

3 

47 

127  128 

loaded,  directions  as  to  putting  them  on  board  ship  .  . 
SHELL-BAGS, 
to  be  preserved  and  returned  into  store  

3 

1 

52 
10 

157 
43 

SHELL-DIVISIONS, 

on  board  monitors  the  duties  of 

1 

i   112 

436-443 

SHELL-GUNS, 
proof-charges  for  

3 

92 

31 

denominated  by  the  diameters  of  their  bores  

3 

30 

47 

cylinders  for,  directions  as  to  makiii"1,  &c 

3 

57,  53 

181-185 

SHELL-MEN*, 
stations  and  numbers  of,  for  broadside-guns  

1 

152 

duties  of,  in  preparing  for  exercise  of  broadside-guns, 
duties  of,  at  the  exercise  of  broadside-guns.  

1 
1 

40 
48 

173 
212 

duties  of,  when  housin^  lower-deck  <nms 

1 

54 

230 

stations,  &c.,  of,  for  pivot-guns  

1 

62 

243 

SHELL-ROOMS, 
to  be  thoroughlv  cleaned,  dried,  and  aired 

1 

7 

28 

when  opened,  precautions  to  be  taken  against  fire.  .  . 
for  morturs,  directions  concerning 

1 
1 

11 
119.  120 

50 
457-470 

the  position  and  construction  of,  on  board  ships  . 

3 

64 

202-204 

to  ascertain  the  drvness  of  . 

3 

64 

205 

SlIELL-WinPS, 

description  and  use  of  

70 

218 

SHIFTING  GUNS, 
to  have  full  gun's  crews  

1 

17 

80 

SHIPS'  CORPORALS, 
tlie  duties  of,  at  general  quarters  

1 

137 

SHOT, 
how  to  be  passed  up  for  use  .... 

1 

44 

200 

solid,  when  to  be  used  in  action  

1 

75 

266 

if  jammed  in  the  bore,  should  be  withdrawn  

1 

75 

267 

solid,  not  to  bo  lired  from  shell-guns   except 

1 

75 

268 

grape,  the  use  of  

1 

76 

271-273 

canister,  the  use  of  

1 

76 

274 

shrapnel-shell,  or  spherical  case,  the  use  of  

1 

76 

275 

for  riiled-cannon,  the  gauges  for  

1 

101 

386 

the  32-pdr.    and    18-pdr.,  may  be  fired  from   the  ) 
100-pdr.  and    GO-pdr.   guns,    especially  on    rico-  I 
chet,  &c.  .'  .  .      .                            ) 

1 

103 

398 

manner  of  inspecting,  with  the  instruments  used, 
to  determine  the  average  weight  of,  &c  

3 

3 

36,  37 

37 

68-76 

76 

gauges  for,  with  their  dimensions,  &c  

3 

39 

88 

preservation  of,  with  directions  as  to  piling,  paint-  ) 
ing,  &c  f 

3 

43 

98-103 

SHOT-GUNS, 
proof-charges  for  

3 

09 

31 

denominated  by  the  weight  of  their  shot. 

30 

47 

cylinders  for,  directions  as  to  making,  &c  

-? 

57,  58 

181-185 

SHRAPNEL-  SHELL, 
in  action,  the  proper  use  of.  . 

1 

76 

275 

time-fuzes,  only  to  be  used  with  .  .  . 

1 

104 

402 

useful  with  light  artillery  in  the  field  

9 

22 

52 

when  useful  with  boat-howitzers  . 

2 

23 

61-63 

gauges  and  dimensions  of  sabots  and  straps  for  
SIGHTS, 
for  broadside-guns,  description  and  use  of  

3 
1 

39 

79-83 

90,91 
288-308 

kind  of.  furnished  to  the  Parrott-riflcs  .  . 

1 

82 

303 

22 


INDEX. 


SIGHTS, 

for  riflcd-guns,  description  and  use  of 

trunnion,  for  mortars  and  pivot-guns,  use,  &c.,  of.  ... 

tangent,  to  be  supplied  to  all  pivot-guns 

SIGNALS, 

making  and  answering,  in  time  of  war 

for  returning  boats,  in  time  of  war 

SIGNAL-OFFICERS, 

in  action,  stationed  upon  the  quarter-deck 

the  duties  of,  at  general  quarters 

SELVAGEE-WADS, 

to  be  placed  over  shot 

description  of,  and  mode  of  making 

SINGLE-STICK, 

practice  with  the,  to  be  encouraged 

SLINGS.     See  GUN-SLINGS. 
SMALL- Amis, 

crews  to  be  exercised  in  the  use  of. 

to  bo  turned  over  at  the  end  of  cruises,  &c 

not  to  be  used  in  the  tops,  without 

loading  and  distribution  of 

to  be  unloaded  after  exercise  or  battle .... 

proper  lor  boats  on  armed  expeditions 

condemnations  of,  not  allowed,  except 

size  of  powder  for 

a  list  of,  to  be  furnished  commanding  officers  of 
vessels 

quantity  of  powder  for  the  cartridges  of 

dimensions  of  the  boxes  for  the  ammunition,  £c.,  |_ 
of \ 

percussion-caps,  and  bullets  for,  will  be  furnished  / 
from  the  Washington  Yard J 

how  to  be  stamped 

to  be  carefully  cleaned,  &c.,  after  use 

to  bo  frequently  examined,  &c 

cleaning  them,  direction?,  as  to 

precautions  required  in  using 

lacquer  for,  its  composition 

SMALL- ARM-MEN, 

formation,  &c.,  of,  when  landed  for  serviee 

accoutrements  and  equipments  for 

SMOOTH-BOUE  GUNS, 

serviee  charges  for 

SPARE-ARTICLES, 

required  in  action,  the  stowage,  &c.,  of 

SPHERICAL-CASE  SHOT, 

in  action,  the  proper  use  of. 

SPONGES, 

moist,  the  use  of,  recommended  in  wiping  out,  &c. . . 
SPONGERS, 

the  selection  for  guns,  merits  of 

the  selection  and  requirements  of 

stations  and  numbers  of,  for  broadside-guns 

duties  of,  in  preparing  for  exercise  at  the  broadside- 
guns,  &c .N 

duties  of,  at  the  exercise  of  broadside-guns,  on  one 
side  only 

duties  of,  when  housing  lower-deck  guns 

duties  of,  when  shifting  breechings  in  action 

to  keep  within  the  ports,  as  much  as  possible 
SPONGE-CAPS, 

materials  and  description  of 
SPONGE-HEADS, 

materials,  sizes,  &c.,  of. 


P>RT 

PAGE 

1 

104 

3 

71 

3 

71 

1 

94 

1 

96 

1 

14 

1 

27 

1 

75 

3 

68 

1 

93 

1 

5 

1 

12 

1 

25 

1 

26 

I 

51 

2 

7 

3 

31 

3 

49 

3 

51 

3 

55 

3 

55 

3 

55 

3 

79 

3 

80 

;; 

80 

3 

80-82 

3 

82 

3 

86 

2 

25 

3 

77 

3 

53 

1 

7 

1 

76 

1 

74 

1 

18 

1 

18 

1 

35 

1 

40 

1 

47 

1 

54 

1 

59 

1 

74 

3 

73 

3 

72,  73 

ARTICLE 

404 
225 
226 

347-350 
365 

66 
109,  110 

2G4 
214 

344 


12 

56 

103 

107 

229 

11,12 

51 

134 

146 
166 
167 

168 

258 

259 

260 

262-2G9 

270 

271 

70-75 
249 

160 
25 

27 
25 


84 


171 

210-229 

230 
240 

260 


233 
228-230 


INDEX. 


23 


SPONGE-STAVES, 

materials,  sizes,  &c.,  of. 

STEAMSHIPS, 

preparations  on  board  of,  when  going  into  action.  . . . 

going  into  action,  to  have  all  the  fires  lighted,  &c 

STORES, 

table  of,  for  armed  boat  expeditions 

STRAPS  FOR  SHELLS, 

dimensions,  &c.,  of 

SUEGEONS, 

their  stations  when  at  quarters,  with  their  divisions. 

the  duties  of,  at  general  quarters 

the  duties  of,  in  caso  of  lire  on  board  ship 

to  accompany  armed  boat  expeditions 

SURVEYS, 

on  ordnance  stores,  when  to  be  ordered 

on  ordnance  stores,  when  to  be  asked  for  by  gunners 

on  ordnance  stores  landed  from  ships,  reports  of, 

directions  as  to  preparing,  &c 

SWORDS, 

crews  to  bo  exercised  in  the  use  of 

number  allowed  for  pivot  and  other  guns 

to  be  kept  ready  for  the  use  of  boarders 

the  efficient  use  of,  in  repelling  boarders 

the  practice  with,  to  be  encouraged 

SWORD-SCABBARDS, 

of  Porter's  pattern,  a  description  of. 

T. 
TABLES, 

of  the  number  of  men  for  each  kind  of  gun 

of  the  number  of  men  and  their  stations,  for  pivot-guns 
of  the  number  of  men,  with  their  stations,  &c.,  for  / 

diiferent  classes  of  guns ) 

of  small-arms,  allowed  the  master's  division 

of  equipments  and  implements  for  broadside-guns. . . 

of  stations  and  gun-numbers  for  broadside-guns 

of  the  wooden  parts  of  ordinary  truck-carriages 

of  the  metal  parts  of  ordinary  truck-carriages 

of  parts  peculiar  to  the  Marsilly  carriage 

of  equipments  and  implements  for  pivot-guns 

of  stations  and  gun-numbers  for  pivot-guns 

of  the  weight,  charges,  &a,  of  rifled-guns,  with  their 

shot,  shell,  &c 

of  the  sizes  of  boxes  for  rifled  projectiles 

of  equipments,  arms,  and  stores  for  boats 

of  the  stations,  &c.,  of  the  men  of  boat-howitzers. . .  . 

of  the  stations,  &c.,  of  the  men  for  field-howitzers 

of  allowed  variations  in  guns  from  the  proper  di-  £ 

mensions ) 

of  proof  charges  for  shot  and  shell  guns 

of  shot  and  shell  guages 

of  the  number  of  balls  in  a  triangular  pile 

of  the  number  of  balls  in  a  square  pile 

of  charges  of  powder  for  spherical  shells 

of  exterior  dimensions  of  shell-boxes 

of  areas  occupied  by  one  tier  of  shell-boxes 

of  the  sizes  of  grains  of  different  classes  of  powder. . . 
of  differences  between  the  army  and  navy  powder  [ 


granulations 

of  service-charges  for  smooth-bore  guns 

of  service  charges  for  navy  rifle-guns 

of  the  capacity,  weight,  &c.,  of  powder-tanks. . . 
of  the  stowage  of  cartridges  in  powder  tanks . . 


PAHT 

PACK 

3 

73 

1 

39 

1 

94 

2 

4,5 

3 

39 

1 

15 

1 

31 

1 

99 

2 

26 

1 

4 

1 

11 

3 

6 

1 

5 

1 

21 

1 

40 

1 

93 

1 

93 

3 

78 

1 

16 

1 

21 

1 

22-24 

1 

25 

1 

33 

1 

35 

1 

45 

1 

45 

1 

45 

1 

Gl 

1 

G2 

1 

101 

1 

107 

2 

4 

2 

13 

2 

19 

3 

20 

3 

22 

3 

39,  40 

3 

42 

3 

42 

3 

44 

3 

47 

3 

47 

3 

48 

3 

49 

3 

53 

3 

54 

54 

3 

54 

232 
168 
353-356 

5 
91 

72 

138,  139 
382 
83 

G 
49 

19 


12 

101 
179 
341 
344 

250 


78 
101 

101 

101 
148 
152 
202 
202 
202 
242 
243 

384 

411-414 

5 

21 

37 

30 

31 

88-93 

06 

97 

105 

127 

128 

130,131 

135 

160 
161 
162 
163 


2-1 


INDEX. 


TABLES, 
of  charges  for  boat  and  field  howitzers  

[PAR 
^ 

r           PAGE 

54 

ARTTCLB 

161 

of  dimensions,  weight,  &c.,  of  boxes  for  boat-how-  ) 
itzer  projectiles.  ...                                                  r 

3 

55 

165 

of  the  quantity  of  powder  in  small-arm  cartridges  
of  the  dimensions,  &c..  of  boxes  for  small-arm  am-  J 
munition  and  fireworks                                              r 

3 
3 

55 
55 

166 

:   167 

of  the  dimensions,  &c.,  of  cylinders  for  guns 

3 

58 

183  184 

of  the  dimensions,  &c.,  of  sockets  and  pivots  for  car-  ) 
riages  r 

3 

65 

207 

of  the  dimensions.  &c.,  of  breeching  for  guns  
of  the  dimensions,  .£c.,  of  ordinary  handspikes 

I 
3 
3 

G7 
74 

:    210 
'   237 

of  the  dimensions,  &c.,  of  roller  handspikes     . 

3 

75 

238 

of  the  compositions  of  paints,  varnishes,  lacquers,  <fec. 
[For  Appendix  Tables,  see  "CONTENTS  OP  APPEXDIY  "1 
TACKLEMEN, 
stations  and  numbers  of,  for  broadside-guns 

3 
1 

82-89 
35 

i   271 
!  152 

the  duties  of,  in  preparing  for  use  of  broadside-guns  . 
the  duties  of,  at  tho  exercises  of  broadside-guns"  on  ) 
one  side  only  j- 

;  i 

i  40 

48 

;  177 

i   211-216 

stations,  <tc.,  of,  for  pivot-guns. 

i 

G2 

i    243 

TARGETS, 
materials,  construction,  &c    of 

3 

70 

!   292 

TARGET-PRACTICE, 
numbers  of  rounds  and  broadsides  to  be  expended  in. 
the  expenditure  for  the  allowances  for 

1 
1 

4 
4 

!    7 
10 

in  port,  directions  as  to 

I 

5 

quarterly  reports  of,  to  be  prepared  and  forwarded 
THUMBSTALLS, 
the  naked  thumb  may  be  used,  except  for  howitzers, 
materials  of  

I 
I 

5 

74 

7  R 

15 

!   256 

ocq 

TIME-FUZES, 
times  and  lengths  of,  see  Appendix  B 

1 

90 

332 

unreliable  in  rifle-guns 

I 

91 

qqd. 

when  may  be  used  in  rifle-guns   . 

1 

104 

402 

TOOLS, 
for  boats  on  armed  expeditions 

2 

8 

15 

intrenching,  to  be  furnished  for  each  division  of  ) 
boats,  when  

2 

26 

81 

TOMPIONS, 

not  to  be  put  in  guns  when  stowed,  except  . 

3 

30 

45 

TRAINING, 
guns  sharp,  directions  as  to  

1 

51 

222 

guns  lateral,  directions  as  to 

1 

78 

284 

guns,  general  directions  as  to. 

1 

88 

321  32'* 

TBIAL-GrUNS, 

extreme  proof  for,  directions  for 

3 

24  26 

34  36 

TRUCKS, 
shifting,  directions  as  to. 

1 

60 

241 

TRUCK-CARRIAGES, 
the  names,  &c.,  of  the  parts  of 

1 

45 

202 

TRUNNION, 

gauges,  for  examining  guns,  description  and  use  of.  . 
rules             "                     »                 u                 » 
sights,  for  mortars  and  pivot-guns  "                 "         .'  '. 
squares,  for  examining  guns,           "                 " 

v. 

VARNISHES, 
for  scabbards  or  patent  leather 

3 

3 
3 

3 

14,  19 
14,19 
71 
13,  19 

86 

28,  29 
28,  29 
225 
29,29 

271 

Copal,  the  composition  of  

9 

86 

271 

Japan,  the  composition  of 

3 

87 

271 

VENTS, 
the  stopping  of.  recommended  .  . 

1 

74 

256 

INDEX. 


25 


VENTS, 

PART 

1 
1 
2 
3 
3 
3 
3 

3 

3 
3 

1 
1 
1 
3 

3 
3 

1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 

1 

1 

1 
1 
1 

1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 
1 

PAGK 

74 
104 
15 
18 
24 
33,34 
88 

15,  18 
14,  18 
15,  18 
G4 

7 
75 
103 

68 

77 
23 
88 

47 
47,48 
49 
49 
49 
50 
51 
51 
52 
52 
53,54 
58,59 

59,  GO 

63,  65 
.  65 
65,66 
67 
68 
G9 
70 
70 
71 
71 
109 
109 
110 
110 
110 
110 
110 
115 
115 

ARTICLS 

259 
403 

27 
29 
36 
61-65 
271 

28,29 
28,29 
28,29 
206 

26 
264 
397 
214 

249 
32 
271 

205 
206-218 
219 
220 
221 
222 
223 
224 
225 
227 
229 
238,  239 

240 

244,  245 
246 
247 
248 
249 
250 
251 
252 
253 
254 
421 
422 
423 
424 
425 
426 
427 
417 
448 

the  amount  of  iiring  allowed  for  each,  &c.  

VENT-GAUGES, 

VENT-GUIDES, 

VENT-SEARCHERS, 

VENTILATION, 

W. 

WADS, 

WAIST-BELTS, 

WATER-PROOF, 

WAX, 
for  takin0'  impressions  of  vents  its  composition   .... 

WHIPS.     See  SHELL-  WHIPS. 
WORDS  OP  COMMAND, 
for  broadside  guns  on  one  side  only        .  .  "  Silence." 

"                        "                      "Cast  loose,"  &c. 
"                         "                                   "  Run  in." 
"                        "      "  Serve  vent  and  sponge." 
"                        «                                     "  Load." 
"                         "                                 "  Run  out." 
"                         "                                      "  Prime." 
«                         "                                      "Point." 
"                        "                        "  Ready  —  Fire." 
"                         "                         "  Cease  Firing." 
"                         "                                    "Secure." 
for  quick-firm^     "Load,  in  one  motion." 

shifting  breechings  in  action.  ."  Sponge,  Load,  and  ) 
Shift  "  &c              \ 

for  pivot-guns.  ."Silence  1    Cast  Loose  and  Provide." 
"                                                               "Run  in." 
"                                               "  Shift  Pivot,"  &c. 
"                                "  Serve  vent  and  sponge." 
"                                                                "  Load." 
"                                                          "  Run  out." 
"                                                              "  Prime." 
"                                                               "  Point." 
"                                                   "  Ready—  Fire." 
"               "Shift  to  housing-pivot  and  Secure." 
for  monitors  "  Serve  vent  and  sponge." 

"                                                                "  Load." 
"                                                              "  Prime." 
"                               "  Elevate"  [or  "  Depress."] 
"                                                          "  Run  out." 
"                              "  Train  Rijrht"  [or  "  Left."] 
"                                             "Ready—  Fire." 
for  mortars          .  .     .                                    "Silence." 

"  Cast  Loose  and  Provide." 

26 


INDEX. 


WORDS  OF  COMMAND, 

for  mortars "  Train"  [Right  or  Left.] 

"  Serve  vent  and  sponge." 
"  "Load." 

"  Elevate." 

"  Prime." 

"Ready — Fire." 

"  Mortar— Front." 

"  Secure." 

for  boat-liowitzers "  Man  the  Howitzer." 

"  Sponge." 

"  Load." 

"  Point." 

"  Fire." 

for  disembarking  howitzers "  Prepare  to  Land." 

"Trail  bow  and  stroke  oars." 
"  Trail." 

"  Shift  the  Howitzer." 
"Land." 

for  embarking  Howitzers 

for  field-Howitzers "  Man  the  Howitzer." 

"  "  Sponge." 

"  Load." 

"  "  Point." 

"  Fire." 

"Secure  the  Howitzer." 
WORMS.     See  ROBINSON'S  WORMS. 
WOUNDED, 

arrangements  for  lowering  the 

implements  for,  on  armed  boat  expeditions 

Y. 

YEOMEN, 

what  articles  of  ordnance  stores  to  be  accountable  for 

duties  of,  when  their  ships  are  to  be  laid  up 

appointments  and  qualifications  of. 


PART 

VA 

1 

116 

1 

116 

1 

117 

1 

117 

1 

117 

1 

118 

1   118 

1 

118 

2 

14 

2 

14 

2 

14 

2 

14 

2 

14 

2 

17 

2 

17 

2 

17 

2 

17 

2 

18 

2 

18 

2 

19 

2 

19 

2 

19 

2 

19 

2 

19 

2 

19 

1 

44 

2 

8 

1 

13 

1 

13 

1 

13 

.AKTICJJ 

449 

450 

451 

452 

453 

454 

455 

456 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

31 

32 

33 

34 

35 

36 

38 

39 

40 

41 

42 

43 


201 
17 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 
BERKELEY 

Return  to  desk  from  which  borrowed. 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


RECTO  LD 

AUG  8    1961 


REG  J  LB 

APR   S19^ 


MAR  9    '67 -4PM 

LOAN 


REC'D  LD 


171982 

,c.cm.  FEB6   *83 


LD  21-100m-ll,'49(B7146sl6)476 


